syngoMR PDF

syngo MR Operator Manual
Magnetic Resonance
Operator Manual
Version syngo MR 2006T
0.0
medical
Manufacturers note: 0.0
Products, that are bearing a CE mark fulfill the provisions of the

Council Directive 93/42/EEC of 14 June 1993 concerning med-
ical devices. 0.0
The CE mark applies exclusively to medical equipment and

products that are released under the relevant EU guidelines
mentioned above. 0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
2005 Siemens AG
All rights reserved 0.0
Siemens AG
Wittelsbacherplatz 2
80333 Mnchen
Germany 0.0
0.0
Contact Information:
Siemens AG, Medical Solutions
Magnetic Resonance
Henkestrae 127
91052 Erlangen
Germany 0.0
Telephone: +49 9131 84-0

www.SiemensMedical.com
DokuMR@med.siemens.de 0.0
Print No. MR-05000.621.04.01.24

Printed in Germany 0.0
AG 09.05 0.0
0.0
syngo MR Summary of contents
Basics A
Security Package B
Managing and Adjusting the C

System
Patient Browser D
Patient Registration E
Examination F
Viewing G
3D Evaluation H
Storing and Data Exchange J
Neuro 3D K
Postprocessing Images L
syngo MR 2006T iii

Summary of contents syngo MR
Vessel View M
Composing N
Filming O
References P
Index
0.0
iv Operator Manual
syngo MR Table of contents
A Basics
A.1 General Information
A.2 Basics for Beginners
A.3 Configuring the User Interface
A.4 Service Functions
B Security Package
B.1 Introduction
B.2 Information for Administrators
B.3 Information for Users
B.4 Information for Service Technicians
C Managing and Adjusting the System

C.1 System Manager
C.2 Adjusting the System
D Patient Browser
D.1 Introduction
D.2 Searching for and Displaying Patient Data
D.3 Transferring Data to other Applications
D.4 Correcting Data
D.5 Storing, Sending and Filming Data
D.6 Maintaining your Data
0.0
syngo MR 2006T v
Table of contents syngo MR
D.7 Configuring the Patient Browser
D.8 Reporting
E Patient Registration
E.1 Introduction
E.2 Registering a New Patient
E.3 Registering a Known Patient
E.4 Configuring Patient Registration
F Examination
F.1 Introduction to the MR Examination
F.2 Loading the Scan Program
F.3 Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images
F.4 Positioning Slices
F.5 Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.6 Performing a routine examination
F.7 Using a contrast agent
F.8 Positioning the Patient Table
F.9 Working with instruction areas
F.10 Inline Display
F.11 Patient instructions
F.12 Protocol and Pause Properties
F.13 Printing protocols
0.0
vi Operator Manual
F.14 SAR and Stimulation Monitoring
F.15 Physiologically Controlled Scans
F.16 Organizing Scan Programs
F.17 Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)
F.18 Breast Biopsy
F.19 Automatic position correction
F.20 Quality measurement
G Viewing
G.1 Introduction
G.2 Loading and Displaying Images
G.3 Scrolling and Selecting Images
G.4 Processing Images
G.5 2D Evaluation
G.6 Position display
G.7 Saving and Documenting Images
G.8 Configuring the Viewing Task Card
H 3D Evaluation
H.1 Introduction
H.2 Transferring Images to 3D
H.3 Working in 3D
H.4 Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T vii

H.5 Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection
H.6 Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)
H.7 Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
H.8 Selecting and Processing Images
H.9 3D Editor
H.10 Fusion
H.11 Fly Through
H.12 Saving 3D Series and Images
H.13 Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images
H.14 3D Configuration
J Storing and Data Exchange

J.1 Introduction
J.2 Storing Data on an External Medium
J.3 Sending Data via the Network
J.4 Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk
J.5 Automatic Storing and Sending
J.6 Checking Data Transfer
J.7 Configuring Data Transfer
0.0
viii Operator Manual

K Neuro 3D
K.1 Introduction
K.2 Loading images
K.3 Changing the anatomical display
K.4 Displaying functional information
K.5 Neuro 3D Evaluation
K.6 Saving and filming images
L Postprocessing Images
L.1 Dynamic Analysis
L.2 Evaluating Images with Mean Curve
L.3 Image filtration and distortion correction
L.4 Viewing and Evaluating BOLD Images
L.5 Evaluating Perfusion-Weighted Images
L.6 Soft Tissue Evaluation MR
M Vessel View
M.1 Introduction
M.2 Loading and displaying images
M.3 Defining Vessels
M.4 Evaluating vessels
M.5 Saving and documenting evaluations
0.0
syngo MR 2006T ix
N Composing
N.1 Introduction
N.2 Image selection and reconstruction
N.3 Viewing images
N.4 Evaluations
N.5 Saving and documenting images
O Filming
O.1 Introduction
O.2 Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
O.3 Viewing and Processing Film Sheets and Images
O.4 Changing Film Settings for a Film Job
O.5 Checking Film Jobs
O.6 Configuring Filming
P References
P.1 Scan Parameters
P.2 Text Annotations in Medical Images
Index
0.0
x Operator Manual
syngo MR Special Information 0.0
This manual is part of the multi-volume operating instructions

for the magnetic resonance tomograph of the MAGNETOM
family. 0.0
0.0
N OT E
The magnetic resonance tomographs of the Magnetom
family are not devices with measuring functions. 0.0
Measured values obtained are for information only and

cannot be used as the sole basis for diagnosis. 0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T xi
Revision Info syngo MR
Changes to previous version 0.0
In comparison to the previous version new coils are used for the
MAGNETOMS Symphony and Trio. The corresponding coil
abbreviations are listed in Chapter Text Annotations in Medical
Images.
Page P.28 0.0
0.0
0.0
xii Operator Manual

syngo MR Revision Info
New coordinate system 0.0
The syngo MR software and its predecessor Numaris (includ-

ing Numaris 3.5) use different patient coordinate systems. 0.0
It is important to remember this when diagnosing MR images
acquired in Numaris under syngo MR . 0.0
If you have any questions about converting the different coordi-

nate systems, please contact your applications specialist. 0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T xiii

Coordinate system for Numaris 3 and

Numaris 3.5 (+FAL) 0.0
The slice positions are positive in the Feet, Anterior, and Left
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter. 0.0
MR images based on this patient-oriented coordinate system

are only converted when exporting them into a DICOM format.0.0
0.0
xiv Operator Manual

syngo MR Revision Info
Coordinate system for syngo MR (DICOM

standard, +LPH) 0.0
The slice positions are positive in the Left, Posterior, and Head
directions as seen from the magnet isocenter. 0.0
0.0
syngo MR 2006T xv
The following overview shows how the direction of the slice

position changes as it moves from minus to plus. 0.0
0.0
Direction of slice position
Numaris 3 and Numaris 3.5 +FAL
syngo MR +LPH
If the slice position ascends, the slices move toward the positive
coordinates:
0.0
Numaris 3 and The transverse slice moves in the (F) direction of the feet.
Numaris 3.5 0.0 The coronal slice moves in the anterior (A) direction.
The sagittal slice moves in the left (L) direction.
syngo MR 0.0 The transverse slice moves in the (H) direction of the head.
The coronal slice moves in the posterior (P) direction.
The sagittal slice moves in the left (L) direction.
0.0
NOTE
Beginning with software version MRease VA12A, the
image text changes for the slice position. Instead of the sign
"+" or "-", directional abbreviations such as L, P or H, or R,
A or F are shown. 0.0
0.0
0.0
xvi Operator Manual

PART
A Basics A.0
A.1 General Information

Safety-related information .............................................. A.14
Warning messages .................................................... A.15
Software installation and network .............................. A.16
Virus protection .......................................................... A.17
A.2 Basics for Beginners

The application program ................................................ A.22
Mouse and keyboard ..................................................... A.23
The mouse ................................................................. A.23
The mouse pointer ..................................................... A.24
Using the mouse ........................................................ A.25
The keyboard ............................................................. A.27
Using the keyboard .................................................... A.28
Entering commands and data ...................................... A.216
Selecting objects ..................................................... A.216
Moving or copying objects ....................................... A.218
Changing the image display .................................... A.221
Entering text ............................................................ A.222
Windows ...................................................................... A.223
Layout of windows ................................................... A.223
Resizing and moving a window ............................... A.225
Switching between windows .................................... A.229
Dialog boxes ............................................................ A.230
Operating elements in boxes and on tab cards ....... A.232
Using tab cards ............................................................ A.236
Task cards ............................................................... A.237
Subtask cards .......................................................... A.240
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A1
Contents Basics
Using menus ................................................................ A.241

Application-specific menus....................................... A.241
Dropdown menus of the menu bar ........................... A.243
Popup menus ........................................................... A.246
Status bar ..................................................................... A.247
Resource check ............................................................ A.248
Text information in medical images .............................. A.250
A.3 Configuring the User Interface

Calling up configuration windows ................................... A.32
Defining the regional settings ......................................... A.35
Configuring image text ................................................... A.37
Exiting a configuration window ..................................... A.312
A.4 Service Functions

Displaying the maintenance status ................................. A.42
Local service .................................................................. A.44
Remote service access .................................................. A.45
Logbook .......................................................................... A.47
Configuring the MR system ............................................ A.48
0.0
A2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
A.1 General Information A.1
This chapter contains general information about syngo MR. A.1
A.1
Operating system A.1 The program syngo MR uses the operating system Windows
XP. A.1
syngo MR is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations or
changes of the hardware or software can cause the system
to malfunction. A.1
Consequence: This can cause injury and/or damage to the

equipment. A.1
Remedy: You are therefore not permitted to open or remove

the cladding of the equipment, to install third-party software
or to connect the system to a network. A.1
Depending on the operating system there may be slight vari-

ations in the color display of dialog boxes and windows.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.11

General Information Basics
Security in syngo MR A.1 Security in syngo MR" provides the whole functionality neces-
sary for the protection of patient data. A.1
Privileges allow an user to execute syngo MR functions, such

as sending data over network or invoking the patient registra-
tion.
Log on A.1 After you have switched on the computer and before you start
working you must log on as a user.
Page B.35, Logging on and off A.1
A.1
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost
irretrievably. A.1
Always check whether data still needs to be saved and save

any data you want to keep before you log off. A.1
Program start A.1 After log on the applications start automatically. A.1
0.0
A.12 Operator Manual

Basics General Information
Rebooting of main and During startup of your system the main console and the satellite
satellite consoles A.1 consoles are also automatically started up. If you reboot the
main console manually, make sure to reboot the satellite con-
soles as well.
A.1
System administration A.1 You find more information on security and system administra-
tion in Part B, Security Package.
A.1
Audit trail A.1 In a secure system, all actions on data are logged.
Page B.271, Audit trail and log files
A.1
Names and designations All names and data of patients and institutions that are used in
used A.1 this operator manual are entirely fictional. A.1
Any resemblance to names of existing people or organizations

past or present is entirely coincidental.
A.1
Configuration-dependent designations, such as names of

drives, network nodes, and databases, that are used in this
operator manual are usually not the same as the designations
to be found on a particular installation of the system in a partic-
ular hospital. A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.13

Safety-related information A.1
Safety instructions and other important information for cases

such instructions are part of general text are indicated as fol-
lows in this manual: A.1
A.1
WA R N I N G
Indicates potential dangers that could cause injury or death
in extreme cases. A.1
The syngo MR system was designed and built so that it can-

not cause death if used properly.
A.1
C AU T I O N
Indicates potential (direct) dangers that could cause minor
injury or damage to the system. A.1
A.1
N OT E
Notes regarding optimum use of the system and other
useful information. A.1
0.0

Warning messages A.1
The systems informs you about problems that have occurred by

displaying message dialog boxes. There are three categories of
messages: A.1
General Danger Warnings

(High Priority Error) A.1
This type of warning message informs the user about serious

problems that require your immediate intervention and
response (e.g., danger for patient and system). The danger
message remains on the screen until you confirm it.
A.1
Task Specific Warnings

(Error Message Type 1) A.1
This type of warning message is application and task card spe-

cific. The message occurs within the active workflow/task and
requires your decision, but not immediately. You can confirm the
message and continue work, but you can also switch to another
task card and confirm the message later.
A.1
Information Messages A.1
This type of message only provides additional information (e.g.,

about the result of a performed task). Just confirm the message
by clicking OK. A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.15

Software installation and network A.1
The syngo MR platform is shipped with precautions regarding

data security and prevention of external access with bad intent.
No additional protection (firewall) is included. A.1
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Impermissible or faulty manipulations/
changes of the software or connection of the system to a
network A.1
Consequence: Unauthorized access. A.1
Remedy: Make sure all necessary precautions with respect

to the existing level of security are considered when adding
a functionality or altering the shipped configuration. A.1
A.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Reduced system performance due to
overload of the network environment. A.1
Consequence: Unexpected system behavior. A.1
Remedy: Only use syngo MR in a secure and load-

adapted network. A.1
0.0

Virus protection A.1
As a user of a networked PC you should be aware of the possi-

bility of an infection with computer viruses or other damaging
software. A.1
Prevention A.1 The focus lies on prevention of such an infection: A.1
All precautions have been taken to ensure data security and

to prevent access to your syngo MR system with negative
intent.
Data traffic through all unnecessary ports or "doors" is
blocked. Data exchange is restricted to defined paths only.
This includes the service interface and makes syngo MR
extremely secure.
Additional protection (such as a virus scanner, a local firewall,
etc.) is not installed. A.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.17

Suitable topology A.1 A good and secure network architecture is able to reject most
attacks from viruses, worms etc. The network architects and IT
administrators of a hospital use a suitable topology with the best
protection of the medical devices connected. A.1
Medical devices shall always be connected within sub-net-

works that are separated from the rest of the office equip-
ment by a firewall PC.
Mail programs that may receive virus infected attachments or
browser software with connection to the Internet are a poten-
tial risk for all systems connected to the same subnet.
We recommend to prohibit this type of data transfer into the
subnets of medical devices.
As far as queries are concerned the system should only be
queryable from remote nodes.
0.0

CHAPTER
A.2 Basics for Beginners A.2
This chapter is addressed to beginners with experience using

computers and Windows XP. A.2
It is intended to enable you to use the applications and enter

data. A.2
You are first given a short overview of the user interface of the
program. After that, an explanation is given of how to operate
the computer using the mouse and keyboard. A.2
This chapter also explains the command and input elements on

the programs user interface. A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.21

Basics for Beginners Basics
The application program A.2
After start up, the user interface of the program will appear on
your screen, with the Exam task card in the foreground.
The user interface is subdivided into the following areas: A.2
(1) Menu bar

(2) Image and workspace of the task cards
(3) Tabs of the task cards
(4) Tabs of the subtask cards
(5) Stack of subtask cards
(6) Status bar
0.0

Basics Basics for Beginners
Mouse and keyboard A.2
In order to execute commands on the computer or to input data

you can use the mouse and/or the keyboard.
A.2
The mouse A.2
A.2 Your mouse has three buttons. A.2
You can start actions of the program with the mouse buttons.
With the left button you select objects and start applications and
actions, with the right button you open popup menus and with
the center button you change the window values of images. A.2
With the mouse you can: A.2
Move the mouse pointer

Select and mark objects
Copy and move objects
Start applications and actions
Edit images
Call up menus
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.23

The mouse pointer A.2
A.2 The mouse pointer follows every movement of the mouse on

the screen.
A.2
A.2 If you have lost sight of the mouse pointer, simply move the
mouse.
Depending on the application which is currently active and the
action you want to perform the appearance of the mouse
pointer can change.
A.2
Cursor Position the mouse pointer in a field in which you want to

A.2 enter text.
The mouse pointer changes its shape and becomes a vertical
line. It is now a text cursor indicating where characters can be
typed in will appear. A.2
0.0

Using the mouse A.2
First place the mouse pointer on an object, for example an

image. You can then perform the following actions:
A.2
Single click A.2
Press a mouse button briefly and release it again. Do not move

the mouse while doing this. A.2
You select an object with the left mouse button,

with the right mouse button you call up popup menus.
A.2
Double-click A.2
Double-clicking means pressing the mouse button twice in

quick succession and then releasing the button again. A.2
Double-clicking is used to start programs (left mouse button),

for example, or for auto-windowing (center mouse button).
A.2
Dragging A.2
Press the mouse button and move the mouse while holding the
button down. With this action you can draw graphics, for exam-
ple (left mouse button), or set window levels (center mouse but-
ton). A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.25

Drag & drop A.2 Click an object with the left mouse button, move it while holding
the mouse button down and release the mouse button again. A.2
A.2
Calling up the With the key combination Shift + F10 and a single click of the
popup menu A.2 right mouse button you can call up a pop menu for the selected
object or active area of the screen (except Viewing).
Page A.25, Using the mouse A.2
0.0

The keyboard A.2
You use the keyboard to enter text and numbers. You can also
call up certain functions and start programs using key combina-
tions and the keys of the numeric keypad.
A.2
(1) Function keys

(2) Typewriter keyboard
(3) Cursor keypad
(4) Symbol keypad
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.27

Using the keyboard A.2
Practically all commands can be performed using either the

mouse or the keyboard.
A.2
Entering text and The keys on the typewriter keyboard are normally used to enter
numbers A.2 text and numbers as well as commands.
A.2
Deleting characters A.2 Pressing the Backspace deletes the character in front of the
cursor; pressing the Del key deletes the character following the
cursor. If a text is marked you can use either of these keys to
delete it.
A.2
Moving the cursor A.2 With the cursor keys you can move the text cursor
within a text entry field. With the keys Home and End you move
the cursor to the first and last position within the text.
A.2
Calling up help A.2 Press the F1 key to call up the Online Help supplied with the
program.
A.2
Calling up task cards A.2 Press the function keys F6 to F8, to call up the individual task
cards.
Page A.237, Task cards A.2
0.0

Setting the keyboard The user interface of the Exam task card is divided into sepa-
focus A.2 rate areas, e.g. image area or program control. If you want to
operate the program quickly via the keyboard you can activate
the input and operation tools of the interface separately, one
after the other. By doing this, you are placing a focus on a spe-
cific object on the user interface to enable input via keyboard.A.2
For this purpose, press the Tab key on your keyboard to jump
forwards.
Or A.2
Press the keys Shift + Tab to jump backwards.

The keyboard focus jumps from object to object. A.2
Press the Tab key until you reach the object that you want to
operate via the keyboard.
The object which currently has the keyboard focus is marked.A.2
Buttons are marked with a broken line border.
A.2
List entries have a blue background.

A.2
Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line bor-
der.
A.2
Entries in the program card are marked with a broken line bor-
der and have a blue background. A.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.29

Keyboard focus on the

image area A.2
The keyboard focus can only be placed on an entire image area

i.e. on all two or three image segments. The image area is then
surrounded by a fine white border. You can still see the input
focus (dotted blue border) in the image area, showing you
which image segment your entries apply to.
A.2
Paging through If the keyboard focus is on a card stack, you can also move indi-
card stacks A.2 vidual cards to the foreground via keyboard commands. A.2
Press keys Ctrl + or Ctrl + to jump to the left or to the

right.
If the card in the foreground is itself subdivided into cards, such
as the System parameter card, you can also move these cards
to the foreground via the keyboard. A.2
To do this, press the Shift + Ctrl keys + or the Shift + Ctrl

keys + to jump to the left or to the right.
The keyboard focus is then on the previously set input object
that is marked as such.
A.2
Jumping within objects A.2 You can move the keyboard focus using the tab key within
objects, e.g. program control or parameter cards. A.2
0.0

Starting applications and The symbol keypad of your system looks different from the
functions A.2 numeric keypad on a standard PC keyboard. These keys have
been assigned special functions on your system. The symbols
on each key help you to easily identify the respective functions.A.2
If your system is not equipped with the original Siemens key-
board, you can call up these functions and programs using
the corresponding keys on your standard numeric keypad.
Window Center - (Num. Num)

(Brightness -)
Window Center + (Num. /)

(Brightness +)
Window Width - (Num. *)

(Contrast -)
Window Width + (Num. -)

(Contrast +)
Auto Windowing (Num. 9)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.211

Scroll study back (Num. 7)
Scroll study forward (Num. 8)
Scroll series back (Num. 4)
Scroll series forward (Num. 5)
Scroll image back (Num. 1)
Scroll image forward (Num. 2)
Correct image text (Num. 6)

(not supported by this SW Version)
0.0

Call up Patient Registration (Num. 0)
Call up Patient Browser (Num.)
Copy to Film Sheet (Num. Return)
Mark (Num. 3)
Send To Node 1 (Num. +)
0.0

Using shortcuts A.2 With the key combinations Ctrl or Alt or Windows plus another
key you can give commands to your computer very quickly. A.2
You can execute all functions by pressing the Alt key together
with the key of the letter underlined in the menu item or on the
button. In this way, you can operate the program without using
the mouse.
Here is a table of the most important key combinations: A.2
A.2
Alt + F4 Close Patient Browser

Alt + Tab Switch to another active Windows application
A.2
Ctrl + Tab Switch active task card / page through stack of cards
Ctrl + Shift + Switch active task card backwards / page through stack of
Tab cards backwards
Ctrl + C Copy
Ctrl + I Import data
Ctrl + P Expose film task
Ctrl + S Save (only 3D taskcard)
Ctrl + X Cut (only Filming taskcard)
Ctrl + V Paste
Ctrl + W Save window values
0.0

A.2
Windows Show start menu

Windows + D Minimize or restore all windows
Windows + E Open Windows Explorer
Windows + F Open search dialog
Windows + Ctrl + F Open search dialog for computer
Windows + F1 Show help
Windows + R Show run dialog
Windows + Pause Show system properties dialog
Windows + Shift + Undo minimize all windows
M
Windows + L Lock workstation
Windows + U Open utility manager
0.0

Entering commands and data A.2
You always have several options for entering commands or data

on the computer. You can use the mouse and/or the keyboard.
A.2
Selecting objects A.2
You can select an object (e.g. an image or a patient) by clicking

it with the left mouse button. A.2
Selected objects are marked. Images are given a border,

graphic objects such as ROIs (region of interest) are dis-
played with grab handles, icons and text (e.g. in list entries)
are highlighted (e.g. white on black).
Examples: A.2
The selected patient entry in the window of the Patient

Browser is displayed highlighted (left).
Resizing handles (small squares) are visible on the selected
border (right).
0.0

Selecting several objects A.2 You select an object with the mouse and then press the Ctrl or
the Shift key. A.2
With the Ctrl key you can select other individual objects. A.2
Press the Ctrl key and keep it pressed.

Click all the objects that you want to select.
Click a selected object a second time to deselect it again.
With the Shift key you can select entire blocks of objects. A.2
Press the Shift key and hold it pressed.

Click another object.
All the objects in between are selected as well.
A.2
Deselecting objects A.2 You can deselect selected objects by selecting another object
or by clicking the background with the mouse. A.2
0.0

Moving or copying objects A.2
You can move or copy objects from one application to another

(e.g. images) or from one location to another location on the
screen.
A.2
Drag & drop A.2 This means picking up an object, dragging it and dropping it
again. A.2
Click an object with the left mouse button, e.g. a series, and
hold the mouse button down.
Press the Ctrl key if you want to copy the object.
Drag the object to another location with the mouse (into an-
other task card or window).
Release the mouse button.
The object will be moved or copied to the new location.
Page A.25, Using the mouse A.2
0.0

Cut/copy & paste A.2 Another way of moving objects is via the cut & paste or copy
& paste functions. A.2
Select the object you want to move or copy.

Call up Edit > Cut or use the shortcut Ctrl + X if you want to
move the object (only Filming task card).
Or A.2
Call up Edit > Copy or use the shortcut Ctrl + C if you want
to copy the object.
0.0

The object is moved or copied to the Windows clipboard. It

remains there until you cut or copy another object that will then
replace the previous one. A.2
Click the new location.

Call up Edit > Paste or use the shortcut Ctrl + V to move or
copy the object to this new location.
Page A.214, Using shortcuts
Page A.241, Using menus
Double-clicking A.2 If you double-click on an object with the left mouse button, the
standard function of the associated function menu, which also
depends on the object type, is executed. You can transfer a
selected object to another application with a double click.
A.2
Menus A.2 You can also use the entries of the dropdown menus to pass
objects from one application to another. A.2
Select the object(s) you want to pass onto another task card.
Call up the relevant menu item.
Page A.241, Using menus
0.0

Changing the image display A.2
You can change the display of an image using the mouse: A.2
Setting window levels (windowing)

Changing the image size (zooming)
Moving the image (panning)
For windowing you use the center mouse button. For zooming
and panning you first switch the mouse to zoom/pan mode and
then use the left mouse button to change the image display.
Page G.415, Zooming and panning images
A.2
Move the mouse pointer onto the image, press the center or
left mouse button and hold it pressed. If you now move the
mouse you change the way the image is displayed.
The mouse cursor changes shape for zooming (left cursor) and
panning (right cursor). A.2
0.0

Entering text A.2
If you click a text entry field with the mouse, the mouse pointer
becomes a text cursor (vertical bar). A.2
Enter the text via the keyboard.
You can also enter text into a combo box.

Page A.233, Combo box
Selecting text A.2 You can mark text by moving the cursor across the text while
holding the left mouse button down. The text is displayed high-
lighted. A.2
Selecting words A.2 Double-click with the left mouse button while the cursor is
inside a word. The word is marked.
Deleting text A.2 Use the mouse to select text. Press the Del or the Back-
space key. The selected text is deleted.
0.0

Windows A.2
In the Windows XP operating system programs are displayed

in windows. When you start an application it is called up in a
window.
A.2
Layout of windows A.2
You will find the following graphic elements in a window: A.2
(1) Title bar

The title bar displays the name of the program you are cur-
rently working in.
(2) Title bar icon
Icon for opening a menu for window commands.
(3) Menu bar
This contains the functions of the program in dropdown
menus.
(4) Toolbar
This contains the icons for starting functions and programs.
(5) Workspace
Here you can execute the functions of the program.
(6) Window buttons
Buttons for controlling the window display.
Here you minimize, maximize or close the window.
0.0

A.2 (7) Scroll bar

If the content of the window is too large to be displayed,
scroll bars are displayed on the right and lower edge of the
window.
(8) Border
Place the mouse on the border to resize the window.
(9) Status bar
This displays the instructions and feedback from the cur-
rent program and contains the storage capacity icons.
(1)
(2) (6)
(3)
(4)
(5) (7)
(8)
(9)
0.0

Resizing and moving a window A.2
You can change the window display (window, full screen or

icon), the size of the window and the position of the window.
A.2
Changing the type of In the top right-hand corner of the title bar you will find three but-
window A.2 tons with which you can change the size and position of win-
dows. A.2
With these buttons you can change the active window as fol-
lows:
A.2
A.2 Click on the left-hand button with the left mouse button to
minimize the window.
A.2 Click the center button to toggle between full screen and win-
dow size. If you click the on button again you switch back to
the previous size.
A.2 Click on the right button to close the window and therefore
the application as well.
Or A.2
Click on the Windows title button and select the correspond-

ing entry in the menu.
Not all of these functions are available in all windows.
0.0

Resizing the window A.2 Move the mouse pointer onto the border of the window and its
appearance changes. Depending on where you place the
mouse pointer it can take on one of the following shapes: A.2
On the lower or upper edge it becomes a vertical double

arrow.
Now you can change the height of the window.
On the left or right edges it changes to a horizontal double
arrow.
Now you can change the width of the window.
On a corner of the border it becomes a diagonal double
arrow.
Now you can change the height and width of the window.
On the interior border line it becomes a broken double arrow
(if the window is subdivided).
You can change the height of the window sections.
Press the left mouse button and drag the border to the new
position while holding the mouse button down.
0.0

Changing the position of You can move the window to any position on the screen as long
the window A.2 as it is not maximized or minimized. A.2
Click the title bar and drag the window to the new position
holding the mouse button down.
0.0

Moving the content of the On the scroll bars you will find the arrow buttons and a scroll box
window A.2 with which you can move the content of the window. Depending
on whether the window is too short or too narrow to display its
content the scroll bar will appear on the right or below the win-
dow. A.2
Click an arrow button (1) with the left mouse button. The
screen content is shifted a small distance in the direction of
the arrow.
Click the scroll box (2) and drag it with the mouse. The
screen content is moved continuously in the corresponding
direction.
Click on any point on the scroll bar with the mouse. The
screen content is moved toward this point by a distance
which is proportional to the distance of this point from the
scroll box.
0.0

Switching between windows A.2
Frequently, several windows or tab cards are open at the same

time, for example, if you are looking for a patient using the
Patient Browser before you start an examination.
A.2
Active window A.2 The active window is in the foreground.

The title bar of the active window has a different color from that
of the inactive window. A.2
You can move objects (e.g. images) from an active window to

a window in the background (drag & drop) as long as both
windows are visible.
Switching windows A.2 If you want to switch from one window to another visible window
click on the corresponding window. A.2
It moves to the foreground, and the color of the title bar

changes. It is now the active window in which you can work. A.2
Example: Patient Browser and Patient Registration. A.2
0.0

Dialog boxes A.2
Dialog boxes are used to enter data or to select or confirm set-

tings. A.2
They are usually displayed after you have called up a function.A.2

Example A.2
In a dialog box you will find entry fields, selection lists, radio but-
tons or checkboxes to select options and buttons with which you
can accept or reject inputs. A.2
0.0

NOTE
A large window might be hiding smaller dialog or message
boxes.
In that case, move the large window until the small window
becomes visible. A.2
Example:
The Patient Browser box is open. The system starts
burning a CD in multi-session mode. The dialog box
Enter label is hidden by the Patient Browser.
0.0

Operating elements in boxes and on tab

cards A.2
Dialog boxes and tab cards contain various operating elements

you can use to enter data or make selections.
A.2
Radio buttons A.2
You can select options by clicking on them with the left mouse
button. Only one option can be selected at a time.
A.2
Check box A.2
Click inside the box using the left mouse button.

A cross or checkmark appears. The option is then selected. A.2
Click on the box again to deselect the option.

More than one option can be selected this way.
A.2
Selection list A.2
Click the arrow to the right of the selection list using the left
mouse button to open the selection menu.
Move the mouse pointer down the list.
The entries are highlighted one after the other. A.2
Click on the entry you want to select.
0.0

Entry field A.2
Here you can enter text or numbers. A.2
Click into the entry field with the mouse pointer. Then enter
the text at the text cursor.
Spin box A.2
In a spin box you can select values. A.2
Click one of the arrows with the left mouse button to increase
the set value (up) or decrease it (down), or enter a value in
the entry field.
Combo box A.2
This field is a combination of an entry field and a selection list.

You can either select entries from the list or type them in on the
keyboard. A.2
0.0

Slider A.2 With the slider you can set a value range. A.2
Drag the end boundaries of the slider with the mouse to

increase or decrease the value range.
Move the center mark of the slider to change the position of
the value range.
Double-click the center mark to cover the entire slider area.
Buttons for executing By clicking on a button you start an action. A dialog box con-
commands A.2 tains several buttons, for instance: A.2
A.2 All the settings in the window become valid and the window
is closed. In some dialog boxes OK triggers an action, for
example, filming.
A.2 Same as OK, except that the window is not closed.
A.2 The dialog box is exited without making any changes.
A.2 A help text about the dialog box is displayed.
0.0

Buttons for calling up You can start many functions in the program both via the menus
functions A.2 or via the icon buttons. A.2
You find icon buttons on the toolbars, on the subtask cards, or

in the control area of the task cards. They allow fast and intuitive
execution of functions quickly and intuitively, simply by clicking
on the buttons.
A.2
Dimmed fields and There are a number of functions which you can only execute if
buttons A.2 you have selected an image, for example, or loaded data into
the task card. Buttons and input fields are dimmed (shown gray
or shaded), if you cannot execute the function assigned to
them. A.2
Dimmed button, the function cannot be initiated.
The button is no longer dimmed, you can start the function.
The icon is active, for example, you can now draw a ROI on an
image.
Tool tips A.2
If you place the mouse cursor over an icon, a short text about
this function is displayed. The tool tip disappears again after a
few seconds.
0.0

Using tab cards A.2
Tab cards are arranged in stacks so that you can place them in
the foreground easily by clicking on a tab. When you activate a
tab card it is placed in the foreground. You can only start a func-
tion from an active tab card.
A.2
Activating a tab card A.2 Click a tab to activate a card.
The active tab card has a different background color than the
inactive tab cards. A.2
The settings and data that you have entered on the tab card
which was previously active are not changed when it moves into
the background. When you call up this tab card again you will
find all the data and settings unchanged. A.2
There are two types of tab cards: A.2
Task cards
Subtask cards
0.0

Task cards A.2
The arrangement of the task cards reflects routine operation in

the hospital or practice and their layout supports the examina-
tion procedure, for example: A.2
You can perform an examination in the Examination task

card.
You can view the results and process them in the Viewing
task card.
You edit your film sheet in Filming.
You postprocess images 3-dimensionally in 3D.
Calling up using the tabs A.2 Click on the tab (1) on the right-hand side of the screen to
activate a task card.
0.0

Calling up using the You can also switch to each task card using the function keys.A.2
function keys
Press the F5 key to switch to the Examination task card.
A.2
Press the F6 key to switch to the Viewing task card.

Press the F7 key to switch to the Filming task card.
Press the F8 key to switch to the 3D task card.
Switching to another You can switch to another task card. You simply select the
task card A.2 appropriate tab. A.2
0.0

Too many applications Your system can only handle a certain number of open task
active A.2 cards. If the permitted number is exceeded, the Too Many
Applications Active dialog box will be displayed. In this case,
please close one of the running applications. A.2
0.0

Subtask cards A.2
On task cards you will find smaller cards, called subtask cards.A.2
They are used for the following purposes: A.2
Tool boxes, e.g. for graphic evaluation

Setting parameters
Calling up functions and programs
0.0

Using menus A.2
In order to keep the screen clearer, actions are grouped

together in dropdown menus. A.2
Application-specific menus A.2
The menu bar changes with the task card that is currently active
or the window that is currently open. This way only the functions
are accessible which are relevant for the respective application.A.2
A.2
Patient Browser The menu bar of the Patient Browser window contains the fol-
menu bar A.2 lowing menu items: A.2
Viewing menu bar A.2 The menu bar of the Viewing task card contains the following
menu items: A.2
Filming menu bar A.2 The menu bar of the Filming task card contains the following
menu items: A.2
0.0

3D menu bar A.2 The menu bar of the 3D task card contains the following entries:A.2
A.2
Optional applications A.2 If there are any optional applications integrated in your system
or licensed for your system you call them up via the additional
menu entry Applications. A.2
0.0

Dropdown menus of the menu bar A.2
The menu bar consists of a row of dropdown menus. Via these

menus a series of functions and settings is accessible. A.2
Selecting a menu A.2 Click on a menu item in the menu bar with the left mouse but-
ton.
The dropdown menu is opened. The menu item is highlighted.A.2
Move the mouse pointer down the menu bar and each drop-
down menu opens and closes in turn.
Only the dropdown menu on which the mouse pointer is placed
remains open.
A.2
Closing the menu A.2 If you do not want to select a function, click the menu title
again or click on the background outside the dropdown
menu.
0.0

Selecting an action A.2
Move the mouse pointer down a dropdown menu.

The entries are highlighted one after the other. A.2
Stop at the action you want to execute.

Click on it with the left mouse button.
The action is started and the menu closed. A.2
Menu entries followed by an ellipses open dialog boxes

(e.g. Save As...).
Menu entries without an ellipses call up an action directly
(e.g. Close Patient).
Options A.2
Some menu items when clicked do not seem to perform any

action. However, if you look at the dropdown menu again you
will see that the menu item has a checkmark next to it. The
associated option is now active. A.2
Click the menu entry again to deactivate the option.
0.0

Submenu A.2 Some lines in the dropdown menu have a small arrow on the
right-hand side. If you move down to one of these arrows with
the mouse pointer a submenu is displayed. A.2
0.0

Popup menus A.2
Popup menus contain context-specific information. That means

a different popup menu will appear depending on the type of
object you have selected. These menus offer you actions that
can be performed on this object.
A.2
Calling up popup menus A.2 First select an object with the left mouse button.
Call up the popup menu by pressing the right mouse button
or with Shift + F10.
The menu belonging to the current object type is displayed.
A.2
Selecting an action A.2
Move the mouse pointer over the menu.

The entry on which the mouse pointer is placed will be high-
lighted. You can start the function with a single click (right or left
mouse button).
A.2
If you have not selected an object and click on the right

mouse button a context menu is also opened. This menu now
provides you with actions that are meaningful in the currently
active task card or window as long as nothing is selected.
0.0

Status bar A.2
The status bar at the bottom edge of the window shows you
messages and instructions and contains the storage capacity
icons. A.2
It is subdivided into three columns: A.2
Examination-specific information is displayed in the first col-

umn.
Warnings and messages appear in the second column.
If functions are being executed in the background, the appli-
cation will appear as an icon in the third column, next to the
storage capacity icons.
Action history A.2 Actions executed by the program are automatically logged
together with information about whether each step was suc-
cessfully terminated or whether an error occurred. You can
query a list of the last entries in the history at any time. A.2
Click on the task bar with the left mouse button to list the last
commands and program actions.
You can determine the number of entries in the log in the His-
tory Size dialog box that you call up by clicking the status bar
with the right mouse button.
0.0

Resource check A.2
Your system monitors the memory usage and the storage

capacity of the main database, the scheduler database and the
exchange board (virtual memory).
A.2
Main Database and

Scheduler A.2
By the storage capacity icon you can see how much space has
already been taken up in the local database. If the filled capacity
rises above a configurable limit (default 95%), the icon changes
color from green to red. A.2
If you move the mouse pointer to this icon, the percentage of

storage capacity already taken up is displayed. A.2
Archive the patient and examination data in time and delete

them in the Patient Browser to ensure that sufficient capac-
ity is always available.
Page J.21, Storing Data on an External Medium
0.0

Virtual Memory A.2
By the blinking storage capacity icon in the status bar you can
see that the virtual memory is already filled. A.2
The message Resource Monitor is displayed. A.2
A.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Insufficient memory or disk space may
lead to an instable or blocking system. A.2
Consequence: System is not available in emergency

cases. A.2
Remedy: Do not ignore the storage capacity warning icons.A.2
0.0

Text information in medical images A.2
In medical images various information is displayed as image

text. This text information identifies the patient and documents
examination and image parameters. A.2
With the Image Text Editor you can define which text ele-
ments are to be displayed in the images.
Page A.37, Configuring image text
0.0

The image text is sorted by topic in the four corners of the

image. A.2
(1) Patient and examination data

(2) Orientation label
(3) System-specific information
(4) Scale bar
(5) Window values and image matrix
(6) Comment lines
(7) Examination and image parameters
(8) Orientation label
You will find an overview of all image text components in the

appendix.
Page P.21, Text Annotations in Medical Images A.2
0.0

A.2
NOTE
Note the following changes to image text if you are using the
former Numaris software version to process images
acquired with syngo MR: A.2
The image number is altered.

The sign for the slice position is reversed for the head-
feet and anterior-posterior directions.
The scan time TA and the contrast agent/flow time are
not displayed.
"FS" appears instead of the scan option; "OTHER"
appears instead of the image type.
The image matrix is displayed instead of the acquisition
matrix.
The echo time and inversion time display is modified
(TE:TE 15.0/##, TI: 50).
A.2
NOTE
The image text for the slice position has changed in
software versions MRease VA12A and higher. The
designations for direction L, P or H, and R, A or F are now
displayed instead of the signs "+" and "-". A.2
0.0

CHAPTER Configuring the User
A.3 Interface A.3
You can configure task cards, windows, and individual functions

of the program, i.e. adapt them to your requirements. A.3
To configure windows and task cards, first call up the

NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel where you will find icons
representing various applications. Then double-click on an icon
to open the corresponding configuration window. A.3
For example, you can define which buttons the toolbar of the
Patient Browser window contains.
A.3
Calling up the Call up Options > Configuration... to open the

Configuration Panel A.3 NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.31

Configuring the User Interface Basics
Calling up configuration windows A.3
Configured program parts are represented by icons in the

NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel.
A.3
A.3 Double-click on the icon to display the configuration window

for the Patient Browser.
Chapter D.7, Configuring the Patient Browser

for the saving and network functions.
Chapter J.7, Configuring Data Transfer

for assignment of study-specific film layouts (not supported
by syngo MR).
Chapter O.6, Configuring Filming
A.3 Double-click on the icon to configure film layouts or create

new film layouts.
Chapter O.6, Configuring Filming
0.0

Basics Configuring the User Interface
A.3 Double-click on the icon to configure the Patient Registra-

tion.
Chapter E.4, Configuring Patient Registration
A.3 Double-click on the icon to configure the Viewing task card.

Chapter G.8, Configuring the Viewing Task Card
Double-click on this icon of the NUMARIS/4 - Configuration

Panel to configure the image text.
Double-click on the icon to configure the Voice Output.

Chapter F.11, Patient instructions
A.3
Double-click on this icon to configure the Patient Search.

Page D.244, Configuring Patient Search
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.33

Double-click on this icon to configure the 3D application.

Chapter H.14, 3D Configuration
Double-click on this icon to configure the screensaver set-

tings.
Page B.270, Use of the Screen Saver
Double-click on this icon to configure the Audit Trail settings.

Page B.275, Opening the configuration for audit trail
storing
0.0

Defining the regional settings A.3
Under Regional and Language Options, you can define the

language of the user interface and other settings, such as the
date format. A.3
A.3 Double-click on this icon.

The configuration for regional settings appears. A.3
The user interface for the regional settings is always in

English whatever language is set.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.35

Setting the language A.3 Select the language you require on the Regional Options
subtask card and confirm with OK.
The application is restarted with the new language. A.3
NOTE
A restart of the system is necessary to apply the change of
the language. A.3
A.3
Other regional settings A.3 You can make further settings on the other subtask cards. A.3
In particular, define the format for the Date and Time.

We recommend to select the short date style.
0.0

Configuring image text A.3
With the Image Text Editor you can define which text elements
will be displayed in the images. A.3
A.3 Double-click on this icon of the NUMARIS/4-Configuration

Panel.
The configuration editor Image Text Configuration is dis-
played. A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.37

Image type A.3 You can define individual settings for each modality. A.3
The default setting is used if no other setting is specified for

the displayed image.
Select the type of image you require from the selection list
A.3 View Name.
The setting for this text selection is displayed. A.3
0.0

Number of texts A.3 You can change the default text mode. A.3
Click on the required option button.

A.3 All Text
All available text information is displayed in the images.
No Text
No texts will be displayed in the images.
Customized Text
You can make a selection from the available texts.
NOTE
If you select the setting No Text,
no orientation marks or scale will be displayed either! A.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.39

Text selection A.3 If you have selected the Customized Text option, you can put
together any text selection. A.3
Activate or deactivate the required checkboxes.

Or A.3
Click on Deselect All if you want to deselect all entries.

Or A.3
Click on Select All if you want to select all entries.

The text selection is displayed (depending on modality).
A.3
A.3
0.0

Emphasizing image If the Customized texts option is activated, you can emphasize
texts A.3 selected image texts. This can make sense if some texts would
be displayed too small in certain layouts (layout of 20 or 35
images). A.3
Mark the required image text.

The selected text is highlighted grey and button B is activated.A.3
Click on button B.
The marked image text is displayed in bold. A.3
You can de-emphasize the text again by selecting the bold

texts and clicking on button B again.
Depending on the configuration of your system it might not be

possible to display some texts.
NOTE
If orientation labels are deselected the patient name will not
be displayed. A.3
0.0

Exiting a configuration window A.3
As soon as you have changed settings in a configuration win-

dow, you can exit the configuration window with or without sav-
ing your changes.
A.3
A.3 Click on the OK button to save all your settings and exit the
configuration window.
A.3 Click on the Apply button to save your settings but leave the
window open.
Click on Vendor Default or Default Settings to restore the

original settings.
A.3 Click on Cancel to cancel configuration.

All settings are rejected and the window is closed. A.3
0.0

CHAPTER
A.4 Service Functions A.4
The system provides a range of service functions for mainte-

nance, checking, and configuring the system for authorized
users, i.e. system administrators. A.4
For technical reasons, the user interface of the service func-

tions is always in English independent of the national lan-
guage selected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.41

Service Functions Basics
Displaying the maintenance status A.4
To ensure smooth operation, your system must be maintained

at certain intervals. A.4
The system contains a dialog box which shows you when your
system must be inspected again. A.4
Call up Options > Maintenance....

The Maintenance Status dialog box is displayed. A.4
On monochrome monitors, it might be difficult to see the

progress bar.
0.0

Basics Service Functions
The progress bar shows you when the next maintenance of

your system is due by means of a colored display. A.4
As long as the display is in the green range, you can close the
window again with OK. If the bar moves into the red range, you
can only close this window again after maintenance has been
performed. A.4
In that case, move the window to one side, finish off the exam-
ination, and contact Siemens Service.
For further information, please contact your Siemens Service
or your system administrator.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.43

Local service A.4
In addition to the user-specific configuration, there is a configu-

ration level for authorized users which is protected by a pass-
word. A.4
Select Options > Service > Local Service... to call up the

Authentication window.
Depending on the configuration access rights in your system

several service levels are available. A.4

0.0

Remote service access A.4
Your system can also be serviced by Siemens Service via

modem. A.4
In the Remote Service Access Control window, you can grant

access rights to service so that service personnel can perform
maintenance. A.4
Call up Options > Service > Remote Service... to display

the Remote Service Access Control dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.45

A.4
NOTE
As long as you have assigned full access rights to service,
i.e. maintenance is in progress, you cannot continue
working with your system. A.4
Select Limited Access or No Access and click OK or

Apply to continue.
When switched on, remote service access is only possible

from trusted systems (systems with which your syngo MR
system has exchanged proved certificates).
A.4
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Terminating remote service without
consultation with the service engineers. A.4
Consequence: Terminating the remote service ends all

service processes and causes system malfunctions. A.4
Remedy: Always consult with a service engineer before
terminating remote service. A.4

0.0

Logbook A.4
Your system has a logbook that records all system and applica-
tion-relevant events, for example error messages. A.4
Call up Options > Service > Event Log... to display the

Event Log dialog box.
You can select the type and date of the messages that you want
to display. A.4

0.0
syngo MR 2006T A.47

Configuring the MR system A.4
As an authorized user or system administrator you can set

syngo MR to the exact configuration of your MAGNETOM. This
includes, for example, specifying the MAGNETOM type, the
optional system components and environmental conditions. A.4
Call up Options > Service > Local Service.
Enter a new password and click on the button OK in the
Authentication dialog window.
0.0

PART
B Security Package B.0
B.1 Introduction
Terms and definitions in security ............................... B.15
B.2 Information for Administrators

Configuration of the security system .............................. B.22
Preparatory steps .................................................... B.212
Workflow for the configuration of
the security system .................................................. B.216
Configuration of user accounts ................................ B.225
Configuration of groups and roles ........................... B.235
Access control ......................................................... B.244
Audit trail and log files .................................................. B.271
Opening the configuration for audit trail storing ....... B.275
Configuring the storage of the audit trail .................. B.277
Opening the Audit Trail Filter and Viewer ................ B.286
Defining events to be recorded in the audit trail ...... B.288
Viewing log files ....................................................... B.291
Storing and deleting log files ................................... B.294
What to do when the audit trail blocks
the system ............................................................... B.297
Secure transfer of data ................................................ B.299
B.3 Information for Users

User management and access control .......................... B.32
Logging on and off ..................................................... B.35
Emergency access....................................................... B.311
Failed log on ................................................................ B.312
Protecting data from unauthorized access ................... B.313
Service access ............................................................. B.315
Generating a service password for local access ..... B.317
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B1
Contents Safety standards in syngo MR
Recorded user transactions (audit trail) ....................... B.320
B.4 Information for Service Technicians

Service access ............................................................... B.42
Local access .............................................................. B.43
Remote access .......................................................... B.45
Backup & restore ............................................................ B.47
0.0
B2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
B.1 Introduction B.1
Data and Function Based on diagnostic images and medical reports decisions are
Security B.1 made that affect the health of patients. Therefore, in modern
health care it is necessary to protect such sensitive documents
from unauthorized access and to record all actions on the
data. B.1
The Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act

(HIPAA) is a legal requirement to ensure the privacy, integrity
and consistency of patient data in health care. B.1
In supporting HIPAA, syngo MR provides competent user man-

agement and highly configurable access control to implement
privacy, integrity and consistency of patient data in health care
which may be required by country specific regulatory. B.1
Access to functions as well as to data is only permitted to

authenticated and authorized users. Each user is identifiable
at all times.
Logon and action on data such as creation, read, update and
deletion are recorded in an audit trail. The audit trail can only
be viewed by authorized users.
syngo MR only accepts DICOM Query/Retrieve requests
from trusted hosts. Requests from unknown hosts are
rejected.
Communication during secured remote service sessions is
encrypted.
If the computer is unused for a specific period of time, the
screen is automatically locked.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.11

Introduction Safety standards in syngo MR
B.1 B.1
NOTE
Security has to be set up on every workstation except for
satellite consoles, which take the security settings from
their main console. Therefore, you cannot configure the
security system on satellite consoles. B.1
Furthermore, if the computer is connected to a hospital

network, all partner workstations have to be set up for
security, otherwise a security gap will exist. B.1
Scope B.1 Security in syngo MR provides the infrastructure that is neces-

sary to protect patient data from unauthorized access. Only
persons who need to see certain data will have access to it, and
only persons with the necessary data access rights will be able
to modify data. B.1
The security system consists of the following parts: B.1
Authentication of users who are working on the system

Access protection to patient data with user specific permis-
sions
Protection for execution of application functionality with user-
specific privileges
Logging the access to patient data in an AuditTrail
0.0
B.12 Operator Manual

Safety standards in syngo MR Introduction
Use Cases B.1 The following use cases show you some benefits of the syngo
MR user management and security system. B.1
To ensure high throughput of patients, two assistants work

on one system at the same time. While one assistant pre-
pares a patient for the next examination at the modality, the
other assistant sends the images from the previous examina-
tion to the store. The assistants can take over and log on
without a restart of the application or a significant delay being
caused due to a patient data unload.
A system can be shared between wards or hospitals, and
patient data is only visible to the staff of the ward/hospital
that has acquired the data.
A radiologist working in a radiology department of a hospital
can also have his or her own practice and use the hospitals
systems for examinations of own patients. For example,
depending on the current role (radiologist in hospital or
radiologist for private patients) he/she has access to a
wider or more restricted range of functions for post-process-
ing images.
The presence of a VIP patient in the hospital is kept confi-
dential. Data acquisition is carried out by the departmental
head and one assistant. The acquired images and even the
existence of the patients records is hidden from all other
users of the system.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.13

Structure of the This documentation distinguishes between three types of

Documentation B.1 users. B.1
Information for Administrators

In this part of the documentation, administrators find all the
information they need to manage the security system, from
activating the security package, through managing users
and access control to configuring the audit trail.
Chapter B.2, Information for Administrators
Information for Users
This part of the documentation shows the user how to log on
and off, how to work efficiently and what to do when he/she
forgot the password. It also shows how to enable access to
a service technician (local and remote access).
Chapter B.3, Information for Users
Information for Service Technicians
Service technicians can enter the system locally or remotely.
This documentation part is restricted to the most common
service issues.
A special source of information aimed at service technicians
is available in the Service Software Online Help.
Chapter B.4, Information for Service Technicians
0.0

Terms and definitions in security B.1
Access Rights B.1 In syngo MR security, rights protect the access to patient
health information (data) with group/user specific permissions.
B.1
Authentication B.1 Authentication of users who are working with syngo MR is the
underlying basis of all security measures. A user account is cre-
ated for every person who will be working with syngo MR. To
log on to the system, the user enters his/her user account and
password. By this, a user is identifiable.
B.1
Audit Trail B.1 On a secure system, all actions on data are logged. syngo uses
auditing to track which user account was used to access files or
other objects, as well as logon attempts, system shutdowns or
restarts, and similar events. B.1
Only authorized users can track auditing activity by viewing the

log files of the audit trail. B.1
The log files of the audit trail need to be stored on a regular

schedule.
B.1
Authorization B.1 Authorization means: B.1
Data Access: Only users who need access to certain patient

data can view it (for example, all medical personnel on
Ward A).
Functional Privileges: Only users with the necessary autho-
rization can modify the data (for example, only doctors would
have the right to change the work status).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.15

Data Access and Groups B.1 The data access security check is based on groups and users:B.1
Users need to have access to patient data within their sphere
of influence (for example, their ward).
Users are assigned to groups that correspond with their
sphere of influence; these groups are allowed access to the
corresponding patient data.
It is easier to manage permissions for groups than for individ-
ual users.
Access to patient data is secured through the needed permis-
sions: In order to reduce complexity, only the following permis-
sion levels are implemented: B.1
NO ACCESS
FULL CONTROL
0.0

Everyone (Group and syngo MR security makes use of the Everyone group and a
Role) B.1 Everyone role. B.1
The Everyone group is the default group for setting up

access to data. If the Everyone group is configured to have
access to all data within the hospital, all users will have
access to all data (regardless of any group or individual set-
tings).
It is therefore essential that the Everyone group is restricted
to patient data that everyone must have access to (for exam-
ple, emergency patients).
The Everyone role is the default level for granting privileges
to users. If all privileges are assigned to Everyone, the con-
figuration of other roles or individuals will not have any actual
effect.
It is therefore essential to limit the privileges of the Every-
one role to those that everyone must have.
All users potentially have full access to data and functions
because the default settings of the Everyone group and role
allow full access. The effective rights for a user depend on the
configuration of this group and role. B.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.17

B.1
NOTE
Because it is not possible to deny rights, the Everyone
group and role have but the user shall not, we recommend
to take special care when configuring the data access
permission and the functional privileges. B.1
You can follow two different strategies for the Everyone

setup: B.1
Following the Allow nothing strategy, you would withdraw

almost all rights from the Everyone group and role and then
set up the user groups and the roles. In this case, even com-
mon rights would have to be assigned to every group and
role.
Following the Common rights strategy, you would only with-
draw critical rights that are not needed by all users.
A useful procedure could be to set up the desired permis-
sions, and then check the effective permissions. When you
are finished, you can remove any unnecessary privileges
from the Everyone group. You must then re-check the effec-
tive permissions.
0.0

Please take care not to configure No Access for all groups,

because then even fall-back data objects are can no longer
be accessed.
We recommend to allow Full Control, for example, for the
STANDARD patient group at the Everyone configuration
level. This would allow all users access to the standard
patients (for example, any patients who have not yet been
assigned to a ward).
Groups B.1 Groups are assigned to users which are members of a team or
a department. All members of a group receive the same data
access rights (permission, for example, to view or to process
data). B.1
Establishing groups helps to efficiently assign data access

rights to users and reduces the time needed for configuration.
B.1
Permissions B.1 Data access rights. The right to create, read, update, delete or
protect data is granted via permissions. The following permis-
sion levels are available: B.1
NO ACCESS
FULL CONTROL
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.19

Privileges B.1 The right to execute functions is granted via privileges. The
functional security check is based on roles and users: B.1
Users need to perform functions that correspond with their

role in the hospital, for example, nurse, physician, office
desk,
Privileges are managed by roles.
It is easier to manage privileges for roles than for individual
users.
Users are associated with roles and inherit the correspond-
ing privileges.
Roles B.1 Users having the same tasks are assigned a role (for example,
radiologists, administrators, or technicians). Then all users of a
role have the same right to execute functions, such as storing
data. B.1
Establishing roles helps to efficiently assign execution rights to

users and reduces the time needed for configuration. B.1
0.0

Trusted Hosts B.1 Trusted hosts is a principle for a secure exchange of data
between systems in a network. The trusted host functionality
can be switched on in the Local Service Software. Switching
on has the following consequences: B.1
Basically, all trusted systems must have knowledge about

each other.
At your local workstation, all systems you trust must be set
up as such.
Received data is only accepted from trusted systems.
Data will only be sent to trusted systems.
Queries on data are only allowed from other trusted systems.
Your trusted zone must contain only network nodes with the
security system installed so that you can receive and send data
without worrying about data security. B.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.111

0.0

CHAPTER Information for
B.2 Administrators B.2
Administrators tasks B.2 Once the syngo MR security system has been installed,
Administrators are responsible for establishing and maintaining
competent user management, and for ensuring that the system
remains secure. This includes the following main tasks: B.2
Creation and maintenance of user and group accounts and

role definitions
Definition of data access rights (permissions)
Assignment of functional privileges
Handling of the audit trail
Regularly backing up the audit trail
NOTE
User management has to be set up on every computer,
except for satellite consoles, which take the security
settings from their main console. B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.21

Information for Administrators Safety standards in syngo MR
Configuration of the security

system B.2
Principles of the syngo MR Patient data is sensitive information that has to be protected
User Management B.2 from unauthorized access, modification, transfer or deletion.
B.2
User Authentication B.2 A user account has to be created for every person who will be
working with syngo MR. To log on to the system, the user
enters his/her user account and password.
B.2
User Authorization B.2 The syngo MR user management and security system pro-
vides a highly configurable access control and ensures that
users obtain access only to application functions and patient
data they are authorized to work with. B.2
The right to execute functions is granted via privileges.

The right to create, read, update, delete or protect data is
granted via permissions.
Permissions can be set on at the patient or the study level.
Series and instances inherit their permissions from the study
they belong to.
0.0

Safety standards in syngo MR Information for Administrators
Example: Doctor Stern wants to send a study of the patient Mr.

Smith to the archive. To do so, he needs the permission to
access the study of Mr. Smith and he needs the privilege to
send data to the archive. B.2
B.2
Grouping of Users: Roles Setting up the access rights for each user individually would
and Groups B.2 take a long time and would inevitably lead to inconsistent rights
for similar users. B.2
Scenario: Every doctor in the hospital shall be allowed to invoke

the 3-D functions, but nurses shall not be allowed to do so. Also,
patient data shall only be visible in the ward where the patient
is being treated. B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.23

As the scenario shows, users can be grouped under certain

aspects: B.2
According to his/her profession or duties, a user may have

assigned one or several roles, such as radiologist, nurse, or
administrator.
Roles can be assigned certain function execution rights
(= privileges), such as sending data, correcting data or set-
ting a work status. These rights extend to all users who
assume a certain role (or several roles). B.2
According to the department(s) a user belongs to, a user

may also be assigned to one or several groups, such as the
radiology department or a ward.
For groups, you can configure data access rights (= permis-
sions), which are granted to all group members. B.2
You can also set up permissions and privileges for each user
individually.
0.0

Typically, a user belongs to at least one group and has at least

one role. A user can also be assigned to more than one group
or role. See ( Page B.244) for more information about access
control and how conflicting permissions and privileges are han-
dled if a user belongs to more than one group or role.
B.2
Special User Accounts B.2 The syngo MR security system knows the following special
user accounts: B.2
Administrator
By default, the security system is installed with a general
Administrator user account assigned to the groups Admin-
istrators and SecurityAdmins and having assigned a role
called SecurityAdmins. B.2
Use this system account only to set up user management.

You then have to create a separate user account for every
administrator and assign these user accounts both to the
groups Administrators and SecurityAdmins. From now on,
log on to the system only under your personal administrator
user name. B.2
By default, the system is delivered with a setup that allows all

administrators full access to the system as long as an admin-
istrator does not remove these settings, the system is acces-
sible for him. B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.25

LocalServiceUser
This account usually is set up to have restricted access to
patient data, but full functional privileges for checking and
maintaining the system. B.2
To allow local service activities, an authorized user gets the

system to generate a temporary service password that auto-
matically expires after a configurable number of days. The
user then gives the password to the service technician, so
that the technician has access to the system under the
LocalServiceUser account. B.2
By default, this account is assigned both to the built-in group

and role called syngoServiceUsers. It also inherits rights
from the Everyone group and role (like all other accounts). B.2
In the default settings, the syngoServiceUsers group and
role have full access to all data. We therefore recommend
that you as administrator disable the rights for the syngoS-
erviceUsers group and role that are not essential for service
activities. B.2
0.0

RemoteServiceUser
This account is used for remote service sessions. B.2
By default, the security system is installed with a Remote-

ServiceUser account assigned to the group syngoService-
Users and the role syngoServiceUsers. B.2
Depending on national and local regulations, remote access

to patient data is prohibited. Keep in mind that the Remote-
ServiceUserinherits the rights of the Everyone group and
role and the syngoServiceUsers group and role. It is there-
fore necessary that the data access rights for these groups
and roles do not allow the violation of remote data access.
B.2
Emergency Access
To ensure emergency access to the system at all times, you
should create at least one special user account for common
emergency logon. B.2
Typically, the emergency user account(s) are assigned to an

Emergency_Access group and assigned the Emergen-
cy_Access role, which are already built in by the security
configuration. B.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.27

Depending on national and local regulations and the hospi-

tals security policies, the administrator has to define the cor-
rect permissions and privileges of the emergency access.
For example, emergency access should not allow modifica-
tion, deletion or transfer of data. If this is in accordance with
the security policy, you may think about creating an emer-
gency account without password. B.2
To make this emergency logon information available for the

users, we suggest to give this information to the desk officer
or deposited in a safe place. Also, the users have to be
informed about the correct usage of this account and the
consequences of abuse.
B.2
Internal Users B.2 Internal user accounts are essential for the system. They con-
sist of built-in users of the Windows operating system and
syngo MR internal users. B.2
The symbol user with exclamation mark indicates internal

users. B.2
NOTE
Although it is possible to change the password of these
internal accounts, we strongly recommend not to modify
any of the internal users. B.2
0.0

The internal user accounts are: B.2
BRAdmin: This account is used to back up and restore files

on the computer, regardless of any permissions that protect
those files. Further functions are very restricted.
DICOM_USER: Account for processes using DICOM ser-
vices.
Guest: Built-in Windows XP account, not to be deleted. For
syngo MR, this account is disabled.
HelpAssistant: Built-in Windows XP account for providing
remote desktop assistance. Usually, this account is disabled.
IUSR_nnn: Account to access the Internet Information Ser-
vices.
IWAM_nnn: Account for starting the Internet Information Ser-
vices from process applications.
meduser: Account created by syngo MR to keep system
services running.
PPP: Account created by syngo MR to enable point-to-point
communication used for remote service logon via modem.
SUPPORT_xxx: Built-in Windows XP account for the Help
and Support Service. Usually, this account is disabled.
HP ITO account: Account created by syngo when the Sys-
tem Management is enabled.
OPC_OP: Account created by syngo when the System Man-
agement is enabled.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.29

DICOM Nodes B.2 For the security system, DICOM network nodes are treated as
virtual user accounts. They are not intended for local logon;
they are required for proper networking (transfer of data).
B.2
The network symbol indicates virtual DICOM users. B.2
For each DICOM service (AET) that is configured in the Local

Service Software, automatically a corresponding entry is cre-
ated in the special DICOM Nodes folder of the user manage-
ment. B.2
To set up the access rights for data being transferred from and
to the network workstation, you should put each DICOM node
into a user group and assign a role (this effectively assigns the
workstation a user group and role). The relationship between
user groups and patient groups define the permissions on the
data as well as the default patient group, the roles define the
functional privileges of the DICOM nodes. B.2
Example: You may want to configure the system so that the

workstation AET_HOP01 may query for data of VIP patients,
but the workstation AET_WARD12 has no access. The Patient
Groups configuration in the Data Access Permissions sec-
tion is the place to configure this. B.2
0.0

Tracking of User Activities B.2 In syngo MR, the activities of a user are recorded in the audit
trail - including the users identity. According to national regula-
tions, it is not allowed to share user accounts. B.2
TIP
Recommend the users to use the Log In Different User
function to switch the user quickly at the workstation. B.2
B.2
Multistage Security Setup B.2 Security in syngo MR has a multistage security concept: B.2
(1) The user management is the essential basis of all other

security building blocks. It makes user logon mandatory
and ensures user authentication.
(2) The audit trail records all (the defined) actions involving
patient data.
(3) The function execution check ensures that only authorized
users perform actions.
(4) The data access check defines the rights to access patient
data (assembled in patient groups).
Despite of the mandatory user management, any combination
of the options mentioned above is possible. Useful combina-
tions of options are: 1., 1.+3., 1.+2.+3. for PACS or network,
1.+2.+3.+4. for full security management. B.2
0.0

Preparatory steps B.2
The following preparatory steps will help you to set up the secu-
rity system from scratch. Depending on the options selected for
your security system, you do not have to perform all steps: B.2
Get a license for the security system.
Outline the intended user management system with the help
of a drawing similar to the one shown below.
As a basis, outline the intended daily workflow at the system.
For example, consider who can stand in as an acting physi-
cian and set up the necessary access rights accordingly. B.2
For basic user management you need user accounts and
groups. When using the functional check too, you also need
to think about the organization of roles. B.2
For data access check, define data security levels in accor-

dance with the security regulations of your hospital.
In the security configuration, you define patient groups and
assign them to users and groups. For example, Radiology
could be used for data that should only be visible to members
of the radiology department or VIP for patient data that
should only be visible to very few persons, such as the head
physician.
0.0

For each patient group you can later grant groups and
users the permission to have full control or no access to
data that is marked with that patient group. You can also
grant the right to modify the assigned patient group.
Whenever a real user or a virtual DICOM node user
creates new patient data on your system, a patient group
that defines the access rights to the data can be applied.
Registration of new patients or data received from a
DICOM node are the most common ways new data is cre-
ated.
If studies of a patient are already stored in the local data-
base, the existing patient group assignment is also used
for any additional studies.
After switching the data access check option of the secu-
rity system on, you will find all of your patient studies in the
STANDARD patient group.
0.0

Develop a matrix that describes the permissions and privi-

leges of the groups, roles and special user accounts.
Verify this model before activating the security system. B.2
You are also responsible for establishing a proper procedure

for emergency access. Inform your users that they should
contact you or the system administrator in case of problems.
0.0

B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: Behavior of secured systems. B.2
Consequence: The hospital's security policy also affects

the behavior of the syngo MR system in certain cases (for
example, password requirements, enabled empty
passwords, or locking of an account after a specific number
of failed logins). B.2
Remedy: B.2
Establish a user model for your hospital and verify it

before the security system is activated.
Establish a proper procedure for emergency access.
Note that if you enable an empty password for the emer-
gency account, this is enabled for all other users as well.
Nevertheless, instruct the users to use good passwords.
Always back up your system before enabling the secu-
rity system and before any major changes.
Inform all your users about any changes and settings.
They should contact you or any other administrator
immediately in case of problems.
0.0

Workflow for the configuration of the security

system B.2
B.2
NOTE
You have to set up the security system on every syngo MR
workstation in your hospital except for satellite consoles,
which take the security settings from their main console. B.2
B.2
NOTE
In any case, the security system should never be configured
during an acquisition B.2
Once the security system has been enabled, access to the

computer is possible only after the user has logged on and has
been authorized. This requires that the security system must be
configured immediately after its activation. At least, the follow-
ing must be done: B.2
Proceed as follows: B.2
Backup of the system.

Page B.47
Log on under the default Administrator account and open
the syngo MR Security Configuration console.
Page B.222
0.0

Create user accounts for every user who will work with the
workstation. Do not forget to create at least one user account
that is intended to stand in as both an administrator and
security administrator.
Page B.225
Please check the personal administrator account(s) inten-
sively to make sure they work properly. After finishing and
testing the security configuration, we recommend to disable
the built-in Administrator or to set an individual password
for it.
Page B.41
Create the groups and roles of your user model. Add the cor-
responding users to those groups and roles. Do not forget to
assign the user account(s) intended as administrator both to
the groups and roles Administrators and SecurityAdmins.
Page B.235
Create patient groups to define the various data access
rights (= permissions). Assign them the desired user groups
and set up the default patient group. If necessary, you can
also set individual permissions at user level.
Page B.248
0.0

Restrict the permissions of the Everyone group according

to your strategy.
Page B.15
For all roles, define the privileges for the function execution
rights. If necessary, you can also set individual privileges at
user level.
Page B.263
Restrict the privileges of the Everyone role according to
your strategy and check for effective privileges that are
inherited from the various roles assigned and from the
Everyone role.
Page B.15
Make sure that there is at least one full privileged user
account (fall-back user).
Configure the audit trail.
Page B.271
To avoid loss of configuration data, the system must be
backed up again.
Page B.47
After setup, you must check the security configuration on
your real-world workflow carefully.
We recommend to log on as any user type defined and to
check the execution of all functions for inconsistencies. B.2
Inform every user about their account, the emergency

account and any relevant passwords.
0.0

Securing the System B.2 By activating the syngo MR security system, the customer ser-
vice technician turns your system into a system with high data
protection level. The service technician needs the appropriate
service key for service level 7. B.2
Normally, the security system is not activated during the system

installation. To secure your system, you will have to instruct a
service technician as to which security options you want to be
enabled. B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: There is no undo! B.2
Consequence: After activating the security system, access

is limited to only the defined users. Once the security
system is activated, it is not possible to deactivate it
(instead, you would have to re-install the complete syngo
MR system on the computer from scratch). B.2
Remedy: Make sure you have read and completed all

preparatory steps. Back up your system before activating
the security system. B.2
Log on under a service account and choose the Options >

Service > Local Service menu item from any task card.
0.0

After authorization, the Service Software window opens: B.2
In the Configuration section, go to the Security settings

page.
Select the Local security features that you want to activate:
0.0

User management Activates user management which is the basis for all other security options. When
activating any other security option, the user management will also be switched on
automatically.
Data access check Access to data is always provided in accordance with the current permissions. If this
check box is not selected, you cannot restrict any data access rights.
Functional check Access to functions is always provided in accordance with the privileges granted to a user
role. If this check box is not selected, you cannot restrict the use of functions.
Auditing Access to the system and configured actions are recorded in an audit trail.
If the workstation is connected to a network, select the

Enable trusted host functionality check box to establish a
secure system to your network partners and services.
Only trusted hosts will answer queries or allow data transfer. B.2
To enhance the security of the remote service access to your

computer, select the SSL encryption check box.
Selecting this option enables the secure HTTPS protocol, which
uses the SSL (Secure Socket Layer) protocol for authentication
and data encryption. B.2
To confirm, click Save and Finish in the status bar of the win-
dow.
End the service session and log off.
After a restart of the system, only authenticated and authorized
persons can use the workstation. B.2
0.0

Opening the Security You need Administrator and SecurityAdmin rights to config-
Configuration Console B.2 ure the security system. B.2
Log on as administrator or as a user with administrative.

Page B.35
From any task card, choose the Options > Security Config-
uration menu item.
After authorization, the syngo MR Security Configuration
console is displayed. B.2
By clicking an item in the tree view on the left-hand side, you

display the various pages for set-up.
0.0

B.2
TIP
Use the Show/Hide Console Tree icon if the tree view
does not appear after start-up. B.2
Security Configuration is intended for one security admin-

istrator only.
User Management for managing user, groups and roles with
the following sub-folders:
Users for creating and setting up user accounts
Internal Users for checking built-in and internal system
accounts
DICOM Nodes for checking those accounts that are auto-
matically created for all configured network partners
Groups for managing the user groups and the group
members
Roles for managing the roles and their owners
0.0

Security Management with:

Data Access Permissions for defining the access rights
to any data
Functional Privileges for defining the function execution
rights based on the users/roles view
On the right-hand side, you see the settings page that has been
selected on the left-hand side. B.2
B.2
TIP
The items to be recorded in the audit trail are configured in
the Audit Trail Viewer Console ( Page B.288) and
storing parameters are set up in the Audit Trail
Configuration dialog box ( Page B.277). B.2
0.0

Configuration of user accounts B.2
User Accounts B.2 For every user who will work with the system, create a user
account and assign a password. B.2
A user account that is no longer required, can be disabled or

deleted (for example, if the user quits). B.2
B.2
NOTE
Always work in the syngo MR Security Configuration,
never use the Microsoft Management Console (MMC) to
create or to manage user accounts. syngo MR expands the
Windows-related security system by a data security
management and distinguishes between groups and
roles. B.2
Note that the syngo MR security system only makes use of

some fundamental levels of security granted to users by the
Windows operating system. Moreover, the syngo MR security
system has its own security concept. B.2
0.0

Special User Accounts B.2 The security system comes with some default and some inter-
nal user accounts, and automatically generates DICOM Node
user accounts. B.2
Default users are delivered with the software and contain, for
example, the Administrator, the LocalServiceUser and the
RemoteServiceUser.
All internal users are essential for the system and indicated
as such. We strongly recommend not changing the pass-
words of these users.
DICOM nodes are required for remote network functions.
They are created as soon as you configure the DICOM ser-
vices (AET). You can only change the password and the
group assignment of these users.
For a detailed list of the internal user accounts see
Page B.22. B.2
0.0

Handling of Passwords B.2 The password of a user in syngo MR never expires, but the
users are allowed to change their passwords on their own
(depending on your security policy). B.2
You can assign a user a new password at any time. B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: User access may be prevented due to
forgotten or unknown accounts or passwords, or wrong
setup (for example, in case of an emergency). B.2
Consequence: Inaccessible system. B.2
Remedy: Do not forget to define a general user account for

emergency access and assign it to a group and a role both
called "EmergencyAccess". B.2
Regardless as to whether you specify a password for the

emergency account or not, users shall be prohibited from
changing any passwords (especially for the emergency
account). B.2
The users shall contact you immediately in case of

problems. B.2
Creating a new User One basic task for configuration is the creation of the necessary
Account B.2 user accounts. A number of general user accounts come pre-
installed with the system. B.2
It is not possible to rename a user account. If you mistype it

here, delete the account and create a new one. B.2
0.0

B.2
NOTE
Misuse of the emergency account defeats the security
system! B.2
Patient data acquired and processed during emergency

access is logged in the audit trail as belonging to the
emergency account. As a result, the identity of the user
involved cannot subsequently be determined. The
ownership of any data recorded this way must be altered
and the data newly assigned. B.2
Ensure that all users have been properly informed about the
use of the emergency access account and the use of the
password. Misuse of the account is illegal! B.2
Open the syngo MR Security Configuration console.

Page B.222
B.2
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the User Manage-

ment folder.
0.0

Right-click the Users folder and choose New > User from
the context menu.
Or B.2
Select the Users folder and choose the Action > New >
User menu item.
The User tab card is displayed: B.2
Enter the desired user information.
0.0

Name Name of the user account (= logon name). Note, that the name has to be unique within
the system. The user name is not case sensitive. Only alphanumeric characters are
allowed.
Full name Information that helps to identify the user, for example, first, second name and title of the
user.
Description Further information about the user (for example, his/her department).
New Password The password that has to be entered by the user in order to log on to a workstation. The
password is case sensitive.
Confirm Password For validation purposes, the password has to be entered a second time.
According to the hospitals security policies, users in syngo may be allowed to change
passwords on their own.
Account is disabled If selected, the user account is set up but the user cannot log onto the system. You may
use this option, for example, for users who are off-site for some time.
Password never This option is selected by default and cannot be changed: The users password does not
expires expire regularly (for example, this setting is important for the EmergencyAccess account).
User cannot change If selected, the user cannot change the password on their own. For the
password EmergencyAccess, we strongly recommend to disable the change of password.
To store, click Apply and continue to create other user

accounts.
Or B.2
Click OK to store and close the dialog box.

After OK, the list of current users appears. B.2
0.0

Selecting a User Account To select a user account for editing: B.2
for Editing
B.2
Page B.222
On the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.
Click the Users folder.
All available user accounts are displayed on the right-hand side.
You can identify the users by the information in the Name, Full
Name and Description columns. B.2
To edit a user account, double-click the entry on the right-

hand side.
Modifying a User Account You can change the account properties or enable/disable an
and Passwords B.2 account. Also it is possible to change the password for normal
users and DICOM Nodes. B.2
B.2
NOTE
We strongly recommend not to change passwords of any
internal user accounts, otherwise important system
services may no longer work properly. B.2
0.0

It is not possible to rename an account, because if a user has

already worked with this account, some data objects may exist
with the data security level inherited from this user. To correct
mistakes, delete and create the account instead. B.2
Double-click the desired user account.

The User tab card is displayed with the current properties for
this user account. B.2
0.0

On the User tab card, you can change the Full Name and
the Description of the user account.
To change a password, type the desired password into the
New Password field and repeat it in the Confirm Password
field.
To disable/enable the account, select/clear the Account is
disabled check box.
To prevent users from changing their password, select the
User cannot change password check box.
The Member of tab card lists all groups (for data access) this
user is assigned to. B.2
The Owner of tab card lists all roles (for use cases or functional
privileges) this user owns. B.2
Click Apply to save the settings.

Or B.2
Click OK to save and close the dialog box.

To configure another account, you must close the dialog box.
This opens the list of all user accounts. B.2
0.0

Deleting a User Account B.2 You can delete user accounts that are no longer needed. B.2
B.2
NOTE
For reason of system integrity, it is not possible to delete
internal users, DICOM nodes, and special users. B.2
Right-click the desired user account and choose Delete from

the context menu.
Or B.2
Select the desired user account and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with Yes.
The user account is deleted. B.2
0.0

Configuration of groups and roles B.2
About Groups and Roles B.2 The syngo MR security system makes use of users, groups
and roles. B.2
Groups are used to configure the same data access rights for
a group of people (for example, everyone who works in a par-
ticular ward).
We recommend that you create a user group for every team
or department of your user model. Then you assign the user
accounts that belong to that group.
Roles are used to configure the same function execution
privileges for people with similar tasks (for example, physi-
cians, nurses, or assistants).
You then assign the user accounts that will own that role.
Built-in Groups and Roles B.2 By default, some general groups and roles are already
installed. They are created automatically when you install the
Windows operating system and syngo MR. These groups and
roles are named identically: B.2
Emergency_Access
SecurityAdmins
syngoServiceUsers
0.0

No Group Hierarchies B.2 Note that you cannot plan sub-groups (groups-in-groups), such
as Hospital for hospital-wide permissions and Neurology for
defining permissions for people working in the neurology
department of the hospital.
B.2
Configuration Levels B.2 The security configuration provides you two different ways to
assign group members and owners of roles. Which one you
prefer depends on your interest; it is often useful to switch
between both: B.2
Starting at the Users level easily provides a good overview

about the current memberships of the user and lets you eas-
ily pick the desired groups or roles for this user.
Starting at Groups or Roles level gives you a good overview
of which users have already been assigned to the group or
role under configuration.
Creating a new Group or Because groups and roles handled almost identically, their han-
Role B.2 dling is described here together. B.2
Take a look at your outline from the preparatory steps to create

the groups and roles. B.2
It is not possible to create groups in groups or sub-roles to set

up a hierarchy of rules and rights. B.2
0.0

To create a new group or role: B.2

Page B.222
On the left-hand side, open the User Management folder.
Right-click the Groups or the Roles folder and choose

New > Group or New > Role from the context menu.
Or B.2
Select the Groups or the Roles folder and choose the

Action > New menu item.
0.0

The Group respectively the Role tab card is displayed: B.2
Enter a Name and a Description that helps to identify the

group or role.
0.0

B.2
NOTE
The name has to be unique within the system. The name is
case sensitive. Special characters such as " / \\\\\\\\
[ ] : ; | = , + * ? < > are not allowed. B.2
Click Apply to save.

For group configuration, click the Members tab to add Users
to the group.
Or B.2
For role configuration, click the Owners tab to assign Users

the role.
All available user accounts are displayed on the right-hand side,
all already assigned users are placed on the left-hand side. B.2
0.0

This symbol indicates normal user accounts.

B.2
This symbol indicates internal users.

B.2
This symbol indicates accounts for DICOM nodes in the net-

work. To restrict the remote data access to your workstation,
you should also assign these nodes to groups and roles. B.2
0.0

At the Available list (on the right-hand side), double-click the

user, or select the user(s) you want to assign and click [ << ].
All already assigned users are listed in the Assigned list.
To resolve an assignment, select the user on the left-hand
side and click [ >> ] or double-click a user.
Click Apply to store.
Or B.2
Click OK when you are finished.

After OK, the group or role is stored and the list of groups or
roles appears. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Because you cannot rename groups or roles, you must
instead delete them and recreate them. B.2
0.0

Selecting a Group or Role To select a group or role for editing: B.2
for Editing
B.2
Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the User Manage-
ment item.
Select the Groups or the Roles item.
All available groups or roles are listed on the right-hand side. B.2
Double-click an entry to edit it.
Adding or Removing Group To add or remove group members or role owners: B.2
Members or Role Owners B.2

Double-click the desired group or role in the tree on the right-
hand side.
The Group respectively the Role tab card is displayed. B.2
If desired, you can modify the Description.

On the Members or Owners tab card, use the add [ << ] and
remove [ >> ] buttons to update the users group or role.
Page B.236
0.0

Deleting a Group or Role B.2 To delete a group/role:

B.2
Right-click the desired group or role and choose Delete from

the context menu.
Or B.2
Select the desired group or role and choose the Action >
Delete menu item.
Confirm the security notice with OK.
The group account is deleted; all members lose the corre-
sponding privileges/rights. B.2
0.0

Access control B.2
Access control in syngo MR security system consist of permis-

sions (which users and user groups are allowed to access a
certain data set) and functional privileges (which user or roles
are allowed to execute a certain program module or function). B.2
B.2
NOTE
The different security levels applied to application functions
and patient data in the context of the clinical workflow are
normally defined in the hospitals security policy. B.2
Privileges B.2 A privilege is the right to use a specific syngo MR function, for
instance, sending data or invoking the Patient Registration.
B.2
Patient Group Patient group permissions regulate the access to data: B.2
Permissions
You define a list of patient groups according to the data secu-
B.2
rity policy of your hospital. For example, create a patient

group Radiology for data that should only be visible to
members of the radiology department, or VIP for patient
data that should only be visible to very few persons, such as
the head physician.
0.0

For each patient group, you can grant users and groups the
permission to access data that is assigned to this group. B.2
You can set permissions for the following types of access: B.2
No Access: The user will have absolutely no access to the

data of this patient group. B.2
Full Control: The user has access to the data, and can work
with it according to his/her role. In general, the user can: B.2
create data objects, like studies or series
read data, for example, load it into the Viewer
update or modify data, for example, draw annotations on
images or correct the patients name
delete data
execute changes to the security levels applying to certain
data, for example, to hide the data of VIP patients from
some doctors on the ward
Permissions can be set at the patient or study level. Series
and images inherit their permissions from the study they
belong to. B.2
0.0

A newly created patient entry or study is automatically

assigned a patient group. Basically, this is the one that has
been assigned as default to the user (or to the group the user
belongs to). To be more precise:
If a user registers a new patient, this patient is first
assigned to the default patient group.
If a user registers a new study of a known patient, the pre-
viously assigned patient groups are taken over.
If your system receives studies from a DICOM node and
the patient is not known at your system, the default patient
group of the DICOM node is assigned.
If your system receives studies of a known patient, the
previously assigned patient groups are taken over.
During Patient Registration and in the Patient Browser you
can modify the assignment of patient groups.
B.2
NOTE
To reduce your configuration efforts, define permissions on
group level and privileges on role level whenever possible.B.2
0.0

Example B.2 Example: Doctor Stern wants to send a study of the patient Mr.
Smith to the archive. To do so, he needs the permission to
access Mr. Smith study and he needs the privilege to send data
to the archive. B.2
B.2
Inheritance of Permissions The Everyone group is the top level of inheritance. The per-
and Privileges B.2 missions set for the Everyone group are transferred to all
groups of your security system. The same rule applies to the
Everyone role. B.2
Typically, a user belongs to at least one group and one role. But
you can also assign a user to more than one group or role. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Keep in mind that user rights are inherited. It is not possible
to assign someone function execution rights for a specific
group. B.2
0.0

The security system follows an inheritance strategy: Any right

granted on group or role level is inherited by all members. B.2
In the configuration user interface, this effect is indicated by the

display of Effective rights. B.2
It is not possible to deny rights that the user inherited from a

group or role.
It is possible to grant additional permissions and privileges
for single users. This way you expand the permissions and
privileges that have been defined for the group or role.
Because of the heredity rules, it is very important to check
and restrict the rights of the Everyone group and role.
The final decision as to whether a user will be granted an exe-
cution privilege or a permission depends on the inheritance
hierarchy of roles and groups to which the user belongs.
B.2
Managing Patient Groups Data Protections B.2
for Data Protection B.2

The permissions (data access rights) are configured on the
basis of patient groups. All data assigned to the same patient
group has the same protection attribute. B.2
0.0

You can create patient groups as desired according to your

security concept and workflow, but syngo MR delivers some
patient groups for data protection by default: B.2
The STANDARD patient group is a built-in group. It cannot

be deleted, because it is used as a fall-back protection for
otherwise unprotected data. The patient group is internally
assigned to any data object that has not been explicitly
assigned a protection (for example, a user without default
protection created a new patient entry). Also any data that
"loses" its patient group is also assigned to this group.
Any user concerned with the import of data from storage
disks should have Full Control access to the STANDARD
patient group.
The Emergency patient group can be used to protect data
from emergency acquisition.
The Service patient group is used to prohibit common
access to the internal Service Patient.
The LOST&FOUND patient group collects all studies that
had been assigned to unknown or to undefined patient
groups. Using this patient group, you can configure permis-
sion on this type of data. At least one user must have Full
Control access.
Whenever a user registers a new study, a default data security
level is applied to that data. You can configure the default data
security level either for groups or for individual users. B.2
0.0

Different views on the Data Access Permissions are available

(based on the same configuration data): B.2
The by User/Group View allows selecting a single user or

group and setting the rights on the various patient groups.
The by Patient Groups View allows selecting a single
patient group and setting the various user or group access
rights.
Special Configuration Issues B.2
Before modifying any security settings, it is important to take

some special configurations into consideration: B.2
Follow a strategy regarding the Everyone group. Check the

effective permissions. These are inherited from the various
groups, including the top level "Everyone" group.
Page B.15
We recommend to allow the administrator group or account
Full Control to the Lost&Found patient group.
Please ensure that at least one Administrator or user with
administrative rights has access to each patient group. (Do
not configure No Access for all patient groups.)
We recommend to allow the Everyone group Full Control
to the STANDARD patient group
0.0

Creating and Managing To create a new patient group for data protection: B.2
Patient Groups
B.2
Page B.222
In the tree on the left-hand side, open the Security Manage-
ment and the Data Access Permissions item.
Right-click the Patient Groups item and choose New >
Patient Group from the context menu.
Or B.2
Select the Patient Groups item and choose the Action >
New > Patient Group menu item.
0.0

The properties page for patient groups is displayed: B.2
Enter a Full name and a Description to identify the patient

group later easily.
Enter a text that describes the security level, for example:
used to control access to data of the radiology department.
0.0

To allow a service technician access to any patient data pro-

tected by this patient group, select the Grant read access
for syngoServiceUsers in service sessions check box.
Click Apply to save the settings.
Or B.2
Click OK to save and return to the list of existing patient

groups.
You are able to create additional patient groups only after click-
ing OK.
B.2
To delete a patient group: B.2
Right-click a patient group in the list and choose Delete from

the context menu.
The local database is checked for data objects that are
assigned to this patient group. If any are found, it is not possible
to delete this patient group. If it is allowed, a confirmation mes-
sage appears. B.2
Click Yes to confirm the deletion.
0.0

Opening the Data To access the setup of data permissions on patient groups: B.2
Permission Setup
B.2
Page B.222
ment and the Data Access Permissions item.
Click the by User/Groups item.
Or B.2
Click the by Patient Groups item.

It depends on your preferred workflow which view you choose
to work in. For configuration, it is quite common to switch
between both views to identify all dependencies and set up the
permissions accordingly. B.2
At the top of the configuration page, the selection list displays

the user/group respectively the patient group to be configured. B.2
In the by Users/Groups view, the table lists all available patient
groups and the permissions for the element selected at the top.B.2
In the by Patient Groups view, the table lists all users and
groups, and the permissions on the patient group selected at
the top of the page. B.2
0.0

Setting up Permissions in To set up the data access permissions for patient groups: B.2
the Users View

In the tree-view, click the by User/Groups item.
B.2
At the top of the dialog box, select the level you want to set
up for the available patient groups:
0.0

Everyone Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions often differ from the setup permission. The permissions in this group should
be the minimum permissions of all users.
Groups Shows the permissions at the group level. This allows you to set up group access rights
one after the other.
Users Shows the permissions at the user level. This allows you to set up individual access
rights. Note that users inherit their permissions from the Everyone group and from their
group memberships.
Select an item from the list according to the specified content

type (for example, a user group).
This symbol indicates that the list item represents a group. B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item represents a single user
account. B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item represents DICOM

Nodes (AETs for networked DICOM services, but handled like
users). B.2
0.0

After your selection, each table row represents a patient group.

The columns show the current permissions for the selected
user or group onto the patient groups.
Page B.251 B.2
B.2
NOTE
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box. B.2
In the Permission column, double-click and select the

desired access rights for the corresponding patient group:
No Access Prohibits any access to the data stored in this patient group. The data will not be visible
to the user or group.
Full Control Allows all actions to the data assigned with this patient group: create, read, update,
delete, and execute change protection.
Check the Eff. Permission column to see which access

rights actually become valid.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration at
Everyone and normal user group level, or from a membership
in two or more different user groups, etc. B.2
0.0

To set the default data protection: B.2
Whenever a user of the group under configuration creates a

new data object, by default the set of data protections config-
ured here is applied to that data. B.2
In the by User/Groups page, select an item from the top list.

You can configure the default protections for groups and users
here, so that it is possible to set up the default protection for
each user individually. B.2
Select the Default check box for those patient groups you
want to assign by default to the user or group.
Check the Eff. Default column to see which default protec-
tion attributes are actually become true.
Again, the deviation may originate from a different configuration
on user and group level, or from a membership in different user
groups, etc.
B.2
To save the protection, click Apply.

Or B.2
Click OK to save and close the page.
0.0

Setting up Permissions in To define a new set of default data protections for a group or
the Patient Groups View B.2 user: B.2
Display the by Patient Groups page.

Page B.251
From the Patient Groups list, select the patient group you
want to configure.
0.0

The table shows the permission configuration for this patient

group. Each line represents a user or a user group. B.2
B.2
TIP
To modify an existing configuration or to reduce the amount
of displayed groups and users, you can select the List only
objects with permissions assigned check box. B.2
Below the Patient Groups list, select the type of objects you
want to set up for the selected patient group:
Everyone Shows the permissions for the special group Everyone. This is the top level for the rights
inheritance on all other groups and all users. This group is one reason that the effective
permissions and the effective default differ from the permission set up for users or groups.
Groups Shows the permissions at the user group level. This allows you to set up group access
rights one after the other.
Users Shows the permissions at the user level, so that you can set up individual data access
rights.
0.0

After your selection, the table shows the permissions the vari-
ous users or user groups have for the selected patient group.
Each table row represents a single user or user group: B.2
This symbol indicates that the row belongs to a user group. B.2
This symbol indicates that the row represents a single user

account. B.2
This symbol indicates that the row belongs to an auto-gener-

ated user account for a DICOM AET service in the network.
B.2
In the Permission column, select the desired access rights: B.2
No Access Prohibits any access to the data stored in this patient group.
Full Control Allows all actions to the data stored in the patient group: create, read, update, delete, and
execute change protection.
Check the Eff. Permission column to see which access

rights are actually become valid.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration on
Everyone, user and group level, or from a membership in two or
more different user groups, etc. B.2
0.0

To set the default data protection: B.2
Whenever a user or group displayed in the permission table cre-

ates a new data object, by default the set of data protections
configured here is applied to that data. B.2
You can configure the default protections for groups and users
here, so that it is possible to specify a default protection for each
user individually. B.2
Select the check box Default for those user groups you want
to assign the selected patient group as default.
Check the Eff. Default column to see which default protec-
tion attributes are actually become true.
The deviation may originate from a different configuration on
user and group level, or from a membership in different user
groups, etc.
B.2
To save the protection settings, click Apply.

Or B.2
Click OK to save the settings and close the page.
0.0

Setting up the Privileges Privileges allow a user to execute syngo MR functions, such as
for a Role or a User B.2 sending data over network or invoking the patient registration. B.2
The privileges set for a role a user belongs to override the priv-
ileges explicitly set for the user. B.2
B.2
NOTE
For the emergency role and user, we strongly recommend
not to grant any functional privileges that allow deletion or
export of patient data. B.2

Page B.222
ment and the Functional Privileges items.
Select the by User/Role item.
0.0

The Privileges of... page is displayed, with the side tabs corre-
sponding to the various syngo MR modules installed at your
system: B.2
At the top of the dialog box, select the level of objects you
want to configure:
0.0

Everyone Shows the privileges at the Everyone level. This are the basic functional rights for all
roles and users.
Roles Shows the privileges at the role level. This allows you to set up privileges for all members
of a role.
User Shows the privileges at the user level. This allows you to set up the individual privileges.
B.2
Select the desired user or role from the Privileges of list.
This symbol indicates that the list item is a single user account.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item is an auto-generated

user account for a DICOM AET service in the network.
B.2
This symbol indicates that the list item is a role.

B.2
0.0

The explicit privileges for the selected item are marked in the
selection table. B.2
Every syngo MR application is represented by a separate side

tab, for example, PatBrowser for the Patient Browser. syngo
MR provides the tabs as described below, but during installation
at your modality site, further module tabs are added. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Please remember that the configuration of a user is also
influenced by the configuration of the role a user is
assigned. B.2
Click the application tab with the functions you want to allow
or restrict for users or roles.
0.0

B.2
NOTE
Use the double arrow at the bottom of the page to see
further application tabs. B.2
Select the check boxes on the page to set the privileges as

desired.
0.0

Archnet Archive allows to store data on storage disks or in the central network archive server.
Export allows to export data on disks or to the file system. Send allows to send data to
other network nodes. The Query/Retrieve functionality is not protected but restricted to
trusted hosts.
AuditTrail Archive allows to invoke the Audit Trail Archiving dialog box and the Audit Trail Archiving
Settings. Only users with this privilege are able to use the according menu items.
SetFilter allows to open the audit trail management and configure (filter) the events to be
logged in the audit trail. View allows to view logs. The privileges are intended for
administrators or experienced and instructed users. We recommend not to assign these
privileges to the emergency role or user.
Correct&Rearrange Correct allows to change any patient and study data. History allows to open a dialog box
for the history of changes on the data. Rearrange allows to drag data objects in the
Patient Browser.
Filming Expose allows to expose film tasks or single film sheets on a camera or to print them.
PatientBrowser Delete allows to delete data objects in the Patient Browser. ModifyPatientGroups allows
to change the patient group assigned to data (and change this way the permissions on
data access). SetStateComplete allows to set this work status on data objects.
SetStateRead allows to set this work status.SetStateVerified allows to set this work
status.
Patient InvokeRegistration allows to open the registration form and perform registration.
Registration
0.0

SecuritySystem All these privileges are important for security administrators. BypassBlockedSystem
allows logging on to a system even if the security system is blocked. At least one
administrator must have this privilege. It is also useful to grant the AuditTrail - Archive
and the SetMode privilege. Configuration_Read allows access to the security
configuration for viewing only.Configuration_ReadWrite: With this privilege, you are
able to change and store the security configuration. You also need the Configuration
privilege to do so. DesktopAccess allows to access the desktop of the Windows
operating system with the help of short cutkeys (Windows key or CTRL +ESC).
EnableServiceAccount allows to create a temporary password for the service
technician ServiceUser. InteractiveLogin allows to log on to the system to have
desktop access. We recommend to set this privilege on Everyone level for all users.
SetMode allows a user to change the security system mode. This privilege is needed for
activating security options in the Local Service Software and for bypassing a blocked
system. At least one SecurityAdmin must have this right.
UserAutoStart AllUsers allows to automatically start processes or components for all users.
SecurityConfigurationConsole is an internal privilege.
A check mark indicates that this function is allowed to the role

or user selected on top of the page. B.2
An asterisk * indicates that the changed setup on this page or

item is not saved yet.
B.2
To save the settings, click Apply.

Or B.2
Click OK to save and close the page.
0.0

Use of the Screen Saver B.2 Screen Saver B.2
You can configure a syngo MR screen saver. The screen saver

locks the workstation if there has been no mouse or keyboard
activity within a certain period. B.2
To unlock the workstation, the user has to enter the account

name and the password in the Computer locked dialog box,
which will automatically appear when the mouse is moved. B.2
The screen saver has the same effect as the Lock Computer
function. If a user logs on to a workstation again, he finds the
workstation exactly as he/she has left it. If another user logs on,
depending on the permissions, the data is closed (and unsaved
changes are lost).
B.2
Configuration B.2
The screen saver is automatically enabled during system instal-

lation. B.2
Use the Screen Saver configuration in the syngo MR - Config-

uration Panel to configure the inactivity period (time-out)
before activation. B.2
0.0

Audit trail and log files B.2
Audit Trail and Log Files B.2 The syngo MR security system has an audit trail for recording
the following actions: B.2
All user activities on sensitive data

All logins (and unsuccessful login attempts)
System shut downs, system restarts and similar events
By reviewing the audit trail, all security relevant transactions can
be reconstructed. B.2
The audit trail consists of several log files, where only one log
file is open at any one time. A new log file is created whenever
the current log file is closed. This occurs, for example, at syngo
MR startup. A new log file is also created at system restart after
a power failure. B.2
As soon as a log file reaches a certain size, it is closed. Closing

the file automatically creates a new one.
B.2
Naming of Log Files B.2 To keep the files in the correct order, a number is appended to
the file name, which is incremented with each new file: B.2
file name = <host name>_<date of creation>_<Time of cre-

ation>_<incremented number> B.2
Example: csant42_2002-04-14_10-47-28_1.xml B.2
0.0

Administration B.2 Authorized users (such as administrators) can set up the audit
trail and view, store and delete stored audit trail log files. The
files are protected against manual manipulation.
B.2
Configuration B.2 To configure the audit trail, you need to define general security
parameters, such as the trail's location and size, as well as any
transactions that are to be recorded. B.2
The setup of the audit trail consists of two different parts (and
two different configuration dialog boxes): B.2
Parameters for location, size and warning level as well as

storage parameters are set up in the Audit Trail Settings
dialog box.
Events to be recorded in the audit trail are specified in the
Audit Trail Management console.
Because the size of the audit trail increases by time, syngo MR
provides the Audit Trail Archiving dialog box to store log files
and to delete them subsequently. B.2
0.0

B.2
NOTE
You have to store the audit trail at regular intervals. Failure
to do this will cause the audit trail to fill up the disk partition,
causing the system to block until the audit trail has been
stored and removed. B.2
Please ensure that stored audit files are kept according to

national and local regulations. B.2
B.2
NOTE
The system informs the users when the size of the audit trail
exceeds the specified warning levels. It issues low level and
high level warnings by displaying colored icons in the status
bar. Any user recognizing the warning should inform the
system administrator immediately for storing the audit trail.B.2
Additionally, the resource monitor keeps track of storage capac-

ity and memory size. B.2
0.0

Time synchronization B.2 Time stamps for log file entries have to be consistent within all
log files in the audit trail. Therefore, time synchronization
between all system components is very important. B.2
If you use a network of syngo MR systems, you can establish

a special NTP (Network Time Protocol) that ensures a synchro-
nized time all over the network system. Ask the service techni-
cian to connect syngo MR to this. B.2
B.2
NOTE
You carry the responsibility for maintaining the time server.
Ensure that you set the correct time, otherwise your service
licence may become outdated. This is because the license
manager only accepts a jitter of 24 hours. When the service
licence becomes invalid, the system must be completely
reinstalled. B.2
0.0

Opening the configuration for audit trail

storing B.2
A user needs the Audit Trail > Archive privilege to configure

the storing and settings of the audit trail. B.2
Log on as administrator.
Page B.35
From any task card, choose the Options > Configuration
menu item.
The Configuration Panel appears. B.2
Double-click the Audit Trail Configuration icon.

The Audit Trail Settings dialog box appears for a guided con-
figuration of the audit trail. Depending on the archive target
selection (on the second page) you are guided through. Config-
uration pages for non-selected storage options are omitted.
Nevertheless, all configuration pages are described in the fol-
lowing. B.2
0.0

At full, the dialog box provides the following setting pages: B.2
Local Audit Trail Setup summarizes the current settings

and allows to start the guided configuration.
Select archive target for selecting the device or the location
where the audit trail is stored to. According to your selection
here you have to use the corresponding configuration tab
and the Audit Trail tab.
CD-R for setting up the CD write parameters (session type
and burn speed).
Network Share for defining the node and path for storing in
the network.
You need to know the user name and password of the person
intended to store the audit trail and the share name of the
network folder.
Audit Trail for setting up size and path parameters of the
audit trail, as well as warning levels.
0.0

Configuring the storage of the audit trail B.2
To define the parameters for the storing of the audit trail and the
common properties: B.2
Open the Audit Trail Settings dialog box.

The Local Audit Trail Setup page appears. It summarizes the
current settings. B.2
0.0

You can check the settings: B.2
B.2
Local Audit Trail This section displays the current settings for storing the logs of the audit trail.
Disk quota checks This section displays the warning levels.
Audit Trail archive This section displays the current storage settings.
target
Click the Setup button to start the configuration.

The Select Target page appears. On this page, you only select
the type of drive or the (computer) node for storing. B.2
0.0

Select where the log files of the audit trail are to be stored:
CD-R drive Selects the CD-R writer of your system for storing the audit trail. After clicking Next, you
will be guided to the CD-R page to set up the parameters.
Network Share Defines that the audit trail is to be stored on a shared folder in the network. After clicking
Next, you will be guided to the Network Share page to set up the parameters.
B.2
B.2 Click the Next button to continue.

Or B.2
B.2 Click Back to return to the previous page.

B.2
Depending on your selection, the according page for entering

the storage parameters appears. B.2
0.0

If you selected the CD-R option, the following page appears

for configuration:
0.0

Select the Session Type:
Single Session Specifies that a CD-R is written once and then closed. You cannot use it for further
storing.
Multi Session Specifies that you can store on a CD-R several times (until its capacity is full).
Finalize Select this check box to close a multi session CD-R.
B.2
Set up the drive and speed parameters.
Drive Letter Select the drive letter of the CD Recorder. Use the same drive letter as for storing
patient data on CD-R.
Burning Speed Select the speed the recorder is able to write data to CD-R. Example: Storing 200 MB
at 4x speed takes about 5 min.
Click Next to set up the common parameters of the audit trail.
0.0

To set up the network You need the server share name (not letter) and path to set up
share for storing B.2 the Network Share option. We recommend to use the Win-
dows Explorer to check the connection. B.2
If you have enabled the Network Share option in the Select

archive target page, the following page appears for configura-
tion. B.2
0.0

Enter the parameters:
User name Enter the user name for logging to the network shared folder. This user must be
allowed to write the audit trail log files at the network node. Note that this user name
can derive from the local user name that is allowed to start the audit trail storing (and
has to have at least the AuditTrail > Archive privilege).
Domain Enter either the workstation's domain or local computer name here.
Password Enter the password for the logon.
Share name Enter the server name and the path. Use the UNC convention to enter server name
and path (you cannot use drive letters).
Test Click the Test button to check if the folder is available in the network.
B.2
NOTE
The syntax for a share name is:
\\servername\sharename\[folder]: B.2
Example: \\deeparchive\archaudit_ws12\at2002 B.2
Make sure that the specified folder exists, and that it can be
written to. B.2
Click Next to set up the common parameters of the audit trail.
0.0

To set up the common After clicking the Next button on any of the configuration
parameters of the pages of the Audit Trail Settings dialog box, you reach the
audit trail B.2 Audit Trail page.
B.2
Enter the parameters to set up the path and size of the audit
trail as well as the warning levels.
0.0

B.2
AuditTrail Directory Enter the path for the folder in which the log files of the audit trail are stored. If the
path does not exist, the system creates it automatically. We recommend to use the
default path: %medhome%\log\Auditing. Keep in mind that the audit trail has to be
protected from normal users.
max. Size [KBytes] Enter or select the size of the audit trail. Default size is 1024 kBytes (=1 MByte).
When a log file reaches this size, it is closed, and a new log file is created.
Zipped Select this check box to have the audit trail automatically compressed in a ZIP file.
In the Disk quota checks area, specify the warning levels in

case the size of the audit trail uses too much of the hard
disks capacity.
Warning level % As soon as the given percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, an orange
warning icon appears in the status bar. 70-75% may be useful values (70% is the
minimum value).
Quota limit % As soon as this percentage of the hard disks capacity is reached, a red warning icon
appears in the status bar and the Audit Trail Archiver opens. Storing should be started
immediately. If the current user has no privilege to store, there is a message box
which informs the user about the situation and gives a hint what to do. 80-85% may
be useful values (80% is the minimum value).
In addition to the disc space check, there is a cyclic check of the

security system state. A blocked system (even if no disc space
limit was exceeded) also forces the Audit Trail Archiver to be
popped up. For storing in a blocked system, the user needs the
Archive and the BypassBlockedSystem privileges. B.2
0.0

B.2
NOTE
Inform the system users about what to do if audit trail
storing should be started. If the current user does not have
storage rights, the End Session dialog box calls the Log in
different user function to switch to a user account with
storage rights. B.2
Click Finish to finish the configuration.
Opening the Audit Trail Filter and Viewer B.2
Event recording and the audit trail viewer are configured in the
syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console. B.2
Only authorized users can handle the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail > View and the AuditTrail >
SetFilter privilege to open and use the syngo MR - Audit
Trail Management console.
To open this management console, choose the Options >
Audit Trail > Viewing menu item from any task card.
0.0

The syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console appears. B.2
With the Audit Filter folder, you can define the events to be
recorded. B.2
With the Audit Trail Viewer item, you can view the various log
files of the audit trail. B.2
0.0

Defining events to be recorded in the audit

trail B.2
In syngo MR, applications generate audit events at internal

function points and transactions. As an administrator, you can
select for every application which audit events result in audit
trail entries. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Note that very detailed recording can slow down system
performance. B.2
Only authorized users can set up the events to be recorded in

the audit trail. They need the AuditTrail - SetFilter privilege. B.2
0.0

B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered). B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with

the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis. B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as

described in Page B.294. Note that then the
SecuritySystem > BypassBlockedSystem and the
AuditTrail > Archive privileges are needed. B.2
Open the syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.

On the left-hand side, open the syngo MR and the Audit Fil-
ter folder.
0.0

The system displays sub-folders one for every application

audited. B.2
Click the desired application folder.

All Audit Events of that application are displayed on the right-
hand side. B.2
The actions to be recorded in the audit trail are marked. B.2
Select or clear the Audit Events as desired.

To save the settings, click Save.
0.0

The changes come into effect immediately. B.2
B.2
TIP
Click the Reset button to clear your changes. B.2
B.2
Viewing log files B.2
It is possible to view the log files at any time. B.2
Only authorized users have access to the log files of the audit
trail. They need the AuditTrail - View privilege. B.2
Open the syngo MR - Audit Trail Management console.
In the tree on the left-hand side, click the Audit Trail Viewer
item.
0.0

The audit trail viewer is displayed on the right-hand side. B.2
You must close the current log file before you can view it:
Click the New Audit Trail button.
The current log file is closed and a new log file is created imme-
diately. B.2
0.0

Browse through by using the Files to view fields and double-

click the log file (.xml or .xml.z) that you want to view.
The log files are formatted in XML. The contents of the selected
log file are displayed in the large area. The header gives gen-
eral information about the institution and log file itself. This is fol-
lowed by data recorded for every security-relevant transaction.
B.2
Filtering the Log Files for To further inspect a log file, you can apply different filters or
Viewing B.2 apply certain filter criteria. B.2
Choose the desired filters from the lists above the display
area. For example, you can filter by Action types, Function
Point IDs, Applications and Users.
In the Argument Filter criteria field, you can copy a param-
eter from the log file and initiate an exact match search.
To apply the filter, click the Refresh button.
The display area shows only the data records that meet the filter
criteria. B.2
To reset a filter, select All ... in the corresponding filter list

and click Refresh.
0.0

Storing and deleting log files B.2
The audit trail storing method defines whether the log files are
stored to a remote shared disk or CD-R.
See Page B.277 for more information. B.2
You must close the current log file before you can store it and
you must have stored a log file before you can delete it. B.2
To store or to delete audit trail log files: B.2
Only authorized users are able to store or delete the log files of
the audit trail. They need the Audit Trail Archive and Audit-
Trail Delete privileges. B.2
From any task card, choose the Options > Audit Trail >
Archiving menu item.
0.0

The Audit Trail Archiving dialog box appears. All audit trail log
files of your system are listed showing their current archive and
importance status. A green icon at the bottom left indicates that
the security system is running properly: B.2
The icon of each file indicates the status:

B.2
These files are not stored.

B.2
These files are already stored.

B.2
These files are not stored but contain important information

about data manipulation (for example, deletions). B.2
0.0

These files are stored and contain important information about

data manipulation (for example, deletions). The storage files
must be kept according to national and local regulations (for
example, 6 years).
B.2
You can delete files which are already stored. B.2
When storing to CD-R, insert a fresh CD-R, or a multi-ses-

sion CD-R from previous audit trail archiving.
For storing on network shares, the connection must be estab-
lished (use the Windows Explorer to check this).
Select the log files you want to store and click the Archive
button.
Multiple selections are possible. B.2
B.2
NOTE
Stored log files obtain the status archived and are marked
with the archived icons. B.2
The selected log files are saved to disk or to CD-R (as config-
ured). The system issues a message upon completion. B.2
0.0

Deleting stored log files B.2 You can only delete log files that have been stored. B.2
Select the log file you want to delete and click the Delete but-
ton.
The log file is deleted from the disk partition containing the audit
trail. The list is automatically updated.
B.2
What to do when the audit trail blocks the

system B.2
B.2
CAUTION
Source of danger: The system blocks when the audit trail
is filled (too many records, or too much drive space
covered). B.2
Consequence: In this case, it is not possible to work with

the system. Emergency access is also not possible. B.2
Remedy: To prevent system blockage, someone must store
the log files and remove them from the audit trail on a
regular basis. Note that the archiver needs the AuditTrail >
Archive privilege. B.2
When the audit trail blocks the system, proceed as

described in Page B.294. Note that for operating a
blocked system, additionally the SecuritySystem >
BypassBlockedSystem privilege is needed. B.2
0.0

A full audit trail blocks the entire system. Emergency access is

also not possible. You have to store the log files and empty the
audit trail before users can continue working. B.2
Only authorized users are able to store the log files of the
audit trail. They need the AuditTrail Archive privilege.
Open the Audit Trail Archiver dialog box.
Page B.275
The Audit Trail Archiver dialog box opens and lists all log files
of the audit trail with their current archive status. B.2
Store all log files and delete them from the audit trail.
Page B.294
Click the Restart button. This button is active only when the
system is blocked.
The system resumes operation. B.2
0.0

Secure transfer of data B.2
During the site-specific configuration of the local system, a ser-

vice technician sets up the connection to network nodes, cen-
tral archives, DICOM service providers and DICOM service
users. B.2
To establish a secure system, all these network partners and

services have to be reliable. B.2
One policy is to establish a trusted sites zone. A trusted zone

contains network nodes you trust-nodes that you believe you
can receive data from or send data to without worrying about
the security of computer or data. B.2
To establish a trusted zone, you must assign nodes to this zone.

Then the syngo MR security features let the system: B.2
Transfer and receive data, knowing that the computer and

confidential patient information are safe.
Only accept DICOM Query/Retrieve requests from trusted
hosts or applications. Requests from unknown workstations
or applications are rejected.
0.0

Security of Protocols B.2 For security reasons, syngo MR follows a restrictive policy con-
cerning ports and IP addresses. Data traffic through all unnec-
essary ports and addresses is blocked. Data exchange is
restricted to defined paths only. B.2
After installation all ports and addresses are blocked except

for a few basic services, such as ports for the DICOM ser-
vices.
By configuring DICOM network nodes in the Local Service
Software, the IP addresses become valid and the necessary
ports are unlocked.
If you need additional IP addresses for other reasons, you
should define them also as network nodes in the Local Ser-
vice Software to enable them.
0.0

Assigning Nodes to Your To establish a trusted zone, you must assign nodes to this
Trusted Zone B.2 zone. B.2
From any task card, choose the Options > Service > Local
Service menu item to open the Service Software window.
Navigate to the Configuration > Security > Settings page.
In the Security properties, select the Enable trusted host
functionality for your computer.
B.2
NOTE
This function must be enabled on all syngo MR
workstations with which you want to exchange data.
Additionally, it is also possible to communicate with
secured legacy systems (Secured by means of
restricted physical access). B.2
B.2
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
B.3 Information for Users B.3
Security System B.3 For security reasons, only authorized persons have access to
sensitive data, such as diagnostic images, results, or reports. B.3
syngo MR allows you to work only with the data and functions
that you have been authorized to use. All other patient data is
not visible to you and the prohibited functions are not avail-
able. B.3
B.3
NOTE
The audit trail logs all activities you perform on sensitive
data in an audit trail. This also includes your identity. B.3
Except for emergency access, you are only allowed to work
with a syngo MR workstation if you are logged into your
personal user account. B.3
The system administrator will notify you about your user

account and password. B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.31

Information for Users Safety standards in syngo MR
User management and access

control B.3
User Accounts, The syngo MR user model ensures that every user is allowed
Permissions and to access only to the data he/she is authorized to work with
Privileges B.3 (data security) and to the functions he/she is authorized to use
(functional security). B.3
How are you integrated in the syngo MR user model? B.3
The administrator created a user account for you. To work

with syngo MR, you have to log on first (password pro-
tected).
Depending on your profession and duties, you are assigned
one or several roles, for example, nurse or doctor. Privi-
leges that are associated with your roles give you the right
to access specific syngo MR functions.
Depending on the departments and/or teams you work in,
you are assigned to one or several groups. The rights on
data are granted to all members of a group by permissions.
Members of the same group have access permissions to the
same data. Users with the same roles have the same privi-
leges for executing functions. The administrator can also set
up privileges and permissions for every user individually.
It is also possible to extend the data rights for someone
beyond a group, for example for a doctor who wants a sec-
ond opinion from a colleague on another ward.
Depending on your permissions, you can manually grant
access to data that you have created to members of a group
who would otherwise not be able to access this data.
0.0

Safety standards in syngo MR Information for Users
Example: If you want to send a study of the patient Mr. Smith to

the store, you need the privilege to send data to the archive and
you also need the permission to access the study of Mr. Smith.B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.33

B.3
TIP
The user configuration depends on the security regulations
of your hospital. For questions about your rights, ask the
system administrator. B.3
If you are asked to work temporarily in another department,

for example to take over from a sick colleague, the
administrator can temporarily assign you to this group. B.3
0.0

Logging on and off B.3
To log on to a workstation, type your user name and password.

After the system has authenticated you, you get access to the
syngo MR application. B.3
B.3
NOTE
Logging off or locking a workstation does not interrupt or
abort running or queued background jobs, such as filming
images. Every background job is protocolled under the
identity of the user who initiated it. B.3
The described functions are provided in the End Session dia-

log box. To open the dialog box, use the System > End Ses-
sion menu item or press CTRL+ALT+DEL: B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.35

Lock Computer B.3
Click the Lock Computer button to lock your computer.

If you have to leave your workstation unattended for a longer
period without quitting your session, you should lock the work-
station with this function. B.3
To unlock the workstation, you have to log on again.
0.0

If you are the person who locked the workstation, you will find
your session as you left it. B.3
If another user unlocks your computer and does not have the
appropriate access rights, a warning appears. Only after explicit
confirmation, any patient data is unloaded (without saving) and
the currently active application function is terminated. B.3
B.3
NOTE
If a screen saver has been enabled on your workstation, it
is automatically activated whenever there has been no
mouse or keyboard activity for a certain period. The screen
saver has the same effect as Lock Computer. B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.37

Log off user B.3
To log off, click the Log off [user name] button.

If you have finished your work, you can log off. This ends your
session at the computer. All patient data is closed. At a new log
on, syngo MR appears in a neutral state. B.3
B.3
NOTE
irretrievably. B.3
Therefore always check whether data still needs to be

saved and save any data you want to keep before you log
off. B.3
To ensure high throughput of patients, two assistants share

modality consoles. While one assistant prepares a patient for
the examination, the other assistant sends the images from the
previous examination to the archive. Both assistants have the
same privileges and permissions. B.3
The switch user function allows them to efficiently work together

at the same console. In this way, they can alternately use the
consoles without suffering delays or losing the work of the other
user. B.3
0.0

Log different user B.3
To switch the user at your workstation, click the Log in Dif-

ferent User button.
If you share the workstation with other users, you can hand over
the workstation quickly by using the switch user function. B.3
The current user is logged off. The workstation can only be

used by the new user after logging on. B.3
B.3
NOTE
If the new user has the same (or sufficient) access rights,
the current images are not unloaded. B.3
If the new user does not have the appropriate access rights,
all patient data is unloaded and the currently active
application function is terminated. Unsaved data will be lost. B.3
If a measurement or an image calculation of a previous user
is still running in the background, the current user cannot
start his measurement until the previous users
measurement or image calculation is finished. B.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.39

Change Password B.3
To change your password, click the Change Password but-

ton.
Enter the old password for authentication, and type the new
password. Repeat the new password for verification.
The password is case sensitive. B.3
0.0

Emergency access B.3
The security policy influences the behavior in emergency

cases. Depending on the security configuration, you can log on
under the general emergency account in case of an emergency.
Ask your administrator. Account name and the necessary pass-
word are supplied by the administrator. B.3
Emergency access is very restricted. Typically, it does not allow

the modification, deletion or transfer of data. B.3
B.3
NOTE
Do not misuse the emergency access account to log on to
the system if you forget your password. B.3
Patient data acquired and processed during emergency

access must be corrected and rearranged later. As a
consequence, the data will be assigned to the user who
carries out the alteration. B.3
0.0

Failed log on B.3
You cannot change your account name, but you can change
your own password. Only administrators are allowed to change
user accounts. B.3
If you have been denied access to your workstation because

you have forgotten your user name or password proceed as fol-
lows: B.3
Ask your administrator for your current account name. The

account name is not case sensitive.
Make sure that the Caps Lock key is not accidentally set.
Bear in mind that passwords are case sensitive: W56Xrad
and w56xrad are not the same.
Re-enter your account name and password.
If this does not lead to success, ask your administrator to
give you a new password.
0.0

Protecting data from unauthorized

access B.3
Depending on your permissions, you can manually modify the

protections of data objects by using the Patient Groups. This
way, you can grant users access to data that they would other-
wise not have had. Similarly, you can deny users access to data
who had previously had it.
Page B.212 B.3
Imagine, the patient Mr. Smith is transferred from the intensive

care unit to the cardiology department. As a consequence, Mr.
Smith's data is no longer available to the staff of the intensive
care unit, but it becomes available to the staff of the cardiology
department. B.3
This is established by both removing the Patient Group inten-

sive care and assigning the Patient Group cardiology. B.3
B.3
NOTE
You can set data protections at patient or study level. Series
and images inherit protections from the patient or the study
they belong to. B.3
0.0

Select the patient or the study in the Patient Browser.

Choose the Edit > Modify Patient Groups menu item.
All patient groups available are listed in the Patient Groups dia-
log box. The groups the selected patient or study is currently
applied to are marked. B.3
Select or clear the patient groups as desired. Note that the

STANDARD patient group is a fall-back patient group. You
should not change it.
Take care that you do not unintentionally withdraw your own
access permissions. B.3
The patient groups and the access permissions to them are

defined in the syngo MR Security Configuration console.
Most commonly, the names of the patient groups indicate the
protection level. B.3
Click the Users button to view and set up the access permis-
sions of individual users.
To confirm, click OK.
The dialog box closes. The new access permissions on data
take effect immediately. B.3
0.0

Service access B.3
In order to allow service activities, users with the according priv-

ilege must grant the service technician access to the computer.
The procedure differs for the local and remote service access.
B.3
Local access B.3 Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for the
service technician for carrying out local service activities. B.3
To allow local service activities if no account is available, you

have to get the system to generate a temporary password for
the general LocalServiceUser account. This password expires
after a predefined number of days. Using this password, a ser-
vice technician can log on to the computer under the LocalSer-
viceUser user account. B.3
Usually the LocalServiceUser account is member of the syn-

goServiceUser group and role. This way, the service techni-
cian obtains permissions and privileges as determined by the
system administrator. B.3
0.0

Remote access B.3 Remote service access lets a service technician carry out
maintenance activities from a remote workstation. B.3
You start a remote service session and wait for the response
from the remote workstation. Depending on the required ser-
vice activities, you then grant the technician full or limited
access to your workstation. B.3
Full Access
Allows the service technician to take control of your worksta-
tion (which blocks it to you).
Limited Access
This mode provides access to all service functions that do
not interfere with regular patient operations.
Access to Patient Data
The service technician has no access to patient data from a
remote system. If he needs one, he will explicitly have to
request it.
Remote Application Access
No Access
Unexpected closing can cause inconsistent or inoperable sys-

tem. B.3
If you close a remote service session while the service techni-

cian is still working, all currently running service programs will
be terminated. This may result in an inconsistent or inoperable
system. B.3
The service technician will only be notified that the session is

going to be closed by you.
Ask the service technician before you close the session.
0.0

Generating a service password for local

access B.3
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for the

service technician for carrying out local service activities. B.3
If there is no personal account for the service technician avail-

able, you must get the system to generate a service password
for the general LocalServiceUser account when the service
technician needs access to your workstation. B.3
The password expires after a configurable number of days.

After that time, the password becomes invalid. You will need to
generate a new service password. B.3
As there is only one LocalServiceUser account, the system

holds just one service password at any one time. If you gener-
ate a new service password and an old one is still valid, the old
password gets overwritten. B.3
You need the EnableServiceAccess privilege to use the

Service User menu item. Otherwise you wont see it.
From any task card, choose the Options > Service > Ser-
vice User menu item.
0.0

The Set Password for the account 'LocalServiceUser' dialog

box is displayed. B.3
In the Comment field, enter the reason for a service access

and the name of the service technician.
Enter the expiry period in days.
Confirm with Apply to generate the password.
The generated password is displayed next to Assigned pass-
word. B.3
0.0

Note the password.

To end, click Close.
Keep the password confidential and pass it only to the ser-
vice technician.
B.3
NOTE
Transfer the password as securely as possible to the
service technician. Sending passwords via unencrypted e-
mail or mail is not secure! B.3
0.0

Recorded user transactions

(audit trail) B.3
Audit Trail B.3 The syngo MR security system supports tracking of the follow-
ing actions: B.3
All activities you perform on sensitive data is logged in an

audit trail, with your identity.
Unsuccessful login attempts are recorded, too.
B.3
NOTE
Important! You carry the responsibility for all transactions
that have been performed under your user account. B.3
In your own interest, lock the computer or log off when you
have finished work or when leaving the workstation
unattended for a longer period. B.3
The audit trail can be viewed by authorized personnel only. B.3
0.0

Audit Trail full? B.3 A full audit trail blocks the entire system. You cannot proceed
working. Emergency access is also not possible. B.3
When the storage space reaches the warning level, an yel-

low icon appears in the status bar of all task cards.
When the storage space reaches the quota limit, a red icon
appears in the status bar. Additionally, the system displays a
message when the audit trail exceeds a certain limit.
Clicking the red icon opens either a warning message box
if you dont have the storing privilege or the Audit Trail
Archiving dialog box provided you have the appropriate
privileges.
Do not ignore these warnings, inform your system administrator
immediately. B.3
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Information for Service
B.4 Technicians B.4
Service Access Rights B.4 For any service activities to take place, you must ask a user or
the system administrator to allow local access to the worksta-
tion. B.4
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for

carrying out local service activities.
If there is no personal account for the service technician
available, you can only access syngo with the LocalService-
User account, which provides the service account rights.
The service account is not deleted when the password
expires. For subsequent service activities, it is merely neces-
sary to request a new password.
Audit Trail B.4 All system activities affecting sensitive data are recorded in the
audit trail for later review. Each local and remote service ses-
sion leads to an entry in the audit trail. B.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.41

Information for Service Technicians Safety standards in syngo MR
Service access B.4
Different Types of Access B.4 If service personnel needs access to patient data, or the config-
uration of the system has to be changed during a remote ser-
vice session, this has to be enabled by the local user first. B.4
Remote access to the syngo MR system for service purposes

is only possible from trusted systems (a system with a proved
certificate) There is only are very small number of systems set
up for remote access. B.4
Trusted systems are systems with a certificate from a root

CA which is in the server certificate trust list (client authenti-
cation).
The use of SSL and HTTPS are mandatory for this connec-
tion.
To add certificates, the standard mechanism of the operating
system is used.
Together with the syngo MR installation, the certificate of the
root CA of the RDIAG (remote service server) is delivered.
syngo MR generates a self signed certificate, therefore, the
RDIAG is not able to identify a syngo MR system via the cer-
tificate (no server authentication).
The RDIAG server connects to syngo MR via HTTPS.
0.0

Safety standards in syngo MR Information for Service Technicians
Local access B.4
Usually, a user account with restricted rights is created for car-

rying out local service activities. B.4
To log on to syngo MR for service activities when an individual

account is not available: B.4
Ask a user or the system administrator to generate a pass-

word for the service account.
The password expires after a predefined number of days. B.4
Log on to the computer under the default service account:

LocalServiceUser.
Enter the generated password and click OK.
To open the local service software, choose the Options >
Service > Local Service menu item from any task card.
The Service Software window appears. B.4
Enter both parts of the service key necessary for the desired
service level.
The service key decides with which service level the Service
Software will open. B.4
Enter the service password.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.43

The system will check the service password. If it is valid, the

service interface appears. Depending on security configuration,
the patient data access may be enabled. B.4
B.4
NOTE
The detailed view of the Resource Monitor is only
available after you have logged on to the Service
Software. B.4
0.0

Remote access B.4
Remote access to the syngo MR system for service purposes

is only possible from trusted systems. B.4
If the remote service access is configured to be based on

SSL encryption, remote access is only possible from hosts
believed to be trusted. Certificates are exchanged and
checked. The certificate for RDIAG server is stored locally.
The protocol used is HTTPS:\\
SSL may affect the performance of the connection.
If SSL is not used, the local system can configure to allow
remote access any remote server. The protocol used is
HTTP:\\
For remote service to take place, access must be enabled on
the local system by using the Remote Service Access Control
window. B.4
To start a remote service session: B.4
Phone or ask the user to allow you remote access in the

Remote Service Access Control window.
Start your remote service session.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.45

As long as you work without access to patient information, you

will only see anonymized patient information. B.4
To execute particular service and test functions (File&Image

Tools), you need access to patient information.
The Service Software will remind you to request this access: B.4
Enter your name and click the Request button.

The request appears in the Remote Service Access Control
window of the local system. The user concerned must explicitly
confirm it. This confirmation is logged into the audit trail. B.4
B.4
NOTE
Because the Remote Service Access Control may be
closed on the local system at the time, you should call the
local user to get the confirmation. B.4
0.0

Backup & restore B.4
To avoid the loss of configuration data, ask the service techni-

cian to back up the system. B.4
Backups and restores are done within the Service Software

package of syngo MR. B.4
Update/Upgrade B.4 An update is a patch within a version. A software upgrade

replaces a version with a newer one. B.4
B.4
NOTE
Do not forget to store the audit trail before software update
or upgrade. The audit trail has to be saved separately. The
backup and restore functionality under Local Service does
not store the audit trail. B.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T B.47

0.0

PART Managing and Adjusting
C the System C.0
C.1 System Manager

Using the image control system and syngo MR ............. C.12
Shutting down the entire system ............................... C.13
Shutting down and rebooting the
image control system ................................................. C.15
Closing syngo MR and rebooting .............................. C.16
Forced shutdown/reboot ............................................ C.18
Handling applications ................................................ C.19
Locking the computer .............................................. C.111
Logging off ............................................................... C.112
Logging on a new user ............................................ C.113
Changing your password ......................................... C.114
Monitoring the image reconstruction system ............... C.115
Rebooting the image reconstruction system ........... C.116
Shutting down and rebooting components .............. C.117
Controlling the MR scanner ......................................... C.119
Rebooting the operating system .............................. C.121
Switching the Power Supply to Standby .................. C.121
Tools ............................................................................ C.124
Gathering diagnostic information ............................. C.125
Displaying changed files .......................................... C.126
Displaying system information ..................................... C.127
General system information ..................................... C.127
Information about the system .................................. C.129
Drive and database information ............................... C.130
Network information ................................................. C.133
Displaying patents ................................................... C.135
Updating the display ................................................ C.136
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C1
Contents Managing and Adjusting the System
C.2 Adjusting the System

Configuring automatic adjustment .................................. C.22
Adapting the adjustment volume ................................ C.27
Automatic sequence of adjustment steps ..................... C.219
Manual adjustment ....................................................... C.221
Optimizing the frequency ......................................... C.223
Transmitter adjustment ............................................ C.233
3D Shim ................................................................... C.239
Interactive shim ........................................................ C.248
Manual water suppression ....................................... C.256
Undoing changes ..................................................... C.263
Completing adjustment ............................................ C.263
Starting protocol adjustments manually ................... C.264
Changing the resonance frequency
after inline adjustment .............................................. C.265
Displaying adjustment results ....................................... C.270
Selecting Parameters for Display ............................. C.272
0.0
C2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
C.1 System Manager C.1
Your MR system consists of various components: The main

component is the MR scanner located in the examination room.
Next to it are the image reconstruction system and the console
for operating syngo MR. As an option, you may also use a sat-
ellite console. C.1
These components comprise your MR system. The syngo MR

System Manager is a module that allows you to monitor, as
well as start and stop the individual components of the scan
system. C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.11

System Manager Managing and Adjusting the System
Using the image control system

and syngo MR C.1
You control and operate your MR system from the console

using the syngo MR program which runs on the Windows XP
operating system. The syngo MR program consists of different
applications, such as image processing or 3D. You may some-
times find that one or more applications no longer respond, i.e.
your commands are not accepted. If this happens, you may
close these applications separately without having to shut down
syngo MR or the operating system. C.1
Select System > Control from the main menu.

The System Manager dialog box opens. C.1
Click the Host card.
0.0
C.12 Operator Manual

Managing and Adjusting the System System Manager
Shutting down the entire system C.1
You can shut down the entire system at once (the console, the
MR scanner, and the image reconstruction system), for exam-
ple, at the end of the day or to disconnect the system from the
power supply for service work or reinitialization of the hardware
and software. C.1
Select System > End Session from the main menu.

The End Session dialog box opens. C.1
Click the Shutdown System button.

Or C.1
Click the Shutdown All button in the System Manager/

Host card.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.13

The Confirm Action dialog window opens. C.1
Click the Yes button.
Or click No to cancel the operation. The system does not shut

down.
Once you have closed down all programs and the operating
system, you have to switch off the components of the scan
system from the alarm box. That is the only way to ensure that
the image reconstruction system will start when you restart
the system.
see System Manual
0.0

Shutting down and rebooting the image

control system C.1
An error in the operating system or in syngo MR may mean that

you have to shut down the console only. The other components
of the system such as the MR scanner are not affected. C.1
Click the Reboot button in the System Manager.

Or C.1

Click the Restart System button.

syngo MR and the operating system are shut down and then
automatically rebooted. C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.15

Closing syngo MR and rebooting C.1
You may have to close syngo MR if it no longer responds. You

may then restart it automatically. C.1
Just click the Restart syngo MR button in the System Man-

ager.
Or C.1

Click the Restart Application button.
0.0

The program syngo MR and the operating system were shut

down. In case Auto-Login is active, all processes will be started
again. C.1
Without Auto-Login, the user has to register again prior to boot-

ing the system (e.g. as "user xy"). C.1
When the safety package is active, the user has to register

again prior to booting the system. C.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.17

Forced shutdown/reboot C.1
If errors occur in the operating system or in the syngo MR appli-

cation, you may respond either by properly shutting down the
software or forcing the system to shut down. Following a forced
shutdown, the system will be operational again in a short time.C.1
Select the Forced Mode option in the system manager.
Click the Reboot button on the System Manager/Host card.
Or C.1
Click the Shutdown All button in the System Manager/Host

card.
Or C.1
Click the Restart syngo MR button in the System Manager/

Host card.
The system shuts down. C.1
C.1
C AU T I O N
After a forced system shut down, all unsaved data and
unfinished filming or storage jobs will be lost. All
background activities are forced to terminate. C.1
0.0

Handling applications C.1
syngo MR includes a series of applications that may be started

and closed individually. C.1
The syngo MR applications that run on your main console are

listed under Application Name in the System Manager. C.1
The status of each application is also displayed: C.1
running
The application is in progress.
not running
The application is not running.
undefined
The application status has not been received shortly after
starting the system manager.
not responding
It is not possible to communicate with this software compo-
nent.
unknown name
Certain components of the application are not available.
stop in progress
The application is being shut down.
startup in progress
The application is being started up.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.19

Stopping an application C.1 You may stop an individual application (e.g. the 3D module) to
save memory space. C.1
Select the application from the list.

Then click the Stop Application button.
Initially, the application shows the status stop in progress.

Then it changes to status not running.
The Activity Progress window shows you how far the selected
action has progressed. The progress bar allows you to monitor
the progress of actions that take a long time.
C.1
Starting an application C.1 You may explicitly start applications that you have stopped or
that do not start automatically. C.1

Click the Start Application button.
Initially, the application shows the status start up in

progress, and then running, once the application is running.
Restarting an application C.1 You can shut down and restart applications, e.g. if they are no
longer responding. C.1

Click the Restart Applications button.
0.0

Locking the computer C.1
If you have to leave the workstation for a short time, you can
protect the data on the computer from unauthorized access
without having to log off. C.1
This function is available only if the syngo security system is

activated on your system.

The End Session dialog box opens.
C.1
Click the Lock Computer button.
A login window opens. It hides the user interface of the pro-

gram. C.1
When you want to resume work on the workstation, you only

need to log on again. C.1
You will find detailed information about logging on and off in

syngo MR and about access rights in general in Part Safety
Standards.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.111

Logging off C.1
When you have finished working with the system, you must log
off. C.1

C.1
Click the [user name] Logoff button.
C.1
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost. C.1
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off. C.1
A logoff window opens. Opened patient data are unloaded. It

hides the user interface of the program. C.1
Another user can now log onto the system. C.1

syngo MR and about access rights in general in the Safety
Standards part.
0.0

Logging on a new user C.1
A new user can log onto the system even if the current user has
not logged off. C.1


C.1
Click the Log on new user button.
A login window opens. It hides the user interface of the pro-

gram. C.1
Enter a new user name in the dialog box.

If you have the same user rights as the previous user, you can
work with the loaded data again. If you have fewer rights, the
data used by the previous user will be unloaded.
Standards part.
0.0

Changing your password C.1
You can change your password in an input dialog box. C.1


C.1
Click the Change Password button.
An input dialog box is displayed. C.1
Enter the old password in the first field for authentification.

Enter the new password in the next field. Repeat the new
password in the third input field for checking.
Upper and lower case letters are treated as different characters.C.1
Standards part.
0.0

Monitoring the image

reconstruction system C.1
The raw data supplied by the scan system are reconstructed by

the image reconstruction system. Like the image control sys-
tem, you can also close down and restart this system, for exam-
ple, if a fault occurs. C.1
Together with the MR Scanner the image processor can be

switched to standby.
Page C.121, Switching the Power Supply to Standby

Go to the Image Reconstr. System card.
0.0

Displaying the status of the The status bar of the system contains an icon indicating the sta-
image reconstruction tus of the image reconstruction system:
system C.1 C.1
Status: The image reconstruction system is ready.

C.1
If the image reconstruction system is not ready, the icon has a

red line through it. C.1
The image processor may be in the standby mode (not volt-

age supply).
Double-clicking on the icon opens a dialog box with an expla-
nation.
Rebooting the image reconstruction system C.1
In the event of a fault, you can shut down and reboot the entire
image reconstruction system.
C.1
Click the Reboot button.
The image reconstruction system will be shut down and reboo-

ted. It is not possible to operate it again until the status of the
monitored applications switches from not running to running.C.1
0.0

Shutting down and rebooting components C.1
The Component Control window of the Image Reconstr. Sys-

tem card shows which software components of the image
reconstruction system are running and what status they have.C.1
If a software error occurs during scanning or image reconstruc-
tion, you may restart the components of the image reconstruc-
tion system separately.
C.1
Restarting software If errors occur during image calculation, all software compo-
components C.1 nents running on the image reconstruction system, except the
Peripherie Server (peripheral server), will be shut down and
restarted.
C.1
Click the Restart Image Calculation button.
The Activity Progress window shows how long it will take to

shut down and restart the software components. C.1
The system is ready for scanning again once the components

of the image reconstruction system have restarted. C.1
The status of the Peripherie Server (peripheral server) com-

ponent must be running while the software components
restart.
0.0

Restarting the Peripherie The Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component estab-
Server (peripheral server) lishes the connection with the MR scanner and is restarted sep-
component C.1 arately.
C.1
Click the Restart Peripherie Server button.
The Peripherie Server (peripheral server) component is shut

down and restarted. C.1
The status of the image calculation components stays running.C.1

Shutting down and restarting the Peripherie Server (periph-
eral server) component of the image reconstruction compo-
nent takes longer than restarting the image calculation com-
ponents.
0.0

Controlling the MR scanner C.1
The computer system of the MR scanner also has an operating

system. You can display the current status of individual compo-
nents of the MR scanner and switch the power supply on and
off. C.1

Go to the MR Scanner card and click it in foreground.
0.0

Operating status of the All the components of the MR scanner are listed under Compo-
individual components C.1 nent Name. C.1
The current status of the components (ok or not ok) is shown

in the State column. C.1
OK Not OK
The list is updated automatically. The MR scanner is not
always online while it is rebooting. Therefore, it is not possible
to display the status of scanner components during booting.
During this time, the MR Scanner window shows the mes-
sage "The Scanner is not online".
Helium fill level C.1 C.1
The helium fill level is shown below the list on the MR Scanner
card. The display is in % (percentages).
C.1
Status of the MR scanner C.1 The status of the MR scanner is shown both on the
MR Scanner subtask card and on the status bar of the system.
C.1
Status: MR scanner is ready.

C.1
If the MR scanner is not online or is booting, the icon has a red

line through it. C.1
0.0

Rebooting the operating system C.1
If an error occurs in the operating system of the MR scanner

during operation, you can eliminate the error by shutting down
and rebooting the operating system.
C.1
Click the Reboot button.
Switching the Power Supply to Standby C.1
Switching the MR scanner If you do not intend to perform scans for a longer period of time
and image processor to or only want to process or evaluate images on the console, you
standby C.1 can save energy by switching off the voltage supply to the MR
Scanners and image processor.
C.1
Click the Stand By button.

Or C.1
Switch the scanner and image processor to standby via the

Alarm Box.
C.1
NOTE
After switch-over to standby, it is not possible to start a new
scan. C.1
0.0

If the image processor no longer contains jobs in the job list, it

is immediately switched to standby. Subsequently, the
MR Scanner is switched to standby as well. C.1
However, if the image processor still has jobs in the job list, it
may not be possible to immediately end these jobs. C.1
In this case, the dialog SystemManager - Scanner StandBy

appears: C.1
This dialog allows you to determine whether and how the image
processor should be shut down. C.1
0.0

C.1
Option Consequences
Proceed The image processor is shut down only after calculating the
current image processor jobs. This may take several
minutes. There is no associated loss in data. The dialog box
is closed and cannot be called up again.
Cancel Shut-down of the image processor is stopped.
End Now The image calculation in progress is ended immediately.
Data may be lost in this case.
Click the button for the desired option.

Shut-down of the image processor is displayed via various
status messages.
Switching the power If your MR scanner is in Stand By mode, you can switch on the
supply on again C.1 power supply again to resume scanning.
C.1
Click the System On button.
You can also switch the power supply of the MR scanner on

or off in the alarm box.
see System Manual
0.0

Tools C.1
The Tools card is used to acquire diagnostic information or

check important system files. C.1

Go to the Tools card.
0.0

Gathering diagnostic information C.1
If a software error occurs during scanning, it is recommended

to create a "MrSaveLog" file immediately. It contains valuable
diagnostic information.
C.1
Click the Save System Log-Files button.
The "MrSaveLog" file is created. It contains all diagnostic infor-

mation valid at the time the error occurred. It is stored in the
C:\MedCom\MriDiagnostic folder as a ZIP file. Siemens Service
will be able to use the ZIP file for subsequent analysis. C.1
The diagnostic information it contains can be used to help

locate the error.
0.0

Displaying changed files C.1
The most important system files are checked every time the
system boots.
C.1
Click the View Consistency Log button.
The "MrConsistency-Checker" checks the system files for

changes every time the system boots. The result is saved in a
log file. You can view the content of this file in the Sup-
port&Diagnostic Tools window by clicking the View Consis-
tency Log button. C.1
Never install additional software on the system. Installation

could replace existing system files and impair the scanning
capability of the system.
C.1
0.0

Displaying system information C.1
syngo MR also displays information about your scan system.

This includes information regarding memory capacity as well as
memory still available.
C.1
General system information C.1
General system information is required, e.g. when you contact

Siemens Service regarding problems. Problems can be solved
more quickly if you specify the serial number of the system and
the software version. C.1
Select Help > Info ... from the main menu.

The Info ... dialog window opens. C.1
Go to the General card.
0.0

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Product name

(2) Series number
(3) Software used
(4) Software version
(5) Software name
(6) Information about license holder; name, hospital or prac-
tice, and product identification number (product ID)
0.0

Information about the system C.1
The System card provides further information about your scan

system. Here, you will find information about hardware and soft-
ware options (e.g. cameras and printers) as well as the coils
currently available. C.1

Go to the System card.
0.0

Drive and database information C.1
The Disk/Database card displays the drives and hard disks

currently connected, including information about the capacity
and free space still available. It also displays how much space
is available in terms of images. C.1

Go to the Disk/Database card.
0.0

Displaying the drives C.1 The Disk list displays all physical (e.g. CD-ROM) and logical
(e.g. network drives) drives. The capacity and free space still
available is listed next to them. C.1
The following information about these drives is displayed: C.1
drive letter, e.g. diskette drive A

type of drive, e.g. CD-ROM
logical name of the hard disk
name of computer to which memory medium is connected
manufacturer of the memory medium
capacity of the memory medium (in MB)
free space available in MB
0.0

Displaying the databases C.1 The Database list contains all local databases that contain
header as well as pixel data. C.1
You are also told how many images can still be stored for each
matrix. C.1
The following information is displayed: C.1
Name of the database

Number of images 256 256 matrix images that can still be
stored
Number of images 512 512 matrix images that can still be
stored
Free space in the database partition for header data (in kB)
Free space in the pixel data partition (in kB)
0.0

Network information C.1
If your console or satellite console is connected to a network,

you may view network-specific information on the Network
card. C.1

Go to the Network card.
0.0

Updating the network If the dialog window has been open for a while, you may refresh
display C.1 the network information display.
C.1
Click the Refresh Network State button.
0.0

Displaying patents C.1
The Patents card lists all the patents used by syngo MR. C.1

Go to the Patents card.
0.0

Updating the display C.1
If the Info... dialog window has been open for a while, you may
refresh the data displayed.
C.1
Just click the Refresh button.
The button is only active if you have selected the System,

Disk/Database, or Network card.
0.0

CHAPTER
C.2 Adjusting the System C.2
To consistently obtain high-quality images, it is important to

adjust the scan protocol prior to each protocol. For this purpose,
individual settings are available which perform automatic
adjustments before each protocol. C.2
However, manual adjustment of the scan system is sometimes

required for special scanning methods such as spectroscopy. C.2
With shimming you compensate for inhomogeneities of the
magnetic field. C.2
An adjustment volume is defined for each protocol. Most adjust-

ments refer to this volume, which you may display during
graphic slice positioning. You may change it there or on the
System parameter card, as required.
Page C.27, Adapting the adjustment volume C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.21

Adjusting the System Managing and Adjusting the System
Configuring automatic adjustment C.2
Automatic adjustment of the system is performed prior to each

scan. In most cases, it is not necessary to change the settings
during routine operation. You can check these parameters, but
you should normally not modify them.
C.2
Opening a protocol C.2 It is only possible to view the parameters of a protocol if it is

open. C.2
Select a protocol in the program control.

Click the Open button or double-click the selected program.
The protocol opens and the specific parameters are displayed.
C.2
You may view and edit (if required) the automatic adjustment
parameters on the System parameter card. C.2
Go to the System parameter card.
C.2
NOTE
All system adjustment settings made on the System
parameter card only apply to the protocol currently open. C.2
0.0

Managing and Adjusting the System Adjusting the System
Settings on the Go to the Adjustments card.

Adjustments card C.2
(1) Select shim mode

(2) Perform adjustments with the body coil
(3) Change the resonance frequency
(4) Adjustment in silicone mode
(5) Changing the reference amplitude
(6) Geometry of the adjustment volume
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.23

Setting shim mode C.2 For the 3D-shim, up to three settings are available per protocol
depending on the various scanning requirements: C.2
Tune-up; neither adjustment scans nor evaluations are nec-

essary. The system uses the values set during system tune-
up by Siemens Service. This setting is sufficient for normal
imaging protocols without special requirements.
Standard; Adjustment scanning and evaluation are per-
formed in standard mode. This mode is suitable for imaging
protocols with special requirements, for example, for fat sat-
uration or EPI.
Advanced; Adjustment scans and evaluation are performed
in advanced mode. This mode is mainly used for spectros-
copy protocols. Advanced mode is time consuming and is
only necessary for scans that place the greatest demands on
the homogeneity of the magnetic field.
Each protocol is preset to the mode required for optimum image

quality. C.2
Select a shim mode from the list.
It is also possible to use the manual interactive shimming

method, independent of this protocol setting.
Page C.248, Interactive shim C.2
0.0

Performing adjustments Normally, all adjustments are performed using the coil elements
with the body coil C.2 defined in each protocol and used during subsequent imaging.
You may also perform the adjustment measurements using the
body coil only. This method saves time, since it is not necessary
to make readjustments after changing the selection of coil ele-
ments. C.2
Click the Adjust with body coil option.

For spectroscopy protocols, it is not possible to perform
adjustments using the body coil.
Confirming or changing the After an inline adjustment, you may pause the system and
resonance frequency C.2 accept or change the resonant frequency. C.2
Click the Confirm freq. adjustment checkbox.

Page C.265, Changing the resonance frequency after
inline adjustment
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.25

Adjustment in silicone The Assume Silicone option optimizes scanning for patients
mode C.2 with silicone implants. C.2
Click the Assume Silicone checkbox.
Changing the reference The TxRef/Ref display field shows a list of reference ampli-
amplitude C.2 tudes for the selected primary or secondary nucleus. C.2
Enter new values for the reference amplitude.

All manually modified values are marked with an exclamation
point ("!") and will be ignored during the next optimization. C.2
You can undo your manual settings at any time. C.2
Click the Reset button on the Transmitter/Receiver param-

eter card.
The automatically calculated values are now displayed again.C.2
0.0

Adapting the adjustment volume C.2
A localized volume, the adjustment volume, is defined for each

protocol for tuning the transmitter and receiver. The adjustment
volume defines the space in the magnet for which the parame-
ters will be optimized. It is determined automatically but may
also be adjusted manually.
C.2
Imaging protocols C.2 The default setting of the adjustment volume depends on the
slices and slabs. In most cases, an orthogonal cuboid com-
pletely encloses the slices or slabs to be measured.
C.2
Spectroscopy protocols C.2 Here, the adjustment volume is equivalent to the VOI.
C.2
C.2
NOTE
Protocols that do not require shim adjustment
measurements (e.g. tune-up mode) or water suppression
adjustment use a fixed adjustment volume in the form of a
large central cuboid.
This saves time since readjustment is not necessary after
slice positioning.
Of course, you may also manually adapt the adjustment
volume at any time. C.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.27

Editing the adjustment During graphic slice positioning, you may display the adjust-
volume graphically C.2 ment volume as an additional graphic object in the reference
images. C.2
Click this button on the Position Toolbar.

The adjustment volume is shown as a green rectangle in each
reference image and may now be edited graphically. C.2
0.0

Adjustment volume To enlarge/minimize you must first select the adjustment vol-
selecting C.2 ume. C.2
Click the contour line of the adjustment volume.

The adjustment volume turns bright green. The center and
resizing handles are displayed. C.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Resizing handles/contour line

(2) Contour line
(3) Center for moving
0.0
syngo MR 2006T C.29

Moving the adjustment Place the mouse pointer on the center of the adjustment vol-
volume C.2 ume.
The mouse pointer changes shape. C.2
Press the left mouse button and drag the adjustment volume
to its new position.
Or C.2
Place the mouse pointer on a contour line or a handle, press

the Shift key and left mouse button, and drag the adjustment
volume to its new position.
0.0

Resizing the adjustment Click a contour line of the adjustment volume if the handles
volume C.2 of the adjustment volume are not yet visible.
Place the mouse pointer on one of the handles.
Press and hold the left mouse button while dragging the han-
dle in the desired direction.
The size of the adjustment volume is increased/decreased
symmetrically. C.2
The center of the adjustment volume remains unchanged.

C.2
To change the size of the adjustment volume asymmetrically,

i.e. increase/decrease its size in only one direction: C.2
Also press the Alt key while performing the steps described
above.
The center of the adjustment volume is moved accordingly. C.2
0.0

Rotating the adjustment The volume element may be rotated about its center point. The
volume C.2 rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image. C.2
Place the mouse pointer on the contour line of the adjust-
ment volume, but not on a handle.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the contour line of
the volume element in the desired direction.
The adjustment volume may only be rotated about the center in
one spatial direction.
C.2
Tilting the adjustment The volume element can be tilted about an axis that runs paral-
volume C.2 lel to the reference image and through the center point. C.2
Press the Alt key and drag the contour line in the required
direction.
The tilting axis is perpendicular to the movement of the
mouse. C.2
0.0

Adjustment volume Free rotation of the adjustment volume is a combination of rota-

rotating freely C.2 tion and tilting and is supported in all three spatial directions. C.2
Click a contour line of the adjustment volume if the adjust-
ment volume handles are not yet visible.
Press the Ctrl key and drag a handle or a contour line.
Drag the adjustment volume tangentially towards the adjust-
ment volume to rotate it.
Or C.2
Perform a radial movement (radiating away from or toward

the center) to tilt the adjustment volume.
tangential movement radial movement
The rotational axis runs through the center of the volume ele-
ment and is perpendicular to the reference image. C.2
0.0

Adjustment volume To set the adjustment volume with millimeter precision, you may
set numerically C.2 also enter the parameters numerically. The respective input
fields are located on the Adjustment subtask card of the Sys-
tem parameter card.
C.2
To manually set the adjustment volume, first select an orien-

tation.
Or C.2
Enter an orientation in the Orientation dialog box.
The Position field displays the current position of the adjust-

ment volume. C.2
Enter a new position for the adjustment volume in the Posi-

tion dialog box.
Page F.523, Geometry parameter card
Enter the angle for rotating the adjustment volume in the

Rotation spin box.
Enter the edge length of the adjustment volume in the A >> P

(anterior/posterior) direction.
Enter the edge length of the adjustment volume in the F >> H

direction (feet/head).
0.0

Finally, enter a translation of the edge length of the adjust-

ment volume in the R >> L direction (right to left).
Applying the settings C.2 To apply the settings simply press the Return key after
numeric input.
Or C.2
Click the image area with the mouse to update the graphic
display.
Settings Click Reset to reactivate automatic calculation of the adjust-

the warning signal C.2 ment volume.
The exclamation points are now hidden. C.2
0.0

Adjustment parameter The System Transmitter/Receiver parameter card shows the

display in the protocol C.2 results of the last successful automatic adjustment. C.2
Click the tab of the System card to move it into foreground.

Click the Transmitter/Receiver card into foreground.
(1) (5)
(2)
(3)
(6)
(4)
(1) Display system frequency

(2) Display reference amplitude
(3) Display the correction factor for water suppression
(4) Amplitude of the RF pulses used in the protocol
(5) Receiver gain
(6) FFT scale factors of the individual images from each coil
element
0.0

The left side of the parameter card displays the values of the
last successful transmitter tuning: C.2
the MR system frequency under Frequency

the pulse amplitude calibration under Ref. amplitude
the factor for water suppression under Correction factor
All pulse amplitudes are calculated from the reference ampli-

tude and, if necessary, the correction factor. C.2
This parameter card also allows you to overwrite the automati-

cally corrected pulse amplitudes by entering new values.
C.2
The right side of the Transmitter/Receiver parameter card

shows the values for the receiver gain automatically calculated
by the system: C.2
the gain level of the receiver

the FFT scale factors for the individual images of each coil
element
Here too, you have the option of overwriting the automatically

calculated values by entering new values. C.2
0.0

Undoing changes C.2 All manually changed values and settings are marked by an
exclamation point ("!"). C.2
You can undo your manual settings at any time. C.2
Click the Reset button on the Transmitter/Receiver param-

eter card.
The automatically calculated values are now displayed again.C.2
0.0

Automatic sequence of adjustment

steps C.2
Special adjustments are performed automatically for each pro-

tocol. To avoid having to perform a complete adjustment each
time, the system checks the adjustment status and uses adjust-
ment results from a previously scanned protocol, if possible. C.2
The results can normally only be applied if the following param-
eters of the two protocols remain unchanged: C.2
the table position

the coil elements used
the shim mode (standard/advanced/tune-up)
the adjustment volume
Dependencies between When adjusting the system, the sequence of adjustment oper-
adjustments C.2 ations is important since some adjustments may invalidate the
results of previously performed adjustments. After 3D-shim, for
example, frequency adjustment is automatically performed
again because changing the magnetic field causes the system
frequency to change.
These dependencies are always taken into account by auto-
matic adjustments. C.2
0.0

Validity of the adjustment The adjustment parameters obtained after successful adjust-
parameters obtained C.2 ment may be used for further protocols. They become invalid in
the following cases: C.2
a new patient is registered

the parameters are invalidated explicitly
Page C.271, Rejecting all adjustment results
the coils on the patient table are changed
As already mentioned, dependency on the coil elements can be

avoided by selecting Adjust with body coil. The dependency
on the adjustment volume may be avoided via the shim mode
tune-up without water suppression.
Page C.23, Settings on the Adjustments card C.2
This reduces the number of adjustment steps and saves time.C.2
0.0

Manual adjustment C.2
Manual adjustments must only be performed by experienced

users and are mainly intended for test purposes, error analysis,
or for special applications such as spectroscopy. C.2
The following adjustment options are available: C.2
Optimizing the resonance frequency

3D shim and interactive shim
Tuning the transmitter
Optimizing water suppression
Interactive shimming may only be performed manually.

The number of adjustment options available depends on your
system.
C.2
NOTE
Manual adjustment of the system should only be performed
by experienced users and should not be performed during
routine operation. C.2
0.0

Opening a protocol C.2 Open the protocol that requires manual adjustment. C.2
Click the Open button in the program control or double-click

the entry.
The protocol-specific parameters are displayed on the parame-
ter cards.
C.2
The individual steps of manual adjustment are described

below. C.2
0.0

Optimizing the frequency C.2
When optimizing the frequency, you may determine the exact

proton resonant frequency. For this purpose, you may enter var-
ious parameters and accept the frequency calculated for the
scan system following adjustment. The results are first trans-
ferred from the time domain into the frequency domain via Fou-
rier transform. The resonance frequency of the water protons is
calculated from the peak position of the water.
C.2
Preparing for adjustment C.2 Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Frequency
card.
0.0

(1)
(6)
(2) (7)
(8)
(3) (9)
(10)
(4)
(11)
(5) (12)
(1) Numeric results

(2) Real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
(3) Imaginary part of the measurement signal in the time
domain
(4) Amplitude in the frequency domain
(5) Phase in the frequency domain
(6) Temporary transmit frequency
(7) Display of system transmit frequency
(8) Transmit amplitude
(9) Sequence and resolution
(10) Receiver gain
(11) Selection of the coil measurement signal for graphic dis-
play
(12) Specific display when entering frequency or amplitude
0.0

Certain parameters have to be entered prior to performing the

frequency adjustment.
C.2
Entering the frequency C.2 A different transmit frequency may be used for each iteration. C.2
You can enter a new transmitter frequency in the Frequency

(temp) input field.
You can also determine the frequency graphically and trans-
fer it to the input field.
Page C.230, Transferring the frequency
The frequency currently used is displayed in the field under-

neath for comparison. C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only

used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.
0.0

Amplitude C.2
You can enter the transmit amplitude to be used for the scan.
Range display C.2 You can use the range display to verify whether your inputs for
the frequency and amplitude are correct. You have to correct
them if they are out of range. C.2
When you enter the amplitude, the labeling of the range dis-
play is modified accordingly. It will then show the amplitude
values.
0.0

Sequence and resolution C.2 The following options are available: C.2
Broadband not volume-selective (FID 400 Hz)

Narrowband not volume-selective (FID 10 Hz)
Narrowband volume-selective (STEAM 10 Hz)
If the frequency lies outside the narrowband standard range (no

resonance line in the spectrum), it is recommended to search a
wide frequency band first to limit the frequency. To subse-
quently adjust the transmit frequency, you will have to work with
a narrow frequency band. C.2
Following each non-volume-selective adjustment scan, it is

necessary to perform at least one volume-selective adjust-
ment.
Select a sequence and resolution from the list.
0.0

Selecting the gain C.2 You may set the receive gain to match the intensity of the mea-
sured signal. C.2
Click the Low button if the receive signal is strong.

Or C.2
Click the High button if the receive signal is weak.

If necessary, the system will adjust this setting automatically.
Starting to scan C.2 After you have entered all parameters, you can start the adjust-
ment. C.2
Click the Go button.
Canceling the
measurement C.2
Click the Abort button to cancel an adjustment scan in

progress.
0.0

Results display C.2 The results are displayed both numerically and graphically.
C.2
Numeric results C.2 The results are listed below the running numbers. The following
parameters are displayed: C.2
No.; running number of the measurement

Freq. [MHz]; transmit frequency in MHz
Ampl. [V]; transmit amplitude of the adjustment measure-
ment
Pos.; position of the largest "peak" of the amplitude in the
frequency domain (in units of the signal graph)
Diff [Hz]; Difference between the transmit frequency and the
calculated "better" frequency
C.freq. [MHz]; calculated, "better" frequency
A.; transmit frequency successfully adjusted (Yes/No)
0.0

Graphic results C.2 The results are displayed graphically in both the time and the
frequency domain. The maximum values of the raw data set are
displayed numerically in the graphics. C.2
If available, the "resonance peak" is highlighted.

C.2
Vertical marker C.2 A vertical marker is shown when you position the mouse pointer
inside the graphic display of the frequency domain. It indicates
the delta frequency of the calculated resonance frequency. If no
peak was detected during the adjustment, the absolute fre-
quency is indicated instead. C.2
The position of the resonance frequency is indicated by a

small line at the top of the graphic.
Transferring the You may select a frequency graphically by moving the vertical
frequency C.2 marker. C.2
Just left-click the line.

The frequency is entered in the Frequency (temp) field. C.2
0.0

Inverting the frequency A context menu is available when the mouse pointer is posi-
axis and zooming the tioned inside the graphic display of the frequency domain. C.2
graphic C.2
You can invert the default display of all frequency axes (from left
to right) or zoom into the detected peak. If no peak is available,
the program zooms into the center of the graphic. C.2
When you select a new patient, the default display of the fre-
quency axes is restored. Any zoom applied is reset when you
perform a new measurement.
0.0

Receive channel The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local
selecting C.2 coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
(Coil) and the connector (Con.) are displayed in the selection
list. C.2
The Combined entry is used to select the combined signal of

all coils selected.
Select the receive channel whose signal you want displayed.
Accepting the frequency After successful adjustment "Y" in the numeric result field), the
for the measurement frequency is automatically loaded in the scan system. This may
system C.2 require several iterations.
C.2
Manual acceptance You may correct the frequency manually if the system cannot
without successful detect the correct frequency, e.g. due to the proximity of the res-
adjustment C.2 onance signals.
C.2
Enter a value in the Frequency spin box.

Or C.2
Accept the frequency graphically using the vertical marker.
Click the Apply button in the Manual adjustments dialog

box.
This frequency is then used as the system frequency for subse-
quent scans. C.2
0.0

Transmitter adjustment C.2
Transmitter adjustment is used for calibration of the transmitter.

The reference amplitude is continuously varied until the spins
are rotated 180 (flip angle) by the RF pulse. Two echoes are
generated, one normal echo and one stimulated echo. The
magnitude and the phase relation of both echoes is directly
related to the targeted flip angle.
C.2
Preparing for adjustment C.2 Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Transmitter
card.
0.0

(1)
(2) (7)
(8)
(3)
(9)
(4)
(10)
(5) (11)
(6) (12)
(1) Displaying numeric results

(2) Normal echo (Echo 1) and stimulated echo (Echo 2)
(4) Imaginary part of the measurement signal in the time
domain
(5) Amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
(6) Phase of the measurement signal in the frequency domain
(7) Enter the temporary reference amplitude
(8) System reference amplitude
(9) Start amplitude
(10) Receiver gain
play
(12) Range display
0.0

Transmitter calibration involves performing scans, each with a

slightly different reference amplitude.
C.2
Entering the amplitude C.2
For each scan, you can enter a new reference amplitude in

the Amplitude (temp) spin box.
For comparison, the amplitude currently used by the system is
displayed below. C.2
The temporary amplitude that you enter is only used for

adjustment scans. The system amplitude is used for exami-
nations.
Start amplitude C.2 The Start amplitude text field shows the amplitude value (spe-
cific parameter of the transmitter coil) used for the first iteration.C.2
0.0

Range display C.2 The range displayed shows the range available for the refer-
ence amplitude. If your entry is outside the range, you have to
correct it accordingly. C.2
Selecting the gain C.2 You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
Page C.228, Selecting the gain
C.2
ment. C.2
Canceling the
measurement C.2

progress.
0.0

Results display C.2 The results are displayed both numerically and graphically.
C.2
Numeric results C.2 The results are listed below the running number of the iteration.
The following parameters are displayed: C.2
No.; running number of the adjustment measurement

Ch.; receive channel used to calculate the results
Amp.; transmitter amplitude of the adjustment scan
int1; integral data of the first echo
Ph1; phase of the first echo
int2; integral data of the second echo
Ph2; phase of the second echo
i2/i1; projection of the second echo on the first echo
Angle; measured flip angle
C. amp.; calculated "better amplitude"
A.; transmitter successfully adjusted (Yes/No)
0.0

Graphic results C.2 The following results are displayed graphically: C.2
Real and imaginary part of the echo in the time domain

Amplitude and phase of the respective echo in the frequency
domain
The graphics show the maximum value of each raw data set.
C.2
selecting C.2 coils.
C.2
Accepting the frequency After successful adjustment ("Y" in the numeric field), the
for the measurement amplitude is automatically transferred to the scan system.
system C.2
C.2
Manual acceptance Within a certain range, you can also enter a reference ampli-
without successful tude and manually transfer it to the system without adjustment
adjustment C.2 scanning. C.2
Click the Apply button.

The amplitude is used as the reference amplitude for the follow-
ing scans. C.2
0.0

3D Shim C.2
The 3D shim allows you to correct inhomogeneities of the mag-

netic field. C.2
Scanning is performed in two steps: C.2
(1) First, you generate a "field map" by accepting a 3D data

set. A "field map" is a three-dimensional description of the
magnetic field.
(2) Subsequently, the shim parameters are calculated.
After interactive shimming, you have to readjust the fre-

quency. The frequency is automatically adjusted by the sys-
tem if you do not do this yourself.
Preparing for adjustment C.2 Select Options > Adjustments and go to the 3D Shim card.
0.0

(1)
(7)
(5)
(8)
(2)
(9)
(6)
(10)
(3)
(4)
(11)

(2) Image area for display of the field map (64 images)
(3) Slider for windowing the images
(4) Switchover between magnitude and phase display
play
(7) Name of the field map (temporary and system)
(8) Mode selection for field map display (standard and
advanced)
(9) Receive gain
(10) Temporary shim parameter set
(11) System shim parameter set
0.0

Before you can perform the 3D shim, you first have to enter the
necessary parameters. The system suggests a default value.
C.2
Entering the transmit

amplitude C.2
You can enter the transmit amplitude for the adjustment.
C.2
Entering the shim The nine parameters are part of a parameter set that describes
parameters C.2 the field correction.
C.2
You can enter the transmit frequency for the measurement in

spin box A00.
You can enter the components of the linear gradients in spin

boxes A11, B11 and A10.
Depending on the configuration of your system, you can

enter the second order shimming currents in input fields A20,
A21, B21, A22 and B22.
These shim parameters are used for field map acquisition. C.2
0.0

Loading from tune up C.2 Alternatively, you can load the parameters from the last system
tune up as temporary parameters. C.2
Click the Load Tune Up button.
Or C.2
Loading system Load the parameters currently used by the system as tempo-
parameters C.2 rary parameters. C.2
Click the Load System button.

The system parameters are loaded.
C.2
Mode selection C.2 The shim mode used to perform the adjustment is defined with
the protocol.
Page C.24, Setting shim mode C.2
The active button shows you which mode is active (tune-up,

standard, or advanced).
C.2
Switch modes by clicking the inactive button.
0.0

Selecting the gain C.2 You can set the receiver gain to match the intensity of the mea-
sured signal (low/high).
C.2
ment. The scan takes approximately 20 seconds.
C.2
Click the Measure button.

Or C.2

progress.
0.0

Displaying the field map C.2 The field map is displayed in the image area of the dialog box.
images are shown with a maximum resolution of
64 64 pixels. C.2
Field map, magnitude display Field map, phase display
The tomographic images are displayed row by row. C.2
0.0

Windowing images C.2 If the window values of the images are not optimally set, you
may readjust them manually using the two sliders in the bottom
right-hand corner of the image area. C.2
Move the vertical slider to adjust the contrast.

Move the horizontal slider to adjust the width.
Selecting magnitude or You may display the images as magnitude or phase images.
phase image C.2 C.2
Click the Magnitude button to display magnitude images.

Or C.2
Click the Phase button to display phase images.
Selecting the receive The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local
channel C.2 coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
list. C.2

all coils selected.
0.0

Shim parameters After scanning has been completed and the results are dis-
calculating C.2 played, you may calculate the new shim parameters.
C.2
Click the Calculate button to start the calculation.

The parameters are recalculated and may be used as a basis
for the next field-map scan. They are displayed in the list of
numeric results.
C.2

A00; transmit frequency
A11, B11, A10; linear gradients
A20, A21, B21, A22, B22; second order shim currents
C.2
NOTE
The three-dimensional field-map scan always shows the
entire homogeneity volume of the magnet independent of
the adjustment volume.
The adjustment volume is taken into consideration and the
field homogeneity is optimized during the calculation of the
shim parameters. For this reason, changing the adjustment
volume also results in different shim parameter settings for
the same field map. C.2
0.0

Accepting the field map The temporary field map (valid locally for the adjustment) may
for the scan system C.2 be applied to the scan system.
C.2
Click the Apply button in the upper section of the dialog box.
Manual acceptance of the After you have calculated the new parameters with Calculate,
calculated parameters C.2 you may apply them directly to the scan system as temporary
parameters. At the same time the Field Map is transferred to the
scan system.
C.2
Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.
Manual acceptance You can also enter shim parameters and apply them to the scan
without successful system without performing a scan or calculation. C.2
adjustment C.2
Click the Apply button in the lower part of the dialog box.
The parameters will be applied to the scan system. C.2
0.0

Interactive shim C.2
Similar to 3D shim adjustment, interactive shimming compen-

sates for inhomogeneities of the magnetic field. You can enter
the shim parameters and monitor the measurement of the MR
signal on the screen in real time. If you enter new parameters,
the changes are reflected in the results of the following MR sig-
nal measurement. You may continue shimming the magnetic
field until it meets your requirements. C.2
After interactive shimming, you have to readjust the fre-

quency. The frequency is automatically adjusted by the sys-
tem if you do not do this yourself.
Preparing for adjustment C.2 Select Options > Adjustments from the menu and go to the
Interactive shim card.
0.0

(1)
(2) (7)
(8)
(3) (9)
(10)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(11)
(12)
(1) Numeric results

(2) Display of best shim Result
(3) Amplitude of the measurement signal in the time domain
domain
(8) Physiological parameters
play
(10) Temporary shim parameters and shim parameters cur-
rently used by the system
(11) Sensitivity when changing shim parameters
(12) Range display for entering the amplitude or the shim
parameters
0.0

As soon as you go to the Interactive Shim card, the start

parameters are displayed.
C.2
Physio selection C.2 For the adjustment scan, you may apply physiological measure-
ment parameters from the relevant parameter card of the proto-
col.
C.2
Change the selection by clicking the inactive button.
Entering the transmit

amplitude C.2
You can enter the transmit amplitude for the adjustment.
Entering the shim The nine parameters are part of a parameter set that describes
parameters C.2 the field correction.
C.2
You can enter the transmit frequency for scanning in input

field A00.
You can enter the components of the linear gradients in the

A11, B11, and A10 input fields.
Depending on the configuration of your system, you can

enter the second order shimming currents in input fields A20,
A21, B21, A22 and B22.
0.0

Using the plus and minus Instead of entering shim parameters numerically, you can
buttons increase or decrease their values using the plus or minus but-
C.2 ton. C.2
The Sensitivity slider allows you to define the increments for

value adjustments.
Fine tuning of shim Shimming normally begins with significant changes to the
parameters C.2 parameter values and concludes with very small adjustments
using the plus and minus buttons. C.2
Set the slider to high to change the shim parameters in

larger increments.
Set the slider to low to change the shim parameters in small
increments.
Range display C.2 The range display indicates at what interval you can change the
transmit amplitude or shim parameters. C.2
0.0

Starting to scan C.2
Start the adjustment by clicking the Measure button.

The measurement is performed continuously using the current
parameters. You can terminate continuous scanning with the
Stop button.
C.2
Display of When the measurement is complete, the results for each mea-
results C.2 surement are displayed numerically and graphically. C.2
The following parameters are displayed numerically: C.2

Rec. gain; gain setting used
FWHM (Hz), (Full Width Half Maximum)
Width of the received pulse (frequency domain) at half mag-
nitude.
Int |P|; integral of the amplitude in the time domain
T2*; transverse relaxation time
Tendency; indicates whether the parameter changes result
in shim improvement (+++) or degradation (---).
0.0

The following results are displayed graphically: C.2
The amplitude in the time domain

the real part of the measurement signal in the time domain
The amplitude of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain (Fourier-transformed measurement signal)
the phase of the measurement signal in the frequency
domain
list. C.2

all coils selected.
Changing parameters C.2 Once the measurement results are displayed, you can make
changes while the measurement is in progress. The Tendency
column provides valuable information. C.2
Change the parameters so that the full width at half maxi-

mum (FWHM) decreases and T2* increases.
In the numeric display, the line with the highest T2* value is
marked Best Shim.
0.0

Undoing changes C.2 To undo the last change to the parameters:

C.2
Click the Undo button.
Loading stored You can load the system parameters currently stored in the
parameters C.2 measurement system as temporary shim parameters and use
them, for example, as start parameters. C.2
Click the Load System button.
Loading from tune up C.2 As an alternative, you can also load parameters from the last
system tune-up as temporary parameters. C.2
Click the Load Tune Up button.
0.0

Loading best shim The "best" shim parameters obtained in the current scan may
parameters C.2 be imported as temporary shim parameters. They are then
used for the next adjustment scan. C.2
This is especially useful if you have moved away from the most
optimal values while varying parameters. The most optimal
shim parameters are determined based on the maximum trans-
verse relaxation time (T2*). C.2
Click the Best Shim button.
Deleting the best shim You may delete the "best" shim parameters obtained in the cur-
parameter C.2 rent scan, making them invalid. The corresponding display is
deleted. C.2
Click the Reset Best button.
Applying parameters to You can transfer the optimal shim parameters for the measure-
the scan system C.2 ment to the measurement system.
C.2

They will be used in the next examination.
C.2
Stopping the To stop the measurement: C.2
measurement C.2
Click the Stop button.
0.0

Manual water suppression C.2
There are special RF pulses that are used for water suppres-
sion during scans. With this adjustment, you determine a cor-
rection factor for the transmitter amplitude for these RF pulses.
Within the adjustment volume, the flip angles are set for optimal
suppression of the water signal.
C.2
Preparing for adjustment C.2 Select Options > Adjustments and go to the Water suppr.
card.
0.0

(1)
(12)
(2) (11)
(10)
(3)
(9)
(4) (8)
(5) (7)
(6)

(2) Amplitude of the measurement signal in the time domain
(3) Phase of the measurement signal in the time domain
domain
(6) Select signal graphs
(7) Range display for the correction factor and the transmitter
increment
play
(9) Receiver gain
(10) Transmitter increment
(11) Display of the system correction factor
(12) Input field for the temporary correction factor
0.0

Certain parameters have to be entered prior to the measure-

ment and checked after each measurement.
C.2
Entering the correction For the first iteration, the system suggests an amplitude correc-
factor C.2 tion factor of 1.0 which you may edit. C.2
You can enter a correction factor in the Corr. factor (temp)

spin box.
For comparison, the correction factor currently used by the sys-
tem is displayed below.
C.2
Entering the transmitter You can enter an increment to determine the correction factor.
increment (delta transmit A number of test measurements are performed followed by
amplitude) C.2 eleven adjustment measurements. The adjustment measure-
ments cover the range of the correction factor entered minus
five increments up to the correction factor entered plus five
increments. C.2
You can enter an increment in the Delta transmitter spin

box.
0.0

Selecting the gain C.2 You can set the receiver gain depending on the signal intensity.
C.2
ment. C.2

The scan takes several seconds.
C.2
Canceling the
measurement C.2

progress.
Repeat the measurements using different parameters until the

system has optimized the correction factor. C.2
A will "Y" appear in the numeric field following successful

adjustment.
0.0

Results display C.2 The measurement results are displayed both numerically and
graphically.
C.2

CorrFac.; correction factor of the adjustment scan
Signal (CorrFac - Delta); signal strength for measurement
with correction factor minus transmitter increment
Signal (CorrFac); signal strength for scan with correction
factor
Signal (CorrFac + Delta); signal strength for scan with cor-
rection factor plus transmitter increment
NewCorrFac; calculated "better" correction factor
0.0

Graphic results C.2 The following results are displayed graphically: C.2
The real and imaginary part of the measuring signal in the

time domain.
The amplitude and phase of the measuring signal in the fre-
quency domain.
Three different signal graphs are available for display.
C.2
Click the CorrFac-Delta. button to display the signal graph of

the "correction factor minus increment" measurement.
Or C.2
Click the CorrFac button to display the signal graph of the

measurement with the correction factor.
Or C.2
Click the CorrFac + Delta button to display the signal graph

of the "correction factor plus increment" measurement.
0.0

Selecting the receive The receive channel is used to select the signals of the local
channel C.2 coils. In addition to the receive channel (Ch.), the coil name
list. C.2

all coils selected.
Accepting the correction After successful adjustment, the correction factor is automati-
factor C.2 cally loaded into the measurement system.
C.2
Manual acceptance Within a certain range, you can enter a correction factor and
without successful manually accept it without adjustment measurement.
adjustment C.2 C.2
The correction factor is used for the following measurements. C.2
0.0

Undoing changes C.2
You have performed all adjustments and now want to undo the
settings. C.2
A Reset button is available for this purpose on every card

(except 3D Shim). C.2
Click Reset.
The parameters displayed when the dialog box was opened are
re-loaded. C.2
System parameters that were changed during the adjustment

cannot be restored to their initial settings before the adjust-
ment.
Completing adjustment C.2
Exit the adjustment platform with the Close button. C.2
Click the Close button.

The dialog box closes. C.2
0.0

Starting protocol adjustments manually C.2
All adjustments planned in the selected protocol may be manu-

ally started without starting the following protocol. C.2
Open the protocol first.

Select Options > Adjustments.
Go to the Viewing card.
Then click the Adjust All button.
The adjustments are performed. C.2
If an error occurs during scanning, the adjustment will be

aborted and an error message is displayed.
Aborting adjustment C.2 You can cancel a scan in progress at any time.
C.2
Click the Abort button.
0.0

Changing the resonance frequency after

inline adjustment C.2
Inline adjustment is performed automatically before each

scan. C.2
You can pause the system after an inline adjustment to confirm

or change the calculated resonance frequency. C.2
Settings on the Go to the Adjustments card.

Adjustments card C.2
Click the Confirm freq. adjustment option.

Page C.23, Settings on the Adjustments card
As soon as you click the card Adjustments followed by the

option Freq. Adjust, the dialog box Confirm Frequency Spec-
trum is shown after each inline adjustment. You may correct the
resonant frequency or accept it without changes. C.2
0.0

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(1) Amplitude in the adjustment scan

(2) Temporary frequency
(3) Display of the system frequency
(4) Selection of the receive channel
(5) Range display for entering the frequency
0.0

Graphic display of the The graphic display of the last frequency scan is displayed. C.2
adjustment scan C.2
You can modify the frequency graphically by moving the vertical

marker. Place the mouse pointer in the graphic display of the
frequency domain. A vertical marker is displayed. C.2
Click on the line.

The newly selected frequency is transferred to the Frequency
(temp) field. C.2
If no adjustment graphic is available, you will have to generate

the data for graphic display by performing manual frequency
adjustment. C.2
0.0

Before manual frequency adjustment, you first have to enter a

few parameters.
C.2
Entering the frequency C.2 C.2
You can enter a new transmitter frequency in the Frequency

(temp) input field.
The frequency currently used is displayed in the field under-

neath for comparison. C.2
The temporary frequency that you may enter yourself is only

used for adjustment scans. The system frequency is used for
examinations.
0.0

Range display C.2 Use the range display to verify the accuracy of the selected fre-
quency. If it is out of range, correct it accordingly. C.2
list. C.2

all coils selected.
Starting the measurement C.2 After you have corrected the resonance frequency, you may
start scanning. C.2
Click the Continue button.
Canceling the You may stop the examination if you are not satisfied with the
measurement C.2 frequency spectrum. C.2
Click the Cancel button.
0.0

Displaying adjustment results C.2
The Show card in the Manual adjustments dialog box displays

the results of all the adjustments performed. It provides an over-
view of the current status of your scan system. C.2
Use the selection buttons to define the information to be dis-

played.
Displaying all adjustment Select Options > Adjustments.

parameters
Go to the Show card.
C.2
0.0

NOTE
This list is usually provided for diagnostic purposes
handled by Siemens Service. C.2
Updating the display of You can update the scan results displayed on the card after
parameters C.2 each adjustment.
C.2
Just click the Update Information button.
Rejecting all adjustment If you want to reject all the adjustments already performed:
results C.2 C.2
Click the Invalidate All button.
The system is now in an unadjusted state. C.2
0.0

Selecting Parameters for Display

C.2
Detail of information for the You can define the scope of the information to be displayed. All
parameters displayed C.2 of the important parameters are displayed in "customer"
mode. C.2
Adjustment vector C.2 Select the parameter sets you want to display. C.2
The following parameter sets may be selected: C.2
System (SYS): Adjustment parameters applicable to the

system.
Temporary (ADJ): Parameters acquired via the current
adjustment process.
Last used (LOADED): Adjustment parameters used in the
last scan.
Saved: All saved adjustment parameters.
0.0

Adjustment type C.2 Specify the adjustment types to be displayed. C.2
The relevant adjustment parameters are displayed with the

selected adjustment type. C.2
0.0

0.0

PART
D Patient Browser D.0
D.1 Introduction
Databases and drives .................................................... D.12
Data levels ..................................................................... D.14
Calling up the Patient Browser ....................................... D.16
The Patient Browser window ......................................... D.17
Customizing the Patient Browser window ............... D.110
Image stamps .............................................................. D.116
D.2 Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

Displaying information levels ......................................... D.22
Scrolling through and selecting patient data .................. D.26
Filtering data ................................................................ D.211
Using standard filters ............................................... D.211
Creating a user-defined filter ................................... D.213
Sorting data .................................................................. D.219
Sorting patients ........................................................ D.220
Sorting examinations ............................................... D.221
Sorting series ........................................................... D.222
Sorting images ......................................................... D.223
Printing out a data list .................................................. D.228
Reading data from storing media ................................. D.231
Searching for and importing data in the network ......... D.234
Searching for data ................................................... D.236
Search Selected ...................................................... D.241
Importing data .......................................................... D.242
Configuring Patient Search ...................................... D.244
Calling up additional information about a patient ......... D.246
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D1
Contents Patient Browser
D.3 Transferring Data to other Applications

Registering the patient again .......................................... D.32
Viewing and processing images ..................................... D.33
Splitting mosaic images into single images .................... D.37
Processing images in 3D .............................................. D.310
Private applications ...................................................... D.312
D.4 Correcting Data

Correcting patient or examination data .......................... D.42
Moving data .................................................................. D.410
Displaying a history of changes .................................... D.414
D.5 Storing, Sending and Filming Data

Storing data on an external medium .............................. D.52
Sending data via the network ......................................... D.53
Printing patient data from data media ............................ D.55
Exporting images to the file system ................................ D.56
Filming ............................................................................ D.57
D.6 Maintaining your Data

Defining the work status ................................................. D.62
Marking examination data .............................................. D.66
Procedure tracking with MPPS ....................................... D.68
Editing the performance documentation .................... D.68
Displaying actions, billing ......................................... D.612
Sending and concluding a report ............................. D.613
Closing the performance report without saving ........ D.615
Deleting data ................................................................ D.616
0.0
D2 Operator Manual
Patient Browser Contents
D.7 Configuring the Patient Browser

General settings ............................................................. D.72
Toolbar ...................................................................... D.73
Work status ................................................................ D.74
Delete confirmation .................................................... D.75
Hierarchical view in the navigation and content area ..... D.76
List entries ............................................................... D.710
Hiding data levels .................................................... D.713
List display / image stamp display ........................... D.714
Single View of the content area ................................... D.715
Configuring user-defined applications .......................... D.718
D.8 Reporting
Basics ............................................................................ D.83
Layout ........................................................................ D.84
Creating a report ............................................................ D.86
Editing a report............................................................... D.87
Opening a report ........................................................ D.88
Navigating in the report ........................................... D.810
Editing a report ........................................................ D.812
Saving a report ........................................................ D.822
Printing a report ........................................................... D.824
Opening the print preview ........................................ D.824
Close the print preview ............................................ D.826
Starting to print ........................................................ D.827
Sending a report .......................................................... D.829
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D3
Contents Patient Browser
Configuration settings for the report ............................. D.831

Opening a configuration ........................................... D.832
Enter general settings .............................................. D.833
Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemes ........ D.836
Save and close configuration settings...................... D.842
0.0
D4 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
D.1 Introduction D.1
The Patient Browser supports you with administration of the

patient and examination data that are stored in the databases
of your system. D.1
With the Patient Browser you can search for data in a fast and
uncomplicated way and then process that data in the browser
or in the task cards.
D.1
When to access data with To examine a patient who has already been examined once
the Patient Browser D.1 before with your system.
To view the images of a patient from earlier examinations in
order to compare them with current results.
To comment or postprocess images after an examination.
To correct incorrect information for a patient stored in your
system.
To save patient and examination data or to send them to
another location in your hospital via the network.
To expose images of a patient onto film for reporting or doc-
umentation purposes.
Security-Privileges D.1 When Security is activated, you can correct, rearrange and set
work states only if you are authorized to do so.
Page B.268, PatientBrowser D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.11

Introduction Patient Browser
Databases and drives D.1
In the Patient Browser you access patient and examination

data that are stored in the various databases of your system or
on external data media such as CDs.
D.1
Scheduler D.1
The scheduler contains the data of all preregistered patients.

This database gives you an overview of all patients who have
been preregistered for examination. Here you can search for a
patient to register him or her for an examination.
The scheduler can be updated with data from an HIS/RIS sys-
tem either automatically or manually if the system is connected
to one. D.1
Local database D.1
The local database is the area of your system in which the

patient data and results of current examinations are stored.
If the data volume in the local database increases, the access
times become longer and examinations are slowed down.
Therefore you should regularly move data from your local
database to storage media.
0.0
D.12 Operator Manual

Patient Browser Introduction
Connected drives D.1
One ore more CD drives are connected to your system. The

icons with the drive names provide a quick way of accessing
these archiving media. As soon as an examination has been
completed and evaluated you should save the examination data
and then delete it from the local database. D.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.13

Data levels D.1
In the databases and on the external data media, the patient

and examination data are structured hierarchically. This struc-
ture helps you find examination results quickly. D.1
The display of the data levels depends on the configuration.
(1) Database
(2) Patient
(3) Study
(4) Series
(5) Instances
Depending on the database, the work status of each data-
base entry is displayed as an abbreviation. You will find infor-
mation about the processing status on
Page D.62, Defining the work status
0.0

Patient D.1 The examination data of different patients are stored by the
names of the patients in your database.
D.1
Study / Procedure D.1 A study is an examination which is conducted to find answers to

a particular question, usually as a result of a referral. A study
consists of one or more series. In the Scheduler, the planned
Procedure is stored at this level.
D.1
Series / Procedure Step D.1 All the images of a measurement or of an image-processing

operation are designated to a series. In the Scheduler, the Pro-
cedure Steps for the examination are listed at this level. D.1
Procedure Steps are not displayed for patients preregistered

locally (i.e. at this workstation).
Instances D.1
D.1 On the lowest data level, the Instance Level, the individual
images are stored and depending on the modality, the data sets
from which images can be generated (e.g. raw data). All entries
on the Instance Level are generally referred to as images.
In the Scheduler, you will find the individual Action Items for
the Procedure Step in question at this point. D.1
Action Items are not displayed for patients preregistered

locally (i.e. at this workstation).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.15

Calling up the Patient Browser D.1
You can call up the Patient Browser window either from the
main menu or by using the symbol keypad.
D.1
Main menu D.1
D.1 Call up the Patient Browser in the main menu by selecting

the entry Patient > Browser....
Or D.1
Symbol keypad D.1
Press the Browser key on the symbol keypad (Num.).
D.1
NOTE
If a dialog box is open and active the button Patient
Browser might not function. D.1
Click into the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or

close the dialog box.
D.1
NOTE
If you call up the Patient Browser on the satellite console,
it will not be updated automatically. D.1
To update it, select View > Refresh.
0.0

The Patient Browser window D.1
When you call up the Patient Browser, the Patient Browser

window is displayed and placed in the foreground. D.1
The window is subdivided into various processing areas and

therefore provides you with access to your data in a clearly laid
out manner. D.1
(1) Menu and tool bar

(2) Navigation area
(3) Information area
(4) Content area
(5) Status bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.17

Tool bar D.1 You can work on the data you have selected using the menus
or the icon buttons on the tool bar. D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which buttons the

tool bar contains.
Page D.72, General settings
You can hide the toolbar by deselecting View > Toolbar.
Navigation area D.1 The lower data levels for the selected databases, patients,
examinations, and series are displayed graphically in the navi-
gation area. D.1
Using the mouse you can select patient, study, series or image
data in order to edit it or to transfer it to other applications. Every
selection you make in the navigation area is automatically
shown in the content area.
D.1
Information area D.1 In the information area you can see brief information about the
patient and study selected. When the navigation area is hidden,
you can also see which database is open and which data level
is displayed.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections D.1
0.0

Content area D.1 In the content area you will see a list of the studies or proce-
dures for the patient selected in the navigation area. If you
select the lower data levels, you can see which series or proce-
dure steps are stored for a study and which images or action
items are stored for a series or procedure step. D.1
In Browser Configuration you can define which information

is to be displayed for each entry.
In the content area you can also select patient and examination
data for further processing. D.1
You can toggle between a list display or image stamp display.

Page D.113, Display of lists and image stamps in the con-
tent area
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.19

Customizing the Patient Browser window D.1
You can alter the display of the Patient Browser window and in
this way optimize it for your way of working. For example, you
can have a certain area enlarged in order to view as much data
as possible at one time.
D.1
Changing the window You can enlarge, reduce, and pan the Patient Browser window
size D.1 on your screen as you require.
Page A.225, Resizing and moving a window D.1
0.0

Enlarging and reducing the You can change the height of the navigation and content areas
navigation and content with respect to one another using the mouse. The larger you
areas D.1 make the navigation area the smaller the content area will
become and vice versa. D.1
D.1 Move the mouse cursor to the border of the navigation area.
The cursor changes shape to a small vertical double arrow. D.1
Drag the line down to enlarge the navigation area and reduce
the content area.
Or D.1
Drag the line up to reduce the navigation area and enlarge

the content area.
In the image stamp display, the content area can only be
enlarged or reduced in steps so that image stamps are not cut
off.
Page D.113, Display of lists and image stamps in the con-
tent area
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.111

Showing and hiding You can have the tool bar, navigation area, and information area
window sections D.1 either displayed or not, in order to create more room in the
Patient Browser window. D.1
D.1 Click on View > Toolbar to hide or show the tool bar.
Click on View > Info Area to hide or show the information
area.
Click on View > Tree to hide or show the data structure in the
navigation area.
If the data structure is not displayed, the data level set in the
configuration is displayed in the content area. In the navigation
area, you can see which database these entries belong to.
Page D.715, Single View of the content area D.1
When switching to tree/single view, the previous selection will

not be retained.
In order to switch between the databases in the navigation
area you must first display the tree structure.
0.0

Display of lists and image If you have selected a study or series in the navigation area, all
stamps in the content areaD.1 the associated series and images are displayed in the content
area. With the View menu you can toggle between a list or
image stamp display.
D.1
Click on View > Image Stamps to have series and images

displayed as image stamps (menu entry has a checkmark) or
as a list in the content area (no checkmark next to menu
entry).
In Browser Configuration you can define what information
the list entries and the image stamps contain.
Page D.76, Hierarchical view in the navigation and con-
tent area
0.0

Showing and hiding You can have individual databases and drives either displayed
databases and drives D.1 or not in the navigation area depending on whether you need
them for your work. D.1
Call up View > Source to open a submenu.

Select the databases and drives that you want to be dis-
played as an icon in the navigation area.
The names of the submenu entries depend on the configura-

tion of your system.
0.0

Customizing the table in The list display of patient and examination data in the content
the content area D.1 area consists of a table. You can alter the preset column widths
for each column. D.1
Click on the header of the table in the content area with the
mouse cursor.
Drag the right column boundary to the right to enlarge the
column.
0.0

Image stamps D.1
If View > Image Stamps is activated, all data objects are dis-
played as image stamps on the image/data level. D.1
D.1 Data objects include series or images of a patient and data sets
from which images can be generated (e.g. raw data, 3D
objects) as well as curves (e.g. ECG curves) and texts. D.1
If you click on an image stamp with the mouse the object will be
selected.
Double-click or drag & drop loads the data into the task card
that is at the top of the stack of cards, e.g. the Viewing card.
D.1
Data objects D.1 This is a selection of possible data objects. (The range of pos-
sible objects is continuously expanded with each software ver-
sion.) D.1
Symbol D.1 Object D.1 Description D.1
Image An image is directly displayed smaller.
Raw data The raw data on which the calculation of

images is based is represented symboli-
cally.
Report Parameters, images and results of an
examination and comments are stored in
the study report.
Result Results of an evaluation of image data
(e.g., curves).
0.0

Symbol D.1 Object D.1 Description D.1
Fusion Contains the coordinates for the alignment

Registration of two image data sets.
Matrix
Fly Path Contains the coordinates of the three-
dimensional Fly path created and stored
during a Fly Through session.
3D Object Edi- 3D objects of a volume data set created
tor Object with the 3D Object Editor.
Radiotherapy Data of radiotherapy objects like Struct-

Object Sets or Plan.
Broken Image Image has been destroyed, e.g., loading of

the image has been interrupted.
Black Image Black images are special images contain-

ing graphics, tables, histograms or reports.
Loading image Image is currently loading.
Waveforms Data of a curve, e.g. ECG curves and other

physiological data.
D.1
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Searching for and
D.2 Displaying Patient Data D.2
In the Patient Browser window you can view all the patient and
examination data stored in the databases of your system and
on external archiving media. D.2
You can search for patient data to examine a patient again or to

review, film, or save his or her images. D.2
You can search for patient data in the Patient Browser by nav-
igating through the data levels of the window by mouse click or
using the keyboard. D.2
You can speed up your search by sorting the data displayed,

e.g. alphabetically by the last name of the patient, or by filtering
the data displayed and only viewing a certain subset. D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.21

Searching for and Displaying Patient Data Patient Browser
Displaying information levels D.2
When searching for patient and examination data you move

through the navigation area with the mouse or you select Open
Subtree in the View menu to open lower data levels.
D.2
Displaying a data tree D.2
D.2 Click on the icon of a patient entry in the navigation area of

the Patient Browser window to view that patients data lev-
els.
Only the first subobject is displayed down to its lowest level. D.2
In the content area you can see a list of all studies that are avail-
able for that patient. D.2
Click on another patient to hide the first patients data tree

and view the information levels of the other patient instead.
0.0

Patient Browser Searching for and Displaying Patient Data
Opening a data tree D.2
Select an entry in the navigation area.
Select the menu entry View > Open Subtree to view all the
entries of lower data levels (open up the data tree com-
pletely).
Or D.2
D.2 Click on this button on the toolbar.
Or D.2
Call up the popup menu with the right mouse button (or Shift
+ F10) and click on Open Subtree.
The function Open Subtree is especially useful if you have
selected several patients simultaneously.
If you select the icon for a database or drive the Open Sub-
tree menu item and the button remain dimmed. At this level
you cannot open the data tree.
Closing a subtree D.2 Call up View > Close Subtree in the main menu or Close
Subtree in the popup menu to close the lower information
levels again.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.23

Updating the scheduler D.2 If your system is connected to an HIS/RIS system, the sched-
uler is automatically updated at regular intervals with informa-
tion from the registration depending on the service configura-
tion. You can also start this updating operation manually. In this
way you can ensure that you are always working with the latest
data. D.2
Select View > Update Worklist to update the scheduler.

Or D.2
Click on the icon for the scheduler to update it and then open
it.
Depending on the configuration, the Worklist Time Range
window is displayed in which you can limit the time frame for
your query.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range
In the Patient Browser, all patients who are preregistered for
examination on your system are now displayed.
D.2
Clearing the scheduler D.2 You have the possibility to delete data from the Scheduler. D.2
Call up Edit > Clear Scheduler in the menu of the Patient

Browser.
Page D.623, Clear Scheduler
0.0

Updating the display Changes and additions to database entries that you make on
of the databases D.2 your workstation or are made via the network are automatically
displayed in the Patient Browser window. You can initiate this
updating manually, too, if the automatic process is delayed.
D.2
Call up View > Refresh to update the display of the naviga-

tion and content areas.
Or D.2
Click on this button.
NOTE
If you are working on a satellite console, you must update
the database with Refresh key. D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.25

Scrolling through and selecting

patient data D.2
You can search for a patients examination data in the data-

bases in order to process it further. D.2
After you have called up the Patient Browser window for the
first time the local database will open. All the patients stored in
it are listed in the navigation and content area. D.2
The data levels of the first patient are displayed in the naviga-
tion area. D.2
If you call up the Patient Browser again later, it appears in

the display last set.
0.0

Now select a database in the navigation area and search for the
patient you require. You then open the lower levels of informa-
tion until you have found the data you are looking for of the
patient concerned. D.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.27

Example D.2 For example, to select certain images of a patient for process-
ing you can open the information levels patient, study, and
series one after the other until the images you require are listed
or displayed (as image stamps) in the content area. D.2
D.2 Click on the icon for the database in which the patient is
stored in the navigation area.
If necessary, scroll through the list of patients using the scroll
bar until you have found the patient you require.
You will find the patient you are looking for even faster if you
press the key for the first letter of the patient's name on the
keyboard. The selection then jumps to the first patient entry
with this initial letter.
D.2 Click on the patient you are looking for in the navigation area
to view the information levels stored for this patient as icons.
All the studies of this patient are displayed in the content
area.
D.2 Click on a study in the navigation area to select it and to view
all the associated series.
Click on a series in the navigation area to select it and to

obtain an overview of all the images contained in it in the
content area.
D.2 Click on an image in the content area to select it.
0.0

Depending on whether you have clicked on View > Image

Stamps or not, the series and images are displayed as image
stamps or listed in the content area.
Page D.110, Customizing the Patient Browser window
Data selection with the Using the keyboard you can reach various data entries in the
keyboard D.2 Patient Browser very quickly. The key assignment for the
selection options in the active area (navigation or content area)
is summarized in the following table. D.2
D.2
Key Selection Key Selection

Home First entry End Last entry
Page up First visible entry Page down Last visible entry
Entry one Entry one
line up (same line down (same
level) level)
Entry left (level Entry right (level
up in navigation down in
area) navigation area)
Tab Toggle between Letter 1st entry with the
or the navigation appropriate
Shift + Tab and content area starting letter
When you press and hold the Ctrl key and click the data input
with the mouse, you are selecting the inputs exclusively. How-
ever, when you press the Shift key and click data inputs with
the mouse, you are selecting the inputs inclusively (standard
Windows functionality).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.29

Multiple selection D.2 You can also select several patients at once, for example, to
save their data, or you can select several images of one patient
in order to review them. D.2
Mark the patient entries or examination data you require in

the navigation or content area with the mouse keeping the
Ctrl key pressed.
Page A.217, Selecting several objects
Or D.2
Select the first entry you require in the navigation or content

area. Hold the Shift key pressed and extend your selection
using the keyboard.
Page D.29, Data selection with the keyboard
The images are transferred to the task card in the same order
in which they were selected.
Multi-select is only possible on one data level in the tree dis-
play. Data selected must belong to the same entry at the next
highest data level (e.g. several series of one study but not
several series of different studies).
0.0

Filtering data D.2
If the volume of data in the navigation and content areas is very

large, you can simplify the search for patient data by filtering the
data. You then only view a certain selection of patients, studies,
series, and images.
D.2
Using standard filters D.2
When filtering your data you can use filter criteria that are
offered by default by your system. These are available to you on
the menu bar or with the buttons on the toolbar. D.2
In Browser Configuration, you can add standard filters to or

remove them from the menu bar or toolbar.
Page D.18, Tool bar
Filter menu D.2
Select one of the filtering criteria in the Filter menu of the

Patient Browser.
These default filters evaluate the status or marking of data on
all data levels.
Page D.66, Marking examination data
D.2
Or D.2
0.0

Filters on the toolbar D.2
Call up a standard filter using the toolbar.
In Browser Configuration (Options > Configure Browser)

you can configure the contents of the toolbar.
Page D.73, Toolbar
Depending on the filtering criteria selected these data are now
displayed:
D.2
Not Archived
Only the data which have not been saved are displayed.
Not Printed
Only the data which have not yet been printed are displayed.
Not Sent
Only the data which have not yet been sent in the network are
displayed.
Not Marked
Only the data which are not marked are displayed.
Marked
Only marked data are displayed.
0.0

Deactivating the filter D.2 A filter remains active until you replace it by another filter. D.2
The status bar shows you which filter is currently in use.

If you exit the Patient Browser and call it up again later on,
the last filter that has been selected is still active.
D.2 Call up Filter > Off or click on the icon button to have all the
data displayed again (unfiltered).
Creating a user-defined filter D.2
Using the Patient Browser you can also create your own filter
criteria in order to filter the database according to a combination
of target items. D.2
If you keep self-defined filters general, you can use them more
frequently to have a certain subset of the data displayed in a
quick and uncomplicated manner. D.2
If you define very specific filters, you can search for patient and
examination data in a direct and time-saving way. D.2
0.0

Creating a filter D.2 Call up Options > Filter Settings....

The Filter Specification dialog box is displayed with input
fields for the filter name and five filtering criteria. D.2
Enter a suitable name in the Filter Name field by which your

filter is to be known.
0.0

D.2 Select one of the filtering criteria offered in the selection list.
Depending on which criteria you select, input fields combined
with and, or or From ... to appear or the criteria has no addi-
tional input field.
D.2
Enter target items in the input field combined with or of

which at least one must be fulfilled.
Enter target items in the input fields combined with and that
must all be fulfilled.
In the input fields combined with From - to enter the range

in which the data you are searching for must be contained.
0.0

Example of a user- The following user-defined filter was created to find a particular
defined filter D.2 series of a thorax examination in a database. D.2
This filter only selects marked series that have already been
completed, filmed, and archived and that were acquired with a
slice position between 0 and 100. D.2
0.0

Saving a filter D.2
Click on OK to save the filter. You will return to the Patient

Browser window.
Or D.2
Click on Cancel to return to the Patient Browser window

without saving the new filter.
Using user-defined filters D.2 User-defined filters are placed in the Filter menu as additional
menu entries. D.2
D.2 Call up, for example, Filter > Thorax-Series-Marked, to fil-

ter all data to your criteria.
0.0

Removing user-defined When you no longer require a user-defined filter, you can
filters D.2 remove it from the Filter menu again to keep the menu clear. D.2
Call up the Filter dialog box and select the filter you want to
delete in the selection list next to Filter Name.
Click on Delete to remove the filter from the list.
If necessary, select further filters from the selection list and

remove them in the same way.
D.2 Then click on OK to confirm deletion of the filter.
You return to the Patient Browser window. D.2
Or D.2
D.2 Click on Cancel to keep all filters as they were.
0.0

Sorting data D.2
You can sort the data displayed in the Patient Browser by var-
ious criteria. This enables you to output the data in a certain
sequence and makes it easier to find certain patient and exam-
ination data. D.2
Depending on the selected data level, different sorting criteria

will be active in the Sort menu. D.2
You can define your own sort schemes with up to three sort lev-
els for sorting the images. D.2
The selected sort criteria or sort scheme is marked by a check-

mark next to the menu item. The checkmark remains until you
select another criteria. D.2
You can reverse the sorting order for each selected sort criteria.D.2
0.0

Sorting patients D.2
You may sort the list of patients in the local database or sched-
uler. D.2
Select the Local database or the Scheduler.

D.2 Select a sort criteria under Sort in the menu.
Patient Name
The patients will be displayed in alphabetical order from
A to Z.
DB Date and Time
The patients will be displayed in order of registration starting
with the most recent patient.
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent)
You may select a work status. The patients will then be
sorted by progress in this work step, starting with the patient
who has progressed furthest.
Page D.62
You can reverse the sort order. D.2
Select Sort > Reverse Order.
0.0

Sorting examinations D.2
You can sort the list of examinations of a patient in the local

database. D.2
Select a Patient from the Local database.

D.2 Select a sort criteria from the Sort menu.
Study Description
The examinations will be displayed in alphabetical order by
name from A to Z.
Study Date and Time
The examinations will be displayed by time created starting
with the most recent examination.
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent, work sequence)
You may select a work status. The examinations will then be
sorted by progress in this work step, starting with the exam-
ination that has progressed furthest.
Page D.62
In case the selected sort order cannot be applied, the follow-

ing default order is automatically used:
Patient Name
Study Description
Series Number
Instance Number
0.0

Sorting series D.2
You can sort the list of series of an examination. D.2
Select a Patient and an Examination from the Local data-

base.
Series Number
The series will be sorted by their series number and dis-
played starting with the smallest.
Series Description
The series will be displayed in alphabetical order by name
from A to Z.
Series Date and Time
The series will be displayed by time created starting with the
most recent series.
Modality
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent, work sequence)
You may select a work status. The series will then be sorted
by progress in this work step, starting with the series that has
progressed furthest.
Page D.62
0.0

Sorting images D.2
You can sort the list of images of a series. D.2
Select a Patient, an Examination, and a Series from the

Local database.
Instance Number
The images of a series are numbered on creation. This num-
bering is determined by the orientation and position of the
images.
Instance Date and Time
The images will be displayed by time created starting with
the most recent series.
Slice Position
The images will be sorted by their main orientation (tra - cor
- sag) and by slice position within the main orientation.
Modality Specific Data
Page D.224, MR-specific sort criteria
Work Status (filmed, archived, sent)
You may select a work status. The images will then be sorted
by progress in this work step, starting with the image that has
progressed furthest.
Page D.62
Multiple
Page D.226, Multiple sorting
0.0

Sorting in the You can also sort in the content area. D.2
content area D.2

Example: Sorting the images by slice position: D.2
D.2 Click on the Slice Position line in the content area.
D.2 The images are sorted and displayed in ascending order by

slice position. You can recognize the direction by the triangle. D.2
Click on the slice position line again.
D.2 The sort order will be reversed.
D.2
MR-specific sort criteria D.2 MR images and data may also be sorted by further sorting cri-
teria and schemes. D.2
Selecting a sort criteria from the menu under Sort > Modal-
ity Specific Data > ....
D.2 Anatomical
Multiple standard sort scheme for localizer and anatomical
examinations.
Page F.316, Using a Siemens sort scheme
Triggered
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for triggered examinations.
Chronological
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by time of creation
of the images.
0.0

Instance Oriented
Multiple Siemens sort scheme for sorting by image number.
Echo Time (TE)
Series that have been acquired with multiple echo protocols,
contain images based on different contrasts (e.g. T2 images,
proton density images). You can use sorting to separate
these images by echo time.
Repetition Time (TR)
The images of a series are sorted by TR.
Inversion Time (TI)
The images of a series are sorted by TI.
Trigger Time (TT)
The images of a series are sorted by TT.
0.0

Multiple sorting D.2 You can define a separate sort scheme with up to three levels
for sorting within a series. You define a sort criteria for each of
the three levels. D.2
The images are first ordered by the sort criteria of the first level.
The sort criteria of the second level is used if images are iden-
tical by the first sort criteria. The sort criteria of the third level is
only used if images are identical by the first and second sort cri-
teria.
D.2
Select Sort > Multiple.

The Image Display Order dialog box opens. D.2
The following sort criteria are available: D.2
Main orientation (MO)

MR Slice position (SP)
Trigger time (TT)
Acquisition time (TA)
Echo time (TE)
Image number (NR)
B_Value (BV)
0.0

D.2 Select a criteria for the first level.
D.2 Select a criteria for the second level.
D.2 If necessary, select a criteria for the third level.
Example: Sorting of the images of a multi-slice protocol by slice

position and image number. D.2
0.0

Printing out a data list D.2
If your system is connected to a printer, you can print out exam-

ination data in the form of a list. On printing out, the information
displayed in the content area is displayed. D.2
Display the required patient and examination data in the con-

tent area.
Page D.26, Scrolling through and selecting patient data
To print out the content area, you can work both in the tree
display and in the single display.
Page D.112, Showing and hiding window sections
You can even print data lists of you have already stored the
patient data, for example, for archiving or transfer to a local
data medium.
Page D.55, Printing patient data from data media
Displaying the print Call up Patient > Print Preview... to have the printout dis-
preview D.2 played in a preview.
Click on Close window to close the print preview again.
0.0

Printing out a list D.2 Call up Patient > Print List to print out the data listed in the
content area.
In a list of patients, the content and date of creation of the list is
stated in the header of the printout. For all other data levels, the
content of the information area is also printed. D.2
This list is always printed out in English.
0.0

Changing printer You can change the printer settings (e.g. page margins) in the
settings D.2 Windows NT/Windows XP print dialog. D.2
Call up Patient > Print... and make the required settings in

the dialog box shown.
D.2 Click on OK to apply the new settings.
0.0

Reading data from storing media D.2
You can import patient and examination data archived or

exported onto a data medium in DICOM format into your sys-
tem (into the local database) if a drive has been installed and
configured appropriately. D.2
With the current program version, you can only import

DICOM data.
Single images in DICOM format can also be imported by the
file system.
Chapter J.4, Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk
D.2 Click on the icon of a data medium in the navigation area to

display all the patient data stored there.
Data media D.2 Depending on the drive setting of your system, you can read
data from the following media: D.2
MOD (magneto optical disk) 3.5" and 5.25"

3.5" diskettes
CD or CD-R
Page J.26, Storing data on CD
0.0

Changing data media D.2 Call up Transfer > Eject from... and select the appropriate
drive from the list which is then displayed.
D.2 Remove the data medium from the drive and insert the new
medium into the corresponding drive.
Or D.2
Call up Transfer > Eject From <drive name>, or press the

eject button on the CD drive and change the medium.
Page J.22, Inserting and ejecting data media
MODs that are written by other systems should only be
inserted with write-protection. Maxpotics MODs written in SPI
format should be inserted only write protected.
D.2
Showing/hiding data With View > Source, you can hide or display archiving media
sources D.2 individually in the navigation area.
Page D.114, Showing and hiding databases and drives D.2
0.0

Selecting data D.2 You search and select patient and examination data from
archive media by clicking through the data levels in the naviga-
tion area. D.2
You can speed up your search by filtering and/or sorting the

data.
Page D.211, Filtering data
Page D.219, Sorting data
Importing data D.2 You can import the patient and examination data selected in the
archive medium into the local database, e.g. to evaluate it, to
send it through the network, or to store it on another data
medium. D.2
Call up Transfer > Import to import the selected data from

the data medium or network node into your local database.
Or D.2
D.2 Click on the icon button on the toolbar.
0.0

Searching for and importing data in

the network D.2
With Search and Search Selected, you can retrieve patient

and examination data from workstations and long-term archives
that are working with other DICOM program systems or older
syngo MR program versions and are therefore not displayed in
the navigation area. D.2
You can import the required data into your local database via
the network and work on your workstation in the usual way, e.g.
loading the data into the Viewing task card for evaluation. D.2
You can retrieve patient and examination data only from work-
stations that are set up as a network node and support the
Search function.
Calling up standard You can perform your data search in the Search window. There
patient search D.2 you enter the search criteria, start the search, and select the
data to import. D.2
Call up Patient > Search... in the main menu.

Or D.2
Click the Search button in the toolbar of the Patient Browser

to display the Patient Search window.
0.0

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Input fields for search criteria

(2) Search details area
(3) Information area
(4) Series details list
(5) Buttons
(6) Status bar
0.0

Searching for data D.2
You search for the patients, studies or series you want to import
into your local database by entering patient, study or series
details in the input fields of the Patient Search dialog. D.2
Network node D.2
D.2 Select the network node on which the data searched for are
located.
Patient details D.2
Enter the last name, ID and date of birth of the patient you are
searching for.
The following characters are not permitted: ^ = \
The search distinguishes between upper and lower case!
Enter the characters correctly.
If you only know part of the name or the patient ID, you can
also use the character * as wildcard.
Page E.35, Wildcards for patient name and ID
0.0

Select Any from the dropdown list if you do not want the sex
to be considered for the search.
Select the Sex from the dropdown list.
Examination details D.2
Enter the study date or a time range.

D.2 When you select an item from the dropdown list the corre-
sponding study date range is automatically entered.
Enter the study ID.

Select a modality from dropdown list.
The items of this list are configurable.
0.0

Study details D.2
Enter the study details or select them from the dropdown

lists.
The items of the dropdown list for the Referring Physician
are configurable.
Page E.42, Defining entries in the selection list
Series details D.2
Enter the series details or select a body part and a perform-

ing physician from the dropdown list.
If you only use series details the search may be retarded.
The items of the dropdown lists are configurable.
0.0

Start Search D.2 After having entered patient, study or series details you can
start the search. D.2
D.2 Click on the Search button to start the search.

The Search button changes to Stop Search which you can
use for aborting the query at any time (e.g. when the required
data have already been found).
Search result D.2 All patients and studies found are displayed in the information
area. D.2
Click a study if you want to have the corresponding series

displayed.
The series are displayed in the series details list. D.2
0.0

D.2
N OT E
If the Patient ID is not unique, studies may be listed which
do not belong to the patient selected and displayed in the
information area. D.2
Image List D.2 With Image List you obtain a list of the instances of a series, in
case you want to explicitly import special instances. D.2
Select the study.

Click the Image List button.
A list of images is displayed. D.2
0.0

Search Selected D.2
Search Selected is used when the Patient Browser or any

other syngo MR application is activated and patient, study,
series, or images have already been selected and you wish to
search further studies, series, or objects referring to the patient
previously selected. D.2
Click on the Search Selected icon in the toolbar of the

Patient Browser.
Or D.2
Call up Patient > Search Selected in the main menu.

The Search dialog window appears. The window is identical
with that of the standard search. In contrast to the standard
search you do not have to enter Patient Name, Patient ID, Date
of Birth and Sex. Data are entered automatically in the corre-
sponding input fields. D.2
Enter additional search criteria: examination, study and

series details.
D.2 Click the Search button.
The results are displayed in the result area.
Page D.239, Search result
0.0

Importing data D.2
After you have found the required study, series, or images,

transfer them to your workstation for further processing. D.2
Starting importing data D.2 Select one or more patients, studies or series from the infor-
mation or search output area of the Search dialog.
Or D.2
Select the images from the Image Search Results dialog

window.
Click the Import button.

Or D.2
In case you selected only one patient, study or series, dou-

ble-click it.
The selected data are copied from the network node to your
workstation and displayed in the navigation and content area of
the Patient Browser. D.2
If the selected objects exceed a certain limit a warning mes-

sage appears.
Click the Import Stop key if you want to cancel the import.
0.0

Checking data Just as for archiving or exporting you can view import pro-
transmission D.2 cesses. D.2
Call up Transfer > Local Job Status or Transfer > Network

Job Status.
Chapter J.6, Checking Data Transfer
Restarting search D.2
D.2 Click Clear if you want all entries to be cleared, stop the cur-
rent search and start a new one.
All input fields, the information area and the result output list are
cleared.
D.2
Closing Patient Search D.2 You have two possibilities to close the Search window. D.2
D.2 Click the Close button.

If you have triggered a patient search it is not canceled.
Search parameters and search results are not lost and are
available when the dialog window is called up the next time. If
you are in the process of importing data, importing continues
in the background.
Or D.2
D.2 Click the Cancel button.

If you have triggered a patient search it is now canceled. If
you are in the process of importing data, importing continues
in the background.
0.0

Configuring Patient Search D.2
You can adapt the user interface of the Search dialog window
to your method of working. The dropdown lists of the search cri-
teria Modality and Body Part are configurable. D.2
Call up the Numaris 4 Configuration Panel by activating

Options > Configuration in the main menu.
D.2 Double-click the Patient Search icon.
The Query & Retrieve Configuration window appears. D.2
0.0

D.2 Select or deselect the desired items by clicking or deselect-

ing the corresponding check box.
D.2 Click OK to save the settings.
Or D.2
D.2 Click Cancel to close the dialog without saving the settings.
0.0

Calling up additional information

about a patient D.2
If your hospital has an intranet, you can call up information

about a patient from other departments in your hospital using a
EPR Web browser for which syngo MR provides an interface.
This applies to data that has been entered in an HIS or similar
information system. D.2
The additional information about the patient (e.g. concerning

allergies, implants, preliminary examinations) might bear rele-
vance to the pending examination or evaluation of more recent
examination results. D.2
Use the EPR Web browser (EPR = Electronic Patient Record)

to call up the data. D.2
At any one time the EPR Web browser only displays the EPR
for one patient. You can view but not import the data of the
patient with the EPR Web browser.
The first time you launch the EPR Web browser you must log
on (see the operating instructions of your EPR Web browser).
The syngo MR interface must be individually adapted to the
EPR Web browser by your system administrator.
0.0

Calling up the EPR Web To display the electronic report for a particular patient, select a
browser D.2 patient (or a study, series, instances) from the Patient Browser
or in another task card. D.2
D.2 Call up Patient > Retrieve EPR in the main menu to display
the EPR Web browser.
Or
D.2
D.2 Click on Retrieve EPR in the toolbar.
The EPR Web browser starts up and the information available

for the selected patient is displayed.
D.2
If you click with the mouse outside the EPR Web browser, the
window is placed in the background.
0.0

Placing the EPR Web You can call up the Web browser with the same patient data
browser in the again.
foreground D.2
Call up Patient > Show EPR in the main menu.
Or
D.2
Click on Show EPR in the toolbar.
The EPR Web browser is again displayed with the same con-
tents.
D.2
Closing the EPR Web Call up File > Close to close the EPR Web browser.
browser D.2
The EPR Web browser is closed. D.2
D.2
0.0

CHAPTER Transferring Data to other
D.3 Applications D.3
You have found the patient and examination data you require in
the Patient Browser window and would now like to make use
of this data in another application. D.3
You would like to examine the patient again.

You would like to view and possibly review the patients
stored images.
You would like to process and evaluate images three-dimen-
sionally for special diagnostic problems.
You would like to process patient and examination data in
other application programs that you have set.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.31

Transferring Data to other Applications Patient Browser
Registering the patient again D.3
Before you can examine a patient stored in the local database

or in one of the archive media again, you must register this
patient for a new examination.
D.3
D.3 Click on the required patient entry in the navigation or con-

tent area of the Patient Browser.
Or D.3
Select one or more studies of the patient that you want to

perform or repeat.
Call up the patient registration with Patient > Register.

Or D.3

Or D.3
D.3 Press the Patient Register key on the symbol keypad

(Num 0).
Or D.3
Drag the selected data into the open Patient Registration

window (drag & drop).
In the Patient Registration window you can check the patient

data and correct it if necessary. You can add to the examination
data and register the patient whom you can then examine right
away.
Chapter E.3, Registering a Known Patient D.3
0.0

Patient Browser Transferring Data to other Applications
Viewing and processing images D.3
With the Patient Browser you can transfer the images of one
or more patients from the local database to the Viewing task
card for viewing and editing. D.3
Depending on which data level you are in, you can transfer the
following image material to the Viewing card: D.3
All images of one or more patients

All images of one or more studies
All images of one or more series
One image or more than one image
For transferring images to the Viewing task card you can either
use the menu bar or the toolbar or you simply double-click the
images or drag & drop them onto the Viewing task card with
the mouse. D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.33

All images of a patient, Select the patient, study, or series in the navigation or con-
study or series D.3 tent area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Patient > Load to Viewing or click on the button on
the toolbar to transfer the associated images to the Viewing
task card.
Or D.3
Click the Viewing card to the top of the stack.

Then double-click on the required data object. Or select the
data using the keyboard and press the Return key.
Using multiple selection in the navigation or content area you
transfer the images of more than one patient, study, or series
to the Viewing task card.
Page D.210, Multiple selection
One or more than one Click the Viewing card to the top of the stack.
image of a patient
Double-click on the data icon of the image that you want to
D.3
transfer in the content area of the Patient Browser. Or select

the image using the keyboard and press the Return key.
Or D.3
Select more than one image in the content area and transfer
it to the Viewing card with Patient > Load to Viewing or the
Load to Viewing button on the toolbar.
Page D.210, Multiple selection
0.0

Drag & drop D.3 In addition to the methods described above you can also trans-
fer images to the Viewing task card by drag & drop. In this way
you can determine in which segment the first of your selected
images is to be displayed. D.3
Reduce and/or move the Patient Browser window so that

you can see the image area of the Viewing task card.
Drag the selected images to the desired segment on the
Viewing task card.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.35

If the task card is not in the foreground you can also drag the
images from the Browser onto the corresponding tab. The
task card moves into the foreground and the images are
loaded into the image area.
Closed after Loading D.3
If you have selected the Closed after Loading setting in the

Options menu, the Patient Browser window is closed after
transfer of the images.
Call up Patient > Closed after Loading to activate this func-
tion.
If the option is not checked, the Patient Browser remains open

in the foreground even after you have loaded images into the
Viewing card. To process images you can always switch man-
ually to the Viewing task card. D.3
Click on the Close button in the top right corner of the

Patient Browser.
In the Viewing task card you can view and edit the transferred
images.
Part G D.3
0.0

Splitting mosaic images into single

images D.3
Some postprocessing functions, e.g. 3D, cannot use mosaic

images. So in special cases it may be necessary to split them
up into single images again.
Page L.410, Loading mosaic images
D.3
Select Patient > Browser.
Splitting a mosaic image D.3 Select one mosaic image from the Patient Browser.
Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series.
The images of the selected mosaic image are saved in a new
series under the same study. D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.37

Splitting several mosaic Select two or more mosaic images or all mosaic images in
images D.3 the Patient Browser.
Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series.
The images of all selected mosaic images are saved in a new
series under the same study D.3
Or D.3
Select Applications > Mosaic > Split to one Series per

Mosaic.
A new series is created with the split images for each mosaic
image selected.
D.3
NOTE
Due to safety standards splitting of the images may take
some time. This process runs in the background and is
accomplished even if the current user logs off or if the user
changes. D.3
0.0

Canceling splitting of Select Applications > Mosaic > Abort Splitting process....
mosaic images D.3
D.3
NOTE
To cancel a running spiltting process when the user
changes is only possible if the different user disposes of the
corresponding access rights. D.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.39

Processing images in 3D D.3
As the result of an examination you obtain images of a certain

volume which are stored in your local database. You can com-
bine the two-dimensional slices of a suitable series to form a
three-dimensional representation of the region of interest and
you can process and evaluate it in the 3D task card. D.3
Select a patient or one or more of his or her studies, series

or images (at least 4) in the navigation or content area of the
Patient Browser.
D.3 Call up Applications > 3D > MPR or click on the icon button
to start image processing as multiplanar reconstruction
(MPR).
Or D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > MIP or click on the icon button

to start maximum intensity projection (MIP).
Or D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > MinIP to start minimum inten-

sity projection (MinIP).
Or D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > SSD or click on the icon button

to start surface shaded display (SSD).
Or D.3
Call up Applications > 3D > VRT to start the volume render-

ing technique as the image processing.
0.0

If you have selected more than one suitable series or an espe-

cially large series, the Series List dialog box is displayed. As
soon as you have decided on a series there, you can perform
three-dimensional image processing on the 3D task card.
Chapter H.2, Transferring Images to 3D D.3
0.0

Private applications D.3
Only research customers are allowed to use the selection of

syngo programmed user-defined applications in the Private
Applications menu. D.3
D.3
0.0

CHAPTER
D.4 Correcting Data D.4
Every now and then it is necessary to correct patient data or to

add information about the study data, series and instances of a
patient. D.4
You can use the Patient Browser to search for this patient in
the database and then call up a dialog box in which you can pro-
cess the data. D.4
The data of the Service Patient cannot be altered. The same

applies to data that have been imported via an HIS / RIS sys-
tem or which are linked with such a system.
Whether and what changes can be made to data linked with
MPPS depends on the working status.
Page D.68, Procedure tracking with MPPS
History of changes D.4 Every time you change the data of a patient or examination, this
is recorded in a history of changes on your system. The correc-
tion list is maintained for each object level. You can view the his-
tory of changes for an entry in the local database at any time
in order to see what changes have been made to it. D.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.41

Correcting Data Patient Browser
Correcting patient or examination

data D.4
You can correct or add to the personal data of a patient or infor-

mation about that patients studies in the local database. D.4
If you want to change stored data or data from another worksta-

tion, you must first import it into the local database. However,
the original data remain unchanged.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media D.4
D.4
NOTE
As long as you have not generated all the Position Display
images of a patients examinations, you must not change
the respective patient and examination data. D.4
Otherwise the reference of the scanned images gets lost

and it is not possible to use the Position Display in the
Viewing task card. D.4
0.0

Patient Browser Correcting Data
Close the patient in all task cards (Patient > Close Patient).
When Security is activated, you can correct data only if you

are authorized to do so.
Select the patient, study, series or images that you want to
correct in the navigation or content area of the Patient
Browser.
Call up Edit > Correct.
Or D.4
D.4 Click on the icon button on the toolbar to open the Correct
dialog box.
You cannot correct data that was delete-protected with Edit >
Protect. You must first remove the delete protection with
Edit > Remove Protection.
Data that are used by other applications or are being pro-
cessed on another console cannot be corrected, either. The
corresponding entries in the Correct dialog box are then
dimmed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.43

0.0

Selected patient D.4 On the title bar of the Correct window, you can see which
patient and data you have selected. D.4
Content display D.4 In the first line of the window of the header line, the number of
studies, series, and images which are selected for correction is
displayed.
D.4
Entering data D.4 In the input and selection fields of the Correct window you can
see the information that has been stored for the selected patient
or selected study or series so far.
D.4
Correct or add to the selected data.

Depending on the data level in which you want to correct
data, some fields of the Correct window might be dimmed.
When you enter very long comments in the Comment input
field only the first part of the text is displayed in the Viewing
task depending on the selected layout. A third or fourth com-
ment line is not displayed, either.
Multiple values are represented by an asterisk and cannot be
changed (except instance level).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.45

Updating a current If you have called up the Correct window from the examination
examination D.4 card, you can incorporate the changes in the current examina-
tion. D.4
D.4 Select the checkbox Update data acquisition.
Signing for changes D.4
Enter your name under Modifiers name or select your

name from the selection list.
This will indicate who made the changes to the patient and
examination data for further reference. If your name is not yet in
the selection list, it will now be placed in the list automatically.D.4
If you do not specify a name, the name with which you logged
onto the system is taken as the modifier.
In case Security is activated this box displays your user name
and you cannot make any changes.
0.0

Saving changes D.4
Click on OK to save the new data and place the changes in

the history of changes.
The system first checks whether the predefined data are correct
and the date of birth entered is consistent with the specified
age. After that, the changed data are accepted into the system.D.4
Or D.4
Click on Cancel to reject the corrections. The data remain

unchanged and no entry is placed in the history of changes.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.47

One patient stored in the A patient whose name was spelled incorrectly during an exam-
database twice D.4 ination or who was once registered as an emergency patient is
stored in the database twice. D.4
As soon as you save the corrected patient name, the dialog box
asks you whether you want to merge the examination data of
the two patient entries or not. D.4
D.4 Click on OK to store all the selected data under the corrected
patient name.
D.4 Click on Cancel to cancel correction of the data.

No changes will be made. D.4
0.0

Changing external data D.4 If you change patient and examination data that you have pre-
viously imported into your local database (e.g. from another
archiving medium) or that was imported into your system (e.g.
via HIS/RIS), the Losing External References message box is
displayed. D.4
Click on Continue to save the changed data in your local

database.
If you then transfer the corrected data back to its original loca-
tion, it is stored in addition to the original data. D.4
Or D.4
Click on Cancel to cancel the process.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.49

Moving data D.4
The images of a patient are grouped together by examination

and series into hierarchical groups. If you find that the structure
is not correct, you can regroup the examinations and series by
moving them. D.4
If you move external data imported into your local database

and then transfer them back to their original location in a dif-
ferent combination, they will be stored in addition to the orig-
inal data.
Page D.49, Changing external data
When Security is activated, you can rearrange data only if you
D.4
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Correcting/rearranging objects with
references. D.4
Consequence: References may be lost. D.4
Remedy: Rearrange the entire hierarchical group

containing all objects with references in order to maintain
the references. D.4
0.0

Restrictions D.4 The data of the Service Patient, the Quality Assurance Patient,
and the Test Patient cannot be moved. The same applies to
data imported via an HIS/RIS system or linked with such a sys-
tem. D.4
You can only group together examination data that were

acquired by the same examination method with the same
patient position. D.4
You cannot move data that are already opened in another appli-
cation (e.g. the Viewing card) or are delete-protected with
Edit > Protect. D.4
You can only move studies into other studies or patient entries,
series into other series or studies, images into other series. D.4
For example, you can move images from one series into
another series or all images of one series into another study.
For example, you cannot move the images of a study into an
individual series of another study.
If you want to move linked external objects, select this func-

tion with multiple selection because otherwise the reference
to the unselected objects will be lost.
0.0

Drag & drop or cut You can move data either with the mouse (drag & drop) or using
& paste D.4 the Edit menu (cut & paste). D.4
If you accidentally cut and move data by drag & drop, you can
cancel the operation at any time with the Esc key.
Select the study or studies, series, images, or the one image

that you want to move.
Drag the selected data to the target position and release the
mouse button.
Or D.4
D.4 Call up Edit > Cut or click on the icon button on the toolbar.
Click on the target position.
D.4 Call up Edit > Paste or click on the icon button on the toolbar.
The Rearrange dialog box will be displayed. D.4
0.0

Just like when correcting patient and examination data, moving

data is also recorded in the history of changes.
Page D.414, Displaying a history of changes D.4
Enter your name in the Rearrange dialog box or select it

from the selection list.
If you do not specify a name, the name with which you logged
onto the system is taken as the modifier.
In case Security is activated this box displays your user name
and you cannot make any changes.
D.4 Click on OK to confirm your entry.
The data are moved and the changes are recorded in the his-
tory of changes together with your name. D.4
Or D.4
D.4 Click on Cancel to cancel the move.
0.0

Displaying a history of changes D.4
The correction list is a sort of log of your local database that is

created separately for each data level. Here you can always see
what changes and additions have been made to the data of
patient and to the information about the patient's examinations.
D.4
When Security is activated, you can open the History dialog

only if you are authorized to do so.
Select the patient, study, series or image stored in the local
database whose history of changes you want to view.
Call up Edit > History to display the Correct & Rearrange
History window with a chronological list of changes.
Or D.4
In the Correct & Rearrange History window you cannot

make changes yourself. All entries are made by your system.
0.0

Depending on the data level of the selected data different infor-

mation is listed in the Correct & Rearrange History window:D.4
Title
Here you can see the data record to which the logged
changes belong.
Attribute
This column lists the corrected entries.
Original Setting and Corrected Setting
These two columns show you the corrected entry before and
after the change.
Date & Time
This column of the table shows you the date and time of the
change.
Modifiers Name
In the last column in the table you can see who has made the
corrections.
0.0

D.4 If an object has been moved, the entry is marked ">" under
Attribute in window Correct & Rearrange History.
Depending on how many levels have changed when you
change an object, up to four lines of texts can be inserted into
the table.
Click on OK to close the history display again.
0.0

CHAPTER Storing, Sending and
D.5 Filming Data D.5
To backup data and to reduce the amount of data stored in the

local database you should store patient and examination data
at regular intervals. For storing you can equip your system with
a CD recorder, or connect the system to a central archive via
the network. D.5
If your system is connected to the central data network of your

hospital, you can transfer the examination data via this network
to another location in your hospital organization. You can use
this facility, for example, if you want to have examination results
evaluated at another work station or store them centrally. D.5
To process or otherwise use images with other applications,

you export them into the file system. D.5
Finally you can use the Patient Browser to film images for doc-
umentation or reporting. D.5
Select the required patient and examination data in the naviga-

tion area or content area of the Patient Browser window. After
that start storing, sending, or filming with the appropriate menu
item or by using the toolbar. D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.51

Storing, Sending and Filming Data Patient Browser
Storing data on an external medium D.5
Your system is equipped with a CD recorder for writing data to

CD. A CD drive is available for reading data.
D.5
Inserting CD D.5 Press the eject button on the CD drive.

Place the CD-R into the drawer.
Press the eject button on the drive again.
Storing data on CD D.5 Select the data that you want to archive in the navigation or
content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Transfer > Export To....
Select the data medium you require in the Export To dialog
box.
D.5 Click on Export to save the data on the selected data
medium.
The actual procedure for storage to CD-R, recording a CD-R,

starts automatically or can be triggered manually.
Page J.210, Automatic start of the write operation
Page J.211, Starting writing manually D.5
0.0

Patient Browser Storing, Sending and Filming Data
Sending data via the network D.5
If your system is connected to a network, you can send patient

and examination data to other workstations via the network with
the Send To... function.
Page J.33, Sending data D.5
Select the patient, study, series or the images in the naviga-

tion area or content area.
Standard address D.5
D.5 Press the Send To Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
Or
D.5
Call up Transfer > Send To Node 1 or Transfer > Send To

Node 2 to send the data to one of the preconfigured
addresses in the network.
Or D.5
D.5 Click on one of the two icon buttons on the toolbar.
The data are sent to the selected address. D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.53

Selecting a destination D.5 Call up Transfer > Send To....

Or D.5
D.5 Click on the appropriate button on the toolbar instead.
Select the network address(es) you require in the Send To

dialog box.
D.5 Click on Send to send the selected data to the required
address(es).
0.0

Printing patient data from data

media D.5
If a printer is connected to your system and you have stored

your patient data on local media (e.g. CD-R), you can print out
the data directly from there.
D.5
Select a drive in the navigation area.

Select the patient data you want to print out.
Showing print preview D.5 To show the data in the print preview, select Patient > Print
Preview.
Printing out the data list D.5 To print out the data list, select Patient > Print List.
The content and date of creation of the list appears in the
header of the list of patients. For all other data levels the con-
tent of the information area is also printed out.
The list is always printed in English.
Changing printer settings D.5 To change any printer settings, select Patient > Print... and
make your settings in the dialog box that opens.
Click OK to confirm your changes.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.55

Exporting images to the file

system D.5
If you want to process images with other programs, you can

export them to a defined directory on your system hard disk in
certain image formats (Export To Off-line).
Page J.42, Exporting images to the file system
D.5
Select the images for export.

Call up Transfer > Export to Off-line....
Select the required directory in the Export to Off-line dialog
box.
Select the required image format (DICOM, TIFF, bitmap, or
JPEG).
D.5 Click on OK to save the selected images as individual files.
0.0

Filming D.5
You can use the Patient Browser to send single images or all
images of one or more patients, studies or series to the Filming
task card.
D.5
Transferring images to Select the data in the navigation or content area.

Filming D.5
Call up Patient > Copy to Film Sheet or click on the icon

button.
Or D.5
Press the Copy to Film Sheet key on the symbol keypad.
Or
D.5
Click the Filming card to the top of the stack and double-click
on the entries that you want to film in the Patient Browser.
Or D.5
Drag the selection to the Filming task card with the mouse
(drag & drop).
Just like loading the images into the Viewing task card you can
determine in which segment of the film sheet the images are to
appear.
Page D.35, Drag & drop D.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.57

With one of the above commands, all the selected images are
transferred to the Filming task card. Depending on whether
Auto Expose has been activated there, the images are
exposed on film immediately, as soon as a film sheet is full, or
they are first collected in a film job.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
D.5
Film preview D.5 Call up Patient > Film Preview to view a preview showing
how the images will be filmed or printed.
Or D.5
D.5 Click on the Film Preview icon button on the toolbar.
0.0

Exposing images on film D.5 You can expose or print a patients images that you have col-
lected in a film job from the Patient Browser. To do that you do
not have to switch to the Filming task card first. D.5
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task to transfer all images in

the film job to the camera or printer.
Or D.5

If you have transferred more than one patients images to the
Filming task card so that more than one film job exists, a dia-
log box is displayed. In this dialog box you can select the film
job you wish to expose on film or print on paper.
Page O.211, Exposing current patient
You cannot expose multiframe images directly from the
Patient Browser. You must first load them into the Viewing
task card.
Page G.713, Filming/printing images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.59

Film Task Status D.5 You can obtain an overview of all film jobs that have already
been sent to a camera or printer and, for example, change the
sequence in which they are to be processed.
Page O.53, Viewing and manipulating film jobs
D.5
Call up Patient > Film Task Status to display the Film Task
Status dialog box with a list of all pending film jobs.
Or D.5
0.0

CHAPTER
D.6 Maintaining your Data D.6
If you maintain your data collection regularly you can keep your
data management clear and access times to the databases
short. This is an important contribution to the efficiency of daily
examinations. D.6
You can obtain information about the work status of patient

and examination data and can edit it. In this way you can
record the processing stage that a patients images are at.
You can mark important examination data so that you will find
it more easily later on.
You can delete patient or examination data that has already
been stored from the local database.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.61

Maintaining your Data Patient Browser
Defining the work status D.6
The work status indicates the processing stage of patient and

examination data. This status is indicated as an abbreviation in
every list entry in the content area. Except read and verified
all work states will be set by the system. D.6
Via the work status, you can define, for example, precondi-
tions for storing and sending data.
Chapter J.7, Configuring Data Transfer
When Security is activated, you can define the work status

only if you are authorized to do so.
Abbreviations The abbreviation consists of seven parts: D.6
(e.g. com/p/a/s/e/r/h)
com/p/a/s/e/r/H - the first part provides information about the
D.6
progress of the study and whether the results have been

checked by the physician:
The study has been completed (com/...).
The images have already been read (rea/...).
The images and examination data have already been veri-
fied (ver/...).
com/p/a/s/e/H - the second part states whether
all (P/..),
a part of (.../p/...), or
no (.../ /...)
images of this patient, study, or series have been printed or
exposed on film.
0.0

Patient Browser Maintaining your Data
com/p/a/s/e/r/H the third component shows the following

status:
(.../A/...) Data have been archived completely
(.../AC/...) Data have been archived and committed
(.../AV/...) Data have been archived and checked
(.../A?/...) Archiving and checking data is pending
(.../Af/...) Archiving and checking data has failed
(.../a/...) Part of the data has been archived
(.../ /...) No data have been archived
com/p/a/s/e/r/H by the fourth component you can see with
which scope and status the images of the patient, examina-
tion, or series have been sent via the network:
(.../S/...) Data have been sent completely
(.../SC/...) Data have been sent and committed
(.../SV/...) Data have been sent and checked
(.../S?/...) Sending and checking data is pending
(.../Sf/...) Sending and checking data has failed
(.../s/...) Part of the data has been sent
(.../ /...) No data have been sent
com/p/a/s/e/r/H the fifth component states whether
all (E/...),
part (e/...) or
none (/...)
of the images of this patient, examination, or series have
been exported to data medium.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.63

r/com/p/a/s/e/sr/H the sixth part indicates whether

all (R/...),
a part of (r/...) or
no ( /...)
images of this patient, study, or series have been imported
into your local database via the network (received).
com/p/a/s/e/r/H the seventh part indicates whether
changes have been made to this record, i.e. whether a his-
tory of changes has been created (.../H)
or not (.../).
Note that capital or lower case letters indicate that all (capital
letter) or some (lower case letter) of the data have been pro-
cessed.
0.0

Entering the work status D.6 Most of the entries in the work status abbreviation are made
automatically as soon as a data record has been processed
(e.g. an image has been exposed on film). D.6
As a user, you can enter the following work statuses for studies
and series in your local database: D.6
com/... (completed) study has been completed

rea/... (read) the images have been reviewed by the physi-
cian
ver/... (verified) the images have been approved
The completed flag is set automatically.
D.6 Call up Edit > Set State and select the work status that you
want to assign.
Or
D.6
D.6 Click on the relevant icon button on the toolbar.
rea ver Please note that automatic data transfer might be triggered
com
by assigning the completed status. If automatic data trans-
fer has been defined at image level, you must trigger data
transfer manually.
Page J.72, Automatic data transfer
Assignment of a work status is not possible in the Scheduler.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.65

Marking examination data D.6
With the Patient Browser you can mark individual items of

patient or examination data in order to find them and process
them more quickly later on. D.6
With the Filter menu you can search for marked data specif-
ically.
Page D.211, Filtering data
Marking items D.6 Select one or more patients, studies, series, or images in the
navigation area or content area.
Call up Edit > Mark in the main menu of the Patient

Browser to mark the selected patient and examination data.
Or D.6
D.6 Open a popup menu in the navigation or content area with

the right mouse button (or Shift + F10) and select Mark.
Or D.6
Press the Mark key on the symbol keypad (Num 3).
0.0

Display of marked data D.6
You can recognize marked patient and examination data in the

content area by the list entry M in the Mark Status column.
This entry appears on the patient level only. It does not appear
on the study or series level.
Unmarking items D.6 Select the data which you want to unmark in the navigation
or content area.
Call up Edit > Unmark.

Or D.6
Remove the mark with Unmark in the popup menu (right

mouse button or Shift + F10).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.67

Procedure tracking with MPPS D.6
After completion of an examination and all associated evalua-

tions, you can document the work you have done in a perfor-
mance report. This report can then be used, for example, for
invoicing the costs. D.6
Your system creates the performance report during patient reg-

istration. During examination and postprocessing of the exami-
nation results, the report is updated.
D.6
Editing the performance documentation D.6
Before you conclude your work on the examination by archiving,

check and add missing entries to the performance report. D.6
Select the patient, the examination, or one of the associated

series or images from the Patient Browser.
Call up Patient > Show MPPS.
Or D.6
D.6 Click on the button on the toolbar.
The window Modality Performed Procedure Step is dis-

played. D.6
0.0

0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.69

MPPS status D.6 As soon as you select a series the MPPS status in the field Sta-
tus is displayed. It consists of three parts (e.g. "COMPLETED"/
"HIS"/"S"):
D.6
The first part provides information about the processing status:

D.6
"IN PROGRESS" if MPPS is currently being processed,

"COMPLETED" if MPPS is completed,
"DISCONTINUED" if MPPS has been canceled,
"OPEN" (at the Patient/Study level) if at least one MPPS
has the status IN PROGRESS,
"DONE" (at the Patient/Study level) if no MPPS has the sta-
tus IN PROGRESS,
" ", if no MPPS exists.
0.0

The second part describes the location at which the working

step has been planned:
D.6
"HIS", if the planned working step has been assigned via the
HIS/RIS system,
"LOC" if the working step has been planned locally,
" ", if you are on the Patient/Study level.
The third part provides information about the work status in a

message to the HIS/RIS-System:
D.6
"s", if creation of the performance report has been success-

fully sent to the HIS/RIS system,
"S" if COMPLETED/DISCONTINUED has been successfully
sent to the HIS/RIS system,
" " if you are on the Patient/Study level.
Checking data D.6 Check the entries for the patient and examination in the
areas PATIENT, STUDY, and MPPS.
Correct the data and enter a comment, if necessary.
You cannot make entries in all fields.
0.0

Displaying actions, billing D.6
In the lower part of the window Modality Performed Proce-

dure Step, the examination data are listed on three subtask
cards ordered by different aspects. You can select them by
clicking on their tab. D.6
Examination steps D.6
D.6 Click the Actions card into the foreground to display a list of
the examination steps performed.
Cost information D.6
D.6 Click on the Billing card for a cost-related statement of the

services rendered and the materials consumed (film sheets).
0.0

Sending and concluding a report D.6
If all data in the performance report are entered correctly, you

can close the report and therefore also the examination. If fur-
ther working steps are planned, you can save the report tempo-
rarily and conclude it later. D.6
Depending on operational requirements, you can pass the

report on to the HIS/RIS system. D.6
Saving D.6
D.6 Click on the Save button to save your changes to the report.
The examination has not yet been concluded.
D.6
Or D.6
Concluding D.6
D.6 Click on the Completed button to conclude the report and

the examination.
A message indicating this is sent to the HIS/RIS system, if con-
nected. D.6
You cannot make any further changes to the performance

report.
0.0

Or D.6
Exiting as discontinued D.6
D.6 Click on the Discontinued button if you do not want to con-

tinue examination.
The report is also concluded and a message indicating that is
sent to the HIS/RIS system, if connected. D.6
You cannot make any further changes to the performance

report.
Or D.6
Sending to the HIS/RIS D.6
D.6 Click on the Send button to mark the report as "in progress"
and pass it on the HIS/RIS system.
0.0

Closing the performance report without

saving D.6
The Modality Performed Procedure Step window is automat-

ically closed if you conclude, save, or send a report. If you have
only opened the report to view it, close it without changes. D.6
D.6 Click on Close window to exit the dialog box.
0.0

Deleting data D.6
If an examination has been completed and all the examination

results and images have been reviewed and commented, you
can store the data and then delete it from the database. D.6
When Security is activated, you can delete data only if you

D.6
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: The flags A (Archive) and S (Send)
respectively only indicate the receipt of the images. They do
not indicate successful storage in the intended archive. D.6
Consequence: The data may be lost if it is deleted by the
sender e.g., by an auto delete mechanism and if it cannot
be stored by the receiver. D.6
Remedy: Before deleting data from your local database

ensure that this data is safely stored in the intended archive.
Always use 'storage commitment' if supported by sender
and receiver of data. D.6
Please note D.6
Page J.12, CAUTION on Storage Commitment D.6
0.0

Select the data that you want to delete in the navigation area
or content area.
Call up Edit > Delete in the main menu of the Patient

Browser or open a popup menu and select Delete there.
Or D.6
D.6 Click on the button on the toolbar.
0.0

A dialog box is displayed in which you can again confirm that

you really want to delete the data you have selected. D.6
Confirm the question with Yes to delete the selected patient

and examination data.
You can turn this confirmation dialog box off in Browser Con-
figuration. After that, unprotected data will always be deleted
immediately without confirmation.
If the data have been delete-protected expressly or because
of their work status, a dialog box to that effect appears.
Page D.619, Deleting data with missing work status
0.0

Deleting data with If you attempt to delete data for which the work status does not
missing work status D.6 allow deletion, a message box is displayed. D.6
In this message box you can see why you cannot delete the
selected data. For example, because it is first necessary to per-
form a number of processing steps before it can be deleted. D.6
In the Browser Configuration you can define in which work
status you are allowed to delete data.
0.0

D.6 Click on Yes to delete the data record stated in the message
box despite the missing states.
Or D.6
D.6 Click on Yes to All if you have selected more than one data
record for deletion and you want to delete all the records
regardless of their work status.
Or D.6
D.6 Click on No in order not to delete the data record stated in

the message box.
Or D.6
D.6 Click on Cancel to cancel deletion.
0.0

Protecting data from You can protect patient and examination data from accidental
deletion D.6 deletion.
D.6
Select the data that you want to protect against deletion in

the navigation or content area.
Call up Edit > Protect in the main menu of the Patient

Browser.
Or D.6
Click on the icon button on the toolbar.

D.6
Or D.6
Select Protect in the popup menu (right mouse button or

Shift + F10).
You can now no longer simply delete the selected data. Delete
protection always includes all lower data levels and the related
entries of the higher data levels. For example, if you protect a
study entry you can no longer delete the individual images of
that study nor the patient entry. D.6
Data that you have assigned delete protection to, are pro-
tected from both moving and correction.
Page D.410, Moving data
Page D.42, Correcting patient or examination data
0.0

Display of delete-
protected data D.6
Patient and examination data that are assigned delete protec-

tion can be identified by the list entry Prot in the Mark Status
column in the content area. This entry appears on the patient
level only. It does not appear on the study or series level.
D.6
Removing delete If you want to correct, move, or delete data without a message
protection D.6 box being displayed, you must remove the delete protection
again.
D.6
Call up Edit > Remove Protection in the main menu or

Remove Protection in the popup menu to remove the delete
protection.
Or D.6
Click on the icon button in the toolbar.
0.0

Clear Scheduler D.6 With Clear Scheduler you can determine which entries of the
Scheduler are to be deleted. D.6
Call up Edit > Clear Scheduler in the menu of the Patient

Browser.
The dialog box Clear Scheduler is displayed. D.6
Activate the relevant checkbox to select the entries to be

deleted:
all procedure steps already performed

all procedure steps not scheduled for your site
all procedure steps not scheduled for your modality
all procedure steps not scheduled for a given day
0.0

Confirm your selection with OK to save your settings and to

delete the relevant procedure steps.
The procedure steps including the corresponding actions are
deleted. The associated methods and patients are also deleted
unless further procedure steps exist. D.6
Or D.6
D.6 Click Cancel to dismiss the operation.
You can also have the scheduler cleared automatically after

an update via RIS, i.e., all Worklist items that are not sent by
the RIS will be removed from your Local Database.
Contact your service technician for the configuration of this
functionality.
0.0

CHAPTER Configuring the Patient
D.7 Browser D.7
With the Browser Configuration dialog box you can adapt the
Patient Browser to your method of working. D.7
You can change the following settings: D.7
General settings such as the layout of the toolbar and the dis-
play of the work status.
The hierarchical view of the information levels (patient, study,
series, image) in the navigation and content area.
The display of the individual information levels (study, series,
image) in the content area.
syngo programmed user-defined applications in the Private
Applications menu.
D.7 Call up Options > Configure Browser... in the menu bar of

the Patient Browser.
The Browser Configuration window with the three tab cards
General, Tree View and Single View is displayed. D.7
In the Basics part of this manual you can read how to call up
and exit configuration windows, save changes, or reset set-
tings back to the as-delivered state.
Chapter A.3, Configuring the User Interface
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.71

Configuring the Patient Browser Patient Browser
General settings D.7
On the General tab card you can configure the toolbar of the
Patient Browser, define which work status is displayed for the
examination data, and set the influence of the work status on
delete permission. D.7
Click the General tab card into the foreground to activate this
card.
0.0

Patient Browser Configuring the Patient Browser
Toolbar D.7
You can place buttons for the functions of the Patient Browser
that you require frequently on the toolbar and remove rarely-
used functions. D.7
In a later software version you can also configure functions of

other applications in the Patient Browser toolbar by using
the application selection list (dimmed in this version).
Select an action that you want to place as an icon button on

the toolbar from the Tool Pool.
D.7 Click on the down arrow to place the button on the toolbar.
Repeat this step until the toolbar contains all the buttons you
require.
If you want to remove an icon button from the toolbar, select

the corresponding action on the toolbar.
D.7 Click on the up arrow to remove the button from the toolbar.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.73

Work status D.7
In the middle part of the General tab card you can define which
work status is displayed in the content area for the examination
data and in which processing state data is released for deletion.D.7
Display of work status D.7
Select the check box for a work status if you want this work
status to be displayed in the content area of the Patient
Browser.
You will find information about the work status on
Delete authorization D.7
Select the check box of a work status. Data without this sta-
tus cannot be deleted without explicit confirmation in a mes-
sage box.
0.0

Delete confirmation D.7
The default setting is to have your system display a confirmation

window before each deletion even if the data concerned have
already reached the work status required for deletion. This fur-
ther reduces the risk of data being deleted accidentally. You can
activate and deactivate this confirmation in the configuration.
D.7
D.7 Click on the Confirm Deletion check box to have a confirma-

tion box displayed every time before data is deleted.
A check mark in the check box shows that deletion confirmation
is activated. D.7
Or D.7
Deselect the check box to suppress the confirmation for

deletion.
D.7
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Deletion confirmation deactivated. D.7
Consequence: Loss of data possible. D.7
Remedy: Do not deactivate deletion confirmation. D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.75

Hierarchical view in the navigation

and content area D.7
On the Tree View tab card you can define what information is
listed in the content area of the Patient Browser in the hierar-
chy levels (e.g. patient). You can also hide hierarchy levels in
the navigation and content areas. You can also configure the
icon display of series and images.
D.7
Click the Tree View tab card into the foreground.

Selecting a database D.7
Select Scheduler to define the display of preregistered

patient data in the Patient Browser.
Or D.7
Pick Database from the selection list of databases to config-

ure the local database view.
The names and information that appear on the card Tree

View for the different data levels differ depending on the data-
base that you have called up (e.g. Study in the local database
corresponds to Procedure in the scheduler).
0.0

Selecting a data level D.7
Select the hierarchy level Patient, Procedure or Procedure

Step in the scheduler.
Or D.7
Select the hierarchy level Patient, Study, Series or Instance

in the local database
The Tree View tab card differs slightly depending on the hier-
archy level selected. On the Series level the Modality selec-
tion list is also displayed. On the Instance level the selection
list Data Type appears instead.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.77

Example: Data level

Procedure Step /
Scheduler D.7
0.0

Example: Data level Series/

Local database
D.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.79

List entries D.7
You can make the content area of the Patient Browser clearer
by having your own selection of information listed.
D.7
Adding list entries D.7 In the Heading Pool select which entries you want to have
displayed in the content area.
Select the entries in the sequence in which you want to have
them displayed.
D.7 Click on the down arrow to place the entry in the Heading
Settings for the table in the content area.
Repeat this step until the table contains all the required
entries in the content area.
If an entry is dimmed in the Heading Pool it is already con-
tained in the Heading Settings and vice versa.
0.0

Modality-specific entries D.7 In series (local database), the information displayed in the con-
tent area is modality dependent. Depending on the modality
you can also define specific entries in the content area. D.7
Select a modality on the data level Series if you want to cre-

ate list entries in the content area.
Or D.7
Select Default to define the information to be displayed with

series of different modalities, or for which no modal-specific
settings can be made.
D.7 Transfer the required list entries from the Heading Pool to
the Heading Settings.
0.0

Data type specific entries D.7 The list display of images in the content area depends on the
data type. You can select the list entries specifically for each
data type from the relevant Heading Pool. D.7
Select a data type on the Instance data level if you want to

create list entries in the content area specifically for the
images of that data type.
Or D.7
Select Default to define which information is to be displayed

in the content area for images of different data types, or for
which no data type specific settings can be made.
Transfer the required list entries from the Heading Pool to

the Heading Settings.
0.0

Removing list entries D.7
Select an entry in the Heading Settings if you want to

remove it from the table.
D.7 Click on the up arrow to remove the entry from the table in
the content area.
Hiding data levels D.7
You can define which of the hierarchy levels, study, series, or

instance you want displayed in the navigation and content area.D.7
Click on the Hide check box to hide this data level.
0.0

List display / image stamp display D.7
For display of series and images in the content area you can
choose between display as a list and display as image stamps.
You can label the image stamps with up to two entries. To
assign these entries proceed exactly as for definition of the list
entries in the content area.
Page D.710, List entries
D.7
Click on the Icon Configuration option button.

Select the entries in the Heading Pool with which you want
to label the entries for series and images and click on the
down arrow. The entries now appear in the Icon Labels box.
0.0

Single View of the content area D.7
In the card Single View, define to which hierarchy level data are
to be displayed if the navigation area is hidden. Each data entry
is displayed in exactly one line. D.7
Click the Single View tab card into the foreground and select
the database you want to configure.
Page D.76, Selecting a database
0.0

Setting the data level D.7 In the single view, the content area always shows the same data
level. D.7
Select the data level that you want to have displayed when
switching from the Tree View to the Single View in the con-
tent area.
It depends on the data level that you have set for the single view
of the content area what information can be displayed about the
list entries. For example, if you have set the Series level to be
displayed, you can have information from the levels patient,
study, and series displayed in the list of series.
D.7
Combining list entries D.7 You can configure the single view of the content area in a similar
way as the hierarchical view of the navigation and content area.
Page D.76, Hierarchical view in the navigation and content
area D.7
You can combine list entries of different information levels by

varying the data level for the pool in the Heading Pool from
which you then select the required entries. D.7
Define the data level in the selection list from which you want
to take list entries for the content area in the Heading Pool.
0.0

The Heading Pool now contains all the possible list entries
from the selected information level. D.7
Click on a list entry in the Heading Pool and move it into the
Heading Settings with the arrow down key or remove a list
entry from the Heading Settings with the arrow up key.
Now select another Level, if necessary, to place list entries

of another data level from the Heading Pool into the Head-
ing Settings.
For the Series data level, you can set up modality- or data
type-specific list entries for the content area.
Page D.711, Modality-specific entries
Page D.712, Data type specific entries
0.0

Configuring user-defined
applications D.7

syngo MR programmed user-defined applications in the Pri-
vate Applications menu. D.7
0.0

CHAPTER
D.8 Reporting D.8
Results of evaluation (images, plots, etc.) can be stored as

structured reports (SR) in DICOM format.
D.8
Purpose D.8 To be able to edit and transmit the reports.

D.8
Content of the report D.8 The following information can be recorded in a report: D.8
Data of hospital or practice (name, address, ...)

Demographic patient data
Quantitative results of the examination
(wall motion scoring)
Qualitative results of the examination
Summary and conclusions consisting of
individual diagnoses, measured values, and medical codes
Recommendations for further diagnosis or therapy
Links to medical images or graphics
Links to curve plots
You are able to select, edit, and print reports on the Argus task
card or in the Patient Browser. Additionally, the Patient
Browser sends reports via the network. D.8
D.8
N O TE
In this version of syngo MR, this functionality is only
available for Argus reporting. D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.81

Reporting Patient Browser
Identification of a report in Reports in the Patient Browser are stored on the same level as
the Patient Browser D.8 the measurement or evaluation results. D.8
Reports are identified in the Patient Browser as follows: D.8
Report icon in the directory structure.

D.8
Report icon in the content area (report selected).

D.8
Report icon in the content area (study selected). D.8
0.0

Patient Browser Reporting
Basics D.8
The reports are encoded according to the DICOM standard.

The DICOM standard provides predefined structures that limit
you in structuring reports. It is therefore quite unlike writing a
report in a regular text editor. D.8
The predefined report structure has the following advantages: D.8

Each item of information is classified and integrated to a hier-
archical structure.
The DICOM structure facilitates subsequent evaluation of
the data from the report.
Use of the standard enables communication with the DICOM
world. Sharing data is easy. Reports from other systems and
applications can be displayed and evaluated in syngo MR.
Similarly, reports from syngo MR can be used on other sys-
tems.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.83

Layout D.8
Each item of information in a report is a "content item" D.8
Content items D.8 A content item comprises a "name" and a "value". D.8
The name is always a code. D.8
There are various types of values: D.8
Free text
Code
Numeric value with unit
Person's name, date, time
Reference to a DICOM object (image, diagram, or unformat-
ted text)
Relationship between Unless content items are suitably linked, they are of little use.
content items D.8 For this reason a DICOM report provides information items in a
hierarchical structure. D.8
The "document title" item is at the top of the hierarchy. Below it,
the remaining items of information can be placed in different
relationships to each other in a complex tree structure. D.8
For example, the following relationships between content items

of a report are possible: D.8
Configuration within the hierarchy

Property of a higher-level information item
Conclusions from higher-level information items
Reference for a higher-level information item
0.0

Codes in general D.8 The codes for report contents are frequently automatically
assigned by the system. Usually they cannot be changed by the
user. D.8
It is only possible to set or define new diagnostic codes for a sin-

gle report.
Page D.815, Setting diagnostic codes
D.8
Diagnostic codes D.8 Coded texts are usually integrated into reports to facilitate
searches and evaluations. These are obtained from special dic-
tionaries of encode scheme designators. D.8
A DICOM code entry consists of three parts: D.8
code value,
e.g. N11.1
code scheme designator,
e.g. I9 or UCUM
code meaning,
e.g. chronic obstructive pyelonephritis
syngo MR allows you to select a standard code scheme desig-
nator for reporting/diagnostics or for defining your own code
scheme designator.
D.8
Examples of diagnostic encoding scheme designators: D.8
SNOMED ("SNM3" and "SRT")

ACR Index for Radiological Diagnosis ("ACR")
ICD9 and ICD10 ("I9" and "I10")
ICD9-CM and ICD10-PCS ("I9C" and "I10P")
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.85

Creating a report D.8
Reports can be created from the Argus task card. They are
stored in the local database. D.8
Medical images are linked to the report as references. D.8
For more information about creating reports in Argus, refer to

the Argus Operator Manual.
Page 67, Creating a report D.8
0.0

Editing a report D.8
As soon as data acquisition in Argus has been completed, you

can edit a report at any time. D.8
In the report displayed, you can: D.8
set the completion status

set the verification status
record the report author
create or edit diagnostics and comments
enter the diagnostic code
delete parts of the report
The edited report can be stored. The changes in the current
report may either be stored in the same report or in a new report
depending on the completion status set. D.8
D.8
N OT E
Regularly save changes to a report during editing. Make
sure that you have saved your changes before you log off.
The dialog box will be closed and unsaved changes will be
lost. D.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.87

Opening a report D.8
Open the report in the Patient Browser. D.8
Select the report in the Patient Browser

Select Applications > Report Open from the main menu.
Or D.8
Double-click the report in the Patient Browser

The Report Editor window opens:
D.8
Legend D.8 (1) Data from the patient ID

(2) Report header:
Report author
(3) Information units:
Individual diagnoses and diagnostic code
(4) Toolbar of the window.
0.0

0.0
syngo MR 2006T D.89

Navigating in the report D.8
Since the report is one long document without running page

numbers, it includes a navigation function allowing you to go
directly to one of the main sections of the report. You can also
return directly to the beginning from anywhere in the report.
D.8
Going directly to The line below the report heading lists the information items it
information items D.8 contains. The names of the items listed are directly linked to the
information item in the report. D.8
Click the name of an information item, e.g. Ventricular Func-

tion Analysis.
The report display jumps to that item.
D.8
Alternatively, you can go to a position in the report (informa-

tion item) by scrolling via the scroll bar or by paging via the
keyboard.
0.0

Returning to the beginning A link takes you from the part of the report displayed directly
of the report D.8 back to the beginning of the report. D.8
This link takes the form of an arrow above a large information

item. It is linked directly with the beginning of the report. D.8
Click this arrow.

The report display now jumps back to the beginning. D.8
Alternatively, you can return to the beginning of the report by

scrolling via the scroll bar or paging via the keyboard.
0.0

Editing a report D.8
The opened report is automatically displayed in edit mode. D.8
In the report displayed, you can: D.8
set the completion status

set the verification status
record the report author
create or edit diagnostics and comments
enter the diagnostic code
delete parts of the report
Setting the completion By selecting a Completion Status you can indicate the
status D.8 progress of the report. The following statuses are available: D.8
Completed
Partial
Set the status in the Completion Status selection list.
0.0

D.8
N OT E
Once a report has been assigned the Complete status, it
has to be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible to
save changes to the existing report. D.8
D.8
Setting the verification The verification status is set in the same way as the completion
status D.8 flag. The following options are available: D.8
Unverified
Verified
Set the status in the Verification Status selection list.

D.8
N OT E
The verification status is for internal information only. It is
not of legal consequence. D.8
0.0

Recording the report The author has to be entered in the Report created by field. D.8
author's name D.8
Enter your name in the Report created by field.
Making and editing Some parts of the report contain input fields for recording addi-
diagnostics and commentsD.8 tional comments. D.8
Empty text input fields are not displayed in full. Instead, a plus
sign is shown in front of the name of the input field. To display
the input field, you only need to click the plus switch.
Click the relevant comment field in the selected part of the

report.
Enter a new comment or overwrite the existing comment.
0.0

Setting diagnostic The diagnostic codes are organized in coding schemes in the
codes D.8 DICOM format. syngo MR does not provide predefined
schemes. The diagnostic encoding scheme must therefore be
entered and managed in the Configuration by the diagnosing
physician or the hospital.
Page D.836, Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemesD.8
In addition to entering schemes with various diagnostic codes,
you are able to predefine a general scheme for reporting in the
Configuration. For this reason you only need to pick the code
from a selection in the report. D.8
D.8
N OT E
A diagnostic encoding scheme must be preset in the report
configuration before a report is edited for the first time. This
enables you to define the appropriate code either by
selecting it or entering it manually.
Page D.836, Create and edit diagnostic encoding
schemes D.8
Select the diagnostic code from the Conclusion list.
0.0

The diagnostic code is now displayed in the selection list. The

abbreviation for the scheme is shown at the right end of the list. D.8
If a diagnostic code does not include the scheme set, enter the
code manually in the Add Codes line. D.8
Select the empty item from the Conclusion selection list.
Enter the diagnostic code and the description of the code

into the two fields of the Add Codes line.
0.0

D.8
N OT E
When the report is saved, the manually entered diagnostic
code is assigned to the code scheme that you preset in the
Configuration. The code can now be edited again in the
configuration. D.8
D.8
Enlarged display of The default display shows images and tables with reduced size. D.8
images and tables D.8
0.0

A dialog box is provided for viewing the contents of the report in

their original size. D.8
Click this button.

A dialog box opens showing the image or the table in its original
size. D.8
0.0

Delete parts of the report D.8 You can delete unnecessary parts of the report at any time.
Based on the hierarchical structure of the information items not
only the main information item is deleted but all dependent
lower-level items as well. Lower-level information items are
indented to the right in the report. D.8
Before deleting, you have to first select the information item in

the report. D.8
It is not possible to select more than one item.
Click the tab of the information item to be deleted.

Or D.8
Click images, diagrams, or tables.

Or D.8
Click the minus sign of a text field.

The item is shown with a blue border. An X appears in the upper
left edge of the marker. D.8
0.0

You can undo the selection by clicking it again or by clicking

another item. Example:
Click the X above the selected part.

Or D.8
Press the Del key on your keyboard.

The content of the information item and all lower-level informa-
tion items are deleted from the report.
D.8
You can undo the deletion with the Reset button.
0.0

All changes in the You can undo all changes made in the report since it was last
report are undone D.8 saved.
D.8
Click the Reset button.

The entries and changes made in the report are undone. D.8
You can only undo all changes at once; it is not possible to

undo changes step-by-step.
0.0

Saving a report D.8
You can save changes in a report at any time. However, the way
the report is saved depends on its completion status. In case of
a partial completion status, changes are saved in the current
report. D.8
However you had set the completion status to Completed or

Verified the last time you saved, a new version of the report will
automatically be stored with the new version number. D.8
Additionally, a new version of the report is created, if the report

in the database is marked with one of the following flags: D.8
Printed
Archived
Archived + Verified
Archived + Committed
Sent
Sent + Committed
Exported
Received
The existing report is not changed if one of these flags is set.
After you have made your changes, you can save the report.
D.8
Click the Save button.
0.0

The images contained in the report are not saved. Instead,

references to the DICOM images are saved.
D.8
N OT E
Save the changed report before printing it out. If you
subsequently close the print preview without saving it in edit
mode, all changes to the report are lost. D.8
D.8
Closing the edit window D.8

Or D.8
Click the X icon in the top right corner of the window.

The Report - Editor window is closed; display of the entire
report is ended as well. Unsaved changes to the report are lost. D.8
0.0

Printing a report D.8
Before you print a report, you can look at the contents of the
report again in the print preview. D.8
If you want to make changes to the report, you can go back to

the edit window from the print preview at any time.
Page D.826, Close the print preview
D.8
Opening the print preview D.8
The print preview is opened from the edit window. D.8
D.8
N OT E
Print mode is only available to users who have activated a
print privilege for the report in their user account. D.8
If you do not have a print privilege, the Print Mode button is

deactivated. D.8
Click the Print Mode button in the edit window.
The current report is displayed in the print preview mode. You

cannot edit the report in this mode. D.8
0.0

0.0

Close the print preview D.8
There are two ways of closing the print preview: D.8
Switch back to edit mode to continue editing the report.

Close the window and with it the entire report.
Switching to edit mode D.8 If you do not want to print out the report or want to make
changes to the report before printing, you can return to the edit
mode from the print mode.
D.8
Click the Edit Mode button in the print preview.
In the dialog box, the report is now displayed again in the edit
mode. D.8
0.0

Closing the window D.8

Or D.8

The print preview is closed, which also closes the display of the
entire report. Unsaved changes to the report are lost.
D.8
Starting to print D.8
You can only start printing a report from the print preview (print
mode). D.8
Click the Print button.
A print dialog box opens. You can make the necessary print set-
tings here. D.8
0.0

D.8
Set the required printer.

Define the print range.
Set the number of copies you require.
Click the Print button to start printing.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the settings and close
the dialog box.
0.0

Sending a report D.8
If your system is connected to a network, you can send reports

of a patient to other workstations via the network with the func-
tion Send To....
Page J.33, Sending data D.8
Reports are sent in "Secondary Capture" DICOM format. You

will find more detailed information in the DICOM conformance
statement.
D.8
N OT E
Referenced images are not automatically sent with the
report. They must be sent separately. D.8
D.8
N OT E
After a report has been sent, any subsequent changes to it
can only be saved as a new report. It is no longer possible
to save changes to the sent report. D.8
Select the report in the Patient Browser
0.0

Standard address D.8
Press the Send to node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
Or D.8
Select Transfer > Send to node 1 or Transfer > Send to

node 2.
The data are sent to one of the preconfigured addresses in the
network. D.8
Or D.8
D.8 Click one of the two buttons on the toolbar.
The report is sent to the selected address.
D.8
Selecting a destination D.8 Select Transfer > Send....

Or D.8
Click the appropriate button on the tool bar.
The Send To dialog box opens. D.8
Select the network address(es) here.

D.8 Click Send to send the report to the address(es).
0.0

Configuration settings for the report D.8
You can make various settings for the report in a configuration

dialog box. D.8
Use the two subtask cards in the configuration dialog box where
you can enter presets for creating reports. D.8
General settings
for setting the report language and for inserting your own
logo in the report.
Encode scheme designators
for creating diagnostic encoding catalogs that can then be
set in the report.
Proposal for various configuration settings: D.8
Open the configuration dialog box

Enter general settings
Create and edit diagnostic encoding schemes
Save and close the configuration settings
0.0

Opening a configuration D.8
You can select the configuration of the reports from the Appli-
cations menu in the Patient Browser. D.8
Select Applications > Report Tools > Configuration from

the main menu of the Patient Browser.
The Report Configuration dialog box opens: D.8
0.0

Enter general settings D.8
The general settings include the report language and the

optional insertion of your own logo into the report.
D.8
Setting the report You are able to predefine the language used in the report on the
language D.8 General Settings subtask card. This configuration setting
applies to all subsequent new reports.
D.8
Click the General Settings subtask card into the foreground,

if necessary.
You can now predefine the language used for the report via a
selection list. D.8
Select the language from the Report Language selection

list.
D.8
N OT E
The language set only applies to the reports and may differ
from the language set on the system. D.8
0.0

Installing a user logo D.8 You can insert your own user logo into the report from the CD-
ROM or diskette drive of your station. D.8
Before the system can use your logo, the following require-
ments have to be met: D.8
the logo has to be stored in GIF format.

the name of the logo has to be Logo.gif.
To install the logo, proceed as follows: D.8
Save the logo on a suitable data medium (CD or diskette).

Insert this data medium into the appropriate drive on your
station.
Now click on either the Install Logo from CD or Install Logo

from Floppy button, depending on the data medium used.
0.0

The logo is now imported and will be used in all reports stored
after successful completion of the automatic installation. D.8
If installation is successful, this message is displayed: D.8
If installation was not successful, a message to this effect will

appear.
D.8
If necessary, save the settings prior to performing additional

changes.
Page D.842, Save and close configuration settings
0.0

Create and edit diagnostic encoding

schemes D.8
You can set the encoding scheme designators in the reports in

the Report - Configuration dialog box via the Coding
Schemes subtask card. You can also set up complete encoding
schemes with the relevant diagnostic codes. D.8
Click the Coding Schemes subtask card on the Report -

Configuration dialog box into foreground.
0.0

Configuration options: D.8
Predefining the encoding scheme

Changing or creating a new diagnostic code
Creating a new encoding scheme
Predefining the encoding As a rule, predefine an encoding scheme in the configuration

scheme D.8 before editing a report in the Patient Browser for the first time.
Otherwise, it is not possible to assign a diagnostic code in the
report. D.8
The first time configuration is called, no encoding schemes are

defined: D.8
Select the required catalog from the Coding Schemes

selection list.
The coding schemes ICD-9 and ICD-10 empty (without
codes) are already created on your system by default.
You can create further encoding schemes as required.

Page D.841, Creating a new encoding scheme D.8
0.0

Changing or creating a A code catalog may contain different diagnostic codes. This
new diagnostic code D.8 enables you to select the diagnostic codes quickly in the report.
Page D.815, Setting diagnostic codes D.8
Select the required code scheme.

Click the Edit Codes button.
The text editor for the codes of the active encoding scheme
opens: D.8
This dialog box provides you with explanations and an example

for editing diagnostic codes. Lines preceded by "#" are com-
ment lines. D.8
0.0

In all other lines, you can define the codes you require, one
code per line. Example of code entry: D.8
N11.1:chronic obstructive pyelonephritis D.8
The complete code consists of the code value (N11.1) followed

by a colon and a short description of the code (chronic
obstructive pyelonephritis). D.8
Enter the required code line by line.

You also define how the diagnostic code should appear in the
report. The following display formats are possible: D.8
D.8
Display format Identifier

Code value and code description, e.g. 0
N11.1:chronic obstructive pyelonephritis
Code value only, e.g. 1
N11.1
Code description only, e.g. 2
chronic obstructive pyelonephritis
The identifier for the display format is changed in the line Dis-
playFormat =.
0.0

Example: Entering a diagnostic code and a display identifier:D.8
To activate the settings made in the text editor, you have to save
them in the text editor (not to be confused with the Report
Configuration dialog box). D.8
Open File > Save in the text editor.

After that, you can close the text editor. D.8
0.0

Creating a new encoding D.8
scheme D.8
Click the Add Scheme button.

These additional edit boxes are displayed: D.8
Enter a name for the encoding scheme in the Scheme field.

Enter a name for the version number in the Version field.
Enter a short description for the encoding scheme in the
Description field.
Now you can define further codes in a new encoding scheme,

as required. D.8
Click the Add Codes button.

Enter the code in the text editor of the new scheme.
Page D.838, Changing or creating a new diagnostic code
0.0

Save and close configuration settings D.8
Save the configuration setting made in the reports, if you want

to apply them later. D.8

The settings are saved and the Report Configuration dialog
box remains open.
D.8
You may then close the Report Configuration dialog box. D.8
If you close the dialog box without saving first, you will lose all
changes made in the dialog box.
0.0

PART
E Patient Registration E.0
E.1 Introduction
Calling up Patient Registration ....................................... E.13
The Patient Registration window ................................... E.14
E.2 Registering a New Patient

Entries in the PATIENT area .......................................... E.23
Entering personal details of a new patient ................. E.23
Entering additional information .................................. E.26
Displaying detailed information .................................. E.28
Entering admission data .............................................. E.211
Entering examination data ........................................... E.212
Entering one study ................................................... E.212
Entering the patient position .................................... E.215
Administration numbers and comment .................... E.216
Entering institution data ............................................... E.217
Completing data entry .................................................. E.218
Assigning Patient Group .......................................... E.219
Registering a patient for the examination ................ E.220
Preregistering a patient ........................................... E.224
Cancelling patient registration ................................. E.225
E.3 Registering a Known Patient

Performing an HIS/RIS query ........................................ E.32
Automatic query ......................................................... E.32
Manual query ............................................................. E.32
Searching in the Patient Registration window ................ E.34
Entering the patient name/ID ..................................... E.34
Starting a search ....................................................... E.36
Cancelling a search ................................................... E.36
Search list .................................................................. E.37
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E1
Contents Patient Registration
Accepting patient data................................................ E.38

Searching in the Patient Browser ................................. E.310
Completing your entries ............................................... E.313
Searching and registering in the HIS/RIS system ........ E.315
Calling up a patient worklist query ........................... E.316
Search list of the worklist query ............................... E.319
Accepting patient data.............................................. E.320
E.4 Configuring Patient Registration

Defining entries in the selection list ................................ E.42
Possible selection lists ............................................... E.43
Creating entries .......................................................... E.43
Default entries ............................................................ E.44
Configuring the patient search ....................................... E.45
Databases .................................................................. E.46
Limiting the number of patients found ........................ E.47
Display of the search list ............................................ E.48
Configuring the HIS/RIS system ..................................... E.49
Display expiry date of license................................... E.410
Settings for worklist update ...................................... E.411
Settings for patient RIS query .................................. E.413
0.0
E2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
E.1 Introduction E.1
Before you can examine a patient with your system, you must
register him or her. E.1
Registration means that you give your system all the informa-
tion about a patient that it requires for an examination. E.1
Depending on how registrations are organized in your hospital

and how much time you have for registration, you can choose
between different patient registration procedures.
E.1
Registration E.1 However, if you want to register a patient for an examination,

then you first enter his or her patient data or call it up from the
database and then examine the patient. E.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.11

Introduction Patient Registration
Preregistration E.1 If you want to prepare the system to examine a patient at a later
point in time, then you can preregister the patient.
For example, you can enter the data in the morning for all the
patients to be examined during the day. When you want to begin
an examination, simply call up this data and edit it, if necessary.
This saves time during the examinations.
E.1
HIS/RIS query E.1 If your system is linked to, and licensed and registered for an
HIS/RIS system (hospital and radiology information system),
you can call up data for the patient to be examined.
E.1
Security - Privileges E.1 InvokeRegistration allows to open the registration form and
perform registration. E.1
0.0
E.12 Operator Manual

Patient Registration Introduction
Calling up Patient Registration E.1
When Security is activated, you can register a patient only if you

are authorized to do so. E.1
You can call up patient registration both in the Patient menu,

and by using icon buttons on various task cards and from the
Patient Browser. You can choose between emergency regis-
tration and normal registration. E.1
Patient menu E.1
E.1 Call up Patient > Register....
The Patient Registration window is then displayed. E.1
Or E.1
Buttons E.1
E.1 Click on the icon button on the task cards or on the toolbar of
Or E.1
Symbol keypad E.1
E.1 Press the Patient Register key on the symbol keypad.
E.1
NOTE
The button Patient Browser may not function if a dialog box
is open and active. E.1
Click on the image area to deactivate the dialog box, or

0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.13

The Patient Registration window E.1
The Patient Registration window is subdivided into four areas

into which you can enter the following data: E.1
(1) Personal data of the patient (PATIENT)

(2) Referral data (HOSPITAL)
(3) Study-specific data (PROCEDURE)
(4) Institution data (INSTITUTION)
0.0

Patient Registration Introduction
Personal data of In the PATIENT area, you can enter all the personal details and
the patient E.1 any additional information about the patient. E.1
NOTE
Patient name, patient ID, date of birth and sex
are used for unique identification of a patient in the
databases or storage media. E.1
E.1
Referral data E.1 In the HOSPITAL area, you can enter the referring physician,
the preliminary diagnosis, preliminary admission ID, and the
hospital ward in which the patient is located.
E.1
Study-specific data E.1 In the PROCEDURE area, you can enter information about the
planned examination, e.g. the patient position and the examina-
tion to be conducted.
E.1
Institution data E.1 In the input fields of the INSTITUTION area, you can register
the name of your hospital or practice and the names of your
examinations personnel. E.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.15

0.0

CHAPTER
E.2 Registering a New Patient E.2
Your system does not yet contain data for a patient who has not
yet been examined in your hospital or practice.
Information on new patients must therefore be entered prior to
the examination.
E.2
Registration E.2 If you enter the patients data and want to examine the patient
immediately then you must fill in at least those input fields
whose names are displayed bold.
E.2
Preregistration E.2 If you only want to preregister the patient for an examination at
a later point in time, data about his or her sex, name, patient ID,
and date of birth are sufficient. E.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.21

Registering a New Patient Patient Registration
Information for new patients is entered in the blank Patient

Registration window. E.2
Call up the Patient Registration window.

Page E.13, Calling up Patient Registration
If you call up patient registration from the Patient Browser
make sure that you have not selected a patient or study there.
The input fields preconfigured by Siemens Service are shown

above. You can add further input fields to this configuration, e.g.
for example, a second operator.
Page A.44, Local service E.2
0.0

Patient Registration Registering a New Patient
Entries in the PATIENT area E.2
After you have called up patient registration, the cursor is in the

input field for patient name in the PATIENT area. E.2
The Exam and Preregister buttons remain deactivated until

you have entered all the information required to register or pre-
register a patient.
E.2
Entering personal details of a new patient E.2
Personal patient data include name, patient number, age, and

sex. This data uniquely identifies the patient in your data-
bases. E.2
E.2
Enter the patients last name, first name and, depending on

the configuration of your system, any title or suffix, if applica-
ble.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.23

Enter a patient ID and depending on the configuration of

your system any other numbers.
If you do not enter a patient ID, your system will automatically
generate an ID based on the date, time, abbreviation for day-
light-saving or standard time, and the identification number of
your system (unique worldwide). E.2
Enter the patients date of birth.
The input format for the date of birth depends on the regional
settings of your operating system. The valid input format is
displayed in the status line.
You may separate day, month, year with -, . or / or a blank.
You may enter the month numerically or as a three-letter
abbreviation.
You may enter the year with four or two digits.
Examples: Mar/21/55 or 3-21-1955 or 21 03 55.
Enter the year of birth with four digits for patients over
100 years old. Only dates of birth after 18.11.1858 are pro-
cessed correctly.
Enter the sex of the patient.
0.0

Your system has already calculated the age of the patient from
the date of birth you entered above. E.2
Check the age shown. If it is incorrect you must correct the

date of birth.
If you do not know the date of birth you can enter the esti-
mated age here. The system then calculates a date of birth
from the current date. In the selection field next to it you can
enter whether the age is in years, months or days (for exam-
ple for infants).
E.2
NOTE
Check once more that the patient name, patient number,
date of birth, and sex are correct to avoid confusion with
other patients. E.2
Enter the height of the patient.
Enter the weight of the patient.
The units will depend on the regional settings of your system.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.25

Entering additional information E.2
The planning and further procedure of an examination can

sometimes be simplified if you enter additional information
about the patient. E.2
Enter any additional information about the patient, e.g. prior

examinations, in the field Additional info.
If the comment extends over more than three lines, a scroll
bar appears on the right-hand border of the input field. You
can use it to scroll through the input field.
Calling up an overview E.2 For a better overview, you can check the text you have entered
again in a larger format. E.2
Click on the button Blow up in the field Additional info.
0.0

In the window Full Additional Patient Information, you can

read the text that you entered in the field Additional info.
When a patient is registered for the first time, this window
cannot be opened. Only when these dates are called up later,
this overview can also be displayed.
Click on Close to close the window again.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.27

Displaying detailed information E.2
Depending on the modality, it may be necessary to display addi-

tional patient data and information. E.2
Click on the button Details....

The window Additional Patient Attributes is displayed. E.2
0.0

E.2 When a patient is registered for the first time, this window
cannot be opened. Only when these dates are called up later,
the Additional Patient Attributes can also be displayed.
This field informs you whether your patient suffers from any
allergies, e.g. caused by medication.
Here you are informed about any allergies that patient might
have to contrast agents.
If a contrast agent has to be administered, the contrast agent

to be used is entered in this field.
This field informs you of any medication that has to be ad-

ministered to the patient before start of the examination.
This field tells you if special arrangements have to be made

for your patient, e.g. whether he or she requires a wheelchair
or the services of an interpreter.
This field gives you information about the general state of

health of your patient (e.g. reduced vision or loss of orienta-
tion).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.29

The field Smoking status tells you whether your patient is a

smoker or not.
This field tells you if a female patient is pregnant or not.
Under Last menstrual date you can see the date of the last
menstrual cycle of your patient.
In the field Additional patient history you will find informa-

tion about the previous history of the patient.
Like in the field Additional info, here you can enter several
lines of text in the Additional patient history area and have
an overview displayed.
Page E.26, Entering additional information
0.0

Entering admission data E.2
In the HOSPITAL area you can enter information about admis-

sion of the patient to your practice. E.2
Enter the name of the physician (e.g. family doctor) who re-
ferred the patient or select one from the selection list.
Enter the name of the physician who requested admission of

the patient within the hospital or select one from the selection
list.
Enter a preliminary patient number.

In Registration Configuration you can define the entries in
these selection lists.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.211

Entering examination data E.2
Information about the examination to be conducted can be

entered in the PROCEDURE area. E.2
Entering one study E.2
In the Study input field, select the examination region and

examination that you want to perform. These data are trans-
ferred to the parameter card Program where you then immedi-
ately see the standard program for the selected examination. E.2
0.0

Enter the first few letters of the required study.

The study list opens up and the first study which matches your
entry is highlighted and placed in the input field. E.2
If you click on a study in this list it is placed in the input field

immediately.
It then also appears in the field Requested procedure(s)
immediately. E.2
0.0

Or E.2
Scroll through the study list with the scroll bar until you find
the required region of the body.
Click on the + symbol in front of this entry to display all the
studies grouped together for this region.
The + symbol becomes a - symbol.
Click on the - symbol to hide the studies again.
Click on the study you require in the selection list.
It then appears in the Study input field. E.2
0.0

Entering the patient position E.2
After you have entered the requested examination, you enter

the position that the patient is to adopt during the examination.E.2
In the Exam task card you can change the patient position
again.
Select the patient position for the first study in the selection
list. The patient position is defined as direction - position.
E.2
Direction: E.2 Head First

The patient is lying with his or her head toward the examina-
tion unit.
Feet First
The patient is lying with his or her feet toward the examina-
tion unit.
E.2
Position: E.2 Left Lateral

The patient is lying on the left-hand side.
Right Lateral
The patient is lying on the right-hand side.
Supine
The patient is lying on his/her back.
Prone
The patient is lying on his/her stomach.
0.0

Administration numbers and comment E.2
If you have compiled a study list, the following data refer to all
studies in the list. E.2
Configuration-dependent input and output field for the access

number of the study assigned by the RIS (radiological informa-
tion system). E.2
Enter the internal administration number of the study here or

accept the preset number if already entered by your system.
Enter a comment for the study.
0.0

Entering institution data E.2
In the INSTITUTION area, you enter the information about the

examining institution and the examination personnel. This infor-
mation can be helpful if the examination results are passed on
to a different organization for reporting. E.2
Enter the name of the hospital or practice or select it from the

selection list.
Enter the name of the examining physician or physicians or

select them from the selection list.
Enter the name of the operator or operators or select them

In Registration Configuration you can define the entries in
these selection lists.
0.0

Completing data entry E.2
After you have entered all the necessary patient data in the
Patient Registration window, you can assign a certain patient
group to the patient data, register the patient for the ensuing
examination or preregister him or her for examination later on.E.2
E.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Registering a patient twice. E.2
Consequence: Incorrect diagnosis possible. E.2
Remedy: Make sure that you do not register the patient

twice. Always check whether the entry already exists. E.2
0.0

Assigning Patient Group E.2
Before you preregister or register a patient, you can assign a

certain patient group to the patient data, provided that you are
entitled to do so. E.2
This assignment limits access to the patient images. E.2
Click on the Patient Group button to assign a patient group.

E.2
The dialog box Select Default Patient Groups appears. E.2
Select the protections to be applied and click on OK.
0.0

Registering a patient for the examination E.2
If you want to examine the patient directly afterwards, register

the patient now. The ensuing examination is conducted with the
data that you have entered. E.2
Registration E.2
E.2 Click on the Exam button.
Depending on the configuration of your system, a dialog box

appears in which you must confirm the patient position, weight,
and, if necessary, the date of birth of the patient. E.2
The dialog box Registration Confirmation is displayed. E.2
Check your entries, especially patient weight, which is used

for the SAR calculation.
Confirm the information with Confirm.
0.0

Or E.2
If this data is incorrect, click on Cancel. You will return to the

Patient Registration window.
Patient already known to When you have confirmed the patient data the system checks
the system E.2 whether a patient with this personal data has already been pre-
registered or is stored in the local database. If so, the Patient
not unique dialog box is displayed. E.2
E.2 Select the patient entry and confirm by clicking on the Exam
button.
0.0

Or E.2
Click on Cancel to cancel registration in order to change the

patient data.
Checking the weight E.2 During registration the system checks whether the relationship
between age and weight is realistic. If the system detects any
inconsistencies, a warning window such as the following is dis-
played. E.2
Click on Yes if you want to correct your entries.

You will then return to the dialog box Patient Registration. E.2
0.0

Or E.2
Click on No if you wish to register and examine the patient

with these settings.
E.2
WA R N I N G
If you register and examine the patient with the weight you
have entered, SAR limit values may be exceeded. E.2
Depending on your configuration the system checks during reg-

istration whether the relation between the age and the weight is
plausible. If the system finds a mismatch, registration is can-
celed. You then return to the Patient Registration window and
you can correct your entries. E.2
After successful completion of all checks, the following mes-

sage appears in the footer of the Patient Registration window:E.2
Transferring patient to examination. E.2
The patient is now registered for the examination.

The Patient Registration window is closed and you return to
the Exam task card. E.2
0.0

Preregistering a patient E.2
You can preregister the patient with the data entered if you want
to conduct the examination later on. When you start the
examination you then call up the data entered and therefore
save time during routine examinations.
Page E.31, Registering a Known Patient E.2
Preregistration E.2
E.2 Click on the Preregister button.

The system checks whether the patient has already been pre-
registered or is already stored in the database. If necessary the
Patient not unique dialog box is displayed.
Page E.221, Patient already known to the system
E.2
Next, the following message appears in the footer of the Patient

Registration window:
Patient successfully preregistered. E.2
The patient is put in the scheduler. The input fields of the

Patient Registration window are now empty again. You can
enter the data of the next patient.
E.2
The data of a patient may appear twice in the scheduler if the

patient has been preregistered at two consoles, simulta-
neously. In that case, delete one of the entries.
Page D.616, Deleting data
0.0

Cancelling patient registration E.2
You can cancel entering patient data any time. All data that are
entered in the Patient Registration window are lost.
E.2
E.2 Click on the Cancel button.

The Patient Registration window is closed and you return to
the application from which you called up patient registration. E.2
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Registering a Known
E.3 Patient E.3
A patient who is preregistered or has already been examined in

your hospital or practice is known to your system. E.3
If you want to register a known patient for an examination you

do not need to enter the patients data again. You can search for
the patient in the databases and place the stored information in
the Patient Registration window, saving time during registra-
tion.
E.3
HIS/RIS-query E.3 If the data of the patient has already been entered via an HIS/
RIS system, you can call up that data from the hospital network
and place it in the scheduler. The patient is then preregistered.
E.3
Preregistered patient E.3 If the patient is preregistered you call up the data entered pre-
viously and add to it, if necessary. After that you register the
patient for examination.
E.3
Patient already examined E.3 You can use the personal data from the database for a patient
who has already been examined. Check the data, correct it, if
necessary, and enter the new examination data. Next, register
the patient for the ensuing examination or preregister the
patient if you want to examine him or her later. E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.31

Registering a Known Patient Patient Registration
Performing an HIS/RIS query E.3
With an HIS/RIS query, the patient data entered in the hospital

network is updated at specific intervals. E.3
Automatic query E.3
Depending on the configuration, your system either queries

data intended for your workstation, or data from the HIS/RIS
system intended for other workstations with the same modality.
E.3
This process is triggered automatically at specific intervals if

you activate it in the configuration window of Patient Registra-
tion.
Page D.24, Updating the scheduler
Page E.411, Automatic update
E.3
Manual query E.3
You can also query the HIS/RIS system manually at any time.E.3
Before you start looking through the patient data in the data-
bases, make sure that the scheduler contains all the patient
data required for the examination.
Call up View > Update Worklist in the Patient Browser or

double-click on the Scheduler symbol.
0.0

Patient Registration Registering a Known Patient
Defining the worklist If configured, the window Worklist Time Range appears when
time range E.3 you make a manual HIS/RIS query. In it you can define the start
and end time of the patient data entered in the HIS/RIS system
for your query. E.3
You can delimit the worklist range to a period of interest to you,

for example, to all the patient data entered that day. E.3
Enter the start and end point (date and time) of your worklist
query.
Click on Get Worklist to call up the updated worklist for the
defined period.
Page E.37, Search list
Or E.3
Click on Cancel to close the Worklist Time Range window

without updating the worklist.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.33

Searching in the Patient

Registration window E.3
You can search for patient data in the databases from the
Patient Registration window and then use the data for regis-
tration.
E.3
Entering the patient name/ID E.3
Call up the Patient Registration window.

If you call up registration from the Patient Browser, make
sure that no patient or study is currently selected there to
ensure that the registration dialog opens empty.
Enter the data known to you in the fields Last name and
Patient ID.
Page E.23, Entries in the PATIENT area
It does not matter whether your entries contain upper or lower
case letters.
0.0

Wildcards for patient If you know only part of the name or part of the ID of the patient
name and ID E.3 you are looking for, you can also use an asterisk * as a wild-
card. E.3
A wildcard stands for any number of characters (letters and/or

numbers). E.3
You can use up to two asterisks * as wildcards in the input

field, before and/or after the known part of the name or ID.
If you leave one or more fields empty, the search is performed
as if you had entered a *.
If you enter first and last names of a patient for the search,
you must separate them by a "*".
Example of a patient If you enter Mill*, the names Miller and Mill, but not Hamil-
name E.3 ton will be found.
E.3
Example of a patient ID E.3 If you enter *sy*, the patient IDs GO18ENSY39987 and
SYHODSON40425 will be found. E.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.35

Starting a search E.3
You can start the search once you have entered the patients
name and/or the patient ID.
E.3
E.3 Click on Search.

The Search button will turn into the Abort button. E.3
The databases of your system are now searched for the patient
with the name and/or ID entered. E.3
In Registration Configuration you can define which data-

bases (e.g. local database, archive) are to be searched.
Page E.45, Configuring the patient search
Cancelling a search E.3
You can cancel a search at any time, for example, if you have
made a mistake entering the name. E.3
E.3 Click on Abort.

The search is canceled and you return to the Patient Registra-
tion window. No data will be transferred. The Abort button will
turn into the Search button. E.3
0.0

Search list E.3
Patients found in the databases are listed in the Patient Search

window. The hit list is displayed as soon as more than one
patient is found. E.3
In Registration Configuration you can set which patient

data are to be displayed in the Patient Search window.
Status bar E.3 The status bar shows the progression of the search in the
Patient Search window. The following information is displayed:E.3
which database is being searched,
to what extent this database has already been searched
(in %),
how many patients have already been found.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.37

Accepting patient data E.3
The search for further patients in the databases continues, even

after the first patient has been found. As soon as a second
patient has been found, your system will display the Patient
Search window with the hit list.
E.3
One patient found E.3 If only one patient has been found at the end of the search, his
or her personal data are automatically placed in the Patient
For a preregistered patient, all data previously entered are

transferred to the Patient Registration window.
E.3
More than one patient If more than one patient is found, select the patient you require
found E.3 from the search list and transfer that patients data. E.3
Select the patient in the search list and click on OK.

Or E.3
Double-click on the required patient.

The personal data of the selected patient (for preregistered
patients, all data entered previously) are placed in the Patient
The Patient Search window is closed. E.3
0.0

NOTE
If the patient found was examined using the previous
Numaris software, not all the registration information will be
displayed in the Patient Registration window
(e.g. Request ID, Referring Physician, 1.Performing
Physician). E.3
Patient not found E.3 If the hit list does not contain the required patient or if no patient
has been found, you may have incorrectly entered the name or
patient number, or the data of the patient may be stored in a
database that you have not searched. E.3
Click on Cancel if the patient you require is not displayed in

the hit list.
The Patient Search window will close and you will return to the
Patient Registration window again. E.3
Repeat your search with changed entries and/or extend the

search to further databases.
In Registration Configuration you can define which data-
bases to include in the search.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.39

Searching in the Patient Browser E.3
You can also use the Patient Browser to search for a patient in
the scheduler, local database, and archive. The patients data
can then be transferred to the Patient Registration window.
You can simplify your search by filtering and sorting the patient
data.
Page D.246, Calling up additional information about a
patient
E.3
First select the database from which you want to transfer the
patient data.
Search and select the required patient in the navigation area
or in the content area of the Patient Browser.
Or E.3
Select the study or studies of the patient that you want to per-
form or repeat.
Or E.3
Select the series of the patient that you want to perform or

repeat.
0.0

Transferring data to Call up the Patient Registration window by clicking on

registration E.3 Patient > Register....
Or E.3
E.3 Click on the icon button in the toolbar.

Or E.3
Drag the selected data into the Patient Registration window

(drag & drop).
Registering a patient You can also register a preregistered patient for the examina-
directly E.3 tion directly if all the data required for the examination have
been entered. E.3
Double-click on the procedure or the procedure step in the

scheduler.
You can select procedure steps of different procedures by
pressing the Ctrl or the Shift button.
The data are directly transferred to the examination card.
E.3
Once all the data required for registration have been entered,
and depending on the configuration, the window Registration
Confirmation appears in which you must confirm entries such
as patient name or date of birth, etc. E.3
0.0

Click on Confirm if all entries are correct.

The window Patient Registration closes and the examination
card is displayed. E.3
Or
Click on Register if you want to change the patient data.
The Patient Registration window appears in which you can
make any necessary changes.
Page E.313, Completing your entries E.3
If not all of the fields required for registration are completed,

the window Patient Registration is called up automatically.
Click on Cancel to close the window Registration Confir-

mation automatically without registering the patient.
0.0

Completing your entries E.3
After you have transferred the patient data you searched for into
the Patient Registration window, check that it is correct and if
necessary add the missing data before registering the patient.
Page E.211, Entering admission data
Page E.212, Entering examination data
Page E.217, Entering institution data
E.3
Depending on the configuration of your system, it may only be

possible to correct HIS/RIS data partially.
Registering E.3
E.3 Click on Exam if you want to examine the next patient.

The patient will be registered for the examination. E.3
The examination data will be transferred to the Examination

task card and you can begin the examination.
E.3
Or E.3
Preregister E.3
E.3 Click on Preregister to preregister the patient.
0.0

Corrected patient data E.3 If you have transferred the patient from the local database and
made corrections to that patients personal data in the Patient
Registration window, this message box appears. E.3
Do not forget to correct the patient data in the original record

later on.
Page D.42, Correcting patient or examination data
0.0

Searching and registering in the

HIS/RIS system E.3
If you cannot find a particular patient in the databases although

he or she has been entered in the HIS/RIS system, you can
search through the entire HIS/RIS system with a worklist
query. E.3
If configured, you can also use this method to access patient

data intended for other workstations and modalities. E.3
0.0

Calling up a patient worklist query E.3
The patient worklist query allows you to search the whole HIS/
RIS system for patient data. The search is performed according
to the following entries: E.3
First and last name, title

Patient ID
Referring Physician
Ward
Accession Number
Request ID
Scheduled physician
As empty fields are treated like "wildcards", you should com-

plete at least one of the fields so that the search result is bet-
ter manageable.
You will find information about "wildcards" for a patient search
on
You cannot use a patient ID entered automatically as a
search term.
0.0

Starting a search E.3 Call up View > Patientbased Worklist in the menu of the
Patient Browser.
The dialog Patient Worklist Query appears. E.3
Enter search criteria. You may also use wildcards.

0.0

Click on Get Worklist.

The Get Worklist button turns into the Cancel button. E.3
The HIS/RIS system is now searched for patients with the

entered data.
Canceling a search E.3 You can cancel a search at any time, e.g. if you have made a
mistake entering the name. E.3
E.3 In that case, click on Cancel.

The search is canceled without any data being transferred. E.3
0.0

Search list of the worklist query E.3
The patient data found in the HIS/RIS system are listed in the
window Results of the Patient Based Worklist Query. The
search list is also displayed if only one patient has been found.E.3
All the data found for a particular patient is automatically pre-

registered in the Scheduler for the intended modality.
0.0

Accepting patient data E.3
Select a patient from the search list.

Click on OK.
Or E.3
Double-click on a patient entry.
You can close the Results of Patient Based Worklist Query

window with Cancel.
The data of the selected patient is transferred to the Patient
If the fields in the Patient Registration window contain the

data of another patient, they are overwritten by the data of the
new patient.
Patient not found E.3 If you have not found the patient you are looking for, correct your
entries, if necessary, and start the search again. E.3
0.0

CHAPTER Configuring Patient
E.4 Registration E.4
Patient registration can be customized according to your indi-

vidual examination registration.
E.4
You can change the following default settings: E.4
The entries in the selection lists of the Patient Registration

window.
Selection of the databases you want to search when using
the search function, the search procedure, and display of the
search results.
Worklist settings, if an HIS/RIS system is connected.
Call up the Numaris/4-Configuration Panel

(Options > Configuration... in the main menu).
Call up the configuration window for patient registration.
The Basics section of this manual describes how to call up
The Registration Configuration window with the Entering
Data, Searching, and HIS/RIS tab cards is displayed.
E.4
The card HIS/RIS is only displayed if your system is con-

nected to the HIS/RIS system and configured and licensed
accordingly.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.41

Configuring Patient Registration Patient Registration
Defining entries in the selection list E.4
You create selection lists in the Entering Data tab card. You
can access these entries during patient registration. In this way,
you save time during data entry and avoid typing errors. E.4
Click the Entering Data tab card into the foreground.
0.0

Patient Registration Configuring Patient Registration
Possible selection lists E.4
You can change and add to the selection lists for the following
input fields if these fields are shown on the Patient Registra-
tion window: E.4
Referring physician
Admitting diagnosis
Name of the institution
Name of the performing physician
Name of the operator
Creating entries E.4
Each selection list can contain up to 50 entries. E.4
Under Entry, select which selection list you want to edit.

Enter new entries in the text input field and correct or delete
the existing entries.
Make sure that the entries required most often are as near to
the top of the dropdown list as possible.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.43

Default entries E.4
For each selection list you can define whether and which
entries are preselected in an input field when you call up patient
registration. E.4
Choose one of these three options:
No default
When you call up the patient registration the input field is
empty.
Use first entry as default
When you call up the patient registration the first entry from
the selection list is already in the input field.
Keep selection from previous (pre-)registration as
default
When you call up the patient registration the entry you
selected for the last patient you (pre-) registered is already in
the input field.
0.0

Configuring the patient search E.4
The Searching tab card lets you define which databases are to
be searched during a patient search, after how many hits the
search is terminated, and what information the search list is to
contain. E.4
Click the Searching tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.45

Databases E.4
During a patient search the following databases can be

searched.
E.4
Scheduler
(contains all preregistered patients)
Local database
(contains all patients who have been examined in the past
and whose data have not yet been archived)
Local archive
(contains all patients stored on the data media currently
inserted)
Select the databases that you want to search during the

patient search.
It is not possible to exclude the scheduler from the search.
0.0

Limiting the number of patients found E.4
You can have the search stopped once a certain number of

patients has been found. E.4
Enter the number of hits at which you want the patient search
to be abandoned.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.47

Display of the search list E.4
Here you can select which data of the patients found will be
listed in the Patient Search window and how the data should
be displayed.
You can have the following information displayed: E.4
Personal data
You can have some or all of the information entered in the
PATIENT area displayed in the search list.
Admission data
Information about the referring physician and ward from area
HOSPITAL.
Information about hospital/practice
The name of the hospital/practice that you have entered in
area INSTITUTION.
Location
The network node where the data of the patient displayed in
the search list are stored.
Enter in which column of the search list you want to have this
information displayed.
Enter the column width (number of characters).
Click on the information that you want to display.
0.0

Configuring the HIS/RIS system E.4
If your system is connected to an HIS/RIS system (hospital or

radiology information system), you can also select the HIS/RIS
card. E.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T E.49

Display expiry date of license E.4
The use of the worklist for the management of your patients is

subject to a restricted license which you must renew in good
time before the expiry date. E.4
E.4 Click on the control box if you want a message to appear as

of 30 days before expiry of the license for the use of the
worklist.
0.0

Settings for worklist update E.4
You can regularly update the scheduler with new patient data by
calling up the menu entry View > Update Worklist or by dou-
ble-clicking on the Scheduler symbol.
E.4
Search area E.4 Generally, your system only queries the patient data intended
for your workstation, but you can also call up data intended for
other workstations of the same modality in the HIS/RIS sys-
tem. E.4
E.4 Click on the option field Local site to query all the data
intended for your workstation.
Or E.4
Click on the option field Modality of type... if configured.

The system queries all the patient data of your institute
intended for all the workstations of the modality in question.
E.4
Automatic update E.4 This process is triggered automatically at regular intervals if you
activate it. E.4
Click on the check box to have your system initiate an HIS/

RIS query at regular intervals.
Page E.12, HIS/RIS query
If your system is equipped with a main and a satellite console
you should start the HIS/RIS query from only one console.
This console must be connected directly to the hospital net-
work.
0.0

Time range E.4 If you query the HIS/RIS system manually you can limit the
extent of the worklist to a defined time range.
Page E.33, Defining the worklist time range E.4
Click on the control box to enable time range configuration

for manual update.
0.0

Settings for patient RIS query E.4
You can additionally update the scheduler with new patient data
by a patient based query in the Patient Registration window.E.4
Search area E.4 Besides patient data intended for your workstation you can also
call up data that are intended for other workstations of the same
modality in the HIS/RIS system. E.4
E.4 Click on the option field Whole RIS to query all the data of
the RIS system.
Or E.4
Click on the option field Local site to query all the data
intended for your workstation.
Or E.4
Click on the option field Modality of type..., if configured.

The system queries all the patient data of your institute
intended for all the workstations of the modality in question.
E.4
Time range E.4 You can limit the extent of the worklist to a defined time range.E.4
Click on the control box to narrow down the worklist, for
example, to the patient entries for the current day only.
E.4
0.0

0.0

PART
F Examination F.0
F.1 Introduction to the MR Examination

Layout of the Exam task card .........................................F.12
Procedure for routine scanning .......................................F.14
Important terms ...............................................................F.16
F.2 Loading the Scan Program

Checking the region and examination .............................F.22
Selecting a scan program ...............................................F.24
Selecting a scan program on the
Program parameter card ............................................F.25
Selecting a scan program in the Exam Explorer ........F.26
Transferring a scan program to the program control ......F.27
Transferring a routine scan program ..........................F.27
Transferring individual program instructions .............F.210
Adding further program instructions or
scan programs ..........................................................F.212
F.3 Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

Measuring reference images ..........................................F.32
Using reconstructed images as reference images ..........F.34
Loading images into the image area ..........................F.35
Display of loaded reference images ...........................F.38
Defining the scroll order ............................................F.313
Scrolling within image segments ..............................F.318
Editing reference images ..............................................F.322
Selecting images explicitly and implicitly ..................F.322
Changing window values ..........................................F.324
Enlarging, reducing, and panning
reference images ......................................................F.326
Flipping and rotating images ....................................F.330
Showing/hiding image text ........................................F.332
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F1
Contents Examination
Pixel coordinates, distances, and angles ................. F.334

Removing images from the image area ................... F.337
Repeating scans (Phoenix) ...................................... F.337
Table position and reference images ........................... F.338
Scanning at a table position ..................................... F.340
Scans with patient table movement ......................... F.341
Scan program with multiple localizers ...................... F.343
Saving, exporting, and transferring images .................. F.346
Saving images and GSP images ............................. F.348
Transferring images to other task cards................... F.351
Filming, sending, and exporting images................... F.352
F.4 Positioning Slices

Preparing for positioning ................................................ F.42
Graphic objects .............................................................. F.45
Slices and slice groups .............................................. F.46
Slabs and slab groups................................................ F.48
Saturation regions .................................................... F.410
Navigator Objects..................................................... F.415
Display of graphic objects in the
reference images ..................................................... F.417
Graphic slice positioning (GSP) ................................... F.430
Displaying orientation aids ....................................... F.431
Selecting graphic objects ......................................... F.439
Moving objects ......................................................... F.442
Rotating objects ....................................................... F.449
Adding slice and slab groups ................................... F.458
Adding saturation regions ........................................ F.466
Changing graphic slice parameters.......................... F.469
Deleting graphic objects ........................................... F.485
0.0
F2 Operator Manual
Examination Contents
Transferring the position of reference images ..........F.486

Nearest .....................................................................F.488
Applying slice settings ..............................................F.489
F.5 Adjusting Measurement Parameters

Overview of parameter cards ..........................................F.53
Routine parameter card ..............................................F.55
Contrast parameter card ...........................................F.511
Resolution parameter card .......................................F.517
Geometry parameter card ........................................F.523
System parameter card ............................................F.534
Physio parameter card .............................................F.540
Angio parameter card ...............................................F.546
BOLD parameter card ..............................................F.551
Diff parameter card ...................................................F.554
Perf parameter card ..................................................F.556
Inline parameter card ................................................F.558
Sequence parameter card ........................................F.564
Working in the parameter card stack ............................F.569
Protocol info line .......................................................F.569
Changing parameter values and
observing value ranges ............................................F.571
Displaying and editing parameter groups .................F.574
Adding or deleting graphic objects ...........................F.576
Adjusting the orientation and position
of graphic objects .....................................................F.577
Keyboard operation ..................................................F.582
Accepting measurement parameter settings ................F.584
Copying measurement parameters ...............................F.585
Saving the Job List........................................................F.591
Saving a single scan protocol .......................................F.592
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F3
F.6 Performing a routine examination

Displaying the job list in the program control .................. F.64
Scan procedure for a routine examination ................... F.610
Running complete protocols..................................... F.611
Completing and running a protocol
with a construction worker icon ................................ F.612
Playing back patient instructions manually .............. F.616
Closing a routine examination .................................. F.618
Starting a protocol manually ......................................... F.621
Starting a protocol manually - single scan ............... F.622
Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans........... F.624
Interrupting scanning .................................................... F.629
Repeating scans ........................................................... F.634
Defining a new center position ................................. F.636
Scanning an open protocol more than once ............ F.637
Processing the job list while scans are
being performed ........................................................... F.639
Completing protocols ............................................... F.639
Applying parameter settings..................................... F.643
Inconsistencies in parameter settings ...................... F.649
Inserting new program instructions .......................... F.653
Generating a protocol from acquired
images (Phoenix) ..................................................... F.658
Changing scan sequence......................................... F.660
Deleting program instructions .................................. F.663
Changing protocol properties ................................... F.665
Saving a job list as a new program .............................. F.666
Numbering of reconstructed images ............................ F.667
0.0
F4 Operator Manual
Resolving conflicts and inconsistencies ........................F.672

Inconsistent coil configuration ..................................F.672
Inconsistencies resulting from a
changed table position ..............................................F.675
F.7 Using a contrast agent

Actual procedure agent ...................................................F.72
Documenting the use of Contrast Agent .........................F.75
Documenting the use of contrast agent
in the examination pause ............................................F.75
without a pause ..........................................................F.77
Specifying contrast agent details ................................F.79
Resetting the contrast agent icon .............................F.712
Editing the contrast agent catalog ............................F.713
Inserting and planning contrast agent pauses ..............F.715
F.8 Positioning the Patient Table

Calling up table positioning .........................................F.82
Current table position .................................................F.83
Moving the table by a certain distance .......................F.84
Moving the table into the isocenter .............................F.85
Moving the table almost completely
out of the magnet ........................................................F.85
Canceling a table movement ......................................F.86
Canceling table STOP ................................................F.86
Switching magnet opening lighting on/off ...................F.87
Switching magnet opening ventilation on/off ..............F.88
Closing the examination .............................................F.89
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F5
F.9 Working with instruction areas

Editing a body region instruction range .......................... F.93
Changing the body region range marker.................... F.93
Deleting the body region range marker ...................... F.94
Editing a work step in the instruction area ...................... F.95
Adding a work step to range marker .......................... F.96
Editing a new work step ............................................. F.97
Response to a missing work step .............................. F.99
Canceling a procedure step ..................................... F.910
Completing a procedure step ................................... F.911
Deleting the procedure step range marker............... F.912
Editing an image comment ........................................... F.913
Entering an image comment .................................... F.914
Inserting a new image comment .............................. F.915
Changing the image comment ................................. F.916
Deleting an image comment .................................... F.917
F.10 Inline Display

Starting Inline Display ................................................... F.102
Changing the Inline Display ..................................... F.106
Setting the size of the Inline Display ........................ F.107
Image display ............................................................... F.109
Modifying image display ............................................. F.1011
Image windowing ................................................... F.1012
Zooming and panning an image............................. F.1014
Hiding image text ................................................... F.1015
Removing an image ............................................... F.1015
Saving images ............................................................ F.1016
Automatic image storage ....................................... F.1016
Manual image storage............................................ F.1018
0.0
F6 Operator Manual
Copying the image position .........................................F.1019

Selective image display (BOLD) .................................F.1021
Interactive scanning in real-time mode (optional) .......F.1022
Inline Display for CARE Bolus scans ..........................F.1025
Starting multiple breath-hold scans .............................F.1026
Display of the spectroscopy time signal ......................F.1030
Ending Inline Display ..................................................F.1031
Tips on optimum performance with
real-time scans............................................................F.1033
F.11 Patient instructions

Playing back an existing voice output ...........................F.113
Playing back patient instructions manually ...............F.115
Automatic playback of a voice output .......................F.117
Setting playback of voice outputs .............................F.118
Recording and editing voice outputs ...........................F.1113
Recording a new voice output ................................F.1115
Changing a voice output .........................................F.1121
Reordering voice outputs ........................................F.1123
Deleting user-defined voice outputs .......................F.1124
Configuring voice output .............................................F.1129
F.12 Protocol and Pause Properties

Editing protocol properties ............................................F.122
Entering a protocol name .........................................F.124
Defining start options ................................................F.125
Setting automatic saving and loading .....................F.1210
Setting a copy reference .........................................F.1214
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F7
Displaying upgrade info.......................................... F.1216

Applying or rejecting the changed
protocol properties ................................................. F.1218
Editing pause properties ............................................. F.1219
Entering the pause name and comment ................ F.1221
Planning contrast agent administration .................. F.1223
Applying or rejecting modified
pause properties .................................................... F.1227
F.13 Printing protocols

Printing ......................................................................... F.132
Opening the print dialog box .................................... F.132
Setting the printer ..................................................... F.134
Setting the print range .............................................. F.135
Print preview of protocols ......................................... F.138
Starting to print ....................................................... F.1312
Exporting data into a file ............................................. F.1313
F.14 SAR and Stimulation Monitoring

Operating modes .......................................................... F.142
Automatic SAR monitoring ........................................... F.146
Display of the necessary registration ....................... F.147
Calculated SAR higher than the limit value ............ F.1410
Switching modes .................................................... F.1414
SAR message on other task cards......................... F.1419
Displaying SAR information ........................................ F.1420
Displaying predicted SAR values ........................... F.1422
Displaying the SAR status...................................... F.1425
Querying SAR-relevant patient data ...................... F.1426
Displaying information about the protocol .............. F.1428
Displaying current SAR values............................... F.1429
0.0
F8 Operator Manual
Automatic stimulation monitoring ................................F.1431

Stimulation threshold exceeded .............................F.1432
Stimulation limit reached ........................................F.1434
Stimulation message on other task cards ...............F.1438
Information for stimulation monitoring .........................F.1440
The SAFE subtask card ..........................................F.1440
The dB/dt subtask card ...........................................F.1442
F.15 Physiologically Controlled Scans

Preparing a physiologically controlled scan ..................F.153
Monitoring signals on the physiological display ............F.155
Setting parameters......................................................F.1513
Setting ECG triggering ............................................F.1515
Setting pulse triggering ...........................................F.1525
Setting respiratory triggering ..................................F.1526
Setting an external trigger signal ............................F.1530
Setting retrospective gating ....................................F.1531
Starting the scan .........................................................F.1534
F.16 Managing scan programs

Calling up the Exam Explorer .......................................F.163
Layout of the Exam Explorer .........................................F.165
Navigation and content area .....................................F.165
Data levels ................................................................F.166
Tool bar ....................................................................F.169
Displaying unlicensed scan programs ........................F.1610
Finding a scan program ..............................................F.1612
Searching for a name .............................................F.1614
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F9
Processing entries ...................................................... F.1618

Moving entries ........................................................ F.1619
Copying, cutting, and pasting entries ..................... F.1621
Deleting entries ...................................................... F.1624
Renaming and annotating entries .......................... F.1625
Editing properties of scan programs ...................... F.1628
Creating a new examination region ............................ F.1631
Assigning an examination region to a
body region ............................................................ F.1632
Creating a new examination ....................................... F.1637
Creating a new program ............................................. F.1638
Inserting program instructions .................................... F.1639
Finding a protocol................................................... F.1640
Viewing protocol parameters.................................. F.1644
Inserting a protocol................................................. F.1645
New protocol from a sequence
Creating.................................................................. F.1646
Creating a new protocol from a series
or image (Phoenix) ................................................. F.1650
Inserting a scan pause ........................................... F.1653
Editing protocol parameters ....................................... F.1655
Changing parameter settings ................................. F.1656
Changing a coil configuration ................................. F.1657
Applying or rejecting changes ................................ F.1659
Editing protocol and pause properties ........................ F.1660
Saving scan programs ................................................ F.1661
Saving the scan program under a new name ........ F.1661
Saving a scan program under the same name ...... F.1665
Transferring a scan program to the
program control .......................................................... F.1666
0.0
F10 Operator Manual

Updating filming study layouts ....................................F.1668

Importing/exporting examination
database objects .........................................................F.1670
Importing objects ....................................................F.1671
Exporting objects ....................................................F.1678
Printing protocols ........................................................F.1681
Exam Explorer Closing ...............................................F.1682
F.17 Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)

Maestro layout ..............................................................F.172
Selecting the Maestro layout and
loading series ...........................................................F.174
Transferring series from stamp segments
into image segments ................................................F.175
Repeating scanning of a series ................................F.176
Saving, filming, exporting, and transferring
series for postprocessing ..........................................F.176
Navigating in the stamp segments ...........................F.177
Changing the arrangement of series ......................F.1710
Movie display ..............................................................F.1713
Groups within a series ............................................F.1714
Starting the movie display ......................................F.1715
Controlling movie display ........................................F.1717
Controlling movie display using the
dialog box ...............................................................F.1720
Configuring movie display ......................................F.1732
F.18 Breast Biopsy

Loading and selecting images ......................................F.187
Search for original images ........................................F.187
Changing the image display .....................................F.189
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F11

Setting markers to calculate the biopsy channel ........ F.1812

Setting a reference marker..................................... F.1813
Setting a lesion marker .......................................... F.1816
Entering a lesion name .......................................... F.1818
Calculating the biopsy channel ................................... F.1819
Creating the worksheet .......................................... F.1823
Performing a biopsy
examination ................................................................ F.1828
Checking the marker position................................. F.1828
Biopsy examination for multilesions ........................... F.1829
F.19 Automatic Position Suggestion

Basics....................................................................... F.192
Requirements ........................................................... F.193
Display in the Program Control ................................ F.194
Examination with AutoAlign .......................................... F.195
Measuring an AutoAlign Scout ................................. F.195
Adjusting the following protocols .............................. F.198
Closing the AutoAlign examination ........................ F.1910
Deactivating AutoAlign ............................................... F.1911
Checking the patient's age ......................................... F.1913
Patient too young ................................................... F.1913
Unsuitable patient positioning ................................ F.1916
Canceling an AutoAlign scan ..................................... F.1917
Repeating the AutoAlign Scout .................................. F.1919
Editing an AutoAlign scan program ............................ F.1921
Inserting programs and protocols........................... F.1921
Setting copy references ......................................... F.1922
Creating a protocol from a series or
image (Phoenix) ..................................................... F.1923
0.0
F12 Operator Manual

Creating new AutoAlign programs ..............................F.1926

Creating your own AutoAlign head
program in the Exam Explorer ................................F.1926
Exporting executed programs to the
Exam Explorer ........................................................F.1927
Planning with atlas images .....................................F.1928
F.20 Quality Measurement

Performing Quality Measurements ...............................F.202
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F13

0.0
F14 Operator Manual

CHAPTER Introduction to the
F.1 MR Examination F.1
After you register a patient, you'll make the necessary prepara-

tions in the examination room.
F.1
Preparations in the Position the patient in the orientation entered during patient reg-
examination room F.1 istration. Observe the information regarding patient safety pro-
vided in the System Manual. Position the coil(s) and connect
the coil cables to the connectors on the patient table. Mark the
center of the region to be examined with the laser light localizer
and move the patient into the magnet isocenter.
see System Manual
F.1
Working at the console F.1 Next, start scanning from the console in the control room. For
this purpose, use the Exam task card. This card enables you to
select, control, and monitor examination procedures. F.1
You are able to observe the patient through the window in the
control room during the examination. Use the intercom system
on the intercom console to listen or give instructions to the
patient.
F.1
Subsequent chapters take you through an MR examination step

by step. You will find detailed descriptions on how to perform
special scans, organize and manage scan programs, and mon-
itor thresholds relevant to the health of the patient.
F.1
The following pages provide an overview of the Exam task

card, the scanning procedure, as well as important terms. F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.11

Introduction to the MR Examination Examination
Layout of the Exam task card F.1
The Exam task card is displayed in foreground as soon as you

register a patient for an examination. F.1
(1)
(2)
(5)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(7)
0.0
F.12 Operator Manual

Examination Introduction to the MR Examination
This task card includes the following elements and areas: F.1
(1) Menu bar

(2) Image area
The reference images used to position graphic scan
objects (slices, slabs) are displayed.
(3) Info line
Information regarding the current patient and the open pro-
tocol is displayed.
(4) Program control
After loading, the program control contains a list of the pro-
tocols to be processed (job list). It also includes buttons for
controlling the program sequence.
(5) Parameter cards
The Program parameter card is used to select a scan
program or protocol. You may use the other cards to adapt
the parameters for the current examination.
(6) Tool bar
The buttons on the tool bar are used to open dialog boxes
for editing and controlling the measurement.
(7) Status bar
The status bar displays system error and status messages.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.13

Procedure for routine scanning F.1
Select a scan program or protocol on the Program parameter

Selecting and transferring card and transfer it to the program control.
a program
(Chapter F.2)
F.1
Scanning reference images is the first program step, and usu-

Acquiring reference images ally starts automatically. The acquired reference images are
(Chapter F.3) displayed in the image area.
F.1
As the next step you prepare the next protocol in the program
Preparing a protocol control. You graphically position the slices or slabs to be
(Chapter F.4, F.5) acquired on the reference images. Use the parameter cards to
check or change the measurement parameters of the protocol.
F.1
Start the protocol. F.1
Running a protocol
During the scan you may prepare the next protocol, e.g., by
(Chapter F.6)
positioning the slices and adjusting the measurement parame-
ters. Alternatively, you may view the images acquired by the
previous protocol.
F.1
You may save, export or transfer images to other task cards

Save and send images from the Exam task card. F.1
(Chapter F.3)
0.0

You are able to interrupt a protocol in progress, repeat scans,

change the sequence of the program steps, and insert pauses
(e.g. for contrast agent administration).
F.1
Use the Inline Display or movie display to check the acquired

images. F.1
For physiologically triggered scans, you may use the Physio-

logical Display dialog box to monitor the physiological signals
and parameters. F.1
During scanning, the system automatically monitors the SAR

and dB/dt load on the patient (RF exposure and time-varying
magnetic fields). F.1
Use the Exam Explorer to organize examinations, scan pro-

grams, and protocols. F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.15

Important terms F.1
It is very important to be familiar with the following terms asso-

ciated with the examination procedure.
F.1
Sequence F.1 A Sequence is the chronological sequence of RF pulses and

gradient pulses for excitation of the volume to be scanned, for
signal generation, and for position encoding. Each sequence
requires a repeat time TR optimized for contrast. F.1
Your MR system is equipped with a large number of sequences,

allowing you to use different MR imaging techniques.
F.1
Scan protocol F.1 A Scan protocol (Protocol) is a sequence containing a full set
of optimized parameters.
F.1
Scan pause F.1 Scan pauses (Pauses) are planned interruptions in an exami-
nation procedure, e.g. for contrast agent administration.
F.1
Program instructions F.1 Scan protocols and scan pauses are known collectively as Pro-
gram instructions. F.1
0.0

Scan program F.1 A Scan program (Program) contains a list of program instruc-
tions suitable for clarifying diagnostic problems in a specific
region of the body. F.1
For greater clarity, the numerous scan programs are assigned

to specific examinations and regions.
F.1
Examination F.1 An Examination contains all scan programs for an anatomical

region that are required to obtain diagnostically useful informa-
tion.
F.1
Examination region F.1 Examinations for a specific region of the body are grouped
together in an Examination region (Region). F.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.17

0.0

CHAPTER Loading the Scan
F.2 Program F.2
After the preparations in the examination room, check the infor-

mation you entered for the examination and region during
patient registration. F.2
Select the scan program required for your examination and load
it into the program control.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.21

Loading the Scan Program Examination
Checking the region and

examination F.2
When you select the Exam task card, the Programs parameter
card is in the foreground. The region and examination selected
during patient registration are entered here. F.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4) (5)
(6)
(1) Region
(2) Available examinations for the selected region
(3) Selected scan program
(4) List of all available scan programs for the selected exami-
nation
(5) Program instructions for the selected scan program
(6) Sum of scan times of the individual protocols in the
selected scan program
0.0

Examination Loading the Scan Program
Changing the region F.2
Select a different examination region from the Region selec-

tion list, if required.
The Region properties dialog box allows you to view the

properties of the selected region (e.g. the short description or
assignment to a body region). Select Properties from the
context menu.
Changing the An examination limits the region to be examined to a specific

examination F.2 organ or part of the body. F.2
As soon as you select an examination region, the Exams selec-

tion list contains the examinations available for this region. F.2
Select a different examination, if necessary.
The properties of the selected examination (e.g. the short

description) may be viewed in the Tree object properties
dialog box. Select Properties from the context menu.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.23

Selecting a scan program F.2
After you have selected an examination, Programs will display

the scan programs that are available for this examination. F.2
The first scan program is preselected in this list. The content of

this scan program (i.e. the sequence of program instructions
(scan protocols and scan pauses)) is displayed in the right-
hand window of the parameter card. F.2
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Overview measurement Localizer

(2) Scan protocol
(3) Scan pause (in this case, for contrast agent administration)
0.0

Selecting a scan program on the Program

parameter card F.2
If the preset scan program is not suitable for your diagnostic

requirements, you may select one of the other scan programs
offered on the Programs parameter card. F.2
Select the scan program you want to use for your examina-
tion by clicking on it in the list.
The right-hand window of the parameter card shows the pro-
gram instructions of the newly selected scan program.
F.2
The Tree object properties dialog box provides further infor-

mation about the selected scan program (short description,
time of last change, etc.). Select Properties from the context
menu.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.25

Selecting a scan program in the Exam

Explorer F.2
Switch to the Exam Explorer if you are unable to find a partic-

ular examination or scan program on the Programs parameter
card. All examinations and scan programs are clearly listed
there, and you can also access the Siemens tree, if necessary.
Page F.161, Managing scan programs F.2
Select Explorer from the context menu.

The Exam Explorer dialog box is displayed. You may now
search for the appropriate scan program in the Exam Explorer
and then transfer it to the program control.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
Page F.1666, Transferring a scan program to the program
control F.2
You may close the Exam Explorer when you are finished using
it. F.2
To do this, select Object > Close in the Exam Explorer.

F.2
N OT E
Make sure that no program instruction is selected on the
Programs parameter card. Otherwise the context menu will
not contain the Explorer item. F.2
0.0


program control F.2
Before scanning you have to transfer a scan program from the

Programs parameter card (or from the Exam Explorer, see
Page F.26) to the program control.
F.2
Transferring a routine scan program F.2
In routine scans you will usually transfer a complete scan pro-

gram.
F.2
Select the scan program.

Page F.24, Selecting a scan program
F.2 Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.

Or F.2
Select Queue > Append from the main menu.

Or F.2
Select Append from the context menu.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.27

Or F.2
Click the required program and drag & drop it in the program
control.
The steps of the selected scan program will be transferred to

the program control. This program will start automatically if it
contains a Localizer with no additional start instructions. F.2
0.0

The program control displays a sequence of program instruc-

tions with their expected scan time and the processing status of
the protocols.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination F.2
(1)
(2)
(3) (5)
(4)
(1) "Localizer" (overview measurement)

(2) Scan protocol
(3) Icons identifying the start options of a protocol
(4) Scan pause (in this case, for contrast agent administration)
(5) Scan time of a protocol
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.29

Transferring individual program instructions F.2
You may also transfer individual protocols from one or more

scan programs. This allows you to adapt the sequence of the
current examination to your individual diagnostic problem.
F.2
Select the scan program that you want to transfer.

You may also select more than one program instruction in one
step.
Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.

Or F.2

Or F.2

Or F.2
Drag & drop your selection in the program control.
The selected program instructions are transferred to the pro-

gram control. F.2
0.0

Viewing protocol If you are not sure which scan protocol to transfer, you may view
parameters F.2 the measurement parameter settings first. F.2
Select a protocol from the Programs parameter card.

Select Edit > View Protocol from the main menu.
Or F.2
Select View protocol from the context menu.

Or F.2
Double-click the protocol entry.

The Protocol view dialog box opens. F.2
In the Protocol view, you may view (but not change) the mea-
surement parameters of the protocol on the parameter cards.
Protocol or pause The Protocol step properties dialog box provides information
properties F.2 about the start options of a protocol, about copy references,
and about automatic forwarding of images. The Pause step
properties dialog box provides information about a scan pause
(e.g. for administering a contrast agent). F.2
Select a protocol or pause from the Programs parameter

card.
Select Properties from the context menu.
Either the Protocol step properties or the Pause step prop-
erties dialog box will be displayed. F.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.211

Adding further program instructions or scan

programs F.2
The program control includes a list of the transferred program

instructions. You may add additional program instructions or
scan programs to this list.
F.2
Select additional program instructions or another scan pro-

gram from the Programs parameter card (or in the Exam
Explorer, see Page F.26).
Click the << button on the Programs parameter card.

Or F.2

Or F.2

Or F.2
Drag & drop your selection into the program control.
The new scan program or the new program instruction are

appended to the existing program instructions. F.2
0.0

CHAPTER Measuring, Editing, and
F.3 Managing Ref. Images F.3
Most measurement programs will prompt you to perform a

localizer measurement first. The reference images generated
using the localizer are used to position slices or define the field
of view (FOV) for subsequent scans.
Instead of the localizer images, you may also use other patient
images acquired during the current exam as reference
images. F.3
You may view reference images in the image segments,

improve image display, and select the images best suited for
slice positioning. F.3
The image segments of the Exam task card may be used for
other purposes besides graphic slice positioning. For example,
they allow you to view, evaluate, and edit the acquired images.
You can export images directly from the Exam task card to
other task cards for postprocessing, export images, or save
them in the Patient Browser. F.3
F.3
N OT E
To perform the examination, you need to have full access
rights. F.3
Please refer to the information in

Part B, Security Package F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.31

Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images Examination
Measuring reference images F.3
The localizer starts automatically as the first program instruc-

tion after you load a scan program into the program control. F.3
While scanning is in progress, the localizer protocol has a white
background in the program control. F.3
The status bar successively displays the processes in

progress: F.3
Adjustment (coil)...
Adjustment of the system to the parameters and coils
according to the program instruction.
Preparing...
Measuring...
Scan in progress. The remaining scan time of the protocol is
displayed in countdown mode.
The series icon is displayed as soon as scanning and image
calculation have been completed. F.3
These series symbols indicated that the images of one or

Or several series are not fully available.
0.0

Examination Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images
These reference images are displayed in the image area of the

Exam task card once the localizer measurement and image
calculation have been completed. F.3
The reference images show the organ or part of the body to be

examined, usually in the three main orientations (sagittal, trans-
verse, and coronal). F.3
The next program instruction (e.g. t1_se_sag) is normally

incomplete and is opened for graphic slice positioning. F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.33

Using reconstructed images as

reference images F.3
If you have already performed scans and reconstructed series

as part of your examination, you may use images from these
series for graphic slice positioning as well.
F.3
Requirements F.3 These images have to meet the following criteria: F.3
The images are part of the current examination of the current

patient.
The images are part of the same series block.
Page F.339, Series block
The series were measured using the same table position.
The images have NOT been filtered (remapped) using the
FOV compensation filter.
Page P.168, Filter Routine, Resolution Common
The following images cannot be loaded into the image seg-

ments: F.3
Mosaic images
Secondary capture images

e.g. alpha images of the BOLD evaluation
Page L.41, Alpha image
Curved cuts of the 3D evaluation
Page H.47, Generating curved slices
0.0

Loading images into the image area F.3
You can use either the program control or the Patient Browser
to load images and series into the image area of the Exam task
card.
F.3
Loading a series from You can also load images or series from the program control,
the program control F.3 even though the underlying protocol has not been fully pro-
cessed at this point in time.
Page F.67, Symbols of series in program instructions
Select a protocol in the program control that has been pro-

cessed either in part or in full.
Select Queue > Load Series from the main menu.
Or F.3
Select Load series from the context menu.

Or F.3
Double-click the series icon.

Page F.67, Symbols of series in program instructions
Or F.3
Drag & drop the series into the image area.

The series is loaded into the image area of the Exam task
card. F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.35

If the protocol generates several result series, a dialog box

allows you to select the series to be transferred. F.3
(1) (2)
(1) Dialog window with full series description.

Series are fully computed.
(2) Dialog window without serial number.
Computation of series is not yet completed when opening
the selection window. Immediately after completion of
reconstruction, the serial numbers are shown when the
selection window is opened again.
Click the series so that you can load its images.
0.0

Load from the Patient You can use the Patient Browser to load images for graphic
Browser as follows F.3 slice positioning. Images already loaded into the image area will
be ignored during this process. F.3
Open the Patient Browser.

Select the images or series in the Patient Browser.
Drag & drop the images or series into one of the image seg-
ments.
Or (if only one image or series has been selected) F.3
Double-click the selected image or series.
Images with different Each time you load series or images with a different table posi-
table positions F.3 tion, the currently loaded images are cleared from the image
area.
Page F.338, Table position and reference images F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.37

Display of loaded reference images F.3
You can choose between different layouts to display the loaded

images.
F.3
Three-segment layout F.3 Select a three-segment layout if you want to display three refer-
ence images side by side. F.3
Select View > 3 Segments from the main menu.
Two-segment layout F.3 Select a two-segment layout if you want to display two reference
images side by side. The reference images are displayed larger
than in the three-segment layout. F.3
Select View > 2 Segments from the main menu.
e.g. Tra e.g. Sag
0.0

Maestro layout Select the Maestro layout for improved management and eval-
(optional) F.3 uation of cardiac series. The acquired series are displayed in
stamp segments below the three image segments.
Page F.172, Maestro layout F.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.39

Distributing images The following rules apply: F.3
across segments
If the image area is empty, the loaded images will be distrib-
F.3
uted across the image area so that every segment displays

at least one image.
If only one series has been loaded into the empty image
area, the images of this series will be distributed across the
available segments (2 or 3).
If multiple series have been loaded, one image representing
a series will be displayed in each segment.
If all the image segments are filled, the remaining series will
be loaded in the background. You can bring these series to
foreground by scrolling with Series-/Series+.
Page F.318, Scrolling within image segments
Representative image F.3 The image in the center of the anatomy is used as the represen-
tative image for a series with different slice positions. F.3
If all images in a series use the same slice position, the first
image of the current sequence is used as the representative
image.
Page F.313, Defining the scroll order F.3
0.0

Example 1 F.3 All three image segments are empty. A localizer with one sagit-
tal, two coronal, and three transverse overview images has just
been completed. F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as fol-

lows: F.3
The series is duplicated twice and displayed in all three seg-

ments. The left segment shows the sagittal image, the center
segment shows the first coronal image, and the right segment
shows the first transverse image. F.3
0.0

Example 2 F.3 All three image segments are empty. Two series of the current
series block are dragged & dropped from the Patient Browser
to the center segment. F.3
The images are distributed across the image segments as fol-

lows: F.3
The first series is loaded into the target segment (center seg-
ment), the second series is loaded into the right segment. The
second series is duplicated and displayed in the left segment.
The system automatically searches for another suitable image
in the second series to be used as the representative image for
the first segment. F.3
0.0

Defining the scroll order F.3
There is a difference between scrolling within a series and

scrolling between series. F.3
If multiple series are loaded into an image segment, you can

scroll between series. The order of the series is defined by the
series number. This number depends on the date and time of
reconstruction. The order of the series cannot be modified. F.3
However, you can define the order of the images within a series.
You can select from various default sort options in the menu.
You can also define your own sort schemes for the order of
images. F.3
The sort scheme also determines the order of the images dur-
ing movie display.
Page F.1713, Movie display F.3
0.0

Sort criteria F.3 The following sort criteria are available: F.3
F.3
Abbreviation Example
MO Sorting according to the main orientation sag - cor - tra
SP Sorting according to the main orientation tra - cor - sag
Sorting by association with a 3D group and by the SliceShift value
TT Sorting according to trigger time
TA Sorting according to acquisition time
TE Sorting according to echo time
TD Sorting according to time after delay (perfusion or diffusion time)
BV Sorting according to b-value
NR Sorting according to image numbers
-- Sorting according to load order
This criterion does not allow any sub-criteria.
F.3
Defining your own sort You can define up to three levels for sorting images within a
scheme F.3 series. You define a sort criterion for each of the three levels. F.3
Select Scroll > Display Order > User Defined.
The Image Display Order dialog box opens. F.3
0.0

Select the sort criterion for the first sort level from the Image
sorted by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the second sort level from the
then by selection list.
Select the sort criterion for the third sort level from the then
by selection list.
The sort criterion of the second level is used if the sort criterion
values of the first level are identical. F.3
The sort criterion of the third level is used if the sort criterion val-
ues of the first and second levels are identical.
F.3
Select a different sort criterion for each sorting level. Excep-

tion: If you select the Load Order criterion for the first level,
the then by fields will be grayed out. You cannot define addi-
tional sort criteria.
0.0

You can cancel the definition of the sort scheme and close the
dialog box. F.3
Click Cancel.
The previous setting is still applied to the order of the images
within the series.
F.3
You can apply the new sort scheme and close the dialog box.F.3
Click OK.
Using a Siemens sort You may select from five different Siemens sort schemes for the
scheme F.3 order of images within a series. F.3
F.3
Name Sort scheme Application

Anatomical SPTTTANR Standard sort scheme
Localizer, anatomical examinations,
multi-slice/multi-phase scans (grouped according to phases),
multi-slice realtime scans
Triggered MOTTTDSP Multi-slice/single-phase scans or multi-slice/multi-phase scans
(if a slice package is viewed anatomically at defined trigger
times)
Perfusion and diffusion multi-slice scans
Chronological MOTASPNR Sorting by time of acquisition (TA), images with the same TA are
sorted by SP, images with the same TA and SP are sorted by NR.
as Numbered NRSP Sorting according to image numbers (NR)
Images with the same NR are sorted by SP.
as Loaded Sorting by load order
0.0

Select a sort scheme from the menu under Scroll > Display
Order > .......
F.3
The Anatomical sort scheme is selected by default. This is

the optimal scheme for most applications.
The sort scheme selected is applied until you select another
scheme.
0.0

Scrolling within image segments F.3
After loading images into the image area, you can scroll the
images within an image segment. This helps you select the
images most suitable for slice positioning.
F.3
Setting the input focus F.3 The Input Focus indicates the active segment of the image
area. It is highlighted by a dashed blue border. Actions triggered
via the keyboard (e.g., scrolling using the Image+/Image- keys)
are always performed in the active segment.
F.3
Input focus
0.0

You can shift the input focus to another image segment by

pressing the Left or Right cursor keys or by clicking inside the
other segment.
F.3
Keyboard focus F.3 The keyboard focus has to be on the image area if you want to
use the keyboard for scrolling.
Page A.29, Setting the keyboard focus F.3
Keep pressing the Tab key until a thin white border appears
around the image area, or click inside the segment you want
to scroll.
Scrolling between There are different ways of scrolling between images within a
images F.3 series. F.3
Select Scroll > Image Next or Image Previous.

Or F.3
Press the Image+ or Image- keys on the symbol keypad of

the keyboard.
Or F.3
Scroll the image stack using the dog ears.
When you reach the last image of the series, Image+ scrolls
to the first image of the series. Image- scrolls to the first
image to the last image of the series.
0.0

Parallel scrolling F.3 To compare images of two or three series, scroll in parallel
through images in these series. F.3
Explicitly select the image segments you want to scroll in

parallel.
Page F.322, Explicit selection
Use the symbol keys or the menu commands to scroll
between images.
It is also possible to scroll in parallel using the dog ears.

If the series do not contain the same number of images, paral-
lel-scrolling stops at the end of the shorter series. Scrolling con-
tinues up to the end of the longer series. If you continue scroll-
ing, parallel-scrolling will start over with the first image of the
series.
F.3
During parallel-scrolling, system performance depends on

the number of images and series and may be affected by pro-
cesses running in background.
0.0

Scrolling to the next/ There are various ways of scrolling between series.
previous series F.3 F.3
Select Scroll > Series Next or Series Previous from the

main menu when starting applications and functions.
Or F.3
Press the Series+ or Series- keys on the symbol keypad of

the keyboard.
When you reach the last series of an examination, Series+

scrolls to the first series of the examination (accordingly,
Series- scrolls from the first series to the last series of the
examination).
0.0

Editing reference images F.3
You can edit reference images as follows: F.3
Set brightness and contrast

Zoom and reduce images and pan image content
Fit to segment size
Flip and rotate
Display pixel coordinates, measure distances and angles
Showing/hiding image text
Selecting images explicitly and implicitly F.3
You select images explicitly or implicitly before editing them

using the various functions.
Page G.332, Selecting images
F.3
Explicit selection F.3 Objects selected explicitly can be identified by their solid blue
border. F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while left-clicking an image.

The image is selected explicitly. F.3
You can select multiple images explicitly. F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking multiple images.
0.0

You can also select a range explicitly. F.3
Press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the first image
within the range. Press and hold the Shift key as well. Click
the last image within the range.
You can select multiple series explicitly. F.3
Start by selecting one image per series explicitly.

Select Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the context menu.
You can cancel an explicit selection by left-clicking inside a

segment. The segment is now selected implicitly.
Implicit selection F.3 Objects selected implicitly can be identified by their dashed
blue border (input focus). F.3
The segment selected implicitly receives the function call from

the menu. F.3
If you open a context menu within a segment, the segment is

automatically selected implicitly. This does not apply if the seg-
ment is part of a multiple selection. F.3
0.0

Changing window values F.3
Windowing changes the grayscale values, the brightness, and

the contrast of the reference images.
F.3
Windowing using the Position the mouse pointer in the segment you want to win-
mouse F.3 dow.
Press and hold the center mouse button while dragging the
mouse.
Center +
Width- Width+
(contrast)
Center -
(brightness)
Release the mouse button once the window values are set to
your requirements.
0.0

Or F.3
Window by using these symbol keys on the symbol keypad

of your keyboard.
These symbol keys are mainly for fine adjustment. You may
use the mouse for fast windowing.
F.3
Applying window values You can automatically apply the new window values of an
to the series F.3 image to all images in the respective series using the menu. F.3
Activate the Windowing On Series option under Image
Tools.
This setting remains active even after the system is rebooted.
F.3
Auto windowing F.3 This function allows you to set the contrast and brightness of
the reference images automatically. F.3
Double-click an image segment with the center mouse but-

ton.
Or F.3
Select Image Tools > Auto Windowing from the main

menu.
Or F.3
Press this key on the symbol keypad.
0.0

Enlarging, reducing, and panning reference

images F.3
You may want to reduce images for a better overview. You may
want to enlarge images for a better view of details. After enlarg-
ing images, it is often helpful to pan them to move the relevant
structure into the center of the screen.
F.3
Zooming with the mouse F.3 You can enlarge, reduce or pan images using the mouse. This
requires you to switch the functionality of the left mouse button
from "Select" to "Enlarge/Reduce/Pan".
F.3
Select Image Tools > Zoom/Pan.

Or F.3
Select Zoom/Pan from the context menu.

Or F.3

Page F.44, Position toolbar
Position the mouse pointer in the outer area of the image.

The mouse pointer changes shape. F.3
0.0

To enlarge the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer upward.
To reduce the image, press and hold the left mouse button
and drag the mouse pointer downward.
Panning with the mouse F.3 Next, you can use to the mouse to pan the enlarged or reduced
image section in the image segment. F.3
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.

The mouse pointer changes shape. F.3
To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.
Zooming
Moving
0.0

Applying zooming/panning You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
to the series F.3 visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series. F.3
Activate the Zoom/Pan On Series option under Image

Tools.
This setting remains active even after the system is rebooted.
F.3
Fit image to segment F.3 You can automatically enlarge/reduce an image for optimal fit of
the image contents within the segment. F.3
Select an image.
Select Image Tools > Fit to Segment to enlarge/reduce an

image to fit the segment size.
Or F.3
Double-click the image with the left mouse button.
Segment size
0.0

Fit to segment height F.3 Use the Fit to Segment Height function to fit the height of the
reference image precisely to the height of the segment. F.3
Select an image.
Select Image Tools > Fit to Segment Height.
Fit to
segment height
In the two-segment layout, the Fit to Segment and Fit to

Segment Height functions have the same effect.
0.0

Flipping and rotating images F.3
You can flip images in the image segments horizontally and ver-
tically and rotate them clockwise by 90. F.3
These functions are mainly used for improved viewing of breast

biopsy images.
Page F.181, Breast Biopsy
F.3
Flipping images Horizontal flipping swaps the top and bottom of the image. The
horizontally and axis of rotation is horizontal. F.3
vertically F.3
Vertical flipping swaps the left and right side of the image. The
axis of rotation is vertical.
F.3
Place the input focus on the image you want to flip.

To flip multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Flip Horizontally.

Or F.3
Select Image Tools > Flip Vertically.
0.0

Flipping horizontally
Flipping vertically
0.0

Rotating images You are able to rotate images clockwise about 90. F.3
about 90
Place the input focus on the image you want to rotate.
F.3
To rotate multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Rotate 90.
Rotating about 90
degrees
Showing/hiding image text F.3
By default, image text is displayed in the image segments.

When you edit images (e.g. windowing) the image text is fre-
quently hidden for the time being. F.3
You can manually disable image text if necessary. F.3
0.0

Select View > Image Text ON from the main menu.

Or F.3

Page F.44, Position toolbar
(1)
(3)
(4)
(2)
(1) Patient data (name, series image number, date)

(2) Compression, trigger time, and protocol name
(3) Phase-encoding direction and scale
(4) Image data (FOV, slice orientation, table position, slice
position)
0.0

Pixel coordinates, distances, and angles F.3
You can display the position of the mouse pointer within the
image as coordinates in the patient coordinate system. F.3
Select Image Tools > Modify Graphics.

The functionality of the mouse is switched from Zoom/Pan to
Modify Graphics. F.3
Position the mouse pointer on the region of interest in the

image.
Press and hold the left mouse button.
The coordinates in the patient coordinate system are displayed
without sign. F.3
The coordinates of the table position are shown in the second

line if the image was not acquired using the original table posi-
tion of the series block, but after a relative table movement. F.3
Press and hold the left mouse button while moving the
mouse pointer.
The new coordinates for the image position are displayed. F.3
0.0

Measuring the distance In Modify Graphics mode, you can measure the relative dis-
between two points F.3 tance between two image positions.
F.3

Press and hold the left mouse button.
Select the first position for the distance measurement while
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Press the Shift key and drag the mouse.
This starts the distance measurement. You can release the
Shift key as soon as the distance line is displayed. F.3
Drag the mouse pointer to the second position in the image.

The distance to the first point is displayed below the coordi-
nates. F.3
The coordinates and the distance disappear when you release

the mouse button. F.3
The Viewing task card also allows you to measure distances

and save or film the distance line with the measured distance.
Page G.518, Drawing a distance line, measuring the dis-
tance
0.0

Measuring angles F.3 After the distance measurement, you can select a third image
position and determine the angle between the third, first, and
second point. F.3

Measure the distance between two points.
Continue pressing the left mouse button and temporarily add
the Ctrl key while selecting a third image position.
The first and third points will be connected. The angle is dis-
played below the coordinates and the distance. F.3
The coordinates, distance, and angle disappear when you

release the mouse button.
F.3
The Viewing task card also allows you to measure distances

and save or film the distance line with the measured distance.
Page G.527, Measuring an angle
0.0

Removing images from the image area F.3
You can clear the images from all segments if you no longer
need the reference images loaded in the image area.
F.3
Select Edit > Clear All Segments.

The images are removed. The image area is empty. F.3
It is also possible to remove all images of one or more selected

series from the image area. F.3
Select the series explicitly.

Select Edit > Clear Document(s).
Repeating scans (Phoenix) F.3
You can view and evaluate the measured images in the image
segments. F.3
You can repeat the complete scan of a protocol if, for example,
the result images for a breath-hold scan are of poor quality. F.3
Select the poor quality image.
Select Append To Queue from the context menu.
Or F.3
Drag & drop the image into the job list.

A copy of the protocol is generated and converted into an exe-
cutable program instruction. F.3
0.0

Table position and reference

images F.3
In most cases, reference images are scanned with the patient

table in a certain position. This position is used for all protocols
of the scan program. F.3
In some cases, the area of examination may be so large that

you have to move the patient table and run protocols at different
table positions. F.3
It is important to know the relation between the table positions

of the reference images and the protocol parameters for posi-
tioning the scan region.
Page P.181, Position of the scan region F.3
0.0

Series block F.3 You can view and evaluate several series acquired at various
table positions. In this case, they have to be grouped in a series
block. F.3
A series block groups all series with positioning data based on

the same defined original table position. The series block
remains valid in case of automatic table movement. F.3
A new series block begins when you: F.3
register a new patient

Page E.21, Registering a New Patient
reset the table position to zero
Page F.636, Defining a new center position
move the tabletop to the home position
see System Manual
change the patient positioning
see System Manual
set a new mark with the light localizer
see System Manual
You can end a series block explicitly. F.3
Select Patient > Close Patient.
0.0

Scanning at a table position F.3
At the beginning of an examination, you mark the center of the

examination region at the patient using the light localizer. Then
you move this marked position into the center of the magnet
(center position).
F.3
Setting the origin F.3 The light localizer is used to define a zero point (original table
position) to which all subsequent scans will refer.
F.3
Localizer measurement F.3 The image area is still empty. The localizer measurement is
started from the original table position. The reference images
are displayed in the image area after scanning and reconstruc-
tion are completed.
F.3
Transferring the table Open the next protocol and plan the slices to be scanned on the
position of the localizer F.3 reference images. F.3
This protocol will be scanned at the same table position as the

reference images.
F.3
Protocol with undefined Protocols are scanned at the current table position if no refer-
table position F.3 ence images are displayed or you have cleared the reference
images from the image area at the time of scan preparation. F.3
This usually corresponds to the position of the light localizer
marking (original table position). In this case, the protocol does
not have a defined table position. The localizer is a typical pro-
tocol using an undefined table position. F.3
0.0

Scans with patient table movement F.3
You can set the offset of the patient table using the table posi-
tion of the reference images or the Position of the scan reg.
protocol parameter on the System Common parameter card.
F.3
Transferring the table Instead of the localizer images, you load a different series
position of a normal already measured into the image area. F.3
protocol F.3
Open the next protocol and plan the slices to be scanned on
these images. The next protocol is run at the same table posi-
tion as the images loaded in the image area. F.3
The patient table will automatically move to this table position if

it is different from the original table position. F.3
F.3
NOTE
The table position of the reference images overwrites the
table position parameters of the open protocol. F.3
0.0

Defining the table position The image area is empty, e.g., because you have cleared the
using protocol parameters F.3 reference images from the segments. A protocol is opened. F.3
Enter a patient table offset on the System Miscellaneous
parameter card.
Page P.181, Position of the scan region
The protocol now has a defined table position. As soon as you
start running a protocol, the patient table will move to the new
position.
F.3
F.3
N OT E
If protocols have been scanned at various table positions
within a series block, only one automatic adjustment will be
performed for each table position. F.3
The adjustment results are stored and reused if additional

scans are performed at the known table position. F.3
0.0

Scan program with multiple localizers F.3
In some angiography examinations, the examination are is so

large that multiple localizers have to be acquired at different
positions. The subsequent protocols are run using the different
table positions of the localizers.
F.3
Example: Scan program After transferring the scan program from the Program parame-
with two localizers and two ter card to the program control, the first localizer is scanned
angio protocols F.3 automatically at the original table position. F.3
Once the first localizer is completed, the corresponding refer-

ence images are displayed in the image area. The patient table
will automatically move to the preset table position of the sec-
ond localizer. F.3
The second localizer starts automatically at this position. After

scanning, the series icon will indicate that reference images
have been reconstructed for this localizer as well. F.3
0.0

However, they will not be loaded into the image area. F.3
The images of the first localizer are still displayed in the image
area. F.3
Position the slices for the first angio protocol on these local-
izer images.
Start scanning the first angio protocol.
The patient table will move back to the position of the first local-
izer (original table position). The first angio protocol will be
scanned at this position. F.3
Load the reference images of the second localizer into the

image area while the first angio protocol is running.
0.0

Open the second angio protocol and plan this protocol on the
images of the second localizer.
Start the second angio protocol.
The patient table will move to the second table position. The
second angio protocol will be scanned at the second table posi-
tion. F.3
Scanning will finish after all images have been reconstructed.F.3
0.0

Saving, exporting, and transferring

images F.3
You may save, export or transfer images to other task cards

from the Exam task card. F.3
The image segments on the Exam task card may contain nor-
mal acquisition images or GSP images (reference images with
drawn-in graphic objects).
F.3
F.3
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are irretrievably
lost. F.3
Always check for unsaved data and save any data you want
to keep before logging off. F.3
0.0

Rules for saving, The following rules apply to GSP images: F.3
exporting, and filming

GSP graphics (slices, blocks, saturation regions, navigators)
F.3
are stored with the GSP images.

GSP graphics are saved in the non-selected version (without
handles), with shadow lines and monochromatic.
Distance lines, angles, etc. are not saved.
GSP graphics on GSP images can no longer be edited on
the Viewing task card.
0.0

Saving images and GSP images F.3
The Exam task card allows you to group a number of series and
save them in one new series. These series must be part of the
same series block and acquired at the same table position.
F.3
Select the series or images explicitly.

Select Patient > Save As.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. F.3
A name for the new series is suggested. You can modify the
suggested name. F.3
Select the Save images in new series option.

Modify the new series name if necessary.
Click OK.
0.0

Appending images to You can append individual GSP images to an existing series. F.3
an existing series
Select the GSP images explicitly.
F.3
Select Patient > Save As.

The Save As dialog box is displayed. F.3
Select the Append images to series option.
In the list, select the series to which the GSP images should
be appended.
Click OK.
The new images of the series have image numbers 5000 and
up. This usually allows you to distinguish between old and
new images within the series.
0.0

Appending an image You can append the GSP image with the input focus to the exist-
to a reference series F.3 ing reference series in one step. F.3
Make sure the input focus is on the correct segment.

Select Patient > Copy Selection.
The selected GSP image will be appended to the existing refer-
ence series. F.3
0.0

Transferring images to other task cards F.3
You can directly transfer images and series from the Exam task
card to another opened task card for postprocessing. F.3
This helps you save time, for example, when loading images
into a postprocessing application.
F.3
Make sure that the tab of the respective task card is visible.
Explicitly select the images or series on the Exam task card.
Drag & drop your selection onto the tab.
The selected images will be transferred to the task card. The
Exam task card will remain in the foreground. F.3
0.0

Filming, sending, and exporting images F.3
Detailed information about filming is available in

Part O F.3
Detailed information about data exchange via the network or

Windows XP is available in
Chapter J.3
F.3
Copying images to You can copy images directly from the Exam task card to the
the film sheet F.3 virtual film sheet when editing or evaluation has been com-
pleted.
F.3
Select the images or series explicitly.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.

Or F.3
Press this key on the symbol keypad of your keyboard.
If you have not explicitly selected an image, the image from

the segment with the input focus is copied to the film sheet.
0.0

Sending images F.3 If your system is connected to a hospital computer network

(HIS/RIS), you can send images to other network addresses
directly from the Exam task card.
F.3
Select Transfer > Send to.

Or F.3
Press the Send to Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
Exporting images F.3 You can save images on your hard disk as single files. F.3

Select Transfer > Export to file system.
The Export to File System dialog box opens. F.3
Enter the path C:\TEMP and click OK.
0.0

Checking data transfer F.3 You can check and control processing of export and network
jobs.
F.3
Select Transfer > Organize Local Jobs or Transfer > Orga-

nize Network Jobs.
Or F.3
Press the Ctrl + L or Ctrl + N key combination.

Or F.3
Click the corresponding icon on the status bar.
A dialog box for checking and controlling jobs is displayed.

Page J.63, Viewing and checking the transfer jobs F.3
0.0

CHAPTER
F.4 Positioning Slices F.4
After you have scanned and loaded reference images and opti-
mized their display according to your diagnostic question, you
are able to use them for defining the position, scope, and orien-
tation of the region to be examined.
Depending on the protocol, the system will scan slices or slabs

for subsequent reconstruction. F.4
You can plan saturation regions to avoid motion artifacts. F.4
A number of special protocols - based on navigator sequences

- contain additional navigator objects. F.4
These graphic objects are displayed in the reference images as

soon as you open a protocol. F.4
The graphic objects of the protocol usually need to be adapted

to the anatomy of your patient. The mouse and the graphic slice
positioning tools allow you to perform tasks quickly and easily.F.4
If these positioning tools are not accurate enough, you may set
the parameters of the graphic objects on the Geometry param-
eter card.
Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
graphic objects F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.41

Positioning Slices Examination
Preparing for positioning F.4
After completing the localizer, the next protocol automatically

opens, allowing you to position the slices to be scanned.
F.4
Opening a protocol F.4 If you want to adjust the slices of a subsequent protocol, open
the protocol manually. F.4
Double-click a protocol in the program control.

Or F.4
Select a protocol in the program control.

Click the Open button or select Open from the context menu.
The program entry will be moved to the right in the job list. The
protocol opens and its parameters are displayed on the param-
eter card. F.4
Each program instruction in the part of the job list that has not
run yet can be opened for execution.
Page F.640, Opening the next protocol for editing
completed scan
current scan
opened protocol
0.0

Examination Positioning Slices
Various information about the open protocol is displayed below

the image area. F.4
(1) Scan time

(2) PAT Acceleration factor
(3) Voxel size (rounded up to the next 1/10 mm)
(4) Relative signal-to-noise ratio
(5) Sequence type
If you keep the mouse pointer near the voxel size display, a
tool tip will be displayed stating the exact voxel size.
The graphic objects of the protocol (slices, slabs, navigators,
and saturation regions) are displayed in the reference images
in the image area.
F.4
Canceling slice You can cancel processing of the opened protocol and restore
positioning F.4 it to its original status.
F.4
Click the Cancel button on the program control.
All objects you have added or changed will be removed from the
reference images. The reference images are still displayed in
the image segments. F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.43

Position toolbar F.4 Use the Position Toolbar to graphically position the objects to
be scanned.
F.4
Click on the Position Toolbar button on the tool bar of the

Exam card.
Or F.4
Go to the main menu and select View > Position Toolbar.

Or F.4
Select Position Toolbar from the context menu.
The Position Toolbar is displayed: F.4
0.0

Graphic objects F.4
Various graphic objects are displayed in the reference images,

depending on the sequence preset in the protocol. F.4
Slice groups (for 2D scans)

Page F.46
3D/Slabs (for 3D scans)
Page F.48
Saturation regions (possible for both 2D and 3D scans)
Page F.410
Navigator objects (for Navigator sequences)
Page F.415
Spectroscopy volume element
(e.g. for SVS protocols)
Spectroscopy CSI slice
(e.g. for CSI protocols)
Protocols and objects of spectroscopy are explained in a sep-
arate manual.
see MR Spectroscopy Operator Manual
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.45

Slices and slice groups F.4
In 2D scanning, you use slice groups to define the extent, posi-

tion, and orientation of the examination area to be scanned.
Slice groups are composed of individual slices used for subse-
quent reconstruction of one or more tomographic images. F.4
Slices always belong to a slice group. During graphic slice posi-

tioning you have to select an entire slice group. You are not able
to select individual slices. The only exception is a slice group
that consists of one slice only. F.4
All slices of a group are located in parallel, have the same slice
thickness, slice distance and field of view (FoV) as well as the
same phase-oversampling factor (for reducing artifacts). F.4
Slice thickness
Slice distance
Phase FOV
Read FOV
0.0

Field of view (FOV) F.4 The field of view of a slice group is defined by its length and
width. The length and width corresponds to the read-out and
phase-encoding directions in the magnetic field.
Page F.477, Changing the field of view (FOV) via the mouse
F.4
Slice thickness and slice The distance between the slices of a slice group is expressed
distance F.4 as a percentage of the slice thickness. In other words, as soon
as you change the slice thickness of a group, the absolute slice
distance changes as well. F.4
100%
The slice distance is equal to the slice thickness.
0%
The slices are contiguous.
< 0%
The slices overlap.
-100%
The slices overlap fully
Factor > 0 Factor 0 Factor < 0 Factor -1
Page P.15, Dist. factor Routine, Geometry Common

Page F.473, Increasing the distance between slices/slabs
Page F.471, Increasing the number of slices/slabs
F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.47

Slabs and slab groups F.4
For 3D scans, phase-encoding is applied to the spins in the

slice-selection direction. This allows you to measure entire vol-
ume ranges. In graphic slice positioning, these volume ranges
are defined as 3D slabs. F.4
Slabs are made up of contiguous slices (that is, slices without

any overlap or distance between them). The thickness of a slab
is the product of the effective slice thickness and the number of
slices. F.4
Effective slice thickness
Slab thickness
Read FOV
Phase FOV
0.0

Slab groups F.4 Similar to slices, 3D slabs are combined into slab groups. F.4
A slab group consists of several parallel 3D slabs that have the

same thickness and distance between them. F.4
The slab distance is a percentage of the slab thickness: F.4
> 0%
There is a distance between the slabs of a group.
0%
The slabs of the group are contiguous (without any distance
between them).
< 0%
The slabs of the group overlap.
Similar to a slice group, a 3D slab group may only be positioned
as a unit. F.4
Page F.473, Increasing the distance between slices/slabs

Page F.472 F.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.49

Saturation regions F.4
A saturation region (sat for short) is a volume where the MR sig-

nal is suppressed by an RF saturation pulse.
F.4
Standard saturation You are able to freely-define the position, orientation, and slice
regions F.4 thickness for standard saturation regions. Several saturation
regions can be planned in a single protocol. Their orientation,
position, and thickness is freely-selectable. Standard saturation
regions are not associated with a slice or slab group.
F.4
0.0

Parallel saturation Parallel saturation regions may be positioned in pairs or individ-

regions F.4 ually (positive or negative sat). They are associated with and
parallel to a slice or slab group. The distance from the satura-
tion region to the outermost slice is set via a protocol parameter.
Page P.119 F.4
If you translate, rotate, or change the particular slice or slab

group, the two saturation regions are adjusted accordingly. F.4
(1) Positive parallel sat

(2) Negative parallel sat
(3) Paired parallel saturation regions
0.0

The names of the parallel saturation regions are derived from

the preferred direction (orientation) of the slice/slab groups and
may be selected accordingly in the Geometry parameter task
card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator F.4
F.4
Orientation of the slice group Negative parallel sat Positive parallel sat
Sagittal preferred Parallel R (right) Parallel L (left)
Coronal preferred Parallel A (anterior) Parallel P (posterior)
Transverse preferred Parallel F (feet) Parallel H (head)
0.0

Tracking sat regions F.4 You are able to plan tracking sat regions only for certain proto-
cols. These protocols use sequences for sequential multi-slice
scans and scan one slice group or slab group only. F.4
A tracking sat region is associated with and parallel to the slices

of a slice or slab group. It may be positioned on either side of
the slice or slab group. F.4
The tracking sat region passes through the slice/slab group in

either the ascending or descending direction. To avoid shifting
the slice into a region that is already saturated, the sequential
direction is always away from the sat band. For example, for
transverse slices with the sat band above the slice, the excita-
tion order (series) must be descending. Remember that DICOM
defines 'ascending' as moving from foot to head. The name of
the sat depends on the preferred direction of the slice/3D slab
group. Suitable sats may be selected from the list on the Geom-
etry parameter task card.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator F.4
F.4
Orientation of the slice group Order of RF excitation Sat name

Sagittal preferred Ascending Tracking R -> L
Sagittal preferred Descending Tracking L -> R
Coronal preferred Ascending Tracking A -> P
Coronal preferred Descending Tracking P -> A
Transverse preferred Ascending Tracking F -> H
Transverse preferred Descending Tracking H -> F
0.0

During scanning, the saturation region tracks the most recently

scanned slice. The distance between the sat and this particular
slice is the same as at the beginning of the scan (distance to the
first slice of the slice or slab group). F.4
With transverse images, an ascending saturation region is

located below and a descending saturation region is located
above the slice group. F.4
(1) Tracking Sat F -> H

(2) Tracking H -> F
(3) Normal vector
The thickness and distance of a tracking saturation region
may be set on the Geometry parameter task card only.
Page F.529, Parameter card Geometry Saturator
0.0

Navigator Objects F.4
Navigator objects are used in special navigator sequences,

e.g., to record the movement of the diaphragm and uptake of
contrast media, and to trigger the signal that starts the scan. F.4
There are two types of navigator objects: F.4
Navigator cuboid
finite cuboid volume
Navigator pen
infinitely long "pen"
Parameter of navigator
objects F.4
Navigator pen Navigator cuboid
(1) Basic vector 1 (normal direction)

(2) Basic vector 2 (phase-encoding direction)
(3) Extent in the readout direction (navigator direction)
0.0

The base area of navigator objects is defined by the extent in

the direction of base vector 1 and base vector 2. F.4
Unlike navigator cuboids, navigator pens have an infinite extent

in the navigator direction. F.4
A two-dimensional excitation profile may be defined within the

base area. This excitation profile is defined by the sequence.
Depending on the application, it may have a rectangular, trape-
zoidal, or elliptical contour. F.4
Navigator objects may be freely-positioned and oriented. It is

not possible to add new navigator objects with the mouse. They
may be added only on the Geometry/Navigator parameter
task card. F.4
0.0

Display of graphic objects in the reference

images F.4
As soon as you have scanned or loaded reference images, the

graphic display shows the intersection or projection of your
planned slices or slabs together with the reference images. F.4
The display used for these objects shows you their position and
orientation with respect to the reference images.
F.4
Intersecting or If a graphic object intersects the reference image at an angle

projection areas 30, the lines or areas of this intersection are displayed. F.4
F.4
Example:
Sagittal slices in a transverse image.
F.4
When graphic objects intersect the reference images at a shal-

low angle (30),they are projected onto the reference image.
In this case, a projection area is displayed instead of intersect-
ing lines. F.4
In a graphic object located parallel to the reference image, the

projection area corresponds exactly to the dimensions of the
field of view (FoV). F.4
Example:
Sagittal slices in a sagittal image. F.4
0.0

Upon request, Siemens Service will modify the default for the
limit angle (30). For CSI slices, the default for the limit angle
is 45.
If several graphic objects intersect the image at a shallow angle

and one of these objects is selected, only the projection area of
the selected object is displayed. F.4
The projection area will not be displayed, if several graphic

objects intersect the image at a shallow angle and none of the
objects is selected. F.4
0.0

Angle of intersection F.4 The display of intersection and projection lines in reference
images shows you whether a graphic object is located in per-
pendicular, single-oblique, or double-oblique orientation to the
reference image. F.4
Reference Reference Reference

image image image
Perpendicular intersection Single-oblique intersection Double-oblique intersection
F.4
NOTE
Intersections shown as a continuous or dashed line provide
information only about the position of the intersection
with respect to the reference image. F.4
The display does not provide information regarding the

position of the planned slice or slab to standard
anatomical views, since oblique or double-oblique
intersections may be used as reference images as well. F.4
0.0

Single-oblique With single oblique intersections, one side of the field of view
intersection F.4 (FOV) is located in parallel with the intersecting line. The pro-
jection area shows a double border for this purpose. An arrow
indicates the phase-encoding direction of the currently pro-
jected intersection area. F.4
Single-oblique slice group Single-oblique slice group

intersecting the reference that does not intersect the
image reference image
0.0

Double-oblique With double oblique intersections, neither of the two sides of the
intersections F.4 field of view (FOV) of the slice group is parallel with the common
line of intersection with the reference image. Accordingly, two
side areas are displayed on the projection area, providing a
spatial impression. The arrows indicate the phase-encoding
direction.
F.4
Shift slice group without Shift slice group with

Phase oversampling Phase oversampling
0.0

Partial views with oblique With oblique intersections, not all intersections of a slice or slab
intersections F.4 group will be intersecting the reference image. Some slices may
be completely in front of or behind the reference image. As a
result, they are not drawn as a line of intersection. F.4
The bar in the reference image shows you the number of slices
planned that do not intersect the reference image. F.4
Oblique slice group in the

coronal reference image
Oblique slice group in the

transverse reference image
Box mode Package mode
0.0

Partial view of an oblique slice group in the transverse reference image
If you have magnified a reference image and shifted the image

content in the image segment, you may not be able to see the
planned graphic object in the reference image. F.4
Reduce the reference image to its original size again.

Or F.4
Select the invisible slice/slab group on the Routine/

Geometry parameter card.
Select Fit to Image or Perpendicular from the Protocol
menu or the context menu to move the center of the slice
group to the plane of the reference image.
This function allows you to change the position of the slice/
slab group.
0.0

Display in line or The intersection of a slice through a reference image can be

box mode F.4 displayed either as a line (line mode) or as a rectangle (box
mode).
F.4
Box mode Line mode
Oblique and perpendicular inter-

section in the coronal reference
image
Oblique and perpendicular inter-

section in the transverse reference
image
0.0

The box mode shows the actual intersection surface and there-
fore the anatomical region covered by the slice. F.4
In line mode you are able to see the center line of an intersec-
tion area.
F.4
Click the appropriate button on the tool bar.

Or F.4
Select View > Display > Line mode ON /Off from the menu.
Line mode is activated.
F.4
Select View > Graphics > Line mode ON / OFF again from
the menu.
The Box mode is activated.
F.4
Display in In package mode you are able to hide the individual lines of
Package mode F.4 intersection of the slice/slab groups. Only the outline of the
intersection area of the entire group and its thickness are visi-
ble. F.4
Select package mode if your slice group contains a large num-

ber of individual slices to make your display clearer. F.4
Select View > Display > Package mode ON/OFF or click

on-screen.
Package mode is activated. The dashed center lines show the
thickness of the individual slices or individual 3D slab. F.4
0.0

Slice or slab groups are automatically displayed in package

mode if the elements of the group overlap or are very close
together (depending on the zoom setting (factor) of the refer-
ence image).
0.0

Display of saturation Saturation regions that intersect the reference image are dis-
regions F.4 played as cross-hatched bars. F.4
Saturation regions that are perpendicular to the reference

image have a continuous border. Oblique saturation regions
have a dashed line border. F.4
Oblique and perpendicular

saturation region in the
sagittal reference image
As you select a saturation region, the bar is highlighted. The

center (pivot) and the handles are displayed. F.4
A saturation region running parallel to the reference image

completely covers the reference image with its cross-hatched
shading if the region includes the image plane of the reference
image. F.4
It is not possible to project saturation regions onto reference

images.
0.0

Display of navigator
objects F.4
Non-selected navigator objects are displayed in turquoise in the

reference images. F.4
Non-selected navigator pens are displayed in blue.

F.4
As soon as you select a navigator cuboid or navigator pen, it is

displayed in yellow and the handles appear.
F.4
The navigator objects are always shown with projection lines.

This gives you a spatial impression of the position and extent of
the navigator object.
F.4
If the navigator does not have a common intersection with

the reference image, the project lines will be shown as
dashed lines.
If the navigator does have a common intersection with the

reference image, the project lines will be shown as continu-
ous lines. The intersection area, in this case, is shown as
dashed lines.
0.0

The arrow next to the navigator object shows the direction of

base vector 2 and the navigation direction. F.4
The arrow may be displayed in four different ways to distinguish

between four different situations. F.4
(1) The arrow points in the direction of the base vector 2

(phase-encoding direction). The navigator orientation
passes into the image plane.
(2) The arrow points in the direction of the base vector 2
(phase-encoding direction). The navigator orientation runs
out of the image plane.
(3) The arrow with two lines points in the navigator direction.
The direction of base vector 2 is not displayed, since the
angle between the reference image and the direction of the
base vector 2 is between 45 and 90.
(4) Two arrows are visible. The arrow points in the direction of
the base vector 2 (phase-encoding direction). The arrow
with two lines points in the navigator direction.
0.0

Graphic slice positioning (GSP) F.4
You can translate or rotate the graphic objects in the reference

images (slices, slabs, saturation regions, navigators). You can
also delete this object, add new objects, or change the param-
eters of the objects. F.4
To this end, you are using the Position Toolbar or the mouse.F.4
You may also use the parameter cards to manipulate graphic
objects as described. In this case, you adjust the parameters
numerically and work mainly in the Geometry parameter card.
Page F.524, Geometry Common parameter card (2D) F.4
0.0

Displaying orientation aids F.4
The buttons on the Position Toolbar and the menu commands

display additional orientation aids in the reference images. This
facilitates processing graphic objects. F.4
Changing phase oversampling

Page F.432, Display of phase oversampling
F.4
Reference lines on/off

Page F.434, Reference image position lines
F.4
Coil positions on/off

Page F.434, Coil elements
F.4
Adjust volume on/off

Page F.437, Adjustment volume
F.4
Image text on/off

Page F.332, Showing/hiding image text
F.4
Hide/Show slice oversampling.

Page F.433, Display of slice oversampling
F.4
Show/hide projection display (menu)

Page F.436, Projection display
F.4
0.0

Display of phase Phase oversampling is recommended to prevent aliasing arti-

oversampling facts. The field of view (FoV) is symmetrically expanded in the
F.4 phase-encoding direction on both sides of the initial FoV. F.4
This addition to the FoV is not visible in the final images The
phase-oversampled area is displayed as dashed lines in the ref-
erence image. F.4
15% 100% 15% 15% 100% 15%

Phase-encoding direction Phase-encoding direction
The percentage given refers to the field of view (FOV) in the

phase-encoding direction. For example, 30% phase oversam-
pling would increase the field of view (FOV) by 15% on both
sides. The scan time is also prolonged by 30%.
F.4
You may change the phase oversampling via the mouse.

Page F.480, Changing phase oversampling via the mouseF.4
0.0

Display of slice Slice oversampling is suitable for 3D scans only. Slice oversam-
oversampling F.4 pling defines an area of a slice protruding on both sides (of a 3D
slab). This additional area is excited during the scan. F.4
Box mode: Slice oversampling Box mode: Slice and phase oversampling
25 %
100 %
25 %
Phase-encoding direction Phase-encoding direction
To improve the display of objects, deactivate the display of slice

oversampling. F.4
Click this button.

Or F.4
Select View > Graphics > Hide Slice Oversampling via

the main menu.
0.0

Reference image position The position lines of the reference image make it easier for you
lines F.4 to orient the images in space and plan the slices correctly for
subsequent scans.
F.4
Click the button to activate display of the position lines.

Or F.4
Select View > Reference Lines ON.

The menu item is now shown with a check mark. F.4
Coil elements F.4 The currently connected coils and individual coil elements may
be displayed for support during the examination. This facilitates
your selecting the correct coil elements for the region of the
body to be examined. F.4
Only coils with a known table position may be displayed. These

are either coils with fixed table positions or coils whose position
was determined dynamically via application adjustment. F.4
0.0

Open the protocol.

The coil elements that are connected and can be displayed are
shown. F.4
Click this button.

Or F.4
Select the View > Coil Positions On.
Coil elements are only displayed preferably on sagittal or

coronal reference images.
The coil elements are displayed symbolically as thin bars. The

length of the bar corresponds to the length (sensitive region) of
the coil element. F.4
Coil elements selected for the examination are identified by

solid white bars. Coil elements not selected for the examination
are displayed as bars edged in red.
F.4
You can select and deselect coil elements both via the mouse
in the image segment or on the System parameter card.
Page F.535, Parameter card System-Coils
0.0

Projection display F.4 Normally, the projection display of slices/slabs is active only
when the angle between the graphic object and the reference
image is less than 30. F.4
However, you may change this threshold. F.4
Select View > Graphics > Projection On from the main

menu.
The objects are displayed as a projection on the reference

images. F.4
0.0

Adjustment volume F.4 In some cases it may be useful to display the adjustment vol-
ume in the reference images.
F.4
Click the button to activate display of the adjustment volume.

Or F.4
Select Adjust Volume On/Off.
The adjustment volume is marked green in the reference

images and allows for editing.
Page C.28, Editing the adjustment volume graphically F.4
0.0

Shadow lines F.4 To improve the display of graphic objects (GSP Graphic Slice
Positioning objects) in light images, you can include shadow
lines in the intersection and projection areas. F.4
Select View > Graphics > Shadow On.

The menu item is marked with a check mark. F.4
Shadow On/Off
Whenever you save or copy reference images containing

graphic objects to a film sheet, the shadow lines will always
be included and displayed. It does not matter whether the
Shadow On option is activated or deactivated.
0.0

Selecting graphic objects F.4
Before you can edit a graphic object in one of the reference

images you must first select it. F.4
You can select objects in one of two ways: F.4
Explicit selection
Implicit selection
("Implicit selection by direct manipulation")
Explicit selection F.4
Select an object by clicking an intersection or projection line.

Or F.4
Select an object from the Slice Group, Slab Group, or Nav-

igator list on the Geometry or Routine parameter card.
The graphic object is now highlighted. The handles are dis-
played. F.4
0.0

(1)
(2) (2)
(3) (1)
(1) Extent handles

(e.g. for changing slice thickness;
not for projection areas)
(2) FOV handles or phase oversampling handles
(enlarge scan range)
(3) Pivot handle
(move)
You can now explicitly deselect objects again: F.4
Select Edit > Deselect All from the main menu.

Or F.4
Select another graphic object.
0.0

Implicit selection F.4 Move the mouse cursor over one of the graphic objects.
The mouse cursor changes shape allowing you to move or
rotate the graphic object with the mouse. F.4
You may now directly move or rotate the graphic via the
mouse without having to click it.
As soon as you edit a graphic object, it is implicitly selected. Its
settings are displayed on the parameter cards. F.4
0.0

Moving objects F.4
Slice groups, slab groups, saturation regions, or navigator

objects planned in a protocol usually need to be moved to fit the
anatomy of the patient. F.4
There are various ways of moving objects: F.4
Panning with the mouse

Moving via menu commands
Positioning to the millimeter on the Geometry parameter
card
Page F.579, Entering the slice position with millimeter
precision
0.0

Moving via the mouse F.4 Select a graphic object.

The pivot handle is displayed in the center of the object dis-
played. F.4
Place the mouse cursor on the pivot handle, hold the left
mouse button down, and move the object to the required
position.
If the pivot handle of an object is no longer visible in the refer-
ence images: F.4
Press the Shift key on your keyboard and hold the key down.
Place the mouse pointer on the intersection or position line
of a graphic object.
Move the region while holding the left mouse button down.
To move graphic objects in the projection display, click on the

contour line and move the object while keeping the mouse
button pressed.
0.0

Panning with the mouse
The display of the repositioned object is updated on all refer-

ence images.
F.4
Parallel tracking saturation regions may be moved only

together with slices or slabs assigned to them.
0.0

Moving a slice group You can move slice groups by half the distance between slices
by half a slice distance F.4 in the positive or negative slice-selection direction. F.4
This greatly simplifies the task of positioning a second scan to

fill the gaps between the slices of the first scan. This is particu-
larly helpful when the number of slices in one scan does not suf-
fice to provide for a contiguous anatomic coverage of a specific
volume (e.g., some breath-hold exams).
F.4
Select Protocol > Gap Filling + or Protocol > Gap Filling .

Or F.4
Press the short cut Ctrl + 6 (Gap Filling +) or Strg + 5 (Gap

Filling -).
0.0

Moving the slice group Unlike with the Gap filling function, you are able to move a slice
as a whole F.4 group by the thickness of the entire group in one step. This func-
tion is especially suitable for multiple breath-hold scans.
F.4
Select Protocol > Stack + or Protocol > Stack .

Or F.4
Press the short cut Ctrl + 4 (Stack +) or Ctrl + 3 (Stack -).
Stack+
If the slice group contains only one slice, it will be moved

across its slice thickness in or against the slice-selection
direction.
0.0

Moving centers into the You are able to move the centers of slice/slab groups and nav-
reference image plane F.4 igator objects precisely into the reference plane (image plane of
the reference image).
F.4
Place the input focus on the reference image to be used as

the reference plane.
The image will have a bright border.
F.4
Select Protocol > Shift to Image.

Or F.4
Place the mouse cursor on the reference image, right-click,

and select Shift to Image from the context menu.
The centers of all graphic objects (except saturation regions)

will be moved into the reference plane. F.4
Graphic objects (except for saturation regions) whose centers

lie outside the visible area of the reference image are moved
towards the center of this image. F.4
It is not possible to move slice groups, slab groups, and satu-

ration regions that are parallel with the reference image to the
reference image plane in this manner.
0.0

Example: The center of a slice group is moved into the image

area of the reference image by selecting Shift to Image. F.4
Shift to Image
0.0

Rotating objects F.4
You can rotate graphic objects to fit them to an anatomical

structure. F.4
There are various ways of rotating objects: F.4
Rotating using the mouse

Rotating using menu commands
Orientation to the degree set on the Geometry parameter
card
Page F.577, Setting the slice orientation at a precise
angle
Rotating using Select the graphic object explicitly.

the mouse
Click on the selected object with the left mouse button and
F.4
rotate it about its center.

The rotational axis is now perpendicular to the reference image.F.4
Rotating
0.0

Or F.4
Move the pointer over the object.

The pointer changes shape when placed over the delimitation
lines. F.4
Hold the left mouse button down and rotate the object about
its center.
Rotating a navigator Place the mouse cursor on one of the contour lines of the
cuboid F.4 navigator cuboid. Do not use the handle.
The mouse pointer changes shape. S.3 F.4
Press the left mouse button and drag it in the desired direc-
tion of rotation.
Rotating a regular Regular saturation regions and navigator pens are rotated sim-
saturation region and ilar to slice and slab groups. F.4
navigator pen F.4

The center (pivot) always appears at the position clicked with
the mouse. This point is the center of rotation. F.4
You can move the center of rotation by clicking another position

in the Sat region. F.4
Parallel and tracking saturation regions may be rotated only

with the slices or slabs assigned to them.
0.0

Combining rotate and You may rotate and move objects in one step. F.4
shift functions
Hold the Shift key down to move the objects.
F.4
Release the Shift key to rotate it.

Press the Shift key again to shift the object again.
Rotating Objects in the You can rotate slice and 3D block groups in the plane. These
Plane F.4 objects must be projection areas (flat section with reference
image).
F.4
Press the Ctrl key and move the cursor over the object.
The pointer changes shape when placed over the delimitation
lines. F.4
Hold the left mouse button down, press the Ctrl key, and
rotate the object about its center.
The rotational axis runs through the center of the graphic object
and is perpendicular to the object. F.4
Rotating in the plane
0.0

Rotation of oblique When you rotate slices the center of which is not in the plane of
intersections F.4 rotation (intersections inclined in one or two axes), the center of
the slice moves as you rotate the slice.
F.4
Swapping the phase The main orientation of the object may change as it is rotated.F.4
direction F.4
If the object has a rectangular FOV, you may find that the inter-
section lines in the result display are noticeably longer or
shorter than originally, because of the realigned phase-encod-
ing direction of the FoV. F.4
Example:
A mostly transverse slice group becomes a mostly coronal slice
group. F.4
Rotating
After the rotation, check the phase-encoding direction and

swap it if necessary. F.4
0.0

Explicitly select a slice/slab group or a navigator object.

Select Protocol > Swap Phase from the main menu or
Swap Phase from the context menu.
The field of view of the selected object is rotated about 90. The
phase-encoding and readout directions are swapped. F.4
Swapping phases
It is not possible to apply this method to saturation regions.
0.0

Tilt a slice group by 90 F.4 When you tilt a slice group by 90, the intersection line appears
rotated counterclockwise by 90.
F.4
Select the saturation group.

Select Protocol > Turn Group.
The center of the slice group remains unchanged. F.4
Tilting a group
0.0

Aligning graphic objects You may change oblique intersections of the graphic object to
perpendicularly F.4 align them perpendicularly to the reference image. F.4
Select a reference image.

Select a graphic object that obliquely intersects the reference
image.
Select Protocol > Perpendicular.
Or F.4
Select Perpendicular from the context menu.

Or F.4
Press the short cut Ctrl + 1.

The selected slice or slab group will be aligned perpendicularly
to the reference image. Its center will then be moved into the
reference image plane. F.4
Aligning perpendicularly
0.0

If a navigator intersects the reference image at an angle 45,

the navigator direction will be aligned perpendicular to the
image.
If a navigator intersects the reference image at an angle 45,
the navigator direction will be aligned in the image plane.
If no object is selected, Perpendicular will be applied to all
oblique slice and slab groups. Oblique saturation regions or
navigators are not aligned.
0.0

Making slices mutually You can align a slice group orthogonally to another planned
orthogonal F.4 slice group. F.4
Select the slice group you want to align.

Select Protocol > Orthogonal.
Or F.4
Press the short cut Ctrl + 2.

The center of the aligned slice will be in the plane of the refer-
ence slice. F.4
Orthogonal
The Perpendicular function is used to align objects to the ref-

erence image plane. The Orthogonal function is used to
align the selected slice to the reference slice.
0.0

Adding slice and slab groups F.4
If the slice or slab groups shown in the reference images are not
suitable to your diagnostic question, other groups may be
added. F.4
The number of slice or slab groups that you can add depends
on the protocol selected.
Page F.571, Soft limits and extended limits F.4
The order in which new slices or slabs are drawn and edited
does not affect the order of scanning or numbering recon-
structed images.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images
F.4
There are various ways of adding new slice groups: F.4
Freely-selectable slice positioning via the mouse

Positioning new slices in the center of the image segment
Positioning a new slices using an orientation line
Adding new slices in the 3-point mode
0.0

Rules for adding F.4 No slice group was selected before adding: F.4
The new slice group contains one slice.

The center of this slice is in the reference image plane.
Another slice group was selected before adding: F.4
The new slice group inherits the properties of the selected

group (number of slices, distance factor, swap, phase over-
sampling and slice oversampling).
The new slice group has the same orientation as the refer-
ence slice group and is moved in the slice-selection direction
(normal direction) parallel to the thickness of the entire group
(Stack+).
0.0

Freely positioning Use the mouse to move new slice or slab groups into any posi-
slice groups F.4 tion in the reference image.
F.4
Click the Create Slice(Slab) Group button.
The mouse pointer changes shape.

F.4
Click the position in the reference image where you want to

insert a new slice group.
The center of the slice or slab group will appear in the image
plane of the reference image. F.4
Create slice (slab)

group
Hold the mouse button down and rotate/move the new slice or
slab group with the mouse. direction. Click the image again to
create the next slice/3D slab group. F.4
0.0

Positioning graphic You are able to insert new objects in the center of the selected
objects in the center image segment. The center of the newly created slice or slab
of the image segment F.4 group is positioned precisely in the image plane of the reference
image.
F.4
Select Protocol > Add Slice(Slab) Group.
If an existing group is selected, the new slice group will be

shifted parallel and contiguous to the selected group.
F.4
Use orientation lines You may also position a new slice/slab group along an orienta-
to position slice tion line. To this end, draw the line into the reference image
groups F.4 using the mouse. The slice/slab group is then positioned along
the line and is located perpendicularly to the reference image.
The center of the new slice/slab group is in the plane of the ref-
erence image and positioned exactly between the start and end
point of the orientation line.
F.4
Place the mouse cursor on the starting point of the line.

Keep the left mouse button pressed and drag the mouse cur-
sor to the point where you want to position the new slice/slab
group.
The orientation line is drawn in. F.4
0.0

You can change the direction and length of the line, as long as
you hold the mouse button down. F.4

The new slice/slab group is displayed. F.4
Exiting "Create Slice (Slab) Select another mode from the tool bar.
Group" mode F.4
Or F.4
Select another mode from the main menu, for example,

Image Tools > Modify Graphics.
Or F.4
Select another mode from the context menu, for example,

Zoom/Pan On.
If you reach the maximum number of slice(slab) groups, the

Create Slice(Slab) Group mode will be automatically ended.
0.0

Adding a slice/slab This mode allows you to use random reference images to deter-
group in 3 point mode F.4 mine 3 points that define a plane. You are now adding a new
slice or slab group. The center slice or slab of this group passes
exactly through this plane. You can also align an existing slice
or slab group to this plane. F.4
When selecting the 3 points, you may scroll through the refer-
ence images or load new ones. F.4
Ensure that no graphic objects are selected. Select Edit >

Deselect All.
If you want to change an existing slice or slab group, verify
that it is not selected.
Click the Create Slice (Slab) Group (3 point) button to acti-

vate this mode.
F.4
Click three positions successively in one or more reference

images.
After each mouse click, a mark appears at the position you

selected. F.4
As long as the third mark is not positioned, you may move the
corner marks by dragging them with the mouse. Click on them
again for removal. F.4
0.0

Example: Localization of the right coronary artery F.4
(1) Define the first point

(2) Define the second point
(3) Define the third point,
the new slab is displayed
0.0

After you have defined the position of the third point, the new
slice or slab group will appear in the reference images and/or
the previously selected slice will be aligned with the 3 points. F.4
If you have created a new group, it will be selected automati-
cally. You can orient it by specifying 3 points.
You can add additional groups in three-point mode as follows. F.4

Deselect the last group you created.
Click three positions successively in one or more reference
images.
Finally, press the Esc key to deactivate Create Slice (Slab)

Group (3 points) mode.
Or F.4
Select Modify Graphics mode on the tool bar.

Or F.4
Switch to another mode (using the tool bar, main menu, or

context menu).
0.0

Adding saturation regions F.4
You may add further regular saturation regions in a protocol just

like slice or slab groups. F.4
Parallel and tracking saturation regions may only be added on

the Geometry parameter card. They cannot be added via
graphic slice positioning.
F.4
Creating a regular Select a reference image.

saturation region in the
Select Protocol > Add Sat to position a regular saturation
center of the image
region in the center of the image.
segment F.4
The new saturation region appears perpendicular to the refer-

ence image with a vertical intersection area. F.4
0.0

Regular saturation region Select a reference image.

Positioning freely
Select Image Tools > Create Sat.
F.4
Or F.4
Click the Create Sat toolbar to activate this mode.

F.4
Click the position in the reference image where you want to

insert the new saturation region.
The saturation region is located perpendicularly to the refer-
ence image. The intersection runs in vertical direction. The
thickness of the region is calculated using standard protocol
parameters. F.4
Create regular sat
You can change the positioning of the new saturation region by

dragging the mouse while holding the mouse button down. F.4
0.0

Regular sat using an You may also place a regular saturation region along an orien-
orientation line F.4 tation line. The saturation region is then located perpendicularly
to the reference image. F.4
Position the mouse pointer at the starting point of the orien-

tation line.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse cursor
in the direction you want to place the saturation region.
The new saturation region is displayed.
F.4
Exiting the mode F.4 You can exit Create Sat mode if you do not want to draw addi-
tional saturation regions. F.4
Press the Esc key.

The mouse is now in the Modify Graphics mode. F.4
Or F.4
Switch to another mode (using the tool bar or context menu).
When you have reached the maximum number of sat regions

the Create Sat mode is automatically ended. The color of the
icon changes from yellow to blue.
0.0

Changing graphic slice parameters F.4
Use the mouse to change the following slice and slab groups
parameter settings as well as edit standard saturation regions: F.4
Slice thickness or slab thickness
Number of slices or slabs per group
Distance between slices or slabs within a group
Slice oversampling
As an alternative, you may change these parameters numeri-

cally on the Geometry card.
Page F.524, Geometry Common parameter card (2D) F.4
Ensure that the mouse is in the Modify Graphics mode. If

necessary, press the Esc key to ensure that you are in that
mode.
0.0

Increasing the thickness Click the Extent Thickness button.

of the slices/slabs
Or F.4
F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Thickness.

F.4
Click the Extent handle, hold the mouse button down, and
drag the handle in the required direction.
To increase the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent
handle away from the group. F.4
To reduce the thickness of the slices/slabs, drag the extent han-

dle toward the group. F.4
The thickness will be displayed in millimeters on the reference

image as long as you keep the mouse button pressed. F.4
Release the mouse button once the slices/slabs have the

required thickness.
Changing the slice thickness also changes the distance

between slices since the distance factor remains constant. F.4
0.0

Increasing the number of

slices/slabs F.4
Click the Extent Slices (3D-group) to switch to this mode.

Or F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Slices

(slabs).
The mouse pointer changes shape near the pivot.
F.4
drag the handle in the required direction.
0.0

Drag the extent handle (mark) away from the group to increase
the number of slices. F.4
To decrease the number of slices drag the extent handle (mark)

toward the group. F.4
The number of slices will be displayed on the reference image

as long as you hold the mouse button down. F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as you have generated

the required number of slices or slabs.
The maximum possible number of slices is limited by other pro-

tocol parameters (for example, by TR). It is not possible to
exceed this limit by dragging the extent handles. The high-
lighted display indicates when you have reached the limit (thick
line). F.4
F.4
0.0

Increasing the distance Click the Extent Distance button to switch to the appropriate
between slices/slabs mode.
F.4
Or F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Distance.

F.4
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
Drag the extent handle away from the group to increase the dis-
tance between slices. F.4
To reduce the distance between slices, drag the extent handle

toward the group. F.4
0.0

The distance between slices will be displayed on the reference

image as long as you keep the mouse button pressed. F.4
Release the mouse button, when the slices/slabs show the

required distance.
0.0

Changing slice In 3D scans, you can change the slice oversampling. F.4
oversampling F.4
Click the Extent Slice Oversampling button.

Or F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Slice Over-
sampling.
F.4
drag the handle in the required Keep the mouse button
pressed.
To increase the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle
away from the group. F.4
To reduce the slice oversampling, drag the extent handle toward

the group. F.4
Slice oversampling is displayed on the reference image as long

as you hold the mouse button down. F.4
0.0

Release the mouse button as soon as slice oversampling

reaches the desired size.
To change the thickness of the slices/slabs, press the Alt key

to switch to the Extent Thickness mode. Release the Alt key
to return to the Extent Slice Oversampling mode again.
0.0

Switching between the Changing the slice distance is just as easy as changing the
slice number/ slice slice thickness. Press the Alt key to switch to Extent slices
distance/ and slice (slabs) change the number of planned slices, then return to the
thickness mode F.4 Extent Thickness or Extent Distance mode (release the Alt
key again).
F.4
Changing the field of view Select the slice or slab group whose field of view (FoV) you
(FOV) via the mouse F.4 want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
If you drag the FoV handle in the readout direction, the icon
(shown) will appear next to the mouse pointer.
F.4
If you drag the FOV handle in the phase-encoding direction, the

icon (shown) will appear next to the mouse pointer.
F.4
The dimensions of the current field of view (FoV) are displayed

on the reference image as long as you hold the mouse button
pressed.
F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as the field of view (FoV)

has the required size.
0.0

Notes on enlarging the field of view (FOV) F.4
You may continue enlarging the field of view in the phase-

encoding direction until you obtain a square field of view.
You can only enlarge the field of view in the readout direction
as a function of the FOV aspect ratio. The ratio between the
length in the phase-encoding and readout direction remains
constant. If you enlarge the field of view in the readout direc-
tion, the field of view will be enlarged as well in the phase-
encoding direction.
0.0

Notes on reducing the field of view (FoV) F.4
You may only reduce the field of view in the readout direction
in conjunction with the phase-encoding direction. The FOV is
also proportionally reduced in the phase-encoding direction
to maintain a constant FoV aspect ratio.
The FoV in the phase-encoding direction can be reduced

independently of the readout direction.
0.0

Changing phase
oversampling via
the mouse F.4
Click this button to begin processing the phase oversam-

pling.
Or F.4
Select Image Tools > Extent Mode > Extent Phase Over-
sampling On.
Select the slice or slab group whose phase oversampling
factor you want to change.
Drag the FoV handle in the phase-encoding direction.
The current value of the phase oversampling factor will be dis-

played on the reference image as long as you keep the mouse
button pressed. F.4
Release the mouse button as soon as the phase oversam-

pling has been enlarged/reduced as required.
0.0

Changes in phase oversampling have a symmetric effect on

the slice or slab group. The size of the field of view (FoV) and
the center remain constant.
0.0

Regular saturation You are able to move saturation regions, or change their orien-
regions changing F.4 tation or thickness with the mouse. The procedure is the same
as for processing slice and slab groups.
F.4
Other saturation region parameters may be edited numerically

on the Geometry parameter card.
F.4
Parallel or tracking You can change the position and orientation of a parallel/track-
saturation regions ing saturation region via the slice/slab group associated with
changing F.4 this slice group. The distance between slice/slab groups
remains constant.
Page F.442, Moving objects
F.4
Depending on the extent handle clicked, you are able to change

the Thickness of the sat region or the Distance to the slice/slab
group.
F.4
With parallel saturation regions, modifying the slice thickness

and the distance to the slice/slab group always affects both
saturation regions symmetrically.
0.0

(1) Handle for changing the sat thickness

(2) Handle for changing the distance from the slice/slab group
To change the thickness of the parallel saturation region: F.4
Click the Extent handle facing away from the slice/slab

group, press the left mouse button, and drag it.
To change the distance of the parallel saturation region: F.4
Click the Extent handle facing toward the slice/slab group,

press the left mouse button, and drag it.
0.0

Switching between slice You are able to quickly and easily switch to position editing by
thickness and position pressing the Shift key while changing the slice thickness of sat-
editing F.4 uration regions. You can then move the selected standard sat-
uration region before returning to Extent Thickness mode (by
releasing the Shift key again). F.4
0.0

Deleting graphic objects F.4
You can delete or replace graphic objects that you no longer

need for measurements.
F.4
Deleting selected First select the slice object you want to delete.
objects F.4
Select Edit > Delete from the main menu or Delete from the
context menu.
Or F.4
Click the Delete button or press the Del key.
The selected object is deleted. The next object is selected in

place of the deleted object. F.4
The slice or slab group will not be deleted if the number of

slices/slabs is below the minimum number defined for the pro-
tocol. Instead, the number of slices/slabs is reduced to a mini-
mum.
F.4
Deleting all objects F.4 Select Delete All from the context menu.
All slice/slab groups and saturation regions of your protocol will
be deleted except for the minimum number of slice/slab groups
defined in the protocol. Parallel saturation regions are
retained. F.4
0.0

Transferring the position of reference images F.4
You can use the Copy Image Position function to temporarily

store the position and orientation of a reference image and copy
it to the selected slice of the open protocol. F.4
Select the reference image in one of the image segments.

Select the slice.
Select ImageTools > Copy Image Position from the main
menu or Copy Image Position from the context menu.
The position and orientation are copied to the selected slice. F.4
Copy image position
If no slice (slab) group is selected, the position and orientation

will be transferred to the first slice (slab) group of the protocol.
0.0

The position and orientation of the reference image is retained

in temporary storage and may be copied to other selected
slices as well. F.4
Select the slice.

Select Image Tools > Paste Image Position.
0.0

Nearest F.4
The Nearest function selects the best possible reference

images for a region of interest. F.4
As a first step, the center of the currently selected graphic

object is automatically moved into the plane of the previously
selected reference image. This shift is perpendicular to the
plane of the reference image. If the selected graphic object has
already been positioned at the location of interest, this position
is retained during the shift. F.4
In addition, in the other two reference image segments, refer-

ence images are selected with planes nearest to the position of
the selected graphic object.
F.4
The primary application of the Nearest function is spectros-

copy.
Procedure: F.4
Select the required reference image in the loaded reference

image series.
Select the graphic object.
Select ImageTools > Copy Image Position if you want the
graphic object to have the same orientation as the reference
image.
Page F.486, Transferring the position of reference images
Select Scroll > Nearest.
0.0

Applying slice settings F.4
After you have correctly positioned the graphic objects, you may
release the protocol for scanning.
F.4
Click the Apply button in the program control.

The graphic objects in the reference images are now removed.
However, the reference images are still displayed in the image
segments. F.4
When you have finished graphic slice positioning and com-

pleted the protocol, it is loaded into the scan system and run in
the job list accordingly.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination
F.4
The next, incomplete protocol of the program control will be

opened automatically. You can now position the slices for this
protocol and check the other parameter settings in the parame-
ter card.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters F.4
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Adjusting Measurement
F.5 Parameters F.5
Siemens Service has set up the routine scan programs on your

system to require minimal interactions on your part. Usually,
you need to change just a few parameters prior to scanning. F.5
The best time for you to adjust the measurement parameters of
your first protocol is directly after the graphic slice positioning
when your protocol is still open.
The parameter cards of the Exam task card contain all mea-
surement parameters of a protocol sorted by main topics. F.5
During routine scan operations, it usually suffices to look at the

parameters of the Routine parameter card to change the field
of view (FoV) or other parameters that require frequent modifi-
cation. F.5
For more specialized diagnostic problems and special anatom-

ical conditions, you can adjust additional measurement param-
eters in the Contrast, Resolution, and Geometry cards. F.5
Depending on the sequence used for scanning, other applica-

tion-specific parameter cards will be displayed. F.5
An overview of the parameter cards and short descriptions of

the parameters are provided on the following pages. F.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.51

Adjusting Measurement Parameters Examination
Next, the working procedure and input tools of the parameter

card stack are explained. Finally, you learn how to save your
parameter changes and copy them to other scan protocols. F.5
F.5
NOTE
Detailed descriptions of the individual measurement
parameters and notes on settings are provided in the
reference section.
Page P.11 F.5
F.5
NOTE
The parameter cards for spectroscopy scans are included
in the operator manual MR Spectroscopy operating
manual. F.5
F.5
NOTE
This chapter also describes sequences and functions of
optional applications packages. F.5
0.0

Examination Adjusting Measurement Parameters
Overview of parameter cards F.5
The parameter card stack shows the measurement parameters

of the protocol currently open. F.5
The measurement parameters are organized on cards by top-

ics. The parameter cards are arranged in a stack from left to
right to provide easy access to the cards most frequently used
and processed. F.5
Different measurement parameters are displayed on the indi-

vidual cards depending on the sequence associated with the
current scan protocol. F.5
The following pages discuss all parameters that can be dis-

played and edited for various examinations.
However, individual parameters may be missing on the
parameter cards depending on the sequence associated with
the open protocol.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.53

Some measurement parameters are available for verification

and editing on several parameter cards. In other words, you will
find a parameter on all cards for which it is relevant. F.5
The detailed descriptions of the measurement parameters in

the reference section also indicate the cards where the individ-
ual parameters are located.
Page P.11
F.5
Selecting a parameter The Routine parameter card is always on top of the stack when
card for editing F.5 you open a scan protocol. F.5
Click the tab of another parameter card to place it on top.
0.0

Routine parameter card F.5
The Routine parameter card includes all parameters of your

scan protocols. You are able to check as well as modify them
during scan preparations. F.5
The Routine parameter card shows different parameters

depending on whether your protocol uses 2D or 3D scans.
F.5
Routine parameter
card (2D) F.5
(1) Parameters that may be different for each slice group

(2) Parameters that apply to all slice groups
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.55

Routine parameter
card (3D) F.5
(1) Parameters that may be different for each slab group

(2) Parameters that apply to all slices/slabs
0.0

Parameters for image FoV read

resolution and contrast F.5 Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.148
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.149
TR
Repetition time, interval between two consecutive excita-
tions, Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo,
Page P.138
Averages
Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio, Page P.140
Filter
Filters selected, Page P.168
Parameters for monitoring Concatenations

the excitation sequence F.5 Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given num-
ber of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134
Coils F.5 Coil elements

Coils to be used for this protocol,
Page P.185
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.57

Slice parameters for Slice group

for 2D scanning F.5 Number of the slice group currently displayed,
Page F.576, Adding or deleting graphic objects
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group, Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm), Page P.16
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
graphic objects and Page P.111
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate sys-
tem,
Phase enc. dir.
Phase-encoding direction, specified in the main orientations
of the patient coordinate system, the angle of slice rotation
can also be set in a lower-level dialog box,
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the phase-encoding direction to
avoid aliasing artifacts, Page P.114
0.0

Slab parameters for 3D Slab group

scans F.5 Number of the slab group currently displayed,
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thick-
ness, Page P.15
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices of the slabs,
Page P.16
Slices per slab
Number of slices per slab,
Page P.17
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate sys-
tem, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and position of
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.59

Phase enc. dir.

Page P.113
Phase oversampling
avoid aliasing artifacts,
Page P.114
Slice oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the slice selection direction to
Page P.116
0.0

Contrast parameter card F.5
The Contrast parameter card displays all the settings for

changing the contrast in the images. Among other factors,
image contrast is critical for correct diagnosis. F.5
Depending on your diagnostic task, you can acquire images

with different weightings by setting parameters on the Contrast
card. Images with T1 and proton density weighting display ana-
tomical structures especially well. T2 weighting, on the other
hand, is more suitable to detect pathological changes. F.5
Additional effects can be obtained by spin preparation. Using

preceding RF pulses, contrast can be enhanced or signals can
be suppressed completely.
F.5
Contrast parameter card F.5
0.0

T1, T2, and proton To determine the T1, T2, or proton density weighting for spin
density contrast F.5 echo sequences, set the parameters TR (repetition time) and
TE (echo time). F.5
The values recommended for spin echo sequences are as fol-

lows: F.5
Short TR and short TE produces T1 contrast.

Long TR and long TE produces T2 contrast.
Long TR and short TE produces proton density contrast.
F.5
TR
tions,
Page P.137
TE
Echo time, time between RF pulse and measured echo
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.138
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins,
Page P.140
0.0

Settings for spin The actual scan should be preceded by an RF pulse (spin prep-
preparation F.5 aration) when you want to change the contrast or suppress cer-
tain signals (for example, for an inversion recovery sequence).F.5
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
TI
Inversion time,
Page P.139
Increasing signals F.5 Averages

Number of scans, repetitions to improve the signal-to-noise
ratio,
Page P.140
Restore Magn.
Signal raising with T2 weighting by acceleration relaxation of
the longitudinal magnetization,
Page P.146
0.0

Suppressing The MR signal comprises the sum of signals from water and fat
signals F.5 protons. This may result in chemical shift artifacts. Motion arti-
facts may be enhanced, and contrast may degrade. F.5
Signal suppression may be used to decrease these effects. F.5
Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
FatSat mode
Degree of fat suppression,
Page P.144
Water suppression
Suppression of the water signal,
Page P.145
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146
For some types of sequences, the Geometry Saturation

parameter card contains the Saturation mode parameter. If
you select the Quick option for this parameter, the options for
fat and water saturation change to Q-fat sat. and Q-water
sat.
0.0

Magnitude, phase, and The Contrast card lets you select the image types for recon-
real images F.5 struction: F.5
F.5
Magnitude Show the intensity of the MR signal

images
Phase images Show the phase angle of the spins
Real images Show the signed amplitude of the longitudinal
magnetization after an inversion pulse
F.5
N OT E
Reconstruction of image types is not possible in every
protocol and every sequence. F.5
F.5
Reconstruction
Selection of reconstruction mode and image type or types,
Page P.142
0.0

Parameters for dynamic TD

scanning F.5 Pause (for example, for breath-holding commands)
Page F.574, Displaying and editing parameter groups
and Page P.139
Infinite measurement
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value,
Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements for dynamic scanning,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Pause between individual measurements,
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series,
Page P.180
0.0

Resolution parameter card F.5
The image resolution lets you determine the size and the level
of detail shown by the images calculated from raw data. The
higher the image resolution, the longer the acquisition time. F.5
The Resolution parameter card consists of two subcards: F.5
Common
All parameters affecting image resolution are located on the
Resolution Common parameter card.
The Resolution Common parameter card differs for 2D and
3D measurements.
iPAT
The parameters for the PAT reconstruction method to
shorten the scan time are located on the Resolution iPAT
(PAT = parallel acquisition technique) parameter card.
0.0

Resolution Common
parameter card (2D) F.5
Resolution Common
0.0

Image resolution for FoV read

for 2D scanning F.5 Field of view in readout direction,
Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.147
Slice thickness
Slice thickness (in mm),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps,
Page P.150
Phase resolution
Ratio of readout to phase-encoding steps,
Page P.151
Phase partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
direction to reduce scanning time,
Page P.156
0.0

Image resolution for FoV read

3D scanning F.5 Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Field of view in phase-encoding direction, Page P.147
Slice thickness
Individual slice thickness for all slabs (partitions),
Page P.16
Base resolution
Number of readout steps, Page P.150
Phase resolution
Page P.151
Slice resolution
Resolution ratio in slice selection direction,
Page P.154
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in phase-encoding
Page P.156
Slice partial Fourier
Asymmetric scanning of raw data space in slice selection
Page P.157
Filter F.5 Filter

Selection of filter,
Page P.168
Interpolation F.5 Interpolation

Increasing the image matrix to double the size,
Page P.153
0.0

Resolution iPAT
parameter card F.5
F.5 iPAT mode

Selection of PAT reconstruction mode,
Page P.158
Accel. factor PE
Acceleration factor in phase-encoding direction,
Page P.160
0.0

Max. recomm. factor PE

read-only parameter in Online-Editor,
Page P.160
Ref. lines PE
Number of reference lines in the phase-encoding direction,
Page P.161
Accel. factor 3D
Acceleration factor in slice selection direction,
Page P.162
Max. recomm. factor 3D
read-only parameter in Online-Editor,
Page P.163
Ref. lines 3D
Number of reference lines in the slice selection direction,
Page P.164
Matrix coil mode
Setting the modes for the Matrix coil elements,
Page P.165
0.0

Geometry parameter card F.5
In routine examination mode, the position and orientation of

slice and slab groups is planned graphically using the toolbar
for graphic slice positioning and the mouse. F.5
Use the Geometry parameter card if these tools are not suffi-
cient for special diagnostic problems. This card also allows you
to define the parameters for checking the excitation sequence,
make settings for the saturation techniques, and position navi-
gators. F.5
The Geometry card consists of three subcards: F.5
Common
This card contains all parameters for positioning and
expanding the slices or slabs to be scanned. This parameter
card differs for 2D and 3D measurements.
Saturation
This card displays the parameters relevant to the inclusion of
regional or fat/water saturation.
Navigator
This card displays the parameters for navigator objects. It is
only used for special navigator sequences.
0.0

Geometry Common
Geometry Common
0.0

Slice parameters for 2D Slice group

scanning F.5 Number of the slice group currently displayed,
and Page P.13
Slices
Number of slices in this group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between the slices of the group as a percentage of
the slice thickness,
Page P.15
Position
Position of the slice group in the patient coordinate system,
Orientation
Orientation of the slice group in the patient coordinate sys-
Phase enc. dir.
Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Page P.114
0.0

Parameters for extending FoV read

the measurement range F.5 Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Slice thickness
Thickness of the individual slices (2D) or thickness of the
individual slices of the slabs (3D),
Page P.16
TR
tions,
Page P.137
Parameters for controlling Multi-slice mode

the excitation sequence F.5 Sequential (slice by slice) or interleaved (row by row) scan-
ning method,
Page P.131
Series
Excitation sequence of slices,
Page P.133
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given num-
ber of scans to avoid cross-talk,
Page P.134
0.0

Slab parameters for Slab group

3D scanning F.5 Number of the slab group currently displayed,
and Page P.13
Slabs
Number of slabs in this slab group,
Page P.14
Dist. factor
Distance between slabs as a percentage of the slab thick-
ness, Page P.15
Position
Position of the slab group in the patient coordinate system,
Orientation
Orientation of the slab group in the patient coordinate sys-
0.0

F.5 Phase enc. dir.

Page P.113
Phase oversampling
Page P.114
Slice oversampling
Extent of the field of view in the slice selection direction to
Page P.116
Slices per slab
Number of slices per slab,
Page P.17
0.0

Parameter card
Geometry Saturator F.5
Saturation mode F.5 Saturation mode

Saturation pulses before each scan or only as often as nec-
essary.
The Quick saturation mode is available for some sequences.

This mode ensures a shorter scan time and is used both for
fat and water saturation, as well as for single and parallel sat-
uration regions.
0.0

Signal suppression Fat sat. mode

fat/water F.5 Degree of fat suppression, Page P.144
Fat suppr.
Suppression of the fat signal, Page P.143
Water suppr.
Suppression of the water signal, Page P.145
Restore Magn.
Signal raising with T2 weighting by acceleration relaxation of
the longitudinal magnetization, Page P.146
Saturation regions F.5 Saturation regions are areas the signal of which is saturated by
special RF pulses to avoid motion artifacts. F.5
Sat. region
Number of the saturation slice displayed,
Thickness
Thickness of this saturation slice, Page P.118
Position
Position of this saturation slice in the patient coordinate sys-
Orientation
Orientation of this saturation slice in the patient coordinate
system, Page F.577, Adjusting the orientation and posi-
tion of graphic objects and Page P.118
0.0

Special Sat
Selection of a parallel or tracking saturation region,
Page P.119
If you have selected the Quick saturation mode, a Quick
option is available for all parallel saturation regions (for exam-
ple, Q Parallel H). Tracking saturation regions cannot be
planned in Quick mode.
Gap
Distance between parallel or tracking saturation slice and
slice group,
Page P.119
Thickness
Thickness of the parallel or tracking saturation slice,
Page P.119
0.0

Parameter card
Geometry-Navigator F.5
0.0

Navigator
Type of navigator object currently displayed,
Page P.121
Position
Position of the navigator object in the patient coordinate sys-
tem,
Page P.122
Orientation
Orientation of the navigator object in the patient coordinate
system,
Page P.122
Rotation
Angle by which the navigator object is rotated in the slice
plane defined by the orientation,
Page P.123
Base size phase
Extent of the navigator object in the phase-encoding direc-
tion, Page P.123
Base size read
Extent of the navigator object in the readout direction,
Page P.123
Thickness
Thickness of the navigator slice,
Page P.123
0.0

System parameter card F.5
The System card is divided into four subcards: F.5
Coils
This subcard shows the stylized patient and the positions of
the coils connected. The area above the patient displays the
coils with positions not (yet) known, the area underneath the
patient displays the coils with known positions. These coil
elements are shown in the GSP as well.
Miscellaneous
This subcard is used to define the position of the scan
region. You may perform the scan using the current table
position or define a different position.
The selection lists for image numbering allow you to define
the order in which the reconstructed images are numbered.
Adjustments and Transmitter/Receiver
These two parameter cards contain the settings for system
adjustment. These cards are normally not used during rou-
tine operation. The adjustment settings should be changed
only under special circumstances by highly experienced
users.
Chapter C.2, Adjusting the System
0.0

Parameter card
System-Coils F.5
All coil elements connected are displayed on the parameter

card. They can be selected by the user for the respective
scan.
Several fully identical coils (e.g. Body Array coils) may be
connected to the system. The coils are uniquely identified
and differentiated by the software. The user is able to differ-
entiate the coil elements via the tool tip displayed. The coil
name, coil element name, and the plug number are dis-
played.
The coil elements are shown as buttons and do not overlap.
Up to 64 coil elements may be shown.
0.0

The stylized patient shows the patient positioning; the body

coil shows the table position relative to the patient.
The following dependencies exist between the coil elements
selected and the iPAT acceleration factors (Accel. factor PE,
Accel. factor 3D):
Page P.187
Please refer to the System Manual for a detailed description of
the coils including their use.
F.5
F.5
NOTE
Coil selection is linked to the position of the scan region.
Therefore, the coil selection of the protocols already
processed and completed is automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols sharing the same position of
the scan region. F.5
You can deactivate automatic coil selection. This is done by

selecting Queue > Automatic Coil select.
F.5
NOTE
When you copy using copy reference, the target protocol
inherits the coil configuration of the source protocol. The
new coil configuration is stored at the corresponding
position of the scan region. F.5
0.0

Parameter card
System Miscellaneous F.5
F.5
0.0

Parameters for positioning Save uncombined

the scan region F.5 Saves array images uncombined. Two series are created:
one containing the uncombined images of the individual coil
elements and one containing the combined images (original
images).
Page P.182
Scan at current LP.
The protocol is run using the current table position,
Page P.182
If you click the control box, the following two fields Position
of the Scan region M. and Scan reg. Storage are not visi-
ble.
Scan region position
Setting the position of the scan region,
Page P.183
Scan region memory
Selecting a scan region position from the positions of the cur-
rent series block,
Page P.184
F.5
N OT E
The patient table is moved to adjust the position of the scan
region. Depending on the patient positioning, the table will
move toward the magnet or out of the magnet by the
distance specified. F.5
0.0

Parameters for image MSMA (Multi Slice Multi Angle) lets you define the order for
numbering numbering the scanned images with regard to their slice ori-
F.5 entation (primary order).
Page P.135
Use the Sagittal, Coronal and Transversals selection lists
to define whether the scanned images are numbered
according to ascending or descending slice positions (sec-
ondary order).
Page P.135
F.5
NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are therefore automatically applied
when opening consecutive protocols that have the same
position of scan region. F.5
Matrix coil mode F.5 Setting the modes for the Matrix coil elements
Page P.165 F.5
0.0

Physio parameter card F.5
The Physio card is divided into three subcards: F.5
Signal 1
The Physio Signal 1 parameter card lets you set the param-
eters for the 1st physiological signal.
For a detailed description of the Physio Signal 1 parameter
card, please refer to chapter "Scans using physiological trig-
gering", Page F.151
Cardio
The Physio Cardiac parameter card lets you set the param-
eters for cardiac examinations.
PACE (Prospective Acquisition CorrEction)
The Physio PACE parameter card lets you set the parame-
ters for suppression of respiratory artifacts.
0.0

Parameter card Cardiological sequences are used to examine and display car-
Physio-Cardiac F.5 diac functions. The resulting image data can be evaluated using
the Argus task card.
F.5
The Cardiac parameter card is available only if the current

scan protocol is based on a sequence supporting cardiologi-
cal measurements.
0.0

Tagging
Show orientation lines, Page P.1123
Distance
Distance between orientation lines, Page P.1124
Angle
Angle of orientation lines, Page P.1124
Magn. preparation
Magnetization preparation for inversion recovery (IR) and
saturation recovery (SR) sequences,
Page P.141
Fat suppression
Suppression of the fat signal,
Page P.143
Dark blood
Blood appears dark, Page P.1123
TI
Inversion time, Page P.139
FoV read
Field of view in readout direction, Page P.147
FoV phase
Phase resolution
Page P.151
0.0

Parameter card The PACE parameter card allows you to set parameters for sup-
Physio-PACE F.5 pression of respiratory artifacts. F.5
Resp. control
Mode for compensating for the effects of breathing,
Page P.124
Scout mode
Preparation phase where only the navigator signal is mea-
sured, Page P.126
Scout duration
Length of the preparation phase, Page P.126
Scout TR
TR of the navigator pulse, Page P.126
0.0

Acceptance window
Permitted deviation from the tolerance center,
Page P.127
Position Accept Window
Position Accept Window,
Page P.128
Accept. position (green)
Centering position of the acceptance window,
Page P.128
Accept. position
Centering position of the acceptance window on triggering,
Page P.128
Search window
Size of the search window,
Page P.129
Search position (red)
Centering position of the search window,
Page P.129
Store profile images
Stores the navigator signal time curve as an image,
Page P.129
Tracking factor
Connection between the movement of the diaphragm and
the anatomy to be scanned,
Page P.130
Chronological Position
Time when the navigator was used,
Page P.130
0.0

RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Trigger pulse
Trigger pulse, Page P.1137
Slices / respiratory cycle
Slices per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Cardiac trigger / repiratory cycle
Cardiac trigger per respiratory cycle, Page P.1140
Concatenations
Distribution of the slices to be measured across a given num-
ber of scans to avoid cross-talk, Page P.134
0.0

Angio parameter card F.5
The Angio parameter card is available only if the sequence

used as a basis for the current scan protocol supports one of
the following examinations: F.5
Time-of-flight angiography
Contrast-enhanced angiography
Phase contrast angiography (2D and 3D)
Flow quantification
The Angio parameter card is divided into two subcards: F.5
Angio Common
Includes the parameters specific to one of the examinations
mentioned above.
Angio Inline
Includes the parameters for dynamic image evaluation for
angiography examinations.
Page F.558
0.0

Angio Common In time-of-flight angiography sequences, unsaturated spins flow

parameter card for into the slice or volume to generate especially high signal inten-
time-of-flight sity. F.5
angiography F.5
The Angio Common parameter card allows you to individually
adjust specific parameters for magnitude angiography exami-
nations. F.5
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
Inflow
Inflow speed of blood, which defines the shape of the TONE
excitation pulse, Page P.1102
Flow direction
Direction of blood flow, Page P.1102
MTC
Presaturation due to magnetization transfer,
Page P.146
0.0

Angio Common parameter Contrast-enhanced angiography takes advantage of the fact

card for contrast-enhanced that contrast agent (gadolinium compounds) shortens T1 in the
angiography F.5 blood. F.5
The Angio Common parameter card allows you to individually

adjust specific parameters for contrast-enhanced angiography
examinations. F.5
Flip angle
Flip angle of rotational axis of spins, Page P.140
3D centr. reordering
Center of raw data space is measured as quickly as possible,
Page P.1103
Time to Center
Time until k space center is reached, Page P.1103
0.0

Angio Common parameter 2D phase contrast angiography is used to display vessels

card for phase contrast within large scan volumes. F.5
angiography and flow

The intensity of each pixel is a measure of the velocity compo-
quantification F.5
nent at that location. Since only moving spins contribute to the
signal, very thick slices can be displayed as well. The result is
a projection image of all vessels in the excited slice volume. F.5
To display special projections of vessel sections, 3D phase
contrast angiography allows you to process the entire data
volume measured using the MIP technique.
Page H.51, Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection F.5
The MR flow quantification technique allows for non-invasive
examination and evaluation of blood flow. F.5
0.0

Flow mode
Flow-encoding mode, Page P.1104
Encodings
Number of flow sensitivities to be set (flow velocity encod-
ing),
Page P.1105
Velocity enc.
Definition of flow sensitivities in cm/s,
Page P.1105
Direction
Flow-sensitive axis, Page P.1105
Rephased images
Magnitude image (flow-rephased), Page P.1106
Magnitude images
Magnitude images (either per flow direction or per flow sen-
sitivity), Page P.1106
Magnitude sum
Magnitude sum image, Page P.1106
Phase images
Phase images (either per flow direction or per flow sensitiv-
ity), Page P.1106
0.0

BOLD parameter card F.5
The BOLD abbreviation stands for Blood Oxygenation Level

Dependent Contrast. F.5
BOLD imaging displays the change in the oxygenation state of

blood. Generally, T2*-weighted EPI sequences are used for this
purpose. F.5
While the patient is performing certain actions, e.g. finger

movements, images of the brain are acquired during rest as
well as active periods. Statistical analysis of these images (t-
test) provides a parameter map that allows you to locate neu-
rally active regions on the basis of intensity. F.5
The BOLD parameter card is available only if the current pro-

tocol is based on a sequence supporting BOLD imaging.
0.0

t-Test
Enabling or disabling t-test evaluation,
Page P.1120
Threshold
Threshold value for calculating overlaid images,
Page P.1121
Window
t-Test calculation range,
Page P.1121
Dynamic t-cards
Switching on/off storage of generated t-card,
Page P.1120
Starting ignore meas
Number of initial scans excluded from the evaluation,
Page P.1116
Paradigm size
Number of entries in the paradigm table,
Page P.1121
Paradigm table
Table of individual BOLD scans indicating stimulation,
Page P.1122
0.0

Motion correction
Activates or deactivates motion correction,
Page P.1117
Interpolation
Interpolation method used for motion correction,
Page P.1118
Spatial filter
Activates or deactivates the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
Filter setting
Window width of the Gaussian filter,
Page P.1119
The number of scans for realtime sequences is set to the
maximum value, Page P.177
Measurements
Number of measurements,
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Page P.178
Delay in TR
Time between consecutive scans for all ep2d sequences,
Page P.179
Multiple series
The images of each measurement are stored as a separate
series, Page P.180
0.0

Diff parameter card F.5
The diffusion of water molecules along a field gradient reduces

the MR signal. Signal loss is not as pronounced in areas where
the water molecules are not able to diffuse as quickly. Diffu-
sion-weighted scans are based on such diffusion-dependent
differences in signal intensity. F.5
The Diff parameter card allows you to set the parameters spe-
cific to diffusion-weighted scanning. F.5
The Diff parameter card is available only if the current scan

protocol is based on a sequence supporting diffusion-
weighted measurements.
0.0

Diffusion mode
Diffusion-sensitive direction, Page P.1107
Diff. weightings
Number of diffusion weightings, Page P.1108
b-value
Value for diffusion weighting, Page P.1109
Diff. weighted images
Reconstruct original images with diffusion weighting,
Page P.1109
Trace weighted images
Isotropically diffusion-weighted images, i.e. images are aver-
aged in all spatial directions,
Page P.1110
Average ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
averaged over different directions, Page P.1110
Individual ADC maps
Gray-scale values of images show diffusion coefficients
along a gradient axis, Page P.1111
Noise level
Threshold value of the pixel intensity for calculating ADC
maps, Page P.1111
Diffusion moment (psif sequence only)
Measurement for the strength of diffusion weighting,
Page P.1111
Diff. directions
Number of diffusion-encoding directions
Can be selected only in MDDW mode, otherwise predefined
by the diffusion mode parameter,
Page P.1112
0.0

Perf parameter card F.5
One method of MR perfusion imaging is to determine the signal

change in images as a function of time while injecting intrave-
nous contrast agent. Generally, T2*-weighted EPI sequences
with a gadolinium contrast agent are used for this purpose.
F.5
The Perf parameter card is available only if the current scan

protocol is based on a sequence supporting perfusion mea-
surements.
0.0

Global Bolus Plot (GBP)

Calculation of global time/intensity curve, Page P.1114
Percentage of Baseline at Peak map (PBP)
Calculation of signal change compared to the baseline,
Page P.1114
Time To Peak map (TTP)
Calculation of time-to-peak image, Page P.1113
Original images
Save original images, Page P.1113
Number of initial scans excluded from the evaluation,
Page P.1116
Measurements
Page P.177
0.0

Inline parameter card F.5
The Inline parameter card is divided into two subcards: F.5
Common
Breast
Parameter card The Inline Common parameter card allows you to set param-
Inline-Common F.5 eters for dynamic image evaluation. F.5
In case of scan protocols for angiography examinations, the

Inline parameter card is displayed as Angio Inline subcard.
In case of scan protocols for BOLD scans, diffusion-weighted
scans, or perfusion scans, the Inline parameter card is not
part of the parameter card stack.
0.0

Subtract
Activates or deactivates subtraction,
Page P.1125
Saving images
Saving result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Autoscaling
Automatic scaling of result images of subtraction,
Page P.1126
Scaling factor
Entering a scaling factor for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Offset
Entering an offset value for the result images of subtraction,
Page P.1127
Subtrahend
Defines the series to be subtracted,
Page P.1128
Measurements
Page P.177
0.0

Std-Dev-Sag
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the sagittal
direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Cor
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the coro-
nal direction, Page P.1129
Std-Dev-Tra
Calculation of standard deviation result images in the trans-
verse direction, Page P.1130
Std-Dev-Time
Calculation of standard deviation result images in chronolog-
ical sequence, Page P.1130
MIP-Sag
Calculation of MIP images in the sagittal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Cor
Calculation of MIP images in the coronal direction,
Page P.1131
MIP-Tra
Calculation of MIP images in the transverse direction,
Page P.1132
MIP-Time
Calculation of MIP images in chronological sequence
(with Inline-Common cannot be activated if MIP-Time is
already activated on the Inline-Breast parameter card),
Page P.1132
Save original images
Saves original images, Page P.1133
0.0

Parameter card The Inline-Breast parameter card allows you to set parameters
Inline-Breast F.5 for Soft Tissue Evaluation. F.5
For protocols for Soft Tissue Evaluation, the Inline param-

eter card is shown as a sub-card Inline-Common. However,
MIP time is available on this sub-card only if it has not been
activated on the subcard Inline-Breast.
Wash - In
Switching on or off calculation of the signal change in the
starting range of the dynamic measurement series,
Page P.1114
Color table
Color palettes to color-code the parameter cards,
Page P.1115
0.0

First measurement
First measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calcula-
tion,
Page P.1115
Last measurement
Last measurement used for the wash-in or wash-out calcula-
tion,
Page P.1115
Highest value
Defines whether the value of the last measurement or the
highest value between the first and last measurement will be
used for calculation of the wash-in parameter image,
Page P.1115
Wash - Out
Parameter for signal change in the end range of the dynamic
measurement series,
Page P.1116
TTP
Display of the time to signal peak for each voxel,
Page P.1113
0.0

PEI
Positive enhancement integral, area under a signal intensity
- time curve,
Page P.1116
MIP-Time
MIP images, highest pixel value along the time axis,
Page P.1132
Measurements
Page P.177
Pause after meas.
Page P.178
0.0

Sequence parameter card F.5
Your system includes a number of different sequence types: F.5
Gradient echo sequences (GRE, FLASH, Turboflash, True

FISP, MEDIC, PSIF, CISS, DESS)
Spin echo sequences (se)
Turbo spin echo sequences (tse)
HASTE sequences
Single-shot EPI sequences
The Sequence parameter card groups all parameters specific

to a given sequence type. Therefore, the display and input fields
available vary depending on the sequence type selected. The
parameter card is divided into the Part 1 and Part 2 subcards.F.5
The sequence used as a basis for the current protocol is indi-
cated in the right half of the info line above the parameter card
stack.
F.5
A tool tip including the name and type of sequence used will
be displayed if you hold the mouse pointer over the sequence
name.
0.0

Parameter card
Sequence Part 1 F.5
Introduction
Initial knocking signal of the gradient coil,
Page P.188
Dimension
Setting for 2D or 3D scanning, Page P.189
Elliptical scanning
Elliptical k space scanning, Page P.189
Phase stabilization
Prevents phase errors and improves image quality,
Page P.190
Compensate T2 decay
Prevents negative effects of T2 decay,
Page P.190
0.0

Averaging mode
Method for averaging multiple scans,
Page P.191
Multi-slice mode
Scanning method for multislice acquisition: sequential (slice
by slice) or interleaved (row by row),
Page P.131
Sorting
Acquisition sequence for lines of raw data, Page P.191
Asymmetric echo
Defines whether echo asymmetry is permitted in readout
direction, Page P.192
Contrasts
Number of contrasts, Page P.192
Bandwidth
Readout bandwidth for contrasts, Page P.193
Flow comp.
Flow compensation of moving spins in readout and/or slice
selection direction, Page F.574, Displaying and editing
parameter groups and Page P.194
Allowed delay
Maximum delay until the start of the next scan,
Page P.193
Manual echo spacing
Allows you to define echo spacing, Page P.195
Echo spacing
Distance between echoes in the pulse train, Page P.195
0.0

Parameter card
Sequence Part 2 F.5
Turbo factor
Number of echoes per RF excitation for turbo spin echo
sequences, Page P.196
EPI factor
Number of refocused gradient echoes per RF excitation,
Page P.196
Segments
Number of lines of a raw data matrix acquired during one TR,
Page P.196
Combined echoes
Combination of echoes with different T2 weighting for an
image, Page P.197
0.0

RF Pulse Type
Radio frequency pulse type, Page P.197
Gradient mode
Gradient performance used, Page P.198
Excitation
Mode for radio frequency pulse, Page P.1100
RF spoiling
Spoiler RF pulse for destroying phase coherence of gradient
echo sequences, Page P.1100
0.0

Working in the parameter card

stack F.5
The input and orientation tools on and above the parameter

cards help you to quickly and easily adapt a scan protocol.
F.5
Protocol info line F.5
After opening a scan protocol, the following information is dis-

played in the protocol info line (directly above the parameter
card stack). F.5
0.0

(1) Total scan time of protocol,

using current parameter settings
(2) PAT acceleration factor,
(Is shown when supported by the iPAT sequence):
When PAT is activated, the product of the two acceleration
factors PE and 3D is displayed; when PAT is deactivated,
OFF is shown. If one or both factors exceed the max. rec-
ommended acceleration as provided by the system, the
PAT acceleration factor is shown in the protocol info line as
a button with red labeling. When you click the button, the
Tim Assistant dialog is shown and resets acceleration fac-
tors PE and 3D to the max. recommended acceleration.
(3) Voxel size,
using current parameter settings
(4) Relative signal-to-noise ratio (SNR),
SNR using current parameter settings relative to the SNR
when opening the protocol.
This allows you to monitor if and to what extent your param-
eter changes have improved or degraded the signal-to-
noise ratio.
(5) Sequence type
0.0

Changing parameter values and observing

value ranges F.5
Scan settings can be changed in the parameter card stack by

clicking options, selecting options from a list, or changing val-
ues using spin boxes. F.5
However, certain values and settings cannot be freely defined

or combined. The value ranges of some parameters are limited
by the technical capabilities of your scan system. Certain
parameters depend on other measurement parameters. In this
case, changing one parameter value will require that other mea-
surement parameters be changed as well. The scan system
informs you of these limitations.
F.5
Soft limits and extended For parameter values that may be modified using spin boxes,
limits F.5 the acceptable value range is displayed as a bar. When you
click or modify a parameter value, the bar appears at the bottom
of the parameter card. F.5
(1) Soft limits

(2) Extended limits
Within the so-called Soft Limits (green bar), you can freely set
parameter values without affecting other parameters. F.5
0.0

Within the so-called Extended Limits (red bar), you are still
able to change parameter values. However, changes within
extended limits require that you adjust other measurement
parameters as well. F.5
If you exceed the Soft Limits, the Scan Assistant dialog box
will open. F.5
It informs you about the necessary adjustments to other mea-

surement parameters and allows you to decide how to proceed:
F.5
Click the OK button or press the Return key to confirm your

parameter change and the adjustments to other measure-
ment parameters.
Click the Undo button or press the Esc key to cancel your
parameter change.
0.0

Restrictions when Subsequent changes may be necessary also when checking or

selecting options F.5 selecting options from lists.
F.5
In selection lists, these entries can be identified by pointed

brackets.
F.5
Checkboxes requiring other parameter changes when selected

are highlighted in red.
F.5
On the +/ buttons, the "+" and "" signs are displayed in red.F.5
0.0

Displaying and editing parameter groups F.5
Certain parameters on the cards are grouped in sets. These

parameter groups are indicated by blue brackets. F.5
This example shows the parameter settings for a slice group. F.5
Expand the selection list of the Slice group field.
You can see how many slice groups are contained in the scan
protocol. F.5
Select another slice group to display the corresponding slice

parameters.
You can change the parameters of the second group. F.5
0.0

Other input or output fields allow you to access parameter

sets. F.5
In this example, the open scan protocol has several echo

times. F.5
F.5 Click the arrow buttons in the lower left corner to scroll the
echo times for the protocol.
The echo time currently displayed is indicated by square brack-
ets. F.5
Click the arrow buttons of the spin box to change the value of
the echo time currently displayed.
Press the Return key or switch to another input field to con-

firm your parameter change.
0.0

Adding or deleting graphic objects F.5
You usually use the graphic method to plan regions or volumes

that will be excited when a protocol is run. You do this using the
mouse and the graphic slice positioning tool bar. You are able
to move, add, or delete slice or slab groups or saturation
regions within the reference images. F.5
Alternatively, you can use the parameter card stack to plan new
objects or delete objects no longer needed.
F.5
New group or region F.5
Click the Plus button next to the selection list.

The new slice/slab group or saturation region is added to the
selected reference image. It is slightly offset compared to the
existing outermost object to avoid overlap. F.5
Move the new group or region to the desired position and

adjust the orientation as required.
You can either use the mouse for graphical editing within the ref-
erence image or the Position and Orientation dialog boxes to
work with maximum precision. F.5
0.0

Deleting a group Select the slice/slab group or saturation region you want to
or region F.5 delete from the selection lists.
Click the Minus button to remove the group from the scan
protocol.
Or F.5
Select Delete from the context menu for graphic slice posi-
tioning.
Adjusting the orientation and position of

graphic objects F.5
Similar to adding and deleting objects, you will normally position

objects graphically in the reference images using the mouse. F.5
Alternatively, you can use the parameter cards to position
objects with more precision. F.5
Setting the slice

orientation at a
precise angle F.5
Select the slice/slab group or saturation region for which you

want to change the orientation.
Next, select one of the three main orientations from the Ori-
entation selection list.
0.0

Or F.5
Open the Orientation dialog box by clicking the button next

to the selection list.
Select the tilt direction (single slice) and enter a flip angle.
Page P.18
Enter a flip angle for the direction of the third orientation
plane if you want to generate a double-oblique slice.
Close the dialog box to confirm your settings.
0.0

Entering the slice position

with millimeter precision F.5
Select the slice/slab group or saturation region for which you
want to change the parameters.
Next, select Isocenter from the Position list to position the
slice/slab group or saturation region in the magnet isocenter.
Or F.5
Click the button next to the selection list to display the Posi-
tion dialog box.
Under Position mode, select the mode you want to use.

Depending on the position mode selected, the Position dialog
box offers different options. F.5
F.5
NOTE
During volume positioning (e.g., VOI, adjustment volume),
you always work in L-P-H mode.
The Position mode selection list is not available. F.5
0.0

In both modes, you proceed by defining the shift of the center

of the object from the magnet isocenter. F.5
L-P-H
This mode allows you to enter the shift based on the patient
coordinate system.
L - to the left (negative value for shift to the right)
P - to posterior (negative value for shift to anterior)
H - in direction of the head (negative value for shift in direc-
tion of the feet)
Offcenter shift
This mode allows you to enter the shift in the gradient direc-
tions:
Phase - in phase-encoding direction
Read - in readout direction
Shift - in slice selection direction
0.0

C AU T I O N
When exchanging image data generated with the Numaris
predecessor software, please note the following: syngo MR
and Numaris use different patient coordinate systems. As
a result, the slice position and orientation may have different
signs. F.5
The selected position mode is maintained after the current

positioning. When you open the Position dialog box the next
time (even from another protocol), the position mode previ-
ously selected is still applied.
0.0

Keyboard operation F.5
You can use both the mouse and the keyboard to select param-
eter cards from the stack or select and edit parameters.
F.5
The table below lists all actions in the parameter card stack that
may be performed via the keyboard as well. F.5
F.5
Action Keyboard operation

Go to the next parameter card Ctrl + right arrow
Go to the previous parameter card Ctrl + left arrow
Go to the next parameter sub-card Ctrl + Shift + right arrow
Go to the previous sub-card Ctrl + Shift + left arrow
Go to the next parameter Tab
Go to the previous parameter Shift + Tab
Increase numerical value Up arrow
Decrease numerical value Down arrow
Accept numerical value Enter or continue to next parameter (Tab)
Scroll to next parameter in the parameter set Up arrow or right arrow
Scroll to previous parameter in the parameter set Down arrow or left arrow
Scroll to first parameter in the parameter set Home
Scroll to last parameter in the parameter set End
Activate/deactivate checkbox Enter or space bar
Expand/collapse selection list Enter
Select entry from selection list Up/down/right/left arrow
or Home - to first entry
or End - to last entry
Apply entry from selection list Return or Esc or continue to next parameter (Tab)
0.0

Action Keyboard operation

Select button (e.g., for coil selection) Enter or space bar
Toggle checkbox or disable button selection Press Esc key while at same time pressing
Return or Space bar
0.0

Accepting measurement parameter

settings F.5
After adapting the measurement parameters of the open proto-

col to your requirements, save the new settings and close the
protocol.
F.5
F.5 Click the Apply button to accept your changes.

Or F.5
Select Edit > Apply from the main menu or Apply from the
context menu of the program control (right mouse button).
When protocol reaches the top of the job list, it is loaded into the
scan system. Depending on the start mode selected, the sys-
tem starts scanning automatically or waits for your start com-
mand. F.5
0.0

Copying measurement
parameters F.5
After adjusting measurement parameters, you can apply them

to other protocols not currently open. F.5
You can copy the settings and values of entire parameter

groups from one protocol to another. This saves time during
parameter entry and completion of the protocols.
F.5
Open the protocol to which you want to apply the parameters

of another protocol.
Page F.42, Opening a protocol
Select the protocol containing the parameters you wish to
copy (single click in the program control).
Select Queue > Copy Parameter from the main menu or
Copy Parameter from the context menu.
0.0

The Copy Parameter Groups dialog box is displayed. F.5
Select a parameter group and click OK to copy the corre-

sponding settings.
The selected parameters are applied to the open scan protocol.
F.5
Parameter groups F.5 The following table lists the parameters of the different param-
eter groups. F.5
Please note that some parameters are assigned to several

parameter groups.
0.0

F.5
Parameter group Parameters

Center of slice/ Coil elements
slab groups & sat. regions Position, orientation of slices or slabs
Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
Inplane rotation angle of slice groups
Position, orientation, rotation, and thickness of the navigators
Extent of navigators in the phase-encoding and read-out direction
Center of slice/ Coil elements
slab groups & sat. regions with Position, orientation, and rotation of slices or slabs
plane rotation Position, orientation, thickness of the saturation regions
0.0


Measurement parameters Coil elements
Phase FOV
Read FOV
Slice thickness
Base resolution
Phase resolution
Phase oversampling
Slices per slab
Slice resolution
Slice oversampling
Number of slice/slab groups
Number of slices (or slabs) per slice group
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor, phase-encoding direction
of the slice/slab groups
Number of sat. regions
Special sats (parallel or tracking saturation regions)
including thickness and distance (gap)
Saturation mode
VOI (for spectroscopy scans)
Interpolation resolution (for CSI protocols)
Slices Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
0.0


Saturation Number of sat. regions
Saturation mode
Slices & sat. regions Coil elements
Slice thickness
Slices per slab
(or slab group)
Position, orientation, distance factor of the slice/slab groups
Number of sat. regions
Saturation mode
Adjustment volume Shim mode
Position, orientation, extent of the adjustment volume
Everything All parameter settings including sequence
0.0

Inconsistencies F.5 In case of inconsistencies between the parameter settings of

the source and target protocol, the Please Confirm message
window is displayed. F.5
This message window appears in the following cases: F.5
At least one parameter of the group to be copied cannot be

copied or not copied completely.
And/or F.5
At least one additional parameter has to be adapted to allow

copying of the parameters of the selected group (e.g., num-
ber of links).
Click OK to accept the new settings and correct inconsisten-

cies.
Or F.5
Click Cancel to discard the settings.

Enter the measurement parameters manually.
0.0

Saving the Job List F.5
You can save a scan program in the joblist under a new program
name after adapting its protocols. This allows you to reuse pro-
tocols adapted during the examination for subsequent exami-
nations.
F.5
Select Queue > Save As Program from the main menu or

Save As Program from the context menu of the program
control (right mouse button).
The Exam Explorer is opened and displays the Save Program

As [Customer Tree] dialog box. You can enter a name for the
new scan program and assign it to an examination region and
examination.
Page F.1661, Saving the scan program under a new nameF.5
0.0

Saving a single scan protocol F.5
Instead of the entire job list, you can also save individual proto-
cols in the job list. This involves transferring the protocol to the
Exam Explorer. F.5
Call up the Exam Explorer.

Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
In its navigation area, open the data level for the scan pro-
gram where you want to save the protocol.
Page F.1612, Finding a scan program
You can only save the protocol in a scan program of the cus-
tomer level (USER).
Click the required protocol in the job list of the Exam task
card.
0.0

Keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag-and-drop the

selected scan protocol into the content area of the Exam
Explorer.
Select Object > Save from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.5
Click this button on the tool bar.

The protocol transferred to the Exam Explorer is saved with
the corresponding program. F.5
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Performing a routine
F.6 examination F.6
After completion of exam-related preparations, you acquired a

localizer and graphically planned the slice or slab groups for the
examination in the reference images. Any necessary changes
to measurement parameters have been made.
Page F.14, Procedure for routine scanning
F.6
Routine scan Once you have finished adapting the parameters of the first pro-
procedure F.6 tocol, apply the new settings. F.6
The protocol is closed and the system automatically starts run-

ning this protocol. Once this protocol has been completed, the
system automatically starts running the next protocol unless it
is marked by an icon as not ready for measurement.
F.6
Utilizing scan times F.6 Protocols usually take some time to run. This time can be used
to prepare the following protocols or for postprocessing tasks.F.6
After the initial scans have started, you can edit the portion of
the job list not yet measured using the program control. You can
complete the parameters of pending protocols and plan the
examination sequence.
Page F.639, Processing the job list while scans are being
performed F.6
You can also use the time to view, evaluate, comment, or film
images of a series that has already run.
Part G, Part H, Part O F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.61

Performing a routine examination Examination
Stopping an examination F.6 If the measurement procedure is interrupted (e.g., by patient

movement) or you determine that all necessary images have
been scanned, you can interrupt scanning at any time. F.6
This does not affect the remaining program sequence.

F.6
Repeating scans F.6 Protocols that have been interrupted can be repeated at any
time. You decide whether to repeat the most recent protocol
only or a complete section of the job list.
F.6
Starting scans manually F.6 Breath-hold scans to prevent motion artifacts are started man-
ually. The protocol is automatically loaded into the scan system
but does not start until you manually give the command. F.6
For kinematic examinations, you can run protocols any number

of times. In this case, start a protocol manually and run it as
many times as required to complete all necessary scans.
F.6
Contrast agent For examinations using contrast agent, the scan program
examinations F.6 includes pauses to administer the contrast agent.
Page F.71, Using a contrast agent F.6
Alternatively, you can perform contrast agent examinations

using multiple scans.
Page F.624, Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans
F.6
0.0

Examination Performing a routine examination
Scans with patient Before and after scans, you can automatically add patient
instructions F.6 instructions in different languages via protocols or manually
play back voice-overs.
F.6
Automatic position If you have a license for AutoAlign, the system performs slice
suggestion F.6 positioning for head examinations, automatically and reproduc-
ibly, independent of the positioning of the patient's head.
Page F.191, Automatic Position Suggestion
F.6
Jobs F.6 If you have the necessary license and your system is connected
to a hospital information system (HIS), you can receive jobs for
your MR system from the HIS via the network. When you regis-
ter a patient, a reference to the job is created in the form of
steps that appear as a range marker in the job list. All services
rendered are automatically entered in the job. The information
for the procedure step is now available for further processing
within the hospital.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation
F.6
Conflict management F.6 Before and during a scan, inconsistencies may occur between
the scan program and the actual settings at the system (e.g.,
the coils actually connected do not match the coil configuration
on the System Coils parameter card). The system detects
inconsistencies and helps you to eliminate them by displaying
messages. F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.63

Displaying the job list in the

program control F.6
The program control allows you to trace and modify the course
of an examination including all scans. F.6
The program instructions are color-coded depending on the

processing status: F.6
Executed protocols have a dark-gray background

Protocols that are currently running are shown with a white
background
Opened protocols are marked with bars in light gray that are
pushed to the right
Protocols that are pending are shown against a light gray
background
completed protocol
Series
icon
current scan
open scan
pending protocols
0.0

Tooltip F.6 If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the name of a
program instruction, a tool tip displays the following informa-
tion: F.6
The full name of the program instruction.

A short comment if entered in the properties dialog box.
Icons to identify the Icons before or after the protocol names identify additional
protocols F.6 properties of the program instructions.
F.6
A protocol marked with a construction worker icon cannot be

automatically started at this processing state because the
parameters are still incomplete. F.6
The incomplete data usually relates to the positioning of the

slices to be measured. All other data are typically predefined by
the scan program.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices F.6
A protocol identified by a flagman needs to be started manually.

This is required e.g. for breath-hold scans.
F.6
A protocol identified by a flagman with several flags can be

started and measured several times in a row. This is required
e.g. for kinematic examinations.
Page F.61, Performing a routine examination F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.65

This symbol identifies protocols involving automatic image

postprocessing following the measurement, e.g. adding or sub-
tracting series.
F.6
If you have planned a contrast agent pause for your scan pro-
gram, the subsequent scans will be marked with a syringe icon
indicating contrast agent scans.
F.6
On a protocol with this icon, patient instructions are automati-

cally played before and/or after scanning. F.6
F.6
If you insert a protocol in the job list that is marked as including

automatic patient instructions although it does not have voice
output, the program is identified with an icon by the program
control following the appropriate message.
Page F.655, Program instruction with a patient instruction F.6
A protocol that is the target of a copy reference for which the
copy reference exists is marked with this icon. The number next
to the icon indicates the source of the copy reference. F.6
0.0

Copy references crossed out in red are not valid. Invalid copy
references occur when parameters change or when there are
parameter conflicts between the source and target protocol.
They cannot be included in a scan.
F.6
When you load a scan program into the job list for the first time,
the estimated scan time is displayed in addition to all program
instructions. Protocols displaying scan times are pending.
The scan time displayed next to a multiple-loading protocol indi-
cates the duration of a single repetition.
The scan time is also shown in the Exam Explorer and the pro-
tocol overview.
Symbols of series in Once program instructions are processed and the images have
program instructions F.6 been calculated, the series icon is displayed to the right of the
protocol name in the program control. The symbol shows the
status or event of the program instruction to be processed:
Start of scan.
First images of the first series have been reconstructed.
During the scan, only one series was generated; the images of
this series were fully reconstructed.
Several series were generated during the scan; only part of the
images are fully reconstructed.
Several series were generated during the scan; all series are
fully reconstructed.
Page F.35, Loading a series from the program control
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.67

Protocols that have been canceled or skipped are identified by

a lightning icon to the left of the protocol name in the program
control.
Information in the The status bar shows information while a scan is in progress. F.6
status bar
Information about the current status of the program control is
F.6
shown in the left section (e.g. that the patient has not yet
been positioned, program instructions have not yet been
inserted, or the program control is waiting for input/actions).
Results and error messages are shown in the middle sec-
tion.
Scan is aborted due If a system error occurs during a scan, the scan will be aborted
to a system error F.6 automatically and marked as such.
F.6
Indicates that image calculation has been canceled.
F.6
Indicates that calculation has been canceled by the scanner. F.6
0.0

Range markers F.6 Within the job list, range markers provide information about dif-
ferent properties that are valid across multiple protocols. F.6
These range markers indicate whether (and which) image com-

ments have been entered for the scanned images.
Page F.913, Editing an image comment
F.6
This range marker indicates the body region examined.

Page F.93, Editing a body region instruction range
F.6
This range marker indicates that a job exists for the examina-
tion.
Page F.95, Editing a work step in the instruction area
F.6
The range marker for a step can have one of the following
modes: F.6
The step has been completed.
F.6
The examinations of a step have been canceled. F.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.69

F.6
Scan procedure for a routine
examination F.6
After graphic slice positioning in the reference images and

checking the routine measurement parameters of your first pro-
tocol, you can apply the settings.
Page F.584, Accepting measurement parameter settings F.6
For the most part, routine examinations run automatically. F.6
0.0

Running complete protocols F.6
After completing the graphic slice positioning for the first proto-
col, you close the protocol. It is loaded into the scan system.
Scanning will start automatically. F.6
While the scan is in progress, the protocol is displayed with a

white background in the job list. The remaining scan time is indi-
cated in the status bar. F.6
The images of the protocol are reconstructed immediately while

scanning is in progress. After image reconstruction has been
completed, the series icon is displayed. F.6
If the next protocol has executable status (no construction

worker icon), it will start immediately following the first protocol.F.6
Series
icon
current scan
0.0

Completing and running a protocol with a

construction worker icon F.6
A protocol cannot be started automatically unless the slice posi-

tions have been adjusted in the reference images. F.6
These protocols are marked by a construction worker icon in

the job list. F.6
Incomplete protocols ready to be run are opened automati-

cally. F.6
Position the slices or slabs.

Make necessary parameter changes on the cards of the
parameter card stack.
The protocol is closed and the scan is started. F.6
0.0

Setting a protocol to You can mark a scan protocol identified by a construction

executable without worker icon as executable without checking it.
checking F.6 F.6
Select the protocol from the job list.

Right-click and select the Complete option from the context
menu. A checkmark appears next to the menu item.
0.0

Or F.6
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu or Properties

from the context menu.
Or F.6
Press the Alt + Return keys on your keyboard.

The Protocol step properties dialog box opens. F.6
Go to the Execution subtask card.
0.0

Select the Start measurement without further prepara-

tion checkbox.
Click OK.
The protocol is set to executable and the construction worker

icon is removed. The protocol may now be started. F.6
You can also use this method to manually reset scan protocols
with executable parameters to not executable. Deselect the
checkbox. The protocol will stop when it is ready to run. F.6
F.6
NOTE
If you set a protocol to executable without checking to start
the protocol immediately, the table immediately moves to
the table position entered in the protocol if it does not match
the table position currently set. F.6
0.0

Playing back patient instructions manually F.6
If you want to play back breathing or other patient instructions

in the examination room, you can use the voice outputs. They
are available in various languages.
F.6
Playing back an existing Select Queue > Voice Output > Play... from the main menu
voice output F.6 or Voice Output from the context menu in the outer area of
the program control.
The Voice Output dialog box opens. F.6
F.6
0.0

Select the language from the selection list.

Select the required patient instruction.
Click the Play back button.
The selected voice output will be played back.
F.6
Recording patient If the list of voice outputs does not contain the patient instruc-
instructions F.6 tion you require, you can record it.
Page F.1121, Changing a voice output F.6
Voice outputs can be recorded or edited only if no patient is cur-

rently registered. F.6
If you have already registered the patient to be examined,

close the examination again if necessary.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
0.0

Closing a routine examination F.6
An examination is complete after all program instructions in the

program control have been processed and all images have
been reconstructed.
F.6
All protocols All program instructions are now marked with the series icon. F.6
completed F.6
Series
icon
You can close the examination after determining that you do not
have to perform additional scans or repeat protocols. F.6
0.0

Moving the table out The patient table is moved completely out of the magnet bore.F.6
of the magnet F.6
Use the Table Positioning dialog box or move the patient table
using the buttons on the control unit near the magnet bore.
Chapter F.8, Positioning the Patient Table and System
Manual
F.6
Closing the examination F.6 The current examination is complete once you have moved the
patient table into the HOME position, i.e., completely out of the
magnet. F.6
You can now return the patient to the ward.

Subsequently, you can register a new patient.
F.6
Job After all scans of the examination and all planned postprocess-
completing F.6 ing steps have been completed, and the series have been
transferred to the film sheet or printed, you can complete the
procedure step.
Page F.620, Closing a patient F.6
0.0

Closing a patient F.6 If you release the last patient at the end of the working day,
reset the program control to its original state. F.6
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu.

Or F.6
Right-click the name of the patient in the program control and

select Close Patient from the context menu.
The job list is removed from the program control. All functions
of the program control are disabled.
F.6
If you need to correct the data of a registered patient during

an examination, you have to remove the patient from the job
list first by selecting Close Patient.
0.0

Starting a protocol manually F.6
Some protocols should be started manually, e.g. protocols

requiring breath-hold commands. It is helpful to have the scan
system stop after the adjustments and wait for a manual start
command.
F.6
Protocols that have to be started manually are marked by a flag-

man icon in the job list. F.6
Flagman
The start mode of a protocol (manual or automatic) can be set

using the Execution subtask card in the Protocol step prop-
erties dialog box.
F.6
N OT E
You always start multiple breath-hold scans from the Inline
Display.
Page F.1026, Starting multiple breath-hold scans F.6
0.0

Starting a protocol manually - single scan F.6
Manual protocols can be started and run only once or several

times in a row. F.6
A protocol that you want to start manually and run once is auto-
matically loaded into the scan system. After completion of
adjustment, the program control waits for your start commandF.6
The Exam paused dialog box is displayed. F.6
F.6
0.0

Give the breath-hold instructions. Subsequently, start the mea-

surement via Continue or the F12 key. The system does not
have to load parameters or perform adjustments. This saves
time and reduces patient stress. F.6
You can give breath-hold instructions automatically before or

after the scan.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output
Starting the
measurement F.6
Click the Continue button to start scanning immediately and

close the Exam paused dialog box.
Or F.6
Click the Close button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
And F.6
Click the Continue button in the program control or select

Continue from the context menu.
As an alternative, you can start the measurement via the F12
key.
Canceling the
measurement F.6
Click the Skip button to close the Exam paused dialog box.
The loaded protocol is not run and the next program instruc-
tion is initiated.
The protocol is marked "canceled."
F.6
0.0

Starting a protocol manually - multiple scans F.6
Some protocols have to be started manually several times (e.g.

a contrast agent, breath-hold examination of the liver). A series
of the region of interest is acquired at regular intervals to docu-
ment the progress of contrast agent uptake. The protocol is
repeated using the breath-hold technique until all necessary
data have been acquired. F.6
The Exam paused dialog box opens as soon as the program

control comes across this protocol while the program instruc-
tions are running. F.6
Another application for multiple scanning includes kinematic

examinations (e.g. when examining a joint).
0.0

Starting the protocol F.6
Click the Continue button to start the first scan.

The protocol starts. F.6

key.
Icon for multiple

loading/starting
The Exam paused dialog box closes and reopens once the
system is ready for the next scan. F.6
0.0

Starting the next scan F.6 The protocol parameters and slice position may not be modified
during the pause. F.6
Next, click the Continue button again in the Exam pause

dialog box to run the protocol a second time.
The same scan protocol as before is added to the job list and
measured a second time. F.6

key.
Completed protocol
Next running protocol
Protocols that have already run are numbered and appear in

front of the multiple protocol. This shows you the sequence of
scans. F.6
0.0

Timing scans with Contrast-enhanced examinations often require a precisely

countdown F.6 timed sequence of scans, especially following contrast agent
administration. F.6
Three fields are available to help you time the required

sequence of successive scans: F.6
The countdown input field helps you plan the start of the
next scan.
The break time display field indicates the time since the end
of the previous scan.
The time elapsed since the start of the first scan of the cur-
rent multiple scan is displayed in the total time display field.
0.0

Enter the length of the pause in seconds in the Countdown

field.
Click the Start button.

The Start button will change to Hold and the length of the
pause is counted down. F.6
The total time elapsed since the pause dialog box was opened
is counted as well and displayed in the break time display
field. F.6
After the pause, the countdown field continues to count the

time and displays it as a negative number.
Clicking the Hold button interrupts the timer in the countdown
field or stops it after the pause. This allows you to reenter a
pause time. F.6
Interrupting the countdown does not interrupt the break time

and total time.
0.0

Interrupting scanning F.6
Sometimes it is necessary to stop a scan, e.g. if the patient

moves. F.6
F.6 Click the Stop button in the program control.

Or F.6
Select Queue > Stop from the main menu.

Or F.6
Right-click the outer area of the program control and select

Stop Running Step from the context menu.
0.0

Or F.6
Press the F3 key on your keyboard.

The scan stops immediately. The protocol is stopped and
marked with a cancellation icon (lightning). F.6
Cancellation icon
You can also interrupt a scan in the examination room by

using the STOP button on the control unit near the magnet
bore.
see System Manual
0.0

Scan is aborted due to a If a system error occurs during a scan, the scan will be aborted
system error F.6 automatically and marked as such. F.6
The icons on the left are displayed on the status bar.

Page F.68, Scan is aborted due to a system error F.6
0.0

Stopping one scan and You may stop a scan in progress and immediately start the next
starting the next F.6 scan. This is used, e.g. during contrast agent uptake to subse-
quently start a high-resolution protocol. F.6
You can monitor the contrast agent uptake with the first local-
izer. As soon as it becomes visible in the image, you can start
the next high-resolution sequence for imaging.
F.6
Use the Stop button or the menu items to stop the scan in
progress.
F.6 Click the Continue button to start the next scan.
Or F.6
Select Queue > Continue from the main menu.

Or F.6
Press the Shift + F3 keys on your keyboard.

Or F.6
Select Continue Execution from the context menu in the

(left-hand) outer margin of the Program Control.
You can also continue scanning by using the START button at

the magnet bore in the examination room.
Refer to the System Manual
0.0

Skipping a program You may skip a program instruction in the job list that has not
instruction F.6 yet run and is open for editing. F.6
Click the Skip button.

Or F.6
Select Skip Next Step from the context menu in the left mar-
gin of the program control.
The skipped program instruction is marked with a canceled icon
(lightning) and has a dark gray background. F.6
You can now resume the examination with the next program
instruction. F.6
0.0

Repeating scans F.6
You may repeat individual as well as entire sections of previ-

ously processed program instructions. F.6
In some cases (e.g., if you need to reposition the patient), it may

be necessary to scan the entire job list again.
F.6
Repeating a canceled It is possible to repeat a canceled protocol. F.6
protocol
Select the canceled protocol from the job list.
F.6
Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu.

Or F.6
Select Rerun from the context menu.

The protocol is automatically started and processed again.
F.6
Repeating previously Select the protocol you would like to repeat.

processed protocols
Select Add from the context menu (right mouse button).
F.6
Or F.6
Select Queue > Add.

The selected program instruction will be copied and appended
to the end of the job list. F.6
0.0

Repeating multiple Similarly, you may rerun several program instructions up to the
program instructions F.6 protocol you have just stopped. F.6
Select the program instruction from which you want to repeat

all subsequent protocols.
Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu or Rerun from
the context menu.
The selected protocol will be automatically started and all sub-
sequent, previously processed program instructions will be
repeated. F.6
If you skipped the selected protocol the first time, it may still
have the status incomplete. This protocol is automatically
opened for completion.
Repeat entire queue F.6 If you interrupted an examination, for example, because of a
serious error, you can reset the job list and start the examina-
tion again.
(Example: you notice that the patient was not positioned opti-
mally on the patient table and you want to reposition the
patient). F.6
Select the first program instruction.

Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu or Rerun from
the context menu.
All protocols previously processed will be run again. F.6
0.0

Defining a new center position F.6
Resetting the table position to zero allows you to start a new

series block. The current table position is now defined as the
center position.
F.6
Setting the table Select Patient > Reset Table Position from the main menu.
position to zero F.6
Or F.6
Place the mouse pointer on the patient name in the program

control and select Reset Table Position from the context
menu (right mouse button).
All planning images in the graphic segments and all series sym-
bols in the program control are removed from protocols that
have already run. F.6
All protocols ready for measurement are reset to incomplete if

indicated as such in the property dialog box. They must be
planned again. F.6
The job list in the program control is now ready for scanning
again. F.6
0.0

Scanning an open protocol more than once F.6
For examinations with scans that differ only slightly in their pro-
tocol parameters (e.g. for cardiac and angio applications), you
may perform the scans with an open protocol. F.6
When you repeatedly scan an open protocol, it is not neces-

sary to close protocols following each parameter change with
Apply and then reopen the job list again.
Change your parameters as required.
Select Queue > Scan Opened Protocol from the main
menu or Scan Opened Step from the context menu in the
left (outer) margin of the program control.
Or F.6
Click the Scan button in the Program Control.
0.0

A copy of the open protocol is generated and inserted in the job

list below the open protocol. F.6
The protocol is complete and ready to run immediately. The

protocol will be performed as soon as it reaches its turn in the
job list. F.6
You may repeat this process as often as necessary.
0.0

Processing the job list while scans

are being performed F.6
Scanning individual protocols usually takes some time. You can

reduce the duration of the overall examination by effectively
using the scan time for postprocessing and preparing the scan
sequence. This eliminates unnecessary stress from the patient.
F.6
Completing protocols F.6
While the first protocols are in progress, you may check and
complete the parameter settings of subsequent protocols. This
allows you to avoid unnecessary pauses between individual
scans.
F.6
Opening a protocol F.6 Double-click a protocol in the section of the job list that is still
pending.
Or F.6
Select the protocol and click the Open button.
0.0

The protocol opens. Its measurement parameters are displayed

in the parameter card stack. You may add to these parameters
or modify them, if necessary. F.6
Then click the Apply button.

The protocol closes. It is now complete and executable.
F.6
Opening the next Even if a protocol is open, you can open and edit an additional
protocol for editing F.6 program instruction from the part of the job list that is still pend-
ing. Any changes you have made have to be saved first. F.6
Double-click another protocol in the section of the job list that

still needs to be executed.
Or F.6
Select the protocol and click the Open button.

The already opened protocol is closed, and the Apply
Changes dialog box appears (even if you have not made any
changes). F.6
0.0

Select the Make Protocol Complete option to "complete"

the program instruction.
If this option is activated, you must open the protocol again
before scanning and switch it to complete.
Click Yes to accept the changed parameter settings of the

protocol last opened.
The program instruction is now ready to run. F.6
Or F.6
Click No to reject the parameter changes.

Or F.6
Click Cancel to continue editing the last protocol to be

opened.
0.0

Viewing parameters of You may also view the parameters of protocols that have been
protocols previously run F.6 run already. This enables you to compare the parameters of
previous protocols with the program instructions to be run. F.6
Double-click a previously scanned protocol.
Or F.6
Select a previously scanned protocol by clicking it.

Select Edit > View Protocol from the main menu or View
Protocol from the context menu (right mouse button).
The Step Protocol number - Protocol name (read-only) win-
dow opens. The parameters may be viewed but not changed. F.6
Move the window across the screen so that the parameter
card stack is visible. This enables you to compare the mea-
surement parameters of a previously scanned protocol with
those of a protocol still to be performed.
0.0

Applying parameter settings F.6
To apply the parameter settings of one protocol to another pro-

tocol, copy the parameter settings or set a copy reference.
F.6
Copying parameters First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
from a protocol F.6 the parameters (double-click).
Select the (source) protocol from which you wish to transfer
the settings (single-click).
Select Queue > Copy Parameter from the main menu or
Copy Parameter from the context menu.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters
It does not matter if the source protocol is positioned behind
the target protocol in the job list.
0.0

Copying parameters from You may also select a GSP segment for copying parameter set-
an image in the GSP tings, if the GSP segment contains an image, the protocol of
segment F.6 which is still pending in the job list. F.6
First open the (target) protocol into which you want to copy
the parameters (double-click).
Place the mouse pointer on the GSP segment containing the
image.
Select Copy Parameter from the context menu in this seg-
ment.
In the Copy Parameter Groups dialog box, select the
parameter group with the settings you want to copy.
Parameter conflicts may occur on copying parameters settings.

A message box will indicate the conflict.
Page F.649, Inconsistencies in parameter settings F.6
0.0

Setting a copy reference F.6 Copy references provide another way of transferring parameter
settings from one protocol to another. This simplifies manual
copying of parameter settings. F.6
Select a pending target protocol from the section of the job

list.
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu or Properties
Or F.6
Press the Alt + Return keys on your keyboard.
0.0

Go to the Copy References subtask card.
Check the Copy reference is active checkbox.

Once the copy reference has been activated, the Source pro-
tocol step and Copy parameter group lists are available. F.6
In the Source protocol step list, select the protocol with the
parameter settings you want to copy.
0.0

This list contains all the protocols located in front of the

selected protocol in the scan program that are not the target of
a copy reference.
F.6
In the Copy parameter group list, select the parameters to

be copied from the source to the target protocol.
Only parameter groups may be copied with a copy reference,
not single parameters.
Page F.585, Copying measurement parameters F.6
Click OK to close the Protocol step properties dialog box.
The target protocol is now marked by a reference icon in the job

list. F.6
Reference symbol
The number next to the reference symbol identifies the source

protocol with the settings to be copied. F.6
You cannot see which parameter group has been applied. To

view this information you need to reopen the properties win-
dow.
Parameter conflicts may occur when setting copy references. A
message box will indicate the conflict.
0.0

Updating a copy If a target protocol has a copy reference, the referenced param-
reference F.6 eter settings are copied and updated from the source protocol
to the selected program instruction. F.6
Select the target protocol with a reference icon.

Select Queue > Update Copy Reference from the main
menu or Update Copy Reference from the context menu.
The copy reference will be updated and used in the scanning

process.
F.6
Parameter conflicts may occur when you update parameter set-

tings from a source to a target protocol. A message box will indi-
cate the conflict.
0.0

Inconsistencies in parameter settings F.6
The Confirm Parameter Changes message box will be dis-

played in case of inconsistencies between the source and tar-
get protocol for the parameter settings, that is, parameter set-
tings are not valid or executable. F.6
The message box displayed includes proposals for resolving

the conflict. F.6
0.0

Parameter change by F.6
copying F.6
Click OK.
The new settings are applied. This resolves the inconsistency.F.6
Or F.6
Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied.
F.6
Parameter change Click OK.

by copy reference F.6
The suggestion is applied and a valid copy reference is set.
Or F.6
Click Cancel.
The new settings are not applied. The copy reference has been
recorded by the system, however, it is not valid. F.6
0.0

Copy reference for Updating copy references may cause multiple conflicts when
multiple target protocols F.6 several target protocols are updated. F.6
The message box Confirm Parameter Changes appears. F.6
F.6
Applying all parameter Select the Confirm checkbox and click OK.
changes F.6
The parameters are copied to all target protocols. F.6
0.0

Not applying parameter You have a choice to not involve certain target protocols in the
changes F.6 suggested parameter change. F.6
Use the <Back and Next> buttons to switch between target

protocols.
If the Confirm checkbox is not selected, the suggested
change will not be applied even if you close the window with
OK.
Making a source protocol Select the Make Protocols Complete checkbox and click
complete F.6 OK.
The source protocol is set to complete. F.6
0.0

Inserting new program instructions F.6
You can add further program instructions in the job list in addi-
tion to the given scan program.
F.6
Inserting a new protocol F.6 Click the Program parameter card to move it into fore-
ground.
Select the required protocol.
Click the << button on the Program parameter card to
append the selected protocol to the end of the job list.
Or F.6

Or F.6
Or F.6
Call up the Exam Explorer.

Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
Select a protocol in the Exam Explorer.
Select Tools > Append To Queue.
Or F.6
0.0

The selected protocol is appended to the end of the job list. F.6
You may now position the protocol at the required location

among the pending protocols.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence
F.6
Or F.6
Press the mouse button and drag the required protocol from
the Program parameter card or the Exam Explorer to the
job list (drag & drop).
Release the mouse button when the mouse pointer is at the
correct position.
If you drag the protocol into the empty part of the program
control, the program instruction will be placed at the end of
the job list.
0.0

Program instruction with a For example, you have selected a protocol with voice output or
patient instruction F.6 included patient instructions for automatic playback via the pro-
tocol properties.
Page F.129, Playing back voice output F.6
When you insert the protocol into the job list the system checks
whether the voice outputs are available in the set language.
F.6
If the voice outputs are available, the protocol is marked with a

loudspeaker icon in the job list. F.6
Or F.6
A message box opens if the voice outputs are not available. The
protocol is then marked with a crossed out loudspeaker icon in
the job list. F.6
F.6
0.0

Click OK and announce your instructions over the intercom

system.
There are also other ways to respond to the message: F.6
You can set another language.

Page F.118, Setting playback of voice outputs
You can record the voice output in the set language.
Page F.1121, Changing a voice output
If you close the message box without switching languages or

recording a new patient instruction, a message box will
appear when you start the affected protocol. You will be
prompted to remove the missing voice outputs from the pro-
tocol and speak the instructions through the intercom.
0.0

Inserting a new pause F.6 Select Queue > New Pause from the main menu or New
Pause from the context menu in the outer margin of the Pro-
gram Control.
The Pause step properties dialog box is displayed. F.6
Enter a Name and, if necessary, a Description in the input

fields.
Click OK.
The new pause is appended to the end of the job list. You can
now move the pause to the correct position.
Page F.660, Changing scan sequence F.6
If you want the pause to be a contrast agent pause, you can

define contrast agent administration on the Contrast agent
subtask card.
Page F.715, Inserting and planning contrast agent pauses
0.0

Generating a protocol from acquired images

(Phoenix) F.6
You may reconstruct a new protocol from acquired series or sin-

gle images and add it to the job list. For this purpose, you may
select images from different sources (stamp segments, large
segments, or Patient Browser). F.6
Select a series or image from the stamp segments of the

Maestro layout, from the large image segments, or from the
Patient Browser.
F.6
NOTE
For images ore series scanned with a different software
version, or generated at another Magnetom, the protocols
used for this purpose have to be converted.
Page F.659, Reconstructed protocol by conversion F.6
Press the mouse button and drag your selection into the pro-
gram control (drag & drop).
Or F.6
Select Append To Queue from the context menu in one of

the large image segments.
0.0

A protocol is generated from the series or image and contains

all measurement parameters used to acquire the image. The
reconstructed protocol is appended to the end of the job list. F.6
You may now position the protocol at the required location
among the pending protocols.
F.6
Reconstructed protocol If images or series have not be scanned with the same software
by conversion F.6 version or originate from different MAGNETOM types, the
underlying protocols have to be converted to adapt the recon-
structed protocols to your type of MAGNETOM system. F.6
In this case, selection is not possible in the stamp segments

of the Maestro Layout or in the large image segments.
Therefore select a series or image in the Patient Browser.
Drag&drop the image/series into the job list with the left
mouse button held down. Also press the Shift key after you
start dragging.
If conversion fails, an error message appears.
0.0

Changing scan sequence F.6
If the sequence of the routine scan program is not suitable for

the current examination, you can modify the sequence while it
is running. F.6
Of course, you can only change the lower part of the job list that
is still pending.
F.6
Moving a program Select the protocol or scan pause that you want to move.
instruction
Select Queue > Move Up or Move Down from the main
F.6
menu or Move Up or Move Down from the context menu.

Or F.6
Use the shortcuts Alt + and Alt + .
You may also move a program instruction via drag & drop.
Page A.26, Drag & drop
F.6
Select the program instruction that you want to move.

Press the left mouse button and drag it to its new position in
the job list.
0.0

Cutting/copying and Select a program instruction.

pasting a program
Select Edit > Copy from the main menu or Copy from the
instruction F.6
context menu to copy the entry.
Or F.6
Select Edit > Cut from the main menu or Cut from the con-
text menu to cut the entry.
Or F.6
Use the shortcuts Ctrl + C (copy) or Ctrl + X (cut).

The selected entry is copied or cut to the clipboard. F.6
Select the program instruction, in front of the position where

you want to insert the cut protocol.
Select Edit > Paste from the main menu or Paste from the
context menu.
Or F.6
Use the shortcut Ctrl + V.
If no program instruction was selected before pasting it, the

cut protocol or the cut pause will be appended to the end of
the job list.
0.0

You may copy a program instruction via drag & drop.

Page A.26, Drag & drop F.6
Click the program instruction you want to copy.

Keep both the Ctrl key and the left mouse button pressed
and drag it to the desired position in the job list.
Copying via drag & drop does not work with open program
instructions.
0.0

Deleting program instructions F.6
You may remove individual program instructions from the job

list.
F.6
Deleting a program Select the program instruction that you want to remove from
instruction F.6 the job list.
context menu.
Or F.6
Use the Del. key on the keyboard.

Or F.6
Click the wastepaper basket.
You may also remove a program instruction easily via

drag & drop.
Page A.26, Drag & drop F.6
Select the program instruction that you want to remove from

the job list.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag it to the wastepa-
per basket on the bottom left next to the job list.
0.0

Deleting a complete Select Queue > Clear All from the main menu or Clear All
program instruction list F.6 from the context menu.
All program instructions are deleted from the job list. F.6
This menu item is not available when a scan is in progress.
0.0

Changing protocol properties F.6
You can adjust the properties of the pending protocols and

pauses during an examination. F.6
Examples of protocol properties: F.6
Automatic loading of a measured series into the image area

or other task cards
Setting automatic voice outputs
Changing the protocol's start type
Changing the name of the protocol
Already opened protocols can also be changed. However, it
is not possible to adjust the voice output for these protocols.
Select the protocol from the job list.

Select Edit > Properties... from the main menu.
Or F.6
Select Properties... from the context menu.

Click the relevant subtask card into foreground.

Change the properties of the protocol.
A detailed description of the properties of protocols and pauses
is available in a separate chapter.
Chapter F.12, Protocol and Pause Properties F.6
0.0

Saving a job list as a new program F.6
If you want to save a modified scan program for subsequent

examinations, you can save it as a new program. F.6

control (right mouse button).
As [Customer Tree] dialog box. Assign your modified scan
program to an examination region as well as an examination
and enter a name for the scan program.
0.0

Numbering of reconstructed
images F.6
Numbering is determined by the orientation and position of the

images. It is independent of the slice positioning, excitation
sequence, and number of concatenations in multi-slice scans.
F.6
Numbering rules F.6 The following rules apply: F.6
(1) Primary order

Scanned images are divided into sagittal, coronal, and
transverse groups according to their main orientation.
(2) Secondary order
Within these groups, the slices are numbered according to
their position in ascending or descending order.
0.0

You can define the primary order (for example, cor - tra - sag
as one of six possible combinations) and the secondary order
(ascending or descending) when you adapt the protocol
parameters.
The images are numbered by default in the primary order

sag - cor - tra and in the secondary order R >> L, A >> P,
F >> H.
F.6
NOTE
The settings for image numbering are linked to the position
of the scan region.
The image numbering settings of previously processed and
completed protocols are automatically applied when
opening consecutive protocols that have the same position
of scan region. F.6
0.0

Example F.6 You are planning a scan with 3 slice groups. You can move or
rotate the slice groups without changing the numbers of the
slice groups.
F.6
The number of the selected slice group is displayed on the

Geometry parameter card under Slice group.
In the display, slice group 1 is moved up: F.6
After the scan, you may view the numbering of the recon-
structed images in the Position Display of the Viewing task
card, in the image area of the Viewing task card, or in the
Patient Browser. F.6
0.0

In the Position Display you can see the position and numbers
(right side) of the reconstructed images. F.6
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Assignment of lower-case letters to series names

(2) Name of the new position display series
(3) Number of images on the reference image
(4) Image numbers
0.0

NOTE
If you have configured the position display not to label all
cut, lines, overlapping cut lines can cause incorrect
assignment, between cut lines and invisible image numbers
may lead to an incorrect allocation of cut lines and invisible
image numbers. To be on the safe side in such cases, select
the settings for the cut line labeling in the position overview
so that all cut lines and image numbers are displayed. F.6
Page G.616, Configuring the display of the cut lines F.6
The display of images in the Patient Browser is defined by the

sort criterion. If you select the criterion Instance Number on
the series level, the images will be displayed in the order of their
slice position. F.6
You can uniquely assign the images in the Patient Browser to

the images in the Position Display using the images numbers
displayed in both cases. F.6
0.0

Resolving conflicts and

inconsistencies F.6
Before or during the examination, inconsistencies can occur

between the data in the currently loaded scan program and the
actual settings in the scan system.
F.6
Inconsistent coil configuration F.6
The protocol requires coils different from the ones plugged into
the patient table. A message box will appear if one or more coils
is not connected. F.6
0.0

Click OK.
Open the scan protocol (double-click).
Since the required coils are not plugged in for this protocol, the
system automatically adjusts the coil configuration. F.6
The message box Confirm Parameter Changes appears. F.6
Confirm your changes with OK.

Connect the missing coils to the patient table.
Go to the System-Coils card in the parameter card stack
and click it into foreground.
0.0

Coils with a
undefined
position
Coils with
a defined
position
Select the coils for scanning.

Click this button in the program control to confirm your set-
tings.
The protocol is closed and you may start the measurement. F.6
0.0

Inconsistencies resulting from a changed

table position F.6
Sometimes it is necessary to move the patient table prior to a

scan, e.g. to administer contrast agent to the patient. F.6
Use the Table Positioning dialog box to control the table move-
ment from the control room. Or, you may move the table by
using the keys on the operating panel next to the magnet bore.
Chapter F.8, Positioning the Patient Table and System
Manual F.6
At the start a scan the system automatically checks whether the

information about the table position in the subsequent protocols
matches the current table position. F.6
If it does not, a warning appears indicating that the table will

move. If you answer the dialog box with Yes, the table moves to
the position entered in the protocol and scanning starts. F.6
F.6
NOTE
However, do not move the table completely out of the
magnet (not into the HOME position!).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed. F.6
You will not be able to perform any more scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.). F.6
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
F.7 Using a contrast agent F.7
Contrast agents may be required for a variety of MR examina-

tions. Paramagnetic contrast agents (usually Gd compounds)
enhance the signal of many pathological structures. F.7
If you want to run a protocol with contrast agent, use a scan pro-
gram that already contains pauses for administering contrast
agent.
F.7
All protocols after this pause are marked with a syringe icon in
the job list. F.7
If no contrast agent pauses are planned in a scan program, you

can insert them into the job list while the examination is in
progress. Or, you may utilize other unrelated pauses in the
examination sequence to administer contrast agent to the
patient and to document it accordingly. F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.71

Using a contrast agent Examination
Actual procedure agent F.7
This is the usual procedure for examinations using contrast

agent: F.7
Perform a native scan.

Stop the examination before the first contrast agent protocol.
Check whether the contrast agent protocol has a "complete"
status (no construction worker icon).
Please observe the following when applying dynamic contrast
agents:
F.7
Document the contrast agent administered in the Exam

Paused dialog box
Page F.75, Documenting the use of contrast agent in the
examination pause,
Apply contrast agent
Page F.77, Documenting the use of contrast agent with-
out a pause,
New pause or in Pause step properties
Page F.715, Inserting and planning contrast agent
pauses.
Move the patient table out of the magnet using the tabletop
control.
0.0

Examination Using a contrast agent
You can also use the injector to administer the injection in the
magnet. F.7
F.7
N OT E
Move the table out of the magnet
(but not into the HOME position).
Otherwise the examination is considered completed. F.7
You are not able to perform additional scans, and you will
have to start the entire examination again from the
beginning (patient registration, overview scan, position
slices... etc.). F.7
Administer the contrast agent.

After injecting the contrast agent move the table back into the
magnet isocenter.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.73

Start the first contrast agent protocol during the exam pause,
e.g. via Continue or the F12 key.
All program instructions after the pause will be marked as con-

trast agent scans via a syringe icon to the left of the protocol
name. F.7
The syringe icon will be displayed next to the patient's name

above the Program Control.
F.7
Following the contrast agent uptake, reset the contrast agent

icon.
Page F.712, Resetting the contrast agent icon
The subsequent protocols are no longer identified with the con-
trast agent icon. F.7
0.0

Documenting the use of Contrast

Agent F.7
There are various ways of documenting the use of contrast

agent. While you are able to identify an exam as a contrast
agent exam, you are also able to enter data about the type and
quantity of contrast agent. F.7
Documenting the use of contrast agent in the

examination pause F.7
If your scan program includes a contrast agent pause, the

examination will stop at the pause. The Exam Paused dialog
box is displayed. F.7
Select the Contrast agent applied checkbox.

If you want to document further details of the use of contrast
agent for subsequent invoicing (type and quantity), click the
syringe icon to select a substance from the contrast agent
catalog.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.75

Click Close to close the dialog box.

Administer the contrast agent to the patient and start the
scan with Continue in the program control.
Or F.7
Administer the contrast agent to the patient.

Click Continue in the Exam Paused dialog box to close the
window and start scanning immediately.
key.
The system checks whether the patient table is being moved
automatically before the next protocol starts. If it is, a warning
indicates table movement and the possible danger to the
patient. F.7
Click Yes.
The table is moved. The table is moved to the position entered
and scanning is started. F.7
0.0


without a pause F.7
You may also perform a contrast agent examination, even if the

selected program does not include contrast agent pauses.
Instead of a pause, you may use a break in the measurement,
e.g. while you check and complete the parameters of the next
protocol. F.7
Administer the contrast agent to the patient, document it in the

Apply Contrast Agent dialog box, and continue with the exam-
ination.
F.7
Select Job list > Contrast agent from the main menu.
Or F.7
Click the syringe icon located in the upper left next to the job
list.
Or F.7
Select Contrast Agent from the context menu in the left-

hand (outer) margin of the program control.
The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box is displayed. F.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.77

Select the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.

Contrast agent The input fields for volume and contrast agent names are acti-
administration F.7 vated. F.7
Enter the name and quantity of the contrast agent adminis-

tered.
Or F.7
Click the Catalog button.

The following dialog box lets you select the required contrast
agent from the contrast agent catalog.
Page F.79, Specifying contrast agent details. F.7
Click OK.
Scanning continues. F.7
To document a scan as a contrast agent scan, it is not man-

datory to specify the name and quantity of the contrast agent.
Contrast agent administration is identified by the image text.
0.0

Specifying contrast agent details F.7
Click the syringe icon in the Exam Paused dialog box.

Or F.7
list.
The syringe icon is shown as depressed in both the Exam

Paused dialog box and the program control next to the job
list.
Select the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.
Click the Catalog button in the Apply Contrast Agent dialog

box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.79

The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box is displayed. F.7
Selecting a contrast agent F.7 Select a contrast agent from the contrast agent catalog.
Click OK.
The Contrast agent catalog closes. The program returns to
the Apply Contrast Agent dialog box. The selected contrast
agent is displayed in the Contrast agent selection window.
F.7
Click OK.
0.0

The Apply Contrast Agent dialog box closes. Information

about the contrast agent is transferred to the Exam Paused
dialog box, if you called the contrast agent dialog box from the
pause. F.7
The syringe icon becomes active again and you may start scan-
ning by clicking the Continue button. F.7
0.0

Resetting the contrast agent icon F.7
If you notice that the contrast agent no longer affects the image
contrast during scanning, you may remove the syringe icon for
all subsequent scans.
F.7
Select Job list > Contrast Agent from the main menu or
Contrast Agent from the context menu in the left (outer)
margin of the program control.
Or F.7
list.
Deselect the Patient has contrast agent checkbox.

Or F.7
The Exam Paused dialog box opens again if an additional con-

trast agent pause is planned as the next step in the job list. F.7
Deselect the Contrast agent administration checkbox.
Subsequent scans are now no longer marked as contrast agent
scans. F.7
0.0

Editing the contrast agent catalog F.7
To make your work easier, you can enter all substances used
as contrast agents in scans in the catalog. You can also add or
remove contrast media during an examination.
F.7
Inserting a contrast agent If the contrast agent you want to administer is not already in the
into the catalog F.7 catalog, add it in the Contrast agent catalog dialog box.
F.7
Click the Insert Agent button.

A new line is inserted into the catalog. F.7
Enter a name for the contrast agent, the code value, the
active component, concentration, dilution and, possibly, a
comment.
You need the code if you want to document the contrast agent
used via the HIS (hospital information system) The data are
entered as consumed materials.
Page F.91, Job
The newly entered contrast agent is now included in the cata-
log. F.7
The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box remains open. F.7
0.0

Deleting a contrast agent If the catalog still contains a contrast agent no longer used by
from the catalog F.7 you, you may delete it at this time.
F.7
Select the substance you want to remove.

Click the Delete agent button.
The selected substance is deleted from the catalog. F.7
The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box remains open. F.7
0.0

Inserting and planning contrast

agent pauses F.7
If your scan program does not include contrast agent pauses,

you may insert them during an examination. If your program
already contains a contrast agent pause, you can document
contrast agent administration here while the first protocols are
running.
F.7
Inserting a new contrast Select Job list > New Pause from the main menu.
agent pause F.7
Or F.7
Select New Pause from the context menu in the (left-hand)

outer margin of the program control.
0.0

The Pause step properties - Standard - Pause dialog box is

displayed. F.7
Click the Contrast agent card into foreground.
F.7
0.0

Existing contrast agent Contrast agent administration is also documented in the prop-
pause F.7 erties window for contrast agent pauses already positioned in
the job list. F.7
Select the pause from the section of the job list that still
needs to be run.
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu.
Or F.7
Select Properties from the context menu of the Program

Control.
The Pause step properties - Standard - Pause dialog box is
displayed. F.7
Click the Contrast agent card into foreground.
0.0

Planning contrast agent F.7
administration F.7
Select the Contrast agent administration checkbox.
The Contrast agent selection field and the Catalog button

become active. F.7
Select the contrast agent you want to administer from the list.
Or F.7
Click the Catalog... button and select the contrast agent in

the Contrast agent catalog dialog box.
0.0

Confirm your entry with OK.

If you have inserted a new pause, the contrast agent pause will
be appended to end of the job list. F.7
You can now move the contrast agent pause to the correct posi-
tion in the job list.
F.7
Scanning stops as soon as the pause reaches the top of the job
list. The Exam Paused dialog box is displayed. F.7
Administer the contrast agent and start the contrast agent

scan with Continue.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Positioning the Patient
F.8 Table F.8
You will have to move the patient table at various points during
the examination to, for example, administer contrast agent. F.8
You can control the patient table movement by using either the
control panel next to the magnet bore or the software at the con-
sole in the control room. F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.81

Positioning the Patient Table Examination
Calling up table positioning F.8
Click the Table Positioning button on the tool bar of the

Exam task card.
Or F.8
Select View > Table Positioning... from the main menu.

The Table Positioning dialog box opens. F.8
The current table position is displayed, and you can control var-
ious horizontal movements of the patient table. F.8
0.0

Examination Positioning the Patient Table
NOTE
When performing table movements at the console, ensure
that the table is not simultaneously moved via the operating
panel at the magnet bore. F.8
F.8
Current table position F.8
The current, relative table position is displayed here. F.8
The relative table position is the distance between the magnet

isocenter and the slice marked using the light localizer. F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.83

Moving the table by a certain distance F.8
You may position the patient table with millimeter precision in

the Table Positioning dialog box.
F.8
Enter the distance you want to move the patient table in the
Move table by field.
Then click this button to move the patient table into the mag-
net (i.e. toward the isocenter) by the specified distance.
Or F.8
Click this button to move the patient table out of the magnet
by the specified distance.
F.8
NOTE
The Current position and Move table by displays (as well
as the buttons for moving the patient table by a certain
distance) are only available if you have the corresponding
license. F.8
0.0

Moving the table into the isocenter F.8
Click the Move to Center button to move the patient table

precisely into the isocenter.
The isocenter is usually the point that you marked with the light
localizer during the preparation for the examination. F.8
If you have not marked a point, the table position of the last scan
is considered the center. If you have not performed a scan yet,
the table will move to the scan level of the head coil when you
click the Move to Center button (default setting).
F.8
Moving the table almost completely out of the

magnet F.8
Click this button to move the patient table almost completely

out of the magnet.
You will move the table to this position, e.g., for contrast admin-
istration. The information regarding the position of the scan
center does not change. F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.85

Canceling a table movement F.8
Click this button if you want to cancel a table movement.

The patient table will stop at the point it has already reached in
movement.
F.8
Canceling table STOP F.8
As soon as you press the STOP button on the intercom system

or the console (e.g. in an emergency), the table will stop mov-
ing. The buttons for table positioning are also disabled. F.8
Before you can resume table positioning, you have to first can-
cel the table STOP. F.8
Click the Cancelling table stop button.
0.0

Switching magnet opening lighting on/off F.8
Some examinations require you to set or switch the tunnel light-

ing on/off. F.8
Click this button to switch on the magnet opening lighting, if

it is off.
Click the Lighting of magnet opening button several times

in quick succession to set the intensity of the lighting (3 lev-
els: low, medium, high).
The current setting for magnetic opening lighting is shown to the
right of the button. F.8
You may set the magnetic opening lighting to three different

brightness levels. The more times you click the button, the
brighter the lighting. Once maximum brightness has been
reached, clicking the button again will dim the lighting. F.8
To switch the magnet opening lighting off, first set the lighting
to the lowest brightness level.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.87

Switching magnet opening ventilation on/off F.8
You can adjust the ventilation of the magnet opening from the
console in the control room. F.8
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button to switch on

the ventilation in the magnet opening, if it is off.
Click the Ventilation of magnet opening button several

times in quick succession to adjust the ventilation (3 levels:
low, medium, high).
The current setting for tunnel ventilation is shown to the right of
the button. F.8
To switch the magnet opening ventilation off, first set the ven-
tilation to the lowest level.
0.0

Closing the examination F.8
Click the Move to Home button to move the patient table

completely out of the magnet.
F.8
NOTE
Never move the patient table into the HOME position if you
want to resume the examination afterward. F.8
Clicking the Move to HOME button always terminates the

current examination. F.8
The system assumes that you now want to register and

examine the next patient. F.8
All reference images are removed from the image area. F.8
F.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.89

0.0

CHAPTER Working with instruction
F.9 areas F.9
Instruction areas are used to define the common properties of

different program instructions in the job list. The instructions
have to be grouped by range markers.
F.9
There are different types of instruction areas: F.9
Job
Body region
Image comment
Job F.9 With the necessary license and connection to a hospital infor-
mation system (HIS), you can access the HIS via the network
to receive jobs for your MR system in the form of work steps. A
job reference is created in the job list during patient registration.
All acquired series and contrast agent administrations will be
automatically entered in the job. You are also able to enter
results series (e.g. from post-processing) or consumables on
your own. The procedure step information is now available for
further processing within the hospital.
Page D.68, Editing the performance documentation F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.91

Working with instruction areas Examination
Body region F.9 The body region to be examined is defined by selecting the
scan program during patient registration. The body region set in
the Program Control can be useful when sorting images later
(e.g. on another image archiving system).
F.9
Image comment F.9 Instruction areas also include the display of image comments to
be saved with scanned images in the image database. They are
also marked in the program control using range markers. F.9
0.0

Examination Working with instruction areas
Editing a body region instruction

range F.9
When you select your scan program, the first range marker for
the body region is defined automatically.
F.9
Changing the body region range marker F.9
If you decide to examine another body region during the exam-

ination, you may change the region setting. F.9
Select Queue > Change Body Part Examined in the main

menu.
Or F.9
Select Change Body Part Examined from the pop-up menu

in the program control (right mouse button).
The Body Part Examined dialog box opens. F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.93

Select a body region from the selection list.
Click the OK button.

A new range marker is inserted with the new body region. F.9
If you position the mouse pointer over the range instruction, the
new scan region of the program instructions will be displayed as
a tool tip.
F.9
Deleting the body region range marker F.9
Select the range marker of the body region you want to

delete.
Select Delete from the context menu of the program control.
The body region is no longer entered in the images. F.9
0.0

Editing a work step in the

instruction area F.9
As soon as a patient is registered, a range marker is automati-

cally generated for the work step determined. The step causes
all scans and material consumed (e.g. contrast agent adminis-
tration) belonging to the examination to be available for further
editing within a license-dependent hospital information system.
F.9
Hovering the mouse pointer over the procedure step displays

the starting time of the scan and information about the proce-
dure step in a tooltip.
F.9
If you have to repeat scans or insert new protocols, they will

be assigned to the existing work step.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.95

Adding a work step to range marker F.9
If you need an additional work step during the examination,

insert it using the program control.
F.9
Select Queue > Change Work Step from the main menu.
Or F.9
Select Change Procedure Step from the pop-up menu of

the Program Control.
The Change Procedure Step dialog box is displayed. F.9
F.9
The dialog box contains a list of predefined work steps. You can
apply one of the work steps offered or create a new one. F.9
0.0

Select the Create a new Procedure Step option.

A new range marker is inserted in the job list. F.9
If a program instruction was selected, the range marker

above the program instruction will be inserted into the job list.
If you have not selected a program instruction, the range
marker will be appended to the end of the job list.
This option creates a new work step in the patient database. F.9
This work step records subsequent examination steps for billing

purposes. F.9
The range marker of the previous work step is retained and

indicates the processing status.
Editing a new work step F.9
You may define the newly created work step from the program
control. F.9
Select the newly inserted range marker.

The Executed Work Steps dialog box is displayed. F.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.97

Enter a designation in the Description field for billing pur-

poses.
Record all services to be included for billing.
0.0

Response to a missing work step F.9
A message box will appear when you start a protocol, if no pro-

cedure step exists or if the procedure step has already been
completed. It indicates that the following scans will not be
recorded in a job for billing. F.9
Click Yes if you want to start scanning.

Or F.9
Click No if you want to create a work step.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T F.99

Canceling a procedure step F.9
If you are unable to perform an examination as initially planned,

just cancel the procedure step.
F.9
Select the range marker and Cancel from the pop-up menu
of the Program Control.
Or F.9
Select the range marker and Properties from the pop-up

menu.
The Executed Procedure Steps dialog box then opens. F.9

The work step icon is marked with a red cross. F.9
Subsequent scans are no longer entered in the work step. F.9
0.0

Completing a procedure step F.9
You can complete the procedure step when the last scan of the
examination and all planned postprocessing operations have
been completed, and the series has been printed or transferred
to a film sheet.
F.9
Select the range marker and Complete from the pop-up

menu of the Program Control.
Or F.9
Select the range marker and Properties from the pop-up

menu.
The Executed Procedure Steps dialog box then opens. F.9
Click the Completed button.
The procedure step icon is marked with a green checkmark. F.9
Image calculations still in progress are no longer recorded for

this work step.
F.9
If you unregister the patient being examined or register a new

patient, there will be no indication that the procedure step has
not been completed. However, you may complete it later via
the Patient Browser. This can be helpful if you want to enter
series of subsequent postprocessing steps (e.g. spectros-
copy) in this procedure step.
0.0

Deleting the procedure step range marker F.9
You can delete a procedure step from the job list of the program
control. F.9
Select the range marker you want to delete.

Select Delete from the context menu of the program control.
The work step is deleted but is retained in the patient data-
base.
0.0

Editing an image comment F.9
When registering of a patient, a range marker is automatically

generated for image comments. Initially it is empty. You are able
to enter an image comment for all protocols waiting to be pro-
cessed, including the selected or open protocol. This comment
appears as an annotation in the center of the lower image mar-
gin of the series. F.9
If you do not enter an image comment in the program control,

comments entered during patient registration will be inserted.
The image comment line remains empty if this activity does
not generate a comment. Special image calculation programs
(IDEA) can enter a comment as well.
0.0

Entering an image comment F.9
If no image comment has been assigned, you may enter the

required image text.
F.9
Select Queue > Set Image Comment from the main menu.
Or F.9
Select Set Image Comment from the pop-up menu in the

outer area of the program control.
Or F.9
Select the icon for image comment and select Properties

The Image Comment dialog box appears. F.9
0.0

Type a comment in the input field.

Confirm your comment with OK.
The dialog box closes. All images to be acquired contain this
image comment. F.9
Now position the mouse pointer over the image comment icon
to display the image text entered by you.
F.9
Inserting a new image comment F.9
To assign a different image comment to subsequent program

instructions, proceed as follows: F.9
F.9
Select the program instruction starting from which you want

to change the image comment.
Select Queue > Set Image Comment from the main menu.
Or F.9
Select Set Image Comment from the pop-up menu in the

outer area of the program control.
Type the new text.

Another image comment icon is inserted in front of the program
instruction in the job list. F.9
0.0

Changing the image comment F.9
You may change an existing comment for program instructions

that are still waiting to be processed. F.9
Select the icon for image comment and select Properties

Click the Delete button.

The input field for the image comment is cleared. F.9
Enter a new text in the input field.

Or F.9
Select the image comment in the input field and overwrite it.
The images acquired in subsequent protocols will include the
new image comment. F.9
The current image comment will also be used if you repeat

protocols previously scanned with a different comment.
0.0

Deleting an image comment F.9
An image comment can be deleted again if necessary. F.9
Select the icon for the image comment with image text you
want to delete.
Select Delete from the context menu.
The image comment icon is removed from the job list of the pro-
gram control. F.9
Images acquired in subsequent protocols are assigned the pre-

vious image comment or stored without an image comment, if
none is available. F.9
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
F.10 Inline Display F.10
You can use Inline Display for the following applications: F.10
You are able to view the reconstructed images during scan-

ning. This allows you to decide when to intervene in a scan
by checking the acquired images.
You can locate the required slice position and orientation of
a real-time protocol interactively using the space mouse.
Inline Display lets you trace contrast agent build-up in CARE
bolus scans before starting the high-resolution protocol.
You are able to trace the navigator signal (respiratory curve)
and start a multiple breath-hold scan.
You are able to monitor the MR spectrum and stop scanning
as soon as an adequate signal-to-noise ratio is attained.
You are able to filter the display of BOLD images to display
just the images of a certain slice.
0.0

Inline Display Examination
Starting Inline Display F.10
You can start Inline Display manually or automatically. as well

as change the appearance and size of the Inline Display. F.10
The display includes only images that are loaded automati-

cally from the image calculation. It is not possible to load,
manual images into the Inline Display and then to page back
to previously displayed images.
You may start the Inline Display only if you have full access
rights to the data of the patient being scanned. Please refer
to information in,
Starting Inline Display Select View > Inline Display from the main menu.
manually F.10
Or F.10
Click this button on the tool bar of the Exam card.
The Inline Display is displayed. Two views are possible: with

"frame" or without "frame".
Page F.106, Changing the Inline Display
F.10
If Frame on is activated, the image segment is displayed with

the title bar and several function keys. F.10
The title bar shows the number of the program step. You can
move this window to a new position. F.10
0.0

Examination Inline Display
Inline Display with frame: F.10
(1) Scale bar

(2) Imaging area
(3) Control area with buttons
(4) Store Images On/Off button
(5) Save button
(6) Display Pause button
(7) Stop & Continue button
(8) Copy Image Position button
(9) Display Filter On/Off button
(10) Scan Breathhold button
0.0

Starting Inline Display The Inline Display is automatically opened when a protocol with
automatically F.10 the property Auto open Inline Display is about to run in the job
list.
Page F.1213, Opening Inline Display automatically F.10
The Inline Display appears either with or without a "border",

depending on whether Frame on is activated or not. Without a
border, the Inline Display appears in the position of the right
GSP segment.
Page F.106, Changing the Inline Display
F.10
Inline Display without frame: F.10
If Zoom/Pan On is deactivated, you can move the

Inline Display freely.
Page F.1014, Zooming and panning an image F.10
0.0

The Inline Display is closed as soon as the Inline movie option

is enabled in the protocol properties, and the program step has
been completed.
Page F.1715, Starting the movie display
F.10
Changing the protocol parameters (e.g. increasing the number

of coils by propagation) may deactivate the Inline Display as
indicated by the + sign in the protocol info line.
F.10
Display of the current The number of the protocol steps as well as the images dis-
protocol F.10 played in the Inline Display, appear on the Inline Display title bar
and as a tool tip in the bottom left corner of the Inline Display
(drag & drop area). F.10
0.0

Changing the Inline Display F.10
The Inline Display may be displayed with or without a border,

i.e. title bar and switching area.
F.10
Deselect Frame On in the pop-up menu of the Inline Display.

The Inline Display is displayed without a title bar and switching
area. It takes the position of the right-hand GSP segment. F.10
If Zoom/Pan On is deactivated, you can move the
Inline Display freely.
Page F.1014, Zooming and panning an image
F.10
To display the title bar and functional area again. F.10
Select Frame On from the context menu.
0.0

Setting the size of the Inline Display F.10
You can set the size of the Inline Display freely or select one of
three predefined sizes.
F.10
Setting the size freely F.10 Place the mouse pointer on the edge of the Inline Display.
Drag the Inline Display to the required size holding the left
mouse button down.
Image display is temporarily stopped while you drag the Inline
Display.
F.10
Selecting a predefined You are able to select the following predefined sizes for the
size F.10 Inline Display: F.10
Inline
The Inline Display has the size of a GSP segment in the
three-segment layout.
Large
The Inline Display is as high as the monitor. This setting is
useful for examinations with intervention.
Full screen
The Inline Display fills the entire monitor.
0.0

Make sure Zoom/Pan On mode is switched off in the pop-up

menu.
Switch between the predefined sizes Inline and Large by
double-clicking on the Inline Display with the left mouse but-
ton.
Or F.10
Set the required size with Set Size in the pop-up menu.
Exit Full screen size again by pressing the Esc key.
Switching to another Inline Display closes if you switch to another task card (e.g.
task card F.10 Viewing). F.10
If you return to the Exam task card, the Inline Display will be
open again with the same settings as applicable for manual
starting. Only the last Frame On setting is retained.
0.0

Image display F.10
Inline display shows the images in sequence, similar to a fast

slide show. F.10
How reconstructed images are displayed depends on the

sequence used and the protocol settings: F.10
If image calculation provides images very quickly, it may not

be possible to display all the images. In this case, you will
only see the most up-to-date image.
If the slices are scanned with interleaving, the Inline Display
will initially remain empty. The images are reconstructed only
when the data have been acquired.
Click the Display Pause On button.

Or F.10
Select Display Pause On from the context menu.

The presentation pauses at the image currently displayed. F.10
It is not possible to pause the display if automatic image stor-

age is deactivated.
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading
0.0

Restarting image You are able to resume image display at any time. The image
display F.10 displayed next is the last one reconstructed. Images that have
been reconstructed since the display has been paused are no
longer available for Inline Display. F.10
Click the Display Pause On button.

Or F.10
Select Display Pause On from the context menu.

Image display continues. F.10
0.0

Modifying image display F.10
The images are transferred from image calculation using stan-

dardized window values and aspect ratios. F.10
You can modify this image display: You may window, zoom, and
pan the images during Inline Display. F.10
F.10
NOTE
If displayed very quickly on the Inline Display, your changes
may not be visible due to windowing, zooming, or
panning. F.10
In this case, pause the display.
F.10
NOTE
The changed settings for image display in the Inline Display
are not stored. F.10
0.0

Image windowing F.10
Windowing with the center mouse button, allows you to modify

the brightness and contrast of the displayed image. F.10
Position the mouse pointer on the image displayed in the

Inline Display.
Press and hold the center mouse button while dragging the
mouse up/down or right/left.
Or F.10
Window by using these symbol keys on the symbol keypad

of your keyboard.
Windowing images up Using the mouse, you are able to automatically apply the new
to the end of the series F.10 window values of an image to subsequent images in the
respective series. F.10
Select Window OnSucceeding On from the context menu.
0.0

Automatic image You can also assign automatic window values to the image. F.10
Windowing
Double-click the image currently displayed with the center
F.10
mouse button.
Page G.42, Windowing images
Or
0.0

Zooming and panning an image F.10
The images shown in Inline Display are shown to fit the seg-
ment size. You can change this display. F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On from the pop-up menu.

Position the mouse pointer in the outer area of the image.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag the mouse pointer
up to enlarge the image or down to reduce the image.
Position the mouse pointer in the inner area of the image.
To pan the image contents, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the mouse upward, downward, to the right,
or to the left.
Zooming images up to You can change the menu settings so that the changes to the
the end of the series F.10 visible image section are automatically applied to all images in
the series. F.10
Select Zoom/Pan On Series from the pop-up menu.
Resetting changes F.10 You can undo the zooming/panning in the Inline Display. F.10
Double-click the image with the left mouse button.

The images are again fitted to the segment size. F.10
0.0

Hiding image text F.10
You can hide image text for improved viewing of reconstructed

images.
F.10
Deselect Image Text On in the context menu.

Image text is hidden on the transferred images.
F.10
You can show image text in the transferred images again. F.10
Select Image Text On from the context menu.

When you restart image display, all subsequent images will be
shown with (or without) image text.
F.10
Removing an image F.10
For example, if you have interrupted a scan and the image dis-
played last remains in the image area. F.10
Right-click the Inline Display.

Select Clear Segment from the context menu.
The image currently displayed will be cleared from the image
area. F.10
0.0

Saving images F.10
The calculated images in Inline Display are usually automati-

cally stored in the Patient Browser. F.10
In some cases you may deactivate automatic storage and man-

ually store single images from the Inline Display.
F.10
Automatic image storage F.10
For each protocol, the system defines whether automatic

images storage may be switched off or not. F.10
If automatic image storage is switched off, the images will be

deleted after initial display in the Inline Display. F.10
For protocols involving offline image calculation (e.g. spectros-

copy), automatic image storage is not possible. F.10
For real-time scans, on the other hand, it makes sense to switch

off automatic image storage and just save single images man-
ually. F.10
0.0

Disabling automatic You will disable automatic storage if the images are not neces-
image storage F.10 sary for diagnostic purposes (e.g., in case of real-time scans).
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button.

Or F.10
Deselect Auto store images in the context menu.

The images of your current scan are no longer stored. They are
only displayed in the Inline Display.
F.10
F.10
C AU T I O N
If you deactivate automatic storage, image data may be
lost! F.10
Automatic image storage can be disabled for a current mea-

surement only.
F.10 The Display Pause button is not available while automatic
image storage is disabled. In this case, you cannot pause
image display.
The Store Images On/Off button is disabled in case image
calculation is completed or the Auto store images option
cannot be deselected.
0.0

Enabling automatic If you require all images for diagnosis, you can enable auto-
image storage F.10 matic image storage. F.10
Click the Store Images On/Off button in the Inline Display.

Or F.10
Select Store Images On from the context menu.

When the Store Images On/Off button appears depressed,
images are automatically stored in the Patient Browser as they
are acquired.
F.10
Manual image storage F.10
You can still store individual images manually when automatic

image storage is disabled. F.10

The image currently displayed in the image area of the
Inline Display will be saved. F.10
If the Inline Display does not contain an image, the Save but-
ton is not available.
0.0

Copying the image position F.10
You are able to copy the slice position and orientation of the cur-
rent image in Inline Display to the protocol opened in the pro-
gram control. F.10
This position and orientation are then transferred to the

selected graphic object of the opened protocol. If no graphic
object is selected, the position and orientation will be trans-
ferred to the first slice group of the protocol. F.10
The slice position and orientation are also stored in a buffer. F.10
If no protocol is open, the slice position and orientation will

remain in the buffer. You can transfer these settings to another
protocol later with Image Tools > Paste Image Position. F.10
0.0

Copying the image

position via button F.10
Click the Copy Image Position button.

Or F.10
Select Copy Image Position from the context menu.
You may select Copy Image Position as many times as

required. The buffer contents will be overwritten.
Copying the image The prerequisite for this step is an open protocol. F.10
position via drag & drop F.10
Place the mouse pointer on the bottom left corner of the

Inline Display (drag & drop area).
Drag & drop image position of the current image into the
GSP segment.
The current slice position and orientation will be copied to the
open protocol. F.10
0.0

Selective image display (BOLD) F.10
With respect to BOLD, it is sometimes useful to only display a

certain slice in the Inline Display (instead of having all images
displayed). F.10
The slice is selected by image number.

F.10
Click the Display Filter button to enable image display

selection.
When the button is selected, a field is shown that lets you select
the slice to be displayed. F.10
Enter the number of the slice to have the images displayed.

Use the arrow buttons to change the slice number during scan-
ning. F.10
0.0

Interactive scanning in real-time

mode (optional) F.10
Your system contains various protocols that support real-time

mode similar to fluoroscopy. F.10
When performing scans in this mode, you are able to use the
space mouse to continuously change slice position and orien-
tation. F.10
This allows you to interactively locate a slice of interest and

transfer its position and orientation to another (high-resolution)
scan protocol. F.10
Interactive scans in real-time mode run as continuous loops.

After locating the desired slice position and orientation, you
may close the scan in the program control. F.10
0.0

Interactive scanning Select a real-time protocol from the program card.

procedure F.10 Page F.24, Selecting a scan program
Transfer the protocol to the program control.
Page F.27, Transferring a scan program to the program
control
Set automatic opening of Inline Display in the protocol prop-
erties.
Page F.1210, Setting automatic saving and loading
Deselect the Auto store images option on the Auto load
subtask card in the protocol properties.
Prepare the protocol for scanning.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices,
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters.
Click Apply in the program control to start the protocol.

View the first reconstructed images in the Inline Display.
The slice position and orientation specified here are the initial
values that you are changing interactively during scanning. F.10
0.0

Vary the slice position and orientation during scanning by

moving the space mouse.
Refer to the System Manual
The new slice position and orientation are already applied to the
following reconstructed images. Once a suitable slice is dis-
played, you may apply the image position. F.10
Click the Copy Image Position button.

Page F.1019, Copying the image position
Click the Stop button in the program control.

Scanning stops.
F.10
As a next step, you prepare the high-resolution protocol. Copy

the slice position and orientation of the real-time protocol from
the buffer. F.10
Select Image Tools > Paste Image Position.

Page F.486, Transferring the position of reference images
0.0

Inline Display for CARE Bolus

scans F.10
The Inline Display allows you to check acquired images while

scanning is in progress. This is especially helpful in cases
where you may want to stop the current scan and continue with
the next scan, e.g. during contrast agent scans where you are
monitoring the uptake of contrast agent. As soon as the con-
trast agent becomes visible in the image, you may immediately
proceed to the next high-resolution sequence.
F.10
Place the keyboard focus (dashed border) on the Stop /

Continue button.
Page F.319, Keyboard focus
Press the spacebar or the Enter key.
Or F.10
Click the Stop / Continue button in the Inline Display.

Or F.10
Press the F12 key.

The scan in progress stops and the following scan starts imme-
diately. F.10
F.10
NOTE
Using the keyboard provides you with the advantage of
focussing on the Inline Display instead of the mouse
pointer. F.10
0.0

Starting multiple breath-hold

scans F.10
A multiple breath-hold protocol is started in the Inline Display

and run in several steps. F.10
After positioning the slices in GSP, you can define the number
of breath-hold intervals by entering the Concatenations. The
acquisition time required for each breath-hold interval is dis-
played as a tool tip in the information line below the image area.F.10
Tool tip After each breath-hold command, the image rows of the slices
belonging to one concatenation are measured.
Page P.131, Excitation sequence of slices F.10
You are starting by scanning each concatenation (=breath-hold

interval) from the Inline Display. With navigator protocols, you
can also observe the respiratory movement of the diaphragm in
the Inline Display.
F.10
Prepare a navigator protocol for scanning. Select a mode for

Respiratory Control and include a preparation phase
(Scout mode).
Page P.121, Navigator Geometry Navigator
Open the Inline Display.
Click Apply in the program control to start the protocol.
0.0

The position of the diaphragm (navigator signal) is displayed as

a function of time in the Inline Display. F.10
F.10
Follow the respiratory curve on the Inline Display.

Apply the breath-hold command.
Click the Scan Breathhold button.
Scanning starts. F.10
0.0

TIP
If the keyboard focus (dashed border) is on the Scan
Breathhold button, you may want to press the spacebar to
start scanning. F.10
Navigator signals are not recorded during scanning. After the

slices of the first concatenation have been scanned, the naviga-
tor signal is scanned and displayed again. F.10
The diaphragm position during the "first" scan is indicated by a

yellow line. F.10
Apply the command to breathe again.

The patient should draw several normal breaths. F.10
Apply the breath-hold command to scan the image lines of

the next concatenation and click the Scan Breathhold but-
ton again.
Or F.10
Press the F12 key.
0.0

To stop the multiple breathhold scans. F.10
Click the Stop button in the program control.
The results of all slices that have been scanned are stored. Par-
tially scanned slices are lost. F.10
F.10
NOTE
When you cancel a protocol with multiple Scans, all images
from the current scan are lost. F.10
0.0

Display of the spectroscopy time

signal F.10
You may use the Inline Display to track the MR spectrum while
a scan is in progress. The current and accumulated spectros-
copy data are displayed as a vector graphic in the Inline Display
window. F.10
F.10
For spectroscopy sequences, the Store Images On/Off but-

ton is not available, because it is not possible to deselect the
Auto store images option in the protocol properties.
0.0

Ending Inline Display F.10
The Inline Display can be ended either manually or automati-

cally.
F.10
Ending Inline Display When you close Inline Display, you are no longer able to view
manually F.10 reconstructed images or graphics of a scan (online or offline).F.10
Click the Close Window button in the top right corner of the
Inline Display.
Or F.10
Click the Inline Display button again on the tool bar of the
Exam task card.
Or F.10
Press Alt + F4 on your keyboard.

Or F.10
Select Close Inline Display from the context menu.

The Inline Display is closed. F.10
0.0

Ending Inline Display In the pop-up menu, you can set that the Inline Display will
automatically F.10 close automatically as soon as image calculation has been
completed.
F.10
Select Close after measurement from the pop-up menu.

The Inline Display closes as soon as the current image calcula-
tion has finished. F.10
You can also deactivate this setting. F.10
Deselect Close after measurement in the pop-up menu.
If reconstruction of a protocol has been completed with the

Inline movie option, the Inline Display automatically closes
and movie display starts.
The Inline Display is automatically cleared when protocol
reconstruction is complete and a new scan protocol has been
enabled.
0.0

Tips on optimum performance with

real-time scans F.10
Check whether one or two receiver coils are connected.

Deactivate the image text display.
Switch off auto image storage.
The images from this scan are not stored in the Patient
Browser.
Finish all other processes, e.g. archiving and sending.
Optimize the protocol parameters, e.g., minimize TE and TR,
reduce phase-encoding steps, and deactivate fat saturation.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
F.11 Patient instructions F.11
Two essential factors in obtaining useful MR images are patient

communication and cooperation. F.11
Patient information and instructions are given during an exami-

nation by means of manual or automatic voice outputs, e.g.
breathing control instructions. F.11
Sample files for voice outputs are supplied in two languages

with your system. You may record additional voice outputs in
various languages. You can assign these voice recordings to a
protocol as a property. This allows you to automate communi-
cation with the patient. You are also able to play back these
voice outputs manually without reference to a scan. F.11
Voice outputs are not suitable for patient instructions with

multiple scans, e.g. multi-breathhold BOLD.
Voice output F.11 A single spoken instruction to the patient. Instructions are avail-
able in various languages.
F.11
Label F.11 A unique name for each voice output. The label is displayed in
the selection list and is used to identify a voice output. F.11
0.0

Patient instructions Examination
Do not confuse voice outputs with music played to the patient.

The intercom has a separate input for connecting a CD player,
radio, etc. F.11
F.11
N OT E
Never insert a commercial music CD into the CD drive of
the host computer. The copy protection on the CDs could
cause the system to crash and damage the drive. F.11
When using automatic voice outputs to give instructions to the

patient, it is advisable not to play music at the same time. F.11
0.0

Examination Patient instructions
Playing back an existing voice

output F.11
For many examinations it is important to instruct the patient

before and/or after the scan (e.g. to breathe in and hold his
breath). Existing voice outputs may be played back manually or
automatically. You may also set the volume for the voice output
and play back the patient instructions either in the control room
or in both the control as well as the examination room.
Page F.1111, Changing the volume
Page F.1112, CV/CBT switch
F.11
Select Joblist > Voice Output > Play... or select Voice Out-
put from the context menu of the program control.
0.0

The Voice Output dialog box opens. F.11
F.11
Existing voice outputs are marked with a loudspeaker icon and

indicate the playback duration. The language of the label does
not correspond to the set language. F.11
The dialog will open only if no scan is active.
0.0

Playing back patient instructions manually F.11
Voice outputs are available in several languages. They can be

played back as often as necessary and at any time. This may
be helpful, e.g. to familiarize patients with the sound. F.11
Patient instructions can be played back before and after but

not during a scan.
The language in the Voice Outputs dialog box is the default

setting. You may select a different language from the selection
list. F.11
Select the language from the Language selection list.
Select the voice output, e.g. "Continue breathing", from the

Instruction selection list.
0.0

Click the Play button to play back the voice output.

The patient hears the instructions in the examination room via
headphones or loudspeakers.
F.11
Pausing a voice output F.11 You can stop if you do not want to play back an entire voice out-
put or have selected the wrong voice output. F.11
Click the STOP button.

Playback of the voice output stops. F.11
0.0

Automatic playback of a voice output F.11
If you want to play back voice outputs automatically before and/

or after a scan, the required voice outputs have to be referenced
to the protocol. F.11
The voice outputs are integrated F.11
via the protocol properties during program set-up in the

Exam Explorer
Or F.11
in the program control during the examination

When a protocol with reference voice output is ready to run or

if you have integrated patient instructions for automatic play-
back via the protocol properties, the voice output will be played
back automatically. If the referenced voice output does not
exist, a message box appears. In that case, acknowledge this
message box and give your instructions via the intercom sys-
tem.
Page F.655, Program instruction with a patient instructionF.11
0.0

Setting playback of voice outputs F.11
You can adjust the voice outputs to the individual requirements

of a patient, i.e. by selecting the language and adjusting the vol-
ume. F.11
If your system is not able to play back voice outputs, the Test
selection list and the Play button will not be active.
Select Patient > Voice Output Properties.

Or F.11
Right-click the name of the patient in the program control and

select Voice Output Properties from the context menu.
The Voice Output Properties dialog box opens. F.11
0.0

Changing the language Voice outputs should be played back in a language the patient
for the current patient F.11 can understand. F.11
Select the language, e.g. English (United States), from the

Patient Primary Language selection list.
If the Set as Default checkbox is not clicked, the language
entered in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog
box will be used again for the next patient. F.11
You can only select from the languages that are available on
your system. It is not possible to add new languages.
F.11
N OT E
It is not possible to change the patient language once
scanning has started. F.11
You may record voice outputs in other languages.
0.0

Changing the default You can use the same newly selected language again for the
language setting F.11 next patients. F.11
Click the Set as Default checkbox to save the selected lan-

guage as the default language.
The changed default language setting will become the default
in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dialog box.
F.11
You can redefine the default language in the Exam UI Config-

uration - Voice Output dialog box.
Page F.1129, Configuring voice output
F.11
The default language for patient instructions does not have to

be the same as the language of the user interface.
0.0

Changing the volume F.11 The volume of voice outputs is also preset in the Exam UI Con-
figuration - Voice Output configuration window. You may
change the volume set in the Voice Output Properties dialog
box. F.11
Move the Volume slider to the right to increase the volume

for voice output, or to the left to decrease it.
Testing the voice output F.11 After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
are able to select and play back a voice output for test pur-
poses. F.11
Select a voice output from the Test selection list.

Click the Play button.
The selected voice output will be played back. F.11
0.0

CV/CBT switch F.11 Use the toggle switch on the intercom system to select whether
the patient instructions will be played back in the control room
only or in both the control as well as the examination room. F.11
Push the CV/CBT toggle switch on the intercom system
toward CBT.
The patient instructions will be played back in the control room
only. F.11
This may be useful to test, for example, voice outputs right

after you have recorded them.
Or F.11
Push the CV/CBT toggle switch on the intercom system

toward CV.
The patient instructions will be played back in the control as well
as the examination room. F.11
The toggle switch must be set to CV during examinations.
0.0

Recording and editing voice

outputs F.11
Patient instructions may be recorded or edited only if no patient

is currently registered. F.11
Select Patient > Close Patient from the main menu of the
Exam task card.
Or F.11
Select the name of the patient in the program control with a

right-click and select Close Patient from the context menu.
Page F.620, Closing a patient
Select Joblist > Voice Outputs > Organize.
0.0

The Organize Voice Outputs dialog box opens. F.11
(1) Default voice output (black)

(2) User-defined voice output (blue)
0.0

Recording a new voice output F.11
The files available on your system are shown with a loud-

speaker icon in the Instruction selection list in the Organize
Voice Outputs dialog box. You may record additional instruc-
tions, if required.
F.11
Creating a voice output F.11 To create a new voice output, you first have to create a label for
the instructions and then start recording. F.11
Select the language for the new instructions in the Organize

Voice Outputs dialog box.
Click the New button in the Organize Voice Output dialog
box.
The Edit Label dialog box is displayed. The input field is empty.F.11
0.0

Enter a name for the new voice output.

The name for the new label cannot be more than 31 charac-
ters long and must start with a letter
(a to z or A to Z). The following characters cannot be used: ?,
", *, |, :, \, /, >, <.
Confirm with the OK button.
The Edit Label dialog box closes and the newly created voice
output is appended to the end of the Label selection list in the
Organize Voice Outputs dialog box. F.11
The label for the new voice output is now available in all lan-
guages and the voice output can be recorded in any other lan-
guage necessary.
User-defined voice outputs are blue in the Label selection

list.
0.0

Recording a new voice To record a voice output you will need to use both the Record
output F.11 Voice dialog box and your system's intercom. F.11
Click the Record button in the Organize Voice Output dia-

log box.
The Record Voice dialog box opens. F.11
The dialog box shows the language selected in Organize Voice

Output and the label of the voice output that is being recorded.F.11
If your MRC has a volume indicator, the dialog box will contain
an additional bar for monitoring the volume.
0.0

Press the Talk button on the intercom system and hold it

pressed.
Click the Record button in the Record Voice dialog box to

activate recording mode.
Speak the new instruction into the built-in microphone.
The duration is displayed during recording. F.11
A voice output can be up to 30 seconds long.
F.11
N OT E
To ensure good recording quality, we recommend
maintaining a distance of 30 cm from the microphone and
speaking in a normal voice. You can also adjust the
recording volume with the Record Volume slider during
configuration. The volume slider in the exam room has no
effect on the recording volume. F.11
Press the STOP button in the Record Voice dialog box to

stop recording.
Release the Talk button on the intercom.
0.0


The newly recorded voice output will now appear in the selec-
tion list of the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box with its play-
back time and the loudspeaker icon.
F.11
Proceed in this sequence to avoid unwanted noise at the

beginning and end of the recording.
0.0

Testing a new voice You can play back the new patient instructions after recording
output F.11 the voice output to test comprehensibility. F.11
After the recording the Play button will be active. F.11
Click the Play button.

The voice output is played back. F.11
Voice outputs are played back through the loudspeakers or

headphones (set with the CBT/CV switch) both in the control
and the examination rooms, just as they would be during an
examination. F.11
Click the STOP button to stop playback of the voice output.
0.0

Changing a voice output F.11
If an existing voice output does not meet your requirements, you

can record a new one in its place.
F.11
Editing a voice output F.11 Select the instructions to be modified from the Labels selec-
tion list in the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.
F.11
Click the Record button.
0.0

If you select existing instructions to record over, the Confirm

Recording message box appears. F.11
The Record Voice dialog box opens. F.11
You can now record the patient instructions.

Page F.1117, Recording a new voice output F.11
0.0

Reordering voice outputs F.11
Manual playback of patient instructions is much easier if the

instructions are already organized in the correct order. This
enables you to access voice outputs quickly and helps prevent
mistakes.
F.11
Select the voice output from the Instruction selection list in

the Organize Voice Outputs dialog box.
Click the Up button to move a selected voice output up in the

selection list.
Or F.11
Click the Down button to move a selected voice output down

in the selection list.
0.0

Deleting user-defined voice outputs F.11
When you no longer require a voice output, you can delete it.
However, remember that voice outputs may have been linked to
program instructions for automatic playback. If the deleted
voice output does not exist when a protocol is running, a mes-
sage appears and you have to deliver the patient instructions
via the intercom system. F.11
It is not possible to delete standard pre-installed voice out-

puts.
Deleting a voice output In the Organize Voice Output dialog box, select the voice
from the current language F.11 output to be deleted from the Instruction selection list.
0.0

Click the Delete button

The button is only active if a voice output exists for the
selected instruction, i.e. it is marked with a loudspeaker icon.
The Confirm Delete message box will appear. F.11
0.0

The loudspeaker icon in front of the label disappears and the

voice output is no longer available in the selected language.
Deleting voice outputs in the current language does not auto-
matically delete them in other languages (if available). F.11
0.0

Deleting a voice output F.11
from all languages F.11
In the Organize voice output dialog box, select the voice

output to be deleted from the Instruction selection list.
The button is not active, if a default instruction is selected.
0.0

The Confirm Delete message box will appear. F.11
The voice output will be deleted from all languages and the
label will be removed from the selection list. F.11
N OT E
The changes you make in the Organize Voice Outputs
dialog box are implemented immediately. It is not possible
to undo them. F.11
0.0

Configuring voice output F.11
You can configure the voice output in the Voice Output Prop-
erties dialog box or in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Out-
put dialog box. F.11
The settings in the Voice Output Properties dialog box only

apply to the current patient.
Page F.118, Setting playback of voice outputs F.11
The settings in the Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output dia-

log box are global. These defaults will be used when all patients
are registered. F.11
You are able to perform the following settings: F.11
Preselection of patient language

Volume
Select Options > Configuration.

The NUMARIS/4 - Configuration Panel dialog box opens. F.11
0.0

Double-click the Examination icon.

The Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output box opens. F.11
0.0

Selecting the patient Voice outputs should be played back in a language the patient
language F.11 can understand. The language used by most patients should be
set as the default language of your system. F.11
Select the language from the Patient Primary Language

selection list.
You can only select from the languages that are available on
your system. It is not possible to add new languages.
F.11
Setting the output You can set the volume for playback of voice outputs. F.11
volume F.11
Move the Playback Volume slider to the right to increase the

volume for voice output playback, or to the left to decrease it.
0.0

Testing the selected voice After you have selected the language and set the volume, you
output F.11 are able to select and play back a voice output for test pur-
poses. F.11
Select a voice output from the Test selection list.

Then click the Play button.
The selected voice output will be played back.
F.11
Setting the recording You can set the volume for playback of the voice outputs you
volume F.11 have recorded. F.11
Move the Record Volume slider to the right to increase the

volume for recording voice outputs, or to the left to decrease
it.
0.0

Closing the dialog box F.11 After you have entered your settings, you may save them. F.11

All settings will be saved. F.11
Or F.11
Click Cancel.
The Exam UI Configuration - Voice Output box closes. All
settings remain unchanged. F.11
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Protocol and Pause
F.12 Properties F.12
The protocols and pauses are characterized by numerous prop-

erties. F.12
These properties include, e.g. their name, comment, copy ref-

erences, start properties, and automatic loading of scanned
images into other task cards. F.12
You can change the properties of protocols and pauses to influ-

ence how an examination is performed and evaluated. F.12
You can adjust the properties of the pending protocols and

pauses during an examination. F.12
0.0

Protocol and Pause Properties Examination
Editing protocol properties F.12
The properties of a protocol is changed in the Protocol Step

Properties dialog box. You can call this dialog box from the
Exam Explorer or from the job list.
F.12
Calling from the Exam Select a protocol in the Exam Explorer.

Explorer
Select Edit > Properties from the main menu of the Exam
F.12
Explorer.
Or F.12

Or F.12

Or F.12
Press the shortcut Alt + Enter on your keyboard.

0.0

Examination Protocol and Pause Properties
Calling from the job list F.12 Select the pending protocol from the job list.
Or F.12

Or F.12

The Protocol step properties dialog box opens.
F.12
0.0

Entering a protocol name F.12
When you first open the Protocol step properties dialog box,
the Standard card is in the foreground. Enter a name and
description for the protocol on this card. F.12
Give the protocol a unique name. The name of the protocol is

used as a series description for the images acquired with this
protocol and is shown, for example, in the Patient Browser. A
unique name should also clarify the function that the protocol
has in the scan program. F.12
Enter a descriptive name for the protocol.
Add a description to the name, if necessary.
If you place the mouse pointer over a protocol entry in the

Exam Explorer or program control, a tool tip shows you the
name of the protocol and the respective comment.
0.0

Defining start options F.12
Before scanning, you normally have to position the graphic

objects defined in the protocol to make them match the anat-
omy of the patient. Only localizers and protocols not requiring
exact positioning can be started immediately (automatically). F.12
You can set the following start options on the Execution card: F.12
Starting a protocol without further preparation
Starting a protocol manually, once or several times
Automatically playing back a voice output before/after scan-
ning
Go to the Execution subtask card.
0.0

Starting scanning with / You will normally check the parameters and slice positioning of
without preparation F.12 the protocol before each scan. F.12
Deselect the Start measurement without further prepara-

tion checkbox.
The protocol will be marked with a construction worker icon. F.12
A protocol marked with a construction worker icon has the

status "incomplete" and cannot be started automatically by
the system.
Localizers are normally started immediately without checking

the parameters and slice positioning. F.12
Select the Start measurement without further prepara-

tion checkbox.
The construction worker icon is removed. F.12
A protocol without a construction worker icon has the status

"complete" and is started automatically as soon as it reaches
its turn in the queue.
0.0

Starting scanning A protocol run is performed in three steps. 1) adjustments are

manually F.12 performed, 2) data are acquired, and 3) the images are recon-
structed either afterward or at the same time. F.12
For some examinations (e.g. protocols with breath-hold com-

mands), it is better to set manual starting. In this case, the sys-
tem will pause following adjustment. You can then give the
breath-hold command and start the scan manually.
Page F.621, Starting a protocol manually
F.12
Check the Wait for user to start checkbox.
If you have recorded an appropriate voice output on your sys-

tem, you can perform this type of examination without manual
starting.
0.0

Running a protocol once/ After you change the means of starting the protocol to manual,
more than once F.12 you can also define whether to start the protocol once or several
times in succession.
F.12
Click the single measurement option.

Protocols set to run once only are marked in the scan program
with a "flagman with one flag" icon.
F.12
Multiple loading and starting of protocols is used, for example,

for examinations with contrast agent. F.12
Click the multiple measurement option.

Protocols that can be loaded and run more than once are
marked in the scan program with a "flagman with several flags"
icon. F.12
Prior to each new scan, a dialog box is displayed allowing you

to start the protocol. F.12
0.0

Playing back voice Communicating with patients is an essential part of an exami-

output F.12 nation. You need to tell the patient when scanning starts and
ends and give instructions such as breath-hold commands. Fre-
quently required patient instructions are stored in your system
as voice outputs. F.12
The Execution card is used to define whether a voice output

will be played back before scanning. Actual scanning then
starts automatically. You can also play back a voice output after
the end of scanning.
F.12
Activate the Before Measurement option.
Select a suitable voice output from the selection list.
Activate the After Measurement option.
Select a suitable voice output from the selection list.
Protocols with voice outputs are marked with a loudspeaker

icon in the scan program.
0.0

Setting automatic saving and loading F.12
Images and series acquired through scanning can be saved

automatically and loaded into other applications. These proper-
ties are set on the Auto load card. F.12
Go to the Auto load card.
0.0

Automatic image storage F.12 For most protocols, the Auto store images property is defined
and cannot be deactivated. F.12
In some cases (e.g. real-time protocols), you may deactivate

automatic storage and manually store single images from the
Inline Display.
Chapter F.10, Inline Display F.12
Select the Auto store images checkbox.
Loading images into the You can automatically load acquired series into the Viewing
Viewing card F.12 task card after reconstruction for viewing, postprocessing, or
evaluation. F.12
Automatic loading into the Viewing task card is not possible,

if more than 400 images are reconstructed from one protocol
run.
Select the Load images to viewer checkbox.
The images are loaded into the Viewer in the order of their
image numbering. You can influence the image numbering in
the protocol editor on the System-Common measurement
parameter card.
Page F.539, Parameters for image numbering F.12
0.0

Loading images into the You can automatically load acquired series after reconstruction
stamp segments F.12 into the stamp segments of the maestro layout of the Exam task
card.
Page F.172, Maestro layout
F.12
Select the Load images to stamp segments checkbox.
Loading images into You can automatically load an acquired series into a GSP seg-
GSP F.12 ment of the Exam task card after reconstruction and set auto-
matic starting of movie display (inline movie).
Page F.1713, Movie display F.12
Select the Load images to graphic segments checkbox.

Select the required GSP segment from the selection list.
Activating inline movie F.12 If you want to view the scanned images in movie display, acti-
vate inline movie. F.12
Select the Inline movie check box.
0.0

Opening Inline Display You can set the Inline Display to appear automatically while
automatically F.12 the protocol is running. This enables you to check the images
as they are reconstructed.
Chapter F.10, Inline Display
F.12
Select the Auto open Inline Display check box.
0.0

Setting a copy reference F.12
Copy references are used to transfer the parameter settings

from a source protocol to a target protocol. Copy references
make it easier to define the parameter settings.
F.12
Click the Copy References card into foreground.
Activate the Copy reference is active check box.

Once the copy reference is activated, you can browse the lists
below and select the protocol with the parameter settings you
want to copy. F.12
0.0

The list of source protocols displays all protocols that are in

front of the selected protocol in the scan program and are not
themselves already the target of a copy reference.
F.12
Select the protocol from the Source protocol step list.

In the Copy parameter group list, select the parameter set-
tings to be transferred from the source protocol to the target
protocol.
For each copy reference, you may copy only the settings of
parameter groups, not of single parameters.
Page F.645, Setting a copy reference
Scan protocols with a copy reference are marked with a copy

reference icon in the job list and in the content area of the Exam
Explorer. The number after the icon identifies the source pro-
tocol with the copied parameters. F.12
If you position the mouse pointer over the copy reference

icon, a tool tip shows the parameter group of the copy refer-
ence.
0.0

Displaying upgrade info F.12
If a protocol has been modified by a software update, the Pro-

tocol step properties dialog box will contain the Upgrade Info
subtask card. This tells you what software update changed the
current scan protocol and who made the changes (change
information). F.12
Protocols with upgrade info are marked by an underscore

under their name in the scan program.
Go to the Upgrade Info subtask card to view the change

information.
0.0

Once you have read the change information, you can tell the
system not to display the Upgrade Info subtask card for this
protocol again. F.12
Activate the Do not show this information again check

box.
The name's underscore disappears. F.12
0.0

Applying or rejecting the changed protocol

properties F.12
The new settings are applied after you have finished editing
protocol properties on all subtask cards.
F.12

The dialog box closes and your changes are applied. F.12
F.12
You can also close the Protocol step properties dialog box
without applying your changes. F.12
If modify the content of any scan programs, a message box

will be displayed as you exit the content area. You will be
prompted to save the scan program with the changes or in its
original state.
0.0

Editing pause properties F.12
Scan pauses allow you to plan short interruptions in the exam-

ination sequence. You can use scan pauses to administer con-
trast agent, connect additional coils, or allow the patient to take
a short break. F.12
The properties of a pause is changed in the Pause Step Prop-

erties dialog box. You can call this dialog box from the Exam
Explorer or from the job list. F.12
The pause properties can only be processed in the part of the

job list that has not yet been executed.
Calling from the Exam Select a pause in the Exam Explorer.

Explorer F.12 Page F.1653, Inserting a scan pause
Explorer.
Or F.12

Or F.12

Or F.12

The Pause Step Properties dialog box is displayed. F.12
0.0

Calling from the job list F.12 Select a pause from the job list.
Or F.12

Or F.12

Or F.12
Double-click on this pause.

The Pause step properties dialog box opens. F.12
0.0

Entering the pause name and comment F.12
When you first open the Pause step properties dialog box, the
Standard card is on top. You can enter a name and comment
for the pause. F.12
0.0

The pause name you enter should describe the purpose of the
pause in the scan sequence. F.12
Enter a name for the pause.
Add a comment, if required.
If you position the mouse pointer over a pause entry in the

Exam Explorer or program control, a tool tip displays the
pause name and the comment.
0.0

Planning contrast agent administration F.12
If you intend to use a pause for contrast agent administration,

enter the type and quantity of contrast agent on the Contrast
agent card.
Chapter F.7, Using a contrast agent
F.12
Click the Contrast Agent card into foreground.
Selecting a contrast agentF.12

Click the Contrast agent administration option to activate
the Contrast agent selection list and the Catalog button.
0.0

Select the contrast agent to be administered in the selection

list.
You can also select the contrast agent from the Contrast Agent
Catalog.
F.12
Click the Catalog... button.
The Contrast Agent Catalog dialog box opens. F.12
Select a contrast agent.
0.0

Entering a new contrast If the contrast agent you want is not listed, you may enter it.
agent F.12 F.12
Click the Insert Agent button.

A new, blank line will be entered in the list of the contrast agent
catalog. F.12
Enter a name for the contrast agent, the code value, the
active component, concentration, dilution, and a comment.
The newly entered contrast agent is now included in the cata-
log. F.12
The values entered will be incorporated in the DICOM image

information whenever images are acquired with this contrast
agent.
0.0

Deleting contrast agent F.12 The steps are similar for deleting contrast agents you no longer
need. F.12
Select the contrast medium you want to delete.

Click the Delete agent button.
Click the Apply button. F.12
The selected contrast agent will be deleted from the Contrast

Agent Catalog. F.12
F.12
Confirming contrast agent

selection F.12

The selected contrast agent is applied and the dialog box
closed. F.12
0.0

Applying or rejecting modified pause

properties F.12
New settings are applied after you have finished editing pause
properties.
F.12

The dialog box closes and your changes are applied.
F.12
You may also close the Pause Step Properties dialog box with-
out applying your changes. F.12
Click the Abort button.
If you enter settings for contrast agent administration, the pause

instruction in your scan program will now be marked with a
syringe, indicating the contrast agent pause.
F.12

original state.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
F.13 Printing protocols F.13
You are able to either print out the parameter overview of proto-
cols, contents of scan programs, examinations, and regions, or
write them to a PDF file (export).
F.13
N OT E
To print out material, connect the printer to your system
either locally or via a network. The program uses the default
settings of this printer. If no printer is connected, it is only
possible to output to a file (export). F.13
The parameter overview enables you to directly compare the

parameter settings of the protocols. F.13
The lists of contents provide you with an overview of the avail-

able examinations and scan programs, making selection eas-
ier. F.13
Since these functions are time-consuming, they are generally

not used during clinical examinations. F.13
0.0

Printing protocols Examination
Printing F.13
This is the procedure for printing protocols: F.13
Open print dialog box

Set printer
Set print range
Open print preview (optional)
Start printing
Opening the print dialog box F.13
You may select one or more protocols, scan programs, exami-

nations, or regions for printing and then open the print dialog
box. F.13
If necessary, you are able to print an entire protocol tree in the

Exam Explorer. However, preparing such a large volume of
data for printing would take an inordinate length of time.
0.0

Examination Printing protocols
Select the required objects in the Exam Explorer.

Select Object > Print from the menu.
Or F.13
Select Print from the pop-up menu.

The Print dialog box opens. F.13
0.0

Setting the printer F.13
To be able to print protocols and lists of contents, a local or

network printer needs to be installed on your system.
Set the printer F.13 All printers available on your system are included in the Print to
selection list. The default printer is preselected. F.13
Select the desired printer from the Print to selection list.

The Type, Location, and Comment fields provide information
about the printer. F.13
The default properties of the printers defined in the control

panel of the system are used for printing.
0.0

Setting the print range F.13
You set the print scope and the print options in the lower part of
the Print dialog box.
F.13
Print scope F.13 You can restrict the print scope with the Only programs with
archive flag option. In this way, only protocols with changed
scan programs are printed. F.13
This option is only activated if you have selected one or more

scan programs, examinations, or regions.
Changed scan programs are marked by an archive flag in the
properties dialog box of the Exam Explorer.
Page F.1629, "Archive" option F.13
Select the Only programs with archive flag option.

If you want to restrict the print scope, deselect the option with
a mouse click.
0.0

Setting print options F.13 The print options let you select the data to be printed. F.13
Here is an explanation of the print options: F.13
F.13
Print option Explanation

Protocols An overview of the parameter settings is printed for
all selected protocols. The settings are listed in the
same way as on the parameter cards.
Table of contents A list of contents is printed for the selected scan
programs, examinations, or regions.
Protocols and table Both the parameter overview and the list of contents
of contents are printed.
Select the print option you require.
F.13
N OT E
When setting print output, remember that printing a large
selection of objects can take some time. If necessary, see if
you can reduce the number of objects selected. F.13
0.0

Setting page The pages of the printed protocols can be numbered in two
numbering F.13 ways: F.13
F.13
Format Explanation
Page only Simple page format, not showing the total number of
pages. Only the page with a plus or minus sign is
shown.
The plus sign indicates that there are more pages to
follow. The minus sign identifies the last page of the
print-out.
Example: Page 3+ or Page 5-
Advantage: Print data using this page numbering
format is prepared much faster than page numbering
including running total number of pages.
Page with total This format prints the page number with the total
pages number of pages. Example: Page 5 / 10.
Use the Print total number of pages option to set the page
numbering format. F.13
If you want to see the total number of pages, select the Print
total number of pages option.
If you do not want to see the total number of pages, deselect

the option again with a mouse click.
0.0

Print preview of protocols F.13
Before printing protocols or lists of contents, you are able to

view the contents of the print-out (or export). F.13
The preview includes a number of functions that allow you to

change the display of the print data. You can also print the data
directly from the preview. F.13
Opening the print

preview F.13
Click the Preview button in the Print dialog box.

A progress indicator appears that can be used to cancel print-
ing, if necessary. F.13
To cancel printing, click the Cancel button.
0.0

The print data are prepared and displayed in the Preview win-
dow. F.13
0.0

Changing the display You can change display of the print preview via buttons (in the
of the print preview F.13 lower part of the dialog box). F.13
F.13
Function Description
These arrows allow you to jump one page forward

or backward.
These arrows allow you to jump to the beginning

or the end of the report.
These buttons provide various zoom levels

enabling you to view fine details on the display.
The + button enlarges views by a factor of 2, the -
button reduces views by a factor of 2, the 1:1 tool
resets the display to the default zoom setting.
Click the button for the desired function.

The display changes accordingly. F.13
0.0

Printing from the print You can print the displayed data directly from the preview. F.13
preview
Alternatively, you can close the preview and print from the
F.13
print dialog box. In this case the print data would have to be
prepared again.
F.13 Click the Print button.
The displayed data are printed via the default printer of the sys-
tem. F.13
If no default printer is set on your system, the Print button is

dimmed and printing cannot be started. The printer needs to
be installed.
Closing the print preview F.13 The print preview is closed as follows: F.13

Or F.13

The displayed print preview is terminated. F.13
0.0

Starting to print F.13
After you have set the desired parameters, printing begins. F.13
Click the OK button in the print dialog box.

The selected data are sent to the selected printer. The print dia-
log box is closed automatically. The prepared protocol data are
printed out. F.13
A progress indicator appears that can be used to cancel print-

ing, if necessary. F.13
To cancel printing, click the Cancel button.
0.0

Exporting data into a file F.13
You are able to print protocols and lists of contents directly into
a PDF file. This is useful if the system does not have a printer
or if you want to take the data to another location for printing.F.13
The procedure for exporting protocol data into a PDF file differs
only slightly from printing data. F.13
Open the print dialog box.

Page F.132, Opening the print dialog box
Select the Print to item from the Adobe PDF File selection
list.
The File name input box is active. Example: F.13
N OT E
The first time you export data, the File Name input box is
empty. On subsequent exports, it always suggests the path
used for the previous export. F.13
0.0

Export settings F.13 The following storage directories are available: F.13
You can store the data in the default directory T:\. This
default directory is the local directory C:\temp on your sys-
tem.
You can store the data on a diskette in drive A:\.
You can place the data in the directory for data to be
recorded on CD-ROM. This directory is on drive U:\. The
data on drive U:\ can be burned onto CD-ROM later.
You can place the data on another (accessible) network
drive.
Click this button.
0.0

The storage dialog box opens: F.13
Set the required storage location on your system here.
N OT E
The storage dialog box allows you to create subdirectories
on drives A:\, T:\, and U:\. Similarly, you may delete
subdirectories and files. F.13
0.0

Enter a name for the export file in the File name field.
The next step is to transfer the settings back to the print dialog
box. F.13

The storage dialog box closes and the settings (storage direc-
tory, name of export file) are entered as the path in the File
name field. F.13
F.13
Further settings F.13 Set the print range.

Page F.135, Setting the print range
If you want to check the data to be exported, open the print

preview.
Page F.138, Print preview of protocols
Starting to export F.13 Once you have made all settings, you can start exporting. F.13
Click the OK button in the print dialog box.

The selected data are exported to the required PDF file. The
print dialog box is closed automatically. F.13
0.0

A progress indicator for data export appears that can be used

to cancel exporting, if necessary. F.13
The displayed data are exported. F.13
To cancel exporting, click the Cancel button.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER SAR and Stimulation
F.14 Monitoring F.14
Examinations with MR systems may trigger physiological

effects in patients. These effects are caused by radio-frequency
fields or by magnetic fields varying over time.
F.14
Temperature rise due to The patient is in a radio-frequency field during the examination.
radio frequency F.14 Part of this electromagnetic radiation is absorbed by the
patient's body tissue and converted into heat. F.14
The RF power per kg of body mass absorbed by the patient is

called the specific absorption rate (SAR). It is expressed in W/
kg. If the SAR exceeds thermal regulation capacity of the
patient, his/her body temperature will rise.
F.14
Stimulation due to varying In addition to the RF field, electrical currents affect the patient
magnetic fields F.14 during the examination. The magnetic flux generated by the
gradient coil changes over time. This change can be expressed
mathematically as dB/dt. F.14
Peripheral nerve stimulation may result if dB/dt (and therefore

the strength of the electrical currents) rises above a certain
value characteristic for each patient. Nerve stimulation mani-
fests itself as e.g. tingling sensations or slight muscle spasms
in the ribs, side, abdomen, hip, buttock, or thorax region, on the
upper arm or the back muscles in the shoulder region.
F.14
Avoiding physiological Your system automatically monitors the SAR and dB/dt load on
effects F.14 the patient. Different operating modes are taken into account to
avoid physiological effects. F.14
0.0

SAR and Stimulation Monitoring Examination
Operating modes F.14
SAR and stimulation monitoring may be performed in two oper-

ating modes. Normal mode and First level controlled operat-
ing mode.
F.14
Normal operating mode During a scan the system observes especially strict limit values
Normal mode F.14 so that the patient is not subjected to any special temperature
rise and muscle stimulation is prevented. F.14
Normal mode is the default setting at the beginning of an

examination.
F.14
First level controlled The patient may experience a clearly noticeable sensation of
operating mode (First warmth if you have activated First level mode. If stimulation
level mode) F.14 monitoring is performed in First level mode, increased dB/dt
values may cause the patient to experience slight peripheral
nerve stimulation. F.14
The decision to switch to First level mode is the duty of the per-
son with medical responsibility.
Page F.1414, Switching modes
Page F.1432, Stimulation threshold exceeded
F.14
0.0

Examination SAR and Stimulation Monitoring
SAR limit values F.14 The specific absorption rate (SAR) is calculated and monitored
for the areas whole body, partial body, and local RF stress.
The limits applied are set in accordance with the guidelines
applicable to your country. F.14
The various regions are defined differently and have different

limit values. For example, the permissible SAR limit value for
local exposure may be higher than the SAR limit value for the
whole body. For this reason, several limit values apply in each
mode. F.14
The SAR limits depend on the ambient temperature as well. At

a room temperature of > 25C, the permitted SAR limits are
decreased.
F.14
Limit values according to Stimulation monitoring is based on stimulation models. These

stimulation models F.14 models are used to calculate the threshold values (limit of Nor-
mal mode) and stimulation limits (limit of First level mode)
depending on the gradient coils. F.14
SAFE model
The threshold values and stimulation limits are determined
by semi-empirical procedures that take the results of exten-
sive clinical trials into consideration. At the threshold value,
stimulation is possible in no more than 1% of patients. At the
stimulation limit, the probability of stimulation is 50%.
dB/dt model
The statutory dB/dt restrictions are included in the calcula-
tion of the threshold values and stimulation limits.
0.0

Stimulation monitoring according to the SAFE model is per-

formed on a regular basis. Depending on country-specific
guidelines, the dB/dt model may be additionally applied. F.14
F.14
NOTE
SAR and dB/dt monitoring of the limit values is performed
automatically by the system software. F.14
Correct automatic monitoring presupposes compliance with

the prescribed sequence of operations. F.14
0.0

Display of the mode F.14 The status bar shows you the operating mode used for the cur-
rent sequence. F.14
The abbreviations represent the operating modes for stimula-

tion monitoring (Stimu) and SAR monitoring (SAR):
NM (Normal mode)
The limit values for Normal mode are being observed.
FL (First level mode)
The controlled First level mode is active. The SAR values or
dB/dt values can exceed the limits of Normal mode.
SP (stimulation possible)
This mode is only possible with stimulation monitoring
according to the SAFE model. Stimulation can occur during
the scan in progress.
Switching to the First level mode is possible e.g. during auto-

matic SAR or stimulation monitoring.
Page F.1414, Switching modes
Page F.1433, Switch to First level mode
0.0

Automatic SAR monitoring F.14
The weight, age, sex, and position of the registered patient are
used directly to calculate the SAR monitoring. For this reason,
it is important to enter the patient data correctly during patient
registration. F.14
The expected SAR values will be calculated as soon as you

load a new protocol. It not possible to start scanning unless all
limit values are observed. F.14
During the scan, your system monitors compliance with the limit
values using the transmitting power which is measured contin-
uously. If the permissible transmitting power is exceeded, the
system will shut down immediately. This eliminates the possibil-
ity of exceeding the limit values. F.14
We recommend to set the temperature of the examination room

to 21C, since a higher ambient temperature may lead to SAR
limits that are too low. F.14
0.0

Display of the necessary registration F.14
Because correct patient registration is of central importance for

SAR monitoring, the system monitors events that indicate a
change in patients (patient registration, table movement). F.14
At the beginning of a new examination, the patient table is

moved out completely (to the home position) so that you can
position the next patient on the table. For this reason, your sys-
tem assumes that moving to the HOME position and registering
a new patient are always associated with a change of patient. F.14
The system will display a warning should only one of the two
events occur. F.14
0.0

Moving to the HOME The following message is displayed if you load the next protocol
position F.14 after moving the table to the HOME position but do not register
another patient first. F.14
If this registered patient is really on the table, you may continue

scanning. F.14
Click Yes.
Scanning starts.
F.14
If these patient data do not apply to the current patient, cancel

the scan. F.14
Click on No or close the dialog box using the ESC key or the
icon in the top right corner of the window.
Scanning will be stopped. You are prompted to register a new
patient. F.14
0.0

Table not moved out If you have registered a new patient for examination although
during registration F.14 the patient table has not been moved out completely, your sys-
tem will display the following warning before the start of the next
scan. F.14
If this registered patient is really on the table, you may continue

scanning. F.14
Click Yes.
Scanning starts.
F.14
If these patient data do not apply to the current patient, cancel

the scan. F.14
Click on No or close the dialog box using the ESC key or the
icon in the top right corner of the window.
Scanning will be stopped. A message on the status bar
prompts you to register a new patient.
0.0

Calculated SAR higher than the limit value F.14
A protocol will not be loaded if your system has calculated in

advance that the SAR limit values would be exceeded for this
scan. The SAR Limit(s) Exceeded dialog box is displayed on
the Exam card. F.14
(1) Buttons for selecting the SAR mode

(2) Name of the program step and the sequence
(3) Current and recommended measurement parameters
0.0

You may perform one of the following steps to continue the

examination: F.14
Change one or more of the protocol parameters so that the

SAR remains below the limit values.
Switch to First level mode (only if appropriate for the physi-
cal condition of the patient).
Skip the planned protocol and continue scanning with the
subsequent protocol.
Changing measurement The lower part of the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! window recom-
parameters in the dialog mends parameters you can use to avoid exceeding the SAR
box F.14 limit values. F.14
While recommendations are made for one parameter each (TR,

images or flip angles), the parameter depends on the values of
other parameters.
If tolerated by the program, you are able to add a pause after

the protocol has been measured.
F.14
Remember that any changes you make to the parameters

may increase scan time and affect image quality.
0.0

Activate the Wait ... seconds after measurement option to

insert a pause.
Select a suggested change from the SAR Limit(s)
Exceeded! dialog box.
Click OK to confirm your setting.
Scanning will then start automatically.
F.14
If a change option is dimmed, this means that no change sug-

gestion is available for that particular protocol parameter.
0.0

Opening a measurement You may open the protocol yourself and make appropriate
parameter in the protocol F.14 adjustments to the parameters on the parameter cards.
This method is especially useful if all of the recommended

changes in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog box are
dimmed. F.14
For example, reducing the number and thickness of saturation

slices also decreases the SAR load. You may also set the RF
pulse type Low SAR on the Sequence/Part 2 parameter card.
F.14
Click Open Protocol.

Change the appropriate parameters on the parameter cards.
0.0

Switching modes F.14
You can switch from Normal mode to controlled First level

mode in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog box. It is then pos-
sible to run the protocol with the intended measurement param-
eters or, at least, the amount of required parameter changes will
be smaller.
F.14
F.14
WA R N I N G
The increased RF load in First level mode may pose a
hazard to the health of the patient. F.14
Always use Normal mode to examine patients with

impaired heat regulation, patients with a higher than
normal body temperature or pregnant patients.
Always use Normal mode for examinations of fetuses,
testicles, and eyes using local transmitter coils. In addi-
tion, please note the special restrictions applying to
these coils.
F.14
WA R N I N G
The increased RF load in First level mode may pose a
hazard to the health of the patient. F.14
In First level mode, you must monitor the patient care-

fully (e.g. using a squeeze bulb or pulse sensor).
Ensure that the climate in the examination room is con-
trolled accordingly.
0.0

N OT E
Normal mode is activated automatically as soon as you
register a new patient. F.14
First level mode remains active while you are examining

the current patient until you switch modes manually. F.14
Click the First level button in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded!

dialog box.
The SAR Monitor dialog box opens. F.14
0.0

Click OK in the SAR Monitor dialog box to switch to First

level mode.
The SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog now shows the First level
button as depressed, and the recommended parameters are
adjusted for this mode. F.14
Click OK to run the protocol in First level mode.
If you want to return to Normal mode, close the SAR Monitor

dialog box. F.14
Click either Cancel or the close window icon, or press the

ESC key.
All suggestions dimmed F.14 If all suggested changes are dimmed in First level mode, try
changing the parameters directly in the protocol until you are
permitted to scan in First level mode.
0.0

Skipping the scan F.14
Click Cancel in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog box to

skip the scan.
The protocol is marked as canceled in the job list. The next pro-
tocol is loaded.
F.14
Switching back to You may set Normal mode in the SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dia-
Normal mode F.14 log box as follows.
F.14
Click the Normal mode button.
F.14
N OT E
The load on the patient may be above the Normal mode.
To ensure that the load status of the patient returns to the
Normal mode level, a pause of at least 3 minutes must be
observed. Otherwise, scanning is shut down by online
monitoring. The online monitoring evaluates the patient
load and shuts down when a permissible limit is violated. F.14
0.0

The SAR Monitor dialog box opens. F.14

The system switches to Normal mode. F.14
0.0

SAR message on other task cards F.14
If a task card other than Exam is open and the SAR limit is
exceeded, scanning will be stopped or not even started. The
Warning: Examination interrupted! window is displayed. F.14
Click the Exam button to switch to the Exam task card.

The SAR Limit(s) Exceeded! dialog box is displayed and you
can change the parameters.
Page F.1410, Calculated SAR higher than the limit value
F.14
Click Cancel if you want to continue working in the current

task card and do not want to edit the protocol until later.
0.0

Displaying SAR information F.14
Your system allows you to view the data of the current protocol
that is relevant to SAR monitoring.
F.14
SAR meter F.14
The SAR button on the tool card for the task card Exam con-
tains a level indicator. This indicator lets you determine to what
degree the estimated (look ahead) highest and therefore limit-
ing SAR value of the measurement approximates the critical
SAR limit.
The SAR display is not updated during the measurement; for
this reason it does not show the current SAR load for the
patient.
Dialog box The SAR Information window provides detailed information

SAR information F.14 regarding parameters for SAR monitoring.
F.14
Select Options > SAR Info....

Or F.14
Click the SAR Information button.
The SAR Information window is displayed with the Prediction,

Status, Patient, as well as Protocol and Current subtask
cards. F.14
0.0

In addition to the specific entries on the different subcards, the

dialog box SAR Information shows the operating mode cur-
rently set. F.14
(1) Currently set operating mode

(2) Buttons to switch over to the operating mode for the next
scan
The buttons Normal mode and First level allow you to change
the operating mode for the next scan.
Page F.1414, Switching modes F.14
0.0

Displaying predicted SAR values F.14
The subtask card Prediction displays the SAR values esti-

mated for the current scan for all monitored anatomical areas. F.14
Click the Prediction subtask card to foreground.
(1) Relative SAR value of all monitored body regions.

(2) Bar display for the highest SAR value
0.0

Monitored body regions F.14 Display of the body regions depends on both the transmitter coil
used and the SAR guidelines in effect for your system.
F.14
Relative SAR values F.14 SAR values are shown as relative SAR values. The percent-
ages provided refer to the respective SAR limits. F.14
If one of the values exceeds 100%, the respective SAR limit

value is exceeded. This may be the case, e.g. when you select
a high-performance RF protocol in the Normal mode. F.14
(1) SAR limit value has been exceeded

(2) Predicted SAR is below the limit value
(3) This region is not SAR-controlled or monitored at all
SAR monitoring involves observing different limits for different

SAR aspects.
Page F.143, SAR limit values
0.0

Bar display F.14 A bar displays the SAR value that is currently the highest (the
one that should be limited). F.14
The estimated (predicted) SAR value is shown below the bar

chart. The permissible limit is shown above it. F.14
If the SAR value is outside the green range, the permissible limit
value has been exceeded for the operating mode currently
selected. F.14
0.0

Displaying the SAR status F.14
The Status subtask card provides information regarding the

current status of SAR monitoring. F.14
Go to the Status subtask card.
(1) Current mode (patient mode or service)

(2) Result of the last SAR check
(3) Legal guidelines for SAR monitoring
0.0

Querying SAR-relevant patient data F.14
Ensure that the patient data are correct before the SAR limits
are calculated. You can check the patient data on the Patient
subtask card. If the data are incorrect, you have to register the
patient again. F.14
Go to the Patient subtask card to display the patient data rel-

evant to the SAR.
0.0

F.14 (1) Patient Name

(2) Sex of the patient
(3) Age of patient
(4) The body weight entered during patient registration
(5) Weight actually used for SAR monitoring
(6) Patient orientation with respect to magnet
(7) Accumulated specific RF dose
SAR weight F.14 In certain cases, the SAR body weight may differ from the reg-
istered body weight. F.14
The system compares the Registered body weight with statis-

tical population data and corrects it in case of deviations. The
corrected weight is the SAR body weight. F.14
0.0

Displaying information about the protocol F.14
SAR-relevant information about the current protocol are shown

on the Protocol subtask card. F.14
Go to the Protocol subtask card.
(1) Name of current program instruction

(2) Sequence used
(3) Measurement duration
(4) Medium RF power
0.0

Displaying current SAR values F.14
The subtask card Current displays the current SAR values for
all monitored anatomical areas. F.14
Click the Current subtask card into foreground.
0.0

The display of the monitored anatomical regions corresponds to

the display on the subtask card Prediction.
Page F.1423, Monitored body regions F.14
As compared to the subtask card Prediction the entered rela-

tive SAR values show the current SAR load of the patient. The
values are updated whenever the subtask card Current is
selected. F.14
Analogous to the subtask card Prediction a bar chart is shown

for the highest and therefore limiting SAR value.
Page F.1424, Bar display F.14
0.0

Automatic stimulation monitoring F.14
Your system includes automatic simulation monitoring. F.14
Every time you load a new protocol, the system uses the stim-
ulation models to check whether stimulation may occur during
scanning. F.14
When stimulation monitoring is active in the Normal mode, it is

not possible to start a scan that would exceed the stimulation
threshold. Nerve stimulation is not expected in Normal mode.F.14
If the system switches to Stimulation possible (SP) mode, the
higher limits will be taken into account. In this case, nerve stim-
ulation may occur during scanning. However, it is not possible
to start a protocol if the system precalculates that the stimula-
tion limit would be exceeded. In this case, you have to e.g. lower
the dB/dt values by making appropriate changes to the mea-
surement parameters. F.14
Even during scanning, stimulation monitoring is active and con-

trols the actual value gradient signals. If the stimulation limits
are exceeded, active scanning is stopped immediately and the
gradient currents are reset. This eliminates the possibility of
exceeding the limit values. F.14
0.0

Unlike in SAR monitoring, patient data such as age, weight

are not used for the stimulation models. With respect to stim-
ulation monitoring, a protocol may either be run for all patients
or for no patients.
Stimulation threshold exceeded F.14
The following dialog box will appear if your system detects that
the pending scan exceeds the stimulation threshold. F.14
0.0

Switch to First You may start scanning despite possible stimulation. F.14
level mode F.14
Click OK in the Stimulation Monitor - Warning! dialog box.

Stimulation monitoring is now performed in the controlled First
level operating mode. The abbreviation SP appears on the sta-
tus bar whenever the stimulation threshold is exceeded for the
current scan.
Page F.145, Display of the mode
F.14
Skipping a scan protocol F.14 You may skip the current protocol. F.14
Click Cancel in the Stimulation Monitor - Warning! dialog

box.
The dialog box closes. The next protocol in the job list is loaded.F.14
0.0

Stimulation limit reached F.14
A protocol is not loaded if the stimulation limit (First level mode

limit) would be exceeded during the scan. F.14
The Stimulation Monitor - Stimulation Limit Exceeded! dia-

log box is displayed on the Exam task card. F.14
To continue running the protocol, you can modify the parame-

ters in 3 different ways: F.14
Have the system calculate suitable parameter changes and

display them in the Stimulation Monitor - Recommenda-
tions dialog box. Apply these parameter changes.
Change the gradient mode of the protocol in the Stimulation
Monitor - Recommendations dialog box.
Open the protocol and change one or more measurement
parameters on the parameter cards so that the stimulation
limit is no longer exceeded.
0.0

Calculating parameter Have the system calculate recommended changes to the mea-
changes F.14 surement parameters that are below the stimulation limit. F.14
Click the Calculate button in the Stimulation Monitor

Stimulation Limit Exceeded! dialog box.
The Stimulation Monitor - Recommendations dialog box is
displayed. F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Name of the protocol and the sequence

(2) Current and recommended measurement parameters
(3) Current parameters modified by changes to the gradient
mode
0.0

Select one of the recommended changes.
If a change option is dimmed, this means no suggested

change is available for that particular measurement parame-
ter.
Changing a gradient modeF.14 You may also set a new, slower gradient mode. The system will
modify the gradient slope iteratively until the simulation limit is
no longer exceeded. As a result, changes are made to the TE,
TR, and measurement time. F.14
Change the gradient mode by activating the Adapt to option.
The modified gradient mode in a protocol is marked by an aster-

isk on the Sequence/Part2 parameter card.
Page F.567, Parameter card Sequence Part 2
F.14
Click OK to confirm the new setting.

The protocol starts automatically. F.14
0.0

Editing the protocol F.14 If there are no changes for the current protocol, the dialog box
Stimulation Monitor - Recommendations is displayed along
with the message "Measurement not possible!" Change the
protocol." F.14
You may only modify the parameters on the parameter cards.

Click Open Protocol.
You may combine several parameter changes in the parameter

cards.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.14
Skipping a scan protocol F.14 You can skip the protocol if the system precalculates a violation
of the stimulation limit. F.14
Click Cancel in the Stimulation Monitor Stimulation

Limit Exceeded! dialog box.
The protocol is marked as canceled in the job list and the next
protocol is loaded. F.14
0.0

Stimulation message on other task cards F.14
The scan will not start if you are working on a task card other
than the Exam card and your system precalculates that the
stimulation limit would be exceeded.
F.14
The Stimulation Monitor - Message window opens. You may

continue working on the task card currently open or switch to
the Exam card, e.g. to edit the protocol. F.14
Click the Exam button to switch to the Exam card.

The Stimulation Monitor - Stimulation Limit Exceeded! win-
dow opens.
Page F.1434, Stimulation limit reached F.14
0.0

Or F.14
Click Calculate if you want your system to calculate suitable

parameter changes.
The previous application remains open and a message is dis-
played as soon as the parameter changes have been calcu-
lated. If you switch to the Exam card, the Stimulation Monitor
- Recommendations window will be displayed including the
calculated parameter adjustments. F.14
Or F.14
Click Cancel to skip the scan.

The protocol is marked as canceled in the job list and the next
protocol is loaded. F.14
0.0

Information for stimulation

monitoring F.14
You may query the threshold/limit values and other parameters

important for automatic stimulation monitoring of the current
protocol.
F.14
Select System > Stimulation Monitor - Information to dis-

play information about stimulation monitoring.
The Stimulation Monitor - Information window opens with the
SAFE subtask card and (depending on country-specific
approval) the dB/dt card.
F.14
The SAFE subtask card F.14
The SAFE subtask card contains a list of calculated and mea-

sured parameters that are taken into account in the SAFE
model.
Page F.143, Limit values according to stimulation models F.14
To query the stimulation parameters according to the SAFE
model, go to the SAFE subtask card.
0.0

The left-hand side of the subtask card displays the precalcu-

lated parameter values of the stimulation monitoring. The mea-
sured data is shown on the right. The data refer to the protocol
in progress or just completed. F.14
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Safety factor for the stimulation forecast

The probability that stimulation will occur is estimated to be
higher by this factor than calculated.
(2) Maximum approximation to the stimulation limit (in %)
(3) Information about whether the stimulation threshold or the
stimulation limit has been exceeded.
0.0

The dB/dt subtask card F.14
The country-specific regulations determine whether monitoring

is performed by taking the statutory dB/dt limit values into
account on your system. In this case, you may also select the
dB/dt subtask card. F.14
F.14
0.0

CHAPTER Physiologically Controlled
F.15 Scans F.15
Physiological movements in the body, such as heart beats or

respiration, can cause motion artifacts. Such artifacts are rec-
ognizable in the image as e.g. noise or distortion. F.15
You can avoid these motion artifacts by synchronizing physio-

logical signals (ECG signal, pulse, respiration) with the scans.
Physiologically triggered scans also enable you to create cine
studies of motion cycles, such as the functioning of a heart
valve. F.15
Two scan methods are currently used, namely triggering or ret-

rospective gating. F.15
Triggering involves using a characteristics position in the phys-

iological signal curve as the trigger for scanning. Triggering is
possible using ECG signals, pulse signals, respiration signals,
and external trigger signals. F.15
Retrospective gating involves retrospectively correlating the

acquired image data with the curve of a physiological signal.
Retrospective gating can be applied using ECG signals, pulse
signals, and external trigger signals. F.15
0.0

Physiologically Controlled Scans Examination
The Physiological Display window lets you track physiological

signal curves. F.15
The special parameters for triggering or retrogating scan meth-

ods are set on the Physio parameter card. F.15
F.15
N OT E
You can only perform physiologically controlled scans if
your system includes a PMU display. F.15
0.0

Examination Physiologically Controlled Scans
Preparing a physiologically
controlled scan F.15
Physiologically triggered scans are performed the same way as

regular MR examinations. However, you have to perform a few
additional preparations, and there are additional settings as
well as control options.
F.15
Applying sensors F.15 Position sensors on the patient prior to a physiologically trig-
gered scan. These sensors pick up the signals used for physio-
logically triggering.
Refer to the System Manual F.15
ECG electrodes for recording the ECG

Pulse sensor for recording the pulse curve
Respiratory cushion for recording the respiratory curve
PMU display F.15 The signal curves of the sensors are shown on the PMU display
integrated in the housing of the magnet. This allows you to
check whether the quality of the signals is satisfactory while you
are in the examination room. F.15
You monitor the physiological signals on the Physiological

Display dialog box in the control room.
Page F.155, Monitoring signals on the physiological displayF.15
0.0

Trigger indication F.15 You can listen to the trigger signal (a short beep) via the inter-
com system. Use the slide switch on the console to adjust the
volume of the beep.
see System Manual
F.15
Loading the Scan Once you have finished the preparation steps, select a scan
Program F.15 program for your examination. F.15
Select the required scan program from the Program card.

Transfer the scan program into the Program Control.
On completion of the localizer, the first protocol is opened.

Adjust the slices graphically and set the measurement parame-
ters.
Page F.430, Graphic slice positioning (GSP)
Chapter F.5, Adjusting Measurement Parameters
F.15
0.0

Monitoring signals on the

physiological display F.15
You have attached the sensors to the patient in the examination

room and are observing the signals in the Physiological Dis-
play window. You may also use the Physiological Display win-
dow to select an ECG lead and to check the long-term statistical
values. F.15
Select View > Physiological Display.

Or F.15
F.15 Click the button in the toolbar of the Exam task card.
The Physiological Display window is displayed to the right of
the image area. You can resize or move this window around the
screen.
Page A.225, Resizing and moving a window F.15
0.0

Changing window There are two display modes for the Physiological Display
display F.15 window. F.15
Without a border (default setting)

With a border
Select Border from the context menu.
The Physiological Display window is displayed with its title
bar, status bar, and buttons. The size of the physiological sig-
nals does not change in the display. F.15
(1) Title bar

(2) Image area for display of signal curves
(3) Buttons for setting the speed and operating the physiolog-
ical display
(4) Symbol for a standard trigger
(5) List for selecting the physiological signal
(6) Online statistical values
(7) Status bar
If you want to display the Physiological Display window

without the title bar, status bar, and buttons, deselect Border
in the context menu.
0.0

Displaying physiological The physiological signals are displayed in the image area of the
signals F.15 window. They move from right to left. If you enlarge or reduce
the window, the signals in the image area will be displayed
enlarged or reduced accordingly. F.15
F.15
Setting the recording The speed at which the signals move across the image area
speed F.15 may be set to one of three levels. F.15
F.15 Click one of these buttons to select a recording speed.
Slow Medium Fast Or

F.15
Select Slow, Medium or Fast from the context menu.
0.0

Selecting a signal F.15 You may only select up to two signals for display in the Physio-
logical Display window, even if more than two sensors are con-
nected.
F.15
To display the first signal, select ECG I, ECG aVF, Pulse,

Respiration, or Ext. Signal.
The selected signal will be displayed in the image area.
F.15
Displaying a second You may have two signals displayed. The tracks for the two sig-
signal F.15 nals are synchronized in time.
F.15
Click the 2nd Track button.

Or F.15
Select 2nd Track in the context menu.
Signal 1
Signal 2
0.0

Online statistical values F.15 F.15
The online statistical values are displayed to the right of the

curve. They show the values currently being measured by the
system. For an ECG, for example, the current cardiac rate and
cycle are displayed.
F.15
Long-term statistical In addition to current data, the system also collects signal data
values F.15 over a longer period to calculate the average value, standard
deviation, minimum, maximum, as well as the system acquisi-
tion window.
F.15
Click the Statistics button to display these data.

Or F.15
Select Statistics from the context menu.
Long-term statistics
0.0

Resetting the long-term The system calculates the system acquisition window from the
statistics F.15 long-term statistics. Once the patient has become accustomed
to having the measurements taken after a few minutes, their
respiration, pulse, or heart rate will become calmer. F.15
You should then reset the long-term statistics to have the sys-
tem calculate current values again. The system acquisition win-
dow will also be updated.
F.15
Click the Reset Stat button.

Or F.15
Select Reset statistics from the context menu.
Faulty contact F.15 The system detects poor sensor contact. Relevant error mes-
sages are displayed on the status bar of the Physiological Dis-
play window when Border display mode is set: F.15
Lead error (with ECG)

Sensor not connected (with pulse sensor)
Current ECG El. are connected
0.0

Graphic display of time The various time ranges of a scan are indicated during scan-
ranges F.15 ning in a bar below the first signal curve in the Physiological
Display window. F.15
Each time range is assigned a different color: F.15
(1) Delay time - gray

(2) Scan interval (scan acquisition window) - green
(3) Scan pause (e.g. transmission of saturation pulses) - dark
green
(4) Timeout - red
Page F.1524, Graphic display of the time ranges
(1) (2) (3) (4)
The following restrictions apply to the display of time ranges: F.15

No time ranges are displayed for the second track.
With display rate Fast no time ranges are displayed.
With display rate Medium time ranges are displayed.
With display rate Slow time ranges are displayed if the
selected signal is a respiratory signal or an external signal.
0.0

Display of trigger Trigger information is displayed above the physiological curve.

information F.15 F.15
Standard trigger - appears for triggering and for retrogating
0.0

Setting parameters F.15
To perform a physiologically controlled scan, you have to set

additional measurement parameters on the Physio parameter
card. F.15
Before you set the measurement parameters, we recommend

resetting the long-term statistics using the Reset Stat button
of the Physiological Display dialog box to obtain the most
current value for the Average cycle parameter.
Page F.1510, Resetting the long-term statistics
Page F.1519, Average cycle
Click the Reset Stat button in the Physiological Display

window.
Or F.15
Select Reset statistics from the context menu.
0.0

Displaying the Physio Click the Physio tab to move the parameter card into fore-
parameter card F.15 ground.
The Physio parameter card is divided into several subtask
cards. Different subtask cards are shown depending on the
installed and configured PMU and on the sequence the protocol
is based on. F.15
Signal 1
Use the Signal 1 subtask card to set the parameters for the
1st physiological signal.
Cardio
Use the Cardio subtask card to set the parameters for car-
diac examinations.
PACE
This subtask card is used to set additional parameters to cor-
rect breath-hold motion and for multiple breath-hold scans.
The Cardiac and PACE subtask cards are described in:

Chapter F.5 F.15
0.0

Setting ECG triggering F.15
ECG triggering is especially useful for thoracic and cardiac

scans to avoid image blurring caused by the heartbeat during
regular scans.
F.15
Signal 1 subtask card F.15 Click the Signal 1 subtask card to move it into foreground.
0.0

(1) Signal and mode selection

(2) Average time between two trigger events and standard
deviation
(3) Current, captured average cycle
(4) Acquisition window
(5) Trigger counter
(6) Delay time
(7) Target RR (average heart rate of the patient)
(8) Repetition time TR
(9) Number of concatenations
(10) Number of segments
(11) Graphic display of scan times
(12) Number of cardiac phases
(13) Arrhythmia detection
(14) Size of acquisition window
(15) Limit display of numeric parameters
0.0

The display of the Signal 1 subtask card depends on the signal

setting. F.15
Use the 1st Signal/Mode selection list to enter the physiologi-

cal signal to be used for triggering. You may also select the scan
mode at this time.
F.15
Select ECG/Trigger from the selection list.
The ECG Signal shows the action potential of the heart in the
R form of a curve. F.15
The individual curve phases correspond to the respective con-

traction or relaxation phases of the heart. The R wave in the
QRS complex is used as triggering point for the scan. F.15
P T
Q S
0.0

The signal curve for ECG triggering may be illustrated as fol-

lows: F.15
(1) System acquisition window

(2) Scan acquisition window
(3) Average interval (average cycle)
(4) Delay time (delay trigger TD)
(5) Standard deviation of the average cycle
0.0

Average cycle F.15 Your system calculates the Average cycle from statistical val-
ues. This value indicates the time that has elapsed between two
trigger events. F.15
The average cycle is recalculated and updated continually. You

cannot change this value. F.15
When Averag. cycle displays No Signal, then either no sen-

sors are connected or the sensors are not providing a usable
signal.
F.15
Captured cycle F.15 You can have the acquisition window calculated from the cur-
rent cycle. F.15
Click the Captured cycle contour button.

The value of the current average cycle is displayed on the but-
ton and used to calculate the acquisition window. Protocol
parameters may have to be adjusted. F.15
The Captured Cycle parameter is reset as soon as you edit the

value for the acquisition window.
F.15
Target RR F.15 In some sequences, arrhythmia is detected by the Target RR

parameter. F.15
F.15 Set the Target RR parameter to the average heart rate of the
patient.
0.0

Acquisition window F.15 The Acquisition window parameter represents the time avail-
able for data acquisition after a trigger pulse in a physiologically
triggered scan. F.15
The delay time, number of phases, and repetition time are pro-
portional to the size of the Acquisition window. F.15
Place the mouse pointer over the Acquisition window input

field for a few seconds to display a tool tip. It shows the value
recommended by the system.
Enter a time (in ms) in the spin box.
Please also note the difference in meaning between the terms

system acquisition time and scan acquisition time: F.15
System acquisition time

Calculated by the system; difference between the average
cycle and twice the standard deviation.
The acquisition window cannot be larger than the system
acquisition time.
Scan acquisition time
The time actually used by the system for data acquisition.
0.0

Number of triggers F.15 The Trigger pulse field lets you define whether every trigger
event or only every nth event should trigger a scan.
F.15
Enter a value in the Trigger pulse spin box.
Select 1 if you want to use every trigger to start a scan.

Select 2 if you want to use every second trigger to start a
scan.
Delay time You may enter a delay time for the ECG/Trigger signal This
Entering F.15 parameter defines the delay before the system starts the scan
after the trigger signal has been received. For example, for an
adult patient with a pulse rate of 70/min, you will obtain an
image of the systole with a 0 second delay time, and an image
of the end diastole with a 250 to 350 ms delay time. This allows
you to acquire images at any point in the signal cycle.
F.15
Enter a delay time in ms in the Trigger Delay spin box.
0.0

Repetition time TR F.15 The repetition time TR is set if permitted by the parameters of
the protocol. The longer the repetition time TR, the fewer
images you will obtain per trigger event.
F.15
Enter a value in the TR spin box.

If you are able to enter more than one repetition time, use the
spin buttons to scroll through individual times.
F.15
Concatenations F.15 With triggered multislice scans ("interleaved" excitation

sequence), it is sometimes not possible to acquire all slices in
one measurement. The slices missing from one scan will then
be acquired in the next scan.
F.15
Enter the number of scans you want to concatenate in the

Concatenations spin box.
Segments F.15 With the segments, you may define the number of rows in the k
space that are measured for an image during a TR interval. F.15
Enter the number of segments in the Segments spin box.
0.0

Phases F.15 This parameter defines the number of phases of the heart beat
that will be acquired. The number of phases is usually automat-
ically calculated from the acquisition window, TR, and the delay
time.
F.15
Enter the number of cardiac phases in the Phases spin box.
Arrhythmia detection F.15 Some sequences contain automatic detection of rhythm distur-
bances. F.15
This detection is based on a time-controlled recognition of addi-

tional systoles (By time). F.15
Select Arrhythmia detection and select By time from the

selection list.
Trigger window F.15 If you have selected the By time entry, another parameter will
appear on the parameter card. F.15
Enter the size of the trigger window for extra systole detec-
tion in the Trigger window spin box.
0.0

Graphic display of The top right areas of the parameter card shows the physiolog-
the time ranges F.15 ical signal and the time ranges resulting from the parameters
set.
Page F.1511, Graphic display of time ranges F.15
Unlike the Physiological Display dialog box, a frozen image is

displayed on the Physio parameter card. F.15
(1) Delay time

(2) Repetition time
(3) Twice the standard deviation
(4) Scan acquisition window
If e.g. the scan acquisition time set is longer than the time
between two trigger events, the scan acquisition window will
overlap the following trigger section. The time overlap is shown
in red. F.15
If the input focus is on the trigger delay or TR, the correspond-

ing time range has a blue border. F.15
0.0

Setting pulse triggering F.15
Pulse triggering is especially useful for suppressing motion

and flow artifacts caused by pulsating blood or CSF. F.15
The pulse sensor may be attached to the patient's middle finger.F.15
(1) (4)
(2)
(3)
(1) First pulse wave

(2) Second pulse wave
(3) Diastolic blood pressure
(4) Systolic blood pressure
The first pulse wave ("premature pulse wave") is used for trig-
gering. This wave corresponds to the systolic blood pressure.
F.15
Select Pulse/Trigger from the 1st Signal/Mode subtask

card.
You can set the same parameters on the Signal 1 subtask card
as on the ECG/Trigger card. F.15
0.0

Setting respiratory triggering F.15
Respiratory triggering is used to avoid motion artifacts

caused by breathing. F.15
The respiratory signal is obtained e.g. using a respiratory belt.

The cyclic expansion and contraction of the thorax generates
the respiratory curve. F.15
(1) (2)
(1) Expiration
(2) Inspiration
Select Resp./Trigger from the Signal 1/Mode subtask card.
0.0

Physio parameter card for

respiratory triggering F.15

deviation
(3) Acquisition window
(4) Threshold value for respiration
(5) Respiratory phase (inspiration or expiration)
(7) Number of concatenations
(9) Number of respiratory phases
0.0

Average cycle F.15 The value of the Average cycle is calculated by the system. F.15
The system acquisition window is calculated as follows for res-
piratory triggering: Difference between half the average cycle
and the standard deviation.
F.15
Acquisition window F.15 The Acquisition window shows the time used for the scan
after a trigger pulse in a physiologically triggered scan. F.15
Enter a time in ms in the Acquisition Window spin box.

Place the mouse pointer over the Acquisition window input
field to display a tool tip. It shows the value recommended by
the system.
Threshold F.15 The threshold value determines the point of the respiratory
cycle where scanning is triggered. F.15
Enter a threshold in the Threshold spin box.

When the respiratory curve reaches this value, the signal is trig-
gered. The threshold value is expressed as a percentage of the
respiratory curve. 100% is the maximum expansion of the tho-
rax. F.15
0.0

Respiratory phases F.15 You may use either inspiration or expiration for triggering. F.15
Select Inspiration or Expiration from the Resp. phases

selection list.
Repetition time TR F.15
Enter the repetition time in the TR spin box.
Concatenations F.15 You will define the number of scans to be concatenated. F.15
Enter a value in the Concatenations spin box.
Phases F.15 This setting determines the number of respiratory phases to be

acquired. It is used for e.g. multislice or multiphase cardiac
measurements. The number of phases (respiration) depends
on the repetition time selected. Please observe the limits. F.15
Enter the number of respiratory phases in the Phases spin

box.
After you have set and checked all parameters, you may start
scanning.
Page F.1534, Starting the scan F.15
0.0

Setting an external trigger signal F.15
An external signal may be used e.g. for functional scans (BOLD

imaging) to trigger scanning of the stimulated series. F.15
The PMU connection at the foot end of the patient table allows
you to induce an external digital triggering signal. F.15
The rising edge of the signal is used to start the scan.

F.15
Select Ext./Trigger from the 1st Signal/Mode subtask card.
You can set the same parameters on the Signal 1 subtask card
as on the ECG/Trigger card. F.15
0.0

Setting retrospective gating F.15
Certain sequences support retrospective gating, e.g. cine_trufi.F.15

In this case, the scan is performed with triggering. The acquired
image data is sorted retrospectively and normalized to a
medium RR interval. F.15
Unlike with triggering, with retrospective gating you can mea-

sure all cardiac phases including the late diastole. F.15
Retrospective gating may be applied to ECG signal curves,

pulse signal curves, and external trigger signal curves. The 1st
Signal/Mode selection list on the Signal 1 subtask card con-
tains the following additional entries: F.15
ECG/Retro
Pulse/Retro
Ext/Retro
0.0

Signal 1 subtask card

with ECG/Retro F.15
Select ECG/Retro from the 1st Signal/Mode subtask card.

deviation
(3) Target RR (average heart rate of the patient)
(4) Calculated phases
(6) Number of segments
(8) Detection of rhythm disturbances
(9) Trigger window
0.0

The Parameter Average cycle is determined by the system.
F.15
Calculated phases F.15 This parameter is used to define the number of images to be
reconstructed per cardiac interval. F.15
Enter the number of phases to be calculated in the Calcu-

lated Phases spin box.
0.0

Starting the scan F.15
After you have checked all measurement parameters on the

parameter cards, apply these parameters as usual and start
scanning.
F.15
Loading parameters F.15
Click the Apply button in the program control.

The settings are transferred to the scan system. The protocol is
now complete.
F.15
Starting the scan F.15 The complete protocol starts automatically and is processed. If
there are still incomplete protocols in the joblist (construction-
worker icon), open and edit them like the first protocol of the
program so that they can also be started automatically.
Page F.610, Scan procedure for a routine examination F.15
0.0

CHAPTER Managing scan
F.16 programs F.16
The sequences and parameter settings of frequently performed

MR examinations are stored in your system as scan programs.
Exam Explorer provides you with an overview of the available
scan programs. F.16
The programs are divided into two groups: Siemens programs

and customer programs. The Siemens programs are used as a
basis for customer programs. Customer programs comprise the
directory of scan programs used for your daily work and exam-
inations. F.16
The customer programs are offered for selection on the pro-

gram card.
The Exam Explorer allows you to manage and maintain your

scan programs. F.16
For example, the Exam Explorer is used for: F.16
Copying scan programs from the Siemens tree into the cus-
tomer tree. You can then use these programs to perform
examinations.
Changing scan programs of the customer tree. For example,
you can re-organize, delete, or add new program steps or
make permanent changes to the measurement parameters
of a protocol.
Exchanging scan programs or protocols with other syngo
MR systems. In an intermediate step, you will be required to
use external data media (diskette) or a file system.
You cannot change the existing scan programs in the Sie-
mens tree.
0.0

Managing scan programs Examination
You can only edit entries in the customer tree of the Exam
Explorer (e.g. delete exams or change measurement parame-
ters of a protocol), if you have the appropriate authorization.
Page B.31, Information for Users
F.16
You will generally work offline with the Exam Explorer, i.e. not
during an examination in progress. In some cases, you may use
the Exam Explorer to search for scan programs or protocols
during an examination and transfer them directly into the
queue. F.16
The Exam Explorer is primarily a tool for managing and main-

taining your scan programs. If you want to change a scan pro-
gram immediately prior to an examination (and for this particu-
lar examination only), use the joblist in the program control
instead. F.16
The Exam Explorer provides a print dialog for you to print pro-
tocols with an overview of parameter settings and lists of proto-
col contents. F.16
0.0

Examination Managing scan programs
Calling up the Exam Explorer F.16
Select View > Exam Explorer from the main menu.

Or F.16
Click this button on the tool bar of the Exam task card.
Or F.16
If you are in the Program parameter card, select Explorer

The Exam Explorer window is displayed. You may resize or

move this window around the screen.
Page A.225, Resizing and moving a window F.16
0.0

(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Title bar with path

(2) Menu bar
(3) Tool bar
(4) Navigation area
(5) Content area
(6) Status bar
0.0

Layout of the Exam Explorer F.16
The program window of the Exam Explorer is similar to Win-

dows Explorer. You will be able to intuitively use the Exam
Explorer in a short time.
F.16
Navigation and content area F.16
The Exam Explorer window is divided into two main areas: F.16
Navigation area (left)

Here you use the mouse to navigate through the various data
levels.
Page F.166, Data levels
Content area (right)
The navigation area displays the content of the selected data
level.
Moving the border line F.16 To optimize the display, you may move the border between the
navigation area and content area.
F.16
Place the cursor on the border line between the two window
areas.
The cursor changes shape. F.16
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the border line to
the left or to the right.
The size of the content area will increase and the size of the
navigation area will be reduced, or vice versa. F.16
0.0

Data levels F.16
The examinations and scan programs stored on your system

are grouped hierarchically in the Exam Explorer.
F.16
Level 1: Customer/Siemens level

The Siemens tree contains a variety of clinically tested, recom-
mended scan programs set up by Siemens customer service
during system installation. They are to be used as a basis for
preparing your own selection of frequently used scan pro-
grams. F.16
You cannot change the Siemens tree but you may copy the fold-
ers to your customer tree and edit them there. You can always
go back and recover the original recommended Siemens scan
programs at any time. F.16
0.0

Level 2: Examination region

All examinations for a certain body region are grouped together
in an Examination region (Region).
F.16
Level 3: Examination
An Examination contains all scan programs for a certain body
part or anatomical structure of a body region.
F.16
Level 4: Scan program

A scan program (Program) contains a sequence of optimized
program instructions (scan protocols and scan pauses) suitable
for particular diagnostic requirements.
F.16
Level 5: Program instructions

A program instruction may be a scan protocol (Protocol) or a
scan pause (Pause). The sequence of scan protocols/pauses
in a scan program determines the course of the examination.F.16
0.0

Content of a data level F.16 If you select the customer/Siemens tree, a region, or an exam-
ination in the navigation area, its content will be listed in the
content area. F.16
Scan program
Examination
Examination region Next level down, in this case,
scan programs
Customer/Siemens level
Select a scan program to display its program instructions in the

content area. F.16
Scan program Program instructions
0.0

Tool bar F.16
Similar to Windows Explorer, the Exam Explorer also has a

tool bar that allows you to perform frequently required operator
actions quickly and easily.
F.16
Move up one folder level

F.16
Cut
F.16
Copy
F.16
Paste
F.16
Delete
F.16
Display property window

F.16
Move selection up
F.16
Move selection down

F.16
Insert scan protocol

F.16
Insert scan pause

F.16
Edit scan protocol

F.16
Save scan program in the examination database

F.16
0.0

Displaying unlicensed scan

programs F.16
Scan programs that include unlicensed protocols are normally

not displayed in the Exam Explorer. However, you may display
unlicensed scan programs and protocols. F.16
Select Tools > Show Unlicensed Items from the main

menu of the Exam Explorer.
A check mark is placed in front of the menu item. F.16
Unlicensed scan programs and protocols are now shown as

additional gray items in the Exam Explorer. F.16
0.0

You may use the Protocol View and the Protocol Properties
dialog box to obtain information regarding the parameters and
properties of the unlicensed protocols.
Page F.1644, Viewing protocol parameters
Page F.122, Editing protocol properties
F.16
Of course, you may also hide the unlicensed scan programs

and protocols again. F.16

The check mark in front of the menu item will disappear again.
The gray entries disappear as well.
F.16
In the Object Properties dialog box, you may select a single

unlicensed scan program to be always displayed in the folder
structure of the Exam Explorer, regardless of the setting in
the main menu.
Page F.1628, Editing properties of scan programs
0.0

Finding a scan program F.16
To search for scan programs, click through data levels in the

navigation area. F.16
The content of any entry in the navigation area may also be

displayed in the content area. For this purpose, click the entry
in the navigation area.
Selecting an examination First decide whether you are looking for a scan program in the
tree F.16 Siemens tree or in the customer tree. F.16
Click the + symbol in front of the entry in the navigation area.

The folder level expands to show the examination region stored
in the Siemens or customer tree. The + symbol becomes a -
symbol.
F.16
Selecting an examination
region F.16
Then click the + symbol in front of a region.

The folder level expands to show the examinations stored for
this region. F.16
0.0

Selecting an examination F.16
Then click the + symbol in front of an examination.

The folder level expands to show the scan programs stored for
this examination.
F.16
Scan program not found F.16 If you the scan program you a looking for is not in the open
folder, just look in one of the other folders.
F.16
First click the - symbol in front of the folder.

The directory closes again, keeping the display in the naviga-
tion area uncluttered.
F.16
Then click the + symbol in front of the folder to open it and

look for your scan program.
If you know the name of the scan program, look for the name
in the examination database.
Page F.1614, Searching for a name
0.0

Searching for a name F.16
If you know the name of a specific region, examination, scan

program, and protocol, you may search for the exact name. F.16
If you do not know the entire name or are not sure of its spell-
ing, you may include wildcards (jokers) in your search.
Page D.236, Searching for data
Select Tools > Find from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + F on your keyboard.
0.0

The Find object in data base dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

Enter the name of the region, examination, scan program, or

protocol.
Select one of the following options under Look in:

Siemens
in the Siemens tree only
Customer
in the customer tree only
Selected object
in the selected entry only
All
Search the entire examination database
Click the Find button.
0.0

The result are all objects found with their paths: F.16
Select the entry you require.

Double-click this path.
The Find object in data base dialog box closes and the object
found (region, examination, scan program, or protocol) opens in
the Exam Explorer. F.16
Or F.16
Click the Close button to close the dialog box.

After that, click the region, examination, scan program, or
protocol you located in the navigation area of the Exam
Explorer.
0.0

Processing entries F.16
You may copy regions, examinations, scan programs and pro-

tocols, delete them, or rename them. You can also change the
order of the lists.
F.16
You cannot make changes in the Siemens tree. You may only
view the objects (regions, examinations, programs, and pro-
gram steps) and copy them to the customer tree.

original state.
0.0

Moving entries F.16
You can define the order of examination regions, examinations,

and scan programs displayed in your customer tree. This
enables you to place the regions, examinations, and exams fre-
quently used in your daily routine near to the top, making them
easily accessible. F.16
You may also relocate individual program instructions within a

scan program to modify the program sequence.
F.16
First open the examination tree, examination region, exami-

nation, or the program whose content you want to re-order.
Select the entry that you want to move in the content area.
0.0

Moving up F.16 Select Edit > Move Up from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Move Up from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Alt + on your keyboard.
Repeat these steps until the entry has reached the correct
position.
Moving down F.16 Select Edit > Move Down from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Move Down from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Alt + on your keyboard.

Repeat these steps until the entry has reached the correct
position.
Moving entries via Hold down the left mouse button down and drag the entry to
drag and drop F.16 its new position.
0.0

Copying, cutting, and pasting entries F.16
You may transfer examination regions, examinations, scan pro-

grams and program instructions from the Siemens tree to your
customer tree by copying them. F.16
You can also use the copy function to reorganize the program
instructions, scan programs, examinations, and examination
regions in your customer tree.
F.16
Copy F.16 Select the entry you want to copy in the navigation or content
area.
Select Edit > Copy from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Copy from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + C on your keyboard.
The selected entry is copied into the clipboard. F.16
0.0

Cut F.16 Select the entry you want to cut in the navigation or content
area.
Select Edit > Cut from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Cut from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + X on your keyboard.
The selected entry will be cut and placed on the clipboard. F.16
0.0

Pasting F.16 Select the region, the examination, or the scan program to
which you want to append a copied or cut entry.
Or (for program instructions) F.16
Select the program instruction in front of which you want to

insert the cut or copied entry.
Select Edit > Paste from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Paste from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + V on your keyboard.
If you have not selected any program step before pasting a

program instruction, the program instruction will be appended
to the end of the list.
Copying an entry via Select the entry you want to copy in the navigation or content
drag and drop F.16 area.
Keep the Ctrl key and the left mouse button pressed and
drag the selection to its new position.
0.0

Deleting entries F.16
You can delete any examination regions, examinations, scan

programs, or program instructions that you do not require for
your work.
F.16
Select the entry that you want to delete.
Select Edit > Delete from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Delete from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
The selected entry is deleted along with its entire contents. F.16
0.0

Renaming and annotating entries F.16
Similar to Windows Explorer, you may also modify the names of

entries in the Exam Explorer.
F.16
Select the entry that you want to rename.
Explorer.
Or F.16

Or F.16

Or F.16
The Properties dialog box is displayed with the Standard sub-

task card. F.16
0.0

This subtask card shows the name, a brief description, and path
of the selected entry. You can also see the date and time this
entry was last changed.
F.16
The Standard subtask card in the Region properties dialog

box is displayed on the level of examination regions. The
Standard subtask card in the Protocol step properties or
Pause step properties dialog box is displayed on the level of
program instructions.
0.0

F.16 Change the name and/or the short description of the entry.

Your changes are applied and the dialog box closes. F.16
Or F.16

The dialog box closes without applying your changes. F.16
0.0

Editing properties of scan programs F.16
If you are working at scan program level, the additional options

Archive and Visibility - Irrespective of licensing will appear
on the Standard subtask card in the Properties dialog box. F.16
0.0

"Archive" option F.16
The Archive option is automatically enabled for a scan program

as soon as you modify it in the Exam Explorer. F.16
If the Archive option is enabled, you may restore scan pro-

grams in case of data recovery or software updates. F.16
Scan programs for which the Archive option is not set will usu-
ally be replaced by the original programs from the Siemens
tree.
F.16
You may also manually activate/deactivate the Archive option

for a scan program. F.16
Select the scan program.

Open the Properties dialog box and move the Standard
subtask card in foreground.
Page F.1628, Editing properties of scan programs
Click the Archive checkbox to select or deselect it.
0.0

Option "Visibility - When you activate the Visibility - Irrespective of licensing,

Irrespective of licensing" F.16 the scan program is available in the folder structure of the Exam
Explorer, even if it is an unlicensed scan program.
Page F.1610, Displaying unlicensed scan programs F.16
However, before you can activate the Visibility - Irrespective

of licensing option for an unlicensed scan program, you must
first show all unlicensed scan programs. F.16

Unlicensed scan programs are now shown as gray items in the
Exam Explorer. F.16
Select the required unlicensed scan program.

Open the Properties dialog box and move the Standard
subtask card in foreground
Click the Visibility - Irrespective of licensing checkbox to

select it.
0.0

Creating a new examination

region F.16
You can create new examination regions in your customer tree.

F.16
Select the customer tree (USER).

All examination regions in the customer tree are now displayed
in the content area.
F.16
Select Object > New from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select New from the context menu.

The Add New Region dialog box opens. F.16
Enter a name for the new examination region.

The new region will be appended to the end of the list of exam-
ination regions. F.16
0.0

Assigning an examination region to a body

region F.16
The Region subtask card of the Region properties dialog box

allows you to assign a newly created examination region to a
body region and to change the assignment of an existing exam-
ination region.
F.16
Select the examination region.
Explorer.
Or F.16

Or F.16

Or F.16
The Region properties dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

F.16 Click the Region subtask card to the foreground.
Select the required body region from the Body part exam-
ined selection list.

That confirms the assignment and closes the dialog box. F.16
0.0

Managing the body The Body part examined selection list shows all the body
regions F.16 regions of your system. F.16
The regions are grouped as follows: F.16
DICOM regions
DICOM regions are regions defined in the DICOM standard.
SIEMENS regions
SIEMENS regions are regions defined by SIEMENS and
published in compliance with DICOM specifications.
Customer regions
Customer regions are regions users can define for them-
selves.
You may only edit the customer regions in the list of body
regions. You may not modify DICOM and SIEMENS regions.
Click the Organize button to edit the list of the body regions.
The Organize Body Part Examined list dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

F.16
The icons in the list indicate whether it is an invariable DICOM

or SIEMENS region or a customer region that you can
change: F.16
DICOM or SIEMENS region F.16
Customer region F.16
0.0

Creating a new customer You can add a new region to the list of body regions.
region F.16 F.16
Enter a name for the new body region in the input field.
The name must consist of no more than 16 characters. The
permitted characters are capital letters, figures, blanks, and
underscores.
Click the Add button.

The new customer region will appear as a new entry in the list.
F.16
Deleting a customer You may remove from the list any customer regions that are no
region F.16 longer required. F.16
Select the customer region in the list.

Click the Delete button.
The entry will be deleted from the list. F.16
0.0

Creating a new examination F.16
You may create new examinations in your customer tree.

F.16
Select the region for which you want to create a new exami-
nation.
Explorer.
Or F.16
The Add New Exam dialog box opens. F.16
Enter a descriptive name in the Name field and confirm with

OK.
The new examination is appended to the end of the examina-

tion list of the respective region. F.16
0.0

Creating a new program F.16
You may create new scan programs in your customer tree.

F.16
Open the examination for which you want to create a new

scan program.
Explorer.
Or F.16
The Add New Program dialog box opens. F.16
Enter a name for the new scan program and confirm with
OK.
The new program is appended to the list of scan programs of
the open examination. F.16
0.0

Inserting program instructions F.16
You may add existing scan protocols and pauses to a scan pro-
gram. F.16
All steps are performed in the content area of the Exam

Explorer. F.16
Please note: F.16
If a program instruction in a scan program is already

selected, the new instruction will be inserted in front of it.
If no program instruction is selected, the new instruction will
be appended to the end of the scan program.
If none of the scan protocols stored on your system are suitable

for your new scan program, you can create a new scan protocol
from a sequence or a reconstructed image and add it to your
scan program.
F.16

original state.
0.0

Finding a protocol F.16
The protocols you insert will usually be from other scan pro-
grams. You can make use of any program steps from customer
and Siemens programs.
F.16
Select Insert > Program instruction from the main menu of

the Exam Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Insert Program Steps from the context menu.

The Insert Program Steps menu item will only be active
when you select the context menu if i) a scan program is open
and ii) no program step is selected.
Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + I on your keyboard.
The Insert Program Steps dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

F.16
If the open scan program already contains program steps, they

will be displayed in the Insert Program Steps dialog box. F.16
0.0

Go to another scan program using the Region, Exam, and

Program lists.
Or F.16
Click the Show Siemens button to search for program steps

in the Siemens tree as well.
Customer program steps Siemens program steps
0.0

You can go to other examination regions, examinations, and

scan program in the Siemens half of the window as well. F.16
<Select Item> will be displayed in the selection lists if you

have created a new region or examination in your customer
tree for which there is no equivalent in the Siemens area. You
now have to search for an appropriate scan program in the
Siemens tree yourself.
Click Hide Siemens to hide the Siemens program steps

again.
0.0

Viewing protocol parameters F.16
Before you insert a protocol into your scan program, you can
review the protocol parameters.
F.16
Select a protocol.
Click the View Protocol button.
The View Protocol window opens. F.16
You will find the parameter card stack in the protocol view. You
can view all cards and measurement parameters of the proto-
col, but you may not change them. F.16
0.0

Inserting a protocol F.16
Select the protocol that you want to transfer to your scan pro-
gram.
If you want to transfer two or more protocols from a program,
you may extend your selection with the Ctrl and Shift keys.
Click the Insert button.

Or F.16
Double-click the protocol item (to select a single protocol).
The selected protocol will be copied into the scan program in

If you have not selected any program step before pasting a

protocol, the protocol will be appended to the end of the list.
Now you can search for additional protocols and copy them into
your scan program.
F.16
Close the Insert Program Steps dialog box once you have
copied all required protocols into your scan program. F.16
0.0

New protocol from a sequence

Creating F.16
Sequences are sequences of commands for controlling scan-

ning: they control the RF fields (RF pulses), magnetic field gra-
dients, data acquisition, and image reconstruction. Protocols,
on the other hand, contain the measurement parameter set-
tings for a sequence. F.16
You can access a sequence and create a new protocol for the
current scan program. F.16
Select Insert > Sequence.

The Insert Sequences dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

Go to the Folder selection list. You may either insert a Sie-

mens sequence or a sequence from the customer tree.
The Sequences display field now lists all sequences from the
Siemens and customer trees in alphabetical order. F.16
0.0

Checking sequences F.16 If the folder contains fewer than 200 sequences, they will be
checked automatically and only the sequences licensed and
executable on your system will be displayed. F.16
This time-consuming check is not performed automatically if the

folder contains more than 200 sequences. In this case, the
Show only valid sequences option will not be grayed out and
you may decide whether to perform the check yourself.
F.16
Click the Show only valid sequences checkbox to display

only licensed and executable sequences.
0.0

Selecting sequence(s) F.16 You can use the scroll bar (right-hand bar) to scroll to
sequences further down in the alphabet.
F.16
Click on the sequence you are looking for in the list.

Use the Ctrl or Shift key on your keyboard to make a multiple
selection.
Or F.16
Enter the name of the required sequence in the Type in the

sequence(s) you want to insert field.
For multiple selection, enter the sequences one after the
other, with a blank between each sequence.
Click the Insert button.
Or F.16
Double-click the required sequence (to select a single

sequence).
A protocol is created from the selected sequence and trans-

ferred to your scan program. F.16
If you selected more than one sequence, a protocol is created

for each sequence and added to the scan program.
0.0

Creating a new protocol from a series or

image (Phoenix) F.16
You may create a new protocol from previously acquired series

and images and add them to the scan program. F.16
Select a series or image in the program control, the stamp seg-

ments of the maestro layout, or the Patient Browser and drag
& drop the selection into the Exam Explorer.
F.16
F.16
N OT E
It is only possible to create a new protocol from a series or
image if the series or image was acquired on your system
or on a system of the same type
(same hardware configuration, software version syngo MR
2006T and higher). F.16
If the system type or software version with which the series or

image was generated does not match your system, you can
attempt conversion.
Page F.1652, Reconstructed protocol by conversion
0.0

Creating a new protocol by

drag & drop F.16
Click the series icon of an acquired series in the program

control.
Or F.16
Click a series in a stamp segment.
Or F.16
Display the Patient list and select an image or a series.

Hold down the left mouse button and drag-and-drop the

image or series into the Exam Explorer.
A scan protocol is created from the image/series and added to

the scan program.
F.16
An error message is displayed when series or images that do

not meet the requirements are rejected.
0.0

Reconstructed protocol If the images or series were not acquired with the same soft-
by conversion F.16 ware version or on the same system type, you can attempt to
convert the images. F.16
Select a series or image from the stamp segments of the

Maestro layout, from the large image segments, or from the
Patient Browser.
Press and hold the Shift key, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag & drop the series or image into the Exam
Explorer.
Do not press the Shift key too early because then drag & drop
might not work.
A scan protocol is created from the image/series and added to

the scan program, if conversion was possible. F.16
The changes caused by conversion are identified as upgrade

info.
Page F.1216, Displaying upgrade info F.16
If conversion fails, an error message appears. F.16
0.0

Inserting a scan pause F.16
You can insert a pause, for example, to administer contrast

agent to a patient prior to a scan.
F.16
Select the program step in front of where you want to insert

the pause.
If you do not select a program step before you insert the
pause, the pause will be appended to the end of the list.
Select Insert > Pause from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Insert Pause from the context menu.

The Insert Pause menu item is only available in the context
menu, if a scan program is open and no program step is
selected.
Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + W on your keyboard.
0.0

The pause is inserted in the list and the Pause Step Properties
dialog box opens. Enter a name and comment for the pause in
this dialog box. If the pause is for administering contrast agent,
you can also enter information regarding the contrast agent.
Page F.1219, Editing pause properties F.16
0.0

Editing protocol parameters F.16
The Protocol Editor is used to view and change protocol

parameters. This changes the default settings shown in the
parameter card stack of the Exam card, if you access this pro-
tocol during a routine examination. F.16

original state.
Select a scan protocol.
Select Edit > Protocol from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Edit protocols from the context menu.

Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the Enter key on your keyboard.

Or F.16
Double-click the scan protocol.
0.0

The Protocol Editor is displayed with the protocol parame-

ters. F.16
Changing parameter settings F.16
The protocol editor allows you to modify any of the protocol's

parameter settings. The procedure is the same as in the param-
eter card stack of the Exam task card.
Page F.569, Working in the parameter card stack F.16
0.0

Changing a coil configuration F.16
Use the System task card to define the coil elements required
for the scan protocol.
Page P.185, Coils and coil elements Routine, System
Coils
F.16
Selecting virtual coils F.16 If you are editing a protocol in the Protocol Editor and want to
select different coils than the ones stored in the protocol, just
open the Virtual Coils dialog box.
F.16
Click the Virtual Coils... button.
The Virtual Coils dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

Use the special selection list to set one coil for each of the four
coil plug-ins. The list shows only coils that can be connected to
the plug. F.16
Example: Selection list for coil plug 1 F.16
Set the required coil configuration using the four selection

lists.
Click the Apply button to confirm.
If you selected array coils as virtual coils, you still have to set
the coil elements on the System parameter card.
Page P.186, Local coils F.16
0.0

Applying or rejecting changes F.16
You can apply the new coil configuration and all other parame-
ter changes to the protocol. F.16

Your changes are applied and the Protocol Editor closes.
F.16
You can also close the Protocol Editor without applying your
changes. F.16
0.0

Editing protocol and pause

properties F.16
In addition to the measurement parameters that you edit in the

Protocol Editor, you can set a large number of properties for
each protocol and each pause. F.16
You can enter a name and comment for the protocol, define
start options for scanning, activate automatic image loading
processes, and set a copy reference. F.16
You will find detailed descriptions of the protocol and pause

properties in,
Chapter F.12, Protocol and Pause Properties. F.16
0.0

Saving scan programs F.16
Once you have inserted all protocols and scan pauses into your
scan program, organized them in the desired sequence, and
edited your measurement parameters, you will save the result.
F.16
Saving the scan program under a new name F.16
Saving a changed scan program under a new name creates a

new program.
F.16
Select a scan program.
Select Object > Save as from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Save as from the context menu.
The Save Program As [Customer Tree] dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

It displays the examination region and examination to which the

modified scan program belongs. The Program list shows all
scan programs stored under this examination in the customer
tree. The Name text input field shows the previous name of the
edited scan program. F.16
If you have just created an examination region in the Exam

Explorer, the entry <Select Item> will appear under Exam.
You are prompted to assign your new scan program to an
examination.
0.0

F.16 Use the selection list to select a region for your scan pro-
gram.
You may also create a new region. F.16
Click the New Region... button.
The Add New Region dialog box opens. Here, you can create
a new examination region.
Page F.1631, Creating a new examination region
F.16
Use the selection list to select an examination for your pro-

gram.
You can create a new examination. F.16
Click the New Exam... button.
The Add New Exam dialog box opens. Create the new exami-
nation here.
Page F.1637, Creating a new examination
F.16
Enter a name for the new scan program.
Or F.16
Click one of the scan program names in the Programs list.
0.0

NOTE
If you save your program under an existing name, a
message window asks whether you want to overwrite the
selected scan program. If you confirm that you do, the
previous scan program will be replaced. You will no longer
be able to access the old version of the program. F.16
The program is saved and the dialog box closes.

F.16
Click the Save and Edit button.
NOTE
See notice above. F.16
The program is saved and the dialog box remains open so that
you can continue editing.
F.16

The dialog box closes without saving the program. F.16
0.0

Saving a scan program under the same

name F.16
You can also save the changed scan program under the old
name.
F.16
Select Object > Save from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16

Or F.16
Press the shortcut Ctrl + S on your keyboard.
The program is saved under its old name and path. F.16
0.0


program control F.16
You can also use the Exam Explorer to find a scan program
and transfer it to the queue.
F.16
Transferring a scan Call up the Exam Explorer.

program F.16 Page F.163, Calling up the Exam Explorer
Click a scan program or a single program step in the naviga-

tion or content area.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag & drop the
selected scan programs or program instructions to the
queue.
0.0

Or F.16
Select Tools > Append To Queue from the main menu of

the Exam Explorer.
Or F.16
0.0

Updating filming study layouts F.16
Basics F.16 If you place images or series on the Filming task card, you
need to select a suitable film layout for these images. You can
automate this task by assigning an existing film layout to all
series that have a certain study or series description. When you
place the images or series on the Filming task card, the
assigned film layout is then automatically selected. F.16
The film layout assignments are made in the Filming Study

Layout configuration dialog box.
Page O.614, Associating layouts with a study or series F.16
In the Exam Explorer, you can automatically update the data
contained in the configuration dialog box. F.16
Updating filming study

layouts F.16
Select Tools > Filming Study Layouts from the main menu
of the Exam Explorer.
0.0

The data contained in the customer scan program tree of the

Exam Explorer are transferred to the list of available studies and
series descriptions of the Filming Study Layout dialog box. F.16
When selecting the update function in the Exam Explorer

again, the existing list in the Filming Study Layout dialog box
is replaced by the data contained in the Examination Explorer. F.16
Existing assignments of filming study layouts to studies and
series descriptions are retained, provided that the film layout
exists and no other film layout is assigned to these studies and
series descriptions. F.16
This means you can make changes in the Exam Explorer at any
time and call up the Update Filming Study Layout menu item
without losing your previous assignments. F.16
Updating is only possible if the Filming task card is config-

ured.
0.0

Importing/exporting examination
database objects F.16
The Siemens and customer tree is saved in the examination

database on the PC of your MR system. F.16
You may also access examination regions, examinations, scan

programs, and protocols stored on external data media (CD
ROM) or on your hospital-wide data network. F.16
You can also export objects from your database to external data
media or network addresses, for example, to make your exam-
inations and scan programs available to other syngo MR users.F.16
0.0

Importing objects F.16
You can import examination regions, examinations, and scan

programs into your examination database from a network
address or from external data media.
F.16
In the navigation area, select hierarchy level into which you

want to import data.
Example: Select and examination to import a scan program into
the folder.
F.16
Select Object > Import from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Import from the context menu.
A message window opens. F.16
0.0

During an import, your system will check whether the programs

are executable, i.e. whether all protocols are licensed and
whether the protocol parameters are consistent. For this rea-
son, importing may take some time. Furthermore, it is not pos-
sible to perform other actions while an import is in progress.
Confirm whether you wish to continue or cancel the import.
F.16
Click the OK button if you want to import now.

Or F.16
Click the Cancel button if you want to import later.
If you confirm with OK, the Import Object dialog box opens. F.16
0.0

Exam Database (*.edx) is the default setting under File type.

No other selection is possible. F.16
The "edx" format is a special file format for the examination

database. It is the only format that can be read by the system.
Under Drives, select the drive or network address from

which you want to import data.
Under Folder, select the folder from which you want to

import data.
All edx files in the selected folder are now displayed in the con-
tent window.
F.16
Select the file you want to import.
The name of the selected file is displayed in the File name input
field.
F.16
Click the Import button.
0.0

The system will now check whether importing is possible at the

selected position in the navigation region of the Exam
Explorer. F.16
A specific error message will be displayed if it is not possible to

import a file at the position you have selected. F.16
If possible, the edx file is imported and the following message

box appears. F.16
0.0

The Program to be imported dialog box opens after importing

has finished. F.16
It shows the scan programs contained in the imported edx file.

F.16
The Conversion needed checkbox is active for non-executable

scan programs. These programs must be converted before they
can be imported. F.16
0.0

To shorten the time required for conversion, exclude the non-

executable programs that you do not want to import.
F.16
Deselect the Conversion needed checkbox in front of these

programs.
Click the Convert button to start conversion.
The selected non-executable programs will now be converted

one after the other. F.16
You can see how conversion has progressed from the Conver-
sion needed checkbox. As soon as conversion has been com-
pleted, the checkmark disappears. F.16
The Convert button also changes to a Stop conversion but-

ton. This allows you to cancel the conversion after the current
scan program in case of, e.g. a patient requiring immediate
attention.
0.0

Go to Import and select the programs to be imported via the

checkboxes.
F.16
Activate the checkboxes for the programs you want to import.

Deactivate the checkboxes for the programs you do not want
to import.
Click the Import button to import the selected programs.

The Import button does not become active until at least one
program is ready to be imported, for example, after success-
ful conversion.
The imported scan programs are appended in the Exam

Explorer to the end of the folder selected. F.16
0.0

Exporting objects F.16
You can export examination regions, examinations, and scan

programs from your examination database to a network
address or to an external data medium.
F.16
Select the entry you want to export in the navigation area of

the Exam Explorer.
If you select an object in the content area, this object is not
exported, but rather the object that is opened in the naviga-
tion area.
Select Object > Export from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Select Export from the context menu.
The Export Object dialog box opens. F.16
F.16
0.0

Store objects exported from the examination database as "edx"

files in the target directory. This is the only format that the sys-
tem can read. This is why Exam Database (*.edx) is the default
setting under File type. F.16
It is not possible to select a file type other than Exam Data-

base (*.edx).
Select the target drive or the network address in Drives.
Under Folder, select the folder into which you want to export
data.
The content window now shows all "edx" files present in the tar-
get directory.
F.16
Enter a name for the object to be exported in the Filename

field or accept the name suggested by the system.
The name suggested by the system is the object name from
the Exam Explorer.
0.0

Click the Export sequences option if you also want to export

the associated sequence data.
The Export sequences option is deactivated by default.
Click the Export button to export the selected object.
F.16
NOTE
The exported objects are retained on your system. The
export function only copies the objects to the target drive or
network address. F.16
0.0

Printing protocols F.16
From the Exam Explorer, you can print or write to a PDF file
(Adobe Portable Document Format) protocols as an overview
of all parameter settings and lists of protocol contents. F.16
The parameter overview enables you to directly compare the

parameter settings of the protocols. The lists of contents help
you find you way round the numerous available exams and scan
programs and make it easier for you to organize and maintain
The print option is based on your object selection. Individual

protocols you select are printed. If you have selected an object
containing more than one protocol (e.g. a scan program), all
protocols are printed. F.16
If a selected object contains more than one scan program, you

can only print user-defined programs.
Page F.131, Printing protocols F.16
0.0

Exam Explorer
Closing F.16
Once you have completed all your program management tasks,

you can close the Exam Explorer again.
F.16
Select Object > Exit from the main menu of the Exam
Explorer.
Or F.16
Click the Close window button in the upper right of the title
bar of the Exam Explorer.
0.0

CHAPTER Maestro Layout and Movie
F.17 Display (Option) F.17
The Maestro layout with the stamp segments is available on the

Exam task card in addition to the two-segment and three-seg-
ment layouts. F.17
The stamp segments help you to orient yourself during exami-

nations and manage the acquired series. F.17
It is not possible to perform graphic slice positioning or zooming

and panning in the stamp segments. However, it is possible to
window the images.
F.17
You can load the series from the stamp segments into the large
image segments and view them in movie display. F.17
This provides a life-like impression of the morphology and phys-

iology of the examination region and might provide initial diag-
nostic results even before the examination is completed. F.17
There are numerous ways of configuring and controlling movie

display. F.17
0.0

Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option) Examination
Maestro layout F.17
This overview shows how to work with stamp segments. F.17
(7)
(1)
(6)
(2)
(5)
(3) (4)
0.0

Examination Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)
(1) Determine which series are suitable for slice positioning for
the following protocols and load them into the large image
segments using Drag & Drop.
(2) Drag & drop a series into the program control to repeat a
scan.
(3) Sort series into the stamp segments.
(4) Transfer the series for filming.
(5) Transfer the series from the stamp segments directly to
other task cards for postprocessing.
(6) Save the series together in a new series or append them to
an existing series.
(7) Export the series.
0.0

Selecting the Maestro layout and loading

series F.17
Select View > Maestro UI from the main menu.

The Exam task card is displayed with the Maestro layout. The
stamp segments are still empty. F.17
You can load series manually or automatically.

F.17
Loading manually F.17 Select the series in the program control or in the Patient
Browser.
Drag & drop your selection into the stamp segments.
Loading automatically F.17 You can set the protocol properties to automatically load the
images of a protocol into the stamp segments after scanning.
This is the default setting for some protocols.
Page F.1214, Setting a copy reference F.17
Once this type of protocol is completed, the series are dis-

played in the stamp segments immediately following recon-
struction. F.17
0.0

Each stamp segment represents a series. F.17
You can change the layout of the series in the stamp segments
as desired.
F.17
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over a stamp seg-
ment containing a series, a tool tip displays information about
the loaded series.
Transferring series from stamp segments into

image segments F.17
You can load series from stamp segments into the large image
segments to position slices or start movie display. F.17
Mark the large image segment.

Double-click a stamp segment.
The series in this stamp segment is loaded into the previously
selected image segment. F.17
Or F.17
Drag & drop a series from a stamp subsegment into a large

segment.
0.0

Repeating scanning of a series F.17
You can repeat scanning of a protocol if you are not satisfied

with the image quality. F.17
Drag & drop the series from the stamp segment into the job
list.
Or F.17

A copy of the protocol with the current slice positions is gener-
ated and converted into executable program instructions. F.17
If you select Append To Queue, the protocol is appended to

the end of the job list. If you use the drag-and-drop method,
the protocol will be inserted in the job list where you dropped
it.
Saving, filming, exporting, and transferring

series for postprocessing F.17
You can save the series to a new series directly from the stamp
segments, append them to an existing series, film, export, or
load them into other post processing cards. F.17
The procedure is similar to the one described for images and

series in the large image segments.
Page F.346, Saving, exporting, and transferring images F.17
0.0

Navigating in the stamp segments F.17
You may load any number of series into the stamp segments. A
maximum of 12 series are displayed. F.17
Small arrow buttons are displayed in the far left segment if more
than 12 series are loaded.
F.17
Navigating between You can move the input focus by one segment to the left or
series F.17 right. F.17
Press the left or right arrow key on your keyboard.
If the input focus was on the far left or far right segment, a hid-
den series will be moved into the visible area.
0.0

Shifting series by one You can move all series by one position to the left or right. F.17
segment F.17
Click one of the two arrow buttons in the far left segment.
Or F.17
Press the Ctrl + left arrow or Ctrl + right arrow key combi-
nation.
Showing the first series in You can shift the series in the stamp segments so that the first
the left stamp segment F.17 series is displayed in the far left segment. F.17
Press the Home key on your keyboard.
Showing the last series in You can shift the series in the stamp segments so that the last
the right stamp segment F.17 series is displayed in the far right segment. F.17
Press the End key on your keyboard.
0.0

Shifting series by 12 You can shift all series in blocks of 12 segments. This hides all
segments F.17 series previously visible. F.17
Press the Page or Page key on your keyboard.

F.17 F.17
Page
Scrolling images in a You can scroll images in a stamp segment just like in a large
stamp segment F.17 image segment. F.17
Press the respective key on the symbol keypad of your key-

board.
If you hold the key down, the images will be displayed one after
the other like a movie (pseudo movie). F.17
0.0

Changing the arrangement of series F.17
Suppose you are viewing the series in the stamp segments and
determine that some of the series have to be rescanned. You
can remove the existing series and sort the rescanned series
back into the stamp segments.
F.17
Removing series F.17 The series are removed from the stamp segments only. They
are still available in the Patient Browser. F.17
Select the required stamp segments.

Page F.322, Selecting images explicitly and implicitly
Selecting a stamp segment automatically selects the whole
series.
Select Remove Segment from the context menu.
The selected series will be removed. The adjacent series on the
right will be shifted to the left to fill the gap. F.17
Removing a segment
0.0

You can also remove the series while retaining the empty seg-
ments. F.17
Select Edit > Clear Document(s) from the main menu.
Inserting an empty You can insert an empty stamp segment for positioning series
stamp segment F.17 that are loaded using Drag & Drop. F.17
Select a segment. The empty segment will be inserted

before this segment.
Select Insert Segment from the context menu.
An empty segment is inserted. The series on the right will be
shifted by one position to the right. F.17
Inserting a segment
If you want to load multiple series requiring several empty seg-

ments, you may repeat this step as often as necessary. F.17
0.0

Loading series using You may load series from the program control, the Patient
Drag & Drop F.17 Browser, or the large image segments. F.17
Select the series to be loaded.

Drag & drop your selection into an empty stamp segment.
F.17
N OT E
If the target segment is not empty, the existing series will be
replaced by the first series loaded using Drag & Drop. F.17
0.0

Movie display F.17
During a scan or scan pause, you can start the movie display
and check the quality of the images being acquired, and gather
preliminary diagnostic information. F.17
A large image segment is used for movie display. The images

included in a movie are always from a single series. F.17
You can optimize the movie display according to your own

requirements by: F.17
Setting the speed

Selecting Loop or Yo-yo mode
Changing the order of the images
Jumping to the next group during movie display
Setting realtime mode
Changing the image display while movie display is paused
Unsatisfactory images (e.g. from breath-hold scans) can be

rescanned by dragging & dropping them into the program
control during the movie display.
If the series only consists of one image, it is not possible to
enter movie mode.
F.17
N OT E
The movie quality may be affected by processes running in
background. F.17
0.0

Groups within a series F.17
Series are grouped for movie display to provide a better over-

view. Movies display the images of one group. However, it is
possible to jump from group to group.
F.17
One series - one group F.17 A series is treated as one group if all images in the series differ
according to the same sorting criterion. F.17
Example: Single-slice multi-phase series (cardiac imaging)

Sort scheme SP >> TT >> TA
All images of the series have the same slice position. The trig-
ger time, however, is different.
F.17
One series - A series is broken down into multiple groups if the current dis-
multiple groups F.17 play order results in consecutive images with the same primary
sort criterion but a different secondary sort criterion. F.17
Example: Multi-slice multi-phase series (cardiac imaging)

Sort scheme SP >> TT >> TA
This series is divided into n groups because it contains images
of n different slice positions and different trigger times. F.17
The first group contains all images with slice position 1 and dif-
ferent trigger times. The second group contains all images with
slice position 2, etc. F.17
0.0

Starting the movie display F.17
You can start the movie display manually or automatically. F.17
Place the input focus on the segment you want to use for
movie display.
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie ON from the main menu.
Or F.17
Select Movie ON from the context menu.

Or F.17
Make sure the keyboard focus is on the image area and

press the spacebar.
Page F.319, Keyboard focus
Movie display starts. F.17
0.0

Starting movie display The protocol properties can be set to start the movie display
automatically F.17 automatically after scanning. This is the default setting for some
protocols.
Once such a protocol has been scanned, the images are dis-
played in movie display immediately following reconstruction. F.17
If the protocol generates more that one series, only the first
series is shown in movie display. You can display the other
series by selecting Scroll > Series Next. F.17
0.0

Controlling movie display F.17
You can start, pause, and stop the movie display via the key-
board, mouse, main menu or context menu. The Movie Control
dialog box provides additional features.
F.17
Movie display has three statuses: F.17
running
Movie display is active and running. You can advance to the
next group or series.
paused
Movie display is active, but paused.
You can view image text or scroll between images.
stopped
Movie display is not active. Series divided into groups are
ungrouped.
stopped
Es
ar
c
eb
ac
c
Sp
Es
Spacebar
running paused
Spacebar
0.0

With the keyboard You can use the spacebar or mouse to toggle between running
or mouse control F.17 and paused status. F.17
Make sure the keyboard focus is on the image area if you are
controlling movie display via the keyboard. F.17
Press the spacebar while movie display is running.

Or F.17
Left-click the movie segment.

Movie display pauses.
F.17
Press the spacebar while movie display is paused.

Or F.17
Left-click the movie segment while movie display is paused.

Movie display resumes.
F.17
You can switch from running or paused to stopped status

using the Esc key. F.17
Press the Esc key while movie display is running or paused.

Movie display stops. F.17
0.0

Menu control F.17 You can control movie display using the menu. F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie ON from the main menu or
Movie ON from the context menu while movie display is run-
ning or paused.
Movie display stops. The checkmark next to the menu item dis-
appears.
F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie Paused ON from the main
menu while movie display is running.
Movie display pauses. A checkmark appears next to the menu
item. F.17
0.0

Controlling movie display using the dialog box F.17
You can use the Movie Control dialog box to define the speed
and order of movie display. You can define the range displayed,
jump to the next group, and switch to realtime mode. F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Movie Control.

The Movie Control dialog box opens. F.17
(1) Pause movie display

(2) Loop mode
(3) Yo-yo mode
(4) Stop movie display
(5) Current sort order
(6) Open the Movie Properties dialog box
(7) Index of the current image/total number of images
(8) Realtime mode
(9) Skip images (realtime mode)
(10) LED display
0.0

(11) Display of the current speed in frames per second

(12) Change speed using the slider
(13) Close the Movie Control dialog box
(14) Enter speed numerically
(15) running/paused status: scroll forward by one group
stopped status: scroll forward by one series
(16) Scroll forward by one image, status automatically set to
paused
(17) Set "to" marker to limit range
(18) Reverse display order (in paused status only)
(19) Position of the current image in the series
(20) Set "from" marker to limit range (in paused status only)
(21) Scroll back by one image, status automatically set to
paused
(22) running/paused status: scroll back by one group
stopped status: scroll back by one series
The Movie Properties dialog box lets you specify that the
Movie Properties dialog box will be opened automatically
every time the movie display is started.
Page F.1732, Configuring movie display
0.0

Loop mode and In Loop mode, the images of a series are displayed in a loop.
Yo-yo mode F.17 After the last image of the series, the first image is displayed
again, etc. F.17
In Yo-yo mode, the direction of movie display is reversed after

the last image (starting with the second to last image, etc.).
F.17
Click this button to activate Loop mode.
Click this button to activate Yo-yo mode.
If you press the Loop key a second time and/or Yo-yo, the
movie display is paused while you do so.
If you start or pause movie display from stopped status,
Loop mode is activated in running or paused status.
0.0

Display order of The sort scheme determines the order of images within a
the images F.17 series. The sort scheme is defined in the Display Order (for
Movie) dialog box.
Page F.313, Defining the scroll order
F.17
The current sort scheme is displayed in the bottom left corner

of the Movie Control dialog box. F.17
You can reverse the image sequence in movie display. F.17
Click this button.
0.0

Speed of movie display F.17 You can set the number of images (frames) displayed per sec-
ond in movie display either numerically or using a slider. F.17
Enter an integer between 1 and 99 and press Enter.

Or F.17
Change the speed using the arrow keys.

Or F.17
Move the slider.
The leftmost position of the slider corresponds to a speed of

1 frame per second. The rightmost position of the slider corre-
sponds to a speed of 30 frames per second by default.
F.17
If you enter a higher speed in the input field, the value range
of the slider is adjusted accordingly.
When you move the slider, the value in the input field is
updated dynamically.
The position of the slider remains unchanged during movie
mode, i.e. the slider always indicates the speed set by the
user, not the actual speed.
The actual speed is displayed in the bottom right corner of the
Movie Control dialog box. F.17
0.0

Setting realtime mode F.17 Realtime mode can be used to display series of images with dif-
ferent time parameters. F.17
In realtime mode, images are played back in movie display

according to the time interval at which they were acquired. F.17
In realtime mode, the movie display speed is determined by this
time parameter.
F.17
Click this button.

Realtime mode is activated.
F.17
If the time interval between images is very short, you may find
that the realtime speed is greater than the maximum speed
technically possible. F.17
In this case, you can skip images in movie display. F.17
Click this button.
Deactivate this option if you want to view all available images in

movie display and are willing to accept a delay in realtime dis-
play.
F.17
If you manually alter the speed while realtime mode is active,

realtime mode will automatically stop.
0.0

LED display The color of the LED indicates the status of the movie display.F.17
F.17
F.17
Color Status
gray stopped or paused
green running, all images are displayed
yellow running, the Skip images option is activated,
at least two images are skipped
red running, the Skip images option is deactivated,
the real speed is lower than the set speed
F.17
Editing images during In movie display, you can window images, zoom in or out, and
movie display F.17 move image contents.
Page F.326, Enlarging, reducing, and panning reference
images F.17
Movie display is paused during image editing while pressing

and holding the left mouse button. Movie display resumes when
the mouse button is released. F.17
0.0

Navigating in movie
display F.17
The range display in the center of the Movie Control dialog box
shows the range of the current group. F.17
In paused status, the position of the slider indicates the position

of the current image within the group.
F.17
The position of the current image is also indicated on the status

bar of the Movie Control dialog box. F.17
The black bracket above the slider indicates the range of the
group currently shown in movie display. F.17
You can scroll to the first or last image of the group using the
slider. F.17
Drag the slider all the way to the left.

Movie display will pause and the first image of the group will be
displayed. F.17
Drag the slider all the way to the right.

Movie display will pause and the last image of the group will be
displayed.
F.17
You can drag the slider beyond the boundary of the group. If
you switch to running status afterwards, the movie range will
be set to the beginning and end of the group associated with
the current image index.
0.0

Scrolling between In the movie segment, you can scroll all images in a series
images F.17 across group boundaries. To do this, use the buttons in the
Movie Control dialog box, the keys on the symbol keypad, or
the dog ears.
Page F.319, Scrolling between images F.17
In running or paused status, you can use the buttons, menu

commands, or symbol keys to scroll.
In stopped status, you can only use the menu commands or
the keys on the symbol keypad.
The move display has the running or paused status. F.17
Click this button.

Movie display pauses. You will scroll forward by one image.
F.17
Click this button.

Movie display pauses. You will scroll back by one image. F.17
0.0

Scrolling between In running or paused status, you can use buttons, menu com-
groups F.17 mands or the symbol keys to scroll between groups. F.17
You may also move from the last group of series A to the first
group of series B. F.17
If the series in the movie segment contain only one group, you
will scroll between series.
Click this button.

Or F.17
Select Scroll > Series Next.

Or F.17
Press this symbol key.
You will scroll forward by one group.

F.17
Click this button.

Or F.17
Select Scroll > Series Previous.

Or F.17
Press this symbol key.
You will scroll back by one group. F.17
0.0

Unlike normal scrolling with Series Next/Previous, the image

of the previous group corresponding to the index is displayed
instead of the representative image from the next group.
F.17
If the following series cannot be grouped according to the

same criterion as the current series during scrolling, the
series will be skipped. This occurs, for instance, if the follow-
ing series is the localizer series.
If the series contain multiple groups, but movie display is in
stopped status, you always scroll between series since the
grouping is suspended.
0.0

Changing the movie After you have started the movie display, the "from" marker will
display range be at the beginning and the "to" marker at the end of the group
F.17 to be displayed. F.17
If a series contains only one group, the "from" marker will be at

the leftmost position and the "to" marker at the rightmost posi-
tion in the range display.
F.17
In running or paused status, you can assign the "from" or "to"

marker to the current position of the slider. F.17
Move the slider so that the first image of the new movie
sequence is displayed in the movie segment.
Click this button.
The "from" marker will be assigned to this position.
F.17
Move the slider so that the last image of the new movie
sequence is displayed in the movie segment.
Click this button.
The "to" marker will be assigned to this position. F.17
If you adjust the marker in running status, movie display will

immediately start within the new range.
F.17
If you place a marker at the same position twice, the "from"

marker is automatically placed at the beginning and the "to"
marker at the end of the group.
0.0

Configuring movie display F.17
You can configure movie display according to your individual

requirements. Four predefined parameter sets are available for
that purpose. You can modify these parameter sets or define
your own parameter settings.
F.17
Opening the Movie Movie display is configured in the Movie Properties dialog
Properties dialog box F.17 box. F.17
Select Scroll > Movie > Properties.

Or F.17
Click this button in the Movie Control dialog box.
0.0

The Movie Properties dialog box opens. The current movie

display settings and the parameter set last used are displayed.
F.17
(1) Setting realtime mode, Page F.1725

(2) Reverse display order
(3) Open Movie Control dialog box automatically on startup
(4) Close Movie Control dialog box automatically on stopping
(5) Select sort scheme
(6) Activate or deactivate image text during movie display,
Page F.1735
(7) Activate or deactivate reference lines during movie display,
Page F.1735
(8) Activate or deactivate GSP objects during movie display,
Page F.1735
(9) Select predefined parameter sets,
Page F.1736
(10) Select a timeframe for realtime mode
(11) Select a segment for movie display on automatic movie
start
(12) Open Image Order dialog box, define your own sort
scheme, Page F.314
All dialog elements have tool tips. Position and hold the
mouse pointer over a dialog element to display the corre-
sponding tool tip.
0.0

Setting realtime mode F.17
Enable the Realtime option.
If the current group is sorted according to trigger time (TT) and

you want movie display to run in Loop mode, you can also
select a time frame for the realtime display. F.17
In the list next to Realtime, select Continuous.

The image sequence will be repeated without delay. F.17
In the list next to Realtime, select R-R Interval.

A delay will be added between image sequences so that the
duration of an image sequence corresponds to the mean R-R
interval. F.17
0.0

Displaying additional In movie display, you can show or hide image text, reference
information F.17 lines, and GSP objects. F.17
For optimal movie quality, we recommend hiding this addi-

tional information.
When image text is activated, the following information is dis-

played in the movie segment: F.17
Image number, top left

Slice position SP, bottom right
Trigger time TT, bottom right
If the references lines are activated in the menu (View > Refer-
ence Lines ON) and in the Movie Properties dialog box, the
position of the current image in the movie segment will be indi-
cated by a reference line in the non-movie segments and con-
tinuously updated in running or paused status. F.17
0.0

If this option is activated, all GSP objects and all orientation aids
selected via the menu (reference lines, adjustment volume, coil
elements, etc.) will be displayed in the movie segment in run-
ning or paused status.
Page F.431, Displaying orientation aids
F.17
You can perform graphic slice positioning in the movie display.

The movie display is paused while you do so.
Displaying predefined The predefined parameter sets can be selected from the list
parameter sets F.17 under Store Set. F.17
These parameter sets can be modified, but not renamed. F.17
Select a parameter set.
The Movie Properties dialog box shows all the settings of this
parameter set.
F.17
Accept parameter set F.17 You check the parameter settings and apply them if they are
suitable for the current movie display. F.17
Click Apply.
The settings are now applied to the movie display. The Movie
Properties dialog box remains open. F.17
0.0

Changing a predefined You can change the parameters sets and store them perma-
parameter set F.17 nently so that they are available after you reboot the system. F.17
Select a parameter set from the list.
Change the settings in the Movie Properties dialog box.

Click Store.
The current settings in the Movie Properties dialog box are
assigned to the selected parameter set. The current movie dis-
play is not updated.
F.17
Applying temporary You can define the parameters and apply them to the current
settings F.17 movie display without assigning these settings to a parameter
set or saving them. F.17
Define the parameters in the Movie Properties dialog box.

Click Apply.
The current movie display is updated. The parameter set dis-

played in the Store Set list is not changed. F.17
0.0

Canceling the You can cancel the configuration and close the dialog box with-
configuration F.17 out applying the changes. F.17
Click Close.
Or F.17
Press the Esc key. F.17
Or F.17
Click the Close window icon.
0.0

CHAPTER
F.18 Breast Biopsy F.18
If a lesion is detected during mammography, an MR-guided

Breast Biopsy may be performed. F.18
Mark the lesion and reference position on the MR image. The

system calculates the biopsy needle paths at various angles.F.18
A Breast Biopsy examination may be performed only in con-
nection with the appropriate license.
0.0

Breast Biopsy Examination
Requirements F.18 The images have to meet the following prerequisites prior to
your performing a Breast Biopsy examination: F.18

patient.
The patient has to be in the "head first, prone" position.
The images have not been remapped for distortion correc-
tion.
The images are part of the same set of series and have been
acquired at the same table position.
The images have been acquired after the last table move-
ment.
A message box will be displayed if the images do not meet one
of the criteria above.
F.18
Images used to generate a Breast Biopsy exam cannot be

used afterward for repeated markings or calculations.
0.0

Examination Breast Biopsy
Calling up Breast Biopsy You start the Breast Biopsy examination from the Exam task
dialog box F.18 card. F.18
Load the required thorax images into the image area.

Select Image Tools > Breast Biopsy from the main menu.
The Breast Biopsy dialog box opens. F.18
(1) Switching area

(2) Data area
0.0

The Breast Biopsy dialog box is divided into two areas: F.18
Switching area
You'll edit the reference images, set markers, and calculate
the data for the biopsy.
Data area
The text fields are used to display the current patient data
(name, date of birth) and the data calculated on the basis of
the angulation used.
The functions for graphic slice positioning are not active while
the Breast Biopsy dialog box is open.
When you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, the system
checks the patient position. If another patient position than the
"head first, prone" position is used, a message box appears and
the examination is aborted. F.18
0.0

Minimizing the Breast The first time you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, it is posi-
Biopsy dialog box F.18 tioned in front of the parameter cards. You can move it to any
position on the screen. F.18
It is also possible to minimize the Breast Biopsy dialog box to

keep your screen uncluttered. F.18
If you switch back to the Exam task card from another task
card, the dialog box is restored to full size.
Switching to another If you switch to another task card (e.g. Viewer, 3D), the Breast
task card F.18 Biopsy dialog remains open in background. F.18
As soon as you select the Exam task card again, the Breast
Biopsy dialog box will be displayed again. Both the previous
position as well as the contents of the Breast Biopsy dialog
box remain the same. F.18
0.0

Closing Breast Biopsy F.18 After you have completed the biopsy examination, close the
Breast Biopsy dialog box. F.18

Or F.18
Press the Alt + F4 key combination or the Esc key.

Or F.18
Click the right button of the title bar.

The Breast Biopsy dialog box closes. F.18
0.0

Loading and selecting images F.18
After you have registered a patient and completed the first scan
(localizer), the reference images will be displayed in the image
area of the Exam task card.
F.18
Search for original images F.18
You are able to scroll images and series to search for images
suitable for reference and lesion markers.
F.18
Image-by-image scrolling F.18 You are able to scroll a series image-by-image as follows: F.18
Use the dog-ears in the top right-hand corner of the image

segments.
Page G.32, Scrolling
Or F.18
Click the Ima+ or Ima- buttons on the symbol keypad.

Or F.18
Select Scroll > Image Next or Scroll > Image Previous.
0.0

Scrolling series by series F.18 To display series in background in the image area, proceed as
follows: F.18
Click the Series+ or Series- buttons on the symbol keypad.

Or F.18
Select Scroll > Series next or Scroll > Series prev.
Parallel scrolling F.18 To compare images of two or three series, scroll in parallel
through images in these series. F.18
Explicitly select the image segments you want to scroll in

parallel.
Use the symbol keys or the menu commands to scroll
between images.
Selecting images F.18 The input focus and explicit image selection work as described
for the Viewing task card.
Page G.332, Selecting images F.18
0.0

Changing the image display F.18
Once you have selected images for the Breast Biopsy exami-
nation, you may optimize the image display. F.18
The following methods are available: F.18
Setting the brightness and contrast,

Page F.324, Changing window values
Zooming and reducing images as well as panning them,
Page F.326, Enlarging, reducing, and panning reference
images
Display pixel coordinates, measure distances and angles,
Page F.334, Pixel coordinates, distances, and angles
Flipping and rotating images
0.0

Flipping images Horizontal flipping swaps the top and bottom of the image. The
horizontally and axis of rotation is horizontal. F.18
vertically F.18
Vertical flipping swaps the left and right side of the image. The
axis of rotation is vertical.
F.18
Place the input focus on the image you want to flip.

To flip multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Flip Horizontally.

Or F.18
Select Image Tools > Flip Vertically.
Flipping horizontally
Flipping vertically
0.0

Rotating images You are able to rotate images clockwise about 90. F.18
about 90
Place the input focus on the image you want to rotate.
F.18
To rotate multiple images, select the images explicitly.
Select Image Tools > Rotate 90.
Rotating about 90
degrees
0.0

Setting markers to calculate the

biopsy channel F.18
The buttons in the Breast Biopsy dialog box are used to calcu-
late the path of the biopsy needle. F.18
F.18
(1) Activate/deactivate cross hairs

(2) Zoom/pan images
(3) Modify graphic
(4) Setting a reference marker
(5) Setting a lesion marker
(6) Image comment
(7) Calculate/save offset data
(8) Printing out a worksheet (anonymously, if necessary)
You are defining reference and lesion markers in the images.

The system calculates the starting position of the biopsy needle
as well as the biopsy channel based on these data. F.18
0.0

Setting a reference marker F.18
After you have adjusted the reference image to your require-

ments, set the reference marker at the predefined starting posi-
tion of the biopsy needle. F.18
Click the Cross hair button in the Breast Biopsy dialog box.
Click the position in the segment where you want to set the
reference marker.
The cross hair is displayed. F.18
Confirm the correct position of the cross hair with respect to the
reference marker. F.18
Click the Store Marker Position button in the Breast

Biopsy dialog box.
Predefined Display cross hair Reference marker

starting position
The reference marker is indicated by a green cross in the

image. The cross hair disappears. F.18
0.0

Position of the reference The system uses the position of the reference marker to calcu-
marker F.18 late the coordinates in the patient coordinate system and enters
them in the window next to the Store Marker Position button.
The coordinates are displayed in metric units. At the same time
a check mark appears next to the Store Marker Position but-
ton. The position of the reference marker is stored. F.18
F.18
0.0

Moving a reference You can move the stored reference marker to a new position.F.18
marker
Click the Cross hair button again.
F.18
Click another position in the reference image.

Click the Store Marker Position button to accept the posi-
tion of the reference marker.
The cross hair moves to the new position. F.18
Or F.18
Click the cross hair and drag it to a new position while keep-
ing the left mouse button pressed.
The new coordinates of the reference marker are shown in the
display window. The new position of the reference marker is
stored.
F.18
Zooming and panning a You may zoom or pan the image to determine the position of the
reference image F.18 reference marker.
F.18
Click the Zoom/Pan button in the Breast Biopsy dialog box.
0.0

Setting a lesion marker F.18
Define the position of the lesion marker to calculate the depth

of the puncture depth as well as the horizontal and vertical off-
set. F.18
Click the Cross hair button in the Breast Biopsy dialog box.
Click the location in the segment displaying a lesion.
The cross hair is displayed. F.18
Click the Store Lesion Position button in the Breast

Biopsy dialog box.
F.18
The lesion marker is indicated by a yellow cross in the image.

The cross hair disappears.
F.18
You may only set one lesion marker in a series.
0.0

Position of the lesion The patient coordinates appear in the display field next to the
marker F.18 Store Lesion Position button. F.18
As with the reference marker, you are able to move the lesion
marker and zoom or pan the reference image. F.18
You are also able to change the order in which you set the
markers.
0.0

Entering a lesion name F.18
When you open the Breast Biopsy dialog box, "Lesion 1" is
entered as the default name in the Image Comment display
field. F.18
The lesion name is used for generating a series name as well

as for image annotation. F.18
The text index increases in increments of 1 following each cal-

culation, e.g. "Lesion 2". F.18
The lesion name also appears on the printed worksheet.

F.18
Renaming the lesion F.18 You may change the lesion name to any name you wish. F.18
Highlight the text in the display field using the mouse.

Type the new name using the keyboard.
0.0

Calculating the biopsy channel F.18
After you have set the reference and lesion markers, you start
the calculation of the biopsy channel. F.18
Starting calculation F.18
Click the Calculate/Save button in the Breast Biopsy dialog

box.
The offset data will be calculated for the angles (0, 5, 10, 15,
30). The reference images including markers are stored in the
database. When the operation is complete, a checkmark will
appear next to the Calculate/Save button. F.18
The calculated offset data are displayed in the right half of the
Breast Biopsy dialog box. F.18
F.18
(1) Display of the calculation date

(2) Display of the patient's name
(3) Display of the date of birth
(4) Selection of the angle
(5) Display of the vertical offset of the target device
(6) Display of the horizontal offset of the target device
(7) Display of the puncture depth
(8) Name of the series
0.0

Displaying the One new series per angle is generated. The series name, e.g.
series name F.18 "Biopsy 15: Lesion 1" includes the following: F.18
"Biopsy" for the examination

"15" for the angle
"Lesion 1" content of the Image Comment text field
If a series with this name already exists (you can check it in the
Browser), a running number is appended to the series name,
e.g. "Biopsy 15: Lesion 1_1". The series name is also indicated
by an image comment in the stored images. F.18
F.18
0.0

Displaying a biopsy You can scroll the series by angles. F.18
channel F.18
Select an angle from the selection list.

The values for the horizontal and vertical offset and the punc-
ture depth are automatically displayed in the Breast Biopsy
dialog box for the selected angle. F.18
At the same time, the biopsy channel is displayed automatically

in the image segments. F.18
(1) Biopsy channel,

indicated by a blue line
0.0

The biopsy channel is displayed as a blue line, if F.18
the start position and

lesion
are in the same image plane.
F.18
The value in the Angle field is set to "0" upon opening the
Breast Biopsy dialog box.
Resetting offset data F.18 You can reset the calculated offset data. F.18
Click the Reset button.

The control elements and text fields will be reset to the values
upon opening the Breast Biopsy dialog box. F.18
All calculated data and positioned markers will be deleted. F.18
The stored series remain in the database. F.18
0.0

Creating the worksheet F.18
Once calculation of the offset data has been completed, you

can print the worksheet. You will need the printed worksheets
when performing a Breast Biopsy examination. F.18
You can only print the worksheet if you have the correct
access rights.
Page B.31, Information for Users
Printing a worksheet F.18 Before printing a worksheet, you can decide whether the work-
sheet will be printed with the complete shift data. As an alterna-
tive, you can keep the most important patient data anonymous
when printing; i.e. the Patient name, Date of birth, and Series
name are not printed.
F.18
Select the Anonymously check box for anonymized printing

of the shift data.
If you want to print the shift data with the complete patient
data, you can ignore this setting.
Click the Print button in the Breast Biopsy dialog box.

One worksheet is printed per angle (0, 5, 10, 15, 30). F.18
0.0

(1) Contains all calculated data that are displayed in the

Breast Biopsy window.
In an anonymized print-out, the Patient, Date of birth, and
Series name fields are empty.
(2) Enter the actual angle.
(3) Enter the type of needle.
(4) Enter the name of the examining physician.
(5) Enter the starting and ending position of the biopsy needle.
(6) Enter a delta value.
The delta value depends on the type of needle.
0.0

Once the worksheets have been printed, a check mark appears

next to the Print button. F.18
F.18
N OT E
To ensure that the printed worksheets required for the
biopsy examination are up to date, do not change the
position of the reference or lesion markers after calculation
of the offset data. F.18
F.18
Selecting the printer F.18 If you do not want to print your current worksheets on the
default printer, select another printer. F.18
You may select any printer installed on your system. F.18
Click the Select Printer... button.

The Select Printer dialog box opens. F.18
F.18
0.0

Select the desired printer from the selection list.

This selection list contains any printer connected to your sys-
tem.
F.18
Click the OK button in the Select Printer dialog box.

The selected printer becomes the default printer. It is used
unless you select another printer.
F.18
You can select the Windows default printer at any time. F.18
Click the Use Default Printer button in the Select Printer

dialog box.
You can undo your changes. F.18
Click the Cancel button in the Select Printer dialog box.

The changes made in the Select Printer dialog box are
ignored.
F.18
Completing a worksheet F.18 If no printer is connected to your system, you may fill out the
worksheet in the manual and use it for the biopsy examination.F.18
0.0

SIEMENS F.18 Breast Biopsy Worksheet
Patient: Date:
Date of Birth:
Comment:
F.18 F.18
Approach An- deg. Reference Position Lesion Position
F.18
Horizontal Move: mm mm mm
F.18 F.18
Vertical Move: mm mm mm
F.18 F.18
Depth: mm Delta Value: mm mm mm
Series Name:
Abs. Reference Position:
Abs. Lesion Position:
Real Approach:
Needle Type:
Performing Physician:
F.18 F.18
0.0

Performing a biopsy
examination F.18
You have saved the images with the reference and lesion mark-
ers and printed the worksheet. The values for the puncture
depth, horizontal and vertical move have been calculated by the
system. You can now manually configure the biopsy device
using the worksheet and begin the biopsy examination. F.18
After you have performed a biopsy examination, the refer-

ence images may no longer be used for marking or calcula-
tion.
Checking the marker position F.18
You have to ensure that the calculated output data are correct.
You may check the output data by running the open protocol
again.
Page F.637, Scanning an open protocol more than once F.18
0.0

Biopsy examination for multilesions F.18
If there are several lesions, calculate a biopsy channel for each

individual lesion. Biopsy examinations are always performed for
a single marked lesion. F.18
After you have completed the biopsy examination for a lesion,

you can repeat the scan from the open protocol. F.18
Select Queue > Scan Opened Protocol from the main

menu.
A copy of the open protocol is added to the queue above the
original protocol. The open protocol is assigned a new number.
The copied protocol is complete and will start automatically. You
may now set the markers for another lesion in the reference
images.
Page F.1812, Setting markers to calculate the biopsy chan-
nel F.18
This allows you to mark the individual lesions in the same

images.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Automatic Position
F.19 Suggestion F.19
Together with a standard brain atlas, AutoAlignTM enables pre-

cise orientation of measurement objects during head examina-
tions independent of the position of the head. F.19
The use of AutoAlign, requires a license. F.19
For automatic position correction, an AutoAlign head program

is available in the Siemens area of the Exam Explorer. You can
also adapt AutoAlign head programs and save them in your
user area. F.19
After a localizing scan has been performed with a standard

localizer, a second localizer, or special 3D Scout, is acquired.
The volume data obtained from this scan are matched against
the atlas with AutoAlign. This results in a matrix that describes
the offset, translation, and rotation of the measured brain rela-
tive to the atlas. F.19
This AutoAlign matrix (AAM) computed via AutoAlign is auto-

matically added to the slices, sats, etc. of the subsequent pro-
tocols.
F.19
Using statistical images AutoAlign allows you to plan slices for

certain diagnostic problems. This allows you to create a user-
defined scan program for any patient.
F.19
AutoAlign is a trademark of CorTechs. F.19
0.0

Automatic Position Suggestion Examination
Basics F.19
AutoAlign is based on an automatic segmentation algorithm

for gray scale values and CSF (cerebral spine fluid) in acquired
3D volume data sets and the use of an atlas.
F.19
AutoAlign Scout (AAS) F.19 The AutoAlign scout (AAS) is based on a special 3D flash
sequence. The AAS generates the necessary data sets for the
AutoAlign calculation. F.19
The AAS records two image data sets with different flip
angles: F.19
1. scan: 2 degrees
2. scan: 6 degrees
Atlas F.19 The delivery volume of a system with AutoAlign includes the
appropriate AutoAlign atlas. The atlas is based on a large num-
ber of head scans.
F.19
AutoAlign matrix (AAM) F.19 The translation and rotation, or AutoAlign matrix (AAM), are cal-
culated from the 3D volume sets generated with the AAS as a
function of the atlas of the patient's head. F.19
The AAM is applied to all graphical objects of the following pro-

tocols if there is a minimum fit between the patient data and the
atlas. F.19
0.0

Examination Automatic Position Suggestion
Requirements F.19
Individual anatomical differences may be necessary in applying

AutoAlign. AutoAlign head programs can be performed under
the following conditions: F.19
The minimum patient age is 17 years.

The patient can only be measured in the head first - supine
position. This entry has to be included in the patient registra-
tion data.
The patient cannot suffer from certain diseases, such as
Alzheimer, does not have a large tumor, nor has had major
brain surgery.
0.0

Display in the Program Control F.19
A dimmed button below the contrast agent syringe indicates

whether the system has an AutoAlign license.
F.19
AutoAlign activated F.19 F.19
After successful ASS scan, the button is active. It shows that

AutoAlign is activated. F.19
Until a scan has been successfully completed, the button

remains dimmed. F.19
AutoAlign remains active until a patient is newly registered.

The function is deactivated by clicking the softkey or selecting
the menu item Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign.
Page F.1911, Deactivating AutoAlign
AutoAlign Scout F.19 The AAS belonging to an AutoAlign scan program is marked
with an icon. F.19
The icon appears to the left of the name of the AAS.
F.19
A red cross is shown if it was not possible to successfully scan

the AAS. F.19
0.0

Examination with AutoAlign F.19
Load an AutoAlign program into the Program Control. F.19
The AutoAlignScout (AAS) measuring the images for comput-

ing the AAM is started automatically. The successfully calcu-
lated matrix is then applied to the graphical objects of the follow-
ing protocols. Adjusted in this manner, the protocols are now
executed.
After the AAS, the program automatically starts the measuring
of survey images via the localizer.
F.19
Measuring an AutoAlign Scout F.19
Loading a AutoAlign The AutoAlign license is available and you registered the
Head program F.19 patient. F.19
Transfer the AutoAlign program to the Program Control
F.19
0.0

When you insert an AAS in the job list, the patient's age is
checked automatically. A message informs you if the patient
is too young.
Page F.1913, Checking the patient's age
Acquiring an AutoAlign The AAS starts automatically. F.19
Scout
The message "Waiting for slice positioning before ending
F.19
AutoAlign scan" is shown on the status bar.

F.19
NOTE
For the Siemens AutoAlign program, the coils required are
stored for each program. Usually the body coil is used for
AAS. F.19
However, when, e.g. opening the AAS in the queue, the

adverse possibility exists that the head matrix coil selected
for a previous measurement will be transferred to the
current one. F.19
Check the coil allocated to AAS and, if necessary, select

the body coil on the parameter card System Coils
again.
Two image data sets are acquired with different flip angles.
They are not loaded into the large image segments after calcu-
lation. The system calculates the AAM from these data sets. F.19
0.0

Scanning a Standard The first survey starts automatically after measuring the AAS. F.19
localizer F.19
These reference images are loaded into the large image seg-
ments of the Exam task card once the localizer measurement
and image calculation have been completed. F.19
Three reference images are displayed: with sagittal, transverse,

and coronal orientation. F.19
0.0

Adjusting the following protocols F.19
After successfully scanning the AAS and calculating the AAM,

AutoAlign is activated.
F.19
AutoAlign active F.19
The AutoAlign button and the Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign

menu item are available again. F.19
The program control shows the series icon to the right of the
protocol name. F.19
F.19
During AAS scanning, a message appears if it is not possible

to calculate the AAM or to obtain the necessary fit.
Page F.1917, Canceling an AutoAlign scan
0.0

Applying positioning F.19 After the AAM has been successfully calculated, it is applied to
the graphical objects of the subsequent protocols in the job
list. F.19
You may be able to observe this: the graphical objects in the

GSP segments are rotated immediately after opening a proto-
col.
F.19

The protocol is closed and the scan is started with the AAM
applied.
F.19
NOTE
If you position the graphical objects of the next protocol
during AAS scanning, these objects will be rotated after the
AAM has been calculated. F.19
F.19
Not applying slice If you are not satisfied with the slice positioning corrected by the
positioning F.19 AAM, you can position the slices manually as usual.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices F.19
0.0

Closing the AutoAlign examination F.19
You can close the examination after determining that you do not
have to perform additional scans or repeat protocols. F.19
After you have performed the AutoAlign examination and recon-

structed the series, AutoAlign remains activated. F.19
Move the patient table out of the magnet and allow the
patient to leave.
Or F.19
Right-click the name of the patient in the program control

and select Close Patient from the context menu.
AutoAlign is deactivated and the program control is returned to
its original state. F.19
0.0

Deactivating AutoAlign F.19
After successfully scanning an AAS, it may be necessary to

deactivate AutoAlign. This may apply if, e.g., you are not satis-
fied with the results of the AAS scan and want to continue the
examination with manual slice positioning. Another case may
be the need for additional body scans after you complete the
head examination.
F.19
Manually deactivating
AutoAlign F.19
Click the AutoAlign button.

Or F.19
Select Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign from the main menu.

The following message appears: F.19
F.19
0.0

AutoAlign is deactivated. The AutoAlign button and the

Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign menu item are dimmed.
F.19
You can now perform additional patient examinations without

having to register them again. F.19
The protocols already acquired with AutoAlign are not

changed by deactivating AutoAlign.
F.19
New series block F.19 Each table movement deactivates AutoAlign, since the calcu-
lated AAM refers to a fixed table position. F.19
If the table moves or the light localizer is enabled, e.g., to initiate

repositioning, a new series block is started. F.19
You can see that AutoAlign has been deactivated because

both the button and Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign menu item
are dimmed. F.19
0.0

Checking the patient's age F.19
As soon as the AutoAlign program has been transferred to the

queue of the program control, the system checks the patient
data for meeting the conditions for AAS measurements: F.19
Patient age: younger than 17

Patient position: only head first - supine
Patient too young F.19
If the patient is younger than 17, the program control is blocked

and the following message appears. F.19
F.19

The window closes. F.19
To continue scanning for this patient, select a scan program

without AutoAlign. F.19
0.0

If you attempt to scan the AAS again, a message box appears

informing you how to proceed.
0.0

Making the program You can skip or delete the AAS. F.19
control ready to run

Click the Skip button.
again F.19
The AAS is skipped. The next protocol may now be started.

Automatic position suggestion is not used.
F.19
Select the AAS in the job list.

context menu.
Or F.19
Use the Del key on the keyboard.

Or F.19
Drag the AAS into the wastepaper basket.

The AAS is removed from the job list, and the program control
is ready to run again. F.19
0.0

Unsuitable patient positioning F.19
AutoAlign may be performed only when the head first -

supine positioning has been assigned during patient registra-
tion. F.19
If this is not the case, the program control is blocked for addi-
tional measurements. The following message appears: F.19

The window is closed. F.19
Change the patient positioning to head first - supine in the

patient data.
Page E.212, Entering examination data
Subsequently, the AutoAlign measurement may be started
again. F.19
0.0

Canceling an AutoAlign scan F.19
For an AutoAlign scan to run successfully, a given fit has to be

obtained to allow for correct application of the AAM to the pro-
tocols.
F.19
AAS not scanned F.19 If the AAS was not scanned, the message "Scanning of protocol
... has failed" is shown on the status bar. F.19
The AAS is marked as "canceled" by the lightning icon. The

series icon next to the protocol indicates that the image data
sets have not been calculated. F.19
F.19
0.0

Click OK.
The protocols of the job list continue to be executable. You may
continue scanning as usual. F.19
The AutoAlign button and the Queue > Deactivate AutoAlign

menu item are dimmed.
F.19
AAM not usable If the AAS was successfully scanned, without obtaining the
F.19 defined fit, you will see a line running through the icon.
F.19
Fit not achieved F.19 The following situations may make it impossible to obtain a
defined fit or to calculate the AAM. F.19
Pathological changes to the patient's brain.

Page F.193, Requirements
The head of the patient is offset by > 50 degrees and/or > 50
cm from the atlas.
0.0

Repeating the AutoAlign Scout F.19
In some exams, it may be necessary to repeat the AAS, for

example, because the patient moved.
F.19
Select the AAS from the job list.

Select Queue > Rerun from the main menu.
Or F.19
Select Rerun from the context menu.

The AAS is started again. F.19
A new AAM is calculated after the AAS scan. It replaces an

existing AAM. F.19
0.0

Inserting a new AAS F.19 If the patient moved his head after the AAS was scanned, a sec-
ond AAS can be inserted in the job list to correct the slice posi-
tion again.
F.19
Select an AAS on the program card or in the Exam Explorer

and insert it in the job list.
The new AAS will be started automatically and a new AAM will
be calculated. F.19
Inserting the AAS starts a new series block.
0.0

Editing an AutoAlign scan program F.19
You can modify the AutoAlign scan program in the job list as
usual.
Page F.639, Processing the job list while scans are being
performed F.19
F.19
Inserting programs and protocols F.19
You can transfer program steps or complete scan programs to

the job list even if they are for other body regions. F.19
If the protocol requires table movement, a new series block

begins and AutoAlign is deactivated.
Page F.1912, New series block F.19
If the protocols do not include table movement, they are exe-

cuted and the current AAM as calculated by the AAS is
applied. F.19
0.0

Setting copy references F.19
You can apply parameter settings of a protocol in the AutoAlign

scan program to another protocol by setting a copy reference.
The AAS can be a source protocol but not a target protocol.

F.19
N OT E
The AAM is applied to the target protocol only if the copy
reference contains slices. F.19
0.0

Creating a protocol from a series or image

(Phoenix) F.19
The Phoenix function enables you to reconstruct a protocol

from previously acquired images. F.19
It is easy to reconstruct scan protocols for a new examination

from images acquired in a previous exam. F.19
The two steps involved are: F.19
Transfer the AAS to the job list

Transfer the series or image to the job list
Inserting the AAS F.19 To run the reconstructed protocol the AAM has to be recalcu-
lated. F.19
Select an AAS on the program card or in the Exam Explorer

and insert it in the job list.
After the AAS has been successfully scanned, the AAM is cal-
culated. This new AAM is applied to the slices. F.19
0.0

Selecting a scanned series Select a series or image in the Patient Browser.

or image with AutoAlign F.19
A single image is sufficient for reconstruction. F.19
Press the mouse button and drag your selection into the job
list (drag & drop).
Or F.19
Select Append To Queue from the pop-up menu in a GSP

segment.
A protocol is generated from the series or image and contains
all measurement parameters used to acquire the image. After
you have run the protocol, the same slices are scanned as in
the previous examination.
F.19
F.19
NOTE
Phoenix is available for all MAGNETOM systems with
syngo MR 2002B. It works with all images that have been
generated with this or future software versions. F.19
Protocols of images or series that have been scanned with

a different software version or that are from a different
MAGNETOM, must be converted.
Page F.1925, Reconstructed protocol by conversion F.19
0.0

Reconstructed protocol by You can attempt to convert images or series that were not
conversion F.19 acquired on a identical system configuration. F.19
As a prerequisite, the sequence technique for the protocol is

available and licensed for your MAGNETOM system.
F.19
Select a series or image in the Patient Browser.

Press and hold the Shift key, press and hold the left mouse
button and drag the series or image into the job list (drag &
drop).
A message box informs you if the conversion was not success-
ful. F.19
0.0

Creating new AutoAlign programs F.19
There are various ways of creating a new AutoAlign head pro-

gram and saving it as a new AutoAlign program in the user area
of the Exam Explorer.
F.19
Creating your own AutoAlign head program in

the Exam Explorer F.19
You can create your own AutoAlign head program in the usual
way in the Exam Explorer. F.19
Insert an AAS into any head scan program or create a head

program from selected protocols and add an AAS to it.
Page F.1638, Creating a new program F.19
0.0

Exporting executed programs to the Exam

Explorer F.19
After performing an AutoAlign exam, you can save a changed

scan program as a new program and use it for subsequent
examinations. F.19
All patient-specific AutoAlign data are removed so that the pro-

gram can be used just like any other scan program.
F.19

control.
As [Customer Tree] dialog box. F.19
Assign your modified scan program to an examination region as

well as an examination and enter a name for the scan program.
0.0

Planning with atlas images F.19
AutoAlign allows you to plan slices on statistical images for

certain diagnostic problems. As a result, you are able to create
a user-defined scan program. F.19
This slice positioning using statistical images is not performed

for a certain patient but once. You can examine any number of
patients with AutoAlign.
F.19
Registering a planning To plan an AutoAlign program, a special planning patient is

patient F.19 available in the Patient Browser. F.19
Register the AutoAlign patient.

Select patient position Head first - supine.
Click OK.
The window closes. F.19
0.0

Program control in The program control indicates planning mode instead of a

planning mode F.19 patient's name. The status bar indicates that scans are not pos-
sible. F.19
F.19
Loading atlas images in The images for planning are automatically loaded into the
GSP F.19 images segments of the Exam task card.
The program control is blocked for scans but protocol editing is
possible without restriction. F.19
0.0

Adjusting AutoAlign Load, for example, a head program into the job list.
protocols
Now open the protocols and position the slices on the atlas
F.19
images.
The changes are applied to the opened protocols.
F.19
Saving new protocols F.19 After you have positioned the graphical objects, you can save
the edited protocols in the Exam Explorer.
Page F.1927, Exporting executed programs to the Exam
Explorer
Page F.666, Saving a job list as a new program
F.19
Quitting planning Register a real patient.

mode F.19
Or F.19

Or F.19
Right-click the name of the patient in the program control

and select Close Patient from the context menu.
0.0

CHAPTER
F.20 Quality Measurement F.20
You can perform quality checking measurements for each RF

coil. For this purpose, use the measurement phantom and the
quality program at the MR console. F.20
The quality measurement checks the signal-to-noise ratio of the

coils. In addition, you are able to determine the signal uniformity
for the body coil as well as test the phantom image for arti-
facts. F.20
0.0

Quality Measurement Examination
Performing Quality Measurements F.20
The preparation of quality measurements is performed as

described in the "quality assurance" supplement. F.20
Select the Options > Service > Customer QA.. menu item
under syngo MR at the MR console.
The Quality Assurance dialog box opens. F.20
(1) List of configured coils

(2) Available quality measurements
(3) Status of quality measurement
0.0

Examination Quality Measurement
Select the correct coil from the list.
This list shows all coils configured by Siemens Service.
Configuring the quality

measurement F.20
Click the Coil Check checkbox if you want to check the sig-
nal-to-noise ratio and signal uniformity.
Click the Calc Artefacts checkbox if you would like to test

the body coil for artifacts.
Starting Quality
measurement F.20
Click Go.
A help window is displayed that describes the position of the

phantom holder and phantoms for the selected coil. F.20
Follow all positioning instructions.

Connect the coil to the MR system.
The quality measurement can be aborted at this point by

clicking Cancel.
0.0


The help window closes, and the quality measurement starts. F.20
Information regarding the progress of the measurement is dis-
played in the yellow fields next to Coil Check and Calc Arte-
facts. F.20
F.20
Message Explanation
To do Measurement not yet performed
Running Measurement is in progress
Done Measurement finished
Parameters correspond to specifications
NotOK Calculated parameter does not correspond to
specifications
Error Measurement cannot be performed
0.0

Examination Quality Measurement
You can stop a quality measurement in progress. F.20
Click Abort.
If the message Error or NotOK appears, repeat the quality

measurement. F.20
Optimize the position of the phantom.

Optimize marking with the laser light localizer.
Repeat the quality measurement.
If the results of the quality measurement are still unsatisfac-

tory, contact Siemens Service.
End Quality Click the Exit button.

measurement F.20
The Quality Assurance dialog window closes. F.20
0.0

0.0

PART
G Viewing G.0
G.1 Introduction
Calling up the Viewing task card .................................... G.12
The image area .............................................................. G.14
The control area ............................................................. G.17
G.2 Loading and Displaying Images

Transferring images with the Patient Browser ............... G.22
Creating a patient folder ............................................ G.23
Creating a group folder ............................................ G.210
Loading images automatically ...................................... G.211
Displaying images and series ...................................... G.212
Normal mode or study comparison mode ................ G.214
Image-stripe display or stack display ....................... G.216
Division of the image area ....................................... G.220
Showing and hiding image text ................................ G.225
The scale bar ........................................................... G.227
G.3 Scrolling and Selecting Images

Scrolling ......................................................................... G.32
Scrolling image by image .......................................... G.34
Scrolling page by page .............................................. G.37
Scrolling from series to series ................................. G.312
Scrolling from study to study ................................... G.314
Scrolling to the next patient ..................................... G.317
Animated images (Movie) ............................................ G.318
Playing back the movie interactively ........................ G.320
Playing back the movie automatically ...................... G.322
Playback of multiple movies .................................... G.328
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G1
Contents Viewing
Selecting images ......................................................... G.332

Working in the input focus ....................................... G.333
Selecting images explicitly ...................................... G.337
Direct image processing.......................................... G.344
G.4 Processing Images

Windowing images ........................................................ G.42
Setting the scope ...................................................... G.44
Automatic windowing ................................................ G.49
Assigning predefined window settings .................... G.411
Windowing with the mouse ..................................... G.412
Windowing with the keyboard ................................. G.413
Restoring and saving window values ...................... G.414
Zooming and panning images ..................................... G.415
Displaying enlarged/reduced images ...................... G.415
Panning images ...................................................... G.423
Enlarging the image section .................................... G.427
Rotating, flipping and inverting .................................... G.428
Rotating images (Rotate) ........................................ G.429
Flipping images (Flip) .............................................. G.432
Inverting images (Invert) ......................................... G.434
Saving your changes............................................... G.435
G.5 2D Evaluation
Evaluating regions ......................................................... G.54
Rectangular and circular ROIs .................................. G.54
Drawing freehand ROIs............................................. G.57
Evaluating ROIs ...................................................... G.513
Calculating a histogram........................................... G.516
0.0
G2 Operator Manual
Viewing Contents
Measuring distances and angles ................................. G.517

Drawing a distance line, measuring the
distance ................................................................... G.518
Drawing a freehand line, measuring a distance ...... G.522
Calculating a profile ................................................. G.526
Measuring an angle ................................................. G.527
Measuring pixels with the crosshair ......................... G.533
Evaluating pixels, the pixel lens ................................... G.536
Using the pixel lens ................................................. G.538
Setting a shutter ........................................................... G.545
Working with grids ........................................................ G.548
Text in images .............................................................. G.551
Entering comment texts ........................................... G.551
Editing image comments ......................................... G.554
Editing graphics and image text ................................... G.555
G.6 Position Display

Basics ............................................................................ G.62
Defining data and reference images .............................. G.64
Starting calculation ......................................................... G.66
The new position display series ..................................... G.68
Display and labeling of cut lines ..................................... G.69
Display rules .............................................................. G.69
Labeling rules .......................................................... G.610
Examples for calculating the position display .............. G.612
Configuring the position display ................................... G.614
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G3
Contents Viewing
G.7 Saving and Documenting Images

Saving images ............................................................... G.72
Saving window values ............................................... G.77
Exporting, passing on, or filming images ....................... G.78
Exporting images ...................................................... G.78
Sending data via the network .................................. G.710
Exporting images to the file system ........................ G.712
Filming/printing images ........................................... G.713
Transferring images to 3D ........................................... G.716
Transferring images to Windows applications ............. G.717
Closing images, series, studies, and patients ............. G.718
G.8 Configuring the Viewing Task Card

Displaying evaluation results ......................................... G.82
Closing of series/studies in the Viewing task card ........ G.85
Organ- and user-specific window values ....................... G.87
0.0
G4 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
G.1 Introduction G.1
On the Viewing task card, you can view the results of an exam-
ination and evaluate it or prepare it for diagnostics. G.1
You can also use the Viewing task card to compare image
material of different examinations and, depending of configura-
tion, of different patients.
G.1
Loading and displaying You can first load the images using the Patient Browser or from
images G.1 the 3D task card into the Viewing task card. Here you can
select one of various ways of arranging the image material and
displaying it in the clearest way for your diagnostic problem.
G.1
Processing and evaluating On the Viewing task card, you can then process and evaluate
images G.1 the images: G.1
You can change window values, enlarge, pan, rotate, and flip
images.
You can highlight regions of interest (ROIs) using drawing
tools (circles, rectangles, lines), provide them with comment
texts, and evaluate them statistically.
You can display measured values for pixel points or ranges
and measure distances and angles on the images.
Storing, filming and You can then save the images you have processed and evalu-
transferring images G.1 ated, you can print them or expose them on film or send them
to other locations in your hospital. G.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.11

Introduction Viewing
Calling up the Viewing task card G.1
G.1 As soon as you have loaded images into the Viewing task card,
the task card moves into the foreground. But you can also
switch to other applications at any time and resume image pro-
cessing on the Viewing task card later.
G.1
If the Viewing task card is currently not in the foreground,

click on the tab on the right-hand edge of the screen to acti-
vate the card.
The Viewing task card is divided into four main areas: G.1
0.0
G.12 Operator Manual

Viewing Introduction
(4)
(3)
(1) (2)
(1) Image area

(2) Control area
(3) Status bar for system messages
(4) Menu bar with specific entries for viewing and processing
images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.13

The image area G.1
In the image area, the images that you have loaded into the
Viewing task card are displayed. Depending on the division of
the screen and the number of images loaded, you can only see
some of the images. The remaining images are in the back-
ground.
G.1
Layout of the image area G.1 The image area is subdivided into segments. One image is dis-
played in each segment. G.1
Depending on whether you want to see an overview of the

loaded images, or whether you require a display which is suit-
able for reporting, you can choose between different layouts: G.1
In a small format layout, several images are displayed at
once.
In a large format layout, you can only see a few images on
the screen, but these images are displayed large enough for
you to see details.
Small format layout Large format layouts
0.0

Image, text and graphic In the image area, medical images are displayed. These may
objects G.1 also contain text information that is stored in the system about
the patient and the study. G.1
The images can also be provided with graphics (ROIs, mea-

surements etc.) and text comments as part of processing in the
Viewing task card.
G.1
Medical image without text and Medical image with study data Medical image with text and
graphic elements displayed graphic elements
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.15

Image orientation G.1 On each image, you can see orientation labels displayed at the
edge of the image. They always show you the current image ori-
entation, i.e. after rotation or mirroring, you can see immedi-
ately which side of the patient corresponds to which side of the
image. G.1
The letters have the following meanings: G.1
L stands for left

R stands for right
A stands for anterior
P stands for posterior
H stands for head
F stands for feet
For images that are not displayed in an anatomical standard
view (e.g. oblique cuts), the orientation labels consist of two
or three letters.
Page H.32, The patient coordinate system
0.0

The control area G.1
In the control area, you will find all the tools you need to select
image material, arrange the screen display and process
images. G.1
Here you can also control data exchange with other parts of the
program and call up other applications. G.1
You can call up these functions easily using buttons and work
much faster than via the menu bar. G.1
Patient information G.1
In the upper part of the control area, you can see the names of
the patients whose images are currently loaded in the Viewing
task card. Up to three patients (depending on the system con-
figuration) can be loaded into the Viewing task card at one
time.
Here you can select the image data of a patient you want to pro-
cess next. G.1
The open patient folder shows you whose images are currently
visible in the image area. G.1
If you use the option for comparing examination data of differ-

ent patients, this group folder is labeled with the names of the
loaded patients (e.g. "Meier, Neumann" if the group folder
contains the data of two patients, or "Meier, Neumann..." if it
contains the data of three or more patients).
For longer names only the first part is displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.17

Subtask cards G.1 On the subtask cards, you can see the buttons which you use
to call up the processing tools, define display modes, transfer
image data and switch to other applications.
G.1
The stack of cards in the center of the control area contains the
Tools, Image and View subtask cards. G.1
The left-hand card of the stack is called Tools and contains

buttons for image evaluation and commenting.
On the center card, Image, you will find buttons for image
processing.
The right-hand card, View, contains buttons for setting the
layout.
On the Patient subtask card in the lower part of the control

area, you will find buttons with which you can film/print
images, for example after processing, or send images to
other work stations for reporting.
Here you can also call up Patient Registration or the Patient
Browser directly.
In the Evaluation subtask you will find the tool buttons for
evaluating your examination data.
0.0

CHAPTER Loading and Displaying
G.2 Images G.2
In the Viewing task card, you can view and process examina-
tion images that are stored in the local database of your system,
an archive medium or a network node. G.2
In the Patient Browser window, you have access to this data.

You can search for patients, studies, series or individual images
and load them onto the Viewing task card. G.2
You can also transfer images and series from the Exam task
card to the Viewing task card immediately after an examina-
tion. G.2
Moreover, you can view and process the images that you have
generated in the 3D task card and transferred to the Viewing
task card.
Page H.133, Transferring images to the Viewing task cardG.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.21

Loading and Displaying Images Viewing
Transferring images with the

Patient Browser G.2
You can search for image data that you have stored in the local
database or in the archive using the Patient Browser and then
load it onto the Viewing task card. G.2
As soon as you load image material you decide whether you

want to view or evaluate the images or series of one patient, or
whether you want to compare the image material of different
patients. You transfer a patient to a patient folder. If you want to
compare the examination results of different patients you create
a group folder.
G.2
You cannot load raw data, patients with unreconstructed raw

data and reports into the Viewing task card. You will first have
to reconstruct images from these raw data on a suitable post-
processing (e.g. spectroscopy).
With realtime scans and scans with concatenations, you

might find that some images have already been recon-
structed and displayed in the Patient Browser before the pro-
tocol has finished running. It is not yet possible to load these
images onto the Viewing task card. That will only be possible
after completion of scanning.
0.0

Viewing Loading and Displaying Images
Creating a patient folder G.2
If you want to view and evaluate the images of a patient, transfer

them to the patient folder on the Viewing task card.
G.2
Place the Viewing task card into the foreground by clicking

on the tab.
The task card is still empty at this point. G.2
Call up the Patient Browser (Patient > Browser...).

Search for the required patient(s), study(s), series or one or
more images in the navigation or content area.
Double-click on the entry or entries that you were looking for
and they will be loaded into the Viewing task card.
Or G.2
G.2 Select the entries and call up Patient > Load to Viewing, or
click on the Load to Viewing button on the toolbar.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.23

Or G.2
Drag your selection onto the Viewing task card with the
mouse (drag & drop).
0.0

Before you load the image data of a patient with drag & drop,
you must first open a new (empty) patient folder. The images
of any patient folder already open are otherwise removed
from the Viewing card if this folder is not in Multi View Mode.
If you drag & drop images into a folder (Multi View Mode) they
are added to the existing ones.
Page G.210, Load the folder
images from the Patient Browser onto the corresponding
tab. The task card moves into the foreground and the images
are loaded into the image area.
Close after loading G.2 The Patient Browser will be closed if the Closed after Load-
ing option has been selected.
Page D.36, Closed after Loading G.2
The Patient Browser remains open when you load images

by drag & drop.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.25

Stopping loading G.2 Loading a large series with many images can take a long time.
You can then see a progress indicator showing you how far the
loading progress has progressed. G.2
You can stop loading. G.2
G.2 Click on the Cancel button.

Images that have already been loaded will be displayed in the
Viewing application card.
The images of the new patient are displayed in the Viewing
task card grouped by examinations and series. G.2
0.0

Loading multiframe When you load multiframe images each multiframe is treated as
images G.2 a series. If you load a series consisting of several multiframe
images and normal images, each multiframe image and each
normal image will be loaded as a separate series.
G.2
Loading color images G.2 You can also load color images into the Viewing task card (True
Color and Pseudo Color). If the images cannot be displayed,
you obtain an error message. G.2
Please contact your system administrator.
Loading images of another Before you start evaluating the first loaded images, you can first
patient (configuration transfer all the examinations and patients that you want to view
dependent) G.2 and edit in a single session into the Viewing task card. G.2
Click on a closed patient folder in the upper control area of

the Viewing task card to open it.
Select the images of another patient from the Patient
Browser and pull them onto the Viewing task card
(drag & drop).
The new images are transferred to the opened folder. The
patient name appears next to the open folder. G.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.27

No more than three In the Viewing task card, you can manage up to three patients
patients in the Viewing (configurable). If you load a fourth patient, the folder of the
task card G.2 patient you opened first will be closed again. If you want to pro-
cess the images of this patient again, you need to reload the
images. G.2
The two other patients remain in the Viewing task card, but
their images will not be displayed. In the image area, you will be
able to see the images of the patient you have just loaded.
G.2
Last Patient A Patient D

session: 10:05
Load
Patient B patient D Patient B
10:20
Patient C Patient C
10:50
0.0

Loading additional images/ You can add more images, series, and examinations of the
series G.2 same patient to a patient folder at any time. G.2
In the Viewing task card, open the patient folder in which you
want to load additional image material.
Open the Patient Browser and select additional image
material of the patient already loaded.
G.2 Transfer those images with a double-click or with Patient >
Load to Viewing, or click on the Load to Viewing button in
the toolbar or load them by drag & drop.
The images are distributed to the patient folders in question by

the program and appended to the image material contained in
them (studies to studies, series to series and images to
images). G.2
Images of series or studies that are already in the Viewing

card are not loaded a second time. Instead, you receive the
message: Already loaded images skipped.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.29

Creating a group folder G.2
If you want to compare the results of different patients in the

Viewing task card, first create a group folder. G.2
The name of this group folder consists of the name of the

patient contained in it (Meier, Neumann, ...).
G.2
Load the folder G.2 Open the Patient Browser.

There, select all the patients, examinations, and series that
you want to compare in the Viewing task card.
Transfer that data by drag & drop to the Viewing card.
Or G.2
G.2 Transfer those images by double-click, or with Patient >

Load to Viewing, or click on the Load to Viewing button in
the toolbar.
The program automatically creates a group folder and switches

to multi view mode so that different studies can be compared.G.2
You can also load several patient data into an existing patient
folder. G.2
Switch the folder to Multi View mode.

Load additional patient data by drag & drop.
These patient data are added to the existing data and the exist-
ing folder now turns into a group folder. G.2
0.0

Loading images automatically G.2
On the Exam task card you can specify that the images are to
be automatically loaded into the Viewing task card after scan-
ning and reconstruction. G.2
To do that, click on the option Load images to Viewer on the

Auto load card in dialog box Protocol step properties.
Page F.1211, Loading images into the Viewing card
G.2
NOTE
When you select the option Load images to Viewer, the
images that you have just scanned are not automatically
displayed in the Viewer. Instead, you will see the previous
series in the patient folder that is currently open. G.2
Scroll to the next series to view the images that you have
just scanned.
Page G.312, Scrolling from series to series
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.211

Displaying images and series G.2
After you have loaded images into the Viewing task card, you
can choose between different views. G.2
In this way, you can arrange the display of the image material in
the way which is most helpful for your diagnostic problem.
G.2
Order of loaded images G.2 The order of the loaded images depends on whether you have
loaded the images via the Patient Browser or automatically
from the Exam task card. G.2
The order of the images loaded via the Patient Browser is

determined by the sorting criterion.
The order of the images loaded automatically from the Exam
task card is determined by the order of image reconstruction.
0.0

Changing the sequence of You can change the sequence of the images. G.2
images on the Viewing

Select Patient > Close Patient.
task card G.2
The images of the patient are removed from the Viewing sub-
task card. G.2
Change the sorting of the images in the Patient Browser.

Load the images onto the Viewing task card again.
The images are displayed in a new sort order.
Page O.323, Changing the sequence of images on the Film-
ing task card G.2
0.0

Normal mode or study comparison mode G.2
If you have loaded several examinations of a patient in the

Viewing task card, the images of those studies and series are
first displayed one after the other, starting with the images of the
first loaded study. If you want to view the images of further
examinations, you must page to them.
Page G.32, Scrolling G.2
If you want to compare the results of the various examinations

you have loaded directly, you can switch from normal view
mode to study comparison mode. G.2
G.2 Call up View > Multi View to activate study comparison

mode.
In this view, the screen is subdivided into areas in which the
results of different examinations are displayed one below the
other. G.2
0.0

Image area Background
S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S1A4 S3B2 S3B3 S3C1 S3C2
S1A5 S1B1 S1B2 S2A1 S4A1 S4A2 S4A3 S4B1
S2A2 S2B1 S2B2 S2B3 S4B2 S4B3 S4B4 S4C1
S3A1 S3A2 S3A3 S3B1 S4C2 S4C3 S4C4 S4C5
View > Multi View
Study 1 S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S1A4 S1A4 S1B1 S1B2
Study 2 S2A1 S2A2 S2B1 S2B2 S2B3
Study 3 S3A1 S3A2 S3A3 S3B1 S3B2 S3B3 S3C1 S3C2
Study 4 S4A1 S4A2 S4A3 S4B1 S4B2 S4B3 S4B4 S4C1 ...
Deselect the option View > Multi View, or click on the button
again to return to normal mode.
If you created a group folder when you loaded your images,

i.e. loaded the examinations of several patients in a folder,
study comparison mode is already activated. In that case, you
cannot switch to normal mode.
0.0

Image-stripe display or stack display G.2
Medical images are always displayed in the image area of the

Viewing task card grouped by studies or series. G.2
Depending on whether you want to view or evaluate individual

images of a series or whether you want to compare series with
each other, you can select either image-stripe display or stack
display. G.2
You can switch from one view to another.

G.2
NOTE
The stack can be displayed in formats
1:1, 2:1, 4:1, 9:1, and 16:1. G.2
Image-stripe display G.2 Select image-stripe display to view the loaded series of a study
one after the other image by image. G.2
Call up View > Stripe to activate this display mode.

Or G.2
G.2 Click on the Stripe button on the View subtask card.
0.0

G.2 In normal mode (View; Multiview not selected) you can now
see the images of the first loaded series displayed in the image
A1
area from top left to bottom right.
G.2
A4
If more than one series of a patient is loaded, you can see the
first images of series A. To view the images of the other series,
you must first scroll to them. G.2
A1 A2 A5 A6 B3 C1 C4 C5
A3 A4 B1 B2 C2 C3 C6
In study comparison mode (Multi View) you see the images

of the examination first loaded in the first row, starting with the
first image of the first series. In the second row, you see the
images of the second examination etc. G.2
All the images and series of an examination that can no longer

be displayed from left to right in the image area, are placed in
the background. To display those images, you must page to
them. G.2
Study 1 S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S1A4 S1B1 S1B2 S1B3 S1B4
Study 2 S2A1 S2A2 S2A3 S2B1 S2B2 S2B3 S2B4
0.0

Stack display G.2 If you want to compare the images of various series of one
study, you best select stack display. G.2
Call up View > Stack to activate this display mode.

Or G.2
G.2 Click on the Stack button on the View subtask card.
G.2 All images of a series are now stored in a stack one on top of
the other. You can see the first image of each series. G.2
If more than one series of a patient is loaded in normal mode,

the images of these series are arranged in stacks from top left
to bottom right. Each stack has dog ears for scrolling. G.2
Click on the top or bottom (inner or outer triangle) of a dog

ear to display the previous or next image of the stack.
This way you can compare any image of one series with any
image of another loaded series. G.2
The color of the dog ears tells you if you are at the beginning,
inside, or at the end of the series: G.2
(1) Beginning - both corners are dark gray

(2) Inside - the lower corner is light gray
(3) End - both corners are light gray
0.0

G.2
Image area Image area
Scrolling through
A1 B1 series B and C A1 B3
C1 C6
View when first called up Possible display for com-

parison purposes
In study comparison mode (Multi View), the loaded series of

the various examinations are also stored in stacks. Here again,
you can scroll through the series with the dog ears and com-
pare different images with each other. G.2
Scroll through examination 1,

Study 1 S1A1 S1B1 series B S1A1 S1B3
Scroll through examination 2,

Study 2 S2A1 S2A4
series A
0.0

Division of the image area G.2
With the division of the image area, you define the number and
size of the segments in the image area. G.2
Switch to a large format display with just a few images on the

screen if you want to see diagnostic details. Select a small for-
mat display to obtain an overview.
G.2
G.2 Select a layout in the View menu.

The current layout is now marked with a checkmark.
G.2
Or
G.2
Select a layout with the buttons on the View subtask card.
0.0

When you select a new layout, the division of the image area is
changed, but the sequence of the images displayed remains
the same. G.2
If you selected images before you selected a new layout, you

will see the loaded images in the new view starting with the first
selected image.
Page G.332, Selecting images G.2
In study comparison mode different layouts are used.The

non-comparison layouts are dimmed.
Layout change for

image-stripe display G.2
A1 A2 A3
A1 A2
A4 A5 A6
B1 B2 B3 A3 A4
Layout change in normal mode without explicitly selected image

(with input focus)
A1 A2 A3
A3 A4
A4 A5 A6
B1 B2 B3 A5 A6
Layout change in normal mode with explicitly selected image

Last selection A3 (no input focus)
0.0

Study 1 S1A1 S1A2 S1A3

Study 1 S1A2 S1A3
Study 3 S3A1 S3A2 S3B1 Study 2 S2A1 S2A2
Layout change in study comparison mode without explicitly selected image

(with input focus)

Study 1 S1A3 S1A4
Study 3 S3A1 S3A2 S3B1 Study 2 S2A2 S2A3
Layout change in study comparison mode after explicit selection of images

(without input focus)
0.0

Layout change for stack

display G.2 A1 B1 C1 D1
A1 B1
E1 F1 G1
C1 D1
Layout change in normal mode without explicitly selected image
C1 D1 E1 F1
A1 B1
G1
C1 D1
Layout change in normal mode with explicitly selected image (no input focus)
0.0

Study 1 S1A1 S1B1S1C1S1D1
Study 1 S1A1 S1B1 Study 2 S2A1 S2B1 S2C1
Study 3 S3A1 S3B1 S3C1 S3D1
Study 2 S2A1 S2B1 Study 4 S4A1 S4B1
Layout change in study comparison mode with input focus
Study 1 S1A1 S1B1S1C1 S1D1
Study 1 S1A1 S1B1 Study 2 S2B1 S2C1 S2D1
Study 3 S3A1 S3B1 S3C1S3D1
Study 2 S2A1 S2B1 Study 4 S4A1 S4B1
Layout change in study comparison mode with explicitly selected series
0.0

Showing and hiding image text G.2
Patient and study-specific information and image settings can

also be displayed on the images making it easier to identify
each image. The image text can also be filmed/printed so that
the information can be used for documentation.
G.2
Text blocks G.2 The information displayed is arranged in blocks around the
edge of the image according to its content. G.2
(1) (2) (3)
(2)
(7)
(4) (6)
(5)
(1) Patient data and zoom factor

(2) Orientation labels
Page G.16, Image orientation
(3) Hospital/system information
(4) Acquisition-specific settings such as gantry tilt
(5) Image comment
(6) Window values and (for 3D images) orientation cube
(7) Scale bar (CT, MR images only)
0.0

Hiding image text G.2 Especially with a small division layout, the images can become
cluttered by image text. You can then decide whether you want
to have the image text shown in the image or not. G.2
You can only hide the orientation labels together with the
patient's name.
Call up View > All Text in the main menu if you want to dis-
play all image texts.
Or G.2
Select View > No Text to hide all image texts, the scale bar
and the orientation marks.
Or G.2
Call up View > Customized Text if you only want to display

the most important image information.
Using the Image Text Editor on the configuration platform you
can select which text information is to be displayed with the
Customized text option.
Page A.37, Configuring image text G.2
0.0

The scale bar G.2
A scale bar is displayed along the right-hand edge of each seg-

ment indicating the scale of the image in cm. G.2
The size of the scale bar changes to match the current zoom
settings. G.2
If the scale bar would cover image text, it is not shown.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Scrolling and Selecting
G.3 Images G.3
You will usually have loaded more images and series of a

patient onto the Viewing task card than can be displayed in the
image area at once. All the images that cannot be displayed
due to lack of space are placed in the background. G.3
You can scroll through the loaded images of a patient to obtain

an overview and to select images that you then want to process
and evaluate. G.3
The Viewing task card provides you not only with an option for
manual scrolling, but also with an automatic, fast scrolling func-
tion. This gives you the impression of a movie being played
back. The Movie function provides special advantages for view-
ing dynamic series, because processes which change over
time can be displayed especially clearly this way. G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.31

Scrolling and Selecting Images Viewing
Scrolling G.3
The Viewing task card provides you with several alternative

ways of scrolling through the loaded images of different
patients, studies, or series: G.3
(1) Scroll menu

(2) Scroll bar on the right-hand or left-hand side of the image
area (depending on the configuration)
(3) Dog ears in the top right-hand corner of the images
(if you are in stack display)
(4) Keyboard and symbol keypad
Depending on the processing step and the working methods

you are accustomed to, you can select any of the above ways
of scrolling. G.3
G.3
NOTE
If a dialog box in the Viewing task card is open and active,
the keys of the symbol keypad might not function. G.3

0.0

Viewing Scrolling and Selecting Images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.33

Scrolling image by image G.3
Within a study, you can scroll through the loaded images and
series image by image. G.3
The order of the loaded images depends on whether you have

loaded the images via the Patient Browser or automatically
from the Exam card: G.3
The order of the images loaded via the Patient Browser is

determined by the sorting criterion.
The order of the images loaded automatically from the exam-
ination card is determined by the order of image reconstruc-
tion.
Scrolling image by image Call up Scroll > Image Next or Scroll > Image Previous to
in image stripe display G.3 scroll forward or backward by one image.
Or G.3
Scroll with the Image+ key (Num 2) or the Image- key (Num
1) on the symbol keypad.
Explicitly selected images remain selected even if the images
are moved into the background.
If you execute Image+, the image in the top left segment is
moved into the background. All the following images are moved
on by one segment. One image from the background moves
into the bottom right segment. If there is no image in the back-
ground, the segment remains empty. G.3
Image- reverses this process, moving an image from the back-

ground into the top left segment. G.3
0.0

Scrolling image by image If you have selected stack display, you can scroll through a
in a stack G.3 stack using all of the above methods or using the dog ears in
the corner of each stack. G.3
Click on the stack through which you want to scroll with the
mouse.
Scroll from image to image in a stack with Image+ or Image-
just like in image stripe display.
Or G.3
Click on the top or bottom of the dog ear to scroll forward or

backward by one image.
Image+
Image-
If you want to scroll through an image stack quickly, then click

on the dog ear and hold the mouse button pressed.
Explicitly selected images remain selected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.35

Scrolling through several If you want to compare the images of different series, you can
stacks image by image G.3 scroll through more than one stack simultaneously image by
image.
G.3
Press the Ctrl key and click on the stacks that you want to
scroll through. If you click on a stack again, you deselect it.
With the Scroll menu, the buttons or the symbol keypad
scroll forward (Image+) or backward (Image-) through the
selected stacks by one image at a time.
If you have not selected a stack, you only scroll through the
stack which is in the input focus.
The dog ears only allow you to scroll through one stack at a
time.
A1 B1 Image+ A2 B1
C1 C2
0.0

Scrolling page by page G.3
A page describes the contents of the image area at a time. It

can contain different numbers of segments depending on the
layout selected and it may contain only images of one series or
images of more than one series depending on the display
mode. G.3
You can use the menu, keyboard, or scroll bar to page through
the series of a study.
G.3
Scrolling with the menu G.3 Select Scroll > Page Down to scroll forward by one page.
Select Scroll > Page Up to scroll back by one page.
Select Scroll > Last Page to jump to the last page of the
current patient folder.
Select Scroll > First Page to jump back to the first page of
the current patient folder.
The first image of the series is displayed in the top left segment
of the image area. G.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.37

Scrolling with the As an alternative to the menu commands, you can also scroll
keyboard G.3 using the keyboard. G.3
Press the Page Down key to scroll forward by one page.
Press the Page Up key to scroll back by one page.
Press the End key to display the last page of the study.
Press the Home key to jump to the first page of the study.
The image area is filled with images. The first image of the
series is displayed in the top left-hand corner of the image
area.
Page-by-page scrolling In page-by-page scrolling, only the entire content of the image
with the image stripe area is moved into the background. For example, for a 4x4 lay-
display G.3 out, four images are moved into the background at once and
four images with higher image numbers moved from the back-
ground into the image area. G.3
When you reach the last page of a series, you receive the
message At Last Page. The images of the last page remain
displayed so that you do not have an empty image area.
0.0

Scrolling in the stack In image stacks, the topmost images of all series displayed
display G.3 (image stacks) are moved into the background. You can then
see the images of the series which follow in the image stacks
displayed in the image area. G.3
If you scroll back by one page, the preceding images in the

image stacks are displayed again. G.3
The last page of the stack is the last image to be displayed

in the largest series. If the other loaded series contain fewer
images, the relevant segments remain empty.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.39

Scrolling with the The third way of scrolling through the images and series of a
scroll bar G.3 study is to use the scroll bar. G.3
(1) Scroll arrow for first page

Page G.37, Scrolling page by page
(2) Scroll arrow for previous page
(3) Slider
(4) Scroll arrow for next page
(5) Scroll arrow for last page
0.0

Click on the scroll arrow for the first or last page to jump to
the beginning or end of the loaded series.
Click on the scroll arrow for the next or previous row or page.
A1 A2 A3 A4
A3 A4 A5 A6
In image-stripe display, the view is shifted forward or backward

by one row.
G.3
A1 B1 A2 B2
C1 C2
In stack display, the next or previous page is displayed.

G.3
Drag the slider up or down with the mouse until the page you
require is displayed (the page number is also displayed).
If you click the scroll bar above or below the slider, you scroll
backward or forward by one page.
0.0

Scrolling from series to series G.3
You cannot only scroll image by image or page by page, but

also by entire series if you have loaded more than one series of
a study into the Viewing task card.
G.3
Call up Scroll > Series Next or Scroll > Series Previous in

the main menu to scroll forward or backward by one series.
Or G.3
G.3 Press the Series- key (Num 4) or the Series+ key (Num 5)
on the symbol keypad to scroll to the next or previous or
series.
Which images are subsequently displayed in the image area

depends on the display you select (normal mode or study
mode, image stripe or stack display). G.3
0.0

Normal mode G.3 In image stripe display, the entire series of which one image
fills the top left segment of the image display is moved into the
background. The first image of the following series is then dis-
played in the top left segment and the image area is filled with
images of the series. G.3
In stack display, the image stack of the series that fills the top
left segment is moved into the background. The image stack of
the following series moves up by one segment to fill the space.
If there are image stacks in the background with higher series
numbers, the first image stack in the background is moved into
the bottom right segment.
G.3
Study comparison mode In study comparison mode, too, you can only scroll forwards/
(Multi View) G.3 backwards by a series within an examination with Series+/
Series-. G.3
With image stripe display you scroll within the examination in

which images are explicitly displayed with Series+. I.e. the
series of which an image fills the left segment is placed in the
background. The first image of the next series then replaces it.
The segments of the examination series are filled with the
images of the next series. G.3
With stack display, the image stack of a series in the row of an

examination is moved to the left into the background with
Series+. A further series from the background replaces it from
the right. G.3
0.0

Scrolling from study to study G.3
As many of the images of the loaded examinations and series

as there are space for in a single screen are displayed in the
image area of the Viewing task card. G.3
As soon as you load the images, the images of the first exami-
nation are displayed starting top left.
G.3
Call up Scroll > Study Next or Scroll > Study Previous in

the main menu to display the series and images of the next
or previous study.
Or G.3
G.3 Scroll to another study with the Study+ key (Num 8) or the
Study- key (Num 7) on the symbol keypad.
The images of the first examination are placed in the back-
ground. G.3
The image area display is different depending on whether you

selected normal mode or study comparison mode view. G.3
0.0

Normal mode G.3
S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S2A3 S2A3 S2B1
S1A4 S1A5 S1A6 S2B2 S2B3 S2B4
S1B1 S2A1 S2A2 S3A1 S3A2 S3A3
Study +
S1A1 S2A1 S2A2 S2A3 S2A2 S3A3
S1A2 S1A3 S1A4 S2A4 S2B1 S2B2
S1A5 S1A6 S1B1 S2B3 S2B4 S3A1
S1 A1 = Series A1 of Study 1
and so on G.3
0.0

Study comparison mode G.3
Study 1 S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S1B1 S1B2 S1B3 ...
Study 2 S2A1 S2A2 S2A3 S2A4 S2B1 S2B2 ...
Study +
Study 1 S1A1 S1A2 S1A3 S1B1 S1B2 S1B3 ...
Study 2 S2A1 S2A2 S2A3 S2A4 S2B1 S2B2 ...
and so on G.3
0.0

Scrolling to the next patient G.3
Up to three patients can be loaded in the Viewing task card at

one time. You can see whose images are currently being dis-
played in the image area by the opened patient folder in the
patient field of the control area.
G.3
Switch to the patient you require by clicking on his or her

patient folder.
Patient- Patient+
0.0

Animated images (Movie) G.3
It is usually easier to recognize anomalies in processes

(dynamic series) if you view the images in quick succession like
a movie. G.3
The Movie option allows you to scroll through the images of a

series or a whole study automatically and quickly. G.3
N OT E
While running a movie it is not advisable to activate any
correct and rearrange actions. G.3
G.3
N OT E
syngo MR is not a real-time based system. It can therefore
not be ensured that the movie runs at real-time conditions.
There may be delays resulting from processes running
simultaneously in the background. G.3
0.0

Selecting a layout and Select the stack display (View > Stack) if you want to view
display mode G.3 only one series as a movie.
Or G.3
Select the image stripe display (View > Stripe) if you want to
view all the series of a study one after the other as a movie.
After that, select a sufficiently large layout to be able to see

all the details.
We recommend: G.3
1:1
The movie takes up the whole screen.
4:1
You can compare the movie with up to 3 still images.
0.0

Playing back the movie interactively G.3
Because the left mouse button is normally used to select

images and graphics, you must switch over its function to Movie
to be able to play back images interactively.
G.3
Call up Scroll > Interactive Movie On.
The mouse cursor changes shape.
Playing back the movie The movie segments must be selected before you start. G.3
with the mouse

Place the mouse cursor on the image with which you want to
G.3
begin.
Hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse up to
playback the movie forward.
Or G.3
Hold the left mouse button down and move the mouse down
to playback the movie backward.
Forward
Backward
0.0

When the movie reaches the last image of the series or study,
it jumps back to the first image of the series or study and
starts again (Loop).
Interrupting a movie G.3 You can interrupt the movie at any time, for example to take a
better look at an image. G.3
Just release the left mouse button.

The current image is displayed in the movie segment with all its
text information, drawing elements and evaluations. G.3
In image stripe display, the images before and after the current
image are displayed in the remaining segments.
G.3
Resuming a movie G.3 Click on the image area again, hold the left mouse button
down, and drag the mouse vertical over the image area to
continue playback of the movie.
Ending a movie G.3 Release the left mouse button to interrupt the movie.
Call up Scroll > Interactive Movie On again to terminate
Movie mode and switch the function of the left mouse button
back to selection mode.
0.0

Playing back the movie automatically G.3
As an alternative to interactive playback of the movie using the

mouse you can also run the movie automatically. This is recom-
mended, for example, for examinations or series with a large
number of images or if you want to ensure an even playback
speed (e.g. for heart series). G.3
In this mode, you can change a number of settings for movie

playback.
G.3
For performance reasons some evaluation results of an

image series of ROIs in the Automatic Movie mode are dis-
played as "???". In order to obtain the correct values in the
Automatic Movie mode, stop the movie and scroll forwards
and backwards step by step. Restart movie playback.
Page G.326, Stopping the movie, scrolling forwards/back-
wards step by step
How to define and evaluate ROIs see,
Page G.513, Evaluating ROIs
0.0

Starting a movie G.3
G.3 Call up Scroll > Automatic Movie On or click on the button

Automatic Movie on the View subtask card.
Depending on the default settings, movie playback starts imme-
diately or the dialog box Movie Properties... is displayed. Here,
you can change a number of settings for movie playback and
then control movie playback. G.3
Finally click on this button in the Movie Properties window

to play back the movie forwards.
Changing settings for While a movie is being played back click into the playback
movie playback G.3 segment with the right mouse button to call up a popup
menu.
Select Movie Backward or Movie Forward to change the
playback direction.
Or G.3
Select Scroll > Movie Properties to open the dialog box

Movie Properties. Press the forward/backward button or
move slider to adapt speed.
0.0

In the dialog box Movie Properties you can: G.3
Change the playback speed and direction

Stop the movie and restart it
Exclude initial and final images of little interest
0.0

Playback speed and Select a speed from the list.

direction G.3
Or G.3
G.3 Enter a playback speed via the spin box in the field Frame
Rate.
Or G.3
G.3 Select a playback speed and direction using the slider:

To the extreme right - fast forward
Center right - slowly forward
Center position - still frame
Center left - slowly backward
To the extreme left - fast backward
Or G.3
G.3 Change the playback direction by clicking on the forward/

backward buttons.
0.0

G.3 Click on the option Yoyo.

As soon as the movie has reached the last frame, it starts again
backward to the first image, and from there again forward to the
last image etc. G.3
Or G.3
G.3 Deselect the option Yoyo to play back the movie in a loop.
When the movie reaches the last image it starts again from the
first image (loop).
G.3
Stopping the movie,

scrolling forwards/
backwards step by step G.3
G.3 Click on the button Stop to stop the movie.
Scroll with the scrollbar or the dog-ears manually through the

stack.
Excluding initial/final
images G.3
G.3 In the spin boxes From and To, specify which images are to
be included in the movie playback. In this way you can
exclude initial and final images of little interest.
You cannot change this setting while a movie is running.
0.0

Always display the dialog

box G.3
G.3 Select Pop up this dialog... to display the dialog box Movie
Properties every time you call up Automatic Movie.
You then always control the movie from this window.
G.3
Closing automatic movie You can stop a running movie at any time automatically. This
playback G.3 also closes Automatic Movie mode, but you can start it up
again at any time without problem.
G.3
Press the Esc key on the keyboard or click into the playback
segment with the left mouse button (a single click) to termi-
nate Automatic Movie.
Or G.3
G.3 Deselect Scroll > Automatic Movie On in the main menu or

click on the button again.
Or G.3
G.3 Stop movie playback in the dialog box Movie Properties and
close the dialog box with the Close button.
0.0

Playback of multiple movies G.3
If you are working in study comparison mode you can play back
all loaded examinations and series simultaneously as movies
with Automatic Movie. G.3
You can synchronize playback of these movies. G.3
Call up Scroll > Link > Acquisition Time.

You now see images sorted by the same time order in all movie
segments. G.3
Or G.3
Call up Scroll > Link > Slice Position.

You now see images of the same slice position in all movie seg-
ments. G.3
Or G.3
Call up Scroll > Link > Current Order to play back the mov-
ies synchronized in the sequence in which they appear in the
series.
The playback direction set for synchronization is decisive
even if only one film is played back. If you sorted the images
in decreasing chronological order and play them back with
Current Order, the film seems to play back backwards.
0.0

Select the movie segments explicitly before you start.

G.3
Multiple study image

stripe G.3
AS11 AS12
AS21 AS22
One segment is selected.

The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1.
G.3
AS11 AS12
AS21 AS22
Two segments are selected.

The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1 and
S2.
G.3
Multiple study compare

image stripe G.3
AS11 AS12
BS21 BS22
One segment is selected.

The movie contains all the images that belong to study S1. G.3
0.0

G.3
AS11 AS12
BS21 BS22
Two segments are selected, one movie for each segment. Each
movie contains all the images of that study.
G.3
Multiple study series

stack G.3
S11 S12
One stack is selected, one movie through series 1.

G.3
S11 S21
Two stacks are selected, in each case one movie in the selected
segment. G.3
0.0

Multiple study compare

series stack G.3
S11 S21
S31 S41
One stack is selected, one movie through series 1.

G.3
S11 S21
S31 S41
Two stacks are selected, in each case one movie for each
selected stack. G.3
0.0

Selecting images G.3
On the Viewing task card, you can not only view images, but
also process and evaluate them. G.3
You must first select the images that you want to process.
G.3
Ways of selecting images G.3 You can select images in one of two ways: G.3
Explicitly holding the Ctrl key down (explicitly selected

images are shown with a continuous border).
Implicitly by working in the input focus.
0.0

Working in the input focus G.3
The input focus shows the active segment of the image area. It
is marked by a broken line border, i.e. it is selected implicitly. G.3
The processing steps that you execute are always applied to

the image shown in the segment on which the input focus is
located. G.3
Only when you have selected images explicitly is the input focus
switched off and no segment has a broken line border. G.3
0.0

Default input focus G.3 When you load images onto the Viewing task card, the input
focus is in the default position in the top left segment of the
image area. G.3
A1 A2
A3 A4
Placing the input focus G.3
with the mouse G.3
Click with the left mouse button into the segment of the
image area on which you want to place the input focus.
An explicitly selected image or an explicitly selected graphic is

deselected if you place the input focus on a segment even if you
only click on the same segment. G.3
0.0

Examples: G.3
Changing the input focus You can also move the input focus using the keyboard.
using the keyboard G.3 Use the arrow keys.
G.3
Press the arrow key left or right to move the input focus to
the next column of the image area.
Or G.3
Press the arrow key up or down to move the input focus to

the next row of the image area.
If an image or a graphic is selected explicitly, the arrow keys

are not active.
0.0

Processing an image G.3 As long as you have not selected any images explicitly, your
processing steps are applied to the image in the segment on
which the input focus is located, the image with the broken line
border. G.3
Place the input focus on the image that you want to process.
No input focus in the If you cannot see an input focus in the image area, one or more
image area G.3 images are explicitly selected in the background. G.3
Selected image in
A1 A2 A5 A6
the background
A3 A4 B1 B2
No input focus in
the image area
Your processing steps are then only applied to the explicitly

selected images unless you set the input focus. G.3
0.0

Selecting images explicitly G.3
Selecting images explicitly means that you select images or

series specifically and one after the other. Unlike the input
focus, the explicit selection is associated with the content of the
segment. Explicitly selected images remain selected even if you
move them into the background. G.3
All explicitly selected images have a continuous line border. G.3
Image is not selected Image is selected explicitly
0.0

Selecting images You can explicitly select an image or more than one image one
individually G.3 after the other. G.3
Press the Ctrl key and click on an image with the left mouse
button to select it explicitly.
Hold the Ctrl key down and click on further images if you
want to extend your selection.
Selecting images explicitly You want to explicitly select the image displayed and all the fol-
up to the end of series G.3 lowing images of the series.
G.3
Click on the image that you want to select explicitly holding

the Ctrl key down or set the input focus by clicking on the
image.
Call up Edit > Select On Succeeding in the main menu or
Select On Succeeding in the context menu.
The selected image and all the following images are now
selected. G.3
If you have explicitly selected images of different series, the

remaining images of these series are selected starting with
those images.
0.0

Explicitly selecting The easiest way for you to select complete series (i.e. all
complete series G.3 images contained in them) is with Select Series.
G.3
First select an image of the required series explicitly by click-

ing on it holding the Ctrl key down or place the input focus on
the image by clicking on it.
Call up Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the popup menu (right mouse button).
The whole series is now selected explicitly.

G.3
Selecting more than one If you want to select more than one complete series, first select
series explicitly G.3 an image from each series and then extend your selection to
the complete series.
G.3
G.3 Hold the Ctrl key down and click on individual images of the
required series.
Call up Edit > Select Series in the main menu or select
Select Series in the popup menu.
0.0

Explicitly selecting The easiest way for you to select complete studies (i.e. all
complete studies G.3 images contained in them) is with Select Study. G.3
First select an image of the required Study explicitly by click-

Call up Edit > Select > Study from the main menu.
The whole study is now selected explicitly.
G.3
Explicitly selecting a Select a patient (i.e. all images contained in it) with Select
patient G.3 Patient. G.3
First select an image of the required patient explicitly by click-

Call up Edit > Select > Patient from the main menu.
The whole patient is now selected explicitly. G.3
0.0

Marking images and If you have loaded a large number of images into the Viewing
selecting marked images card, you might find it helpful to first page through all the images
explicitly G.3 to look at them in more detail before deciding which are relevant
to the next processing steps. G.3
Mark an image that you want to include in your processing.

Then scroll on and mark all the other relevant images one after
the other. G.3
G.3 Press the Ctrl key and click on the image that you want to
mark to select it.
Then call up Edit > Mark in the main menu or Mark in the
popup menu (right mouse button).
Or G.3
G.3 Press the Mark key (Num 3) on the symbol keypad.
Call up Edit > Unmark in the main menu or Unmark in the

popup menu to undo marking of a selected image.
Or G.3
Click on the icon button or press the Mark/Unmark key on

the symbol keypad again.
0.0

Once you have viewed all loaded images one after the other,
select all marked (or all unmarked) images at once. G.3
Call up Edit > Select > Marked to select all marked images/
series explicitly.
Or G.3
Call up Edit > Select > Unmarked, or click on the button to

select all unmarked images/series at once.
Now you can edit all explicitly selected images or remove them
from the Viewing task card.
Chapter G.4, Processing Images
Page G.718, Closing selected images or series
G.3
0.0

Deselecting images G.3 If the explicit selection of images does not contain the set of
images you require, you can deselect individual images or all
images. G.3
Place the input focus on an unselected segment manually

using the mouse by clicking on it.
Or G.3
Call up Edit > Deselect All in the main menu or Deselect All
in the popup menu to deselect all selected images.
After that, the standard input focus is set automatically, i.e.

the top left segment is active.
Or G.3
G.3 Hold the Ctrl key pressed and click on an explicitly selected
image again (individual image deselection).
0.0

Direct image processing G.3
Direct image processing (implicit selection) with the mouse is

automatically applied to the image segment on which the
mouse cursor is located.
G.3
Setting the input focus G.3 If no images are explicitly selected, you can see the input focus
in the image area. The input focus is placed on the segment on
which you position the mouse cursor and perform image pro-
cessing implicitly. G.3
Place the mouse cursor on an image which is not selected

and process the image, for example, by zooming.
Windowing an image
A1 A2 with the mouse A1 A2
A3 A4 A3 A4
If graphics were previously explicitly selected in the input

focus, they remain explicitly selected.
0.0

Images are explicitly If images are explicitly selected, only that image is processed
selected G.3 on which the mouse cursor is positioned, if it is not explicitly
selected together with other images.
G.3
Example:
The images A1 and A4 are selected explicitly. The position of
the mouse cursor defines the selection. G.3
A1 A2 A1 A2
A3 A4 A3 A4
Only image A2 is processed Images A1 and A4 are processed

(implicit selection) (explicit selection)
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
G.4 Processing Images G.4
As soon as you have loaded all the series and/or images that
you want to view and process into the Viewing task card, you
can change the display parameters of individual images. In this
way, you can emphasize areas and image contents for subse-
quent evaluation or reporting especially clearly. G.4
You can adapt the window values of the loaded images. The
images can be zoomed or ROIs can be drawn on them. You can
also rotate, flip or invert images for certain diagnostic problems.
G.4
With Multiframe images, the image processing functions are

applied to all images of a series.
G.4
N OT E
Extreme window values may reduce the image quality. G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.41

Processing Images Viewing
Windowing images G.4
Imaging methods provide diagnostic information in the form of

gray scale images with up to several thousand different gray
scale values. Windowing means to focus on the range of gray
scales of the diagnostically relevant area and tissue type. G.4
The first step in windowing is therefore to determine the center

of the window, i.e. the gray scale value of the type of tissue
which is central to your diagnostic problem. The smaller the
window center, the brighter the image.
With the window width, you define how many gray scale values
above and below the center value you want to see. The smaller
the window width, the stronger the contrast. G.4
You cannot window color and pseudo-color images.
0.0

Viewing Processing Images
Displaying the window You can see the window values set in the bottom right-hand cor-
values G.4 ner of the images. G.4
W = width (contrast)
C = center (brightness)
Window values
No window values are displayed on color images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.43

Setting the scope G.4
You will often need to window images several times until you
have found the optimum setting for your requirements. By defin-
ing a scope, you can assign new window values to several
images automatically and in a single action to simplify your
work. G.4
Windowing with a scope only applies to images that are not

explicitly selected.
G.4
Windowing images up to With Windowing OnSucceeding On, you can define that win-
the end of series G.4 dowing is to be applied to the image in the input focus (inclu-
sive) or to the implicitly selected image and all the other follow-
ing images up to the end of the series.
G.4
Call up Image > Windowing OnSucceeding On to be able

to process all images up to the end of the series.
0.0

Set the required window values with the keyboard, the con-
trol box, or the main menu.
The new window values are assigned to all images from the
image in the input focus to the end of the series.
G.4
Or G.4
Place the mouse cursor in the input focus or in an image

which is not selected.
Window all images up to the end of the series by pressing the
center mouse button and moving the mouse.
Or G.4
Double-click on the image with the center mouse button to

assign the values calculated in Auto Window to all images
up to the end of the series.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.45

Switching between You can switch between scopes as you require.

scopes G.4 G.4
The scope Windowing OnSucceeding On is active.

You want to window a single image temporarily without having
to select it explicitly. G.4
G.4 Press the Ctrl key on your keyboard.
Window an image by clicking on it with the center mouse but-

ton and move the mouse cursor holding the mouse button
down.
Or G.4
Assign new window values to the image with the input focus
using the main menu, keyboard, or the control box.
The scope Windowing OnSucceeding On is not active.

You want to window all images up to the end of the series tem-
porarily. G.4
Press the Ctrl key and switch the scope to Windowing

OnSucceeding On while you are holding the Ctrl key down.
Then window all images up to the end of the series as
described above.
0.0

Windowing explicitly The Windowing OnSucceeding On scope does not apply to

selected images G.4 explicitly selected images. If you have selected images explic-
itly and window them, only these images are windowed.
G.4
Select one or more images explicitly and set the required

window values using the main menu, the keyboard, or the
control box.
Or G.4
Place the mouse cursor on an explicitly selected image.

Window all explicitly selected images by pressing the center
mouse button and moving the mouse.
Or G.4
Execute a double-click with the center mouse button to

assign preset window values automatically.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.47

Examples: G.4
Windowing OnSucceeding On is active. G.4
A1 A2 A3 Windowing with the A1 A2 A3

mouse in the input focus
A4 A5 A6 A4 A5 A6
B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3 Implicit windowing with A1 A2 A3

the mouse
A4 A5 A6 A4 A5 A6
B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A2 A3 Windowing in explicitly A1 A2 A3
selected images
A4 A5 A6 A4 A5 A6
B1 B2 B3 B1 B2 B3
A1 A1
Window values Window values
unchanged changed
0.0

Automatic windowing G.4
With the Auto-Window option, you automatically assign opti-

mized window values to the images.
G.4
Auto-Window on loading G.4 Before you load images onto the Viewing task card, you can
define with what window values you want these images dis-
played: G.4
With the window values with which they were stored.

With automatically optimized window values (Auto-Window).
Select Image > Auto-Windowing.
Every time you load images into the Viewing task card after
that, they are immediately loaded with the optimum window val-
ues for the study they belong to. G.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.49

Applying Auto-Window to You can also apply Auto-Windowing to individual or selected

individual images G.4 images. G.4
Pay attention to the scope.

Page G.44, Setting the scope
G.4
Make sure that Image > Auto-Windowing is deactivated

before loading your images.
The images are now loaded with the window values with which
they were stored.
G.4
G.4 Double-click on the image with the center mouse button to

which you want to have optimized window values automati-
cally assigned for a study or region of the body.
Or G.4
Call up Image > Auto-Windowing.
0.0

Assigning predefined window settings G.4
A series of organ-specific, study-specific and user-specific win-

dow settings are stored in the Viewing task card. G.4
Some of these window settings were made by Siemens Ser-

vice. You can change them in Viewing Configuration and also
define a few new window settings of your own.
Page G.87, Organ- and user-specific window values
G.4
Select the images that you want to window, paying attention

to the scope.
Call up Image > Windowing to call up a submenu with all the

stored window settings.
Select an entry to apply these window settings to your
images.
0.0

Windowing with the mouse G.4
You can assign new window values to images using the

mouse. G.4
Pay attention to the scope,

Click on an image segment with the center mouse button

and move the mouse holding the button down.
The mouse cursor disappears.
G.4
Move the mouse up/down to change the window center.

Or G.4
Move the mouse right/left to change the window width.
Brightness -
y (center +)
Contrast + Contrast -
(width -) x (width +)
Brightness+
(center -)
In the image in which you are currently windowing, the changed

window values are displayed immediately (interactive window-
ing). G.4
As soon as you release the mouse button, the new window val-
ues are also applied to all the other selected images or the
selected scope of action. G.4
0.0

Windowing with the keyboard G.4
For fine adjustment of the window values, you can also use the
keys on the symbol keypad of the keyboard. G.4
Pay attention to the scope.

Setting the contrast G.4
Press the Width+ (Num -) or Width- key (Num *) to increase

G.4
or reduce the contrast.
Setting the brightness G.4
Press the Center+ (Num /) or Center- key (Num Num) to

G.4
increase or reduce the brightness.
G.4
NOTE
If a dialog box in the Viewing task card is open and active,
the keys of the symbol keypad might not function. G.4

0.0

Restoring and saving window values G.4
You can undo your changes to the window values at any time
and restore the old window settings with which you loaded the
images from the database.
G.4
Call up Image > Home Window.

Or G.4
Call up Home Window in the popup menu (right mouse but-

ton).
The selected image(s) is/are displayed with their original win-

dow values.
G.4
You can save the series with the new window values. G.4
To do that call up Patient > Save as.

Page G.72, Saving images
0.0

Zooming and panning images G.4
You can zoom in on sections of images that you are particularly

interested in. If the zoomed image is too large to be displayed
in the segment, you can then pan it (i.e. move it), so that the
region of interest is in the center of the image again.
G.4
Displaying enlarged/reduced images G.4
The Viewing task card provides you with several ways of dis-
playing enlarged or reduced images. G.4
0.0

Double size/half size G.4 Select the images that you want to zoom.
Click on the button Minify by 0.5 on the Image subtask card

to reduce the image by a factor of 0.5.
Or G.4
0.5
Call up Image > Minify by 0.5 from the main menu.
Click on the button Magnify by 2.0 on the Image subtask

card to increase the image by a factor of 2.0.
Or G.4
2.0
Call up Image > Magnify by 2.0 from the main menu.
0.5 11 1 G.4
2
You can reduce or enlarge the size of the image in steps by

the relevant factor by applying Minify by 0.5 or Magnify by
2.0 several times.
0.0

Entering a zoom factor G.4 You can also increase or enlarge the size of images with an indi-
vidual zoom factor.
G.4
Select the images that you want to zoom.

G.4 Call up Image > Zoom to ..., or click on the Zoom button to
open the Zoom Image dialog box.
Enter a zoom factor and confirm with OK.

The image/images are enlarged/reduced by this zoom factor.
G.4
You cannot zoom step by step in the Zoom Image dialog box.
The set factor is always applied to the original image.
Acquisition size G.4 Call up Image > Acquisition Size in the main menu.
The images are displayed with the zoom factor of the originally
acquired images. G.4
0.0

Zooming with the mouse G.4
G.4 You usually select or deselect images and objects with the left
mouse button. G.4
However, you can also switch over the function of the left mouse
button to perform zooming and panning.
G.4
Select Image > Zoom/Pan.

Or G.4
Click on the Zoom/Pan button on the Image subtask card.
Now place the mouse cursor close to the edge of the frame.
G.4
Drag the mouse cursor up with the left mouse button pressed
to enlarge the image.
Or G.4
Drag the mouse cursor down with the left mouse button
pressed to reduce the image.
0.0

Zooming
+
Enlarging Reducing
0.0

As soon as you release the mouse button, the new zoom factor
is applied to all the selected images or the selected scope of
action. G.4
G.4
NOTE
Please remember the following when zooming images that
contain graphic objects: G.4
First press on the mouse button and then move the

mouse cursor to the outer area of the image.
Now pull the mouse cursor up/down to enlarge/reduce
the image size.
In that way you can avoid accidentally selecting and editing

graphic elements rather than the image itself. G.4
G.4
N OT E
When zooming, make sure you do not click on a graphic
element accidentally. Otherwise, you would pan the graphic
element and not the content of the image. G.4
Then deselect Image > Zoom/Pan again or click again on

the relevant button to switch from Zoom/Pan mode to Select
mode.
0.0

Restoring the zoom You can return to the zoom factor with which the images were
factor G.4 last stored in the database at any time.
G.4
Call up Image > Home Zoom/Pan or call up

Home Zoom/Pan in the popup menu (right mouse button).
Or G.4
G.4 Click on the button.
You cannot restore images that have been imported into the
Patient Browser to their original size.
0.0

Fitting an image into a Select the images that you want to process.
segment G.4
Call up Image > Fit to Segment to enlarge/reduce an image

to the size of the segment.
Or G.4
Click on the Fit to Segment button on the Image subtask

card.
Or G.4
Select Fit to Segment with the pop-up menu (right mouse

button).
The image is displayed in such a way that it fits exactly in the

segment. G.4
0.0

Panning images G.4
After you have zoomed the images, parts of the images might
extend beyond the edge of the image segments. G.4
Therefore always pan the image so that the region of diagnostic

interest is in the center of the segment again before storing.
G.4
First select Image > Zoom/Pan as you would to zoom with

the mouse.
Or G.4
Click on the Zoom/Pan button on the Image subtask card to

switch the left mouse button function from selection to zoom-
ing/panning.
G.4 Now place the mouse cursor in the center part of the image.
G.4
Drag the mouse up, down, right or left holding the left mouse
button down to pan the image.
0.0

up
Panning
down
Up Down
left right
Panning
Left Right
0.0

You can see the result of your mouse movements in the image
on which the mouse cursor is located immediately. G.4
As soon as you release the mouse button, the image content in

all the selected images or all images of the selected scope of
action have been panned. G.4
G.4
NOTE
When panning, make sure you do not click on a graphic
element accidentally. Otherwise, you would pan the graphic
element and not the content of the image. G.4
0.0

Restoring image display G.4 Like with zooming, when you have panned images, you can
restore the images as they were last stored in the database.
G.4
Call up Image > Home Zoom/Pan.

Or G.4
G.4 Click on the button.
Or G.4
Call up the popup menu (right mouse button) and select

Home Zoom/Pan.
You cannot restore images that have been imported into the
Patient Browser to their original size.
You can save the series after zooming/panning. G.4
Call up Patient > Save As.

0.0

Enlarging the image section G.4
Instead of increasing the size of the image (zoom) in order to

move it so that the relevant section is again located at the center
of the screen (pan), you can also select explicit image sections
quickly and display them at maximum size in a segment.
G.4
Select the images in which you want to display an enlarged

image section.
Call up Tools > Capture Area.
Click into one of the selected images with the left mouse but-
ton and drag open a square or rectangle.
As soon as you release the mouse button, that section is dis-
played enlarged to the total segment size in all selected images.
The size ratios remain the same. The enlarging tool is now
deselected again. G.4
0.0

Rotating, flipping and inverting G.4
Aside from the above described methods of focusing on regions

of diagnostic interest in medical images the Viewing task card
provides a number of tools with which you can change these
images. G.4
For example, you can rotate the images around any axis. You
can flip images horizontally or vertically or you can invert the
gray scale values of images. G.4
These functions are useful for comparing series acquired with

different patient positions, gantry inclinations or examination
directions. G.4
0.0

Rotating images (Rotate) G.4
Whether you rotate images 90 or through a freehand rotation,

the center is always the center of the segment.
G.4
Rotating through 90 G.4 Select the images that you want to rotate.
Call up Image > Rotate 90.
The image is rotated 90 clockwise. G.4
0.0

Freely defined angle G.4 Call up Image > Rotate ....

A dialog box is displayed in which you can enter an angle of
rotation. G.4
Enter a positive value to rotate the image(s) clockwise.

Or G.4
Enter a negative value to rotate the image(s) counterclock-

wise.
You can only enter integer values.
0.0

G.4
NOTE
Please note that any annotations and graphics you have
entered will be deleted when you rotate an image. G.4
Orientation labels are rotated together with the image

(for CT and MR images only). G.4
0.0

Flipping images (Flip) G.4
With the flip function, you can compare images of series that
were taken with a different patient position or direction of exam-
ination more easily.
G.4
Flipping images vertically G.4 Select the images that you want to flip.
Call up Image > Flip Vertically.
The image is flipped around a vertical axis. G.4
The orientation labels are changed round accordingly

(for CT and MR images only). G.4
0.0

Flipping images Call up Image > Flip Horizontally.

horizontally G.4
The image is flipped around a horizontal axis. G.4
The orientation labels are changed round accordingly. G.4
G.4
NOTE
Just like when you rotate images, when you flip them, all
annotations and graphics are deleted from the images. G.4
0.0

Inverting images (Invert) G.4
When an image has been inverted, light areas are displayed

dark and dark areas light.
G.4
Select the images that you want to edit.

Call up Image > Invert Gray Scale.
To reset the original view, call up Image > Invert Gray Scale
again.
0.0

Saving your changes G.4
You can save the series after you have rotated/mirrored/

inverted it. G.4
To do that call up Patient > Save As.

0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
G.5 2D Evaluation G.5
On the Viewing task card, you have tools for region evaluation,
measuring distances, lengths, and angles, and for pixel evalua-
tion. G.5
You can also have a grid displayed in selected images, to allow

you to estimate sizes, distances, and angles more precisely. G.5
With a shutter, you can restrict the region of interest to what is
absolutely necessary excluding all irrelevant regions. G.5
You can annotate images with image texts in order to document

your evaluation. G.5
You can enter comment texts for the images in the database
and edit existing comment texts. G.5
G.5
N OT E
For optimum results, perform quantitative analysis on
remapped (distortion-corrected) images only. G.5
That is especially important for evaluations at the edge of

the image and for large FoVs. G.5
It is not possible to evaluate images with the image type Sec-

ondary Capture.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.51

2D Evaluation Viewing
Activating a graphic tool G.5 You will find the tools for drawing graphics and determine pixel
values in the Tools menu or on the Tools subtask card in the
control area. G.5
G.5 Activate a graphic tool by selecting it in the menu, or click on

the button.
Inactive Active
G.5 The mouse cursor becomes a graphic cursor.

G.5
You can now use the tool until you deactivate it again. For exam-
ple, you can draw several regions or distances into your image
one after the other.
G.5
Switching off a graphic Deselect the tool in the menu again.

tool G.5
Or G.5
G.5 Click on the button again.

Or G.5
Press the Esc key of your keyboard.

Active Inactive
Or G.5
Select another graphic tool.
0.0

Viewing 2D Evaluation
Paying attention to the The graphic tools of the Viewing task card work implicitly, i.e.
selection G.5 you do not have to select the images in which you draw the
graphics explicitly. You can simply place the mouse cursor on
the image. The input focus is placed on this image. G.5
If you want to produce a graphic element on more than one

image at once, you must first select these images explicitly. G.5
Page G.332, Selecting images G.5
NOTE
Please look out for the following peculiarity when explicitly
selecting images of different matrices: G.5
When you draw a graphic into an image, that graphic

is not displayed in exactly the same position and size in the
other images. G.5
You can only edit, i.e. resize, graphics in one image.
Multiframe images G.5 Graphics processing is the same for multiframe and normal
images. G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.53

Evaluating regions G.5
You can mark anomalies in the images and then evaluate these
regions. To do this you draw a ROI graphic around the region of
particular interest to you. You can now evaluate the gray scales
within this ROI statistically (CT, MR only).
G.5
ROIs (Regions of interest) can be: G.5
Circular Freehand regions

or polygons
Rectangular and circular ROIs G.5
You can draw around the regions that are of special interest with
a rectangle or circle and evaluate them. First select the tool.
G.5
Call up Tools > Circle or Tools > Rectangle.

Or G.5
G.5 Click on the Circle button on the Tools subtask card.

The mouse cursor changes shape. G.5
0.0

Click on the image and draw the ROI (rectangle or circle)

while holding the mouse button pressed.
Release the mouse button as soon as the ROI has the
desired size.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.55

Resizing/moving regions G.5 If your rectangle or circle is too small or too large or is not quite
in the right position, you can still change the ROI. As soon as
you move the mouse over the ROI the cursor changes shape
and you can alter the graphics.
G.5
G.5 Click on the border of the ROI to select it.

Or G.5
Place the mouse cursor on the border of the ROI.
G.5 Enlarge or reduce the region using the grab handles until it
meets your requirements.
Or G.5
Move the region in the image by positioning the cursor on the

border line between the grab handles.
You can move a small ROI easier by pressing the Alt key. The
cursor then switches into the move mode automatically.
No center is displayed for circular ROIs.
0.0

Drawing freehand ROIs G.5
If a circle or rectangle is too imprecise to describe your ROI, you

can draw a polygon or freehand region instead. This way you
can draw the region that is of interest to you more precisely.
G.5
Call up Tools > Freehand ROI.

Or G.5
G.5 Click on the Freehand ROI button on the Tools subtask

card.
There are two methods for drawing freehand ROIs:
G.5
Drawing point to point

(polygon) G.5
Click on the image to determine the starting point and drag a

line to the first vertex (turning point) with the mouse.
Draw the region point to point by clicking with the mouse at
each change of direction (polygon definition).
Once you double-click on the last vertex, the system closes
your graphic.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.57

Drawing a freehand regionG.5

Click on the image to determine a starting point.
Hold the mouse button pressed and move the mouse around
your region of interest.
Double-click on the end point to close your region.
The program will connect the starting point and the end point
and display the freehand ROI. G.5
0.0

Enlarging/reducing a Like the rectangles and circles, you can also enlarge or reduce
region G.5 freehand regions or move them in the image. G.5
Select the region by clicking on it.

Grab handles will now be displayed.
Change the size by dragging one of the handles.
Changing the shape You can also change the shape of a freehand region or polygon.
of the graphic G.5 To do that, you activate the editing mode in which you can see
a node at every change of direction of your freehand line. You
can move this node in order to change the shape. G.5
First select the region (left mouse button).

Then select Edit in the popup menu (right mouse button).
Nodes are now displayed instead of the grab handles. G.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.59

Inserting a new node G.5 To enlarge a freehand region or a polygon or to define shapes
more accurately, you can insert nodes. G.5
Click on the polygon line with the left mouse button, i.e. the
border of the selected region, between two nodes.
Drag the line to another position in the segment with the
mouse button pressed.
A new node is added and the region remains in editing mode.G.5
0.0

Moving a node G.5 You can change the shape of the region by moving individual
nodes. G.5
Click on one node with the left mouse button.

Drag the node to a new location holding the mouse button
pressed.
The node is moved and the region remains in editing mode. G.5
0.0

Rounding the polygon G.5 You can round off the edge of your freehand region. G.5
Select the region and call up Edit in the popup menu.

Click into the region with the mouse cursor, but not on the
polygon line, on the center or a node and hold the mouse
button pressed. The mouse cursor becomes a circle.
Move the circular mouse cursor to the border.
If the mouse cursor touches the line, all the nodes are moved in
the direction of the movement of the mouse. G.5
The size of the mouse cursor depends on how near you click
to the border of the polygon. For a precise definition, click
very close to the border, for example, to obtain a very small
circle.
Exiting editing mode G.5 Click on any point in the image with the left mouse button, but
not on the edge of the ROI.
The editing mode is closed, and the region is deselected. G.5
0.0

Evaluating ROIs G.5
As soon as you have drawn a border around the regions of

interest with a circle, rectangle or freehand line, a statistical
evaluation of the ROI will be displayed. G.5
The ROIs are now numbered. To avoid confusion, the number

of a ROI is shown in front of every evaluation result. G.5
(1) Min/Max
Highest and lowest gray scale value
(2) Mean/SD
Mean value and standard deviation of the gray scales
(3) Pixels
Number of pixels in the ROI
(4) Area
Area of the ROI in cm2
0.0

You can move the text block of the evaluation results to any
location in the image. G.5
Click on the text block and move it with the mouse.
Showing/hiding statistical The display of evaluation results was set up by Siemens Ser-
evaluations G.5 vice during configuration of your system. In Viewing Configu-
ration, you can change these default settings.
Page G.82, Displaying evaluation results
G.5
If you want to change or hide the display of evaluation results of

certain ROIs only, call up the Properties dialog box for a partic-
ular ROI.
G.5
Select the ROI.

Call up Edit > Properties or call up Properties in the popup
menu (right mouse button).
If a ROI is not completely on the image, i.e. the black area of

the border extends beyond the edge of the image, it is not
possible to evaluate the region. You then obtain ??? as the
area value.
0.0

A dialog box is displayed in which you can change the display

of evaluation results for the selected ROI. G.5
Click on the check box of individual evaluation results to

show or hide these result lines.
Select the Limit check box to evaluate only those pixels of
the ROI that are within a gray scale range that you can now
define.
Or G.5
Deselect the Limit check box to evaluate the entire gray

scale range of the ROI.
0.0

Calculating a histogram G.5
You can have the distribution and frequency of gray scales cal-
culated across the surface of a drawn in an active ROI. G.5
Select the ROI.

Call up Tools > Histogram.
The histogram is placed over the image. Below the X axis label
you can see which ROI the histogram belongs to (e.g. Pixel Val-
ues of Region 1). G.5
An image is always stored and filmed/printed out with the his-

togram(s) displayed on it.
0.0

Measuring distances and angles G.5
You can measure and evaluate not only regions, but also dis-
tances and angles in images. G.5
G.5
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Distance measurement in projected
images G.5
Consequence: False diagnostics possible G.5
Remedy: Do not use measurements in projected images

for diagnostic purposes G.5
0.0

Drawing a distance line, measuring the

distance G.5
Using a distance line, you can measure the distance between

two points in an image. You can also have the statistical evalu-
ation of the gray scales displayed for this line.
G.5
Drawing a distance line G.5 Call up Tools > Distance.

Or G.5
G.5 Click on the Distance button of the Tools subtask card.

G.5
Place the mouse cursor on the starting point of the distance

line.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag out a line.
As soon as you move the mouse, the length of the straight line
you have drawn so far is displayed. G.5
0.0

Release the mouse button to finish the line.
(1) Center
Center of the line
(2) Distance
Distance between the beginning and end point
(3) Min/Max
Minimum/maximum gray scale value on the straight line
0.0

Changing the distance Click on a distance line with the left mouse button.
line G.5
Or G.5
Place the mouse cursor on the line.
At positions at which you can edit the line, the mouse cursor
changes shape.
G.5
G.5 Drag the starting or end point of the line to another position.
The distance is updated as soon as you move the mouse
cursor. G.5
Or G.5
G.5 Move the entire distance line to another location.
0.0

Showing/hiding statistical Like with regions, with distances, too, you can show or hide sta-
evaluations G.5 tistical values individually.
G.5
Select a distance line (left mouse button).
Click on a selected distance line with the right mouse button

and select Properties... in the popup menu.
Or G.5
G.5 Click on the Distance button with the right mouse button,
and select the Properties... entry in the popup menu.
The Distance Properties dialog box is displayed. G.5
Select the evaluation results that you want displayed for your
distance line.
0.0

Drawing a freehand line, measuring a

distance G.5
You can measure not only the direct distance between two
points, but also the length of a structure, i.e. a blood vessel, by
drawing the shape with a freehand line. G.5
Call up Tools > Freehand Distance.

G.5
Point to point G.5
Place the mouse cursor in the segment and click on the start-
ing point of your line with the left mouse button.
Click on the first point at which you want your line to change
direction.
Then click on the next point etc. until you have drawn the
entire freehand line point by point.
Double-click on the end point.
0.0

Drawing a freehand line G.5
Click on the starting point of your freehand line with the left
mouse button.
Draw the structure with the left mouse button pressed.
Like with a freehand ROI, you can change the shape of your
freehand distance line subsequently by editing its nodes.
For some applications, it might be necessary to draw a free-

hand line that consists of a polygon definition and a freehand
line. G.5
As long as you have not double-clicked the end point, you can
mix the two methods, polygon definition and freehand line. G.5
0.0

After you have completed your freehand line, the following val-
ues are displayed. G.5
(1) Distance
Length of the line
(2) Min/Max
Minimum and maximum gray scale value on the line
0.0

Showing/hiding statistical If you do not want to display one or more of the values about
evaluations G.5 your freehand line, call up the Freehand Distance Properties
dialog box.
G.5
Select the freehand line (left mouse button).

Click on the selected line with the right mouse button and
select the Properties... entry in the popup menu.
Select or deselect the evaluation results that you want dis-

played or not displayed.
0.0

Calculating a profile G.5
You can calculate the profile of the distribution and frequency of

gray scales along a distance measurement or freehand line. G.5
Select the graphic object.
Call up Tools > Profile.
The profile is placed on the image. Below the X axis label you
can see which line the profile belongs to (e.g. Pixel Values
of 1). G.5
An image is always stored and filmed/printed out with the pro-

file(s) displayed on it, if applicable.
0.0

Measuring an angle G.5
You can define an angle by two lines, the legs of the angle, that
you draw on the image. The system then calculates the angle
between the two lines drawn in clockwise. If the angle is greater
than 180, the program subtracts 180. G.5
A
A
(1) (2) (3)
The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which you

have drawn the legs of the angle. G.5
(1) Both legs were drawn in the direction of the intersection.

The angle A between the legs is displayed.
(2) Both legs were drawn away from the intersection. The
angle A between the legs is displayed.
(3) Otherwise, the angle B (A - 180) is displayed.
0.0

Call up Tools > Angle.

Or G.5
Click on the Angle button on the Tools subtask card.
Place the mouse cursor on a starting point for the first leg.
Drag a line to the end point of the first leg holding the left
Draw the second leg in the same way.
As soon as you start to draw the second leg, the angle size will
be calculated.
G.5
The two lines between which you want to measure an angle

do not have to intersect in the image. The program automati-
cally calculates the point of intersection even if you have not
drawn it or if it is beyond the edge of the image.
0.0

The two legs of an angle are assigned the same number so you
can distinguish several angles unambiguously. G.5
0.0

Changing an angle G.5 You can change the legs of an angle independently. G.5
Move the mouse cursor into the image.

At those positions at which you can change a leg of an angle,
the shape of the mouse cursor changes. G.5
Move the entire line or drag an end point to another location.

The angle is constantly updated. G.5
0.0

Switching the angle You can also have the complementary angle displayed (180 -
direction G.5 angle measured). G.5
Select the angle.

Call up the popup menu with the right mouse button and
select the entry Other Angle.
The angle is now measured counterclockwise and the new
value displayed. G.5
Angle between the legs Complementary angle
G.5
N OT E
If the angle approximates to 90, 180, 270, it is not clear
whether the angle between the legs or the supplementary
angle has been entered. G.5
Label the angle with an annotation when you display the

supplementary angle.
0.0

Angle across 2 images G.5 Select the images.

Draw an angle in one image.
The angle is also drawn into image 2. G.5
Adjust the angle in the other image.

The correction is only visible in image 2 and is not applied to
image 1.
Angle in image 1 Angle in image 2
0.0

Measuring pixels with the crosshair G.5
In radiation therapy preparation you display a crosshair to mea-

sure pixels. Using the crosshair you can determine the position
of pixels and angles with reference to a starting point and two
axes at right angles to each other in several images at the same
time.
G.5
Displaying a crosshair G.5 Select the image or images in which you want to display the
crosshair.
Call up Tools > Crosshair.
Place the crosshair in one of the selected images by simply
clicking the desired position.
Or G.5
Click one of the selected images and keep the mouse button
pressed.
Drag the crosshair to the desired position and release the
mouse button.
The crosshair is displayed in the selected images. G.5
0.0

Measuring with the After the crosshair has been placed click on the points in the
crosshair G.5 image whose position you want to determine.
All measurement points you set in one image are displayed
simultaneously in all other selected images, whereas the first
measurement point you set is the center point of the crosshair
for the selected images that do not have a crosshair yet. G.5
Depending on the setting, the coordinates of the point, or its dis-

tance from the origin and angle to the X axis are displayed. G.5
One after the other, click on all pixels you want to measure.
The crosshair and the measuring points are stored with the
image and can be filmed and/or printed with it.
G.5
Wrong position of the Moving the crosshair is not possible. Wrongly positioned
crosshair G.5 crosshairs must be deleted and recreated. G.5
0.0

Changing the measuring Click on one of the axes of the crosshair to select it.
method
Call up Edit > Properties..., or select Properties... in the
G.5
popup menu.
The dialog box Crosshair Properties is displayed. G.5
Select the option Carthesian under Coordinate System to

calculate the coordinates of pixels.
Or G.5
Click on the option Polar to have the distance between a

measuring point and the origin, and the angle between that
distance line and the X axis displayed.
Confirm your selection and close the dialog box with OK.
Now click on the other pixels to measure them by the new
method.
0.0

Evaluating pixels, the pixel lens G.5
The pixel lens displays the average value of gray scales of a

small 5 x 5 pixel area. In syngo MR the patient coordinates are
displayed together with this value. G.5
The coordinates displayed refer to the center of the measure-

ment range examined. In greater detail, this is the location used
for the light localizer and/or the location position in the magnet
isocenter during the first scan of the examination. For more
information, please refer to Chapter Change note of this man-
ual.
Page xv
G.5
Requirements for While the gray scale value can always be displayed in the
reference image G.5 Viewer image, the patient coordinates are only displayed if the
following conditions for a reference image have been fulfilled: G.5
only Siemens MR images may be used,
mosaic images cannot be used,
the image must have a defined DICOM image plane,
the image may be distortion-corrected or not (mapped or
unmapped).
0.0

Restrictions G.5 The images used have to be part of the same study.
The result images may contain distortion artifacts as a result
of the non-linearity of the gradient field inside the magnet.
These may be reduced or magnified image distortion arti-
facts in the visible image and are not corrected by the coor-
dinates displayed.
The patient coordinates will be calculated and displayed only
if the inaccuracy of the specified image coordinates lies
within a 7-mm tolerance margin.
The user is responsible for using the correct (mutual compat-
ible) images for comparing the pixel lens coordinates.
G.5
NOTE
Do not copy pixel lens markers from one image to the next
because different image positions and orientations are
ignored. G.5
The patient coordinates are not included in the copying

process. Instead, only the image coordinates in reference to
the upper left corner of the image are copied. G.5
After copying, the image coordinates displayed are

unchanged but they refer to different patient coordinates. G.5
0.0

Using the pixel lens G.5
The pixel lens function provides the following options for using
gray scale and coordinate values (pixel lens values for short): G.5
displaying the value of the pixel lens at the cursor position,
inserting the pixel lens marker at a fixed position,
selecting, moving, or deleting the pixel lens marker,
saving the pixel lens marker with the reference image.
G.5
Displaying the value of the To display the values of the pixel lens at the cursor position, acti-
pixel lens at the cursor vate the pixel lens function. G.5
position
Select Tools > Pixel Lens.
G.5
Or G.5
Click the pixel lens button of the Tools subtask card.
You can deactivate the pixel lens function in the same way.
G.5 The cursor changes shape. The gray scale value is displayed in
the first line. The second line shows patient coordinates. G.5
0.0

Inserting a marker at You are able to permanently display the gray scale value and
a fixed position G.5 patient coordinates of a pixel of interest in the image. G.5
Call the pixel lens function and proceed as follows: G.5
Click the pixel of interest with the left mouse button.
The pixel is now marked with a small circle. The gray scale
value is shown in the first line. The second line shows the
patient coordinates. G.5
0.0

G.5
NOTE
The circular marker of the pixel lens does not match the
area measured to determine the gray scale value but has a
constant size, regardless of the image zoom factor. G.5
The gray scale value is always determined by a 5 x 5 pixel
area. G.5
Selecting or moving the You can also move a permanently displayed pixel lens
marker of the pixel lens G.5 marker. G.5
Deactivate the pixel lens function.

Page G.538
Place the cursor on the marker and, when the quadruple
arrow is magnified, drag the marker to its new position hold-
ing the left mouse button down.
The values of the pixel lens for gray scale and patient coordi-
nates are then updated. G.5
0.0

Applications: G.5 Example 1:

Patient coordinates are used to compare a transverse to a sag-
ittal image. The patient coordinates from the transverse image
on the left are to be located in the second, sagittal image.
Procedure: G.5
(1) Mark the vertebra in the first image with a mouse click while
the pixel lens function is active.
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the patient coor-
dinates are the same as shown in the first image.
0.0

Example 2:
Two sagittal images of the same study but with a different FOV
are compared. The first image shows only part of the lumbar
vertebrae, the second image shows the entire length of the lum-
bar vertebrae.
Procedure: G.5
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the same
patient coordinates are shown as in the first image.
0.0

Example 3:
Two sagittal images of the same study acquired at different
table positions are shown. The first image shows the upper sec-
tion, the second image shows the lower section of the cervical
spine.
Procedure: G.5
(2) Move the marker in the second image until the patient coor-
dinates are the same in the first image.
G.5
G.5
NOTE
Please note the inaccuracies that may be displayed when
using this application. G.5
0.0

Deleting the pixel lens When you no longer require a marker, you can delete it. G.5
marker
Click the marker to select it.
G.5
The marker changes shape. G.5
Then press the Del key.

The marker of the pixel lens is deleted.
G.5
Saving the marker of the When images are saved, the pixel lens markers in the images
pixel lens with the image G.5 are saved as superimposed graphics.
Chapter G.7, Saving and Documenting Images G.5
The same applies to exporting and filming images. G.5
0.0

Setting a shutter G.5
You can hide irrelevant areas of the image. To do that, you place
a shutter over the image. G.5
After that, only the area within the shutter is displayed and all
the surrounding areas are displayed black.
G.5
Only one shutter can be set in an image or multiframe image.

When setting different shutters in different frames of a multi-
frame image, the shutter in the first frame is taken into
account.
Setting a shutter G.5 Call up Tools > Shutter.

Place the mouse cursor in the corner of the area of the image
that you want displayed.
The mouse cursor changes shape. G.5
Hold the left mouse button pressed and drag a rectangle

open for the shutter.
By clicking on the border of the image you can select a shutter
which you can then move or resize.
0.0

When you release the mouse, the area outside the shutter is
displayed black. G.5
To obtain the original view, select the border line of the shutter
and delete it.
0.0

Removing the shutter G.5 Click on the border of the shutter to select it.
Or G.5
Call up Edit > Select > All Shutters In Series if you have set
several shutters within a series.
Or G.5
Call up Edit > Select > All Shutters.

All shutter settings are now selected.
G.5
Call up Edit > Delete Graphics, or select Delete in the

popup menu.
Or G.5
Press the Del key on your keyboard to show the entire series
in its original view again.
0.0

Working with grids G.5
As an aid to orientation and estimating the sizes and angles in

images, you can display a grid in selected images. G.5
The grid consists of parallel, horizontal and vertical lines. The

distance between the grid lines (grid width) can be adapted indi-
vidually. G.5
The grid and grid settings are stored together with the images.
G.5
Displaying a grid G.5 Select the image or images in which you want to display the
grid.
Call up View > Scalegrid to display the grid.
G.5
0.0

Changing grid settings G.5 Click on one of the grid lines to select the grid.
Call up Edit > Properties... in the main menu or Proper-
ties... in the popup menu (right mouse button).
The dialog box Scalegrid Properties is displayed. G.5
Pick a new grid distance from the spin box Distance to

change the grid width.
Click on OK to accept the changed grid settings and close
the dialog box.
If you now zoom the images, the grid width is adapted to the
new sizes. If you move the image center (panning), the grid is
also moved. G.5
0.0

Deleting the grid G.5 Select the grid again by clicking on one of the grid lines.
Call up Edit > Delete Graphics, or select Delete in the
popup menu.
Or G.5
Press on the Del key on the keyboard.

The grid is again removed from all selected images. G.5
0.0

Text in images G.5
You can annotate interesting or anomalous areas of the

images. You can also edit annotations that you entered earlier
at any time.
G.5
You can also store comment texts with acquisition series.

These comment texts are also displayed in the images and
can be altered.
Page F.913, Editing an image comment
Entering comment texts G.5
You can always change image descriptions that you entered at

an earlier date. G.5
Call up Tools > Annotate.

Or G.5
G.5 Click on the Annotate button on the Tools subtask card.

G.5
Click on the position in the image at which you want to insert

the text with the left mouse button.
The mouse cursor becomes a text cursor (small rectangle). G.5
0.0

Now enter your text.

You can force a line break by pressing Shift + Return.
G.5
Terminate text entry with the Return key.

Or G.5
Click into the image outside the text.

The text is displayed white with shading. G.5
You cannot change the font size or the alignment of the text. G.5
G.5
NOTE
Although the text can consist of more than one line, only the
line you are currently editing is displayed. G.5
G.5
Moving text G.5 Click on the text with the left mouse button, but not on the
grab handles.
G.5 Drag the text to the new position.
0.0

Changing text G.5 Double-click on the text with the left mouse button to change
it.
The mouse cursor changes into a text cursor (rectangle) and is
located on the first position of the text. G.5
Now change or add to your text.

You can exit text editing by clicking into the image outside the
text frame or pressing the Return key.
The text is displayed without a background and frame again.

G.5
Anchored annotation If you want to write text marked with an arrow, pull open an
text G.5 arrow keeping the left mouse button pressed and then write
your text in the text input field (end position of the arrow). G.5
0.0

Editing image comments G.5
If comment texts are displayed in some or all images, you can

edit them. You can add comments to images that do not have
any comment texts. G.5
Comment texts are only displayed if configured in the Image

Text Editor.
Place the input focus on the image whose comment you

want to edit, or select the image explicitly.
Call up Edit > Comment in the main menu or Edit comment
in the popup menu.
You can now see the text cursor at the beginning of the first
comment line. G.5
Overwrite, delete or add to the comment text.

You can force a line break by pressing Shift + Return. G.5
If your comment is longer than 2 x 30 characters it cannot fully

be displayed in the image, the second comment line then ends
with three periods ("..."). G.5
Terminate text input by pressing the Return key.

Or G.5

The two lines of text are treated as separate entities. There is
no automatic line break.
0.0

Editing graphics and image text G.5
You can select all graphics and annotation texts (except shutter)
that you have entered in evaluating the images either individu-
ally or altogether in order to delete them, or cut or copy and
insert them at a new position.
G.5
Selecting/deselecting all Call up Edit > Select > All Graphics to mark all graphic ele-
graphics and texts G.5 ments and image texts of all explicitly selected images.
Or G.5
Select Select All Graphics in the popup menu (right-hand

mouse button at any position in the image) to mark the
graphic elements and image texts of all implicitly (including
input focus) or explicitly selected images.
Click into a segment but not on a graphic or text to deselect

the marked graphics and texts on all images.
The standard input focus is set.
G.5
You cannot select images and graphics together. If you select

a graphic, all images are deselected and the input focus is
placed on the image associated with the graphic.
0.0

Copying, cutting and You can copy or cut individual or several selected graphic and
pasting graphics G.5 text elements from an image and insert them into another
image of the same patient.
G.5
Select one, more than one or all graphic and text elements in
an image.
Call up Edit > Copy or select Copy in the popup menu to

copy the selected graphic and text elements into the clip-
board.
Or G.5
Call up Edit > Cut or select Cut in the popup menu to cut out
the selected graphic and text elements and place them in the
clipboard.
Page A.218, Moving or copying objects
You can now insert the graphic and text elements from the clip-
board into another image. G.5
Select an image explicitly or place the input focus on the

image.
Call up Edit > Paste.
Or G.5
Place the mouse cursor in the image into which you want to
insert the graphics.
Select Paste in the popup menu.
0.0

If the zoom factors of the original image and the target image
are different, the size of the graphics is adjusted in the new
image.
Deleting graphics G.5 You can delete selected graphic and text elements when you no
longer require them. G.5
Select individual, several or all graphic and text elements.

Call up Edit > Delete Graphics or select Delete in the popup
menu.
Or G.5

The selected drawing elements and annotations are deleted. G.5
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
G.6 Position Display G.6
For series containing a large number of images, is often useful

to display the position of the scanned images in an overview. G.6
The cut lines are calculated for acquired images with the origi-
nal reference images or other suitable images. G.6
You may display single images, complete series, or several

series in the position display. G.6
You may configure the display and labeling of the cut lines your-
self. G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.61

Position Display Viewing
Basics G.6
The position display is used to show the cut lines of acquired

images on other images. A new series is generated as a
result. G.6
You may display single images, all images of a series, or multi-

ple series as cut lines on reference images.
G.6
Terms G.6 When calculating the position display, it is important to under-

stand the following terms: G.6
Data image
Image whose position line will be displayed
Data series
Series containing the data image
Reference image
Image on which the position line of a data image will be dis-
played
Reference series
Series containing the reference image
0.0

Viewing Position Display
Requirements G.6 Both data images and reference images must fulfill the following
conditions for successful calculation of position lines: G.6
The images are MR images only.

patient.
The images are part of the same series block.
The images have been measured using the same table posi-
tion.
The following images cannot be used for the position display: G.6
Distortion-corrected images.
Page P.171, FOV compensation filter (large FOV)
Mosaic images.
Secondary capture images

e.g. alpha images of the BOLD evaluation.
Page L.411, Automatic calculation of the alpha images
Curved cuts of the 3D evaluation.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.63

Defining data and reference

images G.6
The images and series to be used as data images for the posi-
tion display are already loaded on the Viewing task card. G.6
You may define data images and reference images by selecting

them explicitly or implicitly. G.6
The order in which you select them determines whether they

are used as a data or reference image.
G.6
Select the images or series.

G.6
N OT E
Calculation of the position display requires that the user has
full access rights to the patient data to be evaluated. G.6
Please refer to the information in,
Page B.16, Data Access and Groups G.6
0.0

Selected images are part You have selected some or all images from an S1 series. These
of series S1 G.6 images are used as data images. The system identifies the ref-
erence series R1 used for slice positioning of S1 and uses R1
as a reference series for the position display. G.6
G.6
NOTE
Prior to computing the slice positioning of series S1,
computation of the reference serie(s) R1, R2, etc. has to be
completed. G.6
If the S1 series was planned using images from different ref-

erence R1 and R2 series, the sum R1 + R2 will be used as
the reference series in the position display.
The images of S1 will be mapped on to themselves if no ref-

erence series exists for S1 and if it is possible to calculate cut
lines.
The selection includes You have selected series S1, S2, and S3. G.6
several series (S1, S2,

All images from the series selected last (S3) (or all images from
and S3) G.6
the series to which the image last selected belongs) will be
used as reference images. G.6
The images of series S1 and S2 will be used as data images.G.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.65

Starting calculation G.6
Single images or all images of one or more series may be dis-

played in the position display.
G.6
Displaying whole series G.6 Select Evaluation > Position Display > Series.
Or G.6
Click the Position Display: Series button on the Patient

subtask card.
The cut lines with the reference images are calculated and dis-
played for all images of the data series.
G.6
Displaying some images G.6 Select Evaluation > Position Display > Selection.
Or G.6
Click the Position Display: Selection button on the Patient

subtask card.
The cut lines with the reference images are calculated and dis-
played for only the selected images of the data series. G.6
0.0

Messages are shown on the status bar during calculation.

You may continue working on the Viewing task card while the
position display is being calculated.
A message will notify you if you did not select suitable images
and it is not possible to calculate cut lines.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.67

The new position display series G.6
Calculating the position display generates a new series. G.6
This new series includes the reference images for which at least
one cut line can be calculated and displayed. G.6
The image at the top of the stack in the new series is the image
with the greatest number of perpendicular (or nearly perpendic-
ular) cuts. G.6
All images of the new series are fitted to the segment size, even
if they had been zoomed or panned prior to calculating the posi-
tion display. G.6
You may edit images in the position display series.

Page G.415, Zooming and panning images
G.6
Name of the new series G.6 The name of the new series consists of PosDisp:, the series
number set in square brackets, plus the name of the first data
series. G.6
Example: PosDisp: [2] t1_se_sag
G.6
Number of the new series G.6 The number of the new series is the highest series number
assigned thus far +1. G.6
If a series number has not yet been assigned, e.g, after system
installation, the PosDisp series will be give the number 5000.G.6
0.0

Display and labeling of cut lines G.6
The slice positions of the data images are drawn in the Pos-
Disp images and labeled as cut lines. G.6
The length of the cut lines does not always represent the spatial
extent. It may be cut off at the edges of the images to make
space for image text and cut line labels.
G.6
Display rules G.6
The following rules apply to the display of cut lines: G.6
Perpendicular cuts are displayed as solid cut lines.

Oblique cuts (angle 30) are drawn as a dashed line.
Oblique cuts with smaller angles are not displayed on the ref-
erence image.
(Example: Transverse images are not displayed on trans-
verse reference images.)
The cut lines are always displayed with shading lines.
Page F.438, Shadow lines
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.69

Labeling rules G.6
(4)
(1)
(2)
(3) G.6
(1) Assignment of lower-case letters to series names

(2) Name of the new position display series
(3) Number of cut lines displayed and number of all data
images
(4) Image numbers
0.0

The cut lines are labeled with the number of the image if the
PosDisp series only shows images of one series.
Page F.667, Numbering of reconstructed images G.6
If the PosDisp series shows images of several series, the cut

lines are labeled with a lower-case letter to identify the series
plus the number of the image. If cut lines coincide, the lowest
image number plus ... is shown. G.6
The comment line of the PosDisp images (3) shows how many
data images are displayed as cut lines in the PosDisp.
G.6
G.6
N OT E
If you have configured the position display not to label all cut
lines, overlapping cut lines can cause incorrect assignment
between cut lines and invisible image numbers. In such
cases, select the labeling option All to be on the safe side.
Page G.616, Configuring the display of the cut lines G.6
0.0

Examples for calculating the

position display G.6
Example 1 (series) G.6 All 15 images of a transverse series are to be displayed on the
original reference images. The original reference series con-
sists of a transverse, a coronal, and a sagittal image. G.6
Load the transverse series into the Viewing task card.

Place the input focus on an image from this series.
Select Evaluation > Position Display > Series or click the
Position Display: Series button on the Patient subtask
card.
The position display is calculated. The new PosDisp series

contains the sagittal and coronal reference images, each with
15 cut lines. G.6
0.0

Example 2 (selection) G.6 A coronal series and a transverse series are loaded into the
Viewing task card. The cut lines of selected coronal images are
to be displayed in the transverse images. G.6
Explicitly select the coronal images of interest.

Select an image from the transverse series.
Select Evaluation > Position Display > Selection or click
the Selection button on the Patient subtask card.

contains all images of the transverse series for which cut lines
of the selected coronal images exist.
G.6
Example 3 (several series) G.6 A coronal, a transverse, and a sagittal series are loaded into the
Viewing task card. The cut lines of all transverse and sagittal
images are to be displayed in the coronal images. G.6
Explicitly select a transverse and a sagittal image.

Select an image from the coronal series.
Select Evaluation > Position Display > Series or click the
Position Display: Series button on the Patient subtask
card.

contains all images of the coronal series including the cut lines
of the transverse and sagittal images. G.6
0.0

Configuring the position display G.6
You can configure the number of slices to be drawn into the ref-
erence images, the location of cut lines labels, as well as how
many cut lines should be numbered.
G.6
Opening the Position To change the settings for the position display while no Pos-
Display dialog box G.6 Disp series is loaded on the Viewing task card, open the Posi-
tion Display dialog box via the menu. G.6
Select Evaluation > Position Display > Settings.
If you want to change how the current PosDisp series is dis-

played, you can also open the Position Display dialog box with
the Position Display: Series and Position Display: Selection
buttons. G.6
Place the input focus on the PosDisp series.

Click the Position Display: Series or Position Display:
Selection button on the Patient subtask card.
0.0

The Position Display dialog box opens. G.6
0.0

Configuring the display of You can choose the number of cut lines to be displayed. G.6
the cut lines

All
G.6
All cut lines are displayed.
First/Last
Only the first and last cut lines of a parallel line group are dis-
played.
Automatic
Cut lines that are too close to one another are automatically
hidden. Overlapping cut line labels are avoided.
Select an option under Slices.
G.6
N OT E
The system automatically switches from First/Last to
Automatic as soon as the first and last cut line of a group
can not be calculated. G.6
This does not affect any other line groups. G.6
The above occurs if a data image does not intersect the

reference image. G.6
0.0

Defining the position of You may set a preferred position for the cut line labels in the
the cut line labels G.6 PosDisp image. G.6
Click the appropriate button to place the labels on the left, on

the right, below, or above.
Defining display of the If you are editing a PosDisp series containing several slices, it
cut line labels G.6 is not advisable to label every cut line. G.6
Click one of the following options:

None
No cut lines are labeled.
First/Last
Only the first and last cut lines from each parallel and equi-
distant line group are labeled.
All
All cut lines are labeled.
Automatic
All cut lines are labeled as long as they do not overlap. Indi-
vidual labels are hidden if they do overlap.
Every
Only every nth cut line is labeled. Sorting is based on image
number and starts at 1.
Enter an increment in the text input field for the Every option.
0.0

Applying the settings G.6 You may save the configuration settings for the position dis-
play. G.6
Click the Apply button in the Position Display dialog box.

The dialog box will stay open. G.6
The position display settings will still apply the next time you
restart the system. G.6
0.0

CHAPTER Saving and Documenting
G.7 Images G.7
After image processing, when all the images have been dis-
played in an optimum way and have been evaluated, you can
save, store or transfer these images for further evaluation and
documentation or for 3D postprocessing. G.7
After that, you can close the images of this patient and make
space in the Viewing task card for the images of the next
patient. G.7
NOTE
irretrievably. G.7

any data you want to keep before you log off. G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.71

Saving and Documenting Images Viewing
Saving images G.7
After you have completed processing and evaluation of the

images, you save your results. G.7
You can save your images in one of two ways: G.7
You can place the processed images in a new series.

You can add the images to an existing series.
Before each storage operation, the system checks whether the

capacity of your hard disk is sufficient for saving these images.G.7
If not enough free storage capacity is available, a message box
is displayed. G.7
In this case, delete all the data which is no longer required

and is already stored from your hard disk before saving your
images.
0.0

Viewing Saving and Documenting Images
G.7
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Modifications in medical images are not
saved automatically in the same way as image comment.
Additionally, in case of a user switch where the new user
has no adequate access rights, modifications of the image
text may also be lost. G.7
Consequence: Image modifications may be lost. G.7
Remedy: Use Patient > Save... in order to save the image

comment and Patient > Save as... to save the image with
modifications as a new image. G.7
If you save multiframe images again, they will no longer be

treated as multiframes but as normal images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.73

Calling up the Save As Only images of the same study can be saved together in one
dialog box G.7 series. G.7
First select the images or series that you want to save.

Call up Patient > Save As.
G.7
The Save As dialog box is displayed. G.7
0.0

Saving images as a new You can save all selected images in a new series. The old series
series G.7 remains unchanged. You can then easily compare processed
and evaluated images with the original study images. G.7
Click on the Save images in new series option in the Save

As dialog box.
Enter the new series description in the text input field. The
default is the automatically generated serial number.
Confirm with OK.
The images are saved in a new series.
G.7
If you no longer require the original series later on, you can
delete it in the Patient Browser.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.75

Appending images to an If you do not want to create a new series for your processed and
existing series G.7 evaluated images, you can append them to an existing series.
G.7
Click on the Append images to series option in the Save

As dialog box.
Select the series in the selection list using the serial number
and serial description.
Confirm with OK.
As the default setting, you will find the series in the selection
list that was last used with Save As.
If you are using Save As for the first time and have selected
the images of different series, the series which is entered as
a default is that which contains the image last selected in the
image area.
0.0

Saving window values G.7
If you have changed the window values of your images during

image processing, you can save only the new window values.
G.7
Call up Image > Save Window Values.

Or G.7
Call up the popup menu (right mouse key) and select Save
Window Values.
Or G.7
Click on the Save Window Values button on the Report

subtask card.
The new window values are saved for the selected images. G.7
Window values are only saved if the user has the update per-
mission.
Saving of window values can be turned off by the modality.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.77

Exporting, passing on, or filming

images G.7
After an examination or postprocessing, the images are stored

in the local database from where they can be called up for
reporting or documentation, for example. G.7
A detailed description on exporting and sending is to be found

in,
Part J
Exporting images G.7
With the function Export To..., you can save patient and exam-
ination data to local exchangeable data media (to CD).
Chapter J.2, Storing Data on an External Medium
G.7
Inserting a CD G.7 Insert the required medium into the drive.
0.0

Storing data on CD G.7 Select the data that you want to store in the navigation or
content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Transfer > Export To CD-R.
Or G.7
Click this button.
The actual procedure for storage to CD-R, recording a CD-R,

starts automatically or can be triggered manually.
Page J.210, Automatic start of the write operation
Page J.211, Starting writing manually
G.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.79

Sending data via the network G.7
If your system is connected to a network, you can send patient

and examination data to other workstations via the network with
the Send To... function.
Page J.31, Sending Data via the Network G.7
Select the patient, study, series or the images in the naviga-

tion area or content area.
Standard address G.7
G.7 Press the Send To Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
Or
G.7
Call up Transfer > Send To Node 1 or Transfer > Send To

Node 2 to send the data to one of the preconfigured
addresses in the network.
Or G.7
G.7 Click on one of the two icon buttons on the tool bar.
The data are sent to the selected address. G.7
0.0

Selecting a destination G.7 Call up Transfer > Send To....

Or G.7
G.7 Click on the appropriate button on the toolbar instead.
Select the network address(es) you require in the Send To

dialog box.
G.7 Click on Send to send the selected data to the required
address(es).
0.0

Exporting images to the file system G.7
If you want to process or otherwise use images with other pro-

grams, you can export them to a specific directory on the sys-
tem hard disk in several image formats (Export To Off-line).
G.7
Call up Transfer > Export to Off-line.

Select the required directory in the Export to Off-line dialog
box.
Select the required image format (DICOM, or bitmap).
G.7 Click on OK to save the selected images as individual files.
0.0

Filming/printing images G.7
You can also use the Viewing task card to select images and
copy them to Filming or Film Preview.
G.7
Transferring images for Select the images in the image area of the Viewing task
filming/printing G.7 card.
Call up Patient > Copy to Film Sheet.

Or G.7
Click on this button on the Patient subtask card.
Or
G.7
All the selected images are transferred to the virtual film sheet
(Filming task card or Film Preview window). There you acti-
vate the Auto Expose option and the images are exposed on
film or printed on paper as soon as the film sheet has been
filled, or they are first collected in a film job.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming G.7
0.0

Film preview G.7 Call up Patient > Film Preview in the main menu to have a
preview displayed showing how the transferred images will
be filmed/printed.
Page O.32, Film Preview
Or G.7
G.7 Click on this button on the Patient subtask card.
Printing images/exposing You can print/expose a patients images that you have collected
images on film G.7 in a film job from the Viewing task card. You do not have to
switch to the Filming task card first.
G.7
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task to transfer all images of

that film job to the camera or printer.
If you have transferred images of more than one patient to the
Filming task card so that more than one film job exists, a dia-
log box is displayed where you can select the film job that you
require.
0.0

Film Task Status G.7 You can obtain an overview of all film jobs that have already
been transferred to the camera/printer and change the
sequence in which they are processed, for example.
Page O.53, Viewing and manipulating film jobs
G.7
Call up Patient > Film Task Status to display the Film Task
Status dialog box with a list of all the pending film jobs.
Filming multiframe imagesG.7 You can film and print multiframe images only from the Viewing
task card. G.7
0.0

Transferring images to 3D G.7
In the Viewing task card, you can transfer images to the 3D

task card for three-dimensional processing.
G.7
Select the images or series on the Viewing task card that

you want to process three-dimensionally.
Or G.7
Select no images if you want to transfer the entire content of

the opened patient folder (all images of the patient dis-
played).
Call up Applications > 3D > MPR, Applications > 3D > MIP

or Applications > 3D > SSD depending on the 3D method
with which you want to process your images.
The images are checked for suitability for 3D reconstruction and

transferred to the Series List dialog box.
Page H.26, Series List
G.7
If you select only one or two images, the entire series to which
the selected images belong are transferred, because 3D
requires a minimum number of images for processing. If you
select four or more images, only the selected images are
transferred.
0.0

Transferring images to Windows

applications G.7
From the Viewing task card, you can transfer images to Win-
dows applications via the Windows XP Clipboard. G.7
You can copy individual or several selected images and insert

them into a file of an image postprocessing program.
G.7
Call up Edit > Copy from the main menu.

Or G.7
Select Copy in the popup menu to copy the selected image

into the clipboard.
The last selected visible image will be copied as Bitmap (.bmp).
This includes all graphics, image text and image parameters
that are visible in the image area. G.7
If there are several images selected, only the last selected

image will be copied to the Windows XP Clipboard. G.7
Select Paste in the respective Windows application to paste

the copied images.
0.0

Closing images, series, studies,

and patients G.7
You can terminate processing of images on the Viewing task

card by closing the images, the associated series, or the patient
and thus removing them from the Viewing task card. G.7
The images are still saved in the local database.
G.7
Closing selected It is sometimes helpful to close individual images of a series, for

images or series G.7 example, because some of the images are not relevant for diag-
nosis. If you then save the remaining images as a new series, it
only contains the really relevant images. You can also close the
series of a study that you no longer want to process.
G.7
Select the images or series that you want to close.

Call up Edit > Clear Document(s).
0.0

Example: You want to close images A5 and B1 - B5. G.7
A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4
A5 B1 B2 B3 Clear documents B6 B7 C1 C2
B5 B6 B7 C1 C3 C4 C5
C2 C3 C4 C5
The other images move up and the gap will be closed. G.7
You can remove individual images of a multiframe image from

the Viewing task card with Clear Document(s).
Closing patients G.7 You can also close all images, series, and studies of the patient
whose images are currently displayed.
G.7
Call up Patient > Close Patient.

Or G.7
G.7 Click on the Close Patient button on the Patient subtask

card.
All the images of the patient are closed and removed from the
Viewing task card, the patient folder in the control area is
cleared. G.7
Changes in images are not saved, except for window values,

image comments, and the mark/unmark flags.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Configuring the Viewing
G.8 Task Card G.8
In Viewing Configuration, you can adapt the user interface

and program operation of the Viewing task card to your method
of working.
G.8
You can change and make the following settings: G.8
Display of statistical evaluation results

Whether series/studies remain on the Viewing task card
when you load new series/studies
Organ-specific and user-specific window values
Call up Numaris/4-Configuration Panel

G.8 Select the configuration window of the Viewing task card.
The Viewing Configuration window is displayed with the

Graphic Tools, Administration and Evaluation General tab
cards.
G.8
In the Basics part of this manual you can read how to call up
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.81

Configuring the Viewing Task Card Viewing
Displaying evaluation results G.8
When you draw ROIs and distance lines, the program evaluates
the areas and lines statistically.
Page G.54, Evaluating regions
Page G.517, Measuring distances and angles G.8
On the Graphic Tools tab card, you can set what evaluation
results are to be displayed in the images for each ROI or line
type. G.8
You can also make settings for the Scalegrid and Crosshair
evaluation tools on the Graphic Tools card. G.8
Click the Graphic Tools tab card into the foreground.
0.0

Viewing Configuring the Viewing Task Card
Selecting a graphic tool G.8
G.8 First select for which ROI or line type you want to change the
display of evaluation results.
Displaying evaluation
results G.8
G.8 Select or deselect the display of evaluation results by clicking

or deselecting the corresponding check box.
Gray scale range G.8
G.8 Select the Limit check box to evaluate only those pixels of
the ROI that are within a gray scale range that you can now
define.
Or G.8
Deselect the Limit check box to evaluate the entire gray

scale range of the ROI.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.83

Changing the settings on You can change all the settings for the various graphic tools not
the task card G.8 only on the configuration platform but also directly on the View-
ing task card.
G.8
Place the cursor on the icon button of the graphic tool whose
settings you want to change on the task card stack.
Call up Properties... in the popup menu (right mouse but-
ton).
A dialog box for defining the properties of this graphic tool is dis-
played. You can now change the settings for this graphic tool.
This setting will be used whenever you call this graphic tool in
the future. G.8
G.8
NOTE
If, however, you select a drawing element in an image and
then call up Edit > Properties... (or Properties... in the
popup menu), the settings that you can make in the dialog
box now displayed apply to the selected
drawing element only. G.8
0.0

Closing of series/studies in the

Viewing task card G.8
On the Administration card, you can see whether series or

studies of a patient that are already on the Viewing task card
are removed from Viewing if you load a new series/study of this
patient. G.8
These settings are defined by your system administrator or

Siemens Service.
Click the Administration tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.85

If the option is selected, all studies of a patient loaded on the

Viewing task card are removed as soon as a new study of this
patient is loaded.
G.8
If the option is selected, all series of a study currently loaded

are removed from the Viewing task card as soon as a new
series of this study is loaded. G.8
0.0

Organ- and user-specific window

values G.8
On the Viewing task card, you can window the images by

assigning them predefined organ-specific or user-specific win-
dow values.
Page G.411, Assigning predefined window settings G.8
The Evaluation General card allows you to create window val-

ues of this type, assign a name to them (e.g. organ designation
or user name), and change or delete window values already
created.
G.8
Click the Evaluation General card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.87

Selecting a name G.8
Enter a name in the combo box to create new organ- or user-

specific window values.
Or G.8
Select a name from the list edit window values or delete it.
Deleting window values G.8 The selection list can contain up to 30 entries. If you want to
define new window values when the list is full, you must first
delete an existing entry. G.8
Select an entry.
Click on the Delete button to delete the entry.
Delete entries you no longer require from time to time in the

Default window list to keep the Windowing submenu clearer.G.8
0.0

Entering or changing If you have entered a new name in the Default window field,
window values G.8 the input fields for the window values are initially empty. G.8
Enter the new window values in the spin boxes.

If you have chosen a name that already exists in the Default
window field, you can now change the window value stored
under this name. G.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T G.89

0.0

PART
H 3D Evaluation H.0
H.1 Introduction
3D evaluation method .................................................... H.12
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) .............................. H.13
Maximum (MIP) and minimum (MinIP)
intensity projection ..................................................... H.15
Surface shaded display (SSD) .................................. H.18
Volume rendering technique (VRT) ......................... H.110
The 3D task card .......................................................... H.111
H.2 Transferring Images to 3D

Starting 3D evaluation .................................................... H.22
Calling the 3D task card ................................................. H.25
Series List ...................................................................... H.26
Merging series ........................................................... H.29
Transferring series to 3D ......................................... H.210
Other series from the Series List ............................. H.212
H.3 Working in 3D
The patient coordinate system ....................................... H.32
Orientation aids in the image ..................................... H.35
Image representation in 3D ............................................ H.37
Image area in reference mode .................................. H.37
Image information ...................................................... H.39
Setting views in the volume data set............................ H.311
Setting the reference image .................................... H.311
Using the 3D cross hair ........................................... H.313
Paging with the dog ears ......................................... H.317
Shifting ..................................................................... H.318
Rotating the volume with the mouse ....................... H.319
Rotating around one axis (oblique cut planes) ........ H.320
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H1
Contents 3D Evaluation
Rotating around two axes

(double-oblique cut planes) ...................................... H.324
Controlling image orientation ................................... H.325
Setting standard views ............................................. H.327
Fixing the angle ........................................................ H.331
Blow Up Segment .................................................... H.335
Smart Select............................................................. H.338
Defining output types .................................................... H.339
Setting MPR ............................................................. H.340
Setting MIP............................................................... H.341
Setting MinIP ............................................................ H.343
Setting SSD.............................................................. H.344
Setting VRT .............................................................. H.346
3D task card with mixed output types ...................... H.347
Free View ..................................................................... H.348
Common interactions in the free view segment ....... H.351
Interactions with the clipbox ..................................... H.352
Measurements in 3D .................................................... H.353
Measuring distances ................................................ H.354
Measuring angles ..................................................... H.359
Drawing ROIs ........................................................... H.363
Evaluating pixels, pixel lens ..................................... H.368
Text in images .......................................................... H.370
Generating series from 3D images ............................... H.372
Generating parallel images ...................................... H.377
Postprocessing series of parallel images ................. H.386
Generating curved ranges........................................ H.387
Postprocessing series of curved images.................. H.396
Generating an expanded range ............................... H.397
Generating radial images ....................................... H.3101
0.0
H2 Operator Manual
3D Evaluation Contents
Postprocessing a radial range ............................... H.3110

Series of radial projections and views ................... H.3111
Saving a parameter set with presets ..................... H.3115
H.4 Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)

Transfer as MPR to 3D .................................................. H.42
Changing the slice thickness (MPR Thick) ................ H.43
Generating series of images .......................................... H.45
Generating curved slices ............................................... H.47
Drawing curves .......................................................... H.48
Displaying images ................................................... H.410
H.5 Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection

Transfer as MIP to 3D .................................................... H.54
Extracting a volume of interest (VOI) ............................. H.56
Using the VOI clipbox ................................................ H.57
Activating VOI punch mode ..................................... H.511
Defining a freehand VOI .......................................... H.513
Undoing deletion of VOIs ......................................... H.520
Combining the MIP/MinIP and SSD output types .... H.521
Generating complex VOIs ....................................... H.523
Exiting VOI mode ..................................................... H.528
Generating a radial series from MIP/MinIP displays .... H.529
Defining the MIP slice thickness (MIP Thin) ................ H.530
Generating series of MIP Thin images .................... H.533
Generating curved slices ......................................... H.534
Defining the MinIP slice thickness (MinIP Thin) ........... H.535
Generating series of MinIP Thin images ................. H.538
Generating curved slices ......................................... H.539
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H3
H.6 Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)

Transferring as SSD to 3D ............................................. H.62
SSD reconstruction with changed thresholds ............ H.63
Creating and processing predefined
threshold values ....................................................... H.611
Generating a radial series of SSD displays .................. H.615
H.7 Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)

Transferring to 3D as VRT ............................................. H.72
Assigning parameter sets ............................................... H.74
Automatic assignment of the parameter set............... H.75
Assigning a parameter set manually .......................... H.76
Creating and editing parameter sets ............................ H.710
Dialog box VRT Definition ........................................ H.710
Editing a parameter set ............................................ H.714
Saving a parameter set ............................................ H.720
Deleting a parameter set .......................................... H.721
Finishing VRT Definition........................................... H.721
Defining a VRT slice thickness (VRT Thin) .................. H.722
H.8 Selecting and Processing Images

Selecting images and 3D graphics ................................. H.82
Showing and hiding reference lines ........................... H.84
Windowing images ......................................................... H.85
Defining the scope of action
(Single Windowing) .................................................... H.86
Processing an image view .............................................. H.87
Changing the image display with color LUTs ................. H.89
0.0
H4 Operator Manual
H.9 3D Editor
Functions of the 3D Editor ............................................. H.92
Calling up the 3D Editor ................................................. H.94
3D card in editor mode .............................................. H.95
Dialog box Object Editor ............................................ H.96
The Slab Editor .............................................................. H.97
Switching on the Slab Editor ...................................... H.98
Changing a 3D block ................................................. H.99
Block by block editing with the Slab Editor .............. H.912
Creating 3D objects ..................................................... H.913
Creating an object with threshold ............................ H.914
Creating an object with Region Growing ................. H.919
Working with the object list .......................................... H.924
Selecting objects ..................................................... H.926
Changing object properties ...................................... H.927
Displaying objects in the slab segment ................... H.928
Updating the display ................................................ H.931
Saving, adding, deleting objects .............................. H.932
Postprocessing objects ................................................ H.935
Cutting out structures .............................................. H.935
Morphological editing ............................................... H.942
Closing the 3D Editor ................................................... H.946
H.10 Fusion
Functions of Fusion ...................................................... H.102
Calling up Fusion ......................................................... H.103
Loading image data sets ......................................... H.104
3D card in Fusion mode .......................................... H.107
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H5
Aligning image series ................................................... H.108

Registration Matrix ................................................. H.1010
Aligning images visually ......................................... H.1012
Aligning images with reference points.................... H.1017
Automatic Registration ........................................... H.1022
Surface Matching ................................................... H.1025
Closing alignment................................................... H.1031
Displaying overlaid images ......................................... H.1032
Side-by-Side mode................................................. H.1032
Fusion mode .......................................................... H.1036
Changing the display.............................................. H.1038
Saving result images .............................................. H.1044
Results for non 3-D applications ............................ H.1045
H.11 Fly Through

Starting Fly Through ..................................................... H.113
Changing the display mode...................................... H.115
Free movement within the volume ............................. H.1110
Fly View Volume (FVV) .......................................... H.1111
Changing the Fly view via the FVV ........................ H.1113
Changing the Fly view in the Fly segment ............. H.1116
Defined movement within the volume ........................ H.1120
Auto Navigation ...................................................... H.1121
Defining the path .................................................... H.1122
Flight along a path.................................................. H.1128
Closing Fly Through ................................................... H.1132
0.0
H6 Operator Manual
H.12 Saving 3D Series and Images

Storing 3D images manually ........................................ H.122
Saving with the default settings ............................... H.122
Defining setting when saving ................................... H.123
Saving 3D-series ..................................................... H.128
Storing series automatically ....................................... H.1210
H.13 Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images

Filming 3D images ....................................................... H.132
Transferring images to the Viewing task card .............. H.133
Sending images through the network and storing ........ H.134
H.14 3D Configuration
Configuring image information ..................................... H.142
Configuring processing of series .................................. H.144
Configuring storage ................................................. H.145
Configuring filming ................................................... H.146
Configuring the orientation of the reference image . H.147
Configuring quality filter ........................................... H.148
Configuring resampling ............................................ H.149
Configuring Fly Through ............................................ H.1410
Updating changes .................................................. H.1411
Path representation ............................................... H.1412
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H7
0.0
H8 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
H.1 Introduction H.1
The result of a tomographic examination is a sequence of

images through a solid volume.
By combining two-dimensional images, it is possible to obtain a
three-dimensional display of the region of interest. H.1
(1) (2)
(1) 2D tomographic images

(2) Volume data set
In this three-dimensional display, you can work just like in a
three-dimensional model. For example, you can generate new
images, cut out individual regions and apply a range of evalua-
tion functions for special diagnostic problems. H.1
Your system provides you with a number of alternative proce-

dures for working with three-dimensional images.
You decide with what method you want to begin as soon as you
load images into the 3D task card. H.1
On the 3D task card, you then prepare your image material by

the selected method, or you start another image processing
procedure. H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.11

Introduction 3D Evaluation
3D evaluation method H.1
Your system provides you with the following methods for com-
bining two-dimensional images to form three-dimensional
views: H.1
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) is used to place the slices

in various orientations through the region of interest. The
resulting images are two-dimensional.
You can use the maximum intensity projection (MIP) for the
display of contrast medium examinations or especially for
angiography.
You can use the minimum intensity projection (MinIP) espe-
cially to display the pulmonary tissue.
You can use the surface shaded display (SSD) method, for
example, to evaluate bone and vascular examinations that
you want to display with virtual three-dimensionality.
Volume rendering technique (VRT) is used, for example, to
differentiate between organs and tissue structures, and for
colored, three-dimensional display of bone, tissue, and
organs.
0.0
H.12 Operator Manual

3D Evaluation Introduction
Multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) H.1
With multiplanar reconstruction you can calculate secondary

images of any planes from the volume, for example sagittal,
coronal, or any curved views. H.1
You can reconstruct both single images and series of images.H.1
(1) Transversal/axial
(2) Coronal
(3) Paraxial
(4) Sagittal
(5) Paraxial
(6) Sagittal
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.13

In MPR, two-dimensional images are always calculated from

the "volume". However, you can move through the representa-
tion quickly using the 3D cross-hair or the mouse to gain a
three-dimensional impression. H.1
The smaller the distance between the slices or the larger the
degree of overlap of the original images, the greater the resolu-
tion in the examination direction. H.1
The minimum slice thickness of an MPR image is one voxel. But

you can generate thicker slices (MPR Thick). The gray-scale
mean values are calculated for voxels located one behind the
other. H.1
(1) MPR slice (1 voxel slice thickness)

(2) MPR Thick (slice thickness can be set)
0.0

Maximum (MIP) and minimum (MinIP)

intensity projection H.1
In the selected view through the volume elements (called vox-

els) with the greatest/least intensity are determined and pro-
jected onto a surface irrespective of whether they are at the
front or further back in the stack. This gives you the maximum/
minimum intensity projection.
H.1
MIP H.1 You can use this method, for example, to exploit the fact that
blood vessels are always displayed in the volume as the struc-
tures with the most intensive gray-scale values. H.1
(1) Voxels in MIP images

(2) Most intensive gray scale value
The voxel with the maximum intensity is displayed in the MIP
image. H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.15

Some structures, especially bones, cause interference in the

projections. Where bones and blood vessels are superimposed
on one another on the MIP projection, the voxels of the (denser)
bones can cover the voxels of the blood vessels. In this case,
reduce the target volume using the VOIs (Volumes of Interest)
until it only contains the vessels to be projected.
H.1
MinIP H.1 You can use this method, for example, for examinations of the
lung as the structures with the least intensive gray-scale val-
ues. H.1
In the MinIP image the voxels with the minimum intensity are
displayed.
H.1
In order to gain a three-dimensional impression you can gener-

ate several MIP/MinIP images from different viewing directions
or rotate the projection using the mouse or the 3D cross-hair. H.1
0.0

MIP Thin / MinIP Thin H.1 You can limit the volume for a projection to a partial area of the
volume data set. In the output type MIP Thin / MinIP Thin you
define which expansion the volume used for the projection
should have. H.1
(1) Normal MIP or MinIP Thin, whole volume

(2) MIP Thin or MinIP Thin, only partial volume (slice) is used
for projection
(3) Part used
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.17

Surface shaded display (SSD) H.1
With this method, you reconstruct the surfaces of volumes.

These volumes consist of voxels (volume voxels) whose gray-
scales are in a range defined by two limit values, an upper and
a lower gray-scale limit. This method is especially suitable for
displaying bone structures or blood vessels filled with contrast
medium. H.1
(1) Voxels in the SSD image

(2) Foremost surface voxel volume data set
The foremost voxel of the volume range that is within a defined
gray-scale range is displayed in the SSD image. H.1
0.0

You can change the viewing direction in real time with the
mouse or 3D cross hair. You can also generate series of views
taken from different viewing angles. H.1
You can, for example, cut out any structures to expose areas of
special interest. H.1
The gray-scales that are shown on the display are no longer the
measured values. They are only intended to give a three-
dimensional impression. H.1
A fine distinction in the density of the tissue is no longer possi-

ble, for example, calcification and contrast medium in the ves-
sels can no longer be distinguished by their density in SSD. H.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.19

Volume rendering technique (VRT) H.1
The volume rendering technique (VRT) is a way of creating

color images in which a 3D effect is achieved with such param-
eters as transparency, shading, and color transition. H.1
The entire volume data set is included in the image. Areas of

interest such as bone and blood vessels can be emphasized
interactively by assigning appropriate color and transparency
values. H.1
The VRT method is based on the idea that defined rendering

properties (color, brightness, contrast, and transparency) are
assigned to the voxels of the volume data set depending on the
initial pixel value (MR signal value). In practice, pixel input value
ranges are assigned to specific tissue classes. H.1
0.0

The 3D task card H.1
You process your three-dimensional images on the 3D task

card. H.1
The task card is subdivided into the following main areas: H.1
(1) Main menu, extended by 3D-specific items

(2) Control area for easy call-up of functions
(3) Image area, subdivided into four segments
(4) Status bar for feedback and error messages
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.111

0.0

CHAPTER
H.2 Transferring Images to 3D H.2
For three-dimensional image processing, you use examination

images that are stored in the local database of your system or
in the archive. H.2
If your system is integrated into a hospital network, you can

receive image data from other departments and wards and
evaluate it on your system. H.2
In the Patient Browser window, you have access to this data.

There you can search for patients, studies, series, or individual
images and transfer them to the 3D task card. H.2
You can also transfer images from the Viewing to the 3D task
card. H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.21

Transferring Images to 3D 3D Evaluation
Starting 3D evaluation H.2
You call up 3D processing and load a 3D model in three steps:
H.2
Selecting images/series for First select the images or series that you want to display in three
processing H.2 dimensions in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing task
card. H.2
In this step, you can select more than one series of one patient
for 3D processing.
H.2
Selecting a 3D display After that, select a 3D method and transfer the images/series
method H.2 selected to the 3D task card.
Page G.716, Transferring images to 3D
Page D.310, Processing images in 3D H.2
Or H.2
Drag & drop from the Transfer the images selected in the Patient Browser as an
Patient Browser H.2 MPR by dragging & dropping them onto the 3D task card.
images from the Browser onto the corresponding tab. The
task card moves into the foreground and the images are
loaded into the image area.
When transferring them, the system checks whether the
images and series that you selected are suitable for 3D postpro-
cessing. If necessary, the system displays a message box
pointing out inconsistencies within the series. H.2
0.0

3D Evaluation Transferring Images to 3D
A selection of images that are to be displayed in three dimen-

sions must at least fulfill the following criteria: H.2
All images must originate from one patient and from one
study.
At least 3 images must have been loaded to process 3D.
All images must be parallel and be located on one axis.
If you have selected only one series which also fulfills all the
above criteria, the images will be transferred to the 3D task card
and you can start processing them immediately. H.2
In that case, turn straight to

Page H.41, Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)
Page H.51, Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection
Page H.61, Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)
Page H.71, Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
H.2
If you select several series or an unsuitable series, the Series

List is displayed.
Page H.26, Series List
H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.23

Displaying a series from The last step is to select a series from the Series List and
the Series List in three transfer it to the 3D task card. H.2
dimensions H.2
On the 3D task card, the selected series is displayed in three
dimensions in the selected method. You can now evaluate the
display. H.2
You can only ever process one series at a time on the 3D task
card.
0.0

Calling the 3D task card H.2
As soon as you have loaded images into the 3D task card you
may switch to other tasks and then return to the 3D task card to
continue processing the images.
H.2
H.2 Click on the card tab to return to the 3D task card.
The 3D task card is placed at the front in the same status you
have left the card. H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.25

Series List H.2
If the series you selected is not suitable for 3D display or if you

have selected more than one series for processing, you can see
the results of the selection check in the Series List dialog box.
H.2
Open Series List H.2 You can also open the Series List explicitly, for example, to load
another series into the 3D task card.
Page H.212, Other series from the Series List
H.2
Call Patient > Open Series List... in the main menu of the
3D task card.
0.0

The dialog window 3D Series List is displayed. It is divided into

the following fields: H.2
(1) Patient data

(2) Series suitable for 3D display (valid series)
(3) Series unsuitable for 3D display (invalid series)
Valid list H.2 All the series suitable for a 3D reconstruction are shown in the
top list (valid list). Depending on how many series you have
selected, several lists might be displayed, from which, however,
you can only select and transfer one. H.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.27

Invalid List H.2 All the series unsuitable for 3D reconstruction are displayed in
the lower list (Invalid series). Displayed next to the series data
you will also see a comment which gives a more detailed rea-
son for rejection. H.2
Your computer system only has a limited storage capacity.

Thus, the number of images for 3D display is also limited. In
the Series List box, you will find the images which can not be
loaded in the Invalid Series list.
Hiding the Invalid You can hide the Invalid Series list to keep the Series List dia-
Series list H.2 log box clear. H.2
H.2 Click on the Show invalid series list check box to remove
the checkmark and deselect the option.
The screen display is updated immediately, the Valid Series list
is displayed larger. The Invalid Series list is no longer dis-
played. H.2
If none of the series you selected is suitable for 3D display, so

that the Valid Series list is empty, you cannot hide the Invalid
Series list.
0.0

Merging series H.2
If you have selected a series for 3D display whose examination

ranges overlap, you can decide in the Series List whether you
want these series to be merged to form a single series for your
3D model. In this way, it is possible to enlarge the volumes dis-
played or the image quality is improved. H.2
The series that you want to merge must have been acquired
within 30 minutes of each other.
H.2 Select the Merge when possible option if you want to merge
suitable series.
The screen display is updated immediately. H.2
If the series are MR acquisitions, then the system takes the

images of the first series in the first half of the overlap range
and the images of the second series in the second half of the
overlap range.
H.2 Deselect Merge when possible, if you want to separate

merged series again.
Deselect this option if you have selected multiple series at the
same position but at different times. If two or more series at
exactly the same position are available, only the most recent
will be used for Merge when possible option, all others will
be rejected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.29

Transferring series to 3D H.2
If the list of Valid Series contains more than one series which is
suitable for 3D display, you have to decide which series you
want to display and evaluate in three dimensions. H.2
You can only ever display and process one series at a time on
the 3D task card.
Only medical images can be transferred into the 3D task card.
Double-click in the list of Valid Series on the series that you

want to process first.
Or H.2
H.2 Select the series in the list and click on the button.
The series is passed on to the 3D task card and the Series List
dialog box is closed.
H.2
Close without transfer H.2 Once you have transferred images to the Series List you can
stop processing, for example, processing images. H.2
H.2 Click on Cancel to close the Series List dialog box.

You return to the Viewing task card or the Patient Browser. H.2
0.0

3D task card already busy H.2 If you are processing another series on the 3D task card, the
Confirm dialog box is displayed. H.2
H.2 Confirm with Yes to load the new series onto the 3D task
card and close the old series.
Or H.2
Click on No if you want to continue processing the old series

on the 3D task card.
The new list is not transferred. The dialog window Series List
is displayed from which you can select a different list, for exam-
ple. H.2
0.0

Or H.2
H.2 To cancel transfer of the new series, click on the Cancel but-
ton.
You return to the Patient Browser or to the Viewing task card.
H.2
Other series from the Series List H.2
At any time, you can also access the other series that you had
preselected for processing in the Series List from the 3D task
card. H.2
Call up the Series List dialog box with Patient > Open
Series List....
Select another series and transfer it by clicking on the Select
button.
The series previously loaded is closed. H.2
0.0

CHAPTER
H.3 Working in 3D H.3
Your data exists as a volume data set. A large variety of options

are available to you for generating and processing two-dimen-
sional images. H.3
Various orientation aids, e.g., the orientation cube, guide you

through the volume. They refer to a patient coordinate system
that displays the viewing direction or the image orientation. H.3
You can move around the volume to find the images relevant to
your diagnosis. To do that, use the Free View, the 3D cross-hair,
the dog ears, or rotate the image data set using the mouse. H.3
You have tools for region evaluation, measuring distances,
lengths, and angles, and for pixel evaluation. H.3
Once you have generated a reference image you can recon-

struct entire series in the view you want with the set output
types. H.3
You first generate an image in the orientation that you need.

This is the reference image on which all subsequent working
steps are based (either the orientation or the viewing direction).
Then you select the output type, i.e. either MPR, MIP, MinIP,
SSD or VRT, or use the type already set. H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.31

Working in 3D 3D Evaluation
The patient coordinate system H.3
The orientation of the images is stated by a patient-related

coordinate system. In each image, this data tells you the direc-
tion from which you are looking at the patient (3D) and how a
slice (2D) is positioned in the region of interest. H.3
0.0

3D Evaluation Working in 3D
Directions H.3 Directions are described as follows in the patient coordinate

system: H.3
(1) F for feet (from the feet to the head)

(2) R for right (from the right to the left)
(3) A for anterior (from anterior to posterior)
(4) H for head (from the head to the feet)
(5) L for left (from the left to the right)
(6) P for posterior (from posterior to anterior)
The directions are displayed as orientation labels in the images.
Page H.36, Orientation labels H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.33

Anatomical standard Viewing directions along one of the axes of the patient coordi-
views H.3 nate system are called anatomical standard views. The slices
which you look at in such views are designated: H.3
(1) Sagittal slice

(2) Transversal slice
(3) Coronal slice
0.0

Orientation aids in the image H.3
Various aids are displayed for orientation in the image. They

show you from what direction you are looking at the image. H.3
Orientation description H.3
H.3 For MR images, angle data is displayed that refers to the stan-
dard views (sagittal, transversal and coronal). If, for example,
you tip an image from the transversal viewing plane towards the
coronal plane, you can see by what angle you have rotated the
plane. You can also rotate the representation in a single plane.
If you rotate the image in the direction of the other viewing plane
(in this case sagittal), this angle of rotation, too, is indicated with
reference to the standard view. H.3
The orientation description is also filmed and stored.

H.3
Orientation cube H.3
H.3 The orientation cube is displayed on all images. It indicates the

position of the layer displayed with reference to the patient coor-
dinate system.
Page H.32, The patient coordinate system H.3
The cube is also filmed and saved together with the images. H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.35

Orientation labels H.3 The orientation labels show you the orientation of the patient in
the image. They are identical with the directions in the patient
coordinate system and are not annotations that you can edit.
This text is always displayed in the center of the top and left
edge of the image. H.3
L, R - left, right
Viewing direction sagittal from left or right
A, P - anterior, posterior
Viewing direction coronal from anterior or posterior
H, F - head, feet
Viewing direction transversal from head or feet
Page H.327, Setting standard views
When generating curved cuts or curved ranges, an orienta-

tion label in < > brackets is displayed.
Page H.410, Displaying images
0.0

Image representation in 3D H.3
The image area on the 3D task card is divided into four seg-
ments. The segments have different functions depending on the
mode you are currently working in.
H.3
Image area in reference mode H.3
The first three segments are reference segments, the fourth

segment is an output segment. H.3
Reference segments H.3 In the three reference segments the images are first shown in
the views that are parallel and perpendicular to the direction of
scanning. H.3
By turning and moving the views you can define the position
and orientation of the plane that is to be used as the reference
image for the reconstruction of images or series. H.3
The reference segments are used to display different views of

the volume data set, while the reference display (the view) is
used as a reference for a 3D-reconstruction. H.3
Output segment H.3 The images and series generated by various tools on the basis
of the reference image are displayed in the output segment. H.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.37

(1) Reference segment (sagittal view)

(2) Reference segment (coronal view)
(3) Reference segment (transversal view)
(4) Output segment
H.3
0.0

Image information H.3
Information about the patient, the examination and image data

are shown on the images. H.3
You can configure which image text is to be displayed.

The image information displayed is always given in the same
place as shown in the figure below: H.3
(9)
(1) (2)
(8)
(2)
(7)
(4) (6)
(3) (5)
(1) Patient data

(2) Orientation labels
Page H.36, Orientation labels
(3) Slice thickness
(only MPR, MPR Thick, MIP Thin, MinIP Thin)
(4) Image comment
(5) Automatic values of the pixel lens
(6) Window values
(7) Orientation cube
Page H.35, Orientation cube
(8) Orientation description
Page H.35, Orientation description
(9) Hospital / system information
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.39

Of the standard text elements, the following elements are not

displayed: H.3
Scan-specific settings
(normally in the bottom left corner)
Scale
(on the right edge)
It depends on the configuration settings whether or not the
orientation description is displayed.
Page H.142, Configuring image information
0.0

Setting views in the volume data set H.3
Three-dimensional image processing allows you to create

images in any orientations and positions within the data vol-
ume. You "move" through the volume and can rotate it in any
direction. Depending on the method you are using, various aids
are available to you.
H.3
Setting the reference image H.3
Once you have loaded the images into the 3D task card you can
move through the 3D model using the aids provided on this task
card. H.3
First generate a view you require. You can use this view as ref-
erence image as the basis for further processing. For example,
you can reconstruct parallel slice images on it. H.3
First generate a view you require.

Click on the reference segment of the required view.
You can use this view as a reference image as the basis for fur-
ther processing. The segment is now displayed with a thick bor-
der. H.3
For example, you can reconstruct parallel slice images on it. H.3
0.0

Selecting a reference Set the view in which you want to perform subsequent 3D eval-
image H.3 uation in one of the three reference segments. This view is then
your reference image. H.3
Click on the segment in question to select the image.

The image is displayed with a thick border. In the example
below, it is the top left-hand segment. H.3
0.0

Using the 3D cross hair H.3
The lines through the cross hair (reference lines) indicate the
position of two slice planes that are perpendicular to each other
in the standard view (the lines represent the cut lines). The two
planes are displayed in the two other reference segments. H.3
You can recognize which slice image belongs to which cut lines
in the segment in question by the color of the reference lines
and the frame around the reference segments. H.3
The top left-hand segment is surrounded by a red border. The

position of the corresponding image in the volume data set is
indicated in the two other reference segments by a red line.
Correspondingly, the position of the image in a blue border is
indicated by blue lines and that of the image in the green frame
by green lines. H.3
The arrows indicate the viewing direction from which you view
a plane. H.3
Broken lines indicate planes that are not perpendicular to the

view displayed. H.3
0.0

Moving reference lines H.3 You can now move through the views of the reference segments
in any direction using the lines. H.3
H.3 Click on a line and move it holding the left mouse button
down.
Or H.3
Click on the intersection of the lines to move both lines at the

same time.
As an alternative, you can move the reference lines to a target

position in jumps by mouse click. H.3
Click a line to select it and then click the target position with
the left mouse button.
The reference line is moved there immediately. H.3
0.0

Or H.3
Select the entire reference image and click the target posi-
tion with the left mouse button (no reference line selected).
Both lines are moved in such a way that the intersection is now
at the position you clicked. H.3
0.0

Rotating by cross hair H.3 You can change the view in a reference segment by turning the
corresponding line of the cross hair in one of the other two seg-
ments. H.3
Enable rotation of the lines first by disabling fixed mode and

Free Mode. H.3
H.3 Select Free Mode to activate free mode.
H.3 Now rotate the lines about the displayed point of rotation.
In this way, you create oblique planes (only one line is oblique)
or double-oblique planes (both lines are oblique). H.3
If you want to freeze an angle, you can deselect the Free Mode
option again. H.3
H.3 Click on the active button.
0.0

Paging with the dog ears H.3
When you set the output types MPR, MPR Thick, MIP Thin or
MinIP Thin, you will see dog ears in the top right-hand corner of
the reference segments. H.3
You can move slice by slice forwards or backwards through the

volume using the dog ears. The corresponding line of the cross
hair in another segment moves in parallel. H.3
(1) Page backwards

(2) Page forwards
0.0

Shifting H.3
An interactive equivalent to the dog ear is Shifting. You can

move slice by slice forwards or backwards through the volume.
The other segments are updated simultaneously. H.3
Shifting with the mouse H.3 Click in the segment you want to scroll.
Call up Orientation > Shift in the main menu.
Or H.3
H.3 Activate the parallel shift option via Smart Select (right
mouse click).
Page H.338, Smart Select
H.3
H.3 The mouse cursor changes shape.
H.3
Shifting with the Scroll from image to image in a stack with the Image+ or
keyboard H.3 Image- keys of your keyboard.
0.0

Rotating the volume with the mouse H.3
You can also create oblique and double-oblique images by

rotating the image display in one of the segments with the
mouse. H.3
Call up Orientation > Rotate Images.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the button in the upper part of the control area.
Or
H.3
Call up rotate object with Smart Select.
H.3 When you position the mouse cursor on the segment, the
cursor changes shape.
Move the mouse cursor keeping the left mouse button
pressed down.
Moving the mouse from the center of the segment to the top,
bottom, left, or right tilts the object in the corresponding
direction.
Moving the mouse along the border of the segment spins the
object in the plane in the corresponding direction.
0.0

Rotating around one axis (oblique cut

planes) H.3
For oblique slices, you rotate a slice around one axis of the
patient coordinate system starting from the standard view. H.3
The orientation is displayed in the image as a combination of
two orientation labels. This designation is comparable with the
designations used on a compass, e.g. NW for north-west. H.3
One of the two reference lines in the image is now dotted. The
corresponding plane is therefore oblique in relation to the dis-
played image. H.3
Two different directions of rotation (around an axis) exist for

each standard view, each of which are explained graphically in
the following examples. H.3
In the following examples, the patient is positioned head first,

supine.
0.0

Transversal slice H.3 You can rotate a transversal slice toward the coronal or sagittal
plane. H.3
Rotation of the transversal slice toward the sagittal slice (left

example)
Rotation of the transversal slice toward the coronal slice
(right example)
Sag
H Tra Tra Sag
Tra
RH Cor
Cor Cor
F F L L F
H.3 H.3 L H.3
A AH
RF
R
Depending on the direction of rotation, further combinations of

orientation labels are displayed, e.g. RH, LF, AH, PF. H.3
0.0

Sagittal slice H.3 You can rotate a sagittal slice toward the transversal or coronal
plane. H.3
Rotation of the sagittal slice toward the transversal slice (left

example)
Rotation of the sagittal slice toward the coronal slice (right
example)
A
Sag A Tra
Sag Tra
H Cor
Cor
L
HL H
A AR
Depending on the direction of rotation, other combinations of

orientation labels such as AL, PR, HR or PL can also result. H.3
0.0

Coronal slice H.3 You can rotate a coronal slice toward the transversal or sagittal
plane. H.3
Rotation of the coronal slice toward the transversal slice (left

example)
Rotation of the coronal slice toward the sagittal slice (right
example)
A A
Sag Tra Sag Tra
H
R R H
Cor Cor
HA H
R RA
Depending on the direction of rotation, other combinations of

orientation labels such as RH, HP, FA or LF can result. H.3
0.0

Rotating around two axes (double-oblique cut

planes) H.3
You obtain cut planes in two axes whenever you rotate one slice
around two different patient coordinate axes one after the other.
The plane is then no longer perpendicular to either of the coor-
dinate axes. The image orientation is displayed as a combina-
tion of three orientation labels. H.3
A A
Sag Tra Sag Tra HRP
H H
Cor AR
Cor
(1) (2) (3)
(1) Rotation of the sagittal slice toward transversal slice

(2) Rotation of the Sag/Tra slice toward coronal
(3) Resulting view
0.0

Controlling image orientation H.3
If you rotate the image in a reference segment, the viewing

angle changes. To make orientation easier for you in such
images, orientation markers are displayed in the images.
Page H.36, Orientation labels H.3
Preferred directions H.3 The program also uses the following preferred directions for
image orientation/rotation within the selected cut plane: H.3
H H.3
H A
A
A HH H.3
A H.3
A
R R R H.3
R
R
R H.3
(1) In a sagittal view, the images are displayed anterior-head

(front of the patient left and head up). The orientation label
H is at the top.
(2) In a transversal view, the images are right-anterior (front
up, viewing direction towards the head). The orientation
label A is at the top.
(3) In a coronal view, the images are right-head (front, head
up). The orientation label H is at the top.
0.0

Automatic orientation If you rotate and tip an image from the sagittal plane towards
control H.3 the transversal plane, for example, you eventually find yourself
in the transversal view. The program then rotates the image by
another 90 to display it in a preferred direction again, i.e. from
anterior-head to right-anterior. H.3
PH AF
Call up Orientation > Orientation Control in the main menu

to activate this orientation control.
0.0

Setting standard views H.3
The standard views are used as a starting point for processing

images on the 3D task card. H.3
You can set views for individual segments independently. For

example, you can select a different view for each segment or
define the same view in all segments.
H.3
Transversal view H.3
H.3 In the transversal view you view the tomographic images of the
patient perpendicular to the patient axis (axis that runs from the
head to the feet of the patient).
Your viewing direction is therefore from top or from bottom, i.e.
cranio-caudal or caudo-cranial.
H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Head to Feet, or click on the button on

the Orientation tool card.
The viewing direction changes to transversal, cranio > caudal,
i.e. from head to feet. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Feet to Head or click on the button on

The viewing direction changes to transversal, caudo > cranial,
i.e. from feet to head. H.3
0.0

Sagittal view H.3 H.3
H.3 In the sagittal view, you view the patient from the side (from the
left or from the right).
H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Left to Right or click on the button on

The viewing direction changes to sagittal left. You view the
patient from the left side. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Right to Left or click on the button on

The viewing direction changes to sagittal right. You view the
patient from the right-hand side. H.3
0.0

Coronal view H.3 H.3
H.3 In the coronal view, you view the patient from the front or the
rear.
H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Front to Back or click on the button

on the Orientation tool card.
The viewing angle changes to anterior coronal. You view the
patient from the front. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Call up Orientation > Back to Front or click on the button

on the Orientation tool card.
The viewing angle changes to posterior coronal. You view the
patient from the rear. H.3
0.0

Restoring the standard The standard views serve as orientation aids. You can return to
view H.3 the standard view from any other view and start your processing
again.
H.3
Call up Orientation > Default Orientation to restore the

view set at the beginning of processing.
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Default Orientation button on the Orientation

tool card.
0.0

Fixing the angle H.3
As soon as you have set a view to a particular viewing angle,

you can set that angle. After that, you can no longer rotate the
reference lines, only move them. H.3
Call Orientation > Free Mode (checkmark disappears) to

move the lines in parallel only.
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the active button Free Mode in the upper part of the
control area to deselect the option.
Active Not active
0.0

The angle between the reference lines remains constant. The

reference lines now show the standard view. H.3
0.0

View perpendicular to Usually, you activate the orthogonal view to display slices along
reference image the main axis of an organ, e.g. the heart. In order to do this you
(Ortho Sync) H.3 first set the view in the reference image. H.3
Call up Orientation > Ortho Sync.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Ortho Sync button in the upper part of the con-
trol area.
0.0

Views are now displayed in the other reference segments which

are perpendicular to the reference image, in the example below
the top left-hand image. H.3
These images do not have to be perpendicular to the patient

coordinate system.
0.0

Blow Up Segment H.3
You can blow up each of the reference segments for a detailed

evaluation. Instead of the four image segments, a single view of
the selected segment is displayed. H.3
Activating Blow Up H.3
H.3 Call up View > Blow Up Segment.

Or H.3
Double-click on the selected segment.
0.0

The single view of the selected segment is now displayed. H.3
You can apply the same functions to the enlarged display as to

the 2:2 division. H.3
0.0

Deactivating Blow Up H.3 If you want to return to the normal view, deactivate the option
Blow Up again. H.3
Call up View > Blow Up Segment in the main menu again.

Or H.3
Double-click on the single view.

Blow-up is automatically undone, if a blow-up segment is
emptied (e.g. VOI mode is terminated) or if the display mode
is changed, e.g. with Fusion.
0.0

Smart Select H.3
You use Smart Select to switch functions directly in the image

segment without calling up the relevant menus. H.3
Explicit mode H.3 Place the mouse cursor in the segment and keep the right
A graphical popup menu is displayed. H.3
Drag the mouse cursor onto one of the four menu items and
release the mouse button again.
You can now apply the selected mouse option in the usual way
with the left mouse button.
H.3
Move the mouse over the central frame and release the
mouse button.
The frame will be highlighted in blue and any of the four options
will be switched off.
H.3
Implicit mode H.3 If you are already familiar with the special function Smart
Select you do not need to call up the popup menu. You can sim-
ply drag the mouse in the required direction keeping the right
mouse button pressed in order to select a certain option. H.3
0.0

Defining output types H.3
You can change the output type for a segment at any time, i.e.
from multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) to maximum (MIP) and
(MinIP) intensity projection, to surface shaded display (SSD), or
to volume rendering technique (VRT). H.3
Depending on your working method, you will first generate a ref-

erence image, for example, in MPR in the desired view and then
switch to MIP, MinIP, SSD or VRT display.
H.3
Click on the segment for which you want to change the out-
put type.
If you want to switch over all segments, you must select and
switch over each one separately, one after the other.
0.0

Setting MPR H.3
With multiplanar reconstruction you can generate tomographic

images in a view and position that you define in the volume data
set. H.3
H.3 Call up Type > MPR or click on the MPR button on subtask
card Type.
Or H.3
Transfer the images directly from the Patient Browser or the

Viewing task card to MPR mode. H.3
H.3 Call up Applications > 3D > MPR or click on the button

MPR.
0.0

Setting MIP H.3
The maximum intensity projection uses the most intensive gray-

scale values of the images for reconstruction. For example, in
contrast medium examinations, blood vessels are those struc-
tures with the most intensive values. The system considers
these voxels. The MIP display is therefore especially suitable for
vascular examinations. H.3
H.3 Call up Type > MIP or click on the MIP button on subtask
card Type.
The output type in the selected segment is switched over. H.3
0.0

Or H.3

Viewing task card to MIP mode. H.3
Call Applications > 3D > MIP.
0.0

Setting MinIP H.3
The minimum intensity projection uses the least intensive gray-

scale values of the images for reconstruction. The MinIP display
is therefore especially suitable for examinations of the lung. H.3
Call Type > MinIP.
The output type in the selected segment is switched over. H.3
0.0

Setting SSD H.3
After you have generated a reference image, you can also gen-
erate a surface structure in this view.
Page H.311, Setting the reference image H.3
You can display both complete volume data sets and previ-
ously defined partial volumes (VOIs, volumes of interest) in
SSD display.
Page H.56, Extracting a volume of interest (VOI)
Call up Type > SSD.
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the SSD button on the Type subtask card.

A surface view is generated in the selected segment. Your sys-
tem uses modality-specific default gray-scale values as thres-
hold values to extract the surface. H.3
Or H.3

Viewing task card to SSD mode. H.3
Call Applications > 3D > SSD.
0.0

The Threshold dialog box is displayed. H.3
There you can enter threshold values yourself and start SSD
extraction.
Page H.63, SSD reconstruction with changed thresholds H.3
0.0

Setting VRT H.3
With the volume rendering technique you can generate true

color images in which the entire volume data set is displayed.
The VRT display provides the most information about the exam-
ined volume data set.
H.3
In the 3D card H.3
H.3 Call up Type > VRT or click on the VRT button on subtask
card Type.
A three-dimensional image is generated in the selected seg-
ment. The system uses the preset parameter data sets for the
display. H.3
The VRT Gallery is supplied with a series of predefined

parameter data sets. You can change these parameter data
sets.
Page H.711, VRT Definition
H.3
In the Viewing or Transfer the images directly from the Patient Browser or the
Patient Browser card H.3 Viewing task card to VRT mode. H.3
Select the examination or series that you want to edit in 3D.

Call Applications > 3D > VRT.
0.0

3D task card with mixed output types H.3
You can set the three output types independently of each other
in the three reference segments. H.3
(1) MPR image

(2) MIP image
(3) SSD image
0.0

Free View H.3
With Free View you can isolate a part of the data set volume by
using clip planes and the clip box and, in that way, hide the area
you do not require.
H.3
Calling up Free View H.3 You can call up Free View via main menu or via icon in the sub-
task card. H.3
Select a segment.
Call up Settings > Free View in the main menu.
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Free View button in the Settings subtask card.
In the right lower segment the volume will be displayed in Free

View. H.3
0.0

(1) Reference segments (MPR)

(2) Free View segment (VRT)
0.0

Graphics H.3 You can call up the auxiliary lines as an aid to orientation when
rotating the volume and changing the clip plane. H.3
The clip box surrounds the entire volume displayed, the clip
planes indicate the position of the defined intersection planes.H.3
(1) Clip Box

(2) Clip Plane
(3) Clip Plane Slab Mode button
0.0

Common interactions in the free view

segment H.3
You can rotate, pan and zoom the volume displayed in the free
view segment. H.3
Rotate Object H.3 H.3
H.3 Click the Rotate Images button in the control area of the 3D
card.
Or H.3
H.3 Activate the rotate object option via Smart Select.
Or H.3
Select Orientation > Rotate Images in the main menu.

Zoom/Pan H.3
H.3 Click the Zoom/Pan button in the control area of the 3D card.
Or
H.3
Activate the zoom/pan option via Smart Select.

Or H.3
Select Image > Zoom/Pan in the main menu.
0.0

Interactions with the clipbox H.3
You can change the position and size of the clipbox. H.3
You cannot perform clip plane and clipbox interaction simulta-

neously.
Calling up the VOI Call up Settings > VOI Clipbox to access the VOI mode.
clipbox H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the VOI Clipbox button on the Settings subtask

card.
H.3 The clipbox graphics will be displayed in the free view seg-
ment. H.3
H.3
Changing the size H.3 Move the mouse cursor over the center of the clipbox side
until the border frame of the clip box side becomes high-
lighted blue.
The cursor shape changes. H.3
Drag the mouse cursor keeping the left mouse button

pressed in order to shift the side of the clipbox.
The clipbox cannot be moved as a whole.
0.0

Measurements in 3D H.3
On the 3D task card, you have tools for region evaluation, mea-
suring distances, lengths, and angles, and for pixel evaluation.H.3
You can annotate images with image texts in order to document
your evaluation. H.3
H.3
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Measurements in projected images H.3
Consequence: False diagnostics possible. H.3
Remedy: Do not use angle, distance, polygon, rectangle

and ROI measurements in projected images for diagnostic
purposes. H.3
0.0

Measuring distances H.3
You can measure distances and angles in images. H.3
Using a distance line, you can measure the distance between

two points in an image. H.3
H.3
Drawing a distance line H.3 Call up Tools > 2D Distance.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the 2D Distance button of the Image subtask card.

H.3
Place the mouse cursor on the starting point of the distance

line.
Hold the left mouse button down and drag out a line.
As soon as you move the mouse, the length of the straight line
you have drawn so far is displayed. H.3
Release the mouse button to finish the line.

The distance and the minimum and maximum gray scale values
are displayed. H.3
0.0

(1) Center
Center of the line
(2) Distance
Distance between the beginning and end point
(3) Min/Max
Minimum/maximum gray scale value on the straight line
0.0

Changing the distance Click on a distance line with the left mouse button.
line H.3
Or H.3
At positions at which you can edit the line, the mouse cursor
changes shape.
H.3
H.3 Drag the starting or end point of the line to another position.
The distance is updated as soon as you move the mouse cur-
sor. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Move the entire distance line to another location.
0.0

Drawing a freehand line H.3 You can measure not only the direct distance between two
points, but also the length of a structure, i.e. a blood vessel, by
drawing the shape with a freehand line.
H.3
Call up Tools > 2D Freehand Distance.

H.3 Place the mouse cursor in the segment and click on the start-
ing point of your line with the left mouse button.
H.3
Click on the first point at which you want your line to change
direction.
Then click on the next point etc. until you have drawn the
entire freehand line point by point.
The length of the line and the minimum and maximum gray
scale values are displayed. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the starting point of your freehand line with the left
mouse button.
Draw the structure with the left mouse button pressed.
0.0

After you have completed your freehand line, the following val-
ues are displayed. H.3
(1) Distance
Length of the line
(2) Min/Max
Minimum and maximum gray scale value on the line
0.0

Measuring angles H.3
You can define an angle by two lines, that you draw on the
image. The system then calculates the angle between the two
lines drawn in clockwise direction. If the angle is greater than
180, the program subtracts 180. H.3
A
A
(1) (2) (3)

B
The direction of the arrow indicates the direction in which you

have drawn the legs of the angle. H.3
(1) Both legs were drawn in the direction of the intersection.

The angle A between the legs is displayed.
(2) Both legs were drawn away from the intersection. The
angle A between the legs is displayed.
(3) Otherwise, the angle B (A - 180) is displayed.
0.0

Call up Tools > Angle.

Place the mouse cursor on a starting point for the first leg.
Drag a line to the end point of the first leg holding the left
Draw the second line in the same way.
As soon as you start to draw the second leg, the angle size will
be calculated. H.3
The two lines between which you want to measure an angle

do not have to intersect in the image. The program automati-
cally calculates the point of intersection even if you have not
drawn it or if it is beyond the edge of the image.
0.0

The two legs of an angle are assigned the same number so you
can distinguish several angles unambiguously. H.3
0.0

Changing an angle H.3 You can change the legs of an angle independently. H.3
Move the mouse cursor into the image.

At those positions at which you can change a leg of an angle,
the shape of the mouse cursor changes. H.3
Move the entire line or drag an end point to another location.

The angle is constantly updated.
H.3
H.3
N OT E
If the angle approximates to 90, 180, 270, it is not clear
whether the angle between the legs or the supplementary
angle has been entered. H.3
Label the angle with an annotation when you display the

supplementary angle.
0.0

Drawing ROIs H.3
You can mark anomalies in the images and then evaluate these
regions. To do this you draw a ROI graphic around the region of
particular interest to you. You can now evaluate the gray scales
within this ROI statistically. H.3
Rectangular and circular You can draw around the regions that are of special interest with
ROIs H.3 a rectangle or circle and evaluate them. First select the tool. H.3
Call up Tools > Circle or Tools > Rectangle.
The mouse cursor changes shape. H.3
Click on the image and draw the ROI (rectangle or circle)

while holding the mouse button pressed.
Release the mouse button as soon as the ROI has the
desired size.
0.0

Resizing/moving regions H.3 If your rectangle or circle is too small or too large or is not quite
in the right position, you can still change the ROI. As soon as
you move the mouse over the ROI the cursor changes shape
and you can alter the graphics. H.3
H.3 Click on the border of the ROI to select it.

Or H.3
Place the mouse cursor on the border of the ROI.
H.3 Enlarge or reduce the region using the grab handles until it
meets your requirements.
Or H.3
Move the region in the image by positioning the cursor on the

border line between the grab handles.
H.3 You can move a small circle ROI easier by pressing the Alt
key.
The cursor then switches into the move mode automatically. H.3
No center is displayed for circular ROIs.

Move a rectangle by pressing the ALT key and clicking on
one of the corners.
Or H.3
Move a rectangle by positioning the cursor on the border line.
0.0

Drawing freehand ROIs H.3 If a circle or rectangle is too imprecise to describe your ROI, you
can draw a polygon or freehand region instead. This way you
can draw the region that is of interest to you more precisely.
H.3
Call up Tools > Freehand ROI.

H.3
H.3 Click on the image to determine the starting point and drag a
line to the first vertex (turning point) with the mouse.
Draw the region point to point by clicking with the mouse at
each change of direction (polygon definition).
Double-click on the last vertex.
The system closes your graphic.
H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the image to determine a starting point.

Hold the mouse button pressed and move the mouse around
your region of interest.
Double-click on the end point to close your region.
0.0

The program will connect the starting point and the end point
and display the freehand ROI. H.3
You can also mix both kinds.
0.0

Evaluating ROIs H.3 As soon as you have drawn a border around the regions of
interest with a circle, rectangle or freehand line, a statistical
evaluation of the ROI will be displayed. H.3
The ROIs are now numbered. To avoid confusion, the number

of a ROI is shown in front of every evaluation result. H.3
(1) Limits
Evaluated gray scale range. The limits are taken into
account in the following evaluations
(2) Min/Max
Highest and lowest gray scale value
(3) Mean/SD
Mean value and standard deviation of the gray scales
(4) Pixels
Number of pixels in the ROI
(5) Area
Area of the ROI in cm2
You can move the text block of the evaluation results to any
location in the image. H.3
Click on the text block and move it with the mouse.

When evaluations are done on PET images, or fused images
with PET share, SUV values for quantitative measurements
are displayed.
0.0

Evaluating pixels, pixel lens H.3
With the pixel lens, you can display the average value of the
gray scales of a small area of 55 pixels. H.3
Call up Tools > Pixel Lens.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Pixel Lens button on the Image subtask card.
H.3 The cursor changes shape. The pixel value at the position of the
cursor in the image is displayed.
H.3
Displaying pixel values You can have the values of pixels that are especially interesting
permanently H.3 to you displayed permanently in the image. H.3
Click on the image with the left mouse button.

The pixel is marked, the pixel value is displayed next to the
marker. H.3
0.0

You can also move a permanently displayed pixel marker of

this type, the value is then updated.
H.3
NOTE
This pixel has a constant size and is independent of the
zoom factor of the image. H.3
On PET images the pixel lens displays SUV values.
0.0

Text in images H.3
You can annotate interesting or anomalous areas of the

images. You can edit annotations that you entered earlier at any
time.
H.3
Anchored annotation You can write text marked with an arrow, pull open an arrow
text H.3 keeping the left mouse button pressed and then write your text
in the text input field (end position of the arrow).
H.3
Call up Tools > Annotate.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Annotate Text button on the Image subtask

card.

H.3
Or H.3
Click on the desired location in the image, drag the mouse

and release the mouse button.
The mouse cursor becomes a text cursor. H.3
0.0

H.3 Now enter your text.

You can force a line break by pressing Shift + Return. H.3
Confirm your text entry with the Return key.

Or H.3

H.3 The text is displayed white with shading. H.3
You cannot change the font size or the alignment of the text.
H.3
Moving text H.3 H.3
Click on the text with the left mouse button.

H.3 Drag the text to the new position.
0.0

Generating series from 3D images H.3
In most cases, the result of your 3D evaluation will be the recon-

struction of entire series of images. To do that, first select a ref-
erence image in the view that you require.
Page H.312, Selecting a reference image H.3
Depending on the output type you are using, the following

options will be available to you: H.3
Series of parallel tomographic images

Series of the curved ranges
Radial series
Expanded ranges
0.0

Series of parallel With this option you generate series of cut images that are par-
tomographic images H.3 allel to one another and perpendicular to the reference image
for the output types MPR, MPR Thick and MIP Thin, MinIP Thin,
VRT Thin. H.3
(1) Volume data set

(2) Reference image
(3) Parallel tomographic images
(4) Volume used for projection (MIP Thin, MinIP Thin, VRT
Thin)
(5) Direction of projection (MIP Thin, MinIP Thin, VRT Thin)
0.0

Curved ranges H.3 With this option you generate series of curved cut images that
are parallel to one another for the output types MPR, MPR
Thick, MIP Thin and MinIP Thin. H.3
(1) Volume data set

(2) Reference image
(3) Parallel tomographic images
0.0

Radial series H.3 For output types MPR, MPR Thick,MIP Thin, MinIP Thin and
VRT Thin you generate a series of cut images arranged in a star
shape. For output types MIP, MinIP, SSD and VRT you generate
a series of projections and views of the volume each rotated
around a defined angle. H.3
(1) Volume data set

(2) Reference image
(3) Radial tomographic
0.0

Expanded ranges H.3 With this option you generate tomographic images that are
located in front of or behind the reference image. This option,
too, is only available for output types MPR, MPR Thick or MIP
Thin, MinIP Thin, VRT Thin. H.3
(1) Volume data set

(2) Range in front the reference image
(3) Reference image
(4) Range behind the reference image
0.0

Generating parallel images H.3
In a series of parallel tomographic images, you generate

images that are parallel and a defined distance apart, and per-
pendicular to the reference image. This is equivalent to a step-
by-step offset of a reference line of the 3D cross hair. H.3
Select a continuous reference line to define the position of

the reconstructed images with that line.
The reference line that you select represents an image in one
of the two other reference segments. This image must be of
the required output type, i.e. MPR, MPR Thick or MIP Thin or
MinIP Thin.
Page H.313, Using the 3D cross hair
The presets or the last selected settings are used if no con-
tinuous reference line is selected.
Calling up Parallel Call up Settings > Parallel Ranges.

Ranges H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Parallel Ranges button on the Settings subtask

card.
In the reference segment, the positions of the parallel tomo-
graphic images are shown graphically. The tomographic image
of the selected reference line (preview) is displayed in the out-
put segment. H.3
0.0

Graphic display of the The lines in the output segment show the position of the individ-
new series H.3 ual images. The arrows indicate the viewing direction. H.3
(1) Start line (marked by number 1)

(2) Reference line
(3) End line
(4) Arrows indicate the viewing direction
(5) Image numbers in one series
(6) Distance and thickness
If the series is made up of many images, not all the lines are
displayed in the graphic. The inside lines are then displayed
in green.
0.0

Parallel Ranges dialog The dialog box Parallel Ranges is displayed as soon as you
box H.3 called up Settings > Parallel Ranges.... H.3
Loading default settings H.3 Default parameter settings with individual designations for gen-
erating parallel series are stored in your system. You can
access these parameters with the selection button Presets and
call up a parameter setting adapted to your requirements. H.3
If no parameter set exists that is suitable for your diagnostic

problem, load a similar parameter set and then edit it.
H.3 Select the parameter set you want from the selection list.
0.0

Changing a range
numerically H.3
H.3 Enter the required number of parallel tomographic images

using the spin box or the input field.
Enter at least three images.
Enter the distance between the individual images in the input

field and confirm your entry with the Return key.
H.3 Enter the slice thickness of the result image and confirm your
entry with the Return key.
Page H.43, Changing the slice thickness (MPR Thick)
H.3 Click on the Horizontal Ranges button.
This is how you generate a series whose intersection planes
are horizontal in the center of the reference image. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the button Vertical Ranges.

This is how you generate a series whose intersection planes
are vertical in the center of the reference image. H.3
H.3 Click on the button Swap Range Order to reverse the exist-
ing image numbering of the series.
The graphic display of the series on the reference segment
changes according to your settings. A new preview image is
reconstructed in the output segment. H.3
0.0

Changing the range with You can also increase or reduce the area of a series calculation
the mouse H.3 by moving the starting line or end line with the mouse. The
image that corresponds to the line you have just processed is
displayed in the output segment.
Page H.378, Graphic display of the new series H.3
Click on the starting or end line and move the line holding the
left mouse button down.
The number of images changes accordingly (is increased or
decreased). The distance between the cut images remains the
same. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Keep No. of Images Constant icon and move
the starting or end line holding the left mouse button down.
The distance between the cut images changes accordingly (is
increased or decreased). The number of images remains the
same. H.3
The values in the Parallel Ranges dialog box change in

accordance with the changes in the graphic display.
H.3 Move the entire range by clicking on the point of rotation of

the reference line and moving the mouse with the left mouse
button pressed.
H.3 Rotate the entire range by clicking on the reference line and
moving the mouse cursor around the point of rotation with
the mouse button pressed.
0.0

Starting reconstruction H.3 If all the settings are as you require them, you can start recon-
struction. H.3
H.3 Click on the Start button to create the series of parallel tomo-
graphic images.
A message box is displayed in which you are informed about
the progress of reconstruction. Each image is displayed in the
output segment as soon as it has been calculated. H.3
Canceling reconstruction H.3 You can cancel reconstruction at any time. H.3
H.3 Click on Cancel in the progress box.

All the images already reconstructed are displayed in the output
segment. H.3
Even if you have pressed Cancel, all the images you have so
far reconstructed are saved if the auto-store function is
active.
Page H.145, Activating automatic storage
0.0

Terminating After reconstruction has been completed, the last image of the
reconstruction H.3 range, i.e. the image of the end line, is displayed in the output
segment. H.3
Each image of the series is assigned automatically an image

number.
Click on the dog ear in the top right-hand corner of the output
segment and page through the stack to display another
image of the new series.
0.0

Saving a series H.3 When the series meets your requirements: H.3
Save your new series.

Page H.122, Storing 3D images manually
If the option Enable auto-store has been activated in the
configuration, the series is automatically saved.
If the option Include the reference image when saving
ranges or curved cuts has been activated the reference
image is also saved.
Saving a parameter set H.3 If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recom-
mend that you store it in the system. H.3
H.3 Enter a suitable name and confirm with the Return key.
H.3 Click on the Save button to save the parameter set.

Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets
The next time you load, the presets are assigned to the series
that contain the name entered as the first part of their name.
H.3
Deleting a parameter set H.3 You can delete parameter sets that you no longer require for
editing parallel series from the selection list Presets. H.3
H.3 Select the existing parameter set from the selection list.
H.3 Click on the Delete button to delete the parameter data set.
0.0

H.3 When you have finished editing, click on this button to return
to the original mode.
If you have not stored the reconstructed series, the following
dialog box is displayed: H.3
H.3 Click on Yes to save the series.

The Parallel Ranges dialog box is closed. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on No to reject the series.

The dialog box is closed. H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on Cancel to continue processing the series.

The Parallel Ranges dialog box is still open. H.3
0.0

Postprocessing series of parallel images H.3
If the reconstructed range of the series is not as you require it,

you can adapt it either graphically or in the Parallel Ranges
dialog box. H.3
If you generate a new series by changing the values, a query

appears asking whether you want to store or reject the old
series.
0.0

Generating curved ranges H.3
In a series of curved parallel tomographic images, you gener-

ate images that are parallel and a defined distance apart.
H.3
The reference line that you draw represents an image in one

of the two other reference segments. This image must be of
the required output type, i.e. MPR, MPR Thick, MIP Thin or
MinIP Thin.
The presets or the last selected settings are used if no con-
tinuous reference line is selected.
Select a segment.
Calling up Curved Call up Settings > Curved Ranges.

Ranges H.3
Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Curved Ranges button on the Settings subtask

card.
Draw a reference line by holding the left mouse button

pressed and double-click.
In the selected reference segment, the positions of the parallel
curved tomographic images are shown graphically. The tomo-
graphic image of the drawn reference line is displayed in the
output segment. H.3
0.0

Graphic display of the The lines show the position of the individual images of the cre-
new series H.3 ated series. H.3
(1) Start line (marked by number 1)

(2) Reference line
(3) End line
(4) Arrows indicate the viewing direction
(5) Distance and thickness
If the series is made up of many images, not all the lines are
displayed in the graphic. The inside lines are then displayed
in green.
0.0

Curved Ranges dialog The dialog box Curved Ranges is displayed as soon as you call
box H.3 up Settings > Curved Ranges.... H.3
erating parallel series are stored in your system. You can
access these parameters with the selection button Presets and
call up a parameter setting adapted to your requirements. H.3

0.0

Changing a range
numerically H.3
H.3 Enter the required number of parallel tomographic images

using the spin box or the input field.
Enter at least three images.
Enter the distance between the individual images in the input

field and confirm your entry with the Return key.
H.3 Enter the slice thickness of the result image and confirm your
entry with the Return key.
The graphic display of the series on the reference segment
changes according to your settings. A new preview image is
0.0

Changing the range with You can also increase or reduce the area of a series calculation
the mouse H.3 by moving the starting line or end line with the mouse. The
image that corresponds to the line you have just processed is
displayed in the output segment.
Page H.378, Graphic display of the new series H.3
Click on the starting or end line and move the line holding the
left mouse button down.
decreased). The distance between the cut images remains the
same. H.3
Or H.3
increased or decreased). The number of images remains the
same. H.3
The values in the Curved Ranges dialog box change in

accordance with the changes in the graphic display.
H.3 Move the entire range by clicking on the point of rotation of

the reference line and moving the mouse with the left mouse
button pressed.
0.0

struction. H.3
H.3 Click on the Start button to create the series of parallel tomo-
graphic images.
A message box is displayed in which you are informed about
the progress of reconstruction. Each image is displayed in the
output segment as soon as it has been calculated. H.3
Canceling reconstruction H.3 You can cancel reconstruction at any time. H.3
H.3 Click on Cancel in the progress box.

All the images already reconstructed are displayed in the output
segment. H.3
Even if you have pressed Cancel, all the images you have so
far reconstructed are saved if the auto-store function is
active.
0.0

Terminating After reconstruction has been completed, the last image of the
reconstruction H.3 range, i.e. the image of the end line, is displayed in the output
segment. H.3
An image number is automatically assigned to each image of

the series.
Click on the dog ear in the top right-hand corner of the output
segment and page through the stack to display another
image of the new series.
0.0



H.3
editing parallel series from the selection list Presets. H.3
H.3 Click on the button to delete the parameter data set.
0.0

H.3 When you have finished editing, click on this button to return
to the original mode.

Or H.3

Or H.3

The dialog box is still open. H.3
0.0

Postprocessing series of curved images H.3
If the reconstructed range of the series is not as you require it,

you can adapt it either graphically or in the Curved Ranges dia-
log box. H.3
You postprocess a series of curved images the same way you

do with curved cuts.
Page H.410, Displaying images H.3
If you generate a new series by changing the values, a query

appears asking whether you want to store or reject the old
series.
0.0

Generating an expanded range H.3
Use the expanded range if you want to generate a series of

images that are located in front of or behind the reference
image. In this way, you simulate scrolling through the image
stack with the dog ears. H.3
It is not possible to define an expanded range graphically with

the mouse. You can only define it using standard values in the
Expand Ranges dialog box. H.3
First select a reference image that contains the view of your

choice.
Page H.312, Selecting a reference image
Output type MPR, MPR Thick, MIP, MIP Thin or MinIP Thin
must be set in this reference segment. H.3
Call up Settings > Expand Ranges.

A preview of the expanded range is displayed in the output seg-
ment. The 3D cross hairs in the reference segment are now no
longer visible. H.3
0.0

Expand Ranges dialog The Expand Ranges dialog box is displayed. H.3
box H.3
H.3 Enter how many images you want reconstructed in the input
field.
0.0

Enter the distance between the images in the input field.
H.3 Enter the slice thickness in the input field (only possible for
MPR Thick, MIP Thin, MinIP Thin and VRT Thin) and con-
firm with the Return key.
The new reference image is displayed in the output segment.
H.3
H.3 Start reconstruction by clicking on the Start button.

The images of an expanded series are displayed in the output
segment. They are parallel to the reference image. The last
image of the series is displayed. H.3
Use the dog ears in the top right-hand corner of the output
segment to page through the series.
If you want to change the range, you must enter new values in
the Expand Ranges dialog box. H.3
0.0

If the new series is as you require it: H.3

If the Enable auto-store option was activated during config-
uration, the series is stored automatically.
H.3 Then click on Close to return to the original mode.

If the series does not yet provide the views you want, change
the range settings in the dialog window Expand Ranges and
reconstruct again.
Page H.398, Expand Ranges dialog box H.3
0.0

Generating radial images H.3
You generate radial tomographic images to be able to view a

range from different angles. In this way, you simulate step-by-
step rotation of a reference line. A number of tomographic
images, depending on the angle, are generated from the vol-
ume data set. H.3
Select a broken reference line or a reference image to gen-

erate a series whose intersection plane covers a quadrant in
the reference image and is perpendicular to the reference
image.
Page H.312, Selecting a reference image
The selected reference line represents an image in one of the
two other reference segments. That image must be in the
required output type, i.e. MPR, MPR Thick, MIP Thin, MinIP
Thin or VRT Thin. How to generate series of radial projections
(MIP, MinIP, SSD, VRT) you find on:
Page H.3111, Series of radial projections and views
Or H.3
Select a continuous reference line to define the position of

the reconstructed images with the reference line.
Calling up Radial Ranges H.3 Call up Settings > Radial Ranges.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the Radial Ranges button on the Settings subtask

card.
0.0

Graphic display of the The radial segments are displayed as lines in the reference
radial series H.3 segment. The lines have a common point of intersection and
are distributed with a constant angle between them (default
22.5). H.3
The image of the reference line is reconstructed and displayed

in the output segment. You can see the direction of viewing of
the resulting images by the arrows drawn in the reference seg-
ment. H.3
(1) End line

(2) Reference line
(3) Starting line (marked by arrows)
(4) Viewing direction arrow
(5) Angle and thickness
0.0

Radial Ranges dialog The Radial Ranges dialog box is displayed. H.3
box H.3
erating radial series are stored in your system. You can access
these parameters with the selection button Presets and call up
a parameter setting adapted to your requirements. H.3

0.0

Enter the required angle between the images in the input

field and confirm with the Return key.
The position of the starting and end line remains identical. If you
enter a new angle between the images, the number of images
is changed accordingly. H.3
Set a new number of images to be reconstructed in the spin

box or the input field.
The angle between the images changes accordingly. H.3
H.3 Enter the slice thickness (for MPR Thick, MIP Thin,
MinIP Thin and VRT Thin only) and confirm your entry with
the Return key.
The graphic display of the series in the reference segment

changes according to the settings. A new preview image is
0.0

Changing the range with Click on the starting or end line and move the line holding the
the mouse H.3 left mouse button down.
decreased). The angle between the cut images remains the
same. H.3
Or H.3
increased or decreased). The angle between the cut images
remains the same. H.3
The values in the Radial Ranges dialog box change in accor-

dance with the changes in the graphic display.
H.3 Rotate the selected line around the rotation point holding
down the mouse button.
By rotating the center line you also rotate all the other lines
around the rotation point. Turning the starting line and end line
changes the angle of aperture. H.3
0.0

Or H.3
H.3 Move the entire range by moving the point of rotation with the
The image corresponding to the line being processed is dis-
played in the output segment. The values in the Radial Ranges
dialog box change in accordance with the changes made to the
graphic display. H.3
If you change the range by rotating the start or end line, the
number of images remains constant. Only the angle between
the images changes.
0.0

struction. H.3
H.3 Click on the Start button to start reconstruction of the range.

A message box shows the progress of reconstruction and
allows you to cancel reconstruction. H.3
The reconstructed images are displayed as a stack of images

in the output segment. The upper image corresponds to the end
line in the graphic display. H.3
Using the dog ears in the top right-hand corner of the images,
you can page through the stack.
H.3
If the radial series is as you require it: H.3

If the Enable auto-store option was activated during config-
uration, the series is stored automatically.
H.3 Click on Close to return to the original mode.
0.0



The Radial Ranges dialog box is closed. H.3
Or H.3

Or H.3

The Radial Ranges dialog box is still open. H.3
0.0



that contain the name entered as the first part of their name. H.3
0.0

editing radial series from the selection list Presets. H.3
H.3 Click on the button to delete the parameter data set.
Postprocessing a radial range H.3
You can rotate the starting and end line of the range in order to
change the range and the angle between the result images. H.3
If you generate a new series by changing the values, a
prompt appears asking you whether you want to save or
reject the old series.
0.0

Series of radial projections and views H.3
You do not reconstruct tomographic images for output types

MIP, MinIP, SSD and VRT, but series of projections and views.
H.3
Defining view directions H.3 The future position of the projections/views is displayed graph-
ically by projection arrows on the reference image. The recon-
structed images are at right angles to these arrows. The arrows
therefore indicate the direction in which you generate the pro-
jection. You can define the orientation of these arrows as fol-
lows:
H.3
Select a broken reference line or a reference image.

The image of this segment must be of the same output type.
The projections of the series describe a quadrant within the ref-
erence image. H.3
0.0

Or H.3
Select a continuous reference line in your reference image to

define the direction of viewing graphically.
The reference line that you select represents an image in one
or both of the other reference segments. This image must be
in the required output type, i.e. MIP, MinIP, SSD or VRT.
The selected reference line is at right angles to the center pro-
jection arrow of the series 3d graphics. All other projections are
obtained by rotating this reference line clockwise or counter-
clockwise.
H.3
Setting radial projections You can generate radial projections in radial range mode in the
and views H.3 same way as radial cut images in output type MPR, MPR Thick,
MIP Thin or MinIP Thin. The images of this series simulate
step-by-step rotation of a reference line. H.3
Call Settings > Radial Ranges.

Or H.3
H.3 Click on the button Radial Ranges on the subtask card

Settings.
The range of the new series is marked in the reference image.H.3
0.0

The arrows indicate the direction of the projections, for example

MIP-Image. H.3
(1) Rotation point

(2) Starting line
(3) End line
(4) Angle and thickness (depends on the image type)
0.0

The dialog box Radial Ranges is displayed. H.3
With the exception of the slice thickness, you now select all
other settings for the radial series in the dialog box Radial
Ranges or with the mouse in the reference image as you do for
the reconstruction of radial cuts.
Page H.3101, Generating radial images H.3
0.0

Saving a parameter set with presets H.3
For many functionalities the system offers presets, which can

be edited. In this way you save frequently used value sets under
a certain name to re-use them easily at a later time.
H.3
Linking presets H.3 With this functionality the system offers a name taken from the
Series Description. H.3
H.3 Click on the Link Preset button to get the suitable sugges-
tion for the name.
The generated name is selected in the edit field. H.3
H.3 Remove any patient specific part of the suggested name,

e.g. trailing numbers.
H.3 Press the Save button in order to save the preset.
The generated name is automatically saved. H.3
From now on, all series of the same kind, i.e. having the same
series description, will be automatically linked with this preset.H.3
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Multiplanar
H.4 Reconstruction (MPR) H.4
In multiplanar reconstruction you can create parallel, radial,

expanded series, or individual curved cuts from a selected
view. H.4
The multiplanar reconstruction is first displayed in the views that

are parallel and perpendicular to the direction of scanning. H.4
You can then move through the volume using the functions of
the 3D task card such as the 3D cross hair or mouse in order to
generate the views which are important for you. H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.41

Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR) 3D Evaluation
Transfer as MPR to 3D H.4
You have selected a series of images for display in MPR in the

Patient Browser or the Viewing task card and then transferred
them (or from the Series List dialog box) to the 3D task card.
Page H.340, Setting MPR H.4
The series will be loaded and shown in MPR display mode. H.4
If you have already loaded images onto the 3D task card and
have only switched back to another application temporarily,
switch back to 3D by clicking the tab.
Page H.25, Calling the 3D task card
If you have finished processing your first 3D series and saved
it, you can load the next marked series directly from the
Series List (Patient > Open Series List...). If the last patient
to have been processed is in 3D, a dialog box appears in
which you can specify whether you wish to continue process-
ing or load the new series.
0.0

3D Evaluation Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)
Changing the slice thickness (MPR Thick) H.4
With the MPR for thick slices, you can define the thickness of
the original slice from which the image is to be reconstructed.
The program calculates an average from several gray-scale val-
ues and uses these averages to build up the image.
H.4
Call up Type > MPR Thick to set the output type MPR Thick.
Or H.4
H.4 Click on the MPR Thick button on the Type tool card.
Call up Type > MPR Thickness to display the MPR Thick

dialog box for setting the slice thickness.
Or H.4
H.4 Click the MPR Thick button on the Type tool card with the
right mouse button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.43

H.4
Enter an image thickness (in mm).
H.4 Confirm your entry with OK.

Or H.4
H.4 Click on Default to set the preset image thickness.

The selected setting is applied to all MPR Thick reconstruc-
tions. H.4
The value for MPR image thickness is displayed in the

image and always also filmed and stored.
Changing the default

setting H.4
H.4 Click on Set as default to store a new preset value for the
image thickness.
When you load a new data set, the stored preset value is
used.
0.0

Generating series of images H.4
With the facility to generate images with any interval and direc-
tion, you can simulate examinations independently of the scan-
ning direction. H.4
You can save images reconstructed in this way as new series

and, for example, transfer them to the Viewing task card for 2D
evaluation.
H.4
Parallel ranges H.4 In this mode, parallel tomographic images are generated a
defined distance apart. The images are then perpendicular to
the reference image. H.4
Generate and process series of parallel tomographic images

as described in the following chapters:
Page H.377, Generating parallel images
Page H.386, Postprocessing series of parallel images
H.4
Radial ranges H.4 The images are always arranged in a star and are a defined
angle apart. They are perpendicular to the reference image. H.4
Generate and process series of radial tomographic images
Page H.3101, Generating radial images
Page H.3110, Postprocessing a radial range
H.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.45

Expanded ranges H.4 An expanded range consists of a series of parallel slices that
are a defined distance apart and parallel to the reference
image. You usually use this mode if you want to obtain a range
in front of and behind the target image (reference image) as a
series. H.4
Generate and process series of an expanded range as

described in the following chapter:
Page H.397, Generating an expanded range
0.0

Generating curved slices H.4
If you want to view subareas that cannot be obtained by planar,

i.e. flat images, you can draw in a cut line with any curvature
freehand. You can then display this cut as an image in the out-
put segment. H.4
(1) Working segment

(2) Output segment
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.47

Drawing curves H.4
In reference mode, you have already generated a view which is

important to you. H.4
Select the segment that contains your reference image.

Call up Settings > Curved Mode.
Or H.4
H.4 Activate the curve mode by clicking the Curved Mode button
on the Settings tool card.
The program is in drawing mode and the cursor changes

shape. H.4
0.0

Polygon definition as the You can draw a cut line by entering several vertices. H.4
cut line H.4
H.4 Click into the working segment (selected segment) with the
left mouse button to define the beginning of the cut line.
Define further points along the cut line by clicking each posi-
tion at which you want the direction to change with the left
mouse button.
Finish off the line by double-clicking with the left mouse but-
ton.
Drawing a line freehand H.4 As an alternative, you can also draw structures freehand. H.4
H.4 Open up a curve by moving the mouse cursor over the image
with the left mouse button pressed.
Finish off the freehand line by double-clicking with the left
mouse button.
H.4 For some applications, it can be necessary to connect a poly-

gon definition with a freehand line and vice versa. H.4
As long as you have not double-clicked the end point, you can
mix the two methods, polygon definition and freehand line. H.4
The way the image is reconstructed depends on the direction
in which the line is drawn. For example, if you draw the spinal
canal starting from the top and moving downwards, the image
that you produce is different to the one you produce when you
draw the line from the bottom to the top (opposite way round).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.49

Displaying images H.4
After you have completed your cut line, a new image is recon-
structed in the output segment. In the reference image (working
segment), the starting point of this image is marked by an
arrow. H.4
The orientation mark and the cutline are displayed as orien-

tation aids.
An orientation label in < > brackets is displayed on the right-
hand side of the image segment.
H.4
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using non-planar slice images for
diagnostic purposes H.4
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis H.4
Remedy: Be careful when interpreting orientation labels.

Keep the shape of the curved cut and its orientation in the
volume in mind H.4
0.0

Long cut lines H.4 If you have drawn a very long cut line, it might not be possible
to display the entire image in the output segment. Then, only
the first part of the line is used to generate an image. This part
is then highlighted in the working segment. H.4
The starting point of the display is marked by an arrow. H.4
0.0

Moving the displayed Move the starting point in the working segment to display fur-
part of the line H.4 ther parts of the cut line by moving the arrow along the line
with the mouse.
A new image is generated. In this way, you can draw the struc-
tures bit by bit over their entire extent. H.4
0.0

Moving the entire line H.4 Sometimes, you might want to move a curved cutline in the
working segment to a new location. H.4

H.4 Move the entire line holding the left mouse button down.
A new image is displayed in the output segment. H.4
Delete the selected line by pressing the Del key.

The direction in which you have drawn the curve into the
working image is shown by an arrow on the resulting image.
0.0

Moving a curve within the While drawing you can also move the cutline within the volume
volume with the dog ear H.4 data set layer by layer by paging with the dog ear of the working
segment. H.4
Click on the outside field of the dog ear to move forwards.

Or H.4
Click on the inner field of the dog ear to move backwards.
0.0

Rotating images H.4 Call up Image > Rotate Curved 90 +, to rotate the image
clockwise.
Page G.429, Rotating images (Rotate)
Or H.4
Call up Image > Rotate Curved 90 -, to rotate the image

anti-clockwise.
Flipping images H.4 Call up Image > Flip Curved Vertically, to flip the image
around a horizontal axis.
Page G.432, Flipping images vertically
Or H.4
Call up Image > Flip Curved Horizontally, to flip the image

around a vertical axis.
For curved slices, you can set output type MIP thin, MinIP
thin, MPR thick and MPR thin.
Page H.339, Defining output types
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Maximum and Minimum
H.5 Intensity Projection H.5
The maximum intensity projection uses the most intensive gray-

scale values of the images for reconstruction. For example, in
contrast medium examinations, blood vessels are those struc-
tures that have the most intensive values. The MIP display is
therefore especially suitable for vascular examinations. H.5
The minimum intensity projection uses the least intensive gray-

scale values of the images for reconstruction. Air-filled struc-
tures have the least intensive values, the MinIP display is there-
fore especially suitable for pulmonary examinations. H.5
If other structures are obstructing the volumes of interest to you,

it is useful to extract a VOI (volume of interest). H.5
You can also create radial series in maximum (MIP) and mini-
mum (MinIP) intensity projection from the reference mode. H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.51

Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection 3D Evaluation
MIP H.5 The maximum intensity projection (MIP) is often used for
angiography, for example, to display the course of a blood ves-
sel or a contrast medium injection. It is also used to punch (i.e.
extract) volumes of interest (VOIs). H.5
H.5
0.0

3D Evaluation Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection
MinIP H.5 You can use the minimum intensity projection (MinIP) especially
to display the pulmonary tissue. H.5
H.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.53

Transfer as MIP to 3D H.5
You have selected a series of images for display in MIP and

transferred them to the 3D task card. H.5
The series will be shown in MIP display mode.

Page H.341, Setting MIP H.5
0.0

(1) Sagittal view

(2) Transversal view
(3) Coronal view
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.55

Extracting a volume of interest

(VOI) H.5
With a volume of interest (VOI), you extract a volume of diag-

nostic interest to you, thus limiting the volume to be recon-
structed to a partial volume.
H.5
You can extract a VOI (volume of interest) in one of the following

ways: H.5
Position and delimit a cuboid VOI (VOI Clipbox)

Draw a freehand VOI (VOI Punch Mode)
0.0

Using the VOI clipbox H.5
If you are in reference mode you must activate VOI clipbox

mode. H.5
H.5 Call up Settings > VOI Clipbox to access VOI mode.

Or H.5
H.5 Click on the button VOI Clipbox on the Settings subtask

card.
The entire data set with the default VOI delimitation appears in
the output segment. The rectangle shows the preset delimita-
tion of the VOI. H.5
(1) Volume data set

(2) Rectangular VOI
If you activate Free View before calling up the VOI Clipbox
the clipbox changes behavior.
Page H.352, Interactions with the clipbox
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.57

Changing the size H.5 In the bottom right-hand segment, you initially see a predefined
cuboid VOI. You can use this for processing or changing its size
and position as required.
H.5
H.5 You can change the size by clicking on one of the boundary
lines and moving the grab handles while holding the mouse
button down.
Resetting the size H.5 Select Settings > VOI Reset Clipbox from the main menu if
you want to reset the size of the clipbox to the initial values.
The reset is applied to all segments simultaneously. H.5
0.0

Moving the VOI Change the position of the VOI by placing the mouse pointer
H.5 on the border around the selected VOI, not on a handle.
Move the VOI while holding down the left mouse button.
Setting standard views H.5 You can change the default views in the three segments in any
possible way. This way you control the position of the VOI along
all three axes. H.5
Select the result segment.

Select the required standard view using the buttons on the
Orientation tool card or in the Orientation menu.
The views are perpendicular or parallel to the scan direction
of the data set, but might not be perpendicular to the patient
coordinate system.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.59

Rotating the VOI H.5
H.5 Click on the Rotate Images button on the upper part of the
control area to activate rotation mode.
Place the mouse cursor in the bottom right-hand segment.
H.5 The mouse point changes shape.
H.5
Move the mouse cursor holding the left mouse button down
and rotate the VOI.
Moving the mouse up or down tilts the object in 90-steps.
Moving the mouse to the left or right rotates the object in 90-
steps.
You can also switch to SSD or VRT.
0.0

Activating VOI punch mode H.5
Once you have positioned and delimited the VOI using the VOI
Clipbox, switch to VOI Punch Mode.
H.5
Call up Settings > VOI Punch Mode to access VOI punch

mode.
Or H.5
H.5 Click on button VOI Punch Mode on subtask card Settings.
The
0.0

The dialog box VOI Punch Mode appears in the output seg-
ment. H.5
In this dialog box, you will find a number of buttons which you
can use to extract and process a freehand VOI. H.5
The individual buttons perform the following functions (from left

to right): H.5
Drawing a freehand VOI

Page H.514, Drawing a freehand line
Punching a freehand VOI
Page H.515, Punching a freehand VOI
Cutting out a freehand VOI
Page H.517, Cutting out a freehand VOI
Undoing last command
Page H.520, Undo Last Step
Undoing all
Page H.520, Undo All
0.0

Defining a freehand VOI H.5
If you have adapted the view and size of the rectangular VOI to
your requirements, you can draw a freehand curve (polygon) in
it. With this irregular VOI you can define the contours along
which you can cut out or reveal parts of images.
H.5
Select the reference segment in which you want to define the

freehand VOI.
0.0

Drawing a freehand line H.5
H.5 Click on Draw Contour in the VOI Punch Mode dialog box
to activate the drawing mode.
Click on the required starting point of the line with the left
mouse button.
Click on any other point in the image at which you want the
curve to change direction.
Or H.5
Draw a continuous line by dragging the mouse cursor over

the image holding the left mouse button down.
Complete your line with a double-click.

H.5 The starting and end point of the line are connected. The line
thus becomes a closed polygon definition and includes an area.
You can now select the curve and change its position and size.H.5
0.0

Punching a freehand VOI H.5 In angiography, it is often of diagnostic interest only to display
the highlighted blood vessels in the image, because other
details can obstruct the projection. H.5
Draw a freehand VOI around the volume of interest to you.

H.5 Click on the Keep Inside button.
All volume areas of the rectangular VOI outside the freehand
VOI are deleted. H.5
H.5
0.0

The inside of the rectangular VOI is processed, not the volume

data set that surrounds the VOI. The VOI is used as a sort of
protection for the remaining volume, because you can only work
within the rectangular VOI. H.5
Once you have cut out the contour, the program automatically
switches to drawing mode.
Page H.513, Defining a freehand VOI
0.0

Cutting out a freehand You can also proceed in the opposite manner and expose the
VOI H.5 VOI by cutting out the uninteresting parts of the volume. H.5
To do this, you will usually proceed in small steps, cutting out as

many small areas as necessary until only those structures
remain that are of interest to you. H.5
Draw a freehand VOI around the area that you want to

remove.
H.5 Click on the Remove Inside button.
0.0

The area inside the polygon is cut out and removed. H.5
(1) The freehand VOIs cut through the volume of the rectangu-
lar VOI in the viewing direction.
0.0

Deleting a freehand line H.5 You can delete freehand lines that are not as you require
them. H.5
Select the line by clicking on it.

Delete the line by pressing the Del key on your keyboard.
The program is switched back to drawing mode. H.5
0.0

Undoing deletion of VOIs H.5
If you accidentally cut out too much when working on a VOI, you
can undo your processing steps (only Keep Inside and
Remove Inside). H.5
Undo Last Step H.5 H.5
H.5 Click on the Undo Last Step button in the VOI Punch Mode
dialog box.
Undo All H.5
H.5 Click on the Undo All button in the VOI Punch Mode dialog
box.
The graphic is reset to the state in which you found it before pro-
cessing. H.5
All steps performed so for are undone. H.5
0.0

Combining the MIP/MinIP and SSD output

types H.5
When extracting VOIs, you can combine the output types MIP/
MinIP and SSD (surface shaded display) in different segments
to extract and reveal the volume of interest especially clearly. H.5
For example, select the MIP/MinIP display in the two left-hand
segments to define the size and position of your VOI in these
images and then have the result displayed in the top right-hand
segment in surface shaded display.
Page H.339, Defining output types H.5
0.0

(1) MPR type

(2) MIP type
(3) SSD type
0.0

Generating complex VOIs H.5
If you want to punch very complex structures that extend

through the entire reconstructible volume in an irregular shape,
you combine cuboid and freehand VOIs in several substeps. H.5
In each step you select a rectangular VOI and then punch the
relevant structure in this VOI. This way you proceed through the
entire reconstructible volume. In the end you have the system
put the various segments of the complex VOI structure together.H.5
0.0

H.5 First define a relatively narrow cuboid VOI in the bottom

right-hand image area.
This VOI is displayed in the other segments of the screen. H.5
0.0

H.5 Punch the structures of interest to you for the VOI freehand
in an other image segment.
Page H.515, Punching a freehand VOI
H.5
0.0

H.5 Now move the rectangles in the lower right image segment.
Also punch the structure you require in this second rectangu-

lar VOI in freehand technique.
Continue until you have processed the entire volume of inter-
est to you.
Now resize the rectangle in the lower right image segment
out to a size suitable for your diagnostic problem again.
0.0

All your freehand VOIs are now combined. H.5
0.0

Exiting VOI mode H.5
When you have finished punching your VOI, return to reference

mode.
H.5
H.5 Click on the Close button in the VOI Punch Mode dialog
box.
Or H.5
H.5 Click on the button on the Settings subtask card.

H.5 VOI mode is terminated. The effective VOI, i.e. the last status of
your VOI, is saved. H.5
0.0

Generating a radial series from

MIP/MinIP displays H.5
Using radial projections, you can view the volume of interest to

you from various angles. H.5
Once you have generated a sufficient number of images in a

complete circle, you can play them back as a movie on the
Viewing task card as if you were "walking around" the volume
or partial volume of interest. You can achieve the same effect by
clicking on the dog ear in the output segment while keeping the
Page G.318, Animated images (Movie)
H.5
Generating radial series H.5 For a description of how to generate radial series of MIP/MinIP
projections, please see the following chapters:
Page H.3112, Setting radial projections and views
H.5
On the basis of the MIP/MinIP display, you can also generate

parallel images or curved sections. However, the results are
always displayed as MPR images. Generation of parallel
series and curved sections is therefore described in the fol-
lowing chapters:
You can use a filter with high resolution to calculate radial

ranges.
Page H.148, Configuring quality filter
0.0

Defining the MIP slice thickness

(MIP Thin) H.5
For maximum intensity projection, the entire volume of the data

set is normally used. Sometimes you will only want to use a part
of the volume for the projection. For example, you may want to
cut out interfering structures.
H.5
Selecting a reference In the reference segment, you can define the view of your refer-
image H.5 ence image. H.5
First select a reference segment.

Change the position of the image until it meets your require-
ments.
0.0

Starting MIP Thin H.5 You can set MIP Thin in one, two, or all three reference seg-
ments. H.5
Call up Type > MIP Thin to set MIP Thin output type.
Or H.5
H.5 Click on the MIP Thin button on the Type tool card.
In the reference segment, an MIP Thin display is shown with the
standard settings. H.5
0.0

Changing slice Call up Type > MIP Thickness to display the MIP Thin dia-
thickness H.5 log box to set the slice thickness.
Or H.5
H.5 Click on the MIP Thin button on the Type subtask card with
the right mouse button.
Enter the thickness of the initial slice to be used for the pro-
jection in mm.
Or H.5
H.5 Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for Image
thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all displayed MIP thin slice
reconstructions.
0.0

The value for the MIP image thickness is always filmed and
stored with the image. H.5
H.5 Click on Set as default to store a new default value.

When you load a new data set, the stored default value is
used.
Generating series of MIP Thin images H.5
For the MIP Thin output type too, you can generate parallel,
radial, and expanded series of images. In this way, you divide
the volume data set into partial volumes with a predefined thick-
ness. MIP Thin images are then reconstructed from these par-
tial volumes.
H.5
Parallel MIP Thin series H.5 The structures (bones) that might be an obstruction in a maxi-
mum intensity projection usually only extend over a small part
of the volume data set. With parallel MIP images, you can, for
example, ascertain where the obstructing structures end and
where you can generate usable MIP images in the volume data
set. H.5
0.0

H.5 Generate and process images of parallel MIP Thin series as

described in the following chapters:
Radial MIP Thin series H.5 Generate and process images of radial MIP Thin series as
Generating an expanded Generate and process images of parallel MIP Thin images of
MIP Thin range H.5 an expanded range as described in the following chapters:
In MIP thin mode you can also generate curved slices. The pro-
cedure is the same as in MPR mode.
Page H.47, Generating curved slices H.5
0.0

Defining the MinIP slice thickness

(MinIP Thin) H.5
For minimum intensity projection, the entire volume of the data

set is normally used. Sometimes you will only want to use a part
of the volume for the projection. For example, you may want to
cut out interfering structures.
H.5
Selecting a reference In the reference segment, you can define the view of your refer-

Change the position of the image until it meets your require-
ments.
0.0

Starting MinIP Thin H.5 You can set MinIP Thin in one, two, or all three reference seg-
ments. H.5
Call up Type > MinIP Thin to set MinIP Thin output type.
In the reference segment, a MinIP Thin display is shown with

the standard settings. H.5
0.0

Changing slice thickness H.5 Call up Type > MinIP Thickness to display the MinIP Thin
dialog box to set the slice thickness.
Enter the thickness of the initial slice to be used for the pro-
jection in mm.
Or H.5
H.5 Check this option if you want the MIP thickness to be

adopted.

Or H.5
H.5 Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for Image
thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all displayed MinIP thin slice
reconstructions.
0.0

The value for the MinIP image thickness is always filmed and
stored with the image. H.5
H.5 Click on Set as default to store a new default value.

used.
Generating series of MinIP Thin images H.5
For the MinIP Thin output type too, you can generate parallel,
radial, and expanded series of images. In this way, you divide
the volume data set into partial volumes with a predefined thick-
ness. MinIP Thin images are then reconstructed from these
partial volumes.
H.5
Parallel MinIP Thin With parallel MinIP images, you can, for example, ascertain
series H.5 where the obstructing structures end and where you can gen-
erate usable MinIP images in the volume data set. H.5
Generate and process images of parallel MinIP Thin series

0.0

Radial MinIP Thin series H.5 Generate and process images of radial MinIP Thin series as
Generating an expanded Generate and process images of parallel MinIP Thin images
MinIP Thin range H.5 of an expanded range as described in the following chapters:
In MinIP Thin mode you can also generate curved slices. The
procedure is the same as in MPR mode.
Page H.47, Generating curved slices H.5
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Reconstructing Surfaces
H.6 (SSD) H.6
Surface shaded display (SSD) is based on the extraction of

gray scales between two predefined thresholds. The SSD out-
put type reconstructs surface shaded structures and displays
them in three dimensions. H.6
SSD images are especially suitable for displaying bone struc-

tures and blood vessels filled with contrast medium. H.6
As threshold values for surface extraction in SSD, modality-spe-

cific defaults stored in your system are commonly used. H.6
If these defaults are not appropriate for your diagnostic prob-

lem, you can adapt them individually. In this way, you can dis-
play the structures of interest to you in an optimum way. H.6
Same as with multiplanar reconstruction (MPR) and maximum

(MIP) or minimum (MinIP) intensity projection, you can gener-
ate a new radial series on the basis of SSD displays and save
these images for further processing. H.6
SSD images only have one window level.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.61

Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD) 3D Evaluation
Transferring as SSD to 3D H.6
You have selected a series of images for display in SSD and

transferred them to the 3D task card.
Page H.344, Setting SSD H.6
The series will be loaded and shown in SSD display mode. H.6
0.0

3D Evaluation Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)
SSD reconstruction with changed

thresholds H.6
If the SSD reconstruction based on the default threshold values

in the system is not appropriate for your diagnostic problem,
you can adapt these values. You can then reconstruct your sur-
face image again.
H.6
SSD Definition H.6 Call up Type > SSD Definition... to switch to threshold
mode.
Or H.6
H.6 Click on button SSD on subtask card Type with the right
mouse button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.63

Areas within the set threshold values are marked in all images
of output type MPR, MIP or MinIP. H.6
(1) Highlighted pixels

(2) SSD image
0.0

The SSD Definition dialog box is displayed. H.6
In the SSD Definition dialog box, the preset or last used thresh-
old values are displayed for SSD extraction.
H.6
H.6 Enter new threshold values in the input fields and confirm
with the Return key.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.65

The threshold values entered are applied to the displays in the

reference segments.
H.6
Another way to change the threshold values is: H.6
Drag the slider with the left mouse button to the right or to the
left to increase or reduce the threshold value.
Page A.234, Slider
The new threshold values are immediately applied whenever
they are changed with the slider or arrow keys and appear in the
High or Low value fields. H.6
0.0

Assigning threshold You can see predefined lower and upper threshold values in the
values H.6 Presets list. H.6
H.6 Select the threshold value that is appropriate for your diag-
nostic problem by clicking on the entry in the list.
The values of the list entry are displayed in the Low and High
value fields. The pixels that are within the threshold values are
highlighted in color in the reference segments. H.6
For how to generate predefined threshold values, see:

Page H.611, Creating and processing predefined thresh-
old values
H.6 Click on the High Quality button after you have found the
desired threshold values.
The SSD display in the output segment is now recalculated. A

process indicator tells you how extraction is progressing. H.6
When the procedure is complete an SSD image based on your

new threshold values is displayed in the output segment. H.6
You can rotate and move the resulting image in any way you
wish.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.67

Light Source H.6 You can set a light source to get a better display of the surface
condition of anatomical structures. H.6
H.6 Click on the Light Source button.

The dialog box Light Source Definition - SSD is displayed. H.6
H.6
At the same time, an arrow is shown in the selected segment to

indicate the direction of the light source. H.6
0.0

H.6
Click on and move the arrow in the selected segment to

change the direction of the light source.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.69

H.6 Select one of the predefined settings.
Or H.6
Use the sliders to set the desired ambient light, diffuse reflec-
tion, specular reflection and shininess.
H.6 Click on the check box to set a double-sided light source.

The 2 light sources are identical in all parameters except that
they shine from opposite directions. H.6
H.6
H.6 Click on Reset to restore the original direction of the arrow.
The direction of the light source does not change when the
image is rotated or shifted.
H.6 Confirm your settings with OK.
Or H.6
Save your settings as new preset.
0.0

Returning to reference If the new surface display is as you require it, close the Thresh-
mode H.6 old dialog box and return to reference mode. H.6
H.6 Click on the Close button.
Creating and processing predefined

threshold values H.6
With predefined lower and upper threshold values, you can

store optimized threshold values for different diagnostic prob-
lems. H.6
0.0

Creating new threshold The lower and upper threshold values are listed under their des-
values H.6 ignation in the Presets list in the SSD Definition dialog box.
H.6
H.6 The upper field of the Presets list is initially empty or contains
the last entry selected from the Presets list. H.6
Overwrite the old designation or enter a new designation in

the empty field.
Press the Return key to apply the new designation.
The overwritten designation is still also in the Presets list. H.6
Now adapt the values with the sliders or the arrow keys for
the upper or lower threshold values.
Or H.6
Enter the threshold values in the High and Low value value
input fields.
Confirm the numerical values you have entered by pressing
the Return key on your keyboard to check whether the val-
ues meet your requirements.
Save the new threshold values by clicking on the Save but-

ton.
Light source parameters will be saved together with the tre-
sholds.
0.0

Processing threshold If a pair of threshold values no longer meets your requirements,

values H.6 you can change the two values at any time.
H.6
First select a pair of threshold values by clicking on it in the

Presets list.
The values are displayed in the Low and High value fields.
H.6
Adapt the threshold values to your requirements with the

sliders.
Or H.6
Enter the values in the Low and High value input fields.
Apply the settings by pressing the Return key.
H.6 Save the new threshold values by clicking on the button.
0.0

Deleting a pair of You should delete lower and upper threshold values that you will
threshold values H.6 no longer require in future. In this way, you keep your threshold
value list down to a manageable size. H.6
First select a pair of threshold values by clicking on it in the

Presets list in the SSD Definition dialog box.
H.6 Click on the button.
The entry is deleted. H.6
You cannot delete the modality-specific default entries.
0.0

Generating a radial series of SSD

displays H.6
Using radial projections, you can generate views of your surface

structure from different angles. H.6
You can generate radial series based either on the entire vol-
ume data set or on a partial volume (VOI, volume of interest)
that you have extracted earlier.
Page H.56, Extracting a volume of interest (VOI) H.6
If you generate enough images forming a complete circle, you

can play them back as a movie on the Viewing task card and,
in this way, you can walk around your surface structure.
Page G.318, Animated images (Movie)
H.6
Generating radial series H.6 You will find a description of how to generate radial series from
SSD projections on:
Page H.3111, Series of radial projections and views H.6
0.0

Parallel tomographic On the basis of the SSD display, you can also generate parallel
images and curved images and curved sections. However, the results are always
sections H.6 displayed as MPR images. Generation of parallel series and
curved sections is therefore described in the following chapters:

H.6
0.0

CHAPTER Volume Rendering
H.7 Technique (VRT) H.7
You will use the Volume Rendering Technique (VRT) to obtain

more precise representation and separation of tissue types. In
that way you can obtain a three-dimensional representation. H.7
To highlight certain aspects of the anatomical region, you can
change the color, brightness, and transparency of different
areas. H.7
As display parameters for the VRT view, common default set-

tings are stored on your system in the VRT Gallery. H.7
If the default settings are not appropriate for your diagnostic

problem, you can alter them individually. In that way you can
emphasize the structures of interest in an optimum way. H.7
The Volume Rendering Technique is only possible if the depth

of color of your system is at least 24 bits.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.71

Volume Rendering Technique (VRT) 3D Evaluation
Transferring to 3D as VRT H.7
You transfer a series of images to the 3D task card from the

Patient Browser, the Viewer task card, or the Series List dia-
log box in VRT mode.
Page H.346, Setting VRT H.7
The 3D task card is displayed in the VRT view. H.7
If you have already loaded images into the 3D task card and
had only switched to another application temporarily, you can
now switch back to 3D by clicking on the cards tab.
If you have completed processing and storage of your first 3D
series, you can load the next preregistered series directly
from the 3D task card (Patient > Open Series List...). If the
patient to have been processed last is still in 3D, a dialog box
is displayed. In it you can decide whether to go ahead with
processing or to load the new series.
0.0

3D Evaluation Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
(1) Sagittal view (MPR)

(2) Transverse view (MPR)
(3) Coronal view (MPR)
(4) Free View (VRT)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.73

Assigning parameter sets H.7
In the Volume Rendering Technique, display of a volume data

set is defined by the properties color, brightness, and transpar-
ency. The color and the brightness determine the light emitted
by the object. With the transparency you can define how the
object absorbs and reflects light. H.7
The way in which an object absorbs, emits, or reflects light

depends on the properties of the data set. These can be differ-
ent within three-dimensional space. H.7
Information about the color, brightness, and light are not con-
tained in the original data sets. The CT value or MR signal value
must therefore be assigned to the properties used in VRT
mode. This is done by subdividing value ranges into tissue
classes to which certain display properties are assigned. H.7
The tissue classes and their representation are defined in

parameter sets that are stored in the VRT Gallery. These
parameter sets are automatically or manually assigned to the
original data set in VRT mode. H.7
0.0

Automatic assignment of the parameter set H.7
Each parameter set is assigned a name. H.7
As soon as you load the images into VRT mode, the system will
look for a parameter set with the same name (e.g. head) in the
VRT Gallery. If a parameter set is found, the preset tissue
classes are transferred to the image. H.7
If there is no appropriate parameter set in the VRT Gallery, the

VRT image is displayed with the last parameter set to have
been selected from the VRT Gallery. H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.75

Assigning a parameter set manually H.7
If the VRT display with the automatically assigned parameter

set does not meet your expectations, select another parameter
set from the VRT Gallery. H.7
Opening the VRT Gallery H.7 Call up Type > VRT Gallery... to display the VRT Gallery
dialog box.
Or H.7
Click on the VRT button on the Type subtask card with the
right mouse button.
The VRT Gallery dialog box is displayed. Within the VRT Gal-
lery the parameter data sets are arranged alphabetically from
top left to bottom right. H.7
0.0

If the content of the window is not displayed in its entirety, you

can have the other parameter data sets displayed along the
bottom edge of the window with the scroll bar.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.77

Assigning a parameter Click on a parameter set with the left mouse button to trans-
set H.7 fer the predefined tissue classes to the current VRT display.
0.0

Closing the VRT Gallery H.7
Close the dialog box with the OK button.

The VRT image is displayed with the selected parameter set. H.7
Or H.7
Press the Close button.

The VRT Gallery is closed. The VRT display remains
unchanged. H.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.79

Creating and editing parameter

sets H.7
The VRT Gallery provides various parameter sets for different

types of image data sets. With the VRT Definition you can cre-
ate additional parameter sets and edit existing parameter sets.
In that way, you can expand the VRT Gallery considerably and
will easily be able to assign parameter settings that are tailored
to your diagnostic problem.
H.7
Dialog box VRT Definition H.7
The VRT Gallery contains a number of predefined parameter

data sets. Each parameter set corresponds to special tissue
classes that you can define individually in the VRT Definition.H.7
Calling up VRT Definition H.7 Call up Type > VRT Definition... to switch to the VRT Defi-
nition dialog box.
You can have both dialog boxes VRT Definition and VRT
Gallery open at the same time.
Changes made in the VRT Definition are applied in the VRT
Gallery immediately.
Or H.7
Click on a parameter set of the VRT Gallery with the right

mouse button.
Changes made in the VRT Definition are applied in the VRT
Gallery after saving the preset.
0.0

VRT Definition H.7
(1) List of parameter sets

(2) Graphic setting of the VRT definition parameter
(3) Slider for zooming the histogram area in or out
(4) Light Source button
(5) Tissue classes
(6) Numerical setting of the selected tissue class
(opacity, color, brightness)
0.0

Displaying the numerical It is possible to process the parameter sets both graphically in
setting range H.7 the histogram and numerically. For numerical input you can dis-
play the numerical setting area, if it was not already displayed
when you called up the VRT Definition. H.7
Click on the Advanced >> button.

The VRT Definition dialog box is enlarged so you can edit the
input fields for numerical processing. H.7
If you want to hide the numerical setting area, simply click on

the Advanced << button again.
0.0

Adapt the graphic setting Depending on the modality, the examination data only covers a
area H.7 limited pixel range that is then evaluated in VRT mode. In the
histogram window, the complete value range is initially dis-
played. Using the slider you can zoom the range of examination
data and center it in the histogram. In that way, you can make
graphic processing of the parameter set easier using the dis-
played trapezoids that are assigned to each tissue class. H.7
To enlarge or reduce the histogram range drag the outer bor-

der of the slider with the mouse.
H.7
Slide the central mark of the slider to change the position of

the histogram.
Page A.234, Slider
H.7
0.0

Editing a parameter set H.7
You can edit the parameter set by setting the following proper-
ties for various tissue classes:
H.7
Transparency
Brightness
Color
Signal intensity values
When you enter a new transparency value, brightness value,
or a new color, the VRT display also changes immediately.
In a parameter set you can define up to four different tissue
classes.
H.7
Selecting a parameter First select the parameter set that you want to edit or whose set-
set H.7 tings are very similar to the new parameter set you want to cre-
ate. H.7
Select a parameter set from the selection list.

Overwrite the name of the parameter set with another desig-
nation if you want to create a new parameter data set.
0.0

Selecting tissue classes H.7 In a parameter set, you can define up to four different tissue
classes. H.7
Select the required number of tissue classes using the check

boxes.
For each tissue class, a trapezoid is displayed in the histogram.H.7
To delete a tissue class, simply deselect it. H.7
In the VRT image, this tissue class is then no longer displayed.H.7

Then click on the tissue class whose display you want to
change.
Or H.7
Click on the trapezoid associated with it in the histogram.
0.0

Setting a value range H.7 By changing the corner values of the trapezoid in the histogram,
you can alter the position and size of the value range that is
assigned to a tissue class. This is comparable with setting win-
dow values (center, wide). H.7
Click on a trapezoid with the left mouse button.

Slide one of the handles to the side (but not 4) with the
mouse button.
Or H.7
Enter the value you require in the relevant spin box.
H.7
If the values in the spin box change, display of the trapezoid

also changes.
0.0

Transparency H.7
Set the transparency that you want the tissue to have using
the spin box.
You can enter values from 0% (transparent) to 100%
(opaque).
Or H.7
Slide the center handle (1) of the trapezoid up or down in the

histogram.
Brightness H.7
Use the spin box to set the brightness you want the tissue to
have.
The brightness control defines the gray scale value of the tis-
sue displayed. It ranges from 0% (black) to 100% (white).
0.0

Color H.7
Click on the Color field in the numerical input area with the
left mouse button.
Or H.7
Click into the trapezoid in the histogram with the right mouse
button.
The color palette is displayed. H.7
H.7
Select the required color and confirm with OK.

The object appears in the result segment with the new color. H.7
0.0

Color transition for tissue You can assign a color to each handle in the histogram. In that
class H.7 way, you can set a color transition for display of the tissue class.
The colors of the handles define the corners of the transition. H.7
Click on a handle with the right mouse button to change its
color.
The color of handles 1 and 7 are always set to black in the
original mode.
The color is interpolated linearly between handles 1 and 3
and handles 5 and 7.
Setting shading H.7
Click on the option Shaded to create a shaded display.

If the option Shaded is activated, the VRT display is pro-
cessed with a shading algorithm, and a simulated light source
casts a shadow in the image. This way a three-dimensional
view is achieved.
Light Source H.7 If the Shaded option is checked the Light Source button is
undimmed and you can select a light source. H.7
H.7 Click on the Light Source button.

The dialog box Light Source Definition is displayed. H.7
Choose or define a suitable Light Source.

Page H.68, Light Source
0.0

Saving a parameter set H.7
If you want use the parameter set again in the future, we recom-
Shorten the Preset in a useful way in order to keep the

assignment general and confirm with the Return key.
Click on the button Save Preset to save the parameter set.
Page H.3115, Saving a parameter set with presets H.7
0.0

Deleting a parameter set H.7
You can remove each parameter set from the VRT Gallery. H.7
Click on the Delete Preset button to delete a parameter set

As soon as you delete a parameter set from the selection list,
the image icon will also disappear from the VRT Gallery dialog
box.
H.7
Finishing VRT Definition H.7
After you have saved all the required settings in the dialog box
for VRT Definition, you can close the dialog box. H.7
Click on Close to close the VRT Definition dialog window.

Or H.7
Press on the button.
0.0

Defining a VRT slice thickness

(VRT Thin) H.7
To achieve maximum intensity projection, the entire volume of

the data set is normally used. However, sometimes it is useful
to use only part of the volume for projection. The subarea is
defined by the two parallel intersection planes ("separation
plane"). The distance between these planes is the slice thick-
ness to be defined. For example, you can avoid cutting out inter-
fering structures.
H.7
Selecting a reference In the reference segment, you can define the view of the refer-

Change the display of the image until it meets your require-
ments.
0.0

Starting VRT Thin H.7 You can set VRT Thin in one, in two, or in all three reference
segments. H.7
Call up Type > VRT Thin to set the output type VRT Thin.
Or H.7
Click on the VRT Thin button on the Type subtask card.

A VRT Thin display appears in the selected segment with the
standard settings. H.7
0.0

Changing the slice Call up the Type > VRT Thickness to display the VRT Thin
thickness H.7 dialog box for setting the slice thickness.
Or H.7
Click on the VRT Thin button on the Type subtask card with
the right mouse button.
Enter the thickness that you want to use for projection in mm.
Confirm your input with OK.
Or H.7
Click on Default to set the default value (10 mm) for the
image thickness.
The selected setting is applied to all VRT Clip reconstruc-
tions.
Click on Set as default to store the displayed settings as
new default value.
applied.
0.0

Slice thickness 0 mm H.7 The use of slice thickness 0 mm is a special case of the VRT
display. A separation plane is created from intersection planes,
normally two, to delimit the visible area. This plane separates
the visible area from the hidden area. H.7
Set a slice thickness of 0 mm and confirm with OK.

You can position the separation plane freely in three-dimen-
sional space (e.g. with Smart Selection) and, in that way,
hide the area you do not require.
Page H.338, Smart Select
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Selecting and Processing
H.8 Images H.8
After you have transferred a volume data set to the 3D task

card, you can optimize the display of the images in the seg-
ments. H.8
For the images loaded, you can adapt the window values. You
can display the sections enlarged and place areas of interest in
the center of the image. H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.81

Selecting and Processing Images 3D Evaluation
Selecting images and 3D graphics H.8
You must first select the images or 3D graphics that you want to
process. H.8
On the 3D task card, a distinction is made between images that

are displayed in the reference segments and series that are
located in the output segment.
H.8
Selecting the reference In a reference segment, you can only ever select one reference
segment H.8 image. H.8
Click on the image that you want to process with the left
mouse button.
The segment is now displayed with a thick border.
H.8
Selecting the output The reconstructed series is displayed in the output segment
segment H.8 (bottom right). H.8
Click on the output segment to select all images of the recon-

structed series.
0.0

3D Evaluation Selecting and Processing Images
Selecting 3D graphics H.8 Graphic displays, e.g. graphic display of a parallel series, are
usually displayed in the images of the reference segments. H.8
Click on a line of such a display with the left mouse button to
select it.
Handles and a rotation point are then displayed on the 3D
graphics.
H.8
Processing images and You can execute many processing steps without having to
3D graphics directly H.8 select images or 3D graphics explicitly. H.8
Place the mouse cursor on the image or graphic and start

operation immediately by pressing a mouse button.
For example, you can now window the image or move the refer-
ence line of the 3D cross hair. H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.83

Showing and hiding reference lines H.8
The 3D cross hair can sometimes be an obstruction when you

want to look at details in the image. H.8
You can hide these graphic elements and show them again as
required.
H.8
H.8 Click on the Hide Reference Lines button in the upper part
of the control area to hide the reference lines.
If you now want to change the views of the images, use the
mouse.
H.8 Click on the Hide Reference Lines to display the reference

lines again.
0.0

Windowing images H.8
When transferring the volume data set to the 3D task card, the
images are displayed with the window values with which they
were last stored. H.8
In order to make diagnostically relevant details clearer, it is

often necessary to assign new window values to the images. H.8
On SSD images you can regulate the brightness and shad-
ows on the surface.
For details about windowing, see also
Page G.42, Windowing images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.85

Defining the scope of action

(Single Windowing) H.8
In the default setting, all images of the same output type e.g.
MPR are assigned the same window values. H.8
If you want to assign window values only to individual images,

you must activate the Single Windowing option. H.8
Windowing an image H.8 Call up Image > Single Windowing to select the option. The
menu item is shown with a checkmark.
Or H.8
H.8 Click on the Single Windowing button in the control area to

set Single Windowing.
Single Multi
0.0

Processing an image view H.8
You can enlarge image sections that are of particular interest to

you (zooming). If the zoomed image no longer fits in the seg-
ment, you can move it so as to place the relevant section in the
center of the image again (panning).
You will find a detailed description of how to set the image view
in:
Page G.41, Processing Images H.8
Besides the possibilities to process an image view known from

Viewing and Filming, 3D offers the Rotate function.
H.8
Rotate H.8 Call up Orientation > Rotate Images.

Or H.8
H.8 Click on the Zoom/Pan button in the upper part of the control
area.
Or H.8
Activate Smart Select with a right mouse button click and

select rotate objects.
H.8 By dragging the mouse along the segment edge you can rotate
the image plane around the centre of the image. H.8
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.87

Zoom/Pan H.8 Call up Image > Zoom/Pan.

Or H.8
H.8 Click on the Zoom/Pan button in the upper part of the control
area.
Or H.8
Activate Smart Select with a right mouse button click and

select zoom/pan.
0.0

Changing the image display with

color LUTs H.8
To optimize image viewing for your diagnostic requirements you

can display grayscale images in color. The color intensity then
corresponds to the grayscale value. You can determine which
of several predefined color lookup tables (color LUTs) is the
most suitable, apply it to selected grayscale images and even
store it together with the images. H.8
Select one or more images to apply a color LUT to (either

grayscale images to display in color or pseudo color images
to change their coloring).
Select Image > Color Lookup Table from the main menu.
The Color Lookup Table dialog box opens. H.8
Select the original grey values or a color table from the Color
Lookup Table selection list.
H.8 Click on Cancel, if you do not want to make any changes.
H.8 Click on OK, if you want to apply the color table displayed to
the selected images and close the dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.89

0.0

CHAPTER
H.9 3D Editor H.9
A common problem in evaluating medical images is that areas

relevant to an examination are hidden by other structures,
especially bones. The necessary image information is con-
tained in the volume data set but must be made visible with suit-
able editing steps. H.9
In simpler cases you can solve the problem by post-editing in

VOI mode. You can delimit concealing structures manually and
cut them out of the data set. H.9
In more complex cases, this method will require greater effort if

you want to separate areas relevant to the diagnosis from con-
cealing structures cleanly. In that case we recommend using
the 3D Editor which provides tools for marking and isolating
structures of interest semi-automatically in three-dimensional
space. These structures are referred to as objects. H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.91

3D Editor 3D Evaluation
Functions of the 3D Editor H.9
With the 3D Editor you can perform the following operations: H.9
Object generation with Region Growing
Object management in the object list
Object editing with Object Punching and Morphological
Operations
Region Growing H.9 Normally in the first step you will generate one or more "objects"
from the volume data set originally loaded in 3D. By specifying
a limited voxel value range you extract only a section of the vox-
els from the original data set. In this way, you generate an object
in the result segment. H.9
Instead of extracting globally from the entire volume data set

you can also proceed "slice by slice" (in 3D blocks) using the
Slab Editor. H.9
You can also set Seed Points in the original data set, thus lim-
iting the creation of an object to defined regions which are also
connected to one another in the specified voxel area. H.9
0.0

3D Evaluation 3D Editor
Object Punching H.9 Like editing volume data sets in VOI mode, you can use the 3D
Editor, too. You are provided with tools for cutting out structures
from an object that you have previously generated. H.9
Using the Slab Editor you can define your own cutting depth.
H.9
Morphological Operations H.9 In some cases it will not be simple to separate the structures of
an object using the cutting tools. Here we recommend eroding,
or shrinking, the areas of the object by a specified surface thick-
ness until the obscuring structures are no longer contained in
the object. You can subsequently dilate, or blow up, the remain-
ing object areas by a defined surface thickness. As a result, the
irrelevant areas contained at the outset are now removed from
the representation. If you perform the same operations in
reverse order, small cavities in the object will be filled. H.9
H.9
NOTE
With Morphological Operations you can eliminate small
structures and fill cavities but you will also change the
structures of the target object. H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.93

Calling up the 3D Editor H.9
You can edit the volume data set using the 3D Editor in the dia-
log box Object Editor which you call up as soon as you have
transferred the volume data set to the 3D card in any represen-
tation (MPR, MIP, MinIP, SSD, etc.). H.9
Place the Settings subtask card in the foreground.
Click on the Object Editor button.

The dialog box Object Editor is opened in Region Growing
mode. The segments of the 3D card are repositioned for editing
in the 3D Editor. H.9
0.0

3D card in editor mode H.9
When you call up the 3D Editor, the image area of the 3D card
is subdivided into the following segments: H.9
(1) Slab segment for defining the slice to be edited and repre-
senting the resulting series
(2) 3D editor window
(3) Working segment (MPR or MIP/MinIP Thin)
(4) Result segment (SSD)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.95

Dialog box Object Editor H.9
The dialog box Object Editor always appears in the bottom left-
hand (empty) segment and does not therefore hide any of the
working or result segments. H.9
It contains the following areas: H.9
(1) Tool bar

(2) Object list
(3) Mode-specific tools
(4) General buttons (close 3D editor)
0.0

The Slab Editor H.9
When you call up the 3D Editor, the loaded series of the last
view to be set appears in the slab segment in the selected dis-
play mode. Usually you see a coronal MIP image in the slab
segment and a transversal MPR image in the working segment
whose position in the slab segment is indicated by a navigation
line. H.9
(1) Navigation line
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.97

Switching on the Slab Editor H.9
Select the area of interest from the loaded volume data set as
a 3D block. From this 3D block generate and edit the 3D objects
using the editor functions. H.9
Click on the button Use Slab the tool bar of the dialog box
Object Editor to activate slab mode.
To deactivate slab mode, click again on the Use Slab button.
The block lines are displayed in the slab segment. H.9
(1) Upper boundary line of the 3D block

(2) Center line of the 3D block
(3) Navigation line
(4) Lower boundary line of the 3D block
0.0

Changing a 3D block H.9
All editing operations that you perform in the 3D editor only

affect the structures in the 3D block (within the boundary lines).
You therefore still have to adjust the position, extent, and orien-
tation of the 3D block.
H.9
Enlarging/reducing a 3D You can enlarge or reduce a 3D block by moving the boundary

block H.9 lines with the mouse. H.9
Move the upper boundary line away from the center line
keeping the mouse button pressed to increase the size of the
3D block.
Or H.9
Drag the boundary line toward the center line to reduce the
size of the 3D block.
The same applies to moving the lower boundary line.
In each case, the center line is moved toward the new center of
the enlarged or reduced 3D block. The other boundary line
remains unchanged. H.9
0.0
syngo MR 2006T H.99

Moving a 3D block H.9 You can move the 3D block within the slab segment using the
center line. H.9
Pull the center line at its center point to the desired position
keeping the mouse button pressed.
Rotating a 3D block H.9 You can change the orientation of a 3D block by tilting the center
line or turning the tomographic images. H.9
Click on the center line (not on the center point) and rotate
the center line in the desired direction keeping the mouse
button pressed.
The entire 3D block is moved together with the navigation line
in the corresponding direction.
H.9
0.0

Or H.9
Click on the working segment or slab segment and change

the orientation of the tomographic image using the menu
commands and screen buttons.
Page H.311, Setting views in the volume data set
0.0

Block by block editing with the Slab Editor H.9
When generating and postprocessing objects you can succes-

sively extract structures from blocks of the original data set. To
do that, you first define a 3D block and then position it at one
end of the volume. When you have extracted the voxels, move
the 3D block within the volume so that it joins on to the end posi-
tion of the first block. Then start the next extraction and continue
in this way until you have covered the entire volume. H.9
In this procedure you move the 3D block equidistantly up or

down by one block thickness H.9
Click on the Move Block + button to move the 3D block in the

opposite direction to the slab arrow by the amount of its thick-
ness.
Or H.9
Click on the Move Block - button to move the 3D block equi-

distantly in the direction of the slab arrows.
Or H.9
Move the navigation line beyond the upper or lower boundary

line of the 3D block.
When you have moved the 3D block, the previous upper bound-
ary line is now the lower line of delimitation and vice versa. H.9
0.0

Creating 3D objects H.9
By extracting particular voxels from the volume data set you

create objects with the 3D Editor representing organs and
structures, e.g. blood vessels, bones, and soft tissue. H.9
With Region Growing you create an object from the voxels of

the original data set that are located within a prescribed value
range. You can subsequently expand the objects by adding vox-
els from other value ranges. H.9
The use of Seed Points and Blocker allows you to define as an

object only the regions that you have selected and which are
spatially connected, taking the specified threshold range into
account. H.9
In the slab segment (top left) you can apply the creation of
objects to an entire volume data set or limit it to one 3D block.
Page H.97, The Slab Editor
0.0

Creating an object with threshold H.9
You usually create new objects with Region Growing mode. H.9
Call up Settings > Editor Region Growing....

Or H.9
Click on the button Object Editor.

Or H.9
Click on the button Region Growing on the tool bar of the

dialog box Object Editor.
The tools for thresholding are now displayed in the dialog box
Object Editor. H.9
H.9
(1) Tools for thresholding
0.0

Selecting a new object H.9 The list of objects that have been created for the loaded volume
data set is displayed in the central area of the dialog box Object
Editor. When you edit the list for the first time it contains the
entry "new". H.9
If objects have already been defined for the volume data set,
you can now select them from the object list and postprocess
them.
Page H.924, Working with the object list
Click on new to define a new object.
Setting a threshold H.9 In the dialog box Object Editor you will first see the default or
last threshold values to have been used to reconstruct an
object. The associated areas are highlighted in color in the
working segment (top right). H.9
You can use predefined threshold value pairs or define new

threshold value ranges to create new objects. H.9
0.0

Select the threshold value suitable for your diagnostic prob-

lem from the Presets list.
Or
H.9
Enter new threshold values in the spin box and confirm them
with the Enter key.
Or H.9
H.9
Set a threshold value with the slider.

Drag the end boundaries of the slider with the mouse to
increase or decrease the threshold range.
Move the center mark of the slider to change the position of
the threshold value range.
The threshold values you enter are applied to the representa-

tion in the working segment. H.9
0.0

Displaying an object H.9 As soon as you have set the threshold values start reconstruc-
tion of the object. H.9
Click on the button Add to Object.
The reconstructed object appears in the result segment. H.9
0.0

Undo H.9 You can undo the last task, e.g. Add to Object, if the entries
you have made are incorrect. H.9
Click on the button Undo Last Step.
Saving presets H.9 When you have found suitable threshold value pairs you can
store them under a new name in the preset list.
Page H.611, Creating and processing predefined threshold
values H.9
Overwrite the original name with a name of your choice.
Store the new threshold values by clicking the button.
0.0

Creating an object with Region Growing H.9
Once you have created an object by defining the threshold val-

ues, you limit the size of the object with the functions Define
Seed Points and Draw Blocker. H.9
Selecting an object H.9
Click on the object in the object list.
Setting Seed Points H.9 In the working segment you can see the selected object within
the defined threshold values. H.9
Click on the button Define Seed Points in the Region Grow-

ing window area.

H.9
Click on the relevant points in the working segment with the

left mouse button to set the Seed Points.
0.0

You can set any number of Seed Points and move them by
clicking on them and dragging them with the mouse.
Deleting seed points H.9 If you have set too many Seed Points you can delete them
again. H.9
Click with the left mouse button on the Seed Point and then
press the Del key on your keyboard.
0.0

Setting a blocker H.9 With blockers you can limit growing of the voxel areas starting
from the seed points. To do that you define boundary lines
beyond which the voxel areas are not allowed to grow. H.9
Switch to MIP display in the working segment.

If necessary, use the Slab Editor.
Click on the button Draw Blocker in the window area
Region Growing.
Click with the left mouse button on the required starting point
of the boundary line in the working segment.
Click on any other point in the image at which the direction of
the curve must change.
Or H.9
Draw a continuous line by dragging the mouse cursor across

the image keeping the left mouse button pressed.
Terminate the line with a double-click.
0.0

You can draw one or several freehand curves into your work-
ing segment.
Removing a blocker H.9 You can remove any freehand curves that you no longer need
at any time. H.9
Click with the left mouse button on the Blocker that you want
to delete and then press the Del key.
0.0

Displaying an object H.9 Once you have set the Seed Points and drawn in any Blockers
you require you can start reconstruction of the object. H.9
Click on the button Replace Object.
You can also set a threshold value range from the beginning
and use Seed Points and Blockers. You can generate a new
object with Add to Object.
The edited object appears in the result segment. H.9
Undo H.9 You can undo the last step, e.g. Replace Object, if entries are
incorrect. H.9
Click on the button Undo Last Step.
0.0

Working with the object list H.9
The object list appears as soon as the Object Editor is opened.

All predefined and new objects are displayed in the list. H.9
(1) Name of object

(2) Check box to display the object in the slab segment
(3) Selected object for display in the result segment
(4) New (empty) object
You can select one or several objects simultaneously in the

object list. The selected objects are displayed in the result seg-
ment. H.9
In the object list you can see the name, color, visibility, volume
and status of the object. As soon as you change a predefined
object in the working segment, the status "modified" is entered
in the list. H.9
0.0

Volume values are not exact, especially on images that are

not distortion-corrected.
The Remark column is added to the object list as soon as
you have loaded images on which further information has to
be provided (e.g., MR images which are not distortion-cor-
rected).
0.0

Selecting objects H.9
When you open the dialog box Object Editor, the existing
objects of the loaded volume data set appear in the object list.
The list is updated every time an object is updated. H.9
Individual object H.9
Click on an object in the object list.

The selected object appears in the result segment. H.9
The selected object does not appear in the slab segment until
you activate it in the object list via the check box.
Several objects H.9
Check several objects one after the other while keeping the
Ctrl key pressed.
All the selected objects are displayed in the result segment in
the color assigned to them. H.9
0.0

Changing object properties H.9
You can change the color of objects in the result segment to

provide a more realistic representation of the structure. You can
keep your object list understandable by assigned appropriate
names (e.g. Bone for bone structure). H.9
Assigning a color H.9
Double-click with the left mouse button on the field Color of

the selected object.
The color palette is displayed. H.9
Select the required color and confirm with OK.

The object appears in the result segment with the new color. H.9
0.0

Changing an object name H.9
Select an object from the object list with the mouse.

Click again on the entry keeping the mouse pressed for a
short time.
A text input field is displayed. H.9
Enter a name for the new object via the keyboard and con-
firm it with the Return key.
Displaying objects in the slab segment H.9
The objects contained in the object list can be hidden or

revealed individually in the slab segment. In that way you deter-
mine which areas are to be stored as a new series for further
processing. H.9
Displaying objects H.9
Check the check boxes of the objects to be displayed in the

slab segment.
0.0

Hiding an object H.9
Uncheck the check box of the relevant object again.
0.0

Displaying the complement The Punched Volume contains all the voxels of the original
area H.9 data set not yet contained in objects. H.9
Activate Punched Volume to display the residual data set.

The Punched Volume and all objects activated in the object list
are displayed. H.9
If, for example, you only want to hide the blood in the data set,
deselect the blood objects from the list and activate all the
remaining objects as well as Punched Volume.
0.0

Updating the display H.9
Whenever you create or change objects you must update the

views. Only then are the changes made to objects activated.
For example, an object hidden in an object list is not removed
from the display in the two upper segments until the display is
updated. H.9
Click on Update Masking to apply the changes of your

object editing.
0.0

Saving, adding, deleting objects H.9
You can manage existing objects or objects you have just cre-
ated with the object list. It is recommended that you save inter-
mediate versions while you are working which you can restore
whenever necessary. If you want to keep a particular version of
an object but want to continue working on it, simply create a
duplicate. H.9
Delete any objects that you no longer require from the object
list. This keeps the object list and the database in which the
objects are stored to a manageable size.
H.9
Storing an intermediate With the mouse select the objects in the object list for which
version of the object H.9 you want to store an intermediate version.
Click on the button Save Selected Objects.
Restoring an object You have continued working on an object for which you created
version H.9 in intermediate version and would like to restore the previous
version. H.9
Select the object in question from the object list with the
mouse.
Click on the button Reload Selected Objects.
0.0

H.9
N OT E
Any changes you have made to an object after you stored
an intermediate version of it are lost if you restore that
version. H.9
Duplicating an object H.9 During your work on an object you have arrived at a version that
you do not want to lose by continued work on it. Duplicate this
object and then continue work on the new duplicated object. In
this way, you can make several versions of an object by produc-
ing further duplicates. H.9
With the mouse select the object from the object list that you
want to duplicate.
Click on the button Duplicate Selected Object.
The new object is stored under the same name but with the
extension 1 (or 2, 3,... for further duplicates of this object) to the
end of the object list.
H.9
Creating a new object H.9 Create a new object for each new extraction of voxels from the
volume data set. H.9
Click on the button New Object.

A new object with the name new Object 1 (or new Object 2,
new Object 3,...) is appended to the end of the object list. H.9
0.0

Deleting an object H.9 You can remove any objects that you no longer require from the
object list. H.9
With the mouse select the objects that you want to delete
from the object list.
Click on the button Delete Selected Objects.
Confirm deletion of the selected objects in the dialog box dis-

played.
0.0

Postprocessing objects H.9
The 3D editor offers you the functions Object Punching and

Morphological Operations for fine editing of objects. H.9
With these functions you can edit existing objects that you can
access from the object list.
H.9
Cutting out structures H.9
With Object Punching mode you can cut freely definable areas
out of the object. H.9
Activating Object Call up Settings > Editor Object Punching....

Punching H.9
Or H.9
Click on the button Object Punching in the tool bar of the

dialog box Object Editor.
0.0

The tools of Object Punching mode are displayed in the bot-

tom half of the dialog box Object Editor. H.9
(1) Tools of Object Punching mode.
0.0

Defining a cutting depth H.9 You can extend the cutting out of structures to the entire volume
data set or limit it to one 3D block (Slab). If you work in slab
mode, the cutting depth is limited by the size of the 3D block. H.9
Click on Use Slab to hide or reveal the 3D block in the slab
segment.
If necessary, set the required position, extent, and orienta-
tion of the 3D block.
Drawing in a cut line H.9 Now draw a contour around the object structures that you want
to cut out in the result segment. H.9
Click on the button Draw Contour.
Set the starting point of your contour with a mouse click.

Set further contour points with the mouse.
0.0

The individual contour points are joined up by the straight line.H.9
Or H.9
Draw a continuous line around the required structure while

keeping the left mouse pressed.
Close each contour in question with a double click.
0.0

Editing cut lines H.9 You can lengthen, shorten, and move the cut lines that you have
drawn using handles. H.9
Click on a cut line with the mouse to show the handles.

Change the length and orientation of the cut line using the
lateral handles.
Move the cut line using the center graphic marker.
Removing cut lines H.9 If the contour that you have drawn does not meet your require-
ments, simply delete the line. H.9
Click on the line with the mouse to mark it.

Press the Del key on your keyboard to delete the cut line.
0.0

Cutting out structures H.9 Once you have drawn in a contour and adapted its position and
extent, you can reveal or delete the structures in the contour. H.9
H.9
Click on the button Keep Inside.

The structures outside the contour are deleted. H.9
0.0

Or H.9
Click on the button Remove Inside.

The structures inside the contour are removed. H.9
With the tools Draw Contour and Remove Inside you can
successively remove structures from the object and gradually
adapt the object to its most important structures.
Undo H.9 If you remove any structures accidentally you can undo the last
step. H.9
Click on Undo Last Step.
0.0

Morphological editing H.9
You apply morphological operations if structures inside the

object cannot be separated simply with the cutting tools. You
can remove edge areas in the representation by eroding, or
shrinking, and then dilating, or blowing up, an object. If you per-
form the same operations in reverse order, small cavities in the
object will be filled. H.9
With the Morphological Operations, you can also produce

softer transitions for VRT display, for example.
Activating Morphological Call up Settings > Editor Morphological Operations....

Operations H.9
Or H.9
Click on the button Morphological Operations in the tool

bar of the dialog box Object Editor.
0.0

The tools for the Morphological Operations are displayed in the

lower half of the dialog box Object Editor. H.9
(1) Tools of Morphological Operations mode
0.0

Eroding an object H.9
Enter the surface thickness via the spin box by which the
object is to be eroded or shrunk.
Then click on the Erode Object button.
The eroded object appears in the result segment. H.9
If there are still structures concealing the object you can enter
a new surface thickness and erode the object again.
H.9
Undo H.9 If the result is unsatisfactory you can undo the last step. H.9
Click on Undo Last Step.
0.0

Dilating an object H.9 You have eroded the object so far that it no longer contains con-
cealing structures. Now dilate, or blow up, the object to the
desired size. H.9
Enter the surface thickness via the spin box by which the
object is to be dilated.
Then click on the Dilate Object button.

The object is displayed with the relevant areas in the result seg-
ment. H.9
Use the Undo function if you have used the incorrect surface
thickness to dilate the object.
0.0

Closing the 3D Editor H.9
Once you have defined and evaluated as objects all the struc-
tures to be displayed, you can close the 3D Editor. H.9
When you close the 3D Editor the objects are saved to your
local database together with the original series. H.9
Closing the 3D Editor H.9 H.9
Click on the Close button in the dialog box Object Editor to

close the 3D Editor.
Or H.9
Click on this button.
0.0

CHAPTER
H.10 Fusion H.10
The function Fusion allows you to combine the results of differ-

ent acquisition techniques or acquisitions performed at different
times by overlaying them. H.10
Two image series are loaded in 3D and then aligned spatially

and overlaid with Fusion. The initial data sets are merged to a
new data set. In this data set, matching image pairs from the
two loaded series are linked and can then be displayed for diag-
nostic purposes like two slides one on top of the other.
H.10
Options H.10 The following functions are optional: H.10
Aligning with reference points

Automatic Registration
Surface Matching
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using fused images for diagnosis. H.10
Consequence: Incorrect diagnosis. H.10
Remedy: Do not use fused images for diagnosis if the

history of manipulations is not well known. H.10
0.0

Fusion 3D Evaluation
Functions of Fusion H.10
To perform an evaluation with Fusion, you must execute the

three following steps: H.10
Loading two different image series of a patient

Align the two image series
Edit the display parameters
Loading H.10 In the first step you load two volume data sets in 3D, one refer-
ence series and one model series. H.10
The reference series serves as an anchor for subsequent over-

laying of the two image data sets. H.10
The model series is aligned spatially on the reference series.H.10

Aligning H.10 In the alignment step, the data of the model series is aligned
spatially to the reference series. H.10
You can align the two image series automatically (Automatic

Registration), by selecting threshold values (Surface Matching),
by assigning points (landmarks) or by shifting the model series
visually (visual alignment). H.10
Editing the Fusion image Once you have successfully aligned the image data sets you
data set H.10 can edit the display parameters in order to display them spe-
cific. You can window individual image series and color display
of the Fusion images. You can then apply the whole range of 3D
functions to the merged image data set.
Page H.339, Defining output types H.10
0.0

3D Evaluation Fusion
Calling up Fusion H.10
To perform the function Fusion you require two volume data

sets, the reference series and the model series. H.10
Both image series should cover approximately the same exam-

ination range.
H.10
If you select a data set that has already been processed with
Fusion, it is loaded in 3D together with the previously stored
alignment. It is then not necessary to realign the overlaid
series.
0.0

Loading image data sets H.10
In normal operation, you select the two image series for your
Fusion evaluation in the Patient Browser and transfer them
one after the other to the 3D task card. H.10
If you had already processed the reference series in 3D with

another function (e.g. editor), you can load the missing model
series from the Patient Browser. H.10
If you want to load image series of different patients, you have

to confirm a corresponding message. The overlay of images
of different patients is marked in the Image text.
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Loading unintentionally image data sets
of different patients. H.10
Consequence: Mix-up of patients and incorrect diagnosis

possible. H.10
Remedy: When loading reference and model series, take

care that you select the data of the correct patient. H.10
0.0

Loading a new series H.10 Call up Patient Browser (Patient > Patient Browser).
Select the series that you want to use as reference images
in the navigation or content area.
Call up Applications > 3D > MPR from the main menu.
Or H.10
Click on the 3D-MPR on the toolbar of the Patient Browser.

If you have activated the function Close after loading, the
Patient Browser dialog box is closed as soon as the images
are loaded.
Select the series that you want to use as model images in the
navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Applications > 3D > Fusion from the main menu.
Or H.10
Click on the Fusion button on the toolbar of the Patient

Browser.
0.0

Loading the model series You have already loaded an image data into the 3D task card
subsequently H.10 and now want to overlay another image data set on top of it. H.10
Call up Patient Browser (Patient > Patient Browser).
Select the series that you want to use for the model images
in the navigation or content area of the Patient Browser.
Call up Applications > 3D > Fusion from the main menu.
Or H.10
Click on the Fusion button on the toolbar of the Patient

Browser.
0.0

3D card in Fusion mode H.10
The images of the loaded reference and model series are dis-
played overlaid in the first three segments. H.10
In the fourth segment, a dialog box is displayed which supports

you with the alignment of the images in the reference and model
series. H.10
(1) Image area

Three orthogonal views of the loaded images.
(2) Dialog box Fusion Registration
Operating elements for overlaying images.
(3) Settings subtask card
Buttons for overlaying and displaying images.
0.0

Aligning image series H.10
As soon as you have loaded the image series for processing

with Fusion you can align them in orientation and rotation. You
perform these steps with the help of dialog box Fusion Regis-
tration. H.10
Call up Fusion > Fusion Registration from the main menu.

Or H.10
H.10 Click on the Fusion Registration button in the Image sub-

task card.
0.0

The dialog box Fusion Registration contains the following

functions: H.10
Registration matrix
Lists all available matrices (user defined, the initial, and the
default matrix). After entering a new name here, you can
save your current registration as a new matrix or delete it.
Landmarks
Both loaded image series are made to match using suitable
reference points.
Visual Alignment
The two loaded image series are (manually) made to match
visually.
H.10 Automatic Registration

The two loaded series are automatically made to match.
Surface Matching
The two loaded image series are made to match on the basis
of preset threshold values specific of the tissue structure.
0.0

Registration Matrix H.10
You can save intermediate steps or the final result of a Fusion

registration by saving the corresponding registration matrix.
You can also assign the initial or the default matrix. H.10
The matrix will be saved to the Local Database. You find it in the
"3D Application Data" series of the reference series as a non-
image object. H.10
When you are registering the series for the first time (and no
matrices have been defined), only the "Initial" and "Default"
matrices are shown. H.10
Initial H.10 If the last alignment that you saved is unsuitable, you can return
to the initial position. H.10
Choose the Initial matrix from the Registration matrix list.
Default H.10 If you are working on a combination device (e.g. CT-PET scan-
ner) you have an additional option: calling up a default align-
ment stored in the system and applying it to the alignment of a
reference and model series. H.10
Choose the Default matrix from the Registration matrix list.
User Defined H.10 After aligning the series (which modifies the matrix) and apply-
ing the Save Registration button, a matrix with the name "User
Defined" is stored for this registration (you can also change the
name of the matrix). H.10
Later you can save further versions or update existing ones. H.10
0.0

Re-use of Matrices H.10 The next time you load two series, the last used matrix is auto-
matically applied. You can further modify this matrix, or make
changes and save it under another name. H.10
It is possible to re-use a matrix for a registered series together

with another series, if these series are geometrically compat-
ible.
Saving a Registration In the Fusion Registration dialog box, enter a new name in the
Matrix H.10 Registration matrix field, overwrite an existing name, or keep
the current name to save as an updated version. H.10
It is not possible to overwrite the Default and Initial matri-

ces. When you try to do so, the matrix is stored with a gener-
ated name instead: User Defined.
H.10 Click the Save Registration icon.
Deleting a Stored Matrix H.10 Select a name from the Registration Matrix list.
H.10 Click the Delete icon.
The selected registration matrix is deleted from the list and from
the database. H.10
It is not possible to delete the Default and Initial matrices.
0.0

Aligning images visually H.10
With Visual Alignment you make the reference and model

series match by aligning the model images in the three seg-
ments step by step with the reference images. H.10
Click on the button Visual Alignment in the dialog box

Fusion Registration to display the functions of Visual
Alignment.
(1) Double direction arrow

for large image movements
(2) Single direction arrow
for small image movements
(3) Double rotation arrow
for large image rotations
(4) Single rotation arrow
for small image rotations
0.0

The two image series are displayed overlaid. In three segments

of the image area you can see the reference and model images
in three orthogonal views. To help you distinguish between
them they are displayed in different colors. H.10
0.0

Processing images H.10 Using Zoom/Pan and Rotate object you can find the most suit-
able position to start the alignment of the two series. H.10
H.10 Activate the option zoom/pan via Smart Select.
Or
H.10
H.10 Click the Zoom/Pan icon button in the upper part of the con-
trol area.
Zoom or pan the image.
Activate the option rotate object via Smart Select.

Or H.10
H.10 Click on the icon button in the upper part of the control area.
Rotate the image.
0.0

Moving a model series H.10 Activate the option align model via Smart Select, if neces-
sary.
Drag the model series from the center of the segment into
the desired direction while keeping the left mouse button
pressed.
Or H.10
Click on a single direction arrow in the overview drawing of

the function window Visual Alignment.
The model series moves by 1 mm in the selected direction. H.10
Or H.10
Click on a double direction arrow.

The model series moves by 10 mm in the selected direction.
H.10
Rotating a model series H.10 Activate the option align model via Smart Select, if neces-
sary.
Move the mouse pointer along the edge of the segment to
rotate the model series in the plane while keeping the left
Or H.10
Click on a single rotation arrow in the overview drawing of the

function window Visual Alignment.
The model series turns in steps of 1 in the selected direction.H.10
Or H.10
Click on a double rotation arrow.

The model series turns in the selected direction in steps of
10. H.10
0.0

Saving alignment images H.10 You can intermediately save any promising alignments you
have performed. H.10
You can call up these versions whenever you need them by

selecting the corresponding matrix from the registration matrix
list. H.10
H.10
NOTE
Whenever you make an improvement by turning and
moving the images, you should save the new alignment to
the database. You can then return to a previous result if the
two series start to drift apart again. H.10
Click on the Save button to save the current alignment

matrix.
You can save the alignment as often you want. The previous
result is then overwritten by the new one.
0.0

Aligning images with reference points H.10
You align image series with reference points, if you have

detected distinctive structures in both data sets. H.10
Click on the Landmarks button in the dialog box Fusion

Registration to display the functions of Landmarks.
(1) Buttons
For setting and editing reference points.
(2) List of reference points
With deviation from the current alignment (when there are
at least three defined reference point pairs).
0.0

The reference series is displayed in the two left segments and

the model series in the right segments of the image area. You
can address all the image segments separately. H.10
(1) Reference images

Sagittal view above, axial view below
(2) Model images
Sagittal view above, axial view below
(3) Reference lines with cross hair
on all images
0.0

Defining reference points H.10 You first define a reference point at a distinguishing location in
the volume. Then you place the associated second reference
point at the relevant position in the other series. The result is a
reference point pair on which your system for aligning a model
series to a reference series is based. H.10
Set the views in the reference segments in which you can

clearly see the position for the reference point.
Move the crosshair in one of the reference segments to the
desired reference point position keeping the left mouse but-
ton pressed.
In the other reference segment check whether the crosshair
is located at the correct position and move it, if necessary.
Now define the associated reference point on the model side
in the same way.
Click on the button Add to apply the reference point pair.
The new reference point is numbered and entered in the list of
reference points. Your system now anchors the model series at
the defined reference points with the reference series. H.10
The more points you define, the more precise the overlaying
of the two image series will be. You must define at least three
reference points to determine the spatial alignment of the
series.You can define up to 100 landmarks.
0.0

Displaying a reference H.10
point
Click on the entry in the list that refers to the reference point.
H.10
Click on the Goto button.

Or H.10
Double-click on the relevant entry.

The crosshair jumps to the position of the selected reference
point. The displayed reference point is marked in the table with
a blue background.
H.10
Repositioning a reference Display one of the reference points.

point
Move the crosshair in both series to the required position
H.10
keeping the left mouse button pressed.

Click on the Update button.
Deleting a reference point H.10 Display one of the reference points.

Click on the Remove button.
The marked reference point is deleted. H.10
0.0

Deleting all reference

points H.10
H.10 Click on the Remove All button if you want to delete all
defined reference points.
A dialog box is displayed in which you must confirm deleting of
all reference points.
H.10
Saving alignment images H.10
H.10 Click on the Save button to save the current alignment

matrix.
Page H.1016, Saving alignment images
Page H.1015, Rotating a model series
0.0

Automatic Registration H.10
With Automatic Registration the model series is automatically

aligned with the reference series. You use this procedure mainly
for image series of different modalities from the same patient.H.10
H.10 Click on the Automatic Registration button in the dialog box
Fusion Registration to display the functions of Automatic
Registration.
H.10
It is important to roughly align the model series in the seg-

ments with the reference series.
Page H.1015, Moving a model series
Page H.1015, Rotating a model series
Select Precise registration for highly precise or Fast regis-

tration for fast overlaying.
H.10 Click on the Register button.
0.0

The two image series are now made to match and successively
aligned with each other. You can watch the progress of overlay-
ing in the image area in the three orthogonal views. H.10
0.0

The dialog display shows the progress of the alignment opera-

tion. H.10
H.10 Click on the Stop button if you are satisfied with the results
and do not want to wait until operation has been completed.
The alignment obtained so far is retained.
H.10

matrix.
0.0

Surface Matching H.10
With Surface Matching you align the model images with the
reference images on the basis of threshold values correspond-
ing to a specific tissue structure. You use this procedure in fol-
low-up examinations to compare different data sets of the same
patient. H.10
H.10 Click on the Surface Matching button in the dialog box

Fusion Registration to display the functions of Surface
Matching.
H.10
(1) (2)
(1) Threshold values of the reference series

(2) Threshold values of the model series
0.0

The reference series is displayed in the two left segments and

the model series in the two right segments of the image area.H.10
(1) Reference images

Axial view (MPR) above, coronal view (SSD) below
(2) Model images
Axial view (MPR) above, coronal view (SSD) below
0.0

Entering threshold values H.10 Select a tissue structure for which you want to make the two
image series match (e.g. bone, skin).
Set modality-specific threshold values corresponding to this
tissue structure for the reference series.
Select the corresponding threshold values for the model
series.
The image areas inside the value range are highlighted in color
in the corresponding segments.
H.10
Starting overlaying H.10
H.10 Click on the Register button in the dialog box Fusion

Registration.
The two image series are now made to match and successively
aligned with each other. You can watch the progress of overlay-
ing in the image area in the three orthogonal views. H.10
0.0

A bar display shows the progress of the alignment process. H.10
0.0

H.10 Click on the Stop button if you are satisfied with the results
and do not want to wait until overlaying has been completed.
The alignment obtained so far is retained.
H.10
Changing threshold As soon as you have started overlaying, the Register button
values H.10 changes into Define.
With Define you have the possibility to repeat overlaying with
other threshold values. H.10
0.0

H.10 Click on the Define button.

The images of the reference and model series are now dis-
played side by side again and the threshold values can be
changed.
H.10

matrix.
0.0

Closing alignment H.10
If you have alignment the model series and reference series

with sufficient precision you can store the overlaying in the local
database.
H.10
Applying overlaying H.10 H.10
Click on the OK button in order to keep your alignment

defined so far.
Canceling overlaying H.10
Click on Cancel if you want to dismiss alignment of the data-

base.
0.0

Displaying overlaid images H.10
Once you have aligned the image data sets and confirmed
overlaying, you can display the image data sets both next to one
another (Side-by-Side) and overlaid (Fusion).
H.10
Side-by-Side mode H.10
In Side-by-Side mode, both image data sets are displayed side

by side in separate segments. H.10
Call up Fusion > Fusion Side by Side from the main menu.
Or H.10
Click on the button Side-by-Side on the Image subtask card

to activate the Side-by-Side display.
0.0

The left image area is used to display the reference images and
the right for the model images. To assist assignment in space,
two coupled mouse pointers are displayed that move across
both data sets synchronously. The coupled mouse pointer is
marked in a color. H.10
0.0

Setting the view H.10 In Side-by-Side mode, you move through the image stack on
the reference segment. The corresponding image is automati-
cally displayed on the model segment. You can change the view
of the merged data set by one of the following methods: H.10
Paging
Page H.317, Paging with the dog ears
Rotating the volume with the mouse
Page H.319, Rotating the volume with the mouse
Setting standard views
Using a crosshair
H.10
Setting the display mode H.10 In Side-by-Side mode, the following display modes are possi-
ble: H.10
MPR; MPR Thick
MIP, MIP Thin
MinIP, MinIP Thin
Fused MPR, Fused MIP
0.0

H.10 SSD
H.10 VRT, VRT Thin
Click on the relevant button on the Type subtask card.
Closing Side-by-Side H.10
H.10 Click on the button Side-by-Side to close the Side-by-Side

view.
The merged data set is now displayed in fusion mode. H.10
0.0

Fusion mode H.10
In fusion mode, both image data sets are displayed like two
slides placed on top of each other. H.10
Call up Fusion > Fused MPR from the main menu.

Or H.10
Click on the Fused MPR button on the Type subtask card to

the selected segment to MPR type.
The two image data sets are displayed in different colors to help
you distinguish between them. The overlaid image data set is
displayed as it is for Visual Alignment in three orthogonal dis-
plays in three segments. H.10
0.0

Setting the view H.10 In fusion mode you move through the image stack in each seg-
ment. You can change the view of the merged data set by one
of the following methods: H.10
Paging
Page H.317, Paging with the dog ears
Rotating the volume with the mouse
Page H.319, Rotating the volume with the mouse
Setting standard views
Using a crosshair
H.10
N OT E
Creating curved cuts, 3D editor objects, and VOI punchings
affects the reference series only. H.10
0.0

Changing the display H.10
Once you have successfully overlaid your images, you can opti-
mize the window values, the mixing ratio, and color display of
the images so that you can recognize the structures of individ-
ual image data sets more easily. H.10
Call up Fusion > Fusion Definition from the main menu.

Or H.10
Click on the Fused MPR button with the right mouse button.
The dialog box Fusion Definition is displayed.
H.10
0.0

Windowing in a segment H.10 Drag mouse starting in the left half of a segment to change
the window position (brightness) and window width (con-
trast) of the reference series using the middle mouse button.
Or H.10
Drag mouse starting in the right half of a segment to change

the window position (brightness) and window width (con-
trast) of the model series using the middle mouse button.
Page G.412, Windowing with the mouse
Windowing in the dialog H.10
box H.10
Move the slider for the data set in question to change the win-
dow position (brightness).
Move the right or left edge of the slide to change the window
width (contrast).
Or H.10
Enter the window values numerically into the edit fields and
confirm with the Enter key.
With nuclear medical images the slider determining the width

of the windowed area can also be moved beyond the limits of
the range displayed in the dialog box.
0.0

SUV (Standard Uptake The SUV (standard uptake value) checkbox is displayed for
Values) H.10 PET images only. H.10
H.10 Check this box to use the value for SUV activity of tissue
rather than the default percentage values.
H.10
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: SUV calculation is based on earliest
acquisition date and time within selected and loaded data
set and the first image (with earliest acquisition date and
time) is not within the selection. H.10
Consequence: Incorrect SUV calculation. H.10
Remedy: Make sure to select the first image of the data set
for correct calculation. H.10
0.0

Mixing ratio H.10 To emphasize certain information of one of the two image data
sets, increase its relative importance in the fused image. H.10
Pull the slider with the left mouse button in the direction of the
data set whose intensity you want to increase.
Display H.10 In order to delimit the reference and model series more pre-
cisely you can change the color marking of the image data
sets. H.10
Select the color representation you want in the selection list

for the reference or model data set (LUT, Look Up Table).
Page H.89, Changing the image display with color LUTs
0.0

Advanced H.10 The Fusion Definition dialog box provides an advanced Mask-
ing section for hiding pixel ranges in the fused display. H.10
H.10 Click on the Advanced >> button.

The Fusion Definition dialog box is enlarged so you can define
which pixel ranges are masked out. H.10
If you want to hide the numerical setting area, simply click on

the Advanced << button again.
0.0

Masking H.10 With the masking function, you define individual visibility thresh-
olds for the reference and for the model series. Only gray-scale
values that are within the thresholds are used for alpha-blend-
ing. H.10
Resize a slider with the left or right side grip to change the
covered range of pixels.
Or H.10
Enter the value into the corresponding L(ow) or H(igh) fields.

Or H.10
Drag the slider to move the complete range to another posi-

tion.
The displayed blended segments immediately reflect the
change. All pixels outside the threshold interval are ignored.
They are not over-blended with the other series. H.10
The masking thresholds are also stored with the registration

matrix, together with all other blending parameters.
0.0

Saving result images H.10
You can save the resulting fusion images to the local database,
send them to a DICOM node, or copy them to the Filming task
card. H.10
The images are saved as they are currently displayed. H.10
Fusion mode H.10 When you save a selected image in the Fusion visualization
mode, the stored image data will be of DICOM Secondary Cap-
ture type (modality SC).
H.10
Side by Side H.10 When you save images in Side by Side visualization mode, the
currently displayed type is used (for example, MPR or MIP
Thin).
H.10
It is indicated in the image text if fusion results originate from

series of 2 different patients.
0.0

Results for non 3-D applications H.10
It is possible to save Fusion results for common viewing appli-

cations, such as the syngo Viewer or MagicView. These view-
ers are used to compare the original with the fused images. H.10
You have to store 2 or 3 different series of images with the cor-
rect position, thickness and orientation. H.10
The first series consists of a 3D range from the reference

series.
The second series consists of a 3D range from the model
series.
The third series consists of a 3D range of images that have
been fused from the two series (optional).
There are two possibilities to generate these different series: H.10

Resampling data
Creating ranges explicitly
0.0

Resampling data H.10 Select Fusion > Resample Data from the main menu if you
want the data to be resampled.
Depending on the configuration three new series with the posi-
tion, thickness, orientation and resolution of the reference
series are created and stored in the Local Database together
with the registration matrix: H.10
the resampled data set of the model series: Resam-

pled<Modality><#>"
the resampled data set of the fused images: Resam-
pled<Modality of Reference><Modality of Model><#>
registration matrix: ResampledRegistration<#>
# starts from one and is incremented with each new recal-
culation.
See Page H.149, Configuring resampling for details on
the configuration.
During calculation, the result images will not be displayed.
The dialog 3D: Resample Data in Progress displays the
progress of the calculation.
0.0

Create Series H.10 Select Settings > Parallel Ranges from the main menu.
A range is calculated with alpha-blended images and the Par-
allel Ranges dialog is displayed. H.10
Select the modality of the reference series, e.g. MR, from the
Output Type dropdown list.
Set the desired range parameters and click Start.
Save the calculated range.
Repeat the last two steps, without changing the range
parameters.
Select first the modality of the model series e.g. PET, calcu-
late the range and save it.
0.0

Then select e.g. MR_PET for the calculation of a range of

fused images.
If both datasets have the same modality, "pre" and "post" is
added: "<MOD>pre" or "<MOD>post", e.g., "PTpre".
The Output Type dropdown list is only visible, if a second
data set is loaded and Parallel Ranges or Expand ranges is
active.
The resolution of the calculated range of output type "from
model" depends on the configuration.
Page H.149, Configuring resampling
H.10
NOTE
During these steps it is important not to change the range
parameters or the range graphic. H.10
0.0

CHAPTER
H.11 Fly Through H.11
Fly Through allows you to visualize representations of the

anatomy by creating 3-dimensional object models and is used
to visualize cavities, such as colon, bronchial system and arter-
ies from positions within the volume. H.11
All data records that can be loaded in 3D serve as starting data

for evaluations with Fly Through.
H.11
Procedure H.11 Use Fly Through to move through cavities in volumes that are
visualized in the so-called Fly segment: H.11
free movement within the volume

defined movement within the volume (move along a calcu-
lated or defined path)
A virtual camera is navigated within the object model and a dis-
play is created showing the walls of the objects from the inside
(even inner ear or vessels).
H.11
Fly View Volume (FVV) H.11 The so-called Fly View Volume (FVV) is displayed in the refer-
ence segments and represents the actual field of view of the vir-
tual camera. H.11
You can change the display in the Fly segment by changing

the properties and the position of the FVV.
0.0

Fly Through 3D Evaluation
Legal Instructions H.11 Federal Law restricts this device to sale by, or on order of, a
physician (only USA).
This device is not cleared as a screening device.
This procedure has not been demonstrated to be a replace-
ment for any conventional endoscopic or angiographic pro-
cedure.
H.11
N OT E
Colors displayed are simulated and do not indicate actual
anatomic colors. H.11
0.0

3D Evaluation Fly Through
Starting Fly Through H.11
After having loaded the images in the 3D card, define the start-
ing point of your visualization. Then start Fly Through. H.11
Select a reference segment.

You should bear in mind that when the Fly mode is activated
the FVV in this segment is displayed perpendicularly to the
image plane.
Page H.1111, Fly View Volume (FVV)
Shift the point of intersection of the reference lines in the
selected reference segment to the cavity of interest.
Select Settings > Fly Through in the menu.
Or
H.11
Click the Fly Through button in the Settings subtask card.
0.0

The Fly view appears in the segment at the lower right in the
SSD (Surface Shaded Display) mode. H.11
The FVV is displayed in the 3 reference segments. H.11
(1) Sagittal view

(2) Transverse view
(3) Coronal view
(4) Fly segment
0.0

Changing the display mode H.11
Set the desired mode in the reference segments in the usual

way via the Type subtask card. H.11
In the Fly segment you can switch the display between SSD and
VRT.
H.11
SSD (Fly view) H.11 The SSD (Fly view) mode is the standard setting of the Fly seg-
ment and corresponds to the SSD mode of 3D images. H.11
Select the Fly segment.

Click the SSD button in the Type subtask card to enter the
SSD mode.
Right-click the SSD button of the Type subtask card to

change the SSD settings.
0.0

The SSD Definition - Fly View dialog box is displayed. H.11
Change the settings of the SSD mode,

Page H.63, SSD Definition
There are specific presets for SSD (Fly view) which differ from
those of the SSD mode.
The SSD (Fly view) mode offers the additional possibility of
defining properties and color of the surface. H.11
0.0

Click on the Light Source button.


H.11
Click Color if you want to change the color of the surface.
Select the desired color in the displayed color palette and

confirm with OK.
The changes of the settings are updated automatically in the
Fly segment. H.11
0.0

VRT (Fly view) H.11 The VRT (Fly view) mode of the Fly segment corresponds to the
VRT mode of 3D images. H.11

Click the VRT button in the Type subtask card to enter the
VRT mode.
Select Type > VRT Definition in the main menu.

The VRT Definition - Fly View dialog box is displayed. H.11
0.0

Change the settings of the VRT mode.

Page H.711, VRT Definition
There are specific presets for VRT (Fly view) which differ from
those of the VRT mode.
The VRT (Fly view) mode offers the additional possibility of
defining the properties of the surface. H.11
Check or deactivate the option Shaded.
Click on the Light Source button.


0.0

Free movement within the volume H.11
With the free movement in the Fly mode you can calculate a
perspective view in the Fly segment for any position within the
volume. For this purpose, shift the FVV displayed in the refer-
ence segments as if it were a virtual camera and orient it in the
desired viewing direction. H.11
You can control these movements in the Fly segment via Smart
Select, via the buttons of the Image subtask card and via
mouse click.
Page H.338, Smart Select H.11
All movements and changes in one of the segments are

updated in all of the other segments.
Processing of 3D images remains possible for the reference
segments without restriction.
(Only with the Rotate Images feature in the Fly mode, the
images are not rotated around the VOI Clip Box Center but
around the Viewing Point of the FVV).
H.11
You have the possibility at any time during free movement to

Save images via the button Save.
Set points for defining a path.
Use the path for defined movements and for automatic sav-
ing of images of the Fly segment.
Page H.1122, Defining the path
0.0

Fly View Volume (FVV) H.11
The FVV in the reference segments corresponds to the actual

field of view of the virtual camera. The area visualized in the Fly
segment is determined by the position and orientation of the
FVV. The viewing point of the FVV is the point of intersection of
the reference lines and at the same time the center of the Fly
view in the Fly segment. H.11
Viewing direction H.11
Fly eye
Standing PointH.11 Image Plane H.11
Viewing Viewing Angle

Distance H.11
Front Clip Plane
Viewing Viewing Plane H.11
Point
Viewing
Depth
Clipping Point Back

H.11
Clip Plane H.11
When the Fly mode is activated the FVV in the selected seg-
ment is displayed perpendicularly to the image plane.
H.11
Viewing planes H.11 The area visualized in the Fly view is limited by Front and Back
Clip Plane. H.11
All voxels between the Front and Back Clip Plane are dis-
played in the Fly view. H.11
The Viewing Plane is the plane of intersection of the FVV with

the image plane and is perpendicular to the Viewing Direction.H.11
0.0

Important points H.11 The Standing Point represents the virtual camera. This is
where the pyramid-shaped field of view starts. H.11
The Fly Eye visualizes the position of the standing point, show-
ing that the field of view starts here. H.11
The Viewing Point is situated at the point of intersection of the

reference lines of the reference segments and is the point of
anatomic relevance to the image plane. Thus, the viewing direc-
tion is the connecting line from the standing point to the viewing
point. H.11
The Clipping Point is the point of intersection of the Viewing

Direction and the Back Clip Plane.
H.11
Viewing distances H.11 The Viewing Distance is the distance between the Standing
Point and the Viewing Point, corresponding to the distance
between the virtual camera and the object in focus. H.11
The Viewing Depth is the distance between the Standing

Point and the Clipping Point, corresponding to the viewing
depth of the virtual camera. H.11
The Viewing Angle determines the width of the FVV. H.11
The part of the FVV above the image plane is represented by

a continuous line and that below the image plane by a broken
line.
0.0

Changing the Fly view via the FVV H.11
You can change the display in the Fly segment via the proper-
ties and position of the FVV in the other segments.
H.11
Viewing point H.11 Drag the viewing point to that position in the volume which
you want to visualize in the Fly segment.
Viewing direction H.11 Shift the standing point or the Fly eye to change the viewing
direction. This movement corresponds to a rotation around
the viewing point.
Or H.11
Shift the clipping point, rotating the FVV around the standing
point.
Viewing depth H.11 Drag one side of the front clip plane to the standing point or
to the viewing point to zoom in or zoom out the visible fore-
ground.
Drag one side of the back clip plane forward and backward
to zoom out or zoom in the visible background.
Viewing angle H.11 Drag the edges of the FVV longer or shorter to increase or
reduce the viewing angle.
0.0

Viewing distance H.11 Select Settings > Fly View Volume in the main menu.
The Fly View Volume dialog box is displayed. H.11
H.11
Change the distance between standing point and viewing

point via the spin box.
Click Close to accept the settings.
0.0

Presets H.11 In your system, predefined parameter sets are stored for FVV
settings. H.11
When you switch over to the Fly mode, the data record linked
with the loaded series is used. If such a link does not yet exist
(e.g. new series), the Default Fly View Volume Set is used. H.11
Select Settings > Fly View Volume in the main menu to dis-
play the Fly View Volume box.
Choose that parameter set from the list which you want to
link with the loaded series.
Or H.11
Enter a name to create a new parameter set.
Click Save Preset when you have changed the FVV param-
eters and want to save the new parameter set under the
name previously entered.
All parameters of the FVV are accepted.
H.11
Click Delete Preset if you want to delete the currently

selected parameter set.
The standard parameter sets cannot be deleted.
Click Link Preset to assign a name to the selected parame-

ter set.
0.0

Changing the Fly view in the Fly segment H.11
In the Fly segment, you can control the free movement within
the volume via Smart Select, via the Zoom/Pan button and via
Click Rotate. H.11
Viewing point H.11 The viewing point can be shifted within the image plane via Pan
and Click Rotate and perpendicularly to the image plane via
push/pull. H.11
Click the Zoom/Pan button in the upper part of the control

area and drag the image center in the Fly segment to the
desired position.
Or H.11
Click a position in the Fly view to center this position in the

segment center (Click Rotate).
The viewing point rotates around the standing point.
Or H.11
Activate the push/pull function via Smart Select and move

the mouse vertically.
The virtual camera is moved forward or backward in the cavity.
The further you move the mouse upwards or downwards, the
faster the virtual camera is moved forwards or backwards. H.11
Move the mouse horizontally to reverse the viewing direction.H.11
0.0

Viewing angle H.11
Click the Zoom/Pan button in the upper part of the control

area.
Left-click and drag the mouse along the segment edge to
zoom in/zoom out the image.
Changing the angle of the FVV is the same as zooming the
Fly segment.
Viewing direction H.11
Activate the rotate around viewing point option via Smart

Select.
Drag the mouse from the segment center toward the edge to
rotate the FVV around the standing point.
This option corresponds to the movement of the standing point
in the reference segments. H.11
Or H.11
Activate the rotate view option via Smart Select.

Drag the mouse from the segment center toward the edge to
rotate the FVV around the standing point.
This option corresponds to the movement of the viewing or clip-
ping point in the reference segments. H.11
0.0

Rotating H.11 Activate rotate around viewing point or rotate view via
Smart Select.
Move the mouse along the segment border to rotate the
image in the plane around the centre of the segment.
Fly Volume Click H.11 If you click into the fly segment, an autonavigation to the 3D
clickpoint is performed. H.11
The 3D clickpoint has the coordinates of the first surface pixel

below the clicked position. H.11
By a rotation and a continuous movement of the FVV the clicked

position becomes the viewing point and is shifted to the middle
of the segment. Viewing distance and angle do not change. H.11
The movement is updated in all other segments.
H.11
Reset values H.11
Click on Home Zoom/Pan if you want to return to the initial

values.
The values set when starting the application are restored.
H.11
Reference lines H.11 You have the possibility to display or hide the reference lines of
the Fly segment. H.11

Click the Hide Graphics button in the control section of the
3D card.
0.0

Ortho Sync H.11 You can display orthogonal views to the Fly segment in the ref-
erence segments via the Ortho Sync function. H.11

Click the Ortho Sync button in the Orientation subtask
card.
The image plane of the Fly segment is displayed in the upper
left reference segment, the horizontal plane in the upper right
and the perpendicular plane in the lower left one. H.11
0.0

Defined movement within the

volume H.11
Unlike the free movement within the volume, with defined move-
ment you move along a predefined way. H.11
In the Auto Navigation mode, you move along a way through

the cavity with the aid of the mouse buttons. This way is auto-
matically calculated and continuously updated by the system.H.11
The virtual camera moves along a path which you create inter-
actively or via the Fly Path Planning dialog box. H.11
0.0

Auto Navigation H.11
With auto navigation you move through the cavity. On this

occasion you have the possibility to set path points for the cam-
era flight at the same time. H.11
Via Smart Select, select and activate the auto navigation

mode in the Fly segment.
Left-click and drag the mouse in the Fly segment upwards in
order to start the movement forward.
Or H.11
Left-click and drag the mouse in the Fly segment downwards

in order to start the movement backward.
Drag the mouse left or right to invert the viewing direction.
The virtual camera moves along a line calculated by the system
for this cavity. The further you move the mouse upwards or
downwards, the faster the virtual camera is moved forwards or
backwards. H.11
During Auto Navigation you can set path points via the Mark
key (Num 3) on your keyboard.
Page H.1124, Insert Point
0.0

Defining the path H.11
The path is a three-dimensional polyline allowing movement

through the volume. For this purpose, several points are defined
which determine the movement of the FVV within the volume
(stations of the viewing point). H.11
Select Settings > Fly Path Planning in the main menu.

Or H.11
Right-click the Fly Through button in the Settings subtask

card of the control section.
The Fly Path Planning dialog box is displayed. H.11
0.0

If a path exists from earlier examinations, this path is now dis-

played in the reference segments and in the dialog box. H.11
(1) Path Visualization Line

Visualizing the stretched path with the stations of the
viewing point.
(2) Position Torch
The position of this torch at the Visualization Line repre-
sents the current position of the camera.
(3) Path Point
Stations of the viewing point along the path.
(4) Zoom Slider
If the point density is too high in a specific section, the path
line can be zoomed in.
Whether the length of the visualization line corresponds to the
actual length of the path or not depends on the configuration
setting.
Page H.1410, Configuring Fly Through H.11
0.0

Insert Point H.11 You create a path by defining prominent positions as path points
during free movement within the volume or during Auto Naviga-
tion. The relevant FVV settings (viewing direction, viewing
angle etc.) are stored along with the position of the viewing
points. H.11
Move within the volume to that position which you want to

mark as path point.
Or H.11
Drag the position torch to the desired position on the path

visualization line.
Press the Mark key (Num 3) on your keyboard.
Or
H.11
Click the Insert Point button of the Fly Path Planning dialog
box to add a new point to the path.
This point is inserted at the current position of the position torch
and is displayed both in the dialog box on the Path Visualization
Line and in the reference segments. H.11
If you click an already existing point of the Path Visualization

Line, this point is replaced by a new one.
0.0

Path point designation H.11 When a path is created, the path points are numbered consec-
utively and used with this number in the Path Visualization Line.
You can replace this automatic path point designation with a
suitable designation. H.11
Double-click the name of the point in the Fly Path Planning

dialog box.
Enter the desired designation and confirm with the Enter key.
Remove Point H.11 H.11
Click Remove Point to delete a point of the path.

When doing so, take care to ensure that the position torch in the
dialog box marks the point to be deleted.
H.11
Path Name H.11
Enter a name for the path.
0.0

Save Path H.11
Click Save Path if you want to save the current version of the
path.
H.11
N OT E
It is only possible to save one path. Any existing path will be
overwritten. H.11
Clear Path H.11
Click Clear Path if you want to delete all points of the path
already existing.
0.0

Path representation H.11 The points of the path are represented differently in the refer-
ence segments. Larger points are situated more closely to the
image plane, whereas smaller ones are further away. Unlike
points outside the image plane, points within the image plane
are transparent.
The path connecting the points is represented by a continuous
line above the image plane and by a broken line below the
image plane. H.11
Hide Path H.11
Click Hide Path if you want to suppress display of the path in

the reference segments.
0.0

Flight along a path H.11
As soon as you have defined a path, you can move along this
path through the volume (camera flight). H.11
Stop at the positions of interest to you and save the image in the
Fly segment or activate automatic saving to create an image
series of the camera flight. H.11
You move along the path with the aid of the buttons in the dialog
box or via the position torch at the Path Visualization Line.
H.11
Step Size H.11 Using the step size function you determine the distance along
the path at which a new image is to be created in the Fly seg-
ment. H.11
Set the Step Size with the aid of the slider.
Save Images while Flying H.11
Click Save Images while Flying if you want to save the

images during the flight.
The number of the images saved is determined by the step size.H.11
If the number of images you want to save exceeds a precon-
figured limit you have to confirm a corresponding note with
Yes.
0.0

Fly Forwards H.11
Click Fly Forwards to start the flight.
The flight starts at the current position (indicated by the position

torch) and ends at the last point. H.11
If two adjacent points of the path have different FVV proper-

ties, these properties will change continuously during the
flight between these points.
If, for example, the viewing angle of Point 3 is 30 and that of
Point 4 is 40, the viewing angle on the flight between Points
3 and 4 will continuously increase from 30 to 40.
Stop Flying H.11
Click Stop Flying to stop the flight.
H.11
Fly Backwards H.11
Click Fly Backwards if you want to move from the current

position back to the first path position.
The FVV reverses its viewing direction. H.11
0.0

Position torch H.11
Drag the Position torch in the desired direction.

Click a point of the Path Visualization Line.
The position torch moves to this position. The representation in
the segments is updated accordingly.
H.11
Click the Path Visualization Line.

The position torch moves to the clicked position. The represen-
tation in the segments is updated accordingly.
H.11
Click the arrow next to the torch to change the viewing direc-
tion of the FVV.
0.0

Out of path state H.11 H.11
The position torch visualizes the position of the points you click
in the image area. H.11
The position torch will change position if you click a point beside
the path. H.11
You can dissolve the out-of-path state as follows: H.11
Click on the torch to keep its relative position on the visual-

ization line.
Drag the torch to move it to and along the visualization line.
Click on the path or on a point on the path to move the torch
to the clicked position.
The FVV reflects the new position of the torch. H.11
By pressing the Add button the current FVV settings will be

inserted.
0.0

Closing Fly Through H.11
When you have verified that all important images have been
saved, filmed or sent, close Fly Through. H.11
For this purpose, select Settings > Fly Through in the main
menu.
Or H.11
Click the Fly Through button in the Settings subtask card.
Or
H.11
Click on the Close button.
The Fly segment disappears from the image area. H.11
0.0

CHAPTER Saving 3D Series and
H.12 Images H.12
You can store series of images or projections that you have gen-
erated on the 3D task card for documentation purposes. H.12
You can either store the images quickly in a series that already
exists or store the images in new series. H.12
You can store reconstructed series automatically as new series

after reconstruction. H.12
H.12
NOTE
irretrievably. H.12

any data you want to keep before you log off. H.12
0.0

Saving 3D Series and Images 3D Evaluation
Storing 3D images manually H.12
Once you have generated a new series of parallel, radial or

expand images or projections on the 3D task card, you can
store them in your main database. H.12
In Configure 3D, you can set whether you also want to store
the reference lines and the reference image of a series or not.
Page H.145, Configuring storage
Page H.143, Saving images with reference lines
Saving with the default settings H.12
If you want use the defaults when saving images or series, sim-
ply click on the Save button. H.12
When you use the save button, the settings that you made in
the Save As dialog are valid.
Click on the output segment and select an image, several
images or an entire series.
Call up Patient > Save.
Or H.12
H.12 Click on the Save button in the lower part of the control area.
0.0

3D Evaluation Saving 3D Series and Images
Defining setting when saving H.12
The first time you save a reconstructed series you should first
make a few default settings. H.12
Select an image in a reference segment or the images in the

output segment.
Call up Patient > Save As....
Or H.12
H.12 Click on the Save As... button.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. H.12
0.0

Image information H.12 You can see this image information in the upper part of the dia-
log box: H.12
Patient name
Imaging method (modality)
Exam date
Number of images
3D output type (MIP, MIP Thin, MinIP, MinIP Thin, MPR, MPR
Thick, MPR Curved, MPR Thick Curved, MIP Thin Curved,
VRT, VRT Thin, SSD)
This information is saved together with the series. H.12
Reading physician H.12
Enter the name of the physician to whom you want to provide

the series of a patient.
Comments H.12 You can comment on a series. These comments are then saved
together with the images. H.12
Enter a comment text.

The input field contains a default comment text which is the
comment saved together with the original images. If various
original images had different comments, then there will be no
default comment text.
0.0

Saving images in a series H.12 If you want to save all the images that you generate from a set
of volume data in one series, select the Save all images in one
series option. H.12
All the images are now saved with the same series name in your
main database regardless of the 3D output type they were gen-
erated with (MPR, MPR Thick, MPR Curved, MPR Thick
Curved, MIP Thin Curved, MIP, MIP Thin, MinIP, MinIP Thin,
VRT, VRT Thin or SSD). H.12
Click on the Save all images in one series option.

Enter a series name or select a name from the selection list.
Every time you generate and save images in 3D from your orig-
inal set of data, they are appended to the series entered here.H.12
0.0

Grouping images by If you generate images with different output types (MIP, MinIP,
output type H.12 MPR, MPR Thick, MPR Curved, MPR Thick Curved, MIP Thin
Curved, VRT, VRT Thin or SSD) during processing of your orig-
inal set of data, you can save them in your database sorted by
the output type. H.12
Click on the Group all images by type option.

Enter a series name or select a name from the selection list.
All images that you generate from this original set of data are
now saved under this series name and the designation of the
output type.
H.12
If you generate an entire series of images, these images are

always saved with a different series name.
Page H.128, Saving 3D-series
0.0

Example H.12 You enter Name as the series name for your grouped images.
You then save 1 SSD image, 2 MPR images, 1 MIP image, 1
MPR Thick image, 1 MPR image, and another 1 SSD image
one after the other. H.12
In this way, you generate four series: H.12
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
(1) "Name" SSD Collection

(2) "Name" MPR Collection
(3) "Name" MIP Collection
(4) "Name" MPR Thick Collection
H.12 Save your series by clicking on OK.

Or H.12
H.12 Reject your inputs by clicking on Cancel.
0.0

Saving 3D-series H.12
You can also save images that you have reconstructed, for
example, as parallel images with a comment. H.12
First select the series in the output segment.

Call up Patient > Save As....
Or H.12
H.12 Click on the Save As... button.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. H.12
0.0

Entering series name H.12
Enter a series name in the combo box.

Or H.12
Select a series name from the selection list.
Comments H.12 You can enter a comment for a series. These comments are
then saved together with the images. H.12
Enter a comment text.
H.12 Save your series by clicking on OK.
Or
H.12
H.12 Reject your inputs by clicking on Cancel.
0.0

Storing series automatically H.12
If you want to store the reconstructed series as quickly and eas-

ily as possible, you can have them stored automatically during
reconstruction. H.12
Click on the Enable auto-store option on the Ranges sub-

task card in Configure 3D.
All series are then automatically stored after reconstruction. H.12
In Configure 3D you can define whether you want to addi-

tionally store the reference image of a series or not.
Page H.145, Storing the reference image
0.0

The name of an automatically stored series then consists of the

following parts: H.12
the name of the original series or the name that you entered
in the Range series name field in the Save As dialog box
the output types, e.g. MPR
a serial number
With auto-store, you can produce large volumes of data very
quickly and fill up the capacity of your hard disk. Check the
data stored on your hard disk at regular intervals. Archive
data that you still require and delete data that you no longer
require.
Page J.21, Storing Data on an External Medium
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Filming, Evaluating and
H.13 Sending 3D Images H.13
To film images, send them to the Filming application card from

where you can send them to the camera or printer. H.13
Or you can send data for further processing to the Viewing task
card in order to comment new image series using text and
graphic elements or to continue processing using the 2D evalu-
ation tools that it provides. H.13
If your system is part of a network you can send data to other

workstations in the network where processing can continue. H.13
0.0

Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images 3D Evaluation
Filming 3D images H.13
If you want to document the images or series, you can send

them to a camera or printer for exposure on film or for printing
on paper.
H.13
Select an image in the reference segment by clicking on it.

Or H.13
Select the images in the output segment.

Or H.13
H.13 Click on the Copy To Film Sheet button in the lower part of
the control area of the 3D task card.
Or H.13
H.13 Press the Copy To Film Sheet key on the symbol keypad.
Depending on the settings that you have defined for the film lay-
out, the images are transferred to the camera or printer directly
or remain on the Filming task card for processing until you
send them to the camera/printer manually.
Chapter O.2, Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
H.13
In Configure 3D, you can set whether you also want to film
the reference image of a series or not.
Page H.146, Configuring filming
0.0

3D Evaluation Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images
Transferring images to the Viewing

task card H.13
If you want to evaluate or process selected images in 2D, you

need to transfer the images to the Viewing task card.
H.13
Select an image in a reference segment by clicking on it.

Or H.13
Call up Patient > Load to Viewing.

Or H.13
H.13 Click on the Load to Viewing button in the lower part of the
control area.
The images are transferred to the Viewing task card and you
can process them there.
Page G.41, Processing Images
Page G.51, 2D Evaluation
H.13
0.0

Sending images through the

network and storing H.13
If you want to send 3D images to another location in your hos-

pital, you can do this directly from the 3D task card.
H.13
Select an image in the reference segment by clicking on it.

Or H.13
H.13 Click on the Send to Node 1 button in the control area of the
3D task card.
Or H.13
H.13 Press the Send to Node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
0.0

3D Evaluation Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images
The Send To dialog box is only displayed if more than one net-
work node has been configured. H.13
Select the destination workstation or destination database.
H.13 Click on the Send button to transfer the selected images.
With the Transfer menu item, you can access further func-
tions for archiving and sending.
For detailed information, see:
Page J.15, Automatic Storing and Sending
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
H.14 3D Configuration H.14
In 3D Configuration, you can adapt several settings: H.14
Hide or show orientation description

Save images with or without reference lines
Automatic storage of series
Storage with reference image
Filming with reference image
Automatic orienting of the reference image
Resampling of data sets
Update changes in Fly Through and configure path
representation
Call up the Numaris/4-Configuration Panel

H.14 Double-click on this icon to display the 3D Configuration
dialog.
In the Basics part of this manual, you can read how to call up
the configuration window and exit it again, store changes and
reset the settings to their as supplied state.
0.0

3D Configuration 3D Evaluation
Configuring image information H.14
Various orientation aids are displayed in the images which you

can configure. H.14
Move the Segment Information card into the foreground.
0.0

3D Evaluation 3D Configuration
Displaying the orientation

description H.14
H.14 Click on the Display orientation description option if you

want to have the orientation description displayed.
Page H.35, Orientation aids in the image
Saving images with
reference lines H.14
H.14 Click on the Save images with reference lines option if you
want to have the reference lines saved with the image when
copying it to Viewing or Filming.
0.0

Configuring processing of series H.14
On the Ranges card, you can define the settings for storing and
filming series. In addition, you can configure the orientation of
the reference image when generating parallel and radial
ranges. H.14
Click the Ranges subtask card into the foreground.
0.0

Configuring storage H.14
Reconstructed series (ranges) can be stored completely auto-

matically with or without the reference image.
H.14
Activating automatic
storage H.14
H.14 Click on the Enable auto-store option if you want to have all
reconstructed series stored automatically.
Storing the reference

image H.14
Click on the option Include the reference image when sav-

ing ranges or curved cuts if you want to have the reference
image of the series stored, too.
Page H.372, Generating series from 3D images
0.0

Configuring filming H.14
Reconstructed series can be filmed with or without the refer-

ence image. H.14
Click on the option Include the reference image when film-

ing ranges or curved cuts if you want to have the reference
image of the series filmed, too.
0.0

Configuring the orientation of the reference

image H.14
When you generate parallel and radial series using the stored
defaults, you have the option of having reference image orien-
tation set in the defaults called up automatically.
H.14
Just click on the Apply orientation saved in preset to ref-

erence image option.
When you call up the dialog for creating parallel and radial
series in future, the reference image is reoriented automatically.
The orientation is used that you set for the reference image
when you saved the default of the group of series in question.H.14
0.0

Configuring quality filter H.14
For calculation of radial ranges you can use a special filter with
high resolution, to improve the image quality for filming. The
quality filter is applied during range calculation for matrix sizes
which do not exceed a specified limit. H.14
Check on the option Use high quality filter MIP and MinIP
to enable high quality filtering.
Set the maximum matrix size for filtering via the spin box.
0.0

Configuring resampling H.14
You can resample data with original resolution or with the fused
series. H.14
Click on the Always resample with original resolution

option if you want the resolution of the resampled series to
be the same as the resolution of the reference series.
This applies to the range calculation of the model series, too.
H.14
Click on the Always resample with fused series option if

you want a resampled data set to be created from the fused
images.
0.0

Configuring Fly Through H.14
You can configure the updating of the changes in the segments

and representation of the path Visualization Lines on the Fly
Through card. H.14
Click the Fly Through card to the front.
0.0

Updating changes H.14
You have the possibility to choose between simultaneous and

consecutive updating of the image segments. H.14
Click this option if you want the changes in one segment to

be displayed simultaneously in the other segments.
Otherwise, the changes in one segment will not be updated
until the work in the other segments has been completed. H.14
0.0

Path representation H.14
You can have the path displayed with path points in the Path
Planning dialog box as a function of the position of these points
(true to scale) or in respect of all properties of the FVV. H.14
Click this option if you want to have the path displayed on the
basis of all properties linked with the individual points.
If two path points are at the same position, but have different
FVV properties (e.g. viewing direction) the distance between
these points is calculated from the total of differentiating prop-
erties. H.14
Deselect this option if you want to have the path displayed

only on the basis of the point positions.
If two path points are at the same position, but have different
FVV properties (e.g. viewing direction), they will be shown on
top of each other on the Path Visualization Line. H.14
0.0

PART Storing and
J Data Exchange J.0
J.1 Introduction
Selecting data for transfer ............................................... J.16
Starting transfer .............................................................. J.17
J.2 Storing Data on an External Medium

Handling external data media ......................................... J.22
Inserting and ejecting data media ............................... J.22
Write protection .......................................................... J.25
Storing data on CD ......................................................... J.26
Storing on a single session CD .................................. J.27
Storing on a multi-session CD .................................. J.214
Restoring previous sessions of a multi-
session CD ............................................................... J.217
Record off-line files ....................................................... J.218
Transfer information ...................................................... J.220
Objects already on the data medium ........................ J.220
Objects already stored .............................................. J.221
Displaying images with a rectangular pixel matrix ........ J.222
J.3 Sending Data via the Network

Sending data ................................................................... J.33
Sending data to a default address .............................. J.34
Sending data to other addresses in the network ........ J.35
Sending data to an archive address ............................... J.37
J.4 Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk

Exporting images to the file system ................................ J.42
Importing images from the file system ............................ J.47
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J1
Contents Storing and Data Exchange
J.5 Automatic Storing and Sending

Automatic storing ....................................................... J.51
Automatic sending...................................................... J.51
J.6 Checking Data Transfer

Display on the status bar ................................................ J.62
Viewing and checking the transfer jobs .......................... J.63
Organizing local jobs .................................................. J.64
Network Job Status .................................................... J.65
Information in the Job Status windows....................... J.66
Status of data transfer ................................................ J.68
Influencing data transfer........................................... J.610
J.7 Configuring Data Transfer

Automatic data transfer .................................................. J.72
Rules for automatic data transfer ............................... J.73
Creating, editing, and deleting rules........................... J.75
Default settings for export ............................................ J.710
Defining storage assignment.................................... J.711
Defining the necessary work status ......................... J.712
Setting Network Nodes ................................................. J.713
Setting retries ........................................................... J.714
Defining the necessary work status ......................... J.714
0.0
J2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
J.1 Introduction J.1
After examination or postprocessing, the images are stored in

the local database (Patient Browser) and can be retrieved, for
example for reporting, or filmed for documentation. J.1
This section explains how to store images and patient data from
your local database on other data media, send it through the
network, and how to pass it on data media or in the network.
Data is exchanged in DICOM format (digital imaging and com-
munications in medicine).
Proceed as follows:
Storage on an external medium
Sending in the network
Exchanging data via the hard disk
Automatic saving
Please note that your system may not have all transfer
options. The drives and network links available to you depend
on how your system is configured and what options are
installed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.11

Introduction Storing and Data Exchange
J.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Misleading/misinterpretation of the
flags AC/SC. Flags AC/SC depict receipt and storage on
hard disk on the receiver side which may be not sufficient to
fulfill the regulatory requirements of long-term storing. J.1
Consequence: Loss of data within the required period for
retention. J.1
Remedy: Sending data with the attributes AC, SC via

network indicates a safe data transfer but does not fulfill the
regulatory requirements of long-term storing. Objects with
the "committed" flag may be deleted by the user. Observe
the regulatory requirements regarding the storing
procedure. J.1
0.0
J.12 Operator Manual

Storing and Data Exchange Introduction
J.1
NOTE
The storage of image data is subject to regulations and
statutes governing the duration of storage and data
availability, data security (data integrity, incorruptibility), and
recommendations for fire protection and protection from
water damage. The management of the archive is
responsible for observing these requirements. J.1
J.1
NOTE
Because of constant technological progress and the
required storage duration, it may not be possible to perform
storage and retrieve with a single storage technology and a
single type of medium. Migration of data will therefore be
necessary to some extent and is the responsibility of the
management of the digital archive. J.1
Security Privileges J.1 Archive allows to store data on archive disks or in the central
network archive server. Export allows to export data on disks
or to the file system. Send allows to send data to other network
nodes. J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.13

Storage on an external Storing data on an external medium protects from data loss and
medium J.1 provides long-term storage of patient and examination data.
Chapter J.2, Storing Data on an External Medium
After storage, you can delete the data from the Patient
Browser to keep the examination data displayed there to a
manageable amount. If you require data again later, you can
import it in the Patient Browser.
To avoid any loss of data, you should store the patient and
examination data regularly as part of your routine.
Sending in the network J.1 If your system is connected to a hospital network, you can send
patient and examination data through this network from your
workstation.
Chapter J.3, Sending Data via the Network
For example, you can:
Send examination data to another physician for postprocess-
ing or reporting
Send patient or examination data to a central archive
Send images to a camera or printer in the network
0.0

Importing J.1 If stored data are required again later, they can just be imported
from external media (CD or MOD) again in the Patient
Browser.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media J.1
J.1
Exchanging data via the If you are editing or using images with other programs, you can
hard disk J.1 export them to a certain folder on the system hard disk in some
image formats (Export to File System). J.1
Likewise, you can import images created or edited in other pro-

grams into the application (Import from File System).
J.1
Automatic Storing and To organize your work more efficiently, you can write patient
Sending J.1 and examination data automatically to data media or network
addresses that you have set. J.1
You can define the rules by which and the time at which auto-
matic data transfer will occur.
Page J.72, Automatic data transfer J.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.15

Selecting data for transfer J.1
Select data objects before starting a transfer. J.1
You can only store, export, or send objects that are listed in
the Patient Browser. If you want to transfer data from one
data medium to another, you must first import them into the
Patient Browser.
Selecting in the Patient In most cases, you will be able to select the data in the Patient
Browser J.1 Browser.
Chapter D.2, Searching for and Displaying Patient Data
J.1
Application cards J.1 You can also select data on the following task cards. J.1
Viewing task card:

3D task card:
Page H.82, Selecting images and 3D graphics
0.0

Starting transfer J.1
Storage, sending through the network, export, and import of

data may all be selected from a menu or by clicking buttons.
J.1
Transfer menu J.1 Some task cards and the Patient Browser window contain the
Transfer menu. J.1
The drives and network links available to you in the Transfer

menu depend on how your system is configured and what
options are installed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.17

Buttons J.1 Depending on the configuration, you will find buttons in the con-
trol area of the task card with which you can start transfer
quickly and easily with a mouse click. J.1
You will also find a number of button on the toolbar of the

Patient Browser with which you can start transfers. J.1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6)
The buttons have the following functions (from left to right): J.1
(1) Import data

(2) Store data to defined default CD
(3) Store data to selectable local data medium (CD)
(4) Send data to the first default network address
(5) Send data to the second default network address
(6) Send data to a selectable network address
Symbol key J.1
You can use the Send to default node 1 key on the symbol key
pad or + on the numerical keypad of your keyboard to start
transfer to the first default network address. J.1
0.0

C AU T I O N
When replacing image data generated with syngo MR or
the predecessor Numaris software, please remember the
following: J.1
syngo MR and Numaris use different patient coordinate

systems. That means you must change the sign of the slice
position and slice orientation for double-oblique slices. J.1
Please also pay attention to other changes in the image text

if you further process MR images acquired with software ver-
sion syngo MR with Numaris.
Page A.250, Text information in medical images
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.19

0.0

CHAPTER Storing Data on an
J.2 External Medium J.2
Storing copies the selected data to an external data medium

that will be stored long-term. Any time you require the stored
data again, you can import it into your local database. J.2
Your system is equipped with a CD drive for importing data from

CDs. It is also equipped with a CD recorder for storing data on
CDs.
J.2
Optional drives J.2 The following data medium types are optionally supported by
the system: J.2
5.25" and 3.5" MOD (magneto optical disk; read only)
When Security is activated, you can store data only if you are
authorized to do so.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.21

Storing Data on an External Medium Storing and Data Exchange
Handling external data media J.2
Please follow individual manufacturers' instructions when

handling CDs or MODs.
Inserting and ejecting data media J.2
Insert a CD or MOD in the correct drive.
In the Patient Browser, you can see which medium has been
inserted.
Page D.231, Reading data from storing media
Inserting a CD J.2 CDs can only be written on one side. J.2
Press the eject button on the drive.

Place the CD into the drawer with the label facing upwards.
Press the eject button on the drive again.
The tray with the CD is drawn in. J.2
0.0

Storing and Data Exchange Storing Data on an External Medium
Inserting a MOD J.2 MODs can only be used to import data. J.2
They can be written on both sides (sides A and B). Use the
MODs recommended by Siemens. J.2
Make sure that the side from which you want to read data is
pointing upward.
Insert the MOD into the correct drive.
The tray with the MOD is drawn in.
J.2
Ejecting a medium J.2 In order to remove a medium (CD or MOD) it must be ejected
from the drive. J.2
Open the menu Transfer.

There you will find one or more entries Eject from <drive
name>, depending on your drive configuration. J.2
Select the entry of the required drive.

Or J.2
Select Eject from....

The dialog box Eject From is displayed. J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.23

Select the drive you want and confirm with Eject.

You can select several drives to eject the media in all of them
simultaneously.
If one of the data media is currently being used by the system
(read or write process), the data medium cannot be ejected.
The medium or media is/are moved out of the drive(s). You can
now replace them with another. J.2
0.0

Write protection J.2
CDs are automatically write protected. In single session mode,

this occurs after the first and only write action, in multi session
mode after completing the last session. J.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.25

Storing data on CD J.2
CDs are suitable for long-term back-up and transfer of data.

J.2
Single or multi-session J.2 CDs can be written in one operation (single session) or in two
or more operations (multi-session). J.2
The method used depends on how your system is configured.

J.2
Collecting and then storing In single session mode, you will first collect data, and then write
data J.2 them to CD. J.2
For example, you can select examination data of a patient and

preselect them for storage on CD. You can then add the exam-
ination data of another patient or add preselected data with fur-
ther images of the same patient. J.2
NOTE
Minimize the risk of losing data by using only "medical"
quality CDs recommended by Siemens for storage. J.2
You can obtain "medical" rated CDs from your Siemens

representative. J.2
0.0

Storing on a single session CD J.2
If your system is configured for single session, you can only

store data on a new, unrecorded CD. You cannot reuse a CD
that has already been recorded. Once you have completed the
first write operation, you will not be able to write any more data
to it, even if you have not filled it up. J.2
That is why you must first collect up all the data to be written to
a CD and then write them to a new CD in one go. The system
will inform you when you have collected enough data to fill a CD.
J.2
Preselecting data for Select the data you want to store.

storage on CD
Select Transfer > Export to CD-R.
J.2
Or J.2
Click this button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.27

Labeling a CD J.2 When you preselect data for a new CD for the first time, the
Enter Label dialog box opens. J.2
Enter a unique name for the CD, for example, a serial number
and the date, or accept the suggested label.
The label must only consist of the letters A to Z, figures 0 to 9,
and underscores (lower case letters are automatically con-
verted to upper case). This label must be between three and
eleven characters long.
Click OK to confirm your action.
0.0

Viewing tool J.2 When exporting images to a CD it is possible to record a view-

ing tool to the CD, too. J.2
On the Enter Label dialog box there is a check box offering the
user the choice to decide whether he wants to have that viewing
tool on the medium or not. J.2
CDs can even be used on systems without a DICOM viewer.

J.2
NOTE
Do not use the viewing tool for diagnostic purposes. J.2
J.2
Preselecting further data J.2 Select further data you want to store.
Select Transfer > Export to CD-R.
Or J.2
Click the button.
Preselect all the data sets you want to store.

The Organize Local Jobs window shows a list of all data pre-
selected for storage on CD.
Page J.64, Organizing local jobs
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.29

Automatic start of the write Once you have preselected enough data to fill a CD, a dialog
operation J.2 box will appear. J.2
Select Yes to start writing.
If you select No, writing will be canceled. To resume it later,

you must start it manually.
Chapter J.6, Checking Data Transfer
No CD J.2 If you have selected Yes and there was no CD in the CD re-
corder a further dialog box will appear. J.2
Insert a new CD, wait for a while, and then confirm with OK.
0.0

Starting writing manually J.2 If you system permits CD recording in the background, you can
write all the preselected data to CD at any time. J.2
Select Transfer > Record.

Or J.2
Click the button.
Some systems do not allow CD recording, for example, dur-

ing scanning. In that case, you cannot select Record.
A dialog box will open informing you of the CD's remaining stor-
age capacity. J.2
Confirm with Yes to start writing.

Page J.210, No CD
Select No to start the operation later, for example, when more

data has been collected.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.211

Writing J.2 A dialog box will open informing you of the progress of writing.J.2
The bar display shows how long the storage operation still has
to run.
J.2
Recording in the Actual recording runs in the background. You can close the dia-
background J.2 log box and, for example, postprocess images. An icon on the
status bar indicates that recording is in progress.
Page J.62, Display on the status bar J.2
After completion of recording, you can remove the CD, label the
upper side of the CD using a soft permanent felt-tip pen, and
then store it or pass it on. J.2
0.0

Wrong CD J.2 The following dialog box will appear if you accidentally insert a
recorded or damaged CD. J.2
Confirm with OK.

Change the CD.
Page J.22, Inserting a CD
0.0

Storing on a multi-session CD J.2
If your system is configured for multi-session, you can only

store data on a new, unrecorded CD or on a CD that has once
been recorded partially. The previous data on the CD are
retained and the new data are added to them. J.2
J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Switching to multi session mode may
destroy data previously recorded on this medium. J.2
Consequence: It is no longer possible to read the

previously recorded data. J.2
Remedy: Do not delete any data that you have stored on

CD from your local database until you have completed a
session. J.2
Previous sessions of a multi-session CD are always retained.
Preselecting data for Proceed as described for single-session.

storage on CD
Page J.27, Preselecting data for storage on CD
J.2
Page J.28, Labeling a CD

Page J.29, Preselecting further data J.2
The system compares the storage capacity required for the

selected data with the storage capacity available on the CD. J.2
0.0

Not enough storage A dialog box will appear if the storage capacity of the inserted
capacity J.2 CD is not sufficient. J.2
If you want to change CDs (for example, to insert a new,

unrecorded CD), click Eject.
Wrong CD J.2 The following dialog box will appear if you accidentally insert a
full or damaged CD. J.2
Click Eject.
0.0

Continuing with After inserting another CD, wait a moment and then click
another CD J.2 Retry.
The system will check that the inserted CD has enough storage
capacity and, if so, will continue writing. J.2
Cancel will terminate the entire operation.
Writing J.2 Proceed as described for single-session.

Page J.211, Starting writing manually
Page J.212, Recording in the background
0.0

Restoring previous sessions of a multi-

session CD J.2
If an error occurs during recording of a multi-session CD (e.g.

because of a power failure), the data previously stored may be
lost. The software package therefore provides a service pro-
gram with which the lost data can be restored from previous
sessions. J.2
Insert the unreadable CD into the CD recorder.

Select Local service and enter the password.
Page A.44, Local service
Select Utilities option.
Select Recover CD from the selection list.
Select the CD recorder in which the CD is inserted.
Click Go.
If data recovery was successful, the next message box is dis-
played with the message "CD-R restored successfully". J.2
Insert the CD into the CD-ROM drive and check its content
in the Patient Browser.
If it is not possible to restore the CD, the message "Writing to
CD-R failed: Cannot restore CD" or another message will be
displayed.
0.0

Record off-line files J.2
All files, e.g., images in BMP format and sequences of images

in AVI format, exported previously to a specific directory, can be
recorded automatically on CD. The path of this specific direc-
tory is configurable by service personnel, but the default path is
C:\syngo\temp\CDR_OFFLINE.
Page J.42, Exporting images to the file system
J.2
Call up Transfer > Record Off-line Files in the main menu.

Recording in single session mode is started.
J.2
Note that the CD and the Local Job Status must be empty.
While recording, it is not possible to copy files to that direc-
tory.
Delete all recorded files from this directory after recording on

CD is completed.
0.0

J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Using other than configured directory
for CamTasia data files. J.2
Consequence: Data disk is full and no further examination

possible. Files will not be deletable by the user. J.2
Remedy: Use only the configured directory for saving the

CamTasia data files. J.2
0.0

Transfer information J.2
As soon as you have started storing or exporting, the system

checks whether certain conditions have been met. J.2
Objects already on the data medium J.2
If an object already exists on the data medium, a message box

is displayed. J.2
If you want to overwrite the existing objects, click on Yes.

If you want to leave the objects on the data medium
untouched, but want to add the objects that are missing, click
on No.
If you want to cancel the procedure, click on Cancel.
In that case, no data will be exported.
0.0

Objects already stored J.2
If one or more of the selected objects have already been stored,

another message box will be displayed. J.2
The system does not check whether objects have been

queued several times for a transfer.
If you want to save objects again that have already been

saved, click on Yes.
If you want to skip objects that have already been saved but
want to add the objects that are missing, click on No.
If you want to cancel the procedure, click on Cancel.
In that case, no data is exported.
0.0

Displaying images with a

rectangular pixel matrix J.2
Under certain circumstances, images which have been reim-

ported from an external store medium or hard disk may be dis-
played with a reduced pixel matrix. J.2
J.2
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Transferring manipulated non-square
matrices/viewing segments. J.2
Consequence: Diagnostically relevant areas of images

may be lost. J.2
Remedy: When manipulated images are exported or sent

to another workstation, the related original images should
be sent as well.
It is strongly recommended to base the final diagnosis
always on the original images and not only on modified or
manipulated images. J.2
0.0

Occurrence of behavior J.2 Except for the 3D task card, this behavior occurs in all task
cards when exporting or sending modified images. J.2
It is caused by a mismatch between the dimensions of the

image matrix and the display segment, e.g. display of a rectan-
gular image matrix in a square viewing segment, or display of a
square image matrix in a rectangular viewing segment. J.2
When images in a task card are manipulated by a zoom/pan

and/or rotation operation, the modified image is displayed cor-
rectly, e.g. the complete viewing segment is filled. J.2
If, after saving the image (by using the function Save as), it is
then exported to offline and reimported, the visible pixel matrix
will be reduced. The image information at the edges of the
newly displayed image will be replaced by black margins. J.2
If the image contains a ROI that is now partially covered by

those black margins, the statistical information refers to the
complete ROI and not to the part of the ROI which remains vis-
ible. J.2
0.0

Example 1 J.2 Zooming and panning rectangular images J.2
(1) Original image, Workplace 1

(2) Zoomed and panned image, Workplace 1
(3) Exported/sent image, Workplace 2
Example 2 J.2 Rotating rectangular images J.2
(1) Original image, Workplace 1

(2) Rotated image, Workplace 1
(3) Exported/sent image, Workplace 2
0.0

Example 3 J.2 Displaying a square matrix in a rectangular viewing segment J.2
(1) Original image, square matrix

(2) Image in a rectangular viewing segment
(3) Image at workplace 2
Hints to avoid the When manipulated images are exported or sent to another
occurrence J.2 workstation, the corresponding original images should be sent
as well. J.2
Therefore we strongly recommended to always base a diagno-

sis on the original images and not only on modified or manipu-
lated images. J.2
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Sending Data via the
J.3 Network J.3
If your system is connected to a hospital computer network

(HIS/RIS), you can send patient and examination data from
your workstation to other workstations or receive data from
them. J.3
One or more workstations in the network (DICOM) are set up

as default links. You can either send your data directly to one of
these default addresses or select a network link.
J.3
Please refer to the hints regarding display of images with rect-

angular matrix.
Page J.222, Displaying images with a rectangular pixel
matrix
When Security is activated, you can send data only if you are
J.3
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Storage attributes (S) set for the data
sent via network (the connected archive did not indicate a
safe storage). J.3
Consequence: The stored data are stored only on hard

disk and may be deleted by an auto delete mechanism or
by another user. J.3
Remedy: Before deleting data from your local database,

ensure that these data are safely stored in the intended
archive (SC). J.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.31

Sending Data via the Network Storing and Data Exchange
J.3
NOTE
Sending data with the attributes SC via network is a safe
data transfer, but no long-term storing. J.3
0.0

Storing and Data Exchange Sending Data via the Network
Sending data J.3
You can select patient and examination data in your local data-
base and send them to other network users at any time.
For example, you may send single images of an examination to
another workstation for reporting. Or you can transfer complete
examination data of a patient to be stored centrally.
An image may only be sent to the same network node once,

even if the graphics and text it contains have been changed
since.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.33

Sending data to a default address J.3
On installation, Siemens Service can set up various network

links (e.g. Nodes 1 and Nodes 2) as default addresses in the
network. J.3
Select the data that you want to send.

Press the Send to node 1 key on the symbol keypad.
Or J.3
Select Transfer > Send to node 1 or Transfer > Send to

node 2.
Or J.3
J.3 Click the appropriate button.
The data will be sent to the selected address.

J.3
J.3
NOTE
The Send to node 1 might not work if a dialog box is open
and active. J.3
In that case, click the image area to deactivate the dia-

log box or just close the dialog box.
0.0

Sending data to other addresses in the

network J.3
If you want to send data to addresses other than the default

addresses or want to send them to more than one network user
at once, select the network link(s) from a list. J.3
First select the data that you want to send.

Select Transfer > Send To.
Or J.3
J.3 Click this button.
The Send To dialog box will open with a list of all available
network addresses.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.35

Select one or more network links.
J.3 Click Send to send the data to the address(es).

Or J.3
J.3 Click the Cancel button to cancel.
0.0

Sending data to an archive

address J.3
You can store data at addresses configured as an archive node

in the network on your system. J.3
Select Transfer > Archive to.

The Archive To dialog box opens. The available archive nodes
are listed. J.3
Select a archive from the list.

Click Archive to transfer the data to the selected archive.
Or J.3
J.3 Click the Cancel button to cancel.

J.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.37

0.0

CHAPTER Exchanging Data via the
J.4 Hard Disk J.4
If you want to use or edit images in other applications, you can

copy them from the local database to a folder on your hard disk
or to a shared folder on another computer in the network. J.4
You can likewise import the images from a folder of the hard
disk or from a network folder into the system. This is an appro-
priate way to load images for the Phoenix concept. J.4
You can only export data to a network drive if a network link

has been configured and is active.
When Security is activated, you can export data only if you
Image formats J.4 The following formats are supported: J.4
DICOM format (*.ima)

Windows bitmap (*.bmp)
AVI format (*.avi)
J.4
NOTE
Images in Windows bitmap and AVI format can be exported
but not imported. J.4
The images are stored as single files in a folder on your system

hard disk. Certain folders have been released (shared) for this
purpose (e.g. C:\Temp). J.4
You can import the images from there, for example, via the net-
work. J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.41

Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk Storing and Data Exchange
Exporting images to the file system J.4
You can copy one or more images to certain shared folders of

the system hard disk or in the network. J.4
You can only export data to a network folder if a network link

has been configured and is active.
When Security is activated, you can export data only if you
Exporting J.4 Select the desired images.

Select Transfer > Export to Off-line.
The Export to Off-line dialog box opens. J.4
0.0

Storing and Data Exchange Exchanging Data via the Hard Disk
Path J.4
Select the drive and folder from the Path selection list.
Extend the path, if necessary.
If you want to select or create a subfolder, add the subfolder
to the path separated by a "\" (up to 8 folder levels are possi-
ble from the main folder).
You can also select a folder on another computer in the net-
work. In that case, you must enter the path as "\\computer_
name\folder".
NOTE
Please make sure that the names of new directories and
subdirectories do not contain blanks.
Do not use any of the following characters: ^ = \. J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.43

Image format J.4
Select the image format from the Select Format selection

list (default: DICOM).
Depending on the image type, the images are exported with

8 bit/256 grayscales or 24 bit/RGB.
If you have selected a multiframe image in the Patient
Browser, only the representative image in bitmap format is
exported.
Be aware that files of the C:\Temp\CDR_OFFLINE directory
exceeding the CDs capacity are deleted when the Record
Off-line Files function has been successfully performed.
Image text J.4
Decide whether you want to make the image text and graph-
ics a permanent part of the images and export them, too
(default: without).
If you have selected DICOM format, the image text and
graphics will always be exported, because they are included
in the DICOM format, i.e. the export functions are not active.
0.0

Export anonymously J.4 You have the possibility to store the data anonymously. J.4
Click on the anonymously checkbox and enter the name

under which to store the images in the Dummy Name field.
Starting export J.4
J.4 Confirm with OK.

The selected image data are stored as single files. J.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.45

Filenames J.4 The filenames are formed as follows: J.4
Last name of patient.modality.study description.series number.

image number.timestamp.internal number.
image format J.4
The timestamp has the following format:

YYYY.MM.DD.hh.mm.ss.dddddd J.4
YYYY: year, e.g. 2003

MM: month, e.g. 09
hh: hours, e.g. 15
DD: day, e.g. 10
mm: minutes, e.g. 35
ss: seconds, e.g. 13
dddddd: decimal places, e.g. 123456
J.4
Example:
Miller.CT.Liver.2.13.2000.04.10.15.35.13.123456.ima J.4
In the Japanese version, the patient's name and examination

are omitted from the filename.
0.0

Importing images from the file

system J.4
You can import single images from certain released folders on

the system hard disk or in the network to your local database.J.4
You can only import data from a network folder if a network
link has been configured, is currently active, and the folder is
shared.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.47

Importing J.4 Select Transfer > Import from Off-line.

The Import from Off-line dialog box opens. J.4
Selecting file(s) J.4
Select the drive and folder from the Path selection list or
enter the path and filename, if necessary.
You can use the Windows standard wildcard "*" to select sev-
eral files at once.
0.0

Or J.4
Select the file(s) in the folder.

If you hold the Shift or Ctrl key down, you can select several
files with the left mouse button.
If necessary, navigate through the folder tree by double-click-
ing folders and using the "up" button.
You have access to all folders under the folder originally con-
figured.
Confirm with OK to import selected image files into your local

database.
Or J.4
Double-click the file.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.49

N OT E
Please make sure that the names of files imported from
directories do not contain blanks.
Do not use any of the following characters: ^ = \. J.4
0.0

CHAPTER Automatic Storing and
J.5 Sending J.5
You can automate storing and sending data to rationalize your

examination routine. For automatic data transfer, you can define
the rules by which and the time at which your system will trans-
fer data.
Page J.72, Automatic data transfer
Automatic storing J.5
One benefit of that is an increase in data security during your

examination routine, because examination data are backed up
once they reach a certain stage in processing. If you did ever
delete data from your database unintentionally, you will always
have a copy at hand with which you can continue to work.
J.5
Automatic sending J.5
You will make use of automatic sending of data in the network,

for example, if you want to make the examination results avail-
able to the ward where the patient is accommodated immedi-
ately after scanning.
The data can only be transferred automatically if the system

has been configured accordingly.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.51

Automatic Storing and Sending Storing and Data Exchange
0.0

CHAPTER
J.6 Checking Data Transfer J.6
All data storage, sending, and export jobs are performed one
after the other. J.6
You can find out at any time about which and how many jobs
have been completed, are in progress, or are waiting to be
started in the queue. J.6
You can influences processing of the queue by marking jobs as

urgent, stopping jobs, repeating jobs, or deleting jobs.
J.6
Checking data transfer J.6 The status bar shows whether you system is storing, import-
ing, sending, or receiving data in the background. J.6
The Local Job Status dialog box provides information about

jobs for data storage and export/import to/from your data
drives. J.6
The Network Job Status dialog box provides information about

jobs for data exchange via the network. J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.61

Checking Data Transfer Storing and Data Exchange
Display on the status bar J.6
During data transfer, the status bar shows icons indicating

which operation is in progress and whether errors have occur-
red. J.6
That way, you can monitor the progress of data transfer without
interrupting your work and intervene in the event of an error. J.6
J.6
operation inactive active error

Storage/export No icon
to data medium
Sending/storage No icon
in the network
Recording a CD No icon
Importing J.6 No icon
Receiving J.6 No icon
J.6
Error messages J.6 If an error occurs during data transfer, an error message will
appear on the status bar in addition to the icon. J.6
0.0

Storing and Data Exchange Checking Data Transfer
Viewing and checking the transfer

jobs J.6
The display on the status bar provides information about

progress of data transfer. For more detailed information than is
given on the status bar, see the Local Job Status and Network
Job Status dialog boxes. There you can stop jobs or correct
errors. J.6
Irrespective of whether your system is sending or receiving

patient and examination data, you can use the Transfer menu
to call up the job status dialog box at any time and find out about
pending jobs. J.6
Once data transfer is running in the background, you can call up

this dialog box using the icons on the status bar. That is useful,
for example, if transmission errors occur. You can see immedi-
ately which data is affected in which operation and can inter-
vene accordingly. J.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.63

Organizing local jobs J.6
If you want to know which data is being written to or imported

from local data media or waiting for storage or export, call up
the Local Job Status dialog box. J.6
Select Transfer > Local Job Status.

Or J.6
Click an icon for local data transfer on the status bar.
The Local Job Status dialog box opens. J.6
0.0

Network Job Status J.6
The Network Job Status dialog box provides an overview of

which data are being transferred in the network or are being
received from it. J.6
Select Transfer > Network Job Status.

Or J.6
Click an icon for data transfer in the network on the status

bar.
The Network Job Status dialog box opens. J.6
Controlling Auto Transfer If errors occur during automatically initiated data transfers, the
jobs J.6 network job listed in the Network Job Status dialog becomes
marked. J.6
Click the marked network job to review the messages and to

resume this job.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.65

Information in the Job Status windows J.6
The Local Job Status and Network Job Status dialog boxes
contain a joblist with the following information: J.6
Status
Processing status of the jobs
Page J.68, Status of data transfer
Patient
Name of the patient whose data are transferred
Object
Type and scope of the data transferred
No. of images
Number of images to be transferred in the job
If your system is shut down while a job is in progress, the
number of images displayed in the job status windows may
not be correct after the next restart.
Source
Source address, i.e. name of the data medium or network
address or your local database
Destination
Destination address, i.e. name of the data medium or net-
work address or your local database
0.0

Posted
Time of day at which data transfer was initiated (for data
being received, the time is shown in parentheses).
Try (only in the Network Job Status window)
Number of attempts at reaching the send destination before
the job as been performed successfully.
Remain
Number of images that have not yet been transferred.
If your system is shut down while a job is in progress, the
number of images remaining displayed in the job status win-
dows may not be correct after the next restart.
Urg (only in the Network Job Status window)
Classification as urgent.
Failed objects
Number of images that could not be transferred. A message
also appears on the status bar.
J.6
NOTE
If your system is shut down while a storage job is in
progress, the number of images remaining displayed in the
job status windows may not be correct after the next restart.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.67

Status of data transfer J.6
The status of data transfer shows the extent to which the job
has already been completed: J.6
Queued
The job is still waiting to be processed.
Active
The job is being processed.
Waiting
A network job is waiting for acknowledgement that the data
has arrived.
Stopping
The job is being stopped.
Stopped
Processing of the job has been stopped by the user.
Completed
The job has been processed. All data has been transferred
without error.
Failed
An error occurred while the job was being processed. That
has prevented it from being completed.
Recording possible
The job includes storage of a data set on CD, but it has not
yet been written to CD.
Page J.26, Storing data on CD
0.0

Recording
The data is being written to CD.
Recording failed
An error has occurred during recording.
Retrying
An error occurred while sending to a network node. After a
configured period of time sending will be retried.
Receiving
Data is being received via the network as part of this job.
Received
Receiving via the network has been completed.
Spooling
The job is being prepared for transfer.
Error
It was not possible to prepare the job for transfer (spooling
error).
Deleting
Deletion of the job is ongoing.
Jobs with the status "error", "receiving" (or active import jobs)
or "spooling" are no longer displayed after a restart.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.69

Influencing data transfer J.6
You can select transfer jobs in the Local Job Status and Net-
work Job Status dialog boxes and edit them using buttons. J.6
The status of a job tells you what processing steps you can per-
form and therefore what buttons are active.
J.6
Stopping jobs J.6 You can stop jobs with "active", "retrying" and "queued" status
at any time, for example, if you want to store them on CD before
processing them. J.6
J.6 Select one or more jobs with "queued" status and click Stop.
The selected jobs and all other queued jobs with the same des-
tination address will now no longer be started automatically.
These jobs have first the "Stopping" status while stopping is in
progress and the "Stopped" status when stopping is completed.J.6
0.0

Resuming jobs J.6 You can resume a job with "stopped" or "failed" status from
where you stopped it. (That only applies to operations per-
formed in the Local Job Status window). J.6
J.6 Select one or more jobs with "stopped" or "failed" status and
click Continue.
Jobs with the same destination address as the selected jobs will
also be resumed. The status of the jobs affected changes to
"active" or "stopped".
J.6
Starting jobs again J.6 If you have stopped jobs or if an error has occurred in jobs, you
can start them from the beginning again. You can also repeat a
job already processed. J.6
J.6 Select one or more jobs with "stopping", "stopped", "failed",

or "completed" status and click Restart.
The jobs will be started again and their status changes to
"active" or "queued".
J.6
If a job for writing to a single session CD fails, do not restart

or resume this job. Store it or export it again.
You cannot restart an import job from an MOD if you removed
and reinserted the MOD during the import process.
0.0

Starting storage on CD J.6 Jobs with "recording possible" status are data sets that you
have preselected for storage on CD. J.6
Make sure you have either selected no job or a job with

"recording possible" status.
Click CD Progress.
All data sets preselected for storage on CD and having "record"
status are now written to the CD inserted in the drive. J.6
While data is being written to CD, the Record CD dialog box is

displayed.
Page J.212, Writing
J.6
Deleting jobs J.6 You can delete jobs listed in the job status windows if they do
not have "receiving", "recording", "spooling" or "waiting" sta-
tus. J.6
J.6 Select one or more jobs and click Delete.

These jobs will no longer be performed and will be removed
from the joblist and the status changes to "deleting".
J.6
Large jobs linger in the joblist in status "Deleting" for a while

after deletion for technical reasons. Do not restart or resume
such jobs.
0.0

Changing the priority of You will mark send jobs to be processed first as "urgent" in the
send jobs J.6 Network Job Status dialog box. J.6
J.6 Select a send job to be executed with priority and click

Urgent.
It is only possible to mark one send job per destination address
as "urgent" in the queue. It will be started immediately after the
active jobs have been completed.
J.6
If you want to reset an "urgent" mark, just select the job or

jobs and click Priority again.
Clearing the joblist J.6 You can remove those entries with "completed", "received", or
"error" status from the joblist. J.6
J.6 Click Clear.

These jobs will be removed from the joblist.
J.6
Closing the window J.6
J.6 Click Close.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
J.7 Configuring Data Transfer J.7
The Transfer Configuration dialog box allows you to define

how store, export and send jobs are performed by your system.
J.7
You can make or change the following settings here: J.7
Automatic storing and sending of examination data

Work status required for storing data and whether to make
optimum use of the storage capacity on the data media
Select the Numaris/4-configuration platform

(Options > Configuration in the main menu).
The Basics part of this manual tells you how to call up and
exit configuration windows, save changes, or reset settings
back to their as-delivered state.
Select the Transfer configuration window.

The Transfer Configuration window is displayed with the
Auto-Transfer, Local Devices and Network Nodes tab cards.J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.71

Configuring Data Transfer Storing and Data Exchange
Automatic data transfer J.7
The Auto-Transfer tab card allows you to define whether and

by what rules patient and examination data are automatically
stored or sent via the network. J.7
You can check and change automatically started data transfer

jobs in the job status dialog boxes in exactly the same way as
manually started storing and send jobs.
Page J.63, Viewing and checking the transfer jobs
Go to the Auto-Transfer tab card.
0.0

Storing and Data Exchange Configuring Data Transfer
Rules for automatic data transfer J.7
The list on the Auto Transfer tab card informs you what data
with what work status will automatically be transferred by your
system to what destination. J.7
Each line of this list contains a rule for automatic data transfer.
These rules consist of the following conditions: J.7
Active
A checkmark in the first column indicates that this rule is cur-
rently active.
Workstate
The data preselected for transfer that have reached the work
status specified here are automatically stored or sent
through the network.
You will find information about the work status of patient and
examination data in the Patient Browser part.
Processing Status
Data that have reached the status stated here are automati-
cally stored or sent via the network.
Objects
This shows you the data volume to which the rule applies
(e.g. single images, series...).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.73

Destination
This column shows to which drive or network address the
data are automatically transferred.
Marked
A checkmark in this column indicates that only preselected
data are automatically transferred.
Filmed
A checkmark in this column indicates that only filmed data
are automatically transferred.
You will find information about preselecting patient and exam-
ination data in the Patient Browser part.
Page D.66, Marking examination data
0.0

Creating, editing, and deleting rules J.7
Input field below the list allow you to edit the existing rules for
automatic data transfer or to create new rules.
J.7
Creating new rules and You can create up to ten rules. J.7
editing rules
Select a rule for editing from the list.
J.7
Or J.7
Click New to create a new rule.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.75

Rules J.7
The first checkbox is for activating or deactivating a rule.
The Marked and Printed checkboxes define whether only

preselected and/or filmed/printed images will be used.
With the first selection list you can define the conditions for
the work status. Only data in the work status stated are con-
sidered for automatic data transmission.
With the second selection list you can define the conditions
for the transfer processing step status.
Special entries: J.7
Selecting None in these selection lists means that an auto

transfer route is valid if the according attribute is empty.
Selecting Dont care means that the status is not relevant to
the rule and changes will not be considered.
Selecting * means that any change of the corresponding
attribute invokes an auto transfer job.
0.0

Please note that you can also assign the completed status
manually in the Patient Browser and in this way initiate auto-
matic data transmission if necessary.
Define in the third selection list whether you want each indi-
vidual image, complete series, or only whole studies to be
transmitted given the appropriate work status.
J.7
TIP
Automatic data transfer rules should be configured at the
series level. J.7
J.7 Select the destination address in the fourth entry field.

For example, select Ward as the destination address to
have the examination data of a patient automatically trans-
ferred to the ward where that patient is located and which you
entered during patient registration. This is, of course, only
possible if the name of this ward has been set up as an
address in the data network of your hospital.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.77

Infinite loop J.7 When writing rules, please avoid infinite loops! J.7
Example of a bad configuration containing an infinite loop: J.7
(1) Computer 1 sends data to Computer 2.

(2) Rule on Computer 2: Send all data received to Computer 3.
(3) Rule on Computer 3: Send all data received to Computer 2.
The first time Computer 2 receives data, that data will be sent
round and round in a loop between Computers 2 and 3. J.7
0.0

Deleting rules J.7 You can delete rules that are no longer needed for data trans-
mission in the future instead of just deactivating them. J.7
Select the rule that you want to delete from the list.
Click Delete.
The rule is removed from the list. J.7
0.0
syngo MR 2006T J.79

Default settings for export J.7
The Local Devices tab card allows you to define the default
settings for exporting data to data media. J.7
You can set how the storage capacity date media will be used
on individual drives. You can also define rules for the work sta-
tus. J.7
Go to the Local Devices tab card.
0.0

Defining storage assignment J.7
If you require several data media to export data, you can define
whether the data of one patient can be distributed over two data
media or not (if technically possible). J.7
J.7 Click the Keep all objects... radio button to have the data of
one patient always stored contiguously.
Or J.7
Click the Maximize media usage radio button to allow

examination data of one patient to be distributed over two or
more data media. This will make optimum use of the storage
capacity of the data medium.
J.7
NOTE
The Option Keep all objects for one patient on one
medium is only valid for one job. J.7
0.0

Defining the necessary work status J.7
Here you can select what work status patient and examination
data should reach before being stored. If this work status has
not been reached, a warning will be displayed before storage.
J.7
J.7 Use the radio buttons to define the work status required
before storage.
The Verified and Read radio buttons apply to the Examina-
tion and Series levels only.
Selecting the Unspecific radio button enables storing for any
work status without confirmation.
Also click the Printed checkbox to make sure images are
filmed/printed at least once more before being stored.
0.0

Setting Network Nodes J.7
On the Network Nodes tab card, you can define the default set-
tings for sending data in the network. You can specify a quality
factor and rules for repeated send attempts and the work status
for the network address. J.7
Click the Network Nodes tab card into the foreground.
0.0

Setting retries J.7
If errors occur during data transmission in the network, they can

often be remedied with a repeated attempt. You can set how
many times and at what interval attempts are to be repeated. J.7
J.7 Enter the number of retries or click on the arrows. (Possible
values: 0 to 5; default: 0)
Enter the time interval between the attempts or click on the
arrows.
(Possible values: 5 to 60 min.; default: 10 min.)
The number of new attempts is displayed in the window
Network Job Status.
Page J.66, Information in the Job Status windows
Defining the necessary work status J.7
Here you can select what work status patient and examination
data must have reached in case of storing. If this work status is
not reached, a warning is displayed before storage.
J.7
J.7 With the radio buttons, define the work status required for
sending.
If you select the radio button Unspecific, storing is possible
in any work status without confirmation.
Select the checkbox Printed, too, if you want to film or print
the images at least once before they are sent.
0.0

PART
K Neuro 3D K.0
K.1 Introduction
Starting Neuro 3D .......................................................... K.12
The Neuro 3D task card ................................................. K.13
Image segments ........................................................ K.14
Volume image segment ............................................. K.15
Plot segment .............................................................. K.16
Control area ............................................................... K.17
Closing Neuro 3D ........................................................... K.18
K.2 Loading Images

Loading anatomical images ........................................... K.22
Loading functional information ....................................... K.23
Unloading a volume 4
K.3 Changing the Anatomical Display

Enlarging a segment ...................................................... K.32
Zooming and panning images ........................................ K.33
Adjusting VRT settings................................................... K.34
Rotating a volume image ............................................... K.39
Hiding unwanted volume parts ..................................... K.310
Selecting clip planes ................................................ K.311
Using clip planes ..................................................... K.313
Displaying images in the volume image segment ........ K.316
Defining properties of orthogonal MPRs .................. K.319
Defining properties of floating MPRs ....................... K.321
Resizing images in the volume segment ................. K.323
Windowing images ....................................................... K.324
Moving image planes ................................................... K.326
Calling standard views ................................................. K.329
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K1
Neuro 3D
K.4 Displaying Functional Information

Masking image areas ..................................................... K.42
Setting colors, thresholds, and the alpha value .............. K.45
Setting the colors of the activation map ..................... K.47
Changing the alpha value ........................................ K.410
Changing the cluster size ......................................... K.411
Changing the anatomical threshold.......................... K.412
K.5 Neuro 3D Evaluation

Evaluating examinations in the analysis mode ............... K.52
Selecting regions of the brain..................................... K.53
Monitoring examinations in the online mode .................. K.58
K.6 Saving and Filming Images

Saving images ................................................................ K.62
Exporting images to the file system ................................ K.64
Filming images ............................................................... K.66
0.0
K2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
K.1 Introduction K.1
The Neuro 3D task card is used to examine results of functional

imaging in their anatomical context. To this end, the functional
information is combined with the anatomical image data set.
Subsequently, you select the regions of interest in the brain.
The resulting superimposed image and the graphical display of
brain activity are used for evaluation.
K.1
How to proceed K.1 Once you have started Neuro 3D, load an anatomical image
data set to obtain an initial overview of the volume. A freely
rotatable 3D volume image, three orthogonal and three freely
movable sectional views are available. For final evaluation, you
can switch to either the online mode (main console only) or
analysis mode. K.1
In the analysis mode, functional information from a completed

examination is loaded from a database. In the online mode on
the main console, functional information is taken directly from a
current examination. K.1
You may adapt the views to your requirements and hide

unwanted portions of the image using clip planes. By drawing
VOIs (volumes of interest) in the images you are able to record
a signal-time curve from the selected regions of the brain. K.1
The relevant images are stored in the database or transferred

to the Filming task card. You can export the images to the file
system. K.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.11

Introduction Neuro 3D
Starting Neuro 3D K.1
The Neuro 3D task card is started from one of the task cards or
from the Patient Browser. K.1
Select Applications > Neuro 3D (MR) from the main menu.

The Neuro 3D task card opens.
K.1
You can also open the task card together with the anatomical
image data set to be loaded.
Page K.22, Loading anatomical images
0.0
K.12 Operator Manual

Neuro 3D Introduction
The Neuro 3D task card K.1
The Neuro 3D task card is divided into the following areas: K.1
(1) Menu bar

(2) Image segments 1 and 2
(3) Plot segment / image segment 3
(4) Volume segment
(5) Control area
(6) Status bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.13

Image segments K.1
Sectional images are shown in the two image segments in the

upper part of the task card. Similarly, sectional images will be
shown in the lower left image segment prior to activating an
evaluation mode. These are MPR displays of the anatomical
data or superimposed images comprising anatomical and func-
tional data (alpha images). The three image planes of this
orthogonal MPR are mutually orthogonal and each is parallel
with one edge area of the anatomical volume. In the default
position, the image planes intersect at the center of the volume.
K.1
Reference lines K.1 The image segments contain reference lines showing the sec-
tion position and viewing direction of the two other orthogonal
MPRs. K.1
If the reference lines interfere when evaluating the sectional

image, you can hide them with Display > Reference Lines.
0.0

Volume image segment K.1
The volume image segment shows a three-dimensional display

of the loaded images obtained by the volume rendering tech-
nique (VRT). In addition to the VRT volume image, additional
views and graphical elements are available to you in this seg-
ment. K.1
(1) Orthogonal MPRs: views from the image segments.

(2) Clip planes: Tool for hiding unwanted parts of the volume.
(3) Bounding box: Edges of a loaded volume.
(4) Floating MPRs: freely selectable image views.
(5) Orientation cube: shows the current orientation of the vol-
ume image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.15

Plot segment K.1
When you switch to analysis mode, the plot segment is dis-

played instead of the lower left image segment. It contains a
diagram showing the signal intensity of selected cerebral
regions over time. K.1
Showing/hiding plot You can switch between the plot and image segment, if you
segment K.1 want to use the third sectional image in analysis mode. K.1
Unselect the Display Plot option in the Analysis menu.

The sectional image is displayed.
K.1
Select the Display Plot option in the Analysis menu.

The diagram is displayed again. K.1
0.0

Control area K.1
The control area on the right of the task card contains the fol-
lowing groups with information and operating elements: K.1
(1) Volume control providing information about the loaded

data and for unloading the data sets.
(2) Online/analysis control for controlling online and analysis
modes. The online functions are only available on the main
console if you have a license for them.
(3) General control functions for showing and hiding image
elements.
(4) View control with the subtask card View and Visual for
changing the image views.
(5) Input/output control with functions for saving and filming
images or the diagram.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.17

Closing Neuro 3D K.1
After completing the evaluation in Neuro 3D, exit from the appli-
cation again. K.1
Select Applications > Close Neuro 3D (MR).

The Neuro 3D task card will be closed. Another task card is
moved into foreground.
K.1
What to look out for when If you do not close individual applications but log off the system
logging off K.1 (e.g. with the Options > End Session menu item), please note
the following. K.1
K.1
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently.
Check whether data still needs to be saved and save any
data you want to keep before you log off. K.1
0.0

CHAPTER
K.2 Loading Images K.2
As a first step, load the required anatomical volume data set

from the Patient Browser to the Neuro 3D task card. K.2
For evaluations in analysis mode (offline), continue by loading

the associated functional information. K.2
In online mode (main console only), the function information

is received directly from the Exam task card.
Page K.58, Monitoring examinations in the online mode
Requirements K.2 Neuro 3D lets you evaluate anatomical and functional informa-
tion with software version 2002B and higher. Prior to loading
image data sets, the system checks their suitability for 3D eval-
uation with Neuro 3D. K.2
BOLD data and the activation map can be loaded only in

mosaic format. When selecting anatomical data, please note:K.2
Only one anatomical series can be loaded and has to contain
at least two images.
A series in mosaic format cannot be loaded as an anatomical
image data set.
All images must be from the same study.
All images must be parallel and acquired along one axis.
No missing or duplicate images.
None of the images must have undergone distortion correc-
tion or compression.
If you try to select unsuitable images or series, the system dis-
plays a message. K.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.21

Loading Images Neuro 3D
Loading anatomical images K.2
Select the anatomical image data set for evaluation with

Neuro 3D in the Patient Browser. K.2
Select Patient > Browser from the main menu.

Select the exam, series, or individual images desired.
Drag & drop your selection into the Neuro 3D window.
Or K.2
Click the Neuro 3D (MR) button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or K.2
Select Applications > Neuro 3D (MR) from the Patient

Browser menu.
The images are loaded into Neuro 3D. If the task card was not
open, it will open now. K.2
0.0

Neuro 3D Loading Images
Loading functional information K.2
After you have loaded the anatomical data set, you will add the
functional information to the image views. Load the relevant
BOLD series as a data source for the signal-time curve in the
plot segment. K.2
The BOLD volume and activation map must be available as

mosaic images.
Loading an activation Select Patient > Browser from the main menu.
map
Select the series with the required activation map (e.g.
K.2
EvaSeries_tTest).
Drag & drop your selection into the Neuro 3D window.
Or K.2
Click the Neuro 3D (MR) button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or K.2
Select Applications > Neuro 3D (MR) from the Patient

Browser menu.
The images are loaded into Neuro 3D. The information from the
first image is placed in the image segments.
K.2
Loading the BOLD Select and load the required BOLD volume in the same way
volume K.2 (e.g. MoCoSeries or ep2d_bold...).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.23

Loading Images Neuro 3D
Loading the fieldmap K.2 If you have scanned the anatomical data set first and then the
BOLD images, the fieldmap with the functional information is
also automatically loaded ( Page K.42).
If no fieldmap is available, a message is displayed. K.2
If you have performed the scans in a different sequence, you

must load the fieldmap manually. K.2
Select the fieldmap from the Patient Browser and click the
Neuro 3D (MR) button on the toolbar.
Unloading a volume K.2
The upper control area shows the data sets loaded. The rele-
vant buttons are activated. You can also unload a single volume
using these buttons. However, you cannot unload the anatomy
while one of the other volumes is loaded. K.2
Click the button of the volume you want to unload.
If you want to hide the activation map or fieldmap temporarily,

use the buttons in the center of the control area or the Dis-
play menu.
0.0

CHAPTER Changing the Anatomical
K.3 Display K.3
By individually setting the window values, you are able to opti-

mize the display of the image segments. For volume images
with volume rendering technique (VRT), Neuro 3D provides a
number of predefined parameter sets for selection. K.3
You are able to hide unwanted parts of the volume in the volume
segment using clip planes and rotating the volume image and
free images into position. The size of the view and the displayed
portion of the image can be changed as required in the image
segments. K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.31

Changing the Anatomical Display Neuro 3D
Enlarging a segment K.3
When evaluating details, you can enlarge an image segment or

the plot segment to fill the display. K.3
Double-click the segment to be enlarged.

Or K.3
Select the segment to be enlarged and then View Proper-

ties > 1x1 Layout.
The segment is enlarged to full screen size. You can return to
the standard 2x2 layout view at any time via the menu. K.3
0.0

Neuro 3D Changing the Anatomical Display
Zooming and panning images K.3
For improved detail recognition, zoom images and pan the area
of interest into the center of the segment. K.3
Select Modes > Zoom & Pan.

Or K.3
Click the Zoom/Pan button on the View subtask card of the

control area.
Enlarging an image K.3 Position the mouse pointer along the edge of the image.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse up or
down to zoom the image.
Panning an image K.3 Center the mouse pointer in the image.

Hold down the left mouse button and drag the image to the
required position.
You can deactivate the Zoom/Pan mode the same way you acti-
vated it.
K.3
Resetting K.3 The view is reset to its original size and position as follows: K.3
Select View Properties > Home Zoom/Pan.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.33

Adjusting VRT settings K.3
The three-dimensional volume image is calculated from the

data set by the volume rendering technique (VRT). The VRT
display is determined by the parameters transparency, bright-
ness, color, and signal intensity. K.3
You can adapt the VRT display to your requirements by setting

more suitable parameters. The Anatomy Visual Gallery offers
you various parameter sets that you can select. You can also
change individual parameters. K.3
Neuro 3D uses the same Anatomy Visual Gallery and the

same VRT functions as the 3D task card.
Chapter H.7, Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
Assigning a parameter set The Anatomy Visual Gallery provides an overview of the avail-
by hand K.3 able parameter sets. Choose a suitable one. K.3
Select Visual Properties > Anatomy Visual Gallery.

Or K.3
Click the Anatomy Visual Gallery button on the Visual sub-

task card of the control area.
The Anatomy Visual Gallery opens. K.3
0.0

Click the desired parameter set.

The volume image is displayed including the respective tissue
class parameters. Check the view and change your selection if
necessary. K.3
Confirm your selection with OK.

The Anatomy Visual Gallery closes. K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.35

Edit the parameter set K.3 If the existing parameter sets do not meet your requirements,
the characteristics of the VRT display can be changed individu-
ally. K.3
It is easiest to modify parameters from a similar existing set.

You can either use the modified parameters for the current ses-
sion or store them in the Anatomy Visual Gallery for subsequent
evaluations. K.3
Select the parameter set in the Anatomy Visual Gallery that

you want to use as a starting point.
Select Visual Properties > Anatomy Visual Properties.
Or K.3
Right-click the Show / Hide VRT button in the control area.

The Anatomy Visual Properties dialog box opens. K.3
0.0

Adjust the transparency, brightness, color, and signal inten-

sity value of each tissue class.
To change the numerical values of parameters, show the
numerical setting area with the Advanced >> button.
For a detailed description, please go to

Page H.710, Creating and editing parameter sets. K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.37

Save your changes as a new parameter set or overwrite the

current parameter set.
Connect the loaded data set with the current VRT settings so
the data set will be displayed again later with these settings.
To delete a parameter set from the Anatomy Visual Gallery,
select it from the Preset list and click the Delete Preset but-
ton.
K.3
N OT E
Do not delete or overwrite the parameter sets until they are
no longer required for other images or series. K.3
0.0

Rotating a volume image K.3
You can rotate the volume image to any position using the
mouse. K.3
In case the zoom/pan mode is active, switch it off again.
Grab the volume image with the mouse and drag it to the
desired location.
The orientation cube in the lower right part of the image shows
the viewing angle relative to the patient:
L = Viewed from the left
R = Viewed from the right
A = Front view (Anterior)
P = View from the back (Posterior)
H = Caudal view (Head)
F = Cranial view (Feet)
K.3
You can return the volume image to its original display at any
time or set one of the standard viewing angles.
Page K.329, Calling standard views
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.39

Hiding unwanted volume parts K.3
After loading an image series, the complete data set will be dis-
played. You have a choice of evaluating certain areas of interest
only with Neuro 3D. Set clip planes to expose these structures
behind concealing volume parts. K.3
Six clip planes can be used to delimit the sides of the displayed
volume. You can use the clip planes by moving them between
the areas of interest and the hidden areas. Volume outside the
clip planes will be hidden. The interior, however, will be visible.K.3
Clip planes are only active in the volume image.
Activating/deactivating Activate the clip planes to apply them. K.3
clip planes K.3
Click the Show / Hide Clip Plane button in the control area.
Or K.3
Select the Clip Plane option in the Display menu.

K.3
To deactivate the clip planes, unclick the button or deselect

the option in the menu.
The Clip Plane Properties dialog box defines which of the

six clip planes will be activated or deactivated in this way.
Page K.311, Selecting clip planes
0.0

Selecting clip planes K.3
You can define which of the six clip planes are available in the
Clip Plane Properties dialog box. K.3
Select Display > Clip Plane Properties.

Or K.3
Right-click the Show / Hide Clip Plane button in the control

area.
The Clip Plane Properties dialog box opens. K.3
K.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.311

Selecting clip planes K.3 Individually select the clip planes you want to use. K.3
Click the required clip planes on the cube.

The selected clip planes are highlighted in color. K.3
K.3
Unselecting clip planes K.3 Unselect unwanted clip planes. K.3
Click the selected clip planes you want to deselect.

The deselected clip planes are no longer shown with color high-
lighting.
K.3
Hiding the frames K.3 The frames indicate the position of the clip planes in the volume
and allows you to move them. You can hide the frames if they
are in the way during evaluation. K.3
Click the Hide Frame button.

Frames are hidden and the text on the button changes to Show
Frame. This allows you to show the frames again at any time.
K.3
Click Close.
The Clip Plane Properties dialog box closes. K.3
0.0

Using clip planes K.3
If you have activated the clip planes, the selected clip planes
are active in the volume segment and can be moved. K.3
Activating edit mode K.3 Display the frames of the clip planes if they are hidden.
Click the frame of the clip plane you want to move in the vol-
ume image.
The frame is highlighted in color. It now has edit handles in the
corners (cubes) and center (points). K.3
0.0

Moving K.3 To hide unwanted outer parts of the volume, move the clip plane
into the volume. K.3
Click a line of the frame and hold the mouse button down.
The frame line is highlighted in color. K.3
To move the plane upward or farther away, move the mouse

pointer up.
Or K.3
To move the selected plane downward or closer, drag the

mouse pointer down.
Tilting K.3 You can use the four frame points to tilt a clip plane about its
center in the volume image. K.3
Click the point you want to use to tilt the plane.

The point and the frame line are highlighted in color. K.3
Drag the point in the required direction holding the mouse

button down.
0.0

Resizing the frame K.3 At the four corners you can reduce or enlarge the frame of a clip
plane. This does not alter the clip plane itself. K.3
Click the corner where you want to resize the frame.

The cube and the frame line are highlighted in color. K.3
To reduce the frame, move the cube inward holding the

mouse button down.
Or K.3
To enlarge the frame, drag the cube outward holding the

mouse button down.
Deactivating edit mode K.3 When the clip plane has reached the required position and size,
deactivate the edit mode again. K.3
Click the frame line of the highlighted clip plane.

Or K.3
Click the background of the volume segment.
Resetting K.3 You can return to displaying the complete volume at any time.K.3
Click this button in the Clip Plane Properties dialog box.
All clip planes return to their original size and position. K.3
0.0

Displaying images in the volume

image segment K.3
After you have loaded the anatomical data set, the volume
image segment shows both the VRT volume image and the
orthogonal MPRs. This provides a better overview of the loaded
volume. To display images with a freely selectable image plane,
you may also display floating MPRs. K.3
(1) Orthogonal MPRs (projected)

(2) Floating MPRs
0.0

K.3
N OT E
Please remember that elements (MPR views, clip planes,
VRT image, frames) in the volume segment may hide each
other. This complicates the correct recognition of
structures. K.3
In online mode (main console only), the VRT volume image is

automatically hidden to optimize the response rate of
Neuro 3D. You temporarily use the displayed MPR views for
your evaluations.
Showing / hiding If you do not want to display orthogonal MPRs in the volume
orthogonal MPRs K.3 segment, hide them. K.3
Deselect the Orthogonal MPRs option in the Display menu.

You can show orthogonal MPRs again at any time by selecting
the Orthogonal MPRs option from the menu again. K.3
Use the volume segment in the Orthogonal MPR Properties

dialog box to determine the display of orthogonal MPRs.
Page K.319, Defining properties of orthogonal MPRs
0.0

Showing / hiding Show floating MPRs in the volume segment. K.3
floating MPRs K.3
Click the Show / Hide Floating MPRs button in the control

area.
Or K.3
Select the Floating MPR option in the Display menu.

You can hide floating MPRs again at any time by deselecting
the Floating MPR option from the menu again. K.3
You determine your choice of the three floating MPRs (hidden

or shown) in the Floating MPR Properties dialog.
Page K.321, Defining properties of floating MPRs
K.3
N OT E
If you show the VRT volume image, it will cover the floating
MPRs. K.3
K.3
Hiding the volume image K.3 Hide the volume image if you only want to display special
images in the VRT volume segment. K.3
Click the Show / Hide VRT button in the control area.

Or K.3
Deselect the VRT option in the Display menu.
0.0

Defining properties of orthogonal MPRs K.3
You can define whether the orthogonal MPRs will be displayed

at their actual position in their image plane in the volume or pro-
jected outward. K.3
Select Display > Orthogonal MPR Properties.

The Orthogonal MPR Properties dialog box opens. K.3
If the orthogonal MPRs are hidden in the volume segment,

click the Show button.
The orthogonal MPRs are now visible in the volume segment.K.3
0.0

Displaying MPRs outside Select the Stationary at Volume Cube Surface option.
the volume K.3
With the Shift slider, you can set the interval between the MPR
views and the surface of the volume: K.3
Drag the handle of the slider to the right to increase the inter-
val.
Or K.3
Drag the handle of the slider to the left to reduce the interval.
Displaying the MPRs Select the In Place at Reference Position option.

in the volume K.3
The orthogonal MPRs are displayed at the actual position of
their image plane.
K.3
Displaying the frames K.3 You can mark image planes of orthogonal MPRs by using
frames in the volume. K.3
Click Show Frame.

Frames are shown and the text on the button changes to Hide
Frame. This allows you to hide the frames again at any time.
K.3

Details of how to move the image planes of the orthogonal
MPRs are included on Page K.326.
0.0

Defining properties of floating MPRs K.3
You may select up to three floating MPRs in the volume seg-

ment. K.3
Select Display > Floating MPR Properties.

Or K.3
Right-click the Show / Hide Floating MPRs button.

The Floating MPR Properties dialog box opens. The figures
show the three available floating MPRs in their default posi-
tion. K.3
0.0

If the floating MPRs are hidden in the volume segment, click

the Show button.
Click the image planes you want to activate as floating MPRs
in the figure.
The selected floating MPRs are highlighted in color.
K.3
Hiding the frames K.3 You can hide the frames of floating MPRs in the volume. K.3
Click Hide Frame.

Frames are hidden and the text on the button changes to Show
Frame. This allows you to show the frames again at any time.
K.3

To move the image planes of the floating MPRs, refer to
Page K.326, Moving image planes. K.3
0.0

Resizing images in the volume segment K.3
At the four corners you can reduce or enlarge the frame of an

image in the volume segment. K.3
Display the frames of the images if they are hidden.

Click the image frame you want to reduce or enlarge in the
volume image.
The frame is highlighted in color. The corners of the frame
(cubes) are edit handles. K.3
Click the corner where you want to resize the frame.

The cube and the frame line are highlighted in color. K.3
To reduce (enlarge) the frame, move the cube inward (out-

ward) holding the mouse button down.
It is not possible to resize orthogonal MPRs projected onto
the side areas.
How to deactivate edit mode again. K.3
Click the highlighted frame line.

Or K.3
0.0

Windowing images K.3
You are able to change the window values (brightness and con-
trast) of the images to optimize the anatomical display.
K.3
Single windowing K.3 If you want to change the window values of an image, just
switch to the Single Windowing mode: This mode is not active
in the volume segment. K.3
Click the Single windowing button on the Image subtask

card of the control area.
Or K.3
Select the Single Windowing option in the Visual Proper-

ties menu.
You can deactivate the mode at any time.
Automatic windowing K.3 You can automatically optimize window values. K.3
Click the Auto Windowing button on the Image subtask

Or K.3
Select Visual Properties > Auto Windowing.
Windowing using the During manual windowing with the mouse, you are able to
mouse K.3 observe changes in brightness and contrast until you achieve
the values you require. K.3
Click the image with the center mouse button and hold the
button down.
The mouse pointer disappears. K.3
0.0

Drag the mouse up or down to change the brightness (win-

dow position).
Or K.3
Drag the mouse to the right or left to change the contrast

(window width).
Release the mouse button once the window values are set to
your requirements.
Windowing using the You can also use the keys on your keyboard to fine-tune the
keyboard K.3 window values. K.3
To change window values, select the respective image seg-

ment.
Press the Pos+ or Pos- keys to increase or reduce the
brightness.
Press the Width+ or Width- keys to increase or reduce con-

trast.
0.0

Moving image planes K.3
Suitable section views are set by positioning the image planes

in the volume. K.3
With orthogonal MPRs you are able to move the image plane
via the mouse or reference line. They remain parallel with one
of the volume sides.
You can move the image planes of floating MPRs in any spatial
direction.
K.3
Activating edit mode K.3 Display the frames of the images if they are hidden.
Click the frame of the image whose clip plane you want to
move in the volume image.
The frame is highlighted in color.
K.3
Moving via the mouse K.3 Click a line of the frame and hold the mouse button down.
The frame line is highlighted in color. K.3
To move the plane upward or farther away, move the mouse

pointer up.
Or K.3

mouse pointer down.
The image is updated. K.3
0.0

Moving using the Moving a reference line in an image segment changes the
reference line K.3 associated orthogonal MPR. For example, to change the MPR
in the red image segment, move the red reference line in the
blue or green image segment. K.3
Move the mouse pointer to the intended reference line and

then move the line to the intended section position with the
mouse.
The image is updated.
K.3
Rotating K.3 With the four points in the center of the frame, you can tilt the
image plane of a floating MPR in the volume image about its
center. K.3
Click the point where you want to tilt the plane.

The point and the frame line are highlighted in color. K.3
Drag the point in the required direction holding the mouse

button down.
Deactivating edit mode K.3 Once you have moved the image plane in the required position,
deactivate edit mode again. K.3
Click the frame line of the highlighted image plane.

Or K.3
0.0

Moving a plane of A point of interest in the volume may be simultaneously dis-

intersection K.3 played in all image segments by moving the plane of intersec-
tion of the orthogonal MPRs to this position. K.3
Locate and click the position in the image.

Or K.3
Locate the position to be shown in the volume segment

views. Then click this position in the volume segment.
The views in the image segments and the corresponding
images in the volume segment are updated.
K.3
You can return the image planes to their default position at

any time.
Page K.329, Calling standard views
0.0

Calling standard views K.3
You are able to restore the original view of the loaded data set
at any time. You can also orient the volume view in one of the
standard viewing directions with the mouse.
K.3
Resetting all views K.3 Resetting all image segments to the original view undoes all
changes to the image view (e.g. zooming, panning, or rotat-
ing). K.3
Changes to window values and VRT settings and hiding with

clip planes are retained.
Select View Properties > Home All.
Or K.3
Click the Undo All button on the View subtask card of the
control area.
0.0

Resetting the You can reset the volume view to its original size and front view-
volume view K.3 ing direction. K.3
Select View Properties > Home 3D.

Or K.3
Click the Home 3D button on the View subtask card of the

control area.
All zoom/pan or rotate changes to the volume view are undone.
K.3
Volume view You can orient the volume view in one of the standard viewing
Orienting K.3 directions. K.3
Select View Properties > 3D Orientation and select the

required setting from the submenu.
0.0

Resetting orthogonal Clip planes of the image segments are returned to their default
MPRs K.3 position at the center of the volume as follows: K.3
Open the Orthogonal MPR Properties dialog box with Dis-

play > Orthogonal MPR Properties.
Click this button.
The orthogonal MPRs are updated.
K.3
Resetting floating MPRs K.3 The image planes of floating MPRs have the same default posi-
tion as orthogonal MPRs: mutually orthogonal at the center of
the volume, each parallel with one side of the volume. K.3
Open the Floating MPR Properties dialog box with

Display > Floating MPR Properties.
Click this button.
The floating MPRs are updated. K.3
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Displaying Functional
K.4 Information K.4
Before evaluating overlay images, it is necessary to optimize

the display of the functional information. If needed, you may
temporarily hide the activation map.
K.4
Activating/deactivating To hide the activation map, deselect the Activation Map

the activation map K.4 option from the Display menu.
Or K.4
Click the Show / Hide Activation Map button in the control

area.
To show the activation map, select the Show / Hide Activa-

tion Map option from the View menu.
Or K.4
Click the Show / Hide Activation Map button in the control

area.
Interpolation K.4 The signal intensities measured for adjacent activation clusters
may differ considerably. The resulting pronounced division of
the image into pixels only partly reflects reality and makes eval-
uation of structure more difficult. That is why smooth transitions
are simulated. You can deactivate this function. K.4
Deselect the Interpolation On option in the Display menu.

The measured values are now shown without smoothing
between adjacent voxels. You can reselect this option at any
time. K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.41

Displaying Functional Information Neuro 3D
Masking image areas K.4
Due to the measurement method, echoplanar measurements

are the basis for the functional information and may result in dis-
tortions and local signal loss in some image areas. In those
areas, unambiguous superimposition of the functional informa-
tion on the anatomical images cannot be ensured. K.4
By using additional information from the field map measure-

ment (generates a map of the B0 field) it is possible to mask
these critical areas. Masking indicates that the positional
assignment of functional information to the anatomy has to be
checked carefully in these areas as well as their immediate
vicinity. K.4
(1) Masked area

(2) Delimiting of the field map
(3) Image text with information about the field map
0.0

Neuro 3D Displaying Functional Information
The field map is automatically loaded with the functional infor-

mation. A system messages informs you if no valid field map is
available. K.4
N OT E
Without a field map, combined images may be
misinterpreted. K.4
K.4
Deactivating masked Deselect the Fieldmap option in the Display menu.

areas K.4
Or K.4
Click the Fieldmap button in the control area to turn it off.

Confirm the safety information with OK.
The images no longer contain masked areas. The lower left cor-
ner of the image segments contains the information Fieldmap
Off. K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.43

Activating blocked areas K.4 Select the Fieldmap option in the Display menu.
Or K.4
Click the Fieldmap button in the control area.

The masked areas are displayed again. The image text con-
tains the information Fieldmap On.
K.4
An anatomical threshold is preset that ensures that the col-

ored marking of masked areas is restricted to the head. You
can change this threshold.
Page K.45, Setting colors, thresholds, and the alpha value
0.0

Setting colors, thresholds, and the

alpha value K.4
The Functional Visual Properties dialog box lets you define

how the activation map and the areas masked by the field map
will be displayed.
K.4
Opening the dialog box K.4 Select Visual Properties > Functional Visual Properties.
Or K.4
Click the Functional Visual Properties button on the Visual

subtask card of the control area
The dialog box opens. It contains the dialog elements of the
Activation Color Palette group box. K.4
Click More >>.

The dialog box opens up completely. K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.45

(1) Activation Color Palette group box

(2) Alpha Blend Factor group box
(3) Filter group box
(4) Anatomical Threshold group box
0.0

Setting the colors of the activation map K.4
To visualize the functional information, different colors are

assigned to different signal intensities. The color palette to be
used and the value range of the signal intensities are defined in
the Activation Color Palette group box of the Functional
Visual Properties dialog box. K.4
If the activation map contains positive values, you just need the
upper color palette. Similarly, only the lower color palette is
required if the activation map contains only negative activity val-
ues. Deactivate the color palette that does not apply.
K.4
Selecting a color palette K.4
Select the color palette you require for the positive activity
values from the Upper selection list.
Or K.4
Deactivate the upper palette by selecting None from the

selection list.
Select the color palette you require for the negative activity
values from the Lower selection list.
Or K.4
Deactivate the lower palette by selecting None from the

selection list.
The colors of the combined image display changes in accor-
dance with the new settings. K.4
If you deactivate a color palette although activity data in that

range is available, those areas of the images will not be
shown.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.47

K.4
TIP
If you want to print combined images on a black-and-white
printer, select BrightGreyscale
as the color scale (black-and-white scale). K.4
To rule out possible ambiguities in grayscale values,

window the grayscales values in the anatomical segment.K.4
K.4
Setting the value range K.4 You can define the activity values that are assigned a color. For
this purpose you may use sliders or numerical input fields.
Activity values without a color assigned to them do not appear
in the images. K.4
The check box, which is activated by default, ensures that a

change in one of the two value ranges (positive or negative)
automatically affects the other value range accordingly (sym-
metry). K.4
If you want to set the value ranges independently, deactivate

the Symmetry check box.
Enter the new value for the lower limit of the negative value
range in the far left input field.
Or K.4
Drag the left handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
0.0

Enter the new value for the upper limit of the negative value
range in the left center enter box.
Or K.4
Drag the right handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
Setting a gap between the negative and positive value range
suppresses display of very low-intensity signals and therefore
also noise.
Set the positive value range in the same way as the negative
value range if you want to make changes asymmetrically.
The set color values are then assigned to the activity values
within the value ranges. All activity values outside the value
ranges will not appear. K.4
The default setting is display interpolation activated. For more

info, see
Page K.41, Interpolation. K.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.49

Changing the alpha value K.4
The alpha value defines how predominantly activity data are

superimposed on the anatomical image. The higher the alpha
value (up to 100), the greater the degree to which the pixels of
the activation map cover the anatomical image. If the alpha
value is 0, only the anatomy is visible. K.4
Set the required value in the Alpha Blend Factor group box of
the Functional Visual Properties dialog box. K.4
Enter the new value in the enter box.

Or K.4
Drag the slider to the required setting with the mouse.

The image views are updated accordingly. K.4
0.0

Changing the cluster size K.4
Setting the cluster size is intended to suppress voxels acciden-

tally contained in the activation map. For example, if you enter
a cluster size of 3, all activity clusters will appear whose volume
is smaller than 3 voxels. K.4
The cluster size is set in the Filter group box of the Functional
Visual Properties dialog box. K.4
Select the Clustering check box to apply the cluster size set-
ting to the display of the activity data.
Enter the required cluster size in the Cluster Size enter box.
0.0

Changing the anatomical threshold K.4
You can use the anatomical threshold in the Functional Visual

Properties dialog box to exclude low-intensity anatomical pix-
els from the evaluation. For all anatomical pixels with an inten-
sity below the threshold, the field map is masked automatically.
You can also define that the activation map will be masked. K.4
Enter the new anatomical threshold in the enter box.
Or K.4
Drag the left handle of the slider to the required setting with
the mouse.
It is not possible to change the upper limit.
Select the Activation Map check box to mask activity data
outside the displayed anatomy.
0.0

CHAPTER
K.5 Neuro 3D Evaluation K.5
Neuro 3D provides two evaluation modes: K.5
Analysis mode is used for evaluating a completed examina-

tion. In this case, the function information is loaded from the
database.
Page K.23, Loading functional information
Online mode is used on the main console to receive and
evaluate functional information from a current examination.
In both modes, you select regions of interest in the brain by
drawing VOIs (volumes of interest) in the images. The signal
intensity within the VOIs is shown by the signal-time curve in the
plot segment. K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.51

Neuro 3D Evaluation Neuro 3D
Evaluating examinations in the

analysis mode K.5
To evaluate a completed examination, switch to analysis mode

after loading and preparing the images. K.5
Click the Analysis button in the control area.

Or K.5
Select the Analysis Mode option in the Analysis menu.

The VOI mode is activated together with the analysis mode.
This enables you to select regions of interest in the brain. The
plot segment with the signal-time curve is displayed instead of
the lower left image segment. K.5
0.0

Neuro 3D Neuro 3D Evaluation
Selecting regions of the brain K.5
Regions of the brain are selected by drawing up to ten VOIs

(volumes of interest) in the image segments. You can access
the individual VOIs and change their properties via the VOI list
in the VOI Properties dialog box. The signal-time curve is cal-
culated from the BOLD data for each VOI and displayed in the
plot segment. K.5
Select the VOI option in the Modes menu.

The VOI mode is activated. K.5
The VOI mode is automatically activated when switching to

the analysis mode. You cannot rotate the volume image in
VOI mode.
Drawing a VOI contour K.5 Set a suitable view of the required region of the brain in one
of the image segments.
Click next to the region of interest and drag open a circle
around the region holding the mouse button pressed.
When you release the mouse button, the VOI is put in the VOI
list. K.5
Draw VOI contours around additional relevant regions of

activity (up to ten) in the same way.
Each VOI is defined by its number and color. K.5
The plot segment shows the signal intensity of the VOIs as a

function of time. K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.53

Editing a VOI contour K.5 You can resize the VOI at the four contour points shown in the
image. K.5
Move the mouse pointer to the required position.

Drag the mouse point inward holding the mouse button down
to reduce the contour.
Or K.5
Drag the mouse pointer outward holding the mouse button

down to enlarge the contour.
How to move a VOI K.5
Move the mouse pointer onto the VOI contour between the
resizing points.
Press the mouse button and move the mouse in the required
direction.
0.0

K.5
Displaying VOIs K.5 Depending on how the image plane intersects the VOI sphere,
the contour may be shown as a continuous or dashed line. K.5
A continuous line indicates that the currently set image plane
runs through the center of the VOI. The VOI contour maps the
actual diameter of the VOI. K.5
A dashed line indicates that the currently set image plane does
not run through the center of the VOI. The actual diameter of the
VOI is larger then the diameter of the visible contour. K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.55

Organizing VOI K.5 The VOI Properties dialog box informs you about the VOIs
already created and provides functions for manipulating VOIs.K.5
Select Analysis > VOI Properties.
The VOI Properties dialog box opens. K.5
Mark the VOI to be edited in the list.

Click Goto to center the image planes of the orthogonal
MPRs in the VOI.
Or K.5
Double-click the VOI.

The VOI is now shown with its true diameter in the images. For
how to change the position and size of a VOI subsequently, see
Page K.54, Editing a VOI contour. K.5
0.0

To evaluate just the visible activation map in the VOI and not
the entire sphere, activate the Shrink VOI to Activation
check box.
In that case, the functional information that you hid using the
settings in the Functional Visual Properties dialog box is
not taken into account either .
Chapter K.4, Displaying Functional Information
Deleting VOIs K.5 You can delete VOIs you no longer need from the list and there-
fore also from the images to keep the list uncluttered. K.5
To delete a single VOI, select the VOI in the list and click
Delete.
To delete all VOIs, click Delete All.
Or K.5
Select Analysis > Delete All VOIs.

K.5
N OT E
All VOIs are automatically deleted when you terminate
analysis mode. A warning message is then displayed. K.5
If you just end VOI mode, the VOIs you have created are
retained. K.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.57

Monitoring examinations in the

online mode K.5
The main console provides online mode that allows you to

receive the activation data of the loaded anatomy from an
examination in progress. You can monitor the progression of
signal intensity over time in the image segments and in the
graphic segment. K.5
Load the anatomical data set and set the image views to
meet your requirements.
Chapter K.3, Changing the Anatomical Display
Starting online mode K.5
Click the Start button in the control area.

Or K.5
Select Online > Start.

Online mode is started. K.5
Neuro 3D now receives all signals recorded by the Exam task

card. It is not possible to load other data (e. g. images from the
database) in the online mode. K.5
If functional information is loaded from the database, it will be

unloaded when you start the online mode. You have to con-
firm unloading in a message box first.
The VRT volume image is automatically hidden to optimize the
response time. You can observe the examination via the floating
MPRs shown in the volume segment. The function for changing
the image views is still available. K.5
0.0

Stopping online mode K.5 You can interrupt image updating. K.5
Click the Pause button in the control area.

Or K.5
Select menu item Online > Pause.

During the pause, signals from the Exam task card are still
received and processed and graphical evaluation is still shown
in the plot segment. However, the views in the image segments
are not updated. K.5
To display the updated data again, end the pause. K.5
Unclick the Pause button in the control area.

Or K.5
Select menu item Online > Continue.
Optimizing display K.5 Change display of the activity data in the combined images
as necessary.
Page K.45, Setting colors, thresholds, and the alpha
value
Drawing VOIs K.5 Draw VOI contours in the image segments to select brain
regions for evaluation in the plot segment.
Page K.53, Selecting regions of the brain
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.59

Exiting online mode K.5
Click the Stop button.

Or K.5
Select Online > Stop.

Receipt of data from the Exam task card is stopped. The loaded
information is still displayed for evaluation. K.5
0.0

CHAPTER Saving and Filming
K.6 Images K.6
You can save the views of the image segments and the plot seg-
ments in the database at any time. You can decide whether to
append the image to be saved to an existing series or to save it
in a new series. K.6
The export function available allows you to save the views in

BMP image files. You may reuse the image files using any mul-
timedia player. K.6
To film (copy) images, transfer them to the Filming task card

where you may send images to the camera or printer. K.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.61

Saving and Filming Images Neuro 3D
Saving images K.6
If you want to check the save settings and change them select
the Save As dialog box. Otherwise, use the Save button to save
the selected image or diagram with the settings last made.
K.6
Saving with new settings K.6 Select the segment you want to save.
Click the Save as button in the lower control area.
Or K.6
Select Patient > Save As....

The Save As dialog box will open. K.6
0.0

Neuro 3D Saving and Filming Images
Use the Save all images in one series and Group all images
by type option buttons to set whether all images will be stored
in a single new series or in separate series for each display
mode. K.6
The names of new series are entered in the associated combo

boxes.
Page H.123, Defining setting when saving
K.6
Select the required save option and series name.

Click OK.
The view is saved with the settings selected.
K.6
Saving with given

settings K.6
Click the Save button in the lower control area.

Or K.6
Select Patient > Save.

The image or diagram is saved to the same series as in the last
save operation. K.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.63

Exporting images to the file

system K.6
If you want to load a view from the Neuro 3D task card into
other applications, such as a text processing, network confer-
encing, or presentation program, export it as a BMP image file
first. K.6
K.6
N OT E
If the security system is activated, the image export function
is only available to users with export privilege. K.6
K.6
Select the segment you want to save as a BMP file.

Right-click the Save As button.
Or K.6
Select Patient > Save As Bitmap.

The Save As Bitmap dialog box opens. The BMP file format
and filename are preset. K.6
0.0

Neuro 3D Saving and Filming Images
Activate the Export without image text check box if you do

not want to export the image texts.
Click OK.
The image is exported into the specified bitmap file, where you
can use it as required. K.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T K.65

Filming images K.6
You can transfer the sectional views, the diagram in the plot
segment, or the volume image to the virtual film sheet or to a
printer at any time. K.6
Select the segment view you want to transfer to the film

sheet.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet or click the button.
Or K.6

Depending on the film layout selected, the view is transferred
directly to the camera or to the printer. As an alternative, it may
remain on the Filming task card for processing until you man-
ually send the images to the camera or printer. K.6
0.0

PART Postprocessing
L Images L.0
L.1 Dynamic Analysis

Overview for evaluation .................................................. L.13
Selecting images and starting dynamic analysis ............ L.14
Selecting the images from the Patient Browser .......... L.14
Selecting images on the Viewing task card ................ L.14
Starting dynamic analysis ........................................... L.15
Checking whether images are suitable ....................... L.16
General procedure for dynamic analysis ...................... L.110
Displaying and selecting initial images ..................... L.110
Setting the mode ...................................................... L.114
Generating preview images ...................................... L.117
Limiting the display area ........................................... L.119
Renaming a results series ........................................ L.124
Displaying result images ........................................... L.125
Functions for dynamic analysis ..................................... L.126
Adding images .......................................................... L.126
Subtracting images ................................................... L.129
Multiplication ............................................................. L.134
Division ..................................................................... L.137
Calculating the logarithm of grayscale values .......... L.142
Differentiation ........................................................... L.144
Integration of grayscale values ................................. L.147
Arithmetic mean ........................................................ L.150
Slope of linear regression ......................................... L.152
Determining the diffusion coefficient ......................... L.155
T-test evaluation ....................................................... L.158
Standard deviation .................................................... L.164
Calculating T1 images .............................................. L.167
Calculating T2 images .............................................. L.170
Time-to-peak evaluation ........................................... L.173
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L1
Contents Postprocessing Images
Tracing the progress of evaluation ............................... L.177

Pausing evaluation ................................................... L.181
Stopping and deleting Evaluation............................. L.182
L.2 Evaluating Images with Mean Curve

Starting Mean Curve ...................................................... L.24
Loading images .............................................................. L.26
Loading images into the first segment ....................... L.27
Loading images into the third and
fourth segment ......................................................... L.211
Defining sorting ............................................................ L.213
Searching for an original image for evaluation ............. L.220
Modifying image display ........................................... L.221
Scrolling within a series............................................ L.222
Scrolling across series ............................................. L.223
Searching for an original image by
scrolling through the fourth segment ........................ L.225
Drawing in ROIs (regions of interest) ........................... L.228
Drawing ROIs in the first segment ........................... L.228
Static or dynamic transfer of the ROIs
to other images ........................................................ L.230
Drawing ROIs in the third segment .......................... L.232
Setting and starting the evaluation ............................... L.236
Changing the display of the results .............................. L.243
Storing, filming and deleting results ............................. L.253
0.0
L2 Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images Contents
L.3 Image filtration and distortion correction

Editing images with the ContextVision filter .................... L.32
Selecting images ........................................................ L.32
Setting the filter strength ............................................. L.34
Renaming a results series .......................................... L.38
Starting filtering ........................................................... L.39
Monitoring filtering .................................................... L.310
Displaying the results ............................................... L.310
Correcting distortion artifacts ........................................ L.311
Selecting images and starting calculation ................ L.313
Results ...................................................................... L.314
L.4 Viewing and Evaluating BOLD Images

The BOLD task card ....................................................... L.43
Loading images ............................................................... L.44
Initially loading series ................................................. L.46
Loading additional series ............................................ L.48
Loading mosaic images ............................................ L.410
Automatic calculation of the alpha images .................... L.411
Scrolling images and series .......................................... L.413
Scrolling between images ......................................... L.413
Scrolling from series to series .................................. L.415
Processing images........................................................ L.416
Windowing anatomical images ................................. L.416
Deactivating interpolation in parameter images ....... L.417
Editing a color scale ................................................. L.418
Changing the anatomical threshold .......................... L.423
Activating/Deactivating blocking areas ..................... L.424
Changing the alpha value ......................................... L.426
Changing the cluster size ......................................... L.427
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L3
Saving images .............................................................. L.428

Saving all alpha images ........................................... L.428
Saving single parameter images or
alpha images ............................................................ L.432
Retroactively calculating parameter images ................. L.434
Preparing for postprocessing ................................... L.434
Starting the postprocessing...................................... L.438
Tracking postprocessing .......................................... L.439
Editing a postprocessing protocol ............................ L.440
Closing BOLD ............................................................... L.443
L.5 Evaluating Perfusion-Weighted Images

The Perf MR task card ................................................... L.52
Loading images .............................................................. L.54
Loading images for evaluation ................................... L.55
Loading images for viewing........................................ L.57
Viewing images .............................................................. L.58
Automatic sorting of images ....................................... L.58
Scrolling images and series ..................................... L.510
Optimizing image display ......................................... L.512
Calculating parameter images ...................................... L.513
Selecting a post-processing protocol ....................... L.513
Calculating mean AIF ............................................... L.514
Setting the time range .............................................. L.519
Starting calculation ................................................... L.521
Changing the color display ....................................... L.524
Storing and filming results ............................................ L.526
Editing a post-processing protocol ............................... L.530
0.0
L4 Operator Manual
Postprocessing Images Contents
L.6 Soft Tissue Evaluation MR

Introduction ..................................................................... L.62
Calling up the evaluation dialog box ............................... L.64
Opening the Patient Browser ...................................... L.64
Selecting data ............................................................. L.65
Opening the dialog box ............................................... L.65
Layout of subtask cards .................................................. L.68
Calculating parameter images ...................................... L.610
Selecting anatomical series ...................................... L.611
Selecting postprocessing protocol ............................ L.613
Editing protocol parameters (optional) ...................... L.614
Saving protocol data (optional) ................................. L.617
Deleting customer protocol (optional) ....................... L.621
Performing a calculation ........................................... L.622
Calculating combined images ....................................... L.624
Selecting a parameter image series ......................... L.625
Selecting a combined protocol ................................. L.627
Editing protocol parameters (optional) ...................... L.628
Saving protocol data (optional) ................................. L.631
Deleting customer protocol (optional) ....................... L.633
Performing a calculation ........................................... L.634
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L5
0.0
L6 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
L.1 Dynamic Analysis L.1
Dynamic analysis is used to calculate new evaluations obtained

by combining images and series. L.1
You may use a variety of evaluation functions to postprocess

images and series that you have obtained, for example, from
contrast medium examinations or functional neuro imaging. L.1
For example, you can enhance contrasts by applying arithmetic
or statistical functions to the grayscale values. This function is
also used to calculate T1 and T2 images. L.1
Dynamic analysis is launched from the Patient Browser. You

can also start some of its applications from the Viewing task
card. L.1
A separate dialog box is displayed for each function used to per-

form evaluation. The procedure for each operation in dynamic
analysis is the same. We will begin by describing a few general
steps before going into specific aspects of each analysis. L.1
The results images are stored in the database in the usual way.
You can load and view them in the Viewing task card. L.1
The results obtained from dynamic analysis can be used as

input for other evaluations, such as Mean Curve. L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.11

Dynamic Analysis Postprocessing Images
Access rights for dynamic Dynamic analysis requires that the user have full access rights
analysis L.1 to the patient data to be evaluated. L.1
Please observe the information given in the Safety Standards

chapters,
Page B.11, Introduction L.1
0.0
L.12 Operator Manual

Postprocessing Images Dynamic Analysis
Overview for evaluation L.1
The following functions are available for analysis of dynamic

processes and for postprocessing of images: L.1
ADC - diffusion coefficient

Addition
Slope
Arithmetic mean
ContextVision filter
Page L.31, Image filtration and distortion correction
Differentiation
Division
Integration
Logarithm
Multiplication
Standard deviation
Subtraction
T1-weighted images
T2-weighted images
T-test
Time to peak
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.13

Selecting images and starting

dynamic analysis L.1
Select the images/series that are of interest to you in the

Patient Browser or on the Viewing task card. L.1
Without selecting an image first, it is not possible to start the

dynamic analysis function.
Selecting the images from the Patient

Browser L.1
The Patient Browser allows you to view and process the

images and data of all examinations stored in the main data-
base or in an archive. L.1

Select images/series in the navigation or content area.
Selecting images on the Viewing task card L.1
The Viewing task card is used to view and edit images and
series. L.1
Go to the Viewing task card.

Select the images or series that are relevant to you in the
image area of the Viewing task card.
0.0

Starting dynamic analysis L.1
The functions for dynamic analysis are started from the Patient
Browser and the Viewing task card. L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > ... from the

Patient Browser menu or from the menu of the Viewing
task card.
Or L.1
Click the relevant icon of the Evaluation subtask card on the

Viewing task card.
Image
Loading Images L.1 The selected images are loaded in the relevant dialog box. It
may take several seconds to load the images. A Progress indi-
cator on the footer bar shows the current process of the pro-
cess. L.1
The evaluations are performed similarly to mathematical

functions. The series selected first is the first operand of the
function, all the series selected after that are the other oper-
ands. For some functions, such as division, the result is differ-
ent depending on the sequence of the operands (= sequence
of the series). These are non-commutative functions.
To cancel an operation before it has finished, click the Can-
cel button.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.15

Checking whether images are suitable L.1
Not all images are suitable for dynamic analysis. L.1
Images must fulfill the following conditions to be suitable: L.1
They must belong to the same study (and therefore to the

same patient).
They must have the same FoV.
They must have a corresponding matrix size.
They must have the same slice orientation.
Some evaluation functions require that other conditions be met
as well, for example, the same slice position or slice thickness.L.1
A message box is displayed if images do not fulfill one or more
of these conditions. L.1
For functions in which different image positions or slice thick-

nesses occur, the Evaluation Check dialog box will be dis-
played. L.1
The list shows all images with different image positions or slice
positions. L.1
If more than one series is selected, the images are listed

together by their image number.
0.0

The dialog box appears in two variations for different calcula-

tions. Each variation behaves differently. L.1
Condition A: Calculation does not necessarily require

images with the same image position, slice thickness, etc.
Condition B: Calculation always requires images with the
same image position, slice thickness, etc.
Here are examples of conditions A and B with the same image
position. L.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.17

Condition A L.1 Calculation does not necessarily require images with the same
image position or slice thickness, etc. Example: Image positionL.1
Click the OK button if you want to start the evaluation.

Or L.1
Click the Cancel button if you do not want to start evaluation

and want to close the function dialog box.
0.0

Condition B L.1 Calculation always requires images with the same image posi-
tion or slice thickness, etc. Example: Image position L.1
Click the OK button if you want to return to the function dialog

box.
Or L.1
Click the Cancel button if you do not want to start evaluation

and want to close the function dialog box.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.19

General procedure for dynamic

analysis L.1
After you have transferred the selected images and series and
have called up an evaluation function, a function-specific dialog
box will be displayed.
L.1
Displaying and selecting initial images L.1
The selected images and series are listed numerically in the list
of operands in the upper part of the dialog box. L.1
The images/series are listed in chronological order of cre-

ation when loaded into the evaluation functions Subtraction
or Division.
L.1
Series description Images to be evaluated Image increment
1. operand
2. operand
The Image Range column shows the images marked for eval-
uation. L.1
0.0

If you have not transferred all the images of a series, but only
every third or fourth one, for example, a display as shown below
will indicate the actual images forwarded. It is also possible for
you to select and transfer a range of images within a series. L.1
L.1
Image range Selected images

3 Image 3
2-5 Images 2, 3, 4, 5
4-< images. last image > image 4 to the end
2, 5, 8 images 2, 5, 8
L.1
Removing series L.1 You can remove series from the list of operands L.1
Select the series in the Operands field.

Right-click the series to open the Deletion of Series context
menu.
Or L.1
Press the Del key.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.111

Adding/removing images L.1 You can set image intervals if, for example, you only want to use
part of a series for evaluation. L.1
Because direct editing of entries under Image Range is not

possible, you must set the image intervals like this instead: L.1
First select only some of the images in the Patient Browser
or on the Viewing task card and start evaluation.
The dialog box shows you the selected images under Oper-
ands. L.1
Select the next images in the Patient Browser and drag and
drop them into the dialog box of the evaluation function.
The entries under Image Range are updated. The series with
the appended images from the Patient Browser moves to the
top of the list of operands. L.1
0.0

Entering an increment L.1 You can also set image intervals by entering an increment. L.1
First select the series in the Operands field.

Double-click the selected series in the Increment column.
A spin box is displayed for entering values. L.1
Enter an increment.
Or L.1
Use the spin buttons to select the value.

Complete your entry by clicking outside the spin box.
Confirm your entry by pressing the Enter key. The calculation
is started.
Example:
You want to run a dynamic analysis on every third image in
series 6 2_t2_tse_tra. Enter the value 3 in the Increment col-
umn. L.1
0.0

Setting the mode L.1
Some functions allow you to perform evaluation not only within

a series but also across two or more series.
L.1
Evaluating images within If you evaluate images within series, only the images of the ini-
series L.1 tial series will be used as operands for an evaluation function.
In this editing mode, you can generate a series with one or more
images from an initial series. L.1
A1
A2
C1
A3
Result series
A4
Original series
If you have only selected one original series, either within

series or constant mode will be activated, depending on the
selected function. L.1
0.0

Evaluating images across You can evaluate images from different series. In this case, you
series L.1 are generating result series from the individual images of the
original series by combining the ith image of each series with
the ith images of the other series. L.1
The images in the series are sorted by slice position. If the slice
position is the same in several images, they are sorted by image
number.
L.1
If you have selected more than one original series, across

series mode will be activated automatically for images with
the same slice position.
A1 B1 C1 E1
A2 B2 C2 E2
A3 B3 C3 E3
A4 B4 C4 E4
The result series will contain the same number of images as the
smallest initial series. L.1
0.0

Applying the constants to You can apply an operation with a fixed value to the images of
images L.1 a series by multiplying the images by a constant defined by you.L.1
Select the constant option.
Enter a value for the constant in the input field.
You can also edit the entry in this input field via the context
menu. To open the context menu, right-click the field.
The operation with the constant is applied to each image in the
series. L.1
L.1
Depending on which mode is selected, the title bar of the dialog

box will show which operation is being performed. L.1
0.0

Generating preview images L.1
You can generate preview images for most evaluation functions.

These test images are used to decide whether to perform eval-
uation with these settings for the whole series.
L.1
Display in the test area L.1 The test area shows a test image with the associated histo-
gram. L.1
(1) Test image

(2) Histogram of the test image
(1) (2)
You can window the test images to optimize display.
0.0

Selecting test images L.1 The Test Image selection list shows all possible test combina-
tions of images.
L.1
Select a test combination from the selection list.

The image numbers will be separated by vertical lines if two or
more images are used for a test evaluation.
L.1
To cancel an operation before it has finished, click the Cancel

button.
L.1
Changing the test image L.1 The test image and histogram do not meet your requirements,
you can select another image from the Test Image selection
list. L.1
Select another test image from the Test Image list.
Click the Test button to display the new image in the image
area with the histogram.
0.0

Limiting the display area L.1
You can limit the range displayed in the histogram to the rele-
vant part by defining a lower and an upper threshold value. Only
the grayscale values that are within the threshold values will be
used for evaluation.
L.1
Right-click the histogram window and left-click the only menu

item Properties....
Or L.1
For the Subtraction and Division functions, click the Scal-

ing button.
The Scaling dialog box is displayed. L.1
0.0

Limiting grayscale ranges L.1 For scaling, select the range of the calculation result data that
is mapped onto the grayscale range (0-4095) or onto the range
stated on the lower x-axis. L.1
Go to the x-Axis subtask card by clicking its tab.
Enter the lower threshold in Minimum spin box.

Enter the upper threshold in Maximum spin box.
Offset and factor are in a linear relationship with minimum
and maximum.
For example, if you have select the value 100 for the offset, min-
imum and maximum will have the following values: L.1
=>Minimum = -100 L.1
=>Maximum = 3995 L.1
Click the Test button again.
0.0

The interval that you define (upper X axis) is then mapped onto
the grayscale range of the lower X axis (usually 0 to 4095). L.1
(1)
(2)
(1) Grayscale range defined by scaling

(2) Grayscale range displayed in the result image
0.0

Limiting the number of Now move the y-Axis subtask card to the foreground by
pixels L.1 clicking on the tab.
Enter the lower threshold for the number of pixels in Mini-
mum spin box.
Enter the upper threshold for the number of pixels in Maxi-
mum spin box.
L.1
NOTE
Changes to the scaling of the histogram's y axis only affect
the histogram being displayed, not the results images. L.1
0.0

When the scaled image meets your requirements, apply the

settings by clicking on OK.
Or L.1
Restore the original settings by clicking Reset.

Or L.1
Reject the settings by clicking Cancel.
Setting a noise level L.1 You can set a noise level for some functions. This threshold
value determines the pixels used for evaluation. L.1
Enter a value in the Noise Level input field.
0.0

Renaming a results series L.1
A result series is generated for each original image or series. L.1

Name of the result The Result Series Description text input field contains an
series or image L.1 automatically generated name. However, you are able to modify
the name as required. L.1
As the default setting, a name is displayed as follows: L.1
First part of the description is the function that was used,

e.g., ADD.
The different parts are separated by an underscore.
The operands are identified with "S" for series, "I" for image,
and "C" for constant.
This is usually followed by the series number, image number,
or the value of the constant.
If you are using more than two series or images, the word
"various" will be used instead of a series or image number.
Example: You can add the grayscale values of image 34 to
image number 45.
That gives you the following default description:
ADD_I34_I45_10. L.1
0.0

If the name of the result series meets your requirements, you

can record the name in the Result Series Description field.
L.1
Selecting a result At times when you select more than one series (e.g. Loga-
series or image L.1 rithm, Multiplication, Subtraction, and Division), you can
then use the selection list next to the Result series descrip-
tion input field to select series, check names, or change them,
if necessary. L.1
L.1
Displaying result images L.1
The results are stored in the database under the name you
entered. When you have completed analysis, the results are
displayed on the Viewing task card in the background. Here,
you can further process the images. L.1
0.0

Functions for dynamic analysis L.1
This section describes the specific aspects of each function that

differ from general procedures applicable to all functions. L.1
Adding images L.1
Image addition is used to add the grayscale values of images or

add a constant. L.1
Adding the grayscale values of images is equivalent to image

overlay. For example, you can overlay an image with the result
image of a T-Test evaluation with exceptional anatomical
details. L.1
Adding a constant shifts the entire grayscale range. L.1
You can add: L.1
Images from a series with a constant

Images within a series
A series and one or more series with the same number of
images
Select individual images and/or series in the Patient

Browser or on the Viewing task card.
Then select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Add....
Or L.1
0.0

Click the Add icon on the Viewing task card/Evaluation

subtask card.
The Addition dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Operands shows which images or series are selected.

L.1
Mode L.1 One of the following modes is already selected depending on

whether you have loaded one or more series to the Addition
dialog box: L.1
with constant (image, images, series)

across series (two or more series)
within one series (a series with two or more images)
Select the mode.

It is not possible to activate across series mode if the series
selected do not contain the same number of images or if only
one series or image is selected.
You cannot select within series mode if one series selected
contains one image or more than one series is selected.
Starting evaluation L.1 If you do not want to use a generated name for the Result
series, enter a name for the results series now.
L.1 Click OK to start calculation.
The result will be an image (within series) or a series of images

(across series). L.1
0.0

Subtracting images L.1
During subtraction, you subtract the grayscale values of images

from other images or subtract a constant from images. L.1
For example, you could use image subtraction to clearly visual-

ize an image after contrast agent application. For this purpose,
you subtract the grayscale values of images generated without
contrast medium from those generated with contrast medium.
The results are images showing only the changes caused by
the contrast agent. L.1
You can subtract: L.1
Constants from images/series

Images/series from constants
Series from series
Image from image
Image from series
Selecting images L.1 Select single images/series in the Patient Browser or on the
Viewing task card. L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Subtract....

Or L.1
Click the Subtract button on the Viewing task card/

Evaluation subtask card.
0.0

The Subtraction dialog box opens. L.1
Operands shows which images or series are selected. L.1
0.0

Mode L.1 The constant (one series) or across series (multiple series)
option is already selected, depending on whether you have
loaded one or more series into the Subtraction dialog window.L.1
If you have selected two images only (two series of one image
each or one series with two images), you can only subtract
one image from the other or a constant from both images.
If you have selected two series with the same number of
images, you can subtract one image from the corresponding
image in the other series or a constant from the images of
both series.
If you have selected two or more series, including one or
more with only one image, you can subtract this image from
all other images.
Subtraction across series L.1 If you have already selected two or more series, across series
will be selected automatically. L.1
The subtrahend is shown in a separate field below the list of

operands. L.1
The series acquired earlier is used as the subtrahend default.L.1

The display field for the subtrahend is not active if the con-
stant or within series mode is selected.
0.0

Subtraction within a seriesL.1 It is only possible to select the within a series option if you have
selected a series with only two images.
L.1
Changing the sequence L.1 You can change the order of the operands, for example, to sub-
tract image 5 from image 4 instead of image 4 from image 5. L.1
Click the Exchange button.
Title bar now shows the new operation.
L.1
Example: You have loaded 10 series. To replace the subtra-

hend shown in the field under the list of operands, select the
series you want to use as the subtrahend from the list of oper-
ands and click the Exchange button.
Switching modes L.1 Switching from the constant mode to across series mode will
apply the series selected in the field below. It will then be used
as the subtrahend if the operation is permissible. L.1
If the selected series is unsuitable, the first series that is suit-

able for the across series option will be selected automatically
from the list of operands. L.1
0.0

Scaling grayscales L.1 You can scale the grayscale values of the result with the
selected values. L.1
Click the Scaling button and enter values for the minimum
and maximum.
Rescaling images L.1 Negative pixel values can result from subtracting images/
series. Some evaluations, such as mean curve, require the real
pixel values as input even if they are negative. L.1
Activate the Auto Scale option in the function dialog box.

The grayscale range will now start with the value -500.
If you have made any settings in the Scaling dialog box, a
dialog box will be displayed where you can confirm the set-
tings with OK or reject them with Cancel.
You can deselect autoscaling by deselecting the Auto Scale
option or opening the Scaling dialog box.
The result is an image (within series) or a series of images
0.0

Multiplication L.1
Multiplying the grayscale values by a constant rescales the

grayscale values. L.1
You can multiply: L.1
Images by a constant
A series by a constant
Two or more series by a constant
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Multiply....
0.0

The Multiplication dialog box opens. L.1

L.1
Mode L.1
Enter a value for the constant.
0.0

Performing grayscale Because this function does not generate a test image, it pro-
scaling L.1 vides two options for scaling the result images. L.1
Click the automatic option under Scaling if you want the

grayscale values to be scaled automatically.
Or L.1
Click the none option if you want all grayscale values larger
than 4095 to be set to this value and the scaling of the result
images to correspond to that of the original images.
Start evaluation L.1 If you do not want to use a generated name for the Result
Series Description, enter a name for the results series now.
Start multiplication by clicking the OK button.
0.0

Division L.1
You can divide: L.1
A series/images by a constant
A series by a second series
A series by an image
An image by a second image
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Divide....
0.0

The Division dialog box opens. L.1
Operands shows which images or series are selected. L.1
0.0

Mode L.1 The constant (one series) or across series (multiple series)
option is already selected, depending on whether you have
loaded one or more series into the Division dialog window.
L.1
If you have selected two images, you can divide one image by
the other or both images by a constant.
If you have selected two series with the same number of
images, you can divide the images of one series by the
images of the other series, or divide the images of both series
by a constant.
If you have selected two or more series, including one or
more with only one image, you can divide all other images by
this image.
Division across series L.1 If you have already selected two or more series, across series
will be selected automatically. L.1
The divisor is shown in a separate field below the list of oper-

ands. L.1
The series acquired earlier is used as the default divisor. L.1
The display field for the divisor is not active if the constant or
within series mode is selected.
0.0

Division within a series L.1 It is only possible to select the within a series option if you have
selected a series with only two images.
L.1
Changing the sequence L.1 You can change the order of the operands, that is, swap round
the numerator and denominator of the division. L.1
Click the Exchange button.

Title bar now shows the new operation.
L.1
Switching modes L.1 Switching from constant mode to across series mode will
apply the series selected in the field below. It will then be used
as the divisor if the operation is permissible. L.1
If the selected series is unsuitable, the first series that is suit-

able for the across series option will automatically be
selected as the divisor from the list of operands.
0.0

Scaling grayscales L.1 You can scale the grayscale values of the result with the
selected values. L.1
Click the Scaling button and enter values for the minimum
and maximum.
Starting division L.1 If you do not want to use a generated name for the Result
The result is an image or a series of images. L.1
0.0

Calculating the logarithm of grayscale values L.1
Calculating the logarithm of the grayscale values eliminates

large differences in intensity in MR images. Large intensity gra-
dients are common in MR images of the shoulder and the lung,
for example.
L.1
Selecting images L.1 Select single images/series in the Patient Browser or on

Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Logarithm....
0.0

The Logarithm dialog box opens. L.1
L.1
0.0

Differentiation L.1
Differentiation determines the intensity increase (slope) of gray-

scale values within a series. For example, it is possible to differ-
entiate inflamed tissue from tumor tissue in mammography by
the different enrichment behavior of the contrast agent in the tis-
sue. L.1
You can only ever differentiate one series.

All images of this series must have the same slice position.
Selecting images L.1 Select a series in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing task
card. L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Differentiate....
0.0

The Differentiation dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Starting differentiation L.1 Enter a name for the result series in the Result Series
Description field if you do not want to use the default name.
The result will be a series that contains one image less than the
original series. L.1
The intensity of the grayscales in the images is a direct mea-

sure of the differentiation, that is, the tendency of the increase
or decrease in grayscale intensity. L.1
0.0

Integration of grayscale values L.1
Integration of the grayscale values of a series provides informa-

tion on enhancement when using contrast agent studies. L.1
You can only integrate across images of one series.

These images must have been scanned at the same slice
position.
Selecting images L.1 Select a series in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing task
card. L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Integrate....
0.0

The Integration dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Starting integration L.1 If you do not want to use a generated name for the Result
The result will be a series that contains one image less than the
original series. L.1
The intensity of the grayscales in the images corresponds to the

integrals of the grayscales. L.1
0.0

Arithmetic mean L.1
Calculating the mean value of the grayscales averages large

intensity differences in the images. For parallel images with dif-
ferent slice positions this method is equivalent to an MPR Thick
display. With a chronological sequence of images, averaging
the images improves the signal-to-noise ratio or reduces image
artifacts. L.1
It is possible to calculate the arithmetic mean of the grayscale

values within or across series.
L.1
All images must have the same slice position.
Selecting images L.1 Select a series in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing
task card.
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Arithmetic
Mean....
Or L.1
Click the Arithmetic Mean icon on the Viewing task card/

Evaluation subtask card.
0.0

The Arithmetic Mean dialog box opens. L.1
Mode L.1 The within series (one series) or across series (multiple
series) option is already selected, depending on whether you
have loaded one or more series into the Arithmetic Mean dia-
log box.
L.1

0.0

Slope of linear regression L.1
The slope of linear regression describes the rate at which the

intensity of the grayscale values increases or decreases within
a series. As in the case of differentiation, the different absorp-
tion rates of contrast agent in tissue are able to be visualized.L.1
You can obtain the slope of linear regression within series or
across series that have the same number of images.
L.1
Series must contain at least two images. Otherwise evalua-

tion will not be possible.
task card.
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Slope....
0.0

The Slope dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Mode L.1 The evaluation within series (one series) or evaluation

across series (multiple series) option is already selected,
depending on whether you have loaded one or more series into
the Slope dialog window.
L.1

(across series). The intensity of the grayscales corresponds to
the gradient of the linear regression. The brighter the grayscale
value the greater the gradient. L.1
0.0

Determining the diffusion coefficient L.1
The diffusion coefficient is a measure of the mobility of water

molecules between different types of tissue. The water mole-
cules are sensitized to diffusion measurement by strong gradi-
ent pulses. Before you can determine the diffusion coefficients,
you require measurements with various diffusion weightings (b
values). L.1
You can determine diffusion coefficients for images within

series as well as across different series.
L.1
task card.
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > ADC.
Or L.1
Click the Diffusion Coefficient icon on the Viewing task

card /Evaluation subtask card.
0.0

The ADC dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

have loaded one or more than one series into the ADC dialog
window. L.1
Series have to contain at least two images before you can

perform evaluation within a series.
If you have selected within series, the images of the series

are grouped together to form groups with the same slice
position. An image with b value = 0 is assigned to all groups.
All images of a group must have a different b value (diffusion
weighting). A result image is calculated for each group.
If across series is selected, all slice positions are expected
to have the same b value in each series. A result image is
calculated for slice position. In this case, it is not possible to
take account into different diffusion directions.
The grayscale values correspond to the diffusion coefficient at
this point. L.1
0.0

T-test evaluation L.1
This special method is used to evaluate examinations per-

formed with functional neuro imaging. These examinations usu-
ally consist of a native series (no functional brain activity) and
stimulated series (functional brain activity). With the t-test, you
can sort the series according to stimulated and non-stimulated
series and generate differential images of the mean values. The
differential images display only the active areas of the brain.
L.1
Selecting images L.1 Select a series in the Patient Browser.

You require the same number of stimulated as non-stimulated
series. L.1
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > TTest....
Always start t-test evaluation from the Patient Browser and

not from the Viewing task card.
The TTest dialog box opens.
L.1
Wait until all the series are displayed under Group 1. L.1
0.0

(1) L.1
(2) L.1
(3) L.1
(1) Grouping series

(2) Generating a test image
(3) Naming a result series and starting calculation
0.0

Grouping series L.1 Grouping of series is explained using the following example of
a typical BOLD examination with block paradigms: L.1
The paradigm consists of 10 stimulated and 10 non-stimulated

series. The procedure is repeated five times. L.1
All series initially appear in the Group 1 list. L.1
You can exclude any series from the evaluation that was
acquired at the beginning of the activity or during relaxation,
because they only show the time required to reach a steady
state (deoxygenation/oxygenation of blood). L.1
Enter 2 in the top spin box to exclude the first two series from
evaluation.
You can also define how many series will remain in the groups
(Group 1 - Group 2). L.1
Enter 8 in the bottom spin box.
0.0

The contents of the spin boxes are interdependent and

always add up to the number of series: 2 + 8 = 10
Select all series under Group 1.

Click the > button to group the series in Group 1 and Group
2.
After a few seconds the "act" series are moved to the Group 2
list, the "bas" series remain in the Group 1 list. L.1
Check the series. Each of the lists should contain the same
number of stimulated and non-stimulated series.
0.0

Performing the t-test L.1 The result images show the difference between the mean val-
ues of the stimulated and non-stimulated series. The unit of
grayscales of these images results from the standard deviation
of these mean values. The resulting t-test values are compared
with a threshold value. The values below the threshold value
appear black in the image. The threshold value is set to 0 by
default.
L.1
Generating a test image L.1
Click the Test button to reconstruct an image in the test area.

Check whether the test image meets your requirements.
If it does not, change the threshold value and generate a test
image again. The threshold value is expressed in pixels.
0.0

Starting evaluation L.1
If you do not want to use a generated name for the Result

L.1 Click OK to reconstruct the entire series.
Because the t-test images only show the functionally active

areas of the brain, you can no longer view any anatomical
details. L.1
Overlay these images with images that show the anatomy in

question, for example, ep2d.
Page L.126, Adding images
L.1
N OT E
If you superimpose t-test images on non-EPI images,
compare these images with the superimposed EPI images
for safety reasons. Image distortion may occur with EPI
scans. L.1
0.0

Standard deviation L.1
The standard deviation describes the average deviation of the

values from the mean value. This function visualizes changes
in images.
The larger the standard deviation the greater the variance of the
grayscale values. L.1
You can calculate the standard deviation within a series or

across series.
L.1
task card.
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Standard Devia-
tion....
0.0

The Standard Deviation dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

have loaded one or more series into the Standard Deviation
dialog window.
L.1
Series must contain at least two images before you can per-
form evaluation within a series.

(across series). The grayscales of the images correspond to the
standard deviations. L.1
0.0

Calculating T1 images L.1
T1-weighted images are suitable for displaying anatomical

structures. The system provides you with two ways of calculat-
ing T1-weighted images: L.1
For the inversion recovery method, you require two images

with different inversion times TI. However, the repetition time
TR and the echo time TE are the same.
For the saturation recovery method, you require two images
with a different repetition time TR yet with the same TE.
The result will be a T1 and a T2-weighted image.
L.1
Selecting images L.1 Select two images in the Patient Browser or on the Viewing
task card.
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > T1....
Or L.1
Click the T1 button on the Viewing task card /Evaluation

subtask card.
0.0

The T1 dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Generating a test image L.1 L.1
First enter a noise level
L.1
Click the Test button to generate a test image.

Change the noise level, if necessary.
L.1 Click OK to reconstruct the images.
The result is two images. L.1
0.0

Calculating T2 images L.1
T2 images are suitable for showing pathological lesions in tis-

sue. L.1
To calculate T2-weighted images, you require images with the

same repetition time TR, however a different echo time TE gen-
erated with multi-echo sequences. These images must have
the same slice position. The multi-echo protocol is located
under head > add_on in the Exam Explorer. L.1
The result will be a T2- and a T1-weighted image.

L.1
Selecting images L.1 Select the images or the series in the Patient Browser or on
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > T2....
Or L.1
Click the T2 icon on the Viewing task card/Evaluation sub-

task card.
0.0

The T2 dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Generating a test image L.1 Select a test image.

First enter a noise level.

The result is two images. L.1
0.0

Time-to-peak evaluation L.1
Time to peak evaluation shows the time up to maximum con-

trast agent enhancement. L.1
You can either calculate a grayscale value minimum based on

T2 weighted EPI images or a grayscale value maximum based
on T1 weighted images.
L.1
Selecting images L.1 Select the images or the series in the Patient Browser or on
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > Time To Peak....
0.0

The Time To Peak dialog box opens. L.1
0.0

Mode L.1 The within series (one series) or across series (several
have loaded one or more series into the Time To Peak dialog
box.
L.1
Selecting the evaluation

mode L.1
Select whether you want to work on the basis of T1 or on the

basis of T2 weighted images (EPI).
Generating a test image L.1 Select a test image.

First enter a noise level.

0.0

The result is an image (one slice position) or a series of images

(various slice positions). The gray-scale values on the images
correspond to the uptake times starting with the first image. L.1
The later tissue is enriched with contrast agent, the brighter it
appears in the image. L.1
0.0

Tracing the progress of evaluation L.1
If you are evaluating a large number of series or very large

series, you can trace the progress of evaluation, and pause,
resume, or cancel evaluation. L.1
L.1 Click the icon for dynamic analysis on the status bar.
0.0

The Calculation Status dialog box opens. L.1
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Image area

(2) Status display of the evaluation jobs
(3) Progress indicator
0.0

Status display L.1 The evaluation jobs can have the following processing sta-
tuses: L.1
Active, the job is being processed

Paused, the job has been interrupted
Aborted, the job has been canceled
Waiting, the job is still waiting for evaluation
Jobs with the status "Aborted" have been terminated by the

system because of some calculation error.
Progress indicator L.1 The progress indicator shows the progress of the evaluation in
progress. It does not show the status of the selected job in the
list. L.1
0.0

NOTE
If there is a change of operators in the status dialog during
evaluation and the new operator has no access to the data
of the image being calculated, the data will be hidden. L.1
The series name is replaced by the name of the user who
generated the image. L.1
The new user can stop or resume evaluation but not delete
the job. L.1
Starting the next job L.1 Once a job has been processed, the images will be displayed
on the Viewing task card. L.1
The next job with the "Waiting" status (top in the list) is started
automatically.
L.1
Closing the dialog box L.1 To close the dialog box: L.1
0.0

Pausing evaluation L.1
You can pause evaluation at any time, for example, to view an

evaluated image and to check whether the evaluation meets
your requirements. L.1
L.1 Click the Pause button to pause evaluation.

Calculation of the current image will be completed and the
image will be displayed in the image area. L.1
The Resume button is activated, and the status of the evalua-

tion set to "Paused". L.1
If the list contains a job with the status "Waiting", it will be

started automatically.
L.1
Resuming evaluation L.1 To resume evaluation: L.1
Click the Resume button.

If you have activated a further job, this job will go into the queue.L.1
0.0

Stopping and deleting Evaluation L.1
You can stop evaluation from the joblist, for example, if you find
that the evaluation does not meet your requirements. L.1
However, you cannot delete the active evaluation. You must

stop it first. L.1
Select the active evaluation from the list.

Click the Pause button to pause evaluation.
Click the Delete button to delete the selected jobs from the
list.
Jobs with "Aborted", "Waiting", or "Paused" status can be

deleted directly.
The canceled job is then deleted from the job list. L.1
The images already calculated are stored and may be dis-

played on the Viewing task card.
0.0

CHAPTER Evaluating Images with
L.2 Mean Curve L.2
The Mean Curve task card allows for statistical evaluation of

signal changes as a function of time and place. This evaluation
is frequently performed for perfusion measurements, flow mea-
surements, or angiography measurements. L.2
Both acquired series and postprocessing result series, e.g.

MPR/MIP or Dynamic Analysis, can be evaluated. However,
this does not apply to radial series. L.2
For example, you may want to use Mean Curve to examine how
the mean grayscale value in an image section (Region of Inter-
est, ROI) varies as a function of the slice position, trigger time,
or image number. The result of a Mean Curve evaluation
appears as a curve that plots the mean grayscale value against
a selectable second variable (x axis). L.2
You can evaluate the dependency of the grayscale values on

various values within a series or across the images of more
than one series. Before evaluation, define the sort criteria for
images within the series or across series. L.2
You are able to scroll through the loaded images and look for an
initial image suitable for drawing ROIs. If necessary, you may
load additional series with a different image orientation to locate
the image with the anatomy to be evaluated. L.2
In some cases, it is easier to draw the ROIs in subtraction

images and then to apply them to the images to be evaluated.L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.21

Evaluating Images with Mean Curve Postprocessing Images
As you scroll, the ROIs drawn in one image will be applied to the
loaded images. You can select whether you want the ROIs to be
applied unchanged (static ROI) or changed in each image
(dynamic ROI). L.2
You may select a reference image or a reference series if you

want to evaluate the change in grayscale values with respect to
a reference. L.2
The evaluation results will be displayed as curves or tables. You

can scale the curves, insert comments, save, as well as film the
results. L.2
0.0

Postprocessing Images Evaluating Images with Mean Curve
Loading Images
Page L.26
Define x-axis/sorting
Page L.213
Select relative evaluation
Select reference
Page L.237
Scroll in the 1st segment
Search for original image
Page L.220
Scroll in the 4th segment, Window, zoom, pan images
search for original image Page L.221
Page L.225
Draw ROIs in 1st segment

static/dynamic
Page L.228
Draw and apply ROIs in 3rd Scroll in the 1st segment

segment Delete and correct ROIs
Page L.232 Page L.222
Start evaluation
Page L.236
Change result display
Page L.243
Save and document results

Page L.253
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.23

Starting Mean Curve L.2
You can open the Mean Curve task card from any other task
card or from the Patient Browser. L.2
Select Applications > Mean Curve from a task card or

Applications > Mean Curve from the Patient Browser.
The Mean Curve task card opens and is initially empty. L.2
0.0

(1) Menu bar

(2) First segment (evaluation segment)
(3) Third segment
(4) Status bar
(5) Second segment (result segment)
(6) Display of sort criteria
(7) Control area with subtask cards
(8) Fourth segment
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.25

Loading images L.2
You can load images and series of a patient examination on the

Mean Curve task card. It is not possible to load a complete
examination or patient on the Mean Curve task card. L.2
You may load images into the first, third, and fourth segments.
The second segment is reserved for displaying the results. L.2
L.2
N OT E
For Mean Curve evaluation the user has to have full access
rights to the patient data to be evaluated. You also require
the data save privilege. L.2

Page B.31, Information for Users L.2
0.0

Loading images into the first segment L.2
Select the images and series in the Patient Browser or on the

Viewing task card and load them into the Mean Curve task
card.
L.2
Requirements L.2 The images in the first segment must meet the following criteria
prior to mean curve evaluation. L.2
same matrix size

same field of view (FoV)
same orientation
same series block and table position
If images do not meet one of these criteria, the images will not
be loaded into the task card. L.2
The following criteria have to be met: L.2
same slice position

same slice thickness
A dialog box is displayed if the images do not meet the criteria.
You may then decide whether or not to continue loading the
images. L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.27

From the Patient Browser You can load images and start the Mean Curve task card in one
Loading L.2 step. L.2
Open the Patient Browser and select one or more series.

Select Applications > Mean Curve.
Once the Mean Curve task card has been opened and is in
foreground: L.2
Open the Patient Browser and select one or more series.

Or L.2
Drag and drop the selected series into the first segment.
Or L.2
Double-click the selected series.
0.0

Loading from the Viewer The Viewer task card is in foreground. You can load images and
task card L.2 start the Mean Curve task card in one step. L.2
Explicitly select images or series for the mean curve evalua-

tion.
The Mean Curve task card opens.
L.2
Displaying the loaded The images and series loaded are always displayed as an
images L.2 image stack. L.2
You will see the center image of the series in the first seg-
ment if you have loaded one series only.
You will see the center image of the middle series in the first
segment if you have loaded more than one series.
The images are initially ordered according to the preset sort.
Page L.213, Defining sorting L.2
Graphic objects from, e.g., a previous mean curve evaluation

will be deleted when loading the images. L.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.29

Adding images L.2 You may load additional images into the first segment at any
time. All images in the first segment are sorted according to the
preset sort. L.2
A Warning box will be displayed if you select images or series

from another examination or another patient and add them to
Mean Curve. L.2
You may load "new" images and remove "old" images from seg-
ments at any time. L.2
Simply click the Yes button.

You can stop loading new images. L.2
Simply click the No button.
0.0

Loading images into the third and fourth

segment L.2
The images in the third and fourth segment will not be taken into
account in the actual evaluation. However, the images have to
belong to the same patient and to the same examination as the
images in the first segment.
L.2
Images are always loaded into the third and fourth segment
using drag and drop.
Requirements L.2 Images in the fourth segment may have a different orientation
from the images in the first segment. For example, you can load
reference images of the exam or images showing the lesion in
a different orientation into the fourth segment.
Page L.225, Searching for an original image by scrolling
through the fourth segment L.2
You may load, for example, the subtraction series or the MIP
series of the examination into the third segment. If you want to
copy ROIs from the third segment to the first segment, the
images in the third segment must meet the same conditions as
the images in the first segment.
Page L.232, Drawing ROIs in the third segment
L.2
Open the Patient Browser and select the series.

Drag and drop the selected series into the third or fourth seg-
ment.
0.0

Displaying the loaded The same display rules apply to the loaded images as in the first
images L.2 segment. L.2
Exception:
You have already loaded images or series in the first segment
and you are now in the process of loading another series into
the third segment. The third segment shows the image with the
same preset sort criteria as the current image in the first seg-
ment.
L.2
Moving images to You have loaded images into a segment of the Mean Curve
another segment L.2 task card and now want to move those images to another seg-
ment. L.2
Select the same images again in the Patient Browser.

Drag the selected images to the mean curve segment.
The Warning message box appears. L.2
L.2
Click OK.
0.0

Defining sorting L.2
When sorting loaded images, you may set the scrolling

sequence in the first and third segments and define the x axis
of the mean curve evaluation. L.2
In the fourth segment, the images are always sorted by image

number and series. L.2
The difference between evaluation within a series and evalua-

tion across the images of more than one series is as follows.
L.2
Evaluation within the The mode is automatically set to Within if you have loaded only
series L.2 one series into the first segment. L.2
The Within button then appears pressed.

L.2
You define the sort order of the loaded images by selecting the
x axis. L.2
0.0

Evaluation across The mode will automatically be set to Across if you have loaded
series L.2 multiple series into the first segment. L.2
The Across button then appears pressed.

L.2
You define the sort order of the loaded images across the series
by selecting the x axis. You define the sort order within the
loaded series with a second sort criterion.
L.2
The images are initially ordered as defined by the preset sort:L.2

Within: Sorted by slice position
Across: Sorting by series number
The current sort order is displayed in the control area. L.2
0.0

Defining the x axis L.2 Select Tools > Scaling/Sorting.

Or L.2
Click the Scaling/Sorting button in the control area of the

Mean Curve card.
The Scaling dialog box is displayed. L.2
Move the X-Axis subtask card in foreground.
0.0

Select one of the following parameters as the x axis by click-

ing on the appropriate option.
Ser / Ima No.

Image and series number
Trigger Time
Suitable for displaying physiologically triggered measure-
ment, e.g., cardiac series
Echo Time
Suitable for displaying multi-echo sequences, e.g., multi-
echo spin echo sequences
Slice Pos. default
Normal Time
Excitation time, suitable for dynamic and motion studies
When evaluating Within, the Normal Time of an image is
the difference between the acquisition time of the image and
the shortest acquisition time in the series.
0.0

Sorting in Across mode L.2 The sort criteria for Mean Curve evaluation across the series is
defined in the Scaling dialog box on the Sorting card. L.2
Select the Sorting subtask card in the Scaling dialog box.

The Sort card is displayed only if you are evaluating across
series. L.2
With Sorting across series, you define the parameters used

as the x axis and the order used for evaluating corresponding
images. L.2
You may define the sort parameters used for images within a
series (Sorting within series). Additionally, the images corre-
sponding during the sort across series are determined (evalu-
ation across series). L.2
0.0

L.2 The sort criteria across series and within series have to be
different.
Choose an option for sorting within a series and one for

across series.
Click OK.
The sort criteria will be applied and the Scaling dialog box
closes.
L.2
Images with the same The sort order of images in the first segment is checked and
sort criterion L.2 updated every time images are loaded, deleted, or the sort cri-
terion is switched. L.2
The Same sort size dialog dialog box will be displayed if more
than one image has the same value for one or both sort crite-
ria. L.2
Example: Mode Across, x axis = normal.time L.2
0.0

For each x value, you can decide whether the newest or oldest
image will be used for evaluation. L.2
Click the Use all newest image or Use all oldest image but-
ton.
In general, the newest or oldest of all the images with the same
sort criterion can be used for evaluation. L.2
Click the Use all newest image or Use all oldest image but-
ton.
You can undo the action for locating images with the same sort
size. L.2
Just click Cancel.
Example:
You have loaded additional images into the first segment.
If you click Cancel in the Same sort size dialog dialog box, the
loaded images will be deleted again. L.2
0.0

Searching for an original image for

evaluation L.2
You can scroll through the loaded images and series to look for
a suitable image. L.2
You can also load the reference images of the same examina-
tion into the fourth segment and scroll through them until you
find the optimal original image for evaluation. L.2
You may change the way the loaded images are displayed. L.2
0.0

Modifying image display L.2
You can use the following methods: L.2
Changing brightness and contrast (windowing)

Zooming/panning
Fit to segment size
Inverting grayscale values
These actions are described in detail in the Viewing chapter.
Page G.41, Processing Images L.2
L.2
N OT E
During scrolling, the Mean Curve task card, unlike the
Viewer task card, automatically transfers each change to all
images of the respective segment. L.2
L.2
Select a method for changing the image display under Image

in the main menu.
Or L.2
Place the mouse pointer on the first, third, or fourth segment

and select a method for changing the image display from the
context menu.
0.0

Scrolling within a series L.2
There are several ways of scrolling image by image through a

series. L.2
For scrolling, use the turned down page symbol in the top
right-hand corner of the image segments.
Page G.32, Scrolling
Or L.2
Use the symbol keys on the symbol keypad for scrolling.

Page A.211, Starting applications and functions
Or L.2
Click the Next image or Previous image button on the

Scroll card in the control area.
Or L.2
Select Scroll > Image Next or Scroll > Image Previous

from the main menu.
Images not used for evaluation because of the same sort crite-
rion will not be displayed as you scroll. L.2
Once you have loaded a series into the first as well as third seg-
ments and are scrolling through one of them, the other segment
will look for and display the corresponding image (identical to
within sort criterion). L.2
0.0

Scrolling across series L.2
There are two ways of scrolling across series in a segment. L.2
Click the Series+ or Series- buttons on the Scroll card.

Or L.2
Use the symbol keys on the symbol keypad for scrolling.

Page A.211, Starting applications and functions
Or L.2
Select Scroll > Series Next or Series Previous from the

main menu when starting applications and functions.
Images that have the same within criterion will be displayed as

you scroll across series. L.2
0.0

Example L.2 If the preset sort applies, images with the same slice position
will be displayed as you scroll across series. L.2
A series is placed last in the scrolling order and an empty seg-

ment is displayed along with a message, if an image with the
corresponding within sort criterion is missing in a series. This
series will then be ignored during evaluation.
L.2
Images of the series not used for evaluation because of the

same sort criterion will not be displayed as you scroll.
0.0

Searching for an original image by scrolling

through the fourth segment L.2
In some cases it is simpler to look for the most suitable image

in the first segment using the reference images. L.2
Mean Curve therefore provides a way of loading the reference

images of the images loaded in the first segment into the fourth
segment.
Page L.211, Requirements L.2
In the reference images loaded, shift the cut line that represents
the position of the current image in the first segment. L.2
0.0

Load the reference images of the examination into the fourth

segment.
Page L.27, Requirements
Look for the reference image that best represents the anat-
omy to be evaluated.
Click the reference image with the left mouse button. Hold
the mouse button down and drag the cut line to the anatomy
to be evaluated.
The first segment displays the image whose position best
matches the position of the cut line.
L.2
Scroll through the stack and look for another reference image
if the fourth segment does not show a cut line in the reference
image.
0.0

Moving a cut line
(1) Current image in the first segment

(2) Reference image in the fourth segment
(3) Original image in the first segment after moving the cut line
(4) Reference image in the fourth segment after moving the
cut line
0.0

Drawing in ROIs (regions of

interest) L.2
You can draw ROIs after you have optimized image display and
located the image for evaluation in the first segment. ROIs
delineate the part of the image that will be evaluated. L.2
You can draw ROIs in the first and third segment. L.2
The Mean Curve task card is able to manage up to four ROIs

simultaneously per evaluation.
Drawing ROIs in the first segment L.2
The following tools are available on the Mean Curve task card
for drawing ROIs: L.2
Rectangle
Circle
Freehand ROI
Drawing and editing ROIs is described in detail in the Viewer

chapter.
Page G.54, Evaluating regions L.2
0.0

L.2
NOTE
Ensure that the ROIs do not extend beyond the edge of the
image. If they do, you will not be able to perform
calculations. L.2
If the ROI extends over the edge of the image,

'"???'" appears instead of numbers after Min/Max, Area,
Mean/SD. L.2
Draw one or more ROIs in the original image in the first seg-
ment.
The ROIs in the first segment have different colors and line
styles. Each ROI is also identified by a number. L.2
0.0

Static or dynamic transfer of the ROIs to other

images L.2
You may select whether the ROIs drawn in the image will apply
to all other images in the first segment (Static ROI) or whether
you want to adjust the ROIs for each image (Dynamic ROI). L.2
Select Tools > Static ROI or Dynamic ROI from the main
menu.
Click the Dynamic ROI button in the control area on the
Tools card.
Static ROI mode is the active default setting when you start
Mean Curve.
L.2
Scrolling with static As you scroll, the ROIs drawn in the initial image will be applied
ROIs L.2 to all other images in the first segment. L.2
If ROIs have already been defined in some images, they will be

overwritten by the static ROIs. L.2
0.0

Scrolling with dynamic The ROIs drawn in the initial image will be copied to the next,
ROIs L.2 current image as you scroll. Existing ROIs will not be overwrit-
ten. L.2
At this point, you are able to check how well ROIs match the
anatomy to be evaluated and change the ROIs, if necessary.
L.2
Example:
You have drawn four ROIs in the initial image. The next image
already contains regions 1 and 2. As you scroll, the image con-
tains only regions 3 and 4 from the initial image. L.2
Adjust region 2 to match the anatomy to be evaluated in the

next image. The next image does not include any ROIs. As you
continue scrolling, this image will contain all four ROIs from the
previous image and nothing from the initial image.
L.2
Deleting ROIs L.2 Select the ROI that you want to delete.
Select Edit > Delete Graphics from the main menu or
Delete from the context menu.
Or L.2

The selected ROIs are deleted from all images. L.2
0.0

Filling in missing ROIs L.2 All images required for the current evaluation must have the
same number of ROIs. L.2
Mean Curve adds missing ROIs automatically by copying them

from the nearest images.
L.2
Example:
ROIs will be copied from the previous images if you reload
images into the first segment after drawing ROIs.
L.2
Drawing ROIs in the third segment L.2
In some cases, it is easier to position the ROIs in the images of

the third segment. L.2
For this reason, Mean Curve allows you to load additional

series, e.g. subtraction series or the MIP series of the examina-
tion into the third segment. These images frequently allow for
easier anatomic evaluations and a more accurate drawing of
ROIs. Subsequently, you apply the ROIs to the images in the
first segment.
L.2
Load suitable images into the third segment.

Page L.211, Requirements
The third segment shows the image that has the same sort cri-
terion (within) as the current image in the first segment. L.2
0.0

Select the initial image for drawing in the third segment.

Draw the ROIs in the third segment.
Unlike the first segment, all ROIs are displayed in white and
annotated. L.2
0.0

Transferring ROIs to the You may individually select and apply the ROIs in the third seg-
first segment L.2 ment or apply all ROIs together to the first segment. L.2
Explicitly select an ROI in the third segment.

Or L.2
Put the input focus on the third segment and select Edit >
Select All Graphics from the main menu or Select All
Graphics from the context menu.
The ROIs in the third segment are then selected. L.2
Select Edit > Apply ROI from the main menu or Apply ROI
The ROIs will be applied to the first segment.
L.2
If the slice positions of the current images in the first and third
segment do not match, a message box appears. L.2
Click Yes in the message box to transfer the ROIs.

Click No in the message box to cancel transfer.
0.0

N OT E
Please ensure that you do not exceed the maximum
number of four ROIs. L.2
If two ROIs have already been defined in the first segment,

you can transfer up to two ROIs from the third segment to
the first segment. L.2
L.2
N OT E
If the matrix size of the images in the third segment differs
from that in the first segment, you are not able transfer ROIs
from the third segment to the first segment. L.2
An error message is displayed. L.2
0.0

Setting and starting the evaluation L.2
Before you start the evaluation, define whether you want to per-
form an absolute or relative evaluation. L.2
The signal intensity is plotted against the x axis during absolute

evaluation. L.2
Relative evaluation generates two curves for each ROI. The dif-
ference between the signal intensity and a reference value as
well as the ratio of the difference to the reference value are
applied to the x axis. L.2
L.2
I L.2 I/IRef L.2
x x
Select a single image as the reference if you are evaluating

within a series.
Select a whole series as the reference if you are evaluating
across series.
0.0

Set relative evaluation L.2 Absolute evaluation is the default setting when you start Mean
Curve. L.2
Select Tools > Evaluation Mode relative.

Or L.2
Click this button in the control area on the Tools card.
The Select Reference Image (within mode) or Select Refer-

ence Series (across mode) dialog box opens. L.2
0.0

You can also call up this dialog box explicitly. L.2
Select Tools > Select Reference Image.
The list contains the images or series loaded in the first seg-
ment. These are sorted according to the within or across sort-
ing criterion. L.2
The oldest image or the oldest series is preselected as the ref-

erence. L.2
Select a reference image or reference series from this list. You

will also set the reference image or the reference series to be
used during evaluation. L.2
For example, for a contrast agent series you are able to select
the series without contrast agent as a reference series. L.2
Select a reference image or a reference series.
Activate or deactivate the Include Reference Series option.

Activate this option when evaluating the inflow of contrast
agent in a mammo series.
Deactivate this option when evaluating cardiac images
dependent on the trigger time.
0.0

Click OK.
The dialog box closes.
L.2
The selected reference is used for all subsequent evalua-

tions. As soon as you switch evaluation modes (within or
across), the selected series is no longer valid.
Starting evaluation Click the Start Evaluation button in the control area on the
L.2 Mean Curve card.
Or L.2
Select Tools > Start Evaluation.
The results of mean curve evaluation will be displayed as a

curve and table in the top right segment (result segment).
L.2
Automatic recalculation L.2 The results will be rejected and cleared from the second seg-
ment as soon as you add new images, delete images, manipu-
late ROIs, or change the sort criterion. L.2
Go to the menu and L.2
Select the Auto Recalculation option under Tools.
0.0

L.2
TIP
You should deactivate the Auto Recalculation option if you
have loaded a large number of series into Mean Curve. L.2
If not, you will find that recalculation is too time consuming.L.2
If you switch from Dynamic ROI to Static ROI after a Mean

Curve evaluation, the evaluation is recalculated.
Scroll in the second When you scroll in the second segment, the graphics are dis-
segment L.2 played first and then the tables. L.2
If you scroll to a table in the second segment, this table is dis-

played first after re-evaluation. L.2
0.0

Result display in the The diagram shows a curve for each ROI. Using the color and
diagram L.2 line style, you can assign the ROIs in the first segment to the
corresponding curves in the diagram. L.2
(1) Patient name

(2) Number of the table or diagram
(3) Comment line (can be changed)
(4) Information about scaling
(5) Mean values or the maximum values (for absolute evalua-
tion only)
0.0

Result display in the A table is generated for each diagram. L.2
table
Scroll in through result segment until you come across a
L.2
table.
The far left column lists the values on the x axis, e.g. the serial
numbers. L.2
Next to that you will find the mean value, standard deviation,
and area content of each ROI. L.2
0.0

Changing the display of the results L.2
You can use the following options for changing the display of the
results in the diagram: L.2
Using vertical scan line

Scaling the x axis and y axis
Smoothing curves
Using an image from the first segment as background
Changing the comment line in the image text
Using the vertical scan For more precise evaluation of the curve, you can have the
line L.2 intensity of the signal displayed for a defined x value. L.2
For this purpose, you can shift the vertical line in the image. L.2
Vertical scan line
L.2
0.0

Click on the line and move it by holding down the left mouse
button.
The x value (Series No. 6 in the figure) and the mean values of
the intensities for each ROI are displayed above the curves.
L.2
If it is not visible, the vertical line is located directly on top of

the y axis. You are able to shift it in this position.
0.0

Scaling the x axis L.2 The definition range of the selected parameter is displayed on
the x axis. You can limit this range so that only the section of
interest will be displayed. L.2
Select Scaling dialog box and go to the X-Axis subtask

card.
Page L.215, Defining the x axis
You can also call up the Scaling dialog box by selecting Scal-
ing/Sorting in the result menu on the context menu.
0.0

When you call Mean Curve, the automatic Scaling option is

activated. The X-axis is scaled in accordance with the input
data. L.2
You are also able to scale the X-axis manually to focus on areas
of interest. L.2
Change the value in the two input fields Minimum and Max-
imum.
The automatic Scaling option is deactivated for the x axis and
the y axis. L.2
If the automatic Scaling option is inactive, the current scal-

ing will be applied to all subsequent evaluations.
Click the OK button to apply your changes.

The curves and tables will be adjusted accordingly. L.2
0.0

Scaling the y-Axis L.2 Different cards will be displayed in the Scaling dialog box
depending on the type of evaluation used. L.2
Only the y-Axis card will be displayed for absolute evaluation.

A card for differential signal curves with a y-Axis (diff) and a
card for normalized curves with a y-Axis (norm) will be dis-
played for relative evaluation.
L.2
Select Scaling dialog box and go to the y-Axis card.

Page L.215
You can also call up the Scaling dialog box by selecting Scal-
ing/Sorting in the result menu on the context menu.
0.0

When you call Mean Curve, the automatic Scaling option is

activated. The y axes are scaled in accordance with the result
data. L.2
You are also able to scale the axes manually to focus on areas
of interest. The measured grayscale values will not be
changed. L.2
Change the value in the two input fields Minimum and Max-
imum.
The automatic Scaling option is deactivated for both the x axis
and the y axis. L.2
If the automatic Scaling option is inactive, the current scal-

ing will be applied to all subsequent evaluations.
You can set the scaling of the y axis to be either linear or loga-
rithmic. L.2
Click the Linear or Logarithmic option.
0.0

You are able to scale the grayscale values. The grayscale val-
ues will be changed. This function is useful if the grayscale val-
ues are proportional to a physiologically relevant value and the
proportionality factor is known (e.g. flow velocity of the blood).
L.2
Example: Factor 2, Offset 20

All y values will be multiplied by 2 and shifted 20 units toward
the positive y axis. L.2
Enter suitable values in the Factor and Offset input fields.
The Minimum/Maximum and Factor/Offset parameters are

mutually independent.
Click the OK button to apply your changes.

The curves and tables will be adjusted accordingly. L.2
0.0

Smoothing a curve L.2 The individual measurement points can either be connected by
straight lines or by a smooth curve. L.2
Click the Smoothing button on the Mean Curve card in the

control area.
Or L.2
Select View > Smoothing On.

Or L.2
Select Smoothing from the context menu.

The curve is smoothed. The results in the table are not affected.
L.2
Smoothing
0.0

Image text and You are able to change a comment line in the image text of the
comments L.2 curves and tables. L.2
Double-click this line.

The comment line is selected. L.2
Enter the new comment.

Confirm the new comment line by pressing the Enter or Esc
key or by calling up an ROI tool.
The modified text is updated in all result images.
L.2
Example of an automatically generated comment line:

L.2
Evaluation of image 7 across series 4 to 11

rel 4ima 7: relative evaluation with image 7 from series 4 as
the reference
norm: Normalized curve
(or diff: ratio of the signal difference to the reference image)
0.0

Image as a background Instead of the default background, you may use the current
for the diagram L.2 image in the first segment for diagrams.
L.2
Select the Image with Graphics option under View.
If necessary, adjust the contrast and brightness in the sec-

ond segment for an optimally visible curve.
Select the Graphics only option under View if you want to

reset to a black background.
0.0

Storing, filming and deleting

results L.2
You may save the results of the mean curve evaluation as

images or as an ASCII file and send them to a camera for film-
ing.
L.2
L.2
NOTE
When a user logs off, unsaved data are permanently
lost. L.2

data you want to keep before you log off. L.2
0.0

Saving results as The results are saved as separate images in the database as
images L.2 follows: L.2
(1) Explicitly select the initial images and results images and
select Save as
Explicitly select the images, curves, and tables in all seg-
ments that you want to save.
Select Patient > Save As... to display the Save As dialog
box.
You may save the result images in the same way as on the
Viewer task card.
L.2
(2) Save all results images and all relevant initial images with-
out making a selection
Click the Save Evaluation button on the Patient card in the
control area.
Or L.2
Select Patient > Save Evaluation As.

Or L.2
Select Save As ASCII from the context menu in the second

segment.
The first and second segments are selected explicitly. The Save
As dialog box is displayed. L.2
0.0

A new series is created. This series contains all relevant initial

images with ROIs and the window and zoom/pan values from
the first segment and the results images from the second seg-
ment. L.2
You can archive and send these series automatically.

Page J.51, Automatic Storing and Sending
L.2
If you have not performed any calculations and the second

segment is empty, the Save Evaluation As menu is grayed
out.
The ROIs of images stored in Mean Curve can no longer be

processed on the Viewer task card.
0.0

Saving results as an You may save data from the evaluation in an ASCII file. L.2
ASCII file L.2

You may only store ASCII data onto diskette (diskette drive A:)
or in directories especially set up for import/export by Siemens
Service.
L.2
N OT E
The Save As ASCII menu item is dimmed if you do not have
the necessary EXPORT rights. L.2
Please refer to the information in

Part B, Security Package L.2
L.2
Select Patient > Save As ASCII.

Or L.2
Select Save As ASCII from the save context menu in the

second segment.
0.0

The Save in ASCII dialog box opens. L.2
You can save the ASCII file on diskette or in directories espe-

cially set up for import/export by Siemens Service. L.2
Choose a directory or diskette under File Name.
For security reasons, you are able to deactivate display of the

patient name in the first line of the ASCII file. L.2
Select the Hide Patient Name option.

The ASCII data no longer contain any reference to the patient.
L.2
After relative evaluation, tables for differential signals end with

_diff, and tables for normalized values _norm. If needed, you
may change the file name. L.2
0.0

Reading an ASCII file The ASCII data from the mean curve evaluation could be
into Excel L.2 imported into Microsoft Excel, for example. L.2
Ensure that you set a decimal point under the Regional Set-
tings/Numbers on your PC.
Launch Microsoft Excel.

Select File > Open in Microsoft Excel.
Select drive A: under File type text files (*.txt). Under Look
in click the Open button.
The Convert Text to Columns Wizard (Text Assistant) dialog
box then opens. L.2
Click the End button.

You can now use Microsoft Excel to continue processing the
curve results. L.2
0.0

Filming images L.2 You can transfer the images, curves, and table of the mean
curve evaluation to the virtual film sheet for filming or printing as
follows: L.2
(1) Select the images and results explicitly and transfer them
to film sheet
Explicitly select the images and results from all four seg-
ments.
(2) Transfer the two current images from the first and second
segment to the film sheet without making a selection
Select Patient > Film Evaluation or click Film Evaluation
button in the control area on the Patient card.
The images are transferred to the virtual film sheet and from
there they are sent to the camera either immediately or after a
delay depending on the setting (Auto Expose on/off). L.2
You will find a detailed description of the film function in:

Chapter O.2 L.2
0.0

Deleting images and You can either delete images or results in one segment or
results L.2 delete all the images loaded in Mean Curve. L.2
Put the input focus on a segment.

Select Edit > Delete document(s) or select Delete docu-
ments from the context menu.
The corresponding document will be deleted.
L.2
Select Patient > Close Patient or click the Close Patient

button in the control area on the Patient card.
All segments will be cleared. L.2
0.0

Ending mean curve L.2 Select Applications > Close Mean Curve.
Or L.2
Start another dynamic application function such as Argus.

The Mean Curve task card closes. L.2
Up to six task cards may be active. You have to close one

active task before opening another task card.
L.2
N OT E
If you close the patient but not MeanCurve, all settings, e.g.
evaluation mode or scaling, are retained. L.2
L.2
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Image filtration and
L.3 distortion correction L.3
You can use a filter to post-process images or images with vis-

ible noise. The ContextVision Filter is an adaptive filter that
searches for conspicuous structures in the image. Subse-
quently, the filter checks if these are either random or part of
other structures. L.3
The ContextVision Filter takes into account the local distribution

of signal intensity and the continuity of local tissue structures.L.3
The images selected in the Patient Browser or the Viewing
task card are used for calculation. L.3
Three predefined filters are available (Smooth, Medium,

Sharp). These allow for individual adjustments to suit your
requirements.
L.3
Geometric distortions (barrel/pin cushion) may occur at the

edge of images with a large FoV. These image errors can be
eliminated using the distortion correction postprocessing
function. L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.31

Image filtration and distortion correction Postprocessing Images
Editing images with the

ContextVision filter L.3
Image or series that you want to post-process with the Context-

Vision filter should not have been edited with another filter.
L.3
Selecting images L.3
Use the filter on the Patient Browser or the Viewing task card
to select images for postprocessing. L.3
Selecting via the Patient The Patient Browser allows you to select images and series of
Browser L.3 a study, if you want to pass on a large number of series for fil-
tering and do not want to view these images in detail. L.3

Select the series and images (multiple selection) that you
want to filter.
All images and series that you select here will be filtered. L.3
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > ContextVision

Filter to start the filter.
Or L.3
Click the ContextVision filter on the toolbar of the Patient

Browser.
The ContextVision Parameter dialog box opens. L.3
0.0

Postprocessing Images Image filtration and distortion correction
Selecting via the Viewing You want to view the images in detail before evaluation or edit
task card L.3 them in the 2D evaluation on the Viewing task card. L.3
Select the images and series on the Viewing task card.

All images and series that you select here will be filtered. L.3
Select Evaluation > Dynamic Analysis > ContextVision

Filter to start the filter.
Or L.3
Click the tool button on the Evaluation subtask card on the

Viewing task card.
The ContextVision Parameter dialog box opens. L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.33

Setting the filter strength L.3
The ContextVision Parameter dialog box allows you to select

the desired filter strength. You may either use default filters or
define one set of your own filters. L.3
Since the visual impression of the filter images is very subjec-

tive, we can only provide general recommendations for filter val-
ues.
L.3
Using Siemens filters L.3 The filter strength can be adjusted with the options Smooth,
Medium, or Sharp. These options are set to the following
default values: L.3
Smooth: Filter strength 15

Medium: Filter strength 17
Sharp: Filter strength 19
Select one of the options.
0.0

Using user-defined filters L.3 For each of the three options, you may assign a filter strength
of group 1-10 or group 11-20. We recommend saving the filters
with names that indicate their strength. For example, you could
save a smooth filter as Smooth.
L.3
Using filter settings 1-10 L.3 You will probably use filter settings 1-10 to process images of
256 matrix size. The higher the filter setting, the stronger the
enhancement of structures and the less these structures are
smoothed. L.3
Recommended: Strength 9 filters enhance structures to a

greater degree (to emphasize edges and lines). This filter is
especially suitable for MIP images and angiographic studies.
Select an option.
Enter a value in the Filtervalue spin box.
Apply the filter strength by clicking the Adopt button.

Change the filter strength of the other two options in the
same way.
The modified filter values are updated and displayed next to the
filter options.
L.3
The filter strengths you enter are saved and will be applied
every time you select that option. L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.35

Using filter settings Filter settings 11-20 are optimized for matrix size 512. However,
11-20 L.3 you may apply it to other image sizes as well. The higher the
value, the more the signal is enhanced and the less noise is
suppressed. L.3
Recommended: Filter strengths 11 and 12 result in good

noise suppression and low signal enhancement (e.g. for use
on the spinal column and liver). Strength 19 and 20 filters
have the lowest filter effect.
Select an option.
Enter a value in the Filtervalue spin box.
Confirm your entry with Adopt.
Change the filter strength of the other two options in the

same way.
The modified filter values are updated and displayed next to the
filter options.
L.3
The filter strengths you enter are saved and will be applied
every time you select that option. L.3
0.0

Resetting the filter option You can reset a filter option you have changed (Smooth/
to a default value L.3 Medium/Sharp) back to its original default value.
L.3
Select the filter option Smooth.
Click the Siemens-Default button.
The default value is displayed again next to the selected filter

option.
L.3
Select the next option and reset it to the default value in the
same way.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.37

Renaming a results series L.3
A results series is generated for each original image or series.

L.3
Name of the result The Result Series Description text input field contains an
series or image L.3 automatically generated name. However, you are able to modify
the name as required. L.3
As the default setting, a name is displayed as follows: L.3
The first part of the name corresponds to the original data of

the images or series,
followed by the abbreviation "CV" for filters (ContextVision
Filter)
plus a running number.
Filtered images are identified with the abbreviation "CVxx"

which represents the image type (xx stands for filter strength; integer
value).
Page P.210, List of image types L.3
If the name of the results series does not meet your require-
ments, change the name in the Result Series Description
field. L.3
0.0

Selecting a result If you have selected multiple series, you can use the selection
series or image L.3 list next to the Result Series Description input field to check
the names and change them, if necessary.
L.3
Starting filtering L.3
After you have selected your filters, you can start processing
images.
L.3
Click OK.
The ContextVision Parameter dialog box closes. The filtering

process runs in the background. L.3
An icon in the status bar indicates that the filtering process is

active. L.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.39

Monitoring filtering L.3
You can monitor the progress of filtering in the Calculation Sta-

tus dialog box. You can interrupt or cancel filtering and delete
filter jobs from the list.
L.3
Click the icon on the status bar.
The Calculation Status dialog box opens.

L.3
For a detailed description of how to control the filtering process,

Page L.177, Tracing the progress of evaluation
L.3
The icon for the calculation status disappears after the jobs
have been processed. The result images are then available for
display.
L.3
Displaying the results L.3
All filtered images and series are available for viewing after the
last image has been processed. L.3
The images are loaded onto the Viewing task card after calcu-
lation of the last image or a series. L.3
0.0

Correcting distortion artifacts L.3
Geometric distortions (barrel/pin cushion) may occur at the

edge of images with a large FoV or with off-center slices. L.3
(1) Image with distortion artifacts

(2) Image after distortion correction
Cause L.3 Gradient coils are used to encode spatial information whose
gradient field ideally rises linearly. In reality, however, deviations
from linearity may occur at the edge of the image. L.3
0.0

Remedies L.3 If you are planning quantitative evaluations for images, it is

essential to correct distortion artifacts as follows: L.3
(1) Before scanning switch on the FoV compensation filter.

The images resulting from this scan are distortion-cor-
rected.
Page P.171, FOV compensation filter (large FOV)
(2) You can also correct images after scanning. Call distortion
correction from the Patient Browser. This method is
described on the next pages.
Distortion correction after scanning generates a new series.

The uncorrected original images are retained and can be used
for slice positioning additional scans. L.3
0.0

Selecting images and starting calculation L.3
Requirements L.3 The images have to meet the following conditions for distortion
correction: L.3
The images have been acquired with syngo MR

The images have not been distortion-corrected before
Selecting images L.3 You may select individual images, one or more series or single
images of different series. L.3
Select Patient > Patient Browser.

Select the images or series in the Patient Browser.
Starting calculation L.3 Select Evaluation > Distortion Correction from the Patient
List.
Calculation of the distortion correction starts. The status bar

shows the icon of the image postprocessing jobs. If calculation
fails, the icon appears crossed out.
Page L.439, Tracking postprocessing
L.3
0.0

The Postprocessing Queue dialog box is displayed. You are

able to monitor progress of the image postprocessing job.
L.3
Click the Close button in the Organize Image Postprocess-

ing Jobs dialog box when the image postprocessing job has
been completed.
Results L.3
New series are generated as a result of the distortion correc-

tion. L.3
Example L.3 You have selected three images from series S1, four images
from series S2, and two images from series S3 for distortion
correction. L.3
Three new result series are created: Series E1 with three

images, series E2 with four images, and series E3 with two
images. L.3
You can recognize distortion-corrected images because of their

image type DIS2D.
Page P.210, List of image types L.3
0.0

CHAPTER Viewing and Evaluating
L.4 BOLD Images L.4
The BOLD task card enables you to create alpha images by

combining anatomical images with parameter images as well
as to retroactively calculate parameter images.
L.4
The various image types are defined as follows:

L.4
Parameter images L.4 Post-processed images with functional information. In this

case, t-test images. L.4
t-test images L.4 Parameter images that originate from an online or offline BOLD
calculation or have been generated by statistical analysis with
the Dynamic analysis > TTest... function The pixels contain
functional information. L.4
It is not possible to window t-test images on the BOLD task

card.
Alpha image L.4 Overlay image (magnitude image) created by combining a cur-
rently displayed anatomical image with a currently displayed
parameter image. This requires an identical slice position. L.4
It is not possible to window alpha images or to use them for

additional analysis.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.41

Viewing and Evaluating BOLD Images Postprocessing Images
Access authorization Detailed information about access authorization is available in

to the task card L.4 the chapters on Safety Standards.
Page B.11, Introduction L.4
You require access authorization for the BOLD task card. If you
log on without this access authorization, you will not be able to
perform the protected functions. L.4
If you do not have access to a certain patient, his data will not
be shown in the Patient Browser when you are logged into the
system.
L.4
L.4
NOTE
lost. L.4

0.0

Postprocessing Images Viewing and Evaluating BOLD Images
The BOLD task card L.4
The BOLD task card is divided into the following areas: L.4
(1)
(2) (6)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(7)
(1) Menu bar

(2) Segment 1 (anatomical segment)
(3) Segment 2 (parameter image segment)
(4) Segment 3 (alpha image segment) contains only one
image
(5) Segment 4 (currently not used)
(6) Control area
(7) Status bar
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.43

Loading images L.4
You are transferring anatomical images and parameter images

to the BOLD task card. The sequence is not important. L.4
This automatically creates overlay images, known as alpha

images.
Page L.411, Automatic calculation of the alpha images. L.4
You can choose single images as well as series or complete
studies.
L.4
Restrictions L.4 You can not transfer the complete images set of a patient to
the BOLD task card.
Anatomical images that include distortion correction through
remapping with the Large FOV filter can not be transferred
to the BOLD task card.
The images can only be loaded from the local database. Dur-
ing direct loading from CD-ROM, loading will be canceled fol-
lowed by a message appearing on-screen.
0.0

L.4
NOTE
A message appears when an operator without access
authorization to the data currently loaded takes over. L.4
You can then decide whether to continue or cancel log-on

of the new operator. If you choose to continue, the current
data will be unloaded without saving. The task card is then
closed. L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.45

Initially loading series L.4
Anatomical series and parameter image series are transferred

to the empty BOLD task card as follows.
L.4
Opening the Patient Open the Patient > Browser from the main menu.
Browser L.4
The Patient Browser dialog box opens.
L.4
Selecting images/series L.4 Select the study, series, or individual images desired.
Transferring images L.4 Open Applications > BOLD from the main menu.
Or L.4
Drag and drop the required anatomical series into the image
area of the BOLD task card.
Or L.4
Double-click the required series.
0.0

The anatomical series will be transferred to the anatomical seg-

ment of the BOLD task card. The parameter image series will
be transferred to the parameter image segment. L.4
If the series contains images without a clearly defined slice

plane, these images will also be loaded into the first segment
and appended to the end of the series.
If the anatomical images are not from EPI measurements,
certain restrictions apply.
Page L.424, Activating/Deactivating blocking areas.
The segments show the first image of the first series. If the con-
ditions for an alpha image are met, the alpha image segment
will show a single alpha image. L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.47

Loading additional series L.4
You have already transferred several series to the BOLD task

card and would like to load additional series. L.4
Select the study, series, or individual images desired.

Open Applications > BOLD from the main menu.

Or L.4
Drag and drop the required anatomical series into the image
area of the BOLD task card.
Or L.4

If the selected series consist of anatomical images, they will be
transferred to the anatomical segment. Additionally, the first
image of the first new series you have loaded will be displayed.L.4
If the new series originated from the same study, they will be
stored on the BOLD task card according to their series number.
In this case, you are able to scroll across series,
Page L.415, Scrolling from series to series. L.4
0.0

If you have selected series from another study, a dialog box will
be displayed. The dialog box gives you the choice of transfer-
ring the new series to the BOLD task card. L.4
If yes, the series currently on the BOLD task card will be

deleted. L.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.49

Loading mosaic images L.4
You are able to transfer mosaic images to the BOLD task card
as well. L.4
L.4
N OT E
BOLD imaging generates thousands of images. For simpler
handling and to maintain performance, there are special
sequences that create mosaic images. L.4
A mosaic image combines the slices scanned within a TR

interval. The matrix of the mosaic is defined by the number
of slices. L.4
The images are sorted in anatomical order starting top left

of the matrix.
Page D.37, Splitting mosaic images into single imagesL.4
0.0

Automatic calculation of the alpha

images L.4
Ensure that the source images loaded meet the following

requirements prior to your calculating alpha images: L.4
at least one slice position of the anatomical series and

parameter image series has to match
the parameter image must cover at least half the anatomical
image at the matching slice position
If yes, the alpha images are calculated automatically and dis-
played on the BOLD task card in the alpha image segment. The
image section that does not correspond to the anatomical
image, will be shown in turquoise color in the alpha image. L.4
If the parameter image covers less than half the anatomical
image, it is not possible to calculate the alpha image. The alpha
image segment remains black. L.4
The alpha images are displayed singly rather than as an

image stack because only the alpha image for the currently
displayed anatomical image and parameter image are calcu-
lated.
Image numbers are not displayed in the alpha image.
0.0

The image text of the alpha text provides the slice position and
the magnitude of the threshold value (upper low range, lower
up range) from the color scale, e.g. SP H 29.7 |t| > 4.0. This
also applies to mosaic images. In this case, the slice position of
the first mosaic image is used.
L.4
Rules for mosaic images L.4 If both source images (anatomical image and parameter
image) are in mosaic format, the alpha image is displayed in
mosaic format as well. For this purpose, the slice positions
have to match.
If only one source images is in mosaic format, (for example,
the anatomical image is a single slice image while the
parameter image is in mosaic format) BOLD will search for a
slice position in the mosaic image that matches the anatom-
ical image. If the search is successful, the alpha image will
be calculated and displayed.
Anatomical mosaic images that are not available in EPI for-
mat cannot be superimposed.
0.0

Scrolling images and series L.4
Series and images are displayed as a stack of images in the

anatomical segment or parameter images segment of the
BOLD task card. This means that you can scroll through the
images separately in each segment. L.4
It is not possible to scroll through alpha images because only

one alpha image at a time is shown.
Scrolling between images L.4
The BOLD task card provides options for scrolling image-by-

image through the series: L.4
Use the dog ears in the top right corner of the image seg-
ments.
Page G.32, Scrolling.
Or L.4

Or L.4
Scroll using the Image- or Image+ key on the symbol key-

pad.
0.0

When you select a slice position while scrolling through the

anatomical series that matches an image in the parameter
image series, the image will be displayed, and the program cal-
culates the associated alpha image. L.4
If the anatomical series contains images without a clearly

defined slice plane, these images will be appended to the end
of the series.
If several anatomical series are loaded, it is possible to scroll
through image-by-image from one series to another. L.4
When you select a slice position while scrolling through the

parameter image series that matches an image in the anatom-
ical series, the image will be displayed, and the program calcu-
lates the associated alpha image. L.4
Otherwise, a message will appear informing you that it is not

possible to calculate an alpha image from the source images.
In this case, the alpha image segment remains black. L.4
0.0

Scrolling from series to series L.4
You can scroll series-by-series both in the anatomical segment

as well as the parameter image segment. L.4

Or L.4
Scroll using the Series- or Series+ key on the symbol key-

pad.
If at least one slice position of the anatomical series and the
parameter images series matches, the alpha image will be
automatically calculated for the first matching slice position and
displayed on the alpha image segment on the BOLD task card.
The associated anatomical images and parameter images will
be displayed as well. L.4
Otherwise, a message appears informing you that it is not pos-

sible to calculate an alpha image from either of the two source
images. Additionally, the alpha image segment remains black.L.4
0.0

Processing images L.4
The BOLD task card lets you edit images and change image
display. A number of functions is available, depending on the
type of image. L.4
Image type Editing/display change

Anatomical image Windowing images
Parameter image Deactivating interpolation
Editing a color scale
Alpha image Changing the anatomical threshold
Activating/deactivating blocking areas
Changing the alpha value
Changing the cluster size
L.4
Windowing anatomical images L.4
You can only window anatomical images. It is not possible to

window color images (parameter image and alpha image). L.4
Set the desired window values in the anatomical image.
The alpha image is recalculated and displayed. L.4
0.0

Deactivating interpolation in parameter

images L.4
The pixels of images from EPI scans are clearly visible due to
the small image matrix used. To improve image impression,
these images are interpolated by default with a bicubic algo-
rithm. L.4
This interpolation can be deactivated if necessary. L.4
Scroll to the image you require in the image segment for the
parameter images.
Deactivate the function View > Interpolation On in the main
menu.
Both the alpha image and the parameter image are displayed
without the bicubic algorithm. The pixels are clearly visible. L.4
0.0

Editing a color scale L.4
The pixels of the parameter images contain functional informa-

tion only. A value of the color scale is assigned to each pixel. L.4
You may change the color display of the parameter and alpha
images. L.4
0.0

Selecting a color scale L.4 If the parameter image has positive and negative values, you
can change the color scale in the upper and lower palette. L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Lower Palette and/or
Upper Palette selection list.
The color display of the parameter and alpha image is adjusted
to the new color scale.
L.4
Deselect the lower color If the parameter image has positive values only, the lower color
palette L.4 palette is not required for display. You can therefore deselect
this color palette. L.4
Select the none setting from the Lower Palette selection list.
The lower color scale is hidden. L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Upper Palette selec-
tion list.
to the new color scale. Only positive correlates (0 to 40.95) will
be taken into account. L.4
0.0

Deselecting the upper If the parameter image has negative values only, the upper
color palette L.4 color palette is not required for display. You can deselect this
color palette. L.4
Select the none setting from the Upper Palette selection list.
The upper color scale is hidden. L.4
Select the desired color scale from the Lower Palette selec-
tion list.
to the new color scale. Only negative values (40.95 to 0) will
be taken into account. L.4
L.4
TIP
If you want to expose alpha images and have a black-and-
white printer, select Grayscale as the color scale (black-
and-white scale). L.4
To rule out possible ambiguities in grayscale values,

window the grayscales values in the anatomical segment.L.4
0.0

Changing the color You may define the range of the color scale for displaying
range L.4 parameter images. L.4
Enter the new values in the Lower Range and/or Upper
Range spin boxes.
Or L.4
Move the lines in the scale using the mouse.

The color display of the parameter image is adjusted to the new
values. The alpha image is recalculated and displayed. L.4
0.0

Excluding a color range L.4 You are able to define an intensity threshold for the parameter
images that also suppresses noise. For this purpose, set a sym-
metrical range around zero that will be ignored in the color
assignment and displayed as a black area in the parameter
images. L.4
The selected threshold values is displayed as a black area

between the color scales on the BOLD task card. L.4
Threshold
If you are only using one color scale, you may exclude a range
either ascending (for positive correlates) or descending (for
negative correlates). L.4
The color range to be excluded is selected as follows: L.4
Enter a new value in the Lower Up Range or Upper Low

Range spin-box.
0.0

Or L.4
Use the mouse to move a line at the end of the scale.

The other threshold value will change symmetrically. L.4
The color display of the parameter image is adjusted to the new

values. The alpha image is recalculated and displayed.
Either
Or
L.4
Changing the anatomical threshold L.4
You can define the threshold value for pixel intensity in the ana-
tomical image. As a result, you are able to hide alpha image pix-
els below a certain threshold. The default threshold is 0.10. This
corresponds to 10% of the mean value of all pixels in the ana-
tomical image. L.4
Enter the desired threshold value in the Anatomical

Threshold spin-box.
The alpha image is recalculated and shown in the bottom left
image segment. L.4
The setting is retained when scrolling from image to image.
0.0

Activating/Deactivating blocking areas L.4
If you have transferred parameter images and anatomical

images of different resolution to the BOLD task card (e.g. ana-
tomical spin-echo images), the alpha image is adjusted in size
to the anatomical image. L.4
EPI images are prone to artifacts due to the acquisition method

used. Distortions and signal losses can occur in images. At
times areas may not be allocated correctly when overlaying
parameter images that are based on EPI images. L.4
Areas that contain non-defined or incorrect information are

shown in color in the alpha images. For this purpose, a field
map is superimposed on the alpha image (field map displays
the local B0 field). L.4
If the program is not able to find a valid field map, a message

appears informing you that the alpha image may be misinter-
preted. L.4
0.0

Deactivating blocking Deactivate the function View > Show Fieldmap in the main
areas L.4 menu.
A message appears informing you that the alpha image may be
misinterpreted. L.4
The message appears only once per series.

Acknowledge the warning with OK.
The message will appear as a comment text in the alpha image.
It is not possible to hide this message. The alpha image is recal-
culated and displayed without blocking areas.
L.4
Activating blocking Activate the function View > Show Fieldmap in the main
areas L.4 menu.
The comment text in the alpha image is deleted. The alpha
image is recalculated and displayed with blocking areas. L.4
0.0

Changing the alpha value L.4
The alpha value defines the degree of overlay, i.e. the weighting
used to overlay the anatomical image with the parameter
image. The higher the alpha value, the greater the number of
brightness values taken from the parameter image. At an alpha
value of zero, the alpha image will only show the anatomical
image. L.4
The default value is 1.00. L.4
Enter the desired value in the Alpha Value spin-box.

0.0

Changing the cluster size L.4
To eliminate random pixels from the alpha image, you may

change the size of the clusters that should not be displayed for
the parameter image. The default cluster size is 1 pixel. L.4
Enter the desired cluster size in the Simple Clustering spin-

box.
For example, if you select cluster size 3, all pixel clusters
smaller than 3 pixels in the parameter image will be hidden in
the alpha image. L.4
0.0

Saving images L.4
You can save new or changed images on the BOLD task card.
The following images may be stored: L.4
whenever their slice positions match, all alpha images of the

anatomical and parameter images are loaded
current parameter image with associated color palette
current alpha image as a color image
The above save options let you decide whether to append the
saved images to an existing series or to save them as a new
series.
L.4
Saving all alpha images L.4
You can have all alpha images of the loaded anatomical images
and parameter images calculated and saved with or without a
superimposed field map. L.4
Opening the save Select Patient > Save All Alpha As... from the main menu.
dialog box L.4
Or L.4
Select Save All Alpha As... from the context menu.
0.0

When you select saving, the number of alpha images is deter-

mined that have to be calculated. If the number is greater than
30, you will be asked whether you want to continue saving. If
necessary, you can cancel saving the alpha images by click-
ing the No button. Saving is continued by clicking on the Yes
button.
The Save As dialog box opens. L.4
The save dialog lets you define how the calculated alpha
images will be saved: L.4
You can save the images as a new series.

You can append the images to an existing series.
0.0

Saving images as a new Select the Save images in new series option in the Save
series L.4 As dialog box.
The automatically generated series number is displayed in the
name field. L.4
Enter a new name for the series if necessary.

Confirm your settings with OK.
For all series selected on the BOLD task card, all alpha images
are calculated and saved in which a suitable parameter image
has been found for an anatomical image. Each newly calculated
alpha images is displayed in the alpha images segment. L.4
You are able to monitor image calculation as well image storage

on the progress indicator. These activities may be stopped with
Cancel. L.4
All alpha images are saved with the color palette and settings
selected at the time. L.4
After the alpha images have been saved, the original state is
restored on the BOLD task card as it was before saving. L.4
0.0

L.4
NOTE
If an operator without access authorization to the program
or the loaded data takes over during saving the data will be
hidden on the task card. L.4
Saving is completed in the background. All data are then

unloaded from the task card and the task card is closed. L.4
L.4
Appending images to an To append the calculated alpha images to an existing series,

existing series L.4 proceed as follows: L.4
Select the Append images to series option in the Save As

dialog box.
Subsequently select the required series from the selection
list using the serial number and series description.
Calculation is performed like for saving as a new series. The
alpha images calculated are appended to the selected series. L.4
0.0

Saving single parameter images or alpha

images L.4
You can save both a selected parameter image with the associ-
ated color palette and a selected alpha image. L.4
Select the required parameter image or alpha image in the

2nd or 3rd image segment.
Select Patient > Save As... from the main menu.
The Save As dialog box is displayed. L.4
The saving dialog lets you set whether the image will be
appended to an existing series or saved as a new series. L.4
0.0

Select the required option and assign a name for a new

series, if necessary.
Page L.428, Saving all alpha images
The currently selected image (parameter image or alpha
image) is saved. L.4
0.0

Retroactively calculating parameter

images L.4
You can retroactively calculate parameter images on the BOLD

task card. L.4
The t-test images will be saved in mosaic format and automati-

cally displayed on the BOLD task card.
L.4
Preparing for postprocessing L.4

Select the anatomical series (EPI measurements).
Suitable series L.4 The series must meet the following criteria before they can be
post-processed: L.4
same study
same slice position
same table position
same number of images
0.0

L.4 Select Applications > BOLD Evaluation from the main

menu.
The BOLD task card is displayed or started. L.4
At the same time, the Evaluation Controller Dialog box is dis-

played.
L.4
(1)
(2)
(1) Selected series

(2) postprocessing protocol last used
0.0

The selected series are checked to see whether they fulfill the
above criteria.
Page L.434, Suitable series. L.4
The Evaluation Controller Dialog will indicate if they do not

meet the criteria. Unsuitable series will be highlighted in color
and have to be removed from the list. L.4
0.0

Deleting additional Go to the list and select the series to be deleted (multiple
series L.4 selections are possible).
Click the Delete Series button.
The series is deleted from the list.
L.4
Selecting another L.4
postprocessing
protocol L.4
Select the required postprocessing protocol from the selec-

tion list.
You may also edit the postprocessing protocol.
Page L.440, Editing a postprocessing protocol. L.4
0.0

Starting the postprocessing L.4
Click the Execute button.

Postprocessing starts. L.4
The first image is transferred to the BOLD task card. The Eval-
uation Controller Dialog box will be closed. The calculation
runs in background. L.4
The icon for image postprocessing jobs in the status bar shows
you the calculation in progress. L.4
After calculation has been successfully completed, the calcu-

lated parameter images are displayed as mosaic images in the
parameter image segment of the BOLD task card. L.4
Additionally, the alpha image is calculated and displayed. Cal-

culation is identified as "completed" in the Postprocessing
Queue dialog box. L.4
Unsuccessful calculations are identified as "failed" in the Post-

processing Queue dialog box. L.4
0.0

Tracking postprocessing L.4
You are able to track image calculations in the Postprocessing

Queue dialog box. L.4

The Postprocessing Queue dialog box is displayed.
L.4
L.4
You can stop the calculation of individual series if they are iden-
tified with the "active" status. L.4
Select a calculation.
Click the Delete Job button.
Calculation will be stopped and deleted from the job list. No
images will be calculated. L.4
0.0

Editing a postprocessing protocol L.4
The postprocessing protocol contains the following postpro-

cessing algorithms: L.4
Spatial filtering
3D motion correction
t-test
Spatial filtering L.4 Low-pass filtering is used to soften images. A Gaussian filter is
used. You can choose one of several filter strengths.
L.4
3D motion correction L.4 Various interpolation methods (linear, sinc, k space) and their
parameters are available. Additionally, you are able to save the
motion parameters detected (3 translations and 3 rotations).
L.4
t-test L.4 You may choose from various algorithms and their parameters
(e.g. type of paradigm). L.4
L.4
N OT E
Only experienced users should edit the postprocessing
protocol. L.4
The postprocessing protocol itself contains instructions on

how to edit. L.4
0.0

Starting the You can edit a postprocessing protocol in the Protocol Editor. L.4
protocol editor L.4
Click the Edit Protocol button in the Evaluation Controller

Dialog dialog box.
The Edit Protocol dialog box opens. L.4
0.0

Saving a change under the You can quickly save user-defined postprocessing protocols
same name L.4 (but not Siemens postprocessing protocols).
L.4
Click the Save & Close button.

The selected postprocessing protocol will be overwritten with
the new settings. L.4
The Edit Protocol dialog box is closed.
L.4
Saving changes under a You can save changed postprocessing protocols under a new
new name L.4 name. This makes it possible to change Siemens postprocess-
ing protocols. L.4
Click the Save As & Close button.

The Save As & Close dialog box opens. L.4
Enter a file name.

A new postprocessing protocol is created. The Edit Protocol
dialog box is closed. L.4
0.0

Closing BOLD L.4
Select Applications > Close BOLD from the main menu.

Or L.4
Start another application function.

The BOLD task card is closed. L.4
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Evaluating Perfusion-
L.5 Weighted Images L.5
The Perfusion evaluation function allows the display and eval-

uation of perfusion-weighted images, for example, for tumor
diagnosis.
L.5
The following parameters can be calculated on the Perf MR

task card:
L.5
time to bolus maximum (time-to-peak, TTP)

relative mean transit time (relMTT)
The use of such parameter maps has been shown to be highly

beneficial in a number of perfusion studies. Nevertheless you
should only attempt it if you have sufficient experience interpret-
ing parameter images and take account of possible limitations.
L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.51

Evaluating Perfusion-Weighted Images Postprocessing Images
The Perf MR task card L.5
Opening task card L.5 You can open the Perf MR task card from any other task card
or from the Patient Browser. L.5
Select Applications > Perfusion (MR) from a task card or

Applications > Perfusion (MR) from the Patient Browser.
The Perf MR task card opens. L.5
If images, series, or a study are selected in the Patient

Browser, they will automatically be loaded into Perf MR.
L.5
Closing the task card L.5 Select Applications > Close Perfusion (MR).
The Perf MR task card is closed. L.5
0.0

Postprocessing Images Evaluating Perfusion-Weighted Images
Layout of the task card L.5 The Perf MR task card is divided into the following areas: L.5
(1)
(2) (5)
(3)
(4)
(6)
(1) Menu bar

(2) Base image segment
(3) Viewing area
(4) Parameter map segment (TTP and relMTT)
(5) Control area
(6) Status bar
(2) and (4) are the processing area. L.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.53

Loading images L.5
You will select images and series in the Patient Browser that
you want to display or evaluate on the Perf MR task card. L.5
You can choose single images as well as a series or complete

studies. L.5
It is not possible to load images of different studies onto the Perf

MR task card. L.5
L.5
N OT E
Perfusion analysis requires that the user have full access
rights to the patient data to be evaluated. L.5

Part B, Security Package L.5
0.0

Loading images for evaluation L.5
The analysis is typically performed using time-series of T2*-

weighted or T2-weighted single-shot echo-planar images. This
base image series may contain several hundred images
acquired in quick succession to provide a dynamic display (1
scan every 1 to 2 seconds over 1 to 2 minutes).
L.5
Requirements L.5 For calculation of parameter images, suitable basic images are
grouped into a "volume block" and evaluated. These basic
images have to meet the following criteria: L.5
same series block and table position

same FOV
same slice orientation
same matrix size
the slice position should not differ by more than one vector
orthogonal to the slice plane
same number of images for a slice position
Several "volume blocks" can be loaded in the basic image

segment. However, the only the volume block evaluated is the
one that contains the current image in the base image seg-
ment.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.55


Select the series.
Select Applications > Perfusion (MR).
Or L.5
Drag and drop the required series into the processing area
of the Perf MR task card.
Or L.5
The images are transferred to the Perf MR task card and auto-
matically sorted into the segments of the processing area. L.5
Top left segment (base image segment)
anatomical images
Bottom left segment (parameter image segment)
TTP images and relMTT images
If you have already loaded these images into the viewing
area, a dialog box will let you decide whether to move these
images into the processing area.
0.0

Loading images for viewing L.5
For example, you are able to load the diffusion images of the
study in the top right segment to view and compare the anat-
omy being evaluated.
L.5

Select the series and images you want to view.
Drag and drop the required series into the top right segment
(viewing area) of the Perf MR task card.
If you have already loaded these images into the processing

area, a dialog box will let you decide whether to move these
images into the viewing area.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.57

Viewing images L.5
Series and images are always displayed as an image stack in

every segment of the Perf MR task card. You may scroll image
by image or series by series separately in each segment. L.5
Scrolling gives you a general view of the scan, allowing you to

find a suitable basic image for positioning the "Region of Inter-
est" (ROI). L.5
You may optimize image display by various methods.

L.5
Automatic sorting of images L.5
The image sort that applies in the Patient Browser does not
apply on the Perf MR task card. L.5
On the Perf MR task card, images in the basic image segment

are sorted differently than in the other three segments. L.5
0.0

Sorting in the basic In the basic image segment, images are sorted independently
image segment L.5 of series and image numbers. (The series and image number-
ing can be set by the user.) L.5
The following applies to image-by-image scrolling: L.5
The images are displayed in anatomical sequence.

Exception: If image copies are loaded, these will be dis-
played one after the other before reaching the anatomically
closest image.
The following applies to series-by-series scrolling: L.5
The images of a slice position are displayed in the order of

the scan times.
Sorting in all the other The other segments sort the images by series or image num-
segments L.5 bers. L.5
The following applies to image-by-image scrolling: L.5
Series number
Image number
Time of image generation for image copies
The following applies to series-by-series scrolling: L.5
Image number
Series number
Time of image generation for image copies
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.59

Automatic sorting when You can load additional images onto the Perf MR task card
loading more images L.5 even though it already contains images. L.5
These images are correctly sorted in the segments by image

type, subsequently series, and image number.
L.5
Scrolling images and series L.5
Scrolling between Scrolling image by image allows you to look for the slice position
images L.5 that provides the best view of the anatomy to be evaluated. L.5
Use the dog ears in the top right corner of the image seg-
ments.
Page G.32, Scrolling.
Or L.5

Or L.5
Scroll using the Image- or Image+ key on the symbol key-

pad.
0.0

Scrolling series The image with the "best" slice position is in foreground. Scroll-
by series L.5 ing series by series always shows the image with this slice posi-
tion. L.5
Scrolling series by series allows you to look for the scan time
with maximum vessel contrast in the bolus (vessel dark).
L.5

Or L.5
Scroll using the Series- or Series+ key on the symbol key-

pad.
The series are displayed in the order of the scan times. The
images shown all have the same slice position. L.5
0.0

Optimizing image display L.5
You can use the following methods: L.5
Changing brightness and contrast (windowing)

Zooming/panning
Fit to segment size
Inverting grayscale values
Showing/hiding image text
Inserting an annotation
These actions are described in detail in the Viewing chapters.
Page G.41, Processing Images
Page G.51, 2D Evaluation
L.5
0.0

Calculating parameter images L.5
The following parameter images may be calculated offline via

post-processing protocols: L.5
TTP image
relMTT image
Select a post-processing protocol. L.5
You determine the arterial input function (AIF) and set the time
ranges for evaluation. L.5
You start the post-processing protocol. L.5
You can assign suitable color coding to the calculated parame-

ter images and optimize the window values. L.5
Experienced users can edit the post-processing protocols.
L.5
Selecting a post-processing protocol L.5
The last post-processing protocol to have been used is shown

in a selection list in the lower part of the control area. L.5
Select the required post-processing protocol from the selec-

tion list.
0.0

Calculating mean AIF L.5
L.5
Arterial Input The AIF is calculated from the time curve of the CA concentra-
Function (AIF) L.5 tion. The measurement method used is the same as for the CA
concentration in tissue. The AIF is measured simultaneously
with the tissue concentration. It is calculated either in the same
slice as the CA concentration in the tissue or in a certain slice
of the block if two or more slices are used. This slice should con-
tain sufficiently large vessels to prevent partial volume effects.L.5
Calculation of the relMTT involves deconvolution with the signal
time curve selected for the AIF. Reduced SNR of the basic
images will adversely affect the process maps and the AIF.
L.5
L.5
R E C O M M E N DAT I O N
Please do not use the relMTT images for diagnosis, basic
images are too low and/or head movements of the patient
are clearly visible. L.5
0.0

You determine the mean AIF curve from the individual AIF
curves within an ROI (region of interest). L.5
Look for a suitable basic image for positioning the AIF-ROI in

the top left segment.
Page L.510, Scrolling images and series
Click the Define AIF button in the control area.

Or L.5
Select Tools > AIF.
An AIF-ROI is drawn in the basic image. The AIF curves are

shown for all pixels within the AIF-ROI above the top right seg-
ment (viewing area).
L.5
0.0

The AIF curves represent the change over time in the signal
Intensity
intensity for each pixel in the AIF ROI. All AIF curves have the
same scaling and are therefore comparable.
L.5
Time
The position and number of AIF curves shown matches the
position and number of pixels in the AIF ROI. L.5
The footer of the Step 1: Select AIF subtask card shows the
number of images used for determining the AIF. L.5
0.0

Positioning an AIF ROI L.5 To calculate the mean AIF, select pixels exhibiting a signal over
time curve that is typical of healthy arteries. L.5
L.5
N OT E
Only personnel trained in perfusion diagnostics should
position the AIF-ROI and select suitable AIF curves to
calculate the mean AIF.
L.5
The AIF ROI should be located close to the profusion

anomaly. L.5
Position the AIF ROI with great care! L.5
over healthy arteries, such as the A. cerebri media, but also

over smaller arteries that are not explicitly recognizable as
vessels in the basic image. L.5
Left-click the AIF ROI and drag it to its new position in the
basic image.
The associated AIF curves are displayed in the viewing area
when you release the mouse button. L.5
0.0

Selecting AIF curves L.5 Select suitable AIF curves for determining the mean AIF. L.5
AIF curves with a very low signal minimum may have a distorted
shape if the SNR of the associated pixel in the basic image is
too low. Do not use such AIF curves for evaluation.
L.5
Select the AIF curves in Step 1: Select AIF subtask card

(press the Ctrl or Shift key to select multiple items).
The selected AIF curves are displayed with a white background.L.5
The mean AIF curve in the control area is refreshed. It indicates
the arithmetic mean of the selected AIF curves.
L.5
The selection of AIF curves is retained until you move the AIF
ROI to another point in the basic image or until you select an
image outside the time series displayed.
0.0

Setting the time range L.5
It is mandatory to set the time range for perfusion analysis. L.5
Move Step 2: Set time ranges in foreground.
The mean AIF is enlarged. The Global Bolus Plot (GBP) is also
displayed. L.5
You define the time range to be used for perfusion analysis. The
image range corresponds to the basic images to be used. L.5
0.0

Left-click on the right line and drag it to the end of the first
pass.
Left-click on the center line and drag it to the end of the base
line.
Left-click on the left line and drag it to the beginning of the
base line.
Observe the GBP curve. The bolus arrives in the tissue later
than in the vessel. Do not define the end of the first pass to
far left. The bolus in the tissue could be cut off.
Select the Confirm Time Ranges check box to confirm the

time range.
The Run protocol button in the lower control area is activated.

You are now ready to start the post-processing protocol. L.5
0.0

Starting calculation L.5
You have selected a post-processing protocol, calculated the

mean AIF, and set the time range. You are now ready to start
the calculation.
L.5
Click the Run protocol button in the lower control area.

Or L.5
Select Protocol > Execute.
The post-processing protocol starts. The calculation runs in

background. The image post-processing job icon appears on
the status bar. The message "Calculation in progress - please
wait" is also shown. L.5
Upon completion of the calculation, the parameter images cal-

culated are displayed in lower left segment. L.5
Images already loaded in the lower left segment are retained

and can be viewed via scrolling. L.5
The top left segment shows the mean AIF with the time range
set in the basic image in addition to the AIF-ROI (reference
image). L.5
0.0

(1) (2)
(1) Reference image

(2) relMTT image
0.0

Tracking post-processing L.5 You are able to track image calculations in the Postprocessing
Queue dialog box.
L.5

The Postprocessing Queue dialog box is displayed.
L.5
L.5
You can stop the calculation of individual series if they are iden-
tified with the "active" status. L.5
Select a job.
Click the Delete Job button.
Calculation will be stopped and deleted from the job list. No
images will be calculated. L.5
0.0

Changing the color display L.5
The color display of parameter images may be defined via the

color palette. The color settings apply to all images loaded in
the parameter image segments.
L.5
Select the required color scheme from the selection list.
The color palette shows the selected color scheme. The color
display in the two lower parameter map segments is updated to
the color palette selected. L.5
0.0

Windowing color Window the images in the parameter map segments using
parameter images L.5 the center mouse button.
The minimum and maximum values in the color palette are
adjusted to the current window values. L.5
L.5
TIP
If optimal windowing is a problem in color parameter
images: L.5
Display the parameter images first in black-and-white.

Window the black-and-white parameter images.
Subsequently display the parameter images in color
again.
0.0

Storing and filming results L.5
The calculated parameter images are automatically stored in

the database without a color palette. L.5
You can recognize the automatically stored parameter image

series in the Patient Browser by the following designation:
[seriesnumber] ep2d_perf_parameterimagetype. L.5
The image type of the parameter images is shown in the image

text to the left in the lower margin.
Page P.21, Text Annotations in Medical Images L.5
0.0

Storing selected images L.5 You can store the reference image and select additional
parameter images. L.5
Select the images explicitly.

Select Patient > Save As....
The Save As dialog box is displayed. L.5
The selected images are stored with the color palette in a new
series or appended to an existing series.
Page G.72, Saving images L.5
Enter a unique name for the new series.

L.5
N OT E
lost. L.5

0.0

Parameter image series in

the Patient Browser L.5
(1) Parameter images obtained "offline"; explicitly stored with

the color palette
(2) Parameter images obtained "offline"; automatically stored
without the color palette
(3) Parameter images obtained "inline"
(4) Original series; input for post-processing
L.5
0.0

Filming results L.5 You may copy images to the film sheet, define film layouts, start
filming, and organize film jobs on the Perf MR task card.
Part O, Filming L.5
Select the images you would like to transfer to the film sheet.
0.0

Editing a post-processing protocol L.5
A post-processing protocol contains a certain sequence of

post-processing steps. You can activate, deactivate, and config-
ure the post-processing steps. L.5
L.5
N OT E
Only experienced users should edit the
post-processing protocol. L.5
Select the required post-processing protocol from the selec-

tion list.
Select Protocol > Edit.
0.0

The Edit Protocol dialog box opens. L.5
The protocol displayed itself contains instructions on how to

edit. L.5
0.0

Saving changes under User-defined post-processing protocols can be changed and

the same name L.5 stored. L.5

The selected post-processing protocol will be overwritten with
the new settings. L.5
The Edit Protocol dialog box is closed.

L.5
Saving changes under a You can save changed Siemens post-processing protocols
new name L.5 under a different name. It is not possible to overwrite Siemens
post-processing protocols.
L.5
Click the Save As & Close button.

The Save As & Close dialog box opens. L.5
Enter a file name.

A new post-processing protocol is created. The Edit Protocol
dialog box is closed. L.5
0.0

CHAPTER Soft Tissue
L.6 Evaluation MR L.6
The Soft Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box provides the fol-
lowing options: L.6
You can calculate new result images by combining loaded

images. This allows you to generate parameter images or
combined images.
You can edit the protocol parameters to suit your needs and
save them in the protocols used to calculate the parameter
images and combined images.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.61

Soft Tissue Evaluation MR Postprocessing Images
Introduction L.6
The result images are calculated in the Soft Tissue Evaluation

(MR) dialog box, selectable via the Patient Browser. L.6
The Soft Tissue Evaluation can only process images from

the same series block acquired at the same table position. It
is only possible to load images of one study, i.e. of one
patient.
Soft Tissue Evaluation calculates the following results
images: L.6
Parameter images
Combined images
Definitions L.6 The image types used in Soft Tissue Evaluation are defined
as follows: L.6
Anatomical image
An anatomical image is obtained during a patient exam. This
is then used as the basis for calculating parameter images.
Parameter image
Instead of anatomical information, a parameter image con-
tains functional information. Using algorithms, it is generally
calculated based on anatomical images from several scans.
Combined image
This image is calculated by combining several parameter
images.
0.0

Postprocessing Images Soft Tissue Evaluation MR
Access authorization to Detailed information about access authorization is available in

the evaluation dialog box L.6 Part Safety Standards.
Page B.15, Access Rights L.6
If you do not have access to the data of a specific patient, that

patient's data will not be shown in the Patient Browser when you
are logged onto the system. L.6
The following rules apply to activities in this dialog box: L.6
The evaluation dialog box closes automatically on system

log-off. Any unsaved changes in a postprocessing protocol
are lost.
A query appears when changing the operator to one that
does not have access authorization to patient data, prompt-
ing you to terminate the operator change. If you do not want
to cancel the operator change, the activity will be terminated
and all data unloaded. The dialog box closes.
The dialog box remains open and changes to an operator
with access authorization to the data.
L.6
NOTE
lost. L.6

0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.63

Calling up the evaluation dialog

box L.6
Call the Soft Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box from the
Patient Browser. L.6
The dialog box will open only if at least one series containing
anatomical images and/or parameter images is selected in
Procedure for selecting the evaluation dialog box: L.6
Opening the Patient Browser

Select exam, series, or images
Opening the dialog box
Opening the Patient Browser L.6

The Patient Browser dialog box appears. L.6
0.0

Selecting data L.6
The required exam, series, or images are selected just as they

are when loading them onto a task card. L.6
In this case, however, the calculations performed in the Soft

Tissue Evaluation (MR) dialog box depend on the data
selected. L.6
Anatomical images in examinations or series are required to

calculate parameter images.
Parameter images in exams or series are used to calculate
combined images.
Select the exam, series, or individual images desired.

Opening the dialog box L.6
If the selected examinations or series contain anatomical

images or parameter images, you may select the evaluation
dialog box. L.6
Select Applications > Soft Tissue (MR) from the Patient

Browser.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.65

Only one image type If the examinations or series contain only images of one type
available L.6 (anatomical images or parameter images), the dialog box
opens automatically. This also activates the subtask card rele-
vant for evaluation of the loaded image type. L.6
L.6
Image type Associated evaluation/subtask card

Anatomical images Calculate Parameter Map
Parameter images Calculate Combined Image
L.6
NOTE
Only series containing magnitude images are taken into
account in anatomical series. Other series (e.g. other
modalities or compressed images) are automatically
filtered out when the dialog box starts. L.6
They are not displayed in the list of anatomical series of the

Calculate Parameter Map subtask card. A message
indicates this when the dialog box starts. L.6
0.0

Both image types If the series contains both anatomical images and parameter
available L.6 images, the Select Data Type dialog box appears with a warn-
ing that mixed data selection has been detected: L.6
Because only one image type can be calculated in the evalua-

tion dialog box, you have to decide which evaluation you want
to give priority to. Load the images with the Anatomical or
Parameter Map buttons.
L.6
Loads anatomical images into the evaluation dialog box;

the Calculate Parameter Map subtask card is active.
Loads parameter images into the evaluation dialog box;
the Calculate Combined Images subtask card is active.
Click the button to start the required evaluation.

The evaluation dialog box opens; the subtask card for the
selected evaluation is automatically active. L.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.67

Layout of subtask cards L.6
The layout of the two subtask cards is identical in the Soft Tis-
sue Evaluation (MR) dialog box. Example: Calculate Parame-
ter Map subtask card. L.6
0.0

(1) List of all anatomical series or parameter series available

in the currently loaded study.
For each series the list shows the Series No., the Series
Type, the Series Description, and the Number of images
contained and used.
(2) Display of the parameters of the selected postprocessing
protocol.
(3) Toolbar for selecting, storing, or deleting postprocessing
protocols.
(4) Status line for warnings about images not loaded.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T L.69

Calculating parameter images L.6
Parameter images are obtained by selecting and running a

parameter image postprocessing protocol if the images meet
the following conditions: L.6
Requirements L.6 all slice positions and orientations are identical

all fields of view (FOV) are identical
all slice thicknesses are identical
all numbers of columns and lines (matrix) are identical
Additionally, several series of anatomical images have to be
loaded on the Calculate Parameter Map subtask card. L.6
If all requirements are met, the parameter images are calcu-

lated.
L.6
Procedure for calculating

parameter images: L.6
Selecting/Unselecting anatomical image series

Selecting postprocessing protocol
Editing protocol (optional)
Saving protocol data (optional)
Deleting customer protocols (optional)
Performing a calculation
0.0

Selecting anatomical series L.6
When you open the evaluation dialog box, the preselected

series are shown on the Calculate Parameter Map subtask
card. L.6
The program compares the series previously selected in the

Patient Browser with other series of the same examination for
an identical number of "usable images". L.6
All series that meet this condition are shown marked together
with the original series in the list of series in the dialog box. L.6
Series that do not meet this condition cannot be selected later
either.
The first image of the first selected series is the comparison
reference for usable images.
0.0

You can use the preselected images for calculation. You also
have the following options: L.6
You can deselect single series out of a preselection if you do

not want to include them in the calculation.
You can select completely new series. These have to have
the same number of usable images.
Unselecting series from Hold the Ctrl key down and unselect series you do not
the preselection L.6 require by clicking them.
The series no longer needed are shown marked in the list of
series.
L.6
Making a new selection L.6 Click the required series in the list.
The previous preselection is now canceled. All series in the list
of anatomical series having the same number of "usable image"
as the selected series are automatically preselected. L.6
You can also deselect unneeded series from this new prese-
lection.
0.0

Selecting postprocessing protocol L.6
You require a postprocessing protocol for image calculation.

You can select the postprocessing protocol from the selection
list on the toolbar. L.6
Both Siemens and user-defined customer protocols can be

organized in the selection.
L.6

tion list.
The protocol parameters are displayed on the subtask card. If
necessary, you may change them prior to the calculation.
L.6
0.0

Editing protocol parameters (optional) L.6
For calculating parameter images the system organizes both

Siemens and user-defined customer protocols. L.6
You can set the following evaluations in the protocols: L.6
Wash - In Signal change in the starting range of the

dynamic measurement series
Wash - Out Signal change in the end range of the dynamic
measurement series
TTP Time to peak time elapsed before reaching the sig-
nal peak
PEI Positive enhancement integral area under a signal
intensity - time curve
MIP time Maximum intensity projection highest pixel
value in the measurement interval
The listed evaluations can be activated in check boxes. These
evaluations are either activated or not depending on the proto-
col selected.
L.6
Select or deselect the evaluation.
If an evaluation is deactivated in the protocol, the correspond-

ing parameter image is not calculated in the evaluation.
0.0

Wash - In L.6 In the Wash - In setting area, you may change the parameters
for signal change in the starting range of the dynamic measure-
ment series. L.6
L.6
Parameters Explanation
Color table Color table assigned to the wash-in image obtained.
First measurement First measurement that is used for calculation of the
wash-in image.
Last measurement Last measurement that is used for calculation of the
wash-in image.
Highest value Defines whether the highest value of the input
images should be considered in the "First
measurement - last measurement" interval for
calculating the parameter image instead of the value
from "Last measurement".
Set the Color table parameter in the combo box.

Set the First measurement and Last measurement in the
appropriate spin box.
Select or deselect the Highest value option.
0.0

Wash - Out L.6 In the Wash - Out setting area, you can change the parameters
for signal change in the end range of the dynamic measurement
series. L.6
L.6
Parameters Explanation
Color table Color table assigned to the wash-out image obtained.
First measurement First measurement that is used for calculation of the
wash-out image.
Last measurement Last measurement that is used for calculation of the
wash-out image.
Set the Color table parameter in the combo box.

Set the First measurement and Last measurement in the
appropriate spin box.
TTP, PEI, MIP - time L.6 In the TTP, PEI, and MIP - time setting areas, you can assign
color tables to the appropriate TTP, PEI, or MIP images. L.6
Set a color table in the above setting areas using the corre-
sponding combo box.
0.0

Saving protocol data (optional) L.6
When saving protocols you have to differentiate between: L.6
Siemens protocols:
Changes may only be saved as new customer protocols.
Customer protocols:
Changes may be saved in the current protocol. The previous
settings are overwritten. You may also save the changes in
new customer protocols.
L.6
NOTE
If you do not save the data before a change in operators, a
message indicating that data have not been saved will
appear if the new user does not have the required read
rights. You may then decide whether to continue or cancel
the action. L.6
Caution: If you go through with the action, the evaluation

dialog box will close and all settings made so far will be
lost. L.6
0.0

L.6
NOTE
lost. L.6

L.6
Saving a new customer You can save a postprocessing protocol that you have changed
protocol L.6 as a new customer protocol at any time. If you change a write-
protected Siemens protocol, you must create a new customer
protocol. In this case, the Save button is deactivated.
L.6
Click the Save As button.

The Save Protocol as dialog box opens. L.6
0.0

For changed Siemens protocols, a new name is automatically

suggested for the protocol in the text input box. You can either
accept this name or overwrite it with a new name.
Enter a name in the text input field or overwrite the sug-

gested name.

The postprocessing protocol is stored as a new customer pro-
tocol. L.6
0.0

Overwriting an existing If you do not want to create a new protocol having changed a
customer protocol L.6 customer protocol, you can save the changes in an existing pro-
tocol.
L.6

A message box opens. L.6

The existing customer protocol is overwritten.
L.6
L.6
NOTE
If you do not want to start calculation with the set protocol
parameters, you can close the dialog box with Cancel. L.6
0.0

Deleting customer protocol (optional) L.6
Unlike Siemens protocols, customer protocols may be deleted

at any time. L.6
Only a customer protocol that is currently active may be

deleted.
Mark the protocol to be deleted in the selection list.
A query is displayed: L.6

The protocol is deleted from the list of parameter image proto-
cols. L.6
0.0

Performing a calculation L.6
After you have made all the necessary settings on the Calcu-
late Parameter Map subtask card, you may start with the cal-
culation. L.6
Click the Evaluate button.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the changes made in
the dialog box and close the dialog box.
Calculation starts and the evaluation dialog box closes. The sta-
tus of postprocessing is indicated on the status bar. L.6
If protocol data are still unsaved when you start calculation, a

query asks if you want to save these data before the dialog
box closes.
L.6
TIP
While image calculation is in progress, you may define and
start further calculations. This requires selection in the
Patient Browser again. The individual calculations are
processed sequentially. L.6
0.0

After completing the calculations, the result images are auto-

matically stored in the database and loaded onto the Viewing
task card. L.6
0.0

Calculating combined images L.6
Combined images are obtained from combining previously

selected parameter images. L.6
Requirements L.6 The loaded images must meet the following conditions: L.6
all slice positions and orientations are identical

all fields of view (FOV) are identical
all slice thicknesses are identical
all numbers of columns and lines (matrix) are identical
L.6
NOTE
Combinations are based on Wash - In, Wash - Out, TTP,
MIP, and PEI parameter images only. L.6
If all requirements are met, the combined images are calcu-

lated.
L.6
Procedure for calculating combined images: L.6
Selecting parameter image series

Selecting a combined protocol
Editing protocol (optional)
Saving a protocol (optional)
Deleting a customer protocols (optional)
Performing a calculation
0.0

Selecting a parameter image series L.6
When you open the evaluation dialog box, the preselected

series are shown on the Calculate Combined Images subtask
card. L.6
The program compares the series previously selected in the

Patient Browser with other series of the same examination for
an identical number of "usable images". L.6
All series that meet this condition are shown marked together
with the original series in the list of series in the dialog box. L.6
Series that do not meet this condition cannot be selected later
either.
The first selected series is the comparison reference for
usable series.
0.0

You can, of course, use the preselected images for calculation.

You also have the following options: L.6
You can deselect single series out of a preselection if you do

not want to include them in the calculation.
You can select completely new series, which must then also
have the same number of usable images.
It is not possible to select several series of the same type.

Selecting a further series of the same type cancels the previ-
ous selection.
Unselecting series from Hold the Ctrl key down and unselect series you do not
the preselection L.6 require by clicking them.
The series no longer needed are shown marked in the list of
series.
L.6
Making a new selection L.6 Click the required series in the list.
The previous preselection is canceled. All series in the list of
anatomical series having the same number of "usable image"
as the selected series are automatically preselected. L.6
You can also deselect unneeded series from this new prese-
lection.
0.0

Selecting a combined protocol L.6
You require a combined protocol for image calculation. You can

select the protocol from the selection list on the toolbar. Both
Siemens and user-defined customer protocols can be orga-
nized in the selection.
L.6

tion list.
The protocol parameters are then displayed on the subtask
card. If necessary, you may change them prior to the calcula-
tion. L.6
0.0

Editing protocol parameters (optional) L.6
For calculations of combined images the system organizes both

Siemens and user-defined customer protocols. You may modify
the parameters of these protocols at any time.
L.6
The parameters of a combined protocol are divided into: L.6
Parameters for weighting the original images on generating

combined images.
Color palette that is appended to the combined image gen-
erated.
Correcting weighting You may change the following main parameters after selecting
parameters L.6 the corresponding series in the preselection: L.6
Add Wash-In
Add Wash-Out
Add TTP
Add PEI
Add MIP
0.0

L.6
NOTE
You may only change main parameters whose image series
is marked in the list of series. L.6
Example: If no TTP image series is selected in the list, the

main parameter Add TTP is not shown on the parameter
card and settings are not possible. L.6
For each main parameter you can set the following single
parameters separately: L.6
L.6
Parameters Effect on combined images

Weight Weighting factor for a parameter image on combining the
images
Center Contrast value with which the parameter image is to be
windowed for calculation.
Window Brightness value with which the parameter image is to be
windowed for calculation.
Enter the new values in the spin box.

Or L.6
Click with the left mouse button on the arrows of the spin box
to increase the value (up-arrow) or decrease the value
(down-arrow).
0.0

Assigning a color table L.6 The lower part of the setting area contains the Combine color
table selection list. This selection list is used to select the color
table to assign to the combined image. L.6
Select the color table.
0.0

Saving protocol data (optional) L.6
When saving protocols you have to differentiate between: L.6
Siemens protocols:
Changes may only be saved as new customer protocols.
Customer protocols:
Changes may be saved in the current protocol. The previous
settings are overwritten. You may also save the changes in
new customer protocols.
L.6
NOTE
If you do not save the data before a change in operators, a
message indicating that data have not been saved will
appear if the new user does not have the required read
rights. You may then decide whether to continue or cancel
the action. L.6
Caution: If you go through with the action, the evaluation

dialog box will close and all settings made so far will be
lost. L.6
0.0

L.6
NOTE
lost. L.6

Save the changed protocol as a new customer protocol.

Page L.618, Saving a new customer protocol
Or L.6
Overwrite the changed customer protocol.

Page L.620, Overwriting an existing customer protocol
0.0

Deleting customer protocol (optional) L.6
Unlike Siemens protocols, customer protocols may be deleted

at any time. L.6
Only a customer protocol that is currently active may be

deleted.
Mark the protocol to be deleted in the selection list.
A query is displayed: L.6

The protocol is deleted from the list of combined image proto-
cols. L.6
0.0

Performing a calculation L.6
After you have made all the necessary settings on the Calcu-
late Combined Image subtask card, you may start with the cal-
culation. L.6
Click the Evaluate button.
With the Cancel button, you can reject the changes made in
the dialog box and close the dialog box.
Calculation starts and the evaluation dialog box closes. The sta-
tus of postprocessing is indicated on the status bar. L.6
If protocol data are still unsaved when you start calculation, a

query asks if you want to save these data before the dialog
box closes.
L.6
TIP
While image calculation is in progress, you may define and
start further calculations. This requires selection in the
Patient Browser again. The individual calculations are
processed sequentially. L.6
After calculations have been completed, the result images

(combined images) are automatically stored in the database
and loaded onto the Viewing task card. L.6
0.0

PART
M Vessel View M.0
M.1 Introduction
Calling Vessel View ....................................................... M.13
Vessel View task card .................................................... M.14
Volume image segment ............................................. M.15
Slice image segments ............................................... M.17
Control area ............................................................... M.18
Evaluation area .......................................................... M.19
Context menu .......................................................... M.110
Closing Vessel View .................................................... M.112
M.2 Loading and Displaying Images

Loading images .............................................................. M.22
Volume display............................................................... M.24
Modifying the VRT display ......................................... M.24
Switching to MIP display ............................................ M.28
Rotating a volume image ........................................... M.29
Orienting the volume image ..................................... M.210
Slice images ................................................................. M.211
Switching display modes ......................................... M.211
Enlarging the window .............................................. M.212
Scrolling through the slice image stacks ................. M.213
Rotating the slice image plane ................................ M.215
Orienting the slice image planes ............................. M.217
Zooming and panning images ................................. M.218
Windowing images .................................................. M.219
Configuring an image view ........................................... M.221
Saving and restoring the session ................................. M.225
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M1
Contents Vessel View
M.3 Defining Vessels

Removing unwanted parts of the image ........................ M.32
Defining a VOI ........................................................... M.32
Using clip planes ....................................................... M.35
Creating paths ............................................................... M.39
Semiautomatic path creation................................... M.310
Fully automatic path planning ................................. M.314
Manual path creation............................................... M.315
Managing paths....................................................... M.316
Processing paths ......................................................... M.317
Changing the course of a path ................................ M.318
Connecting paths .................................................... M.321
Defining vessels .......................................................... M.322
M.4 Evaluating Vessels

Setting vessel orthogonal orientation ............................ M.42
Generating axial vessel section images ........................ M.43
Measurements ............................................................... M.46
Measuring distances ................................................. M.47
Measuring curves ...................................................... M.49
Measuring areas ..................................................... M.411
Measuring angles .................................................... M.414
Object list ................................................................ M.416
Vessel navigator .......................................................... M.419
Rotating the longitudinal section about the
axis of the vessel..................................................... M.423
Evaluating a longitudinal section ............................. M.425
Stenosis evaluation with flags ................................. M.428
0.0
M2 Operator Manual
Vessel View Contents
M.5 Saving and Documenting Evaluations

Saving images ............................................................... M.52
Saving with defaults ................................................... M.52
Defining settings for image storage ........................... M.53
Generating a report ........................................................ M.55
Filming images ............................................................... M.56
Transferring images to the Viewing task card ................ M.57
Sending image data for graphic slice
positioning (GSP) ........................................................... M.58
Saving a sequence of actions to a movie file ................. M.59
Saving rotation of the view as a movie ........................ M.511
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M3
Contents Vessel View
0.0
M4 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
M.1 Introduction M.1
After generating a volume data during the examination, you

would like to review the blood vessels by using the Vessel View
program. M.1
How to proceed M.1 After you have started Vessel View and loaded the images,
select a suitable VRT parameter set to display the 3D volume
image. Subsequently obtain a general view of the data set using
either the freely rotatable volume image or three orthogonal
slice images views. M.1
You can remove unwanted parts of the image from the volume
display by cutting out a Volume of Interest (VOI) and using clip
planes. M.1
You can determine the centerline (path) of blood vessels to

accurately define them. Subsequently, you may use the Vessel
Navigator to prepare and analyze a longitudinal section through
the blood vessel. Evaluation of the stenoses is supported by the
vessel navigator through the use of special flags. You can gen-
erate a series of axial vessel section images to document a ves-
sel or vessel segment and store them in the database. M.1
For distance measurements (e.g. diameter), area measure-

ments (e.g. cross-sections) or angle measurements, the Vessel
View functions provide you with the most suitable images. M.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.11

Introduction Vessel View
You can store the relevant images from your evaluation in the
database and send them to the Filming, Viewing, or Exam
task cards for further processing (e.g., graphic slice position-
ing). You can store automatic rotation of the volume or vessel
navigator view as a sequence of images. Vessel View also lets
you record sequences of actions in the volume segment. For
image documentation, the report generator prepares a table
of all objects created. M.1
0.0
M.12 Operator Manual

Vessel View Introduction
Calling Vessel View M.1
The Vessel View task card is started from one of the task cards
or from the Patient Browser. M.1
Select Applications > Vessel View from the main menu.

The Vessel View task card will be displayed. At this point, no
images are loaded. M.1
Sometimes it may not be possible to use Vessel View while

another task card is open. You are asked if you want to close
the other application.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.13

Vessel View task card M.1
The Vessel View task card is divided into the following areas:M.1
(1) Menu bar

(2) Slice image segments
(3) Volume image segment
(4) Control area
(5) Evaluation area
(6) Status bar
0.0

Volume image segment M.1
The volume image segment shows the data in VRT or MIP dis-
play. M.1
VRT display M.1 The volume rendering technique (VRT) shows the volume data
set as a 3D data set with transparency and color. M.1
MIP display M.1 This display is suitable for showing VOIs. M.1
You may swap the volume image segment with one of the
slice image segments, as required.
Page M.212, Enlarging the window
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.15

Orientation aids M.1 In the volume image segment, you are able to move through the
volume as well as orient it, as desired. To this end, use one of
the following orientation aids: M.1
(1) Bounding box: Edges of the loaded volume data set. You
can use the Configure menu to show and hide the delimi-
tation (bounding box).
(2) Focus pointer: Marks the object or position last selected
in the volume. You can use the Configure menu to set the
size of the marking arrow.
(3) Orientation cube: Shows the current orientation of the vol-
ume data set and allows for rotation about the standard
axes.
0.0

Slice image segments M.1
The three slice image segments to the left in the task card show
slice images in the MPR display. As an alternative, you may
switch the display to MIP, MIP thin slice, and MPR thick slice. In
the standard orientation, you will find the sagittal view in the
upper segment, the coronal view in the center segment, and the
axial view in the lower segment. M.1
As an alternative, you may want to temporarily display a mag-

nified slice image segment instead of the volume image seg-
ment.
Page M.212, Enlarging the window
Orientation aids M.1
The slice image segments provide the following tools for posi-
tioning and orientation in the volume: M.1
(1) Reference lines: Show the position and the viewing direc-
tion of the other two slice images.
(2) Orientation cube: Shows the current orientation of the
slice in the volume. (It is not possible to change the orien-
tation with this orientation cube).
You can hide the reference lines by clicking a button if it is in

the way during evaluation.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.17

Control area M.1
The control area to the right in the task card contains the input
fields for selecting functions: M.1
(1) General functions: Rotating images, undoing all steps per-

formed, vessel orthogonal orientation, showing/hiding the
reference lines, zooming/panning images, segment
enlargement.
(2) Subtask card stack for setting the display mode (Type), ori-
entation (Orientation), and view (Image) in the image seg-
ments.
(3) Subtask card stack for defining a volume of interest (VOI),
for using clip planes (Clip), and for replaying image
sequences and recording sequences of actions (Movie).
(4) Documentation functions for storing evaluation results, for
generating axial vessel section images and reports, and for
transferring images to the Filming (virtual film sheet) and
Viewing task cards.
0.0

Evaluation area M.1
The lower part of the task card contains two subtask cards with
tools for defining and evaluating vessels. M.1
(1) Measurements subtask card

with functions for defining vessels and measurement func-
tions for the image segments.
(2) Vessel Navigator subtask card
with display and measurement functions for special views
of a vessel.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.19

Context menu M.1
The pop-up menu of Vessel View for the active segment is dis-
played when you right-click into an image segment. Depending
on the situation, the following menu items may be available:
M.1
Edit Path
Switches path edit mode on or off if a vessel path is selected.
Page M.318, Changing the course of a path
Zoom/Pan
Switches zoom/pan mode on or off.
Page M.218, Zooming and panning images
MIP Mode
Switches the MIP mode on/off for the volume image.
Page M.28, Switching to MIP display
Translucent
Starts transparent display of the vessels defined in the vol-
ume image.
Page M.317, Processing paths
0.0

Accept Contour
Accepts a contour suggestion in the lower slice image seg-
ment for area measurement.
This menu item is inactive if the slice image does not contain
a contour.
Page M.427, Measuring vessel cross-section
Edit Contour
Switches contour edit mode in the lower slice images seg-
ment on or off.
This menu item is inactive if the slice image does not contain
a contour.
Page M.413, Post-processing a contour
Freehand ROI
Switches draw mode in the lower slice images segment on
or off.
Page M.412, Draw contour
Send to GSP
Sends the image coordinates for graphic slice positioning.
Page M.58, Sending image data for graphic slice posi-
tioning (GSP)
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.111

Closing Vessel View M.1
After completion of your evaluations in Vessel View, exit from

the application as follows: M.1
Select Applications > Close Vessel View.

A system message asks whether you still have data to save.
This message always appears, whether you have saved or
not. M.1
Click No if you do not want to save data.

The Vessel View task card closes and another task card moves
in foreground.
M.1
What to look out for when If you do not close individual applications but log off the system
logging off M.1 (e.g. with the Options > End Session menu item), please note
the following. M.1
M.1
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently.
data you want to keep before you log off. M.1
0.0

CHAPTER Loading and Displaying
M.2 Images M.2
First load the required volume data set from the Patient
Browser to Vessel View. M.2
You can optimize the views by setting individual windowing val-

ues. For 3D display with Volume Rendering Technique (VRT),
Vessel View provides a number of predefined parameter sets
for selection. M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.21

Loading and Displaying Images Vessel View
Loading images M.2
Go to the Patient Browser to select the images and series you

want to process and analyze with Vessel View. M.2
Press the Patient Browser button on the symbol keypad or

call the Patient > Patient Browser main menu.
Select the examination, series, or individual images needed
for vessel evaluation.
Chapter D.2, Searching for and Displaying Patient Data M.2
Drag and drop this selection into the Vessel View window.
Or M.2
Click the Vessel View button on the tool bar of the Patient
Browser.
Or M.2
Select Patient > Vessel View on the menu bar of the Patient
Browser.
If Vessel View is not open, the application will start automati-
cally when you load the images.
M.2
If you have completed evaluation, close the data set again

with Patient > Close.
0.0

Vessel View Loading and Displaying Images
Requirements M.2 Prior to loading images, the system checks their suitability for
3D evaluation with Vessel View. The following requirements
have to be met: M.2
Only one series at a time may be loaded.

This series must contain a minimum of three images.
All images have to be from the same patient.
All images must be parallel and acquired along one axis.
Each image have to have a different slice position.
The distance between two adjacent slices cannot exceed 5
times the average slice distance.
All images have to have been acquired within a period of 30
minutes.
The system informs you if you select unsuitable images or
series.
Page H.26, Series List M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.23

Volume display M.2
If you have loaded images onto the Vessel View task card, the
complete data set is initially shown as a 3D volume image in the
VRT display. M.2
You can modify this view as required by assigning different VRT

parameter sets, or by switching to MIP display.
M.2
Modifying the VRT display M.2
The VRT image display is a function of color, brightness, and

transparency. The VRT gallery contains various parameter sets
that affect the display of VRT images. M.2
Vessel View uses the same VRT gallery as the 3D task card.
Chapter H.7, Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)
Assigning a parameter set If the current VRT display is not suitable, select a more suitable
by hand M.2 parameter set from the VRT gallery. M.2
Select Type > VRT Gallery from the main menu.

Or M.2
Right-click the VRT button on the Type subtask card on the

control area.
The VRT Definition & Gallery dialog box opens with the Gal-
lery subtask card. M.2
0.0

Click the desired parameter set.

The VRT volume image is displayed including the respective tis-
sue class parameters.
M.2
Edit the parameter set M.2 If the existing parameter sets do not meet your requirements,
the characteristics of the VRT view can be changed individu-
ally. M.2
It is easiest to modify parameters from a similar existing set.

You can either use the modified parameters for the current ses-
sion or store them in the VRT gallery for subsequent evalua-
tions. M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.25

M.2 For a detailed description, please go to

Page H.710, Creating and editing parameter sets.
Select the parameter set in the VRT gallery that you want to
use as a starting point.
Switch to the VRT Definition subtask card on the VRT Def-
inition & Gallery dialog box.
Adjust the transparency, brightness, color, and signal inten-

sity value of each tissue class.
0.0

You may change the position and inclination of the left edge
of the marked trapezoid by moving the mouse pointer in the
VRT volume image. For this purpose hold down the center
mouse button and move it up/down and/or to the left or right.
Page M.219, Windowing images
Save your changes as a new parameter set or overwrite the

current parameter set.
To delete a parameter set from the VRT gallery, select it from
the Preset list and click the Delete Preset button.
M.2
N OT E
Do not delete or overwrite the parameter sets until they are
no longer required for other images or series. Remember
that the VRT gallery is also used for the 3D task card. M.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.27

Switching to MIP display M.2
Maximum intensity projection (MIP) is used for displaying the

course of a vessel or the inflow of contrast agent. You can
switch the volume image segment from VRT mode to MIP mode
and vice versa.
M.2
Setting MIP mode M.2 Select the volume image segment.

Select Type > MIP from the main menu or choose MIP Mode
from the pop-up menu.
Or M.2
Click the MIP button on the Type subtask card of the control
area
The current settings of the VRT view will be saved and available
when you return to the VRT mode.
M.2
Returning to VRT mode M.2 Select the volume image segment.

Select Type > VRT from the main menu or unselect MIP
Mode from the pop-up menu.
Or M.2
Click the VRT button on the Type subtask card of the control
area
You are returning to VRT display. The saved settings of the VRT
view will be restored. M.2
0.0

Rotating a volume image M.2
To set a suitable volume image for evaluation, use the mouse to

rotate the volume into position. To obtain an overview of the
entire volume, start automatic rotation.
M.2
Rotating using the Grab the volume image with the mouse and drag it to the
mouse M.2 desired location.
Automatic rotation M.2 Automatic rotation continuously rotates the volume about its
vertical axis at a set rate. M.2
Display the Movie subtask card in the control area.

Click this button to start automatic rotation.
Set the speed of rotation using the Speed slider.
Click the Stop button to stop rotation.
The view last set remains on the display. M.2
You can export the image sequence of a 360 rotation by cre-

ating a movie file.
Page M.511, Saving rotation of the view as a movie
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.29

Orienting the volume image M.2
Use the orientation cube to display the volume image in one of

the standard viewing directions. M.2
Click one of the sides of the orientation cube. This side will
be in foreground of the volume image:
L = Viewed from the left
R = Viewed from the right
A = Front view (Anterior)
P = View from the back (Posterior)
H = Caudal view (Head)
F = Cranial view (Feet)
Original display in front You can also use the orientation cube to rotate an image into
view M.2 the front view with the original size. M.2
Double-click in the orientation cube.
0.0

Slice images M.2
As a rule you can use the MPR display in the slice segments of
Vessel View. Depending on your requirements, you can switch
to another display: MPR thick slice, MIP, or MIP thin slice. M.2
You can optimize the views in the slice images segments for
your evaluation using the functions in the control area.
M.2
Switching display modes M.2
You can set the display mode segment by segment on the Type
subtask card in the control area. M.2
Select the respective slice image segment.

Select Type > MPR Thick from the main menu or click on
the button in the control area to switch to MPR Thick display.
Or M.2
Select Type > MIP from the main menu or click the button in
the control area to switch to MIP display.
Or M.2
Select Type > MIP Thin from the main menu or click the but-
ton in the control area to switch to MIP Thin display.
The slice image in the selected segment is recalculated. M.2
0.0

Slice thickness M.2 The default value of the basic settings of Vessel View is used
as the slice thickness for display types MPR thick slice and MIP
thin slice. A right mouse click on the relevant button of the Type
subtask card opens the MPR Thick or MIP Thin dialog box
where you can set another slice thickness. M.2
Detailed instructions are to be found on

Page H.530, Defining the MIP slice thickness (MIP Thin)
M.2
Enlarging the window M.2
For detailed evaluation, you can display each image segment in

full-screen mode. M.2
Select the image segment to be enlarged.

Click the Full Screen button in the control area.
Or M.2
Double-click the image segment.

If it is a small image segment, it will change places with the
large image segment in the center of the task card.
If it is an image segment in the center of the task card, it will
be shown in full-screen mode.
If the segment is already shown full-screen, it is restored to
regular size in the center image segment.
0.0

Scrolling through the slice image stacks M.2
While the three-dimensional view in the volume image segment

shows the complete data set, the two-dimensional views in the
slice image segments show an image stack. Use the dog ears
or the reference lines to scroll through the stacks. M.2
In vessel orthogonal orientation, the two upper slice images

stacks cannot be scrolled and the reference lines cannot be
moved.
Page M.42, Setting vessel orthogonal orientation
Scrolling with the Only MPR, MPR Thick, and MIP Thin image stacks allow you to
dog-ears M.2 scroll with the dog ears. M.2
Click on the dog ear in the image stack to scroll back image
by image.
Or M.2
Click the empty corner in the image stack to scroll forward

image by image.
Or M.2
Press the Next image or Previous image key on your key-

board.
0.0

Scrolling with the Move the mouse pointer to the intended reference line near
reference lines M.2 the image center and then move the line to the intended cut
position with the mouse.
The views associated with the reference lines will be updated.
M.2
Moving a plane of A point in the volume may be simultaneously displayed in all

intersection M.2 three slice planes by moving the plane of intersection to this
position. M.2
Locate and click the position in the slice image.

Or M.2
Locate and click the position in the volume image.

The slice image view will be updated. The landmark is at the
selected position in the volume image. M.2
Two or three parallel slice image planes do not intersect.
0.0

Rotating the slice image plane M.2
You can rotate or tilt the image planes away from the standard
orientations. M.2
Rotating and tilting slice image planes is not possible in ves-

sel orthogonal orientation.
Page M.42, Setting vessel orthogonal orientation
Checking the preferred You can ensure that the preferred orientation does not change
orientation M.2 when you tilt and rotate the slice image planes.
Page H.325, Controlling image orientation M.2
Click the Preferred orientation button on the Orientation

subtask card to activate the orientation check.
You can deactivate orientation control at any time.
Tilting M.2 You can rotate the image plane of a slice image segment by
rotating its reference line(s). M.2
Move the mouse pointer to the required reference lines at the

edge of the image and rotate the reference line about the dis-
played pivotal point using the mouse.
The view in the associated image segment will be updated. M.2
0.0

Rotating M.2 The Rotate Images mode allows you to freely rotate a slice
image plane. M.2
Click on the Rotate Images button in the control area.

The mode is activated. M.2
If the Zoom/Pan mode is active, switch it off again.

To change the display, move the mouse pointer into the
respective slice image segment.
Click the image center, hold down the left mouse key and
drag the mouse in the required direction.
To deactivate Rotate Images mode, unclick the Rotate
Images button.
0.0

Orienting the slice image planes M.2
You may return all three slice image planes to standard orienta-
tions (sagittal, coronal, axial) via the mouse; you may also
return the images to standard orientation one at a time.
M.2
Returning to standard Select Orientation > Default Orientation from the main
orientation M.2 menu.
Or M.2
Click the Basic Setting button on the Orientation subtask

Orienting the image Select the desired slice image segment.

segment singly
Select the required view orientation under Orientation in the
M.2
main menu.
Or M.2
Select the Orientation subtask card in the function area and

click the respective triangle.
The slice image view is updated. M.2
0.0

Zooming and panning images M.2
For improved detail recognition, zoom images and pan the area
of interest into the center of the segment. M.2
Select Image > Zoom/Pan from the main menu or Zoom/

Pan from the pop-up menu.
Or M.2
Click the Zoom/Pan button on the Image subtask card of the

control area.
Enlarging an image M.2 Position the mouse pointer along the edge of the image.
Hold down the left mouse button and drag the mouse up or
down to zoom the image.
Panning an image M.2 Center the mouse pointer in the image.

Hold down the left mouse button and drag the image to the
required position.
You can deactivate the Zoom/Pan mode the same way you acti-
vated it. M.2
0.0

Windowing images M.2
Prior to starting the evaluation, you can change the window val-
ues of MPR and MIP images to an optimal display of the struc-
tures. M.2
Single windowing M.2 If you want to change the window values of a single segment,
just switch to the Single Windowing mode: M.2
Click the Single windowing button on the Image subtask

You can deactivate the mode at any time. M.2
M.2
Automatic windowing M.2 You can call up window values stored for images with a button.M.2
Click the Window 1 or Window 2 button on the Image sub-
task card of the control area.
The image is displayed with the selected window setting.
M.2
You can automatically optimize the window values of images

without stored window settings. M.2
Click the Auto Windowing button on the Image subtask

0.0

Windowing using the Click the image with the center mouse button and hold the
mouse M.2 button down.
The mouse pointer disappears. M.2
Drag the mouse pointer up or down to change the brightness

(window position).
Or M.2
Drag the mouse pointer to the right or left to change the con-
trast (window width).
When you move the mouse pointer up/down or right/left in the
VRT volume image while holding the center mouse button
down, you are changing the individual parameters of the VRT
settings.
Page M.25, Edit the parameter set
Windowing using the You can also use the keys on your keyboard to fine-tune the
keyboard M.2 window values. M.2
To change window values, select the respective image seg-

ment.
Press the Pos+ or Pos- keys to increase or reduce the
brightness.
Press the Width+ or Width- keys to increase or reduce con-

trast.
0.0

Configuring an image view M.2
The Configure menu allows you to enter basic settings for

working with Vessel View. You can switch the modes on (iden-
tified by a checkmark) or off. M.2
You can change settings as required. M.2
M.2
Activate/deactivate image You can switch image elements on or off using the Configure
elements M.2 menu: M.2
Magnifier window
If Show Magnifier Window mode is activated, the surround-
ings of the mouse pointer are shown greatly enlarged in an
additional window located bottom right.
Measurements
If Show All Measurements mode is deactivated, the mea-
surements made are no longer visible in the image seg-
ments. The measurements are automatically shown again
when you switch to a measuring mode.
Paths
If the Show All Paths mode is activated, the existing paths
are displayed in all image segments.
0.0

Volume limits
If the Show Bounding Box mode is activated, the red
boundary lines are visible in the VRT volume image.
Slice images in the VRT volume images
If Show MPR in VRT mode is activated, the three MPR slice
images will be displayed at the appropriate positions in the
VRT volume image.
Flat ribbon MPR
If Show Ribbons in VRT is activated, a flat ribbon MPR is
displayed for each path in the VRT volume image.
Image text
If Show Image Text mode is activated, any existing image
texts will be displayed in the image segments.
Profile curve
If Show Profile Curve mode is activated, the profile curve is
shown in the axial slice image when working with the vessel
navigator. For a detailed description of the profile curve, see
Page M.422, Profile curve
To show or hide one of the image elements, select or unse-
lect the appropriate option from the Configure menu.
0.0

Zooms the marking arrow M.2 The focus pointer can be shown in four different sizes or hid-
den. M.2
Select the Focus Pointer Size option from the Configure

menu and the required setting from the submenu.
Expanding an object list M.2 For area measurement, the object list displays not only the
cross-sectional area but also the minimum and maximum diam-
eter, the equivalent diameter, and the average intensity. Addi-
tionally, the degree of stenosis is shown together with the rele-
vant diameter ratio. M.2
Select the Measurement List option in the Configure menu

and select the required measured value from the submenu.
0.0

Defining a stenosis You can display two different types of stenosis curves in the
curve M.2 Vessel Navigator or hide the curve altogether. M.2
Select the Vessel Navigator Curves option from the Con-

figure menu and the required setting from the submenu.
Or M.2
Unselect the two submenu items to hide the stenosis curve.

For a detailed description of stenosis curves, see
Page M.421, Stenosis curve. M.2
0.0

Saving and restoring the session M.2
You can save the current status of the image series you have
been working on (including the objects and VRT settings made
so far) in the database and restore it later.
M.2
Saving the session M.2 Select File > Save Session from the main menu.
The Save Session dialog box will open. M.2
0.0

M.2 Enter a name for the session in the lower input field.
Or M.2
Select the session in the upper field to overwrite a stored

session.
Click Save.
The session data for the image series will be stored in the data-
base.
M.2
Restoring a session M.2 Select File > Load Session from the main menu.
The dialog box for loading a session opens. M.2
Select the session you want to restore from the list and click
Load.
Vessel View returns to the status when the session was
saved. M.2
Session data are restored only by loading the corresponding

image series.
Deleting a session M.2 You can delete sessions you no longer need from the series in
the Patient Browser. M.2
0.0

CHAPTER
M.3 Defining Vessels M.3
After loading an image series, the complete data set will be dis-
played. You have a choice of evaluating certain areas of interest
only. M.3
Vessel View provides tools that allow you to either remove

unwanted parts or enhance vessels. The resulting image infor-
mation provides for efficient and reliable diagnosis. M.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.31

Defining Vessels Vessel View
Removing unwanted parts of the

image M.3
Cut out VOIs (volumes of interest) to remove unwanted image

parts from the volume display. Use clip planes to hide parts that
are covering relevant structures. M.3
After determining the paths for the vessels of interest, the visi-
ble volume can be additionally fine-tuned. M.3
The volume image changes after hiding parts of the image.

Slice images are not affected, however.
You will find further information about 3D-VOI mode on
Page H.56, Extracting a volume of interest (VOI).
Defining a VOI M.3
You can remove three-dimensional areas from the loaded vol-

ume using the VOI cutting tools on the VOI subtask card. The
shape of the volume is freely-selectable. M.3
The MIP mode is especially suitable for defining VOIs.
0.0

Vessel View Defining Vessels
Calling a VOI subtask Display the VOI subtask card in the control area.
card M.3
(1) Drawing tool for freehand VOIs

(2) Tool for tube-shaped VOI
(3) Fader for setting the transparency of the volume hidden by
semiautomatic or fully automatic segmentation
(4) Cutting tools for VOIs
M.3
VOI contour M.3 You begin by drawing the shape of the VOI in the volume image.
The base shape will be punched through the volume in the
viewing direction when you complete the VOI. M.3
It is not possible to draw a VOI contour in the slice image seg-

ments.
Orient the volume image for easiest tracing.
Click the Draw contour button to activate the Draw mode.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.33

Hold down the mouse button and draw the boundaries of the
desired volume.
Double-click to complete the contour.
If you want to erase the contour, just deactivate the draw

mode. The contour will then be deleted.
Punching out a VOI M.3
Click the Include button to remove all voxels outside the con-
tour.
Or M.3
Click the Exclude button to remove all voxels inside the con-
tour.
The VOI is cut out and draw mode deactivated. M.3
To define more complex VOIs, draw several contours one

after the other, hiding the unwanted areas each time.
0.0

Using clip planes M.3
Six clip planes can be used to delimit the sides of the displayed
volume. You can use the clip planes by moving them between
the areas for evaluation and the hidden areas. Volume outside
the clip planes will be hidden. The interior, however, will be vis-
ible. M.3
Clip planes are only active in the volume image.
Subtask card Clipping M.3 Select the Clip subtask card in the control area.
(1) Activating/deactivating clip planes

(2) Resetting clip plants to their home position
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.35

Showing clip planes M.3
You display clip planes to be able to move them in the volume

image segment. M.3
Click the clip planes that you want to use on the Clip subtask
card.
The selected clip planes are highlighted in the volume image
and on the Clip subtask card. M.3
0.0

Panning M.3 To hide unwanted outer parts of the volume, just move the clip
plane into the volume. M.3
Click in the required clip plane in the volume image and hold
the mouse button down.
To move the selected plane upward or farther away, drag the
mouse pointer up.
Or M.3

mouse pointer down.
You can move all visible clip planes as a group by moving the
mouse while holding the Ctrl key down.
Tilting M.3 You can use the four edge points to tilt a clip plane about its cen-
ter. M.3
Drag the edge point selected to tilt the plane in the desired
direction.
You can tilt all visible clip planes as a group by moving the
mouse while holding the Ctrl key down.
Rotating M.3 You can freely rotate a clip plane. M.3
Hold the Shift key down.

Grab the clip plane with the mouse and drag it to the desired
location.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.37

Hiding clip planes M.3
Click the highlighted clip planes on the Clip subtask card to

hide them again.
M.3
N OT E
All clip planes are still active. The effect of clip planes on the
volume image depends on their position only, not on
whether they are visible or not. M.3
M.3
Resetting M.3
Click the button on the Clip subtask card.

All clip planes return to their original position. You will see the
complete volume again in the volume image segment. M.3
0.0

Creating paths M.3
Lines, known as paths, trace the blood vessels for display and
evaluation. M.3
Paths can be created in different ways: M.3
Semiautomatic path creation

Mark the start, end, and branch points of the vessel to be
defined and start the semiautomatic segmentation algo-
rithm.
Fully automatic path creation (MR images only)
You can start the automatic segmentation algorithm. The
vessel tree will be calculated (if necessary, limited to a VOI).
Manual path creation
Manually position all path points for a blood vessel and let the
system calculate the smoothed connection line.
The paths created are shown in the object list on the Measure-
ments subtask card. M.3
You can use the Fader to partially or completely re-show a

volume that is hidden by semiautomatic or fully automatic
segmentation.
Page M.312, Fader
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.39

Semiautomatic path creation M.3
Semiautomatic path creation is quite often the method of choice

for creating paths. The process can be limited to certain blood
vessels. All seed points can be set automatically, with the
exception of the end and branch points. M.3
Display the Measurements subtask card in the evaluation

area.
Click the Semi Auto Segmentation button.
Or, if another tool is in the first position: M.3
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Semi
Auto Segmentation item from the menu that opens.
The dialog box for controlling semiautomatic path creation
opens. M.3
0.0

Landmarks Setting M.3 The algorithm now expects input of at least two landmarks. M.3
Position a landmark at the beginning and end of the path via

the left mouse button.
Position the individual landmarks in the most suitable image
segment. In many cases this will be the volume image rather
than one of the slice images. When you are not setting points,
you are free to scroll through the views, rotate, or enlarge
them. You can move or delete landmarks that are already set.
You can delete the landmark last set with the Undo button in
the dialog box.
If you want to identify branched d vessels, position a land-
mark where the branches join.
Segmentation M.3
To start segmentation, click the Start button.

The segmentation algorithm automatically finds the vessel lim-
its and determines the vessel centerline (path). M.3
When you segment branched vessels, a separate path will be

created for each branch.
0.0

After segmentation, the transparency is set to 85% (translucent

mode) in the VRT settings to make the paths more visible in the
volume image. For how to activate and deactivate this mode
manually, see
Page M.317, Translucent.
M.3
Fader M.3 Parts of the volume hidden by segmentation have not actually
been deleted from the data set. They have been hidden by the
fader. You can alter the fader setting to a transparency value
between 0 (= hidden completely) and 100 (= shown com-
pletely). If you set an intermediate value, the hidden areas will
appear faded. M.3
Display the VOI subtask card in the control area.

Drag the Fader to the right to increase visibility of the hidden
areas.
0.0

Repeated segmentation M.3 You can use semiautomatic path creation on a previously seg-
mented data set. In this case, the volume defined by the latest
segmentation is added to the volume parts already defined. All
volume parts hidden by vessel segmentation are temporarily re-
shown while you set the landmarks. M.3
0.0

Fully automatic path planning M.3
Fully automatic path creation defines the entire vessel tree. The
automatic segmentation algorithm can only be applied to MR
Data Sets. M.3
Limit the volume to be evaluated to one VOI to increase the

efficiency of fully automatic segmentation.
area.
Click the Automatic Segmentation button.
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Auto-
matic Segmentation item from the menu that then opens.
Segmentation will run completely automatically. Paths are cre-
ated along the vessel tree and tissue that is not part of the ves-
sel tree is hidden. M.3
After segmentation, the transparency is set to 85% (translucent

mode) in the VRT settings to make the paths more visible in the
volume image.
For how to activate and deactivate this mode manually, see
Page M.317, Translucent. M.3
0.0

Manual path creation M.3
For manual path creation, you need to set all path points by
hand. How well the path represents the actual course of the
blood vessel depends on the number as well as accuracy used
in positioning the path points. M.3
Manual path creation is not connected with a segmentation

algorithm. No volume parts are hidden.
area.
Click the Manual Path Creation button.
Click on the arrow of the first button and select the Manual
Path Creation item from the menu that then opens.
The dialog box for controlling manual path creation opens. M.3
0.0

Setting path points M.3 You can use all image segments for setting path points. M.3
Set your path points at the beginning of the vessel and wher-
ever the vessel changes course.
The path line will be drawn in immediately. Based on the char-
acteristics of the tissue, the program automatically calculates
the depth of a point set in the volume. M.3
To complete path creation, click on the Apply button.

Create a tube-shaped VOI to expose the vessel with the path.
Page M.322, Defining vessels
Switch to translucent mode to make the path more visible in
the volume image.
Page M.317, Translucent
Managing paths M.3
The object list on the Measurements subtask card shows each

path with a unique name. You can change the name of a path,
store notes on each path, or delete paths you no longer need.
For a detailed description of object management, see
Page M.416, Object list. M.3
0.0

Processing paths M.3
The Measurements subtask card contains tools that allow you

to edit paths at any time. You can change the course of a path
as well as connect paths.
M.3
Translucent M.3
If you have created paths with a segmentation algorithm, the

transparency is automatically set to 85% in the VRT settings
(translucent mode). That way, the paths in the volume image
are easily visible because they are no longer concealed by the
surrounding contrast agent. If this mode is no longer active or if
you want to edit a manually created path, activate it manually:M.3
Select the Translucent option from the pop-up menu.
The vessel is now translucent and you can see the paths
inside. M.3
Changing the current VRT parameter set in the VRT Defini-

tion & Gallery dialog box automatically and immediately
deactivates the translucent mode immediately.
0.0

Changing the course of a path M.3
Activate the editing mode when you want the course of a path.
You can change the position of the path by moving, inserting, or
removing path points.
M.3
Activating the editing Select the path to be edited in the volume image or object
mode M.3 list.
The selected path will be shown in color in the volume image.M.3
In the slice images that are not perpendicular to the path, visi-
bility of the path line depends on the position of the image
plane. The closer the path line is to the image plane, the
brighter it appears. M.3
Click the Edit path button on the Measurements subtask

card.
Or M.3
Select the Edit path option from the pop-up menu for the
selected path.
The path points are now visible. M.3
Volume image view Slice image view Slice image view

not vessel orthogonal vessel orthogonal
0.0

Slice image vessel If the lower slice images is perpendicular to the path (vessel
orthogonal M.3 orthogonal orientation), the path line with path points is not vis-
ible; only the point of intersection of the path with the image
plane is shown as a small cross. You can move this intersection
point with the mouse. The path is updated automatically: M.3
the path lines goes through the new intersection point,

the position of the neighboring path points is adjusted,
a new path point is inserted if necessary.
Direct movement, insertion, or deletion of path points is not pos-
sible in the vessel orthogonal slice image. M.3
For a description of the vessel orthogonal orientation, see also

Page M.42, Setting vessel orthogonal orientation.
M.3
Inserting path points M.3 Adding path points increases the number of changes in direc-
tion. This allows you to adapt the path even more precisely to
the vessel curvature. M.3
Set a new path point at the appropriate position in the image

with a mouse click.
The path line opens between the two closest points and is
recalculated accordingly. M.3
0.0

Moving path points M.3 Click directly on the path point in the volume image and drag
it to the desired position using the mouse.
Or M.3
Move the mouse pointer up to the required point in a slice

image.
The mouse pointer changes shape. M.3
Hold the mouse button down and drag the point to the new
position.
The path line will be adjusted automatically.
M.3
Deleting path points M.3 You can delete either incorrectly set or superfluous path
points. M.3
Click the path point you want to delete in the volume image
or one of the slice images.
The selected path point changes color in all image segments.M.3
Press the Del key on the keyboard.
The path point will be deleted and the path line is recalculated.M.3
The path changes when you delete a point where the direc-
tion changes significantly. The path will change to a straight
line between adjacent points.
0.0

Connecting paths M.3
You first have to link the paths before you can evaluate a vessel
comprising different paths. The result is a new continuous path
that does not affect the original paths. M.3
Using the new path, you can apply single path functions to the
entire course of the vessel. M.3
The paths to be linked do not have to be contiguous.

Selecting paths M.3 Click the first path to be linked in the object list.
Hold the Ctrl key on your keyboard pressed and click the
second path to be linked.
You can never link more than two paths together with one link-
ing operation.
Connecting M.3
Click the Connect button.

A new, continuous path will be created from the two marked
paths and entered in the object list. The name for the new path
is automatically created from the two original paths. M.3
If the two linked paths are not contiguous, the gap will be
bridged by the shortest connecting line.
0.0

Defining vessels M.3
After you have defined the course of the vessel with paths, you
can either define or remove vessels as a tubular VOI. For that
purpose, define the tube radius required for calculating the tube
with the path as the center line. M.3
The vessel tube will be displayed with a semi-transparent sur-

face in the volume image. The tube is not visible in the slice
image segments. M.3
Example M.3
M.3
0.0

Displaying a vessel tube M.3 Mark the path in the object list or volume image.
Click the Tube Mode button on the VOI subtask card of the
control are to display the vessel tube.
As soon as you switch to another subtask card or the path is no
longer selected, the button is automatically deactivated and the
vessel tube is hidden again.
M.3
Changing the tube radius M.3 You can select any radius between 0 and 50 mm for the vessel
tube. M.3
Set the required radius using the arrow buttons.

Or M.3
Overwrite the current radius in the input box and confirm it

with the Enter key.
Exposing / removing M.3
Click the Include button to expose the vessel tube.

Or M.3
Click the Exclude button to remove the vessel tube.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
M.4 Evaluating Vessels M.4
Vessels are evaluated on the basis of meaningful images. You

can use the vessel orthogonal orientation of the slice images
segments for navigation in the vessel and document vessel with
a series of axial sectional images.
M.4
Measurements M.4 Various measurement tools are provided for quantitative image
evaluations. M.4
The following measurements are possible: M.4
Distances from the image structures in the plane and in

space
Lengths of vessels (curve lengths)
Cross-sections of vessels
Angles
You may perform measurements in all image segments or in the
Vessel Navigator.
M.4
Annotations M.4 You can mark interesting or conspicuous areas of the image
with an annotation text. The annotations are managed in the
object list together with the paths and measurements.
M.4
Vessel navigator M.4 The Vessel Navigator displays and evaluates longitudinal sec-
tions of blood vessels. The vessel navigator supports evaluation
of stenosis using special flags. M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.41

Evaluating Vessels Vessel View
Setting vessel orthogonal

orientation M.4
To evaluate a vessel, you can automatically orient the slice

image planes on the vessel path by setting vessel orthogonal
orientation. In this orientation, the slice image plane is perpen-
dicular to the vessel path and shows the vessel cross-section.
The path is shown by a cross in this case. The center and upper
image planes are perpendicular to the lower image and to each
other. M.4
If you scroll the lower slice image stack with the dog-ear in this
orientation, you will move backward or forward along the blood
vessel. M.4
In vessel orthogonal orientation, the two upper slice images

stacks cannot be scrolled and the reference lines cannot be
moved.
Select the path of the vessel from the object list or the volume
image.
Click the button in the Vessel Orthogonal in the control
area.
If you have created a new path, the slice image segments are
automatically set in the orthogonal vessel orientation.
To deactivate vessel orthogonal orientation, click the Vessel

Orthogonal button.
The slice image planes are no longer automatically oriented on
the vessel path and can be freely moved again. M.4
0.0

Vessel View Evaluating Vessels
Generating axial vessel section

images M.4
You can document a defined vessel with a series of axial vessel

section images in MPR format. The first image is placed per-
pendicular to the vessel axis at a freely selectable path point. All
other images are generated at defined intervals along the ves-
sel axis. The images are saved in a new series.
M.4
Select the path of the vessel from the object list or the volume
image.
Click the Axial Cuts button in the lower section of the control
area.
The Axial Cuts dialog box is opened with default settings. A
symbolic preview of the section image series is shown in the
volume image: Small borders along the vessel path identify the
positions of each section images. M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.43

(1) Starting: Path position from which the section images will
be generated.
(2) End: Path position up to which the section images will be
generated.
(3) Interval between images: Fixed interval between adja-
cent section images.
0.0

Changing settings M.4 If the defaults for the starting position, end position, and image
interval are not suitable for your diagnostic problem, change the
settings in the Axial Cuts dialog box before generating the sec-
tional images series. The starting and end position are defined
in millimeters from the beginning of the path. M.4
Drag the left slider handle to the required start position.
Drag the right slider handle to the required end position.

If you want to change the starting and end position by the
same amount, move the slider using the middle handle.
Type the interval between images.
The graphic display of the section image planes in the volume
image is updated. The number of images automatically results
from the distance between the starting and end position and the
image interval. M.4
Check the section image positions on the symbolic preview

in the volume image and correct the settings, if necessary.
Creating axial cuts M.4
Click Start.
The axial MPR section images are calculated and stored in the
database as a series. The dialog box closes and the symbolic
preview disappears from the volume image. M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.45

Measurements M.4
You can use the measurement tools on the Measurements

subtask card in the slice images segments and in the volume
segment. However, for measurements on vessels that are
already defined, the special views and functions of the vessel
navigator are often more suitable.
M.4
Selecting the Display the Measurements subtask card in the evaluation

measurements subtask area.
card M.4
(1) Tools for creating paths

(2) Tools for editing paths
(3) Object list
(4) Measurement tools
(5) Annotation text in the volume image
0.0

Measuring distances M.4
As a first step, set the start and end points of the distance to be
measured in a slice image or in the volume image. M.4
The vessel navigator is especially suitable for measuring ves-

sel diameters.
Page M.425, Measuring vessel diameter
Click the Straight Distance Measurement button on the

Measurements subtask card.
Distance measurement mode is activated. M.4
After you have successfully completed a distance measure-

ment, the mode will be deactivated automatically. As an alter-
native, you can manually deactivate the mode by clicking the
button again or by selecting another tool.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.47

Entering measurement Set a suitable view in a three slice image segment or in the
points M.4 volume segment.
Click on the starting point and then on the end point of the
distance to be measured.
Or M.4
Drag out the line to be measured in the slice image holding

the mouse button down.
The distance and value measured are shown in the volume
image and, if necessary, in the slice image. M.4
M.4
Post-processing a distance If necessary, you can post-process a distance measurement. M.4

measurement
Select the measurement from the object list.
M.4
The image views switch to the position of the measurement. M.4
Move the measurement points to be corrected to the

required position with the mouse.
The measurement is updated. M.4
0.0

Measuring curves M.4
Curve measurements are used to determine the length of a

path segment taking its curvature into account. M.4
The total length of a path and therefore the associated vessel

is given in the object list.
Page M.416, Object list
You will usually use the vessel navigator for curve measure-
ment because it allows especially easy setting of measurement
points.
Page M.426, Measuring the length of a vessel segment M.4
However, you can also make curve measurements in the vol-
ume image.
M.4
Activating curve
measurement M.4
Click the Curved Distance Measurement button on the

Measurements subtask card.
The curve measurement mode is now active.
M.4
Setting measurement Click the starting point of the curve measurement in the vol-
points M.4 ume image.
Click the end point of the curve measurement.
The shortest distance between the two points is calculated. The
curve measurement is put in the object list and shown in the vol-
ume image. Measurement mode remains active for a follow-on
curve measurement. M.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.49

Follow-on curve You can continue the curve measurement from the measure-
measurement M.4 ment point last entered: M.4
Click the end point for the next measurement.

The new curve measurement is put in the object list and shown
in the volume image.
M.4
Ending curve
measurement M.4
Unclick the Curved Distance Measurement button.
Post-processing a curve If necessary, you can post-process a curve measurement. M.4
measurement
M.4

0.0

Measuring areas M.4
You can evaluate diagnostically relevant areas using a contour

in the axial slice image. M.4
Use the Accept Contour function in the vessel navigator to

measure vessel cross-sections. For area measurements, apply
the vessel contour at a path point.
Page M.427, Measuring vessel cross-section M.4
Alternately, you can make an area measurement without using

a path. Manually draw a contour in the axial slice image.
M.4
Measurement values The following measurement values are calculated and dis-
played in the image together with the contour: M.4
Area content,
Minimum diameter,
Maximum diameter,
Average intensity.
The cross-sectional area is always displayed as a measured
value in the object list. The minimum and maximum diameter,
the equivalent diameter, and the average intensity can be
shown and hidden in the object list via the Configure menu. M.4
The equivalent diameter is the diameter of a circle of the
same area content as the vessel cross-section.
0.0

Draw contour M.4 Set a view suitable for the intended area measurement in the
axial slice image segment.
Click the Freehand ROI button on the Vessel Navigator
subtask card.
Or M.4
Select the Freehand ROI option from the pop-up menu.

Draw mode is activated. M.4
Draw the contour in the slice image using the mouse.

Double-click to complete the contour.
The contour is evaluated and the area measurement is entered
in the object list. Draw mode is deactivated automatically. M.4
0.0

Post-processing a contourM.4 The Contour mode allows you to edit an existing contour. The
associated measurement values are recalculated automati-
cally. M.4
Click the Change Contour button.

Or M.4
Select the Edit Contour item from the pop-up menu.

Counter edit mode is now active. M.4
Click on the slice image next to the contour (inside or out-

side), drag the tool to the contour with the mouse button
pressed, moving the line into position.
Or M.4
Click the contour point to be changed and move it into posi-

tion with the mouse button pressed.
Click the Accept Contour button to finish editing.
The measured values are updated and editing mode is deacti-
vated. M.4
If you deactivated the contour edit mode manually, editing is

canceled and the changes are not accepted.
0.0

Measuring angles M.4
Set three measurement points in the image segments for angle

measurement: the apex and one point for each leg of the angle.
M.4
Click the Create an Angle button on the Measurements

subtask card.
The angle measurement mode is now active. M.4
After you have successfully completed an angle measure-

ment, the mode will be deactivated automatically. As an alter-
native, you can manually deactivate the mode by clicking the
button again or by selecting another tool.
Setting measurement You can set the measurement points in different image seg-
points M.4 ments. First set a suitable image view. M.4
Click the end point for the first side.

Click the apex.
Click the end point for the second side.
The angle is calculated and the angle measurement is put in the
object list. The legs and the angle measurements are displayed
in the VRT volume image. M.4
0.0

Post-processing angle If necessary, you can post-process an angle measurement. M.4
measurement
M.4

0.0

Object list M.4
The paths, measurements, and annotation texts created during

a session are entered in the object list on the Measurements
subtask card. The list shows the objects with their name, object
symbol, measured value, and possibly a comment. M.4
You can change the column width of the measurement list

using the mouse.
Object hierarchy M.4 Indented list items are not independent objects but flags or
measurements that are linked to the higher-level path. The
measured values refer to a certain point on the associated ves-
sel. M.4
0.0

Object types M.4 Newly created objects are put in the object list with a object-
type-identifying symbol and name. M.4
M.4
Symbol + autom. generated name Object type Meas. value(s)

PathXY Path Path length in mm
Normal A, Flag Vessel cross-sectional area in mm,
Minimum Min. / max. vessel diameter in mm,
Normal B Diameter of the equivalent circular area in mm
RatioXY Degree of stenosis Meas. value ratio(s) of the minimum flag to the
normal flag acc. to NASCET criteria
DistanceXY Distance Distance in mm
measurement
CurvedXY Curve measurement Curve length in mm
AreaXY Area measurement Area in mm,
Min. / max. area diameter in mm,
Diameter of the equivalent circular area in mm,
Mean intensity in HU, if applicable
AngleXY Angle measurement Angle size in
AnnotationXY Annotation text
In the Configure menu, you can set which measured values

of an area measurement or flag are shown in the object list.
Page M.223, Expanding an object list
Displaying an object M.4 If you select a measurement from the object list, the image
views automatically switch to the position of this object (only the
volume view switches in curve measurement). The object is
highlighted in the view. M.4
0.0

Renaming an object M.4 Click the object you want to rename in the object list.
Click the object name.
The object name is now shown in color and you can change it.M.4
Enter the new object name via the keyboard and press the
Enter key.
The names of measured values, e.g. MeanInt of an area mea-
surement, cannot be changed.
Notes M.4 To store notes about an object, use the Note column in the
object list. M.4
Click the object you want to comment on in the object list.

Click on the note text.
The text is now shown in color and you can change it. M.4
Enter the new text via the keyboard and press the Enter key.
Notes cannot be entered for individual measured values.
Deleting an object M.4 Go to the object list to delete obsolete objects to keep the list
uncluttered. M.4
Click the object to be deleted from the object list.

The object is deleted from the data set and the object list with
all the elements linked to it if you confirm the safety query. Ses-
sions and reports already stored are not affected by deletion. M.4
0.0

Vessel navigator M.4
The vessel navigator calculates a longitudinal section through a

vessel along the path and displays the associated MPR section
image or MIP projection image. M.4
MPR view M.4 The longitudinal section is calculated with a special procedure.
Both, the curvature of the vessel as well as the rotation of the
vessel about its own axis are traced. The results is a so-called
flat ribbon MPR.
M.4
MIP view M.4 Instead of the flat ribbon MPR, you can also display an MIP
image of the vessel. This MIP image is acquired perpendicular
to the flat ribbon to provide a view that takes account of the cur-
vature and torsion of the vessel.
M.4
Calling the vessel Select the path of the vessel from the object list or the volume
navigator M.4 image.
Display the Vessel Navigator subtask card in the evaluation
area.
The flat ribbon MPR will be calculated and displayed. M.4
0.0

Functions M.4
(1) Functions for area measurement

(2) Selection key for number of flags
(3) Rotator for rotating the longitudinal section
(4) Measurement functions
(5) Stenosis curve
(6) Flat ribbon
(7) Width of the flat ribbon
You can zoom, pan, and window the view in the Vessel Navi-
gator identical to the views in the slice image segments.
Page M.218, Zooming and panning images
Page M.219, Windowing images
0.0

Stenosis curve M.4 The stenosis curve provides an overview of the shape of the
vessel, which helps you find medically relevant locations along
the vessel. Two different types of display are available. M.4
Cross-sectional area display

The stenosis curve is the cross-sectional area along the ves-
sel. For stenosis the curve is extremely low, for aneurysms it
is extremely high.
Diameter display
Three different diameter curves are displayed:
Curve of the vessel diameter maxima,
Curve of the vessel diameter minima,
Diameter curve of the circle with the same cross-sectional
area as the vessel cross-section.
The less the three curves differ at a point along the vessel,
the more the vessel cross-section resembles a circle.
How to set the required display mode: M.4
Select the Vessel Navigator Curves option from the Con-

figure menu and the required setting from the submenu.
If you deselect both submenu items, no stenosis curve is dis-

played.
0.0

Profile curve M.4 When working with the Vessel Navigator, you can display the
profile curve in the axial slice image: M.4
Select the Profile Curve option from the Configure menu.
The cut line of the flat ribbon with the image plane shows the
position of the flat ribbon in the vessel. The profile curve shows
the signal intensities along this cut line. The larger the interval
between the curve point and the line, the higher the signal
intensity.
M.4
Setting the width of You can change the width between the upper and lower edge of
the flat ribbon M.4 the flat ribbon to adjust the vessel view to your requirements. To
hide superfluous vessel surroundings, reduce the width. If less
then the full vessel width or too little of the vessel surroundings
are shown, increase the width. M.4
Overwrite the current width in the input box and confirm it

with the Enter key.
The view is updated. M.4
0.0

Setting MIP view M.4 You can switch display modes in the vessel navigator in the
same way as in one of the image segments. M.4
Select Image type > MIP Thin from the main menu or click
on the button in the control area.
The vessel is displayed in MIP thin mode with the defined slice
thickness. M.4
Right-click the button to open the MIP Thin dialog box where
you can set a different slice thickness.
Page H.530, Defining the MIP slice thickness (MIP Thin)
Rotating the longitudinal section about the

axis of the vessel M.4
For an overview of the visible vessel section, rotate the image

plane about the axis of the vessel in the Vessel Navigator. As
an alternative, you can use this feature to optimize the view for
special evaluations. The rotation can be performed manually or
automatically.
M.4
Manual rotation M.4 Using the rotator, you can rotate the image plane manually in 5
increments for MPR view and in 45 increments for MIP view.M.4
Turn the wheel up or down with the mouse until the correct
view is set.
The current angle of rotation is displayed next to the rotator. M.4
0.0

Automatic rotation M.4 You can also have the image plane rotated automatically. In
MPR mode, you will then see a sequence of longitudinal sec-
tions rotated in steps of 5. M.4
Display the Movie subtask card in the control area.

Click this button to start rotation.
The image plane is rotated continuously and the images are
displayed one after the other. M.4
Set the speed of rotation using the Speed slider.
Click the Stop button to stop rotation.

The image last visible is displayed again. M.4
You can export the image sequence of a 360 rotation by cre-

ating a movie file.
Page M.511, Saving rotation of the view as a movie
0.0

Evaluating a longitudinal section M.4
In the vessel navigator you can trace the longitudinal section

along the vessel and measure the vessel.
M.4
Tracing a longitudinal Trace the longitudinal section by moving the marking arrow. M.4
section
Drag the focus pointer in the desired direction using the
M.4
mouse or click on the desired position in the vessel navigator

view.
Or M.4
Scroll the axial slice image in the required direction.

Or M.4
Click on the required path position in the volume image.

If you have activated a measurement mode, you will not be
able to move the focus pointer.
Measuring vessel The vessel navigator allows you to measure distances perpen-
diameter M.4 dicular to the vessel axis, for example, the diameter of a vessel.M.4
Click the Straight Distance Measurement button.
Click the start point of the distance to be measured, drag the
mouse to the end point, and release the mouse button.
A perpendicular line will be drawn. The measured value is dis-
played next to the line and entered in the object list. M.4
0.0

Measuring the length of a The length of the vessel between two measurement points
vessel segment M.4 along the path is determined by curve measurement. M.4
Click the Curved Distance Measurement button.

Click the starting point in the center of the vessel and then
the end point of the measurement.
Or M.4
Drag a line from the starting point to the end point of the
measurement with the mouse.
The length of the corresponding path segment is calculated and
put in the object list as a curve measurement. Measurement
mode remains active. You can continue the curve measurement
from the measurement point last entered. M.4
Click the end point for the next measurement.

The new curve measurement is put in the object list. M.4
Unclick the Curved Distance Measurement button to end

curve measurement.
0.0

Measuring vessel cross- If you move slice image views orthogonal to the vessel, a vessel
section M.4 contour is drawn in the axial segment. You can apply this auto-
matically generated contour to area measurements in the ves-
sel navigator. M.4
Switch on orthogonal vessel orientation, if not already active.

Move the focus pointer to the point to be measured on the
vessel.
The axial slice image is updated. M.4
If the suggested contour does not meet your requirements,

draw a new contour or edit the contour.
Click the Accept Contour button.
An area measurement is created and linked to the path. The
vessel navigator view shows the area measurement as a verti-
cal line. M.4
0.0

Stenosis evaluation with flags M.4
To evaluate stenosis, measure the cross-sectional area of the

vessel within and behind the stenosis and compare the values.
The vessel navigator automatically prepares a stenosis evalua-
tion by calculating the suitable measurement points and mark-
ing them with flags. M.4
(1) Flag A before the stenosis (normal A)

(2) Minimum flag
(3) Flag B after the stenosis (normal B)
Defining the number of The vessel navigator lets you define how many flags will be set
flags M.4 on the path: M.4
no flag if you do not want to perform a stenosis evaluation for

a vessel,
two flags (minimum flag and flag A) or
three flags.
Click the arrow of the Flags button and select the required
item in the list that opens.
0.0

Moving flags M.4 For optimum flag positioning, move the flags manually. M.4
Drag the flag into position with the mouse.

You can also move flags in the volume image.
Evaluating a stenosis M.4
Switch on orthogonal vessel orientation, if not already active.

Select flag A.
The contour suggested for the cross-sectional area is shown in
the axial slice image. M.4
If the suggested contour does not meet your requirements,

draw a new contour or edit the contour.
Click the Accept Contour button.
The measured values of the flag are determined and shown in
the object list. The flag is now fixed and can no longer be
moved. M.4
Evaluate the minimum flag and, if necessary, flag B in the

same way.
The cross-sectional area of the flags is compared and the result
is shown as a degree of stenosis in the object list. M.4
0.0

M.4 If you have configured this option under Configure > Mea-
surement list, the object list also shows the ratios of min./
max. diameters and the ratio of the equivalent diameters in
the object list.
In the vessel navigator view, you can recognize the evaluated
flags by their rectangular marking. The degree of stenosis is
shown at the stenosis. M.4
M.4
Evaluating further Once all flags have been entered, the object list is shown with
stenosis M.4 the measurement results on the Measurements subtask card.
The flags are released again immediately. You can use them to
evaluate further stenosis of the vessel. M.4
Displaying stenosis M.4 If you select a degree of stenosis in the object list, the flags
return to their position at the time of measurement. That allows
you to re-display the measured values on which the degree of
stenosis is based. M.4
0.0

CHAPTER Saving and Documenting
M.5 Evaluations M.5
Vessel View allows you to store images and evaluation results

and export them for further use at any stage. M.5
To save the current state of evaluation with all image views and
objects, you can store the entire session in the database. For
details, see
Page M.225, Saving and restoring the session. M.5
You can create and store a series of parallel sectional images

of vessels for documentation purposes.
Page M.43, Generating axial vessel section images M.5
After this initial save, you determine if you want to update the
existing series with new image data or create a new series
instead. The report generator lets you save a report as a table
in the database. M.5
To film (copy) images, transfer them to the Filming task card

where you may send images to the camera or printer. M.5
You can also transfer images to the Viewing task card or to the
Exam task card for graphic slice positioning. M.5
To document a sequence of actions, record the actions in the

volume segment and store them in a movie file. You may store
the sequence of automatic rotation images in the volume or
vessel navigator view as a series in the database or as a movie
file. M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.51

Saving and Documenting Evaluations Vessel View
Saving images M.5
Images may be saved in an existing or in a new series.

M.5
Saving with defaults M.5
Use the Save button to store images and series together with
their default values. M.5
The settings made by you the last time under the Save As
dialog box are still valid.
Select the respective image segment view.
Select Patient > Save As from the main menu.
Or M.5
M.5 Click the Save button in the lower control area.
0.0

Vessel View Saving and Documenting Evaluations
Defining settings for image storage M.5
To check the storage settings before each save and make any
necessary changes, proceed as follows: M.5
Select the respective image segment view.

Select Patient > Save As... from the main menu.
Or M.5
M.5 Click the Save as button in the lower control area.

The Save As dialog box is displayed. M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.53

Saving images M.5
Use the Save all images in one series and Group all images
by type option buttons to set whether all images will be stored
in a single new series or in separate series for each display
mode. M.5
The names of new series are entered in the associated combo

boxes.
Page H.123, Defining setting when saving
M.5
Select the required save option and series name.

Confirm with OK to save the images.
Additional information M.5
Enter the name of the reporting physician or select a name

Enter a comment about the images.
0.0

Generating a report M.5
The report generator outputs all measurement data as a synop-

tic table. This provides you with an overview of all paths and
measurements generated by you.
M.5
Table overview M.5
Click the Create Report button in the control area.

The report generator creates a two-part overview: M.5
The Measurements list sorts all measurements according to

type.
The Component Description table contains a list of all
objects you have created with the stored notes.
The overview is automatically stored in the local database as a
new series. M.5
You can load the overview into the Viewing task card via the
Patient Browser or transfer them to the Filming task card for
printing.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.55

Filming images M.5
You can transfer the current slice images, the volume image, or
the view in the Vessel Navigator to the virtual film sheet or to a
printer at any time. M.5
If you want to film or print images of a measurement, select

the measurement from the object list. It will then be displayed
in all image segments.
Select the image segment view you want to transfer to the
film sheet.
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet from the main menu or
click the respective button.
Or M.5

Depending on the film layout selected, the images are trans-
ferred directly to the camera or to the printer. Or they remain on
the Filming task card for processing until you manually send
the images to the camera or printer. M.5
0.0

Transferring images to the Viewing

task card M.5
After Vessel View, you can transfer images to the Viewer for
2D-processing or evaluation. M.5
Select the image segment whose view you want to transfer

to the Viewer.
M.5 Click the Copy to Viewer button in the control area.
The images will be transferred to the Viewer for additional pro-
cessing. M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.57

Sending image data for graphic

slice positioning (GSP) M.5
Vessel View lets you transfer image data to the Exam task card
for graphic slice positioning. The transferred coordinates are
then automatically used for scanning the next slice. M.5
It is only possible to transfer coordinates of MPR images.

Example M.5 For example, to evaluate a stenosis, you can set the vessel
orthogonal MPR view at the stenosis position and transfer the
image to the GSP. On the Exam task card, you can then imme-
diately start plaque or flow measurement without having to plan,
orient, and position the slice first.
M.5
Transferring image data M.5 Select the slice image segment with the image data to be
transferred.
M.5 Select menu item Send to GSP from the pop-up menu.
The image coordinates are transmitted. M.5
0.0

Saving a sequence of actions to a

movie file M.5
You can document procedures by recording the actions per-

formed in a volume segment. This creates an avi movie file that
you can play back outside Vessel View on any multimedia soft-
ware. M.5
Set the required starting view in the volume segment.

Open the Movie subtask card in the control area.
M.5 Click the Record button.
The Save File As dialog box will open. M.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T M.59

Enter a name for the movie file.
Select the Record VRT interaction to AVI file item from the
Save as selection list.
Click Save.
The dialog box closes and recording starts. M.5
Perform the actions to be recorded in the volume segment.

M.5 You may use the Pause button to interrupt recording briefly
and then resume it.
M.5 Click the Stop button to stop recording.
0.0

Saving rotation of the view as a

movie M.5
You can store automatic rotation of the vessel navigator view

and automatic rotation of the volume as an image sequence.
You can define whether to save the images in a new series in
the database or in an avi movie file on the hard disk. M.5
An avi movie file can be replayed on other systems using any

multimedia software.
The image sequence in the vessel navigator is obtained by
rotating the image plane (flat ribbon) about the vessel axis.
Page M.423, Rotating the longitudinal section about the
axis of the vessel M.5
The image sequence in the volume segment is obtained by

rotating the volume about its vertical axis.
Page M.29, Rotating a volume image
M.5
Determining movie Select the volume segment if you want to rotate the volume.
content M.5
Or M.5
Select the vessel navigator if you want to save the vessel

view rotation.
Open the Movie subtask card in the control area.

M.5 Click the Record button.
The Save As dialog box will open. M.5
0.0

Enter a name for the image sequence.

Storing in the database M.5
Select the Save 360 rotation to database item from the

Save as selection list.
Or M.5
Saving to a movie file M.5
Select the Save 360 rotation to AVI file item from the Save
As selection list.
Select the number of images with the slider.

The maximum number of 72 images results in the smallest
viewing angle interval of 5 between two consecutive images.M.5
Click Save.
The dialog box closes and the image sequence is stored. M.5
0.0

PART
N Composing N.0
N.1 Introduction
Starting and quitting composing ..................................... N.13
N.2 Image selection and reconstruction

Selecting series for reconstruction and
starting reconstruction .................................................... N.22
Reconstruction ............................................................... N.23
Requirements, tests, and corrections ........................ N.23
The reconstruction algorithm ..................................... N.25
Important notes .......................................................... N.27
Reconstruction ......................................................... N.211
Adjusting the reconstruction manually ......................... N.212
Select the image position to be shifted .................... N.214
Setting the pixel number for the shift ....................... N.214
Shift the images in a slice relative to
each other ................................................................ N.215
Shifting relative to each other .................................. N.217
Display ..................................................................... N.218
Returning to automatic positioning .......................... N.219
N.3 Viewing images

The Composing task card .............................................. N.32
Image segments ........................................................ N.34
Displays in images ..................................................... N.36
Text information in images ........................................ N.38
Control area ............................................................. N.310
Loading and displaying images .................................... N.311
Loading images for reconstruction .......................... N.312
Composite image/volume or single
image/volume .......................................................... N.312
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N1
Contents Composing
Modifying image display ............................................... N.314

Layouts..................................................................... N.315
Switching between full image and overview............. N.317
Selecting single layout ............................................. N.319
Selecting single with original .................................... N.320
Selecting double layout ............................................ N.321
Switching between blend mode and cut mode......... N.323
Scrolling through composed volumes ...................... N.326
Scrolling through a single volume ............................ N.327
Scrolling the slice image stack ................................. N.328
Selecting an image section / navigating
in the detailed image ................................................ N.329
Switching image text on/off ...................................... N.331
Switching graphics on/off ......................................... N.332
Image display / Windowing ...................................... N.334
Additional display modes ......................................... N.335
N.4 Evaluations
Notes .............................................................................. N.42
Availability of graphics functions ................................ N.42
Format of the composite images ................................ N.42
Special evaluations ........................................................ N.43
Graphics functions .......................................................... N.44
Annotating images ..................................................... N.45
Drawing circles and lines/polygons ............................ N.49
Drawing arrows ........................................................ N.410
Additional graphics functions ................................... N.411
Evaluations for the spine and pelvis ............................. N.412
Important notes ........................................................ N.412
Determining spinal curvature
(scoliosis angle according to Cobb) ......................... N.414
0.0
N2 Operator Manual
Composing Contents
Drawing the scoliosis angle ..................................... N.415

Changing drawn angles ........................................... N.417
Determining the kyphosis angle of a vertebra ......... N.419
Drawing kyphosis angles ......................................... N.420
Changing drawn angles ........................................... N.421
Measuring deviation of the spinal column
from the vertical ....................................................... N.422
Drawing lines ........................................................... N.423
Changing the lines ................................................... N.425
Measuring the difference in height .......................... N.427
Drawing the difference in height .............................. N.428
Modifying the drawn differences in height ............... N.429
N.5 Saving and documenting images

Saving images ............................................................... N.52
Copying images to the clipboard .................................... N.55
Filming images ............................................................... N.57
Sending images ............................................................. N.59
Closing the patient ....................................................... N.511
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N3
Contents Composing
0.0
N4 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
N.1 Introduction N.1
You have obtained several overlapping volume data sets from a

tomographic examination and want to combine them into over-
view images. For this purpose, use the Composing task card.N.1
Application N.1 You could, e.g., generate overviews of the spinal column. N.1
Reconstruction N.1 Once you have started Composing, load the series with the
Patient Browser. The overview images are reconstructed
(composed). N.1
Visualization N.1 The Composing task card allows you to display the original,
detail, and reconstruction images in various layouts, compare
two reconstruction images for evaluation of dynamic processes,
and film the results in various layouts. N.1
Measurements N.1 You can then perform measurements: N.1
Basic functions: circle, distance, angle, freehand ROI (line,

polygon), arrow
Extended orthopedic functions: scoliosis angle according to
Cobb, kyphosis angle, vertical distance measurement, differ-
ence in height
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.11

Introduction Composing
WA R N I N G
The overviews obtained with the Composing task card
cannot be used for therapy planning (e.g. surgical interven-
tions) or diagnosis (e.g. segmental instabilities). N.1
Danger of incorrect diagnoses N.1
Base diagnoses on original images.
N.1
N OT E
You, the user, are responsible for correct selection of the
original images for reconstruction and, if necessary, manual
adjustment of the image edges. N.1
Reconstructed images differ from the original images with

respect to image information, especially at the image
transitions. For this reason, reconstructed images of bones
and vascular structures are not always suitable for
diagnosis. N.1
When transmitting one or several reconstructed images

through the network or on a data medium, please inform the
recipients of the above facts. N.1
0.0
N.12 Operator Manual

Composing Introduction
Starting and quitting composing N.1
N.1
Calling Composing N.1 The Composing task card is started from one of the task cards
or from the Patient Browser. N.1
You can only start up the Composing application if you have

purchased and installed the license.
In the main menu, select Applications and then the menu
item Composing.
The Composing task card opens. N.1
If this results in more than the maximum number of task cards

being opened, close one of the other task cards first.
Closing Composing N.1 If you no longer require the Composing application, close the
task card again. N.1
In the main menu, select Applications and then the menu

item Composing.
The Composing task card will be closed. Another task card is
moved into foreground. N.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.13

Introduction Composing
0.0

CHAPTER Image selection and
N.2 reconstruction N.2
Reconstruction is started by selecting series from the Patient

Browser. When you load images to the Composing task card,
they are checked by a number of criteria and then combined
into overview images. N.2
Manual correction N.2 If in exceptional cases the slice images are not correctly com-
posed, manually position the images in a slice position or the
slices relative to each other. N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.21

Image selection and reconstruction Composing
Selecting series for reconstruction

and starting reconstruction N.2
If series of images that are suitable for reconstruction are in

your local database, select the series for reconstruction using
Chapter D.3, Transferring Data to other Applications
N.2
Selecting a study N.2 Click a study containing suitable series.
Selecting a series N.2 Click a suitable series.

Hold down the Shift key to select a series of consecutive
series.
Hold down the Ctrl key to select a series of single series.
Confirming selection N.2 As soon as you have selected the series, transfer it to the Com-
posing task card. N.2
Select Applications > Composing from the menu of the

Patient Browser.
Or N.2
Drag the selection with the mouse into the image area of the
Composing task card (drag&drop).
0.0

Composing Image selection and reconstruction
Reconstruction N.2
Requirements, tests, and corrections N.2
Requirements N.2 The selected images have to meet the following prerequisites
for reconstruction with Composing. N.2
N.2
Criterion Description
Image type Only MR images acquired with syngo MR are permitted.
Panoramic table move Scanning was performed with table move.
Database storage All images (or series of images) belong to one study.
All images of a volume come from one series.
Slice thickness The slice thickness is identical for all images.
Pixel distance = FoV / matrix size The pixel distance is identical for all images.
Slice distance The images have the same slice distance within a volume.
Series block All images are part of the same series block.
Image orientation If the images are acquired in the coronal direction (main direction), only an
inclination from coronal to axial is permitted
(max. 5 for MR images, max. 45 for SC images).
Images with an inclination from coronal to sagittal with reference to the first
volume are rejected (max. tolerance 1).
If the images are acquired in the sagittal direction (main direction), only an
inclination from sagittal to axial is permitted
(max. 5 for MR images, max. 45 for SC images).
Images with an inclination from coronal to sagittal with reference to the first
volume are rejected (max. tolerance 1).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.23

Test of image The image orientation is tested in various contexts. The first test
orientation N.2 involves the identity within a volume, resulting in a volume ori-
entation. N.2
Subsequently, the volume orientations are tested against the

patient coordinate system and against each other, taking the
main orientation into account (acquisition in the coronal direc-
tion or acquisition in the sagittal direction). N.2
The test reference for image orientation is either the first image
of the volume or the first volume of all volumes.
N.2
Distortion correction N.2 Before images are composed, they may have to be geometri-
cally corrected. The images are first checked to see if they are
already corrected. N.2
If they are not, they are corrected now. In this case, a relevant
message is shown in the status bar. N.2
The corrected images are stored in a new series each time. N.2
0.0

The reconstruction algorithm N.2
When images have been selected for the reconstruction, the

software of the Composing task card searches for similar
structures in the overlapping areas of the single images.
N.2
Automatic alignment N.2 The single images are shifted until the best alignment is
achieved.
N.2
Manual alignment N.2 In the rare cases when transition areas have not been optimally
reconstructed by the computer, you can adjust them manually.
Proceed by shifting the image part below the transition edge rel-
ative to the image part above the transition edge until the best
alignment is achieved in the overlapping area. N.2
The first time you perform manual alignment, a dialog box

appears with a warning.
Original images N.2 In certain cases, for example, when diagnosing bone struc-
tures, it will be necessary to use the original image information.
For this purpose, you may use either the single images or a spe-
cial display mode, the Cut mode (Hard image transitions).
With the latter, the images are joined at the cut lines without
overlapping. This displays an overall image with the unchanged
information of the single images. N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.25

Image 1 Image 1
Image 2 Interpolated Image 2

areas
Image 3 Image 3
Blend mode Cut mode

(Soft image transitions) (Hard image transitions)
Example N.2
0.0

Hardcopy N.2 Overviews and single images may be output on a hardcopy

camera or paper printer on the Filming task card.
N.2
Important notes N.2
The reconstruction algorithms detect similar salient features in

the images to be joined and match them to one another. N.2
N.2
N OT E
Before using a composite image to support a diagnosis,
visually verify the image match using the original images
with an appropriate resolution. No matter how reliable the
match between the single images may appear, only visual
verification by the physician using the original images can
ensure diagnostic accuracy of the image positions relative
to one another. Use the View > Single with Original
function to compare the composite image with the original
images. N.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.27

Same volume position N.2 If a volume is selected that was acquired at the same position,
reconstruction will not be performed. N.2
Select only volumes with different acquisition positions for

reconstruction.
Volumes that do Selecting volumes that do not overlap will result in reconstruc-
not overlap N.2 tion "gaps". Reconstruction is performed. Missing areas are
shown in black in the composite images. N.2
Select overlapping volumes for reconstruction.

Manual alignment of the image edges is no longer possible.
Too many images N.2 If volumes are selected with too many images, reconstruction
will no longer be performed. N.2
Pay attention to the number of images during selection.
0.0

Transition does If one or more transition areas between images are not cor-
not match N.2 rectly recognized by the reconstruction algorithm, a message
appears after reconstruction. N.2
Transition areas that do not match exactly are marked with a

red triangle.
The words "Insufficient match!" are displayed at the bottom of
the image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.29

N.2 Check the marked transition areas.

N.2
N OT E
The text Insufficient match! is an image text that can be
hidden. N.2
Make sure that the image text is displayed for diag-

noses.
If you are transferring or passing on one or several com-
posite images through the network or on data medium,
inform the recipient that the image text has to be dis-
played.
User change N.2 If the new user has access rights to the images loaded in Com-
posing, Composing remains fully available. N.2
If reconstruction is in progress when the user changes, Com-

posing is blocked for the new user until reconstruction has
been completed. N.2
If the new user does not have rights for the current patient, the
images are automatically unloaded. N.2
If Composing is busy with reconstruction on a user change, the

content of the Composing task card is blacked out (i.e. the task
card is black). N.2
The new user must close Composing and start it again to con-
tinue working.
Page B.263, Setting up the Privileges for a Role or a UserN.2
0.0

Reconstruction N.2
Reconstruction starts with the transfer of the series to the Com-

posing task card. N.2
The Composing task card is placed in foreground. N.2
A window opens showing the progress of reconstruction. N.2
While Composing is blocked when composition is in

progress, it is possible to switch to other task cards.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.211

Adjusting the reconstruction

manually N.2
Normally, all parameters required for image reconstruction are

determined automatically. N.2
In rare cases, you might find that the automatic algorithm does
not provide optimum results. In this case, you may manually
determine the position of the images relative to one another
(shifting pixels). N.2
N.2
N OT E
If you make manual changes and therefore modify the
reference parameters, you may find that graphics drawn in
the composite image are no longer valid and have to be
redrawn. N.2
In the case of a saved and reloaded composite image, the

position of the single images may be changed only if the orig-
inal images are still available.
N.2
N OT E
As the user, you are responsible for correct manual
adjustment of the reconstruction and the conclusions for
diagnosis drawn from it. N.2
0.0

Tools N.2 The tools for manual positioning can be found on the Manual
subtask card of the Composing task card. N.2
(1)
(1) Position number (position of the orientation mark)
0.0

Select the image position to be shifted N.2
First, select the image in the series you want to shift: N.2
Double-click the required position in the overview image (on

the right).
The position of the image edge to be corrected is identified with
the orientation mark in the detailed image (on the left). N.2
The position number is displayed.

Page N.36, Displays in images
N.2
Setting the pixel number for the shift N.2
For subsequent corrections you can set the number of pixels

per mouse click in the Image menu. N.2
You can use one of the following values: 1, 3, 5, 10, 15, 20, 30,
40, 50, 100, 200 pixels N.2
When you start the system, 3 pixels per mouse click is the
default setting. N.2
Select Image > Manual Adjustment to enter your chosen

number of pixels, if necessary.
With each mouse click the image is shifted by the number of
pixels set during correction. N.2
The setting remains the same until you change it again or

restart the system. N.2
0.0

Shift the images in a slice relative to each

other N.2
You can now shift the image identified with the orientation mark.
The image is shifted, as well as all subsequent images relative
to the images above the marked image. N.2
The topmost image cannot be shifted.

N.2
N OT E
The shift should be performed in Cut mode (hard image
transitions) because the pixel shift is easier to see in this
mode.
Page N.323, Switching between blend mode and cut
mode. N.2
Moving up/down N.2
Click the up or down arrow once or repeatedly.

The images below are moved up or down. N.2
0.0

Moving left/right N.2
Click the left or right arrow once or repeatedly.

The images below are moved left or right.
N.2
The shift is performed after each click. N.2
The image is shifted by the set number of pixels (default: 3). N.2
The lower part of the composite image is shifted relative to the

upper part.
N.2
Moving a cut line

up/down N.2
Click an arrow with the line symbol up or down once or

repeatedly.
The cut line (the image edge) is shifted up or down. N.2
0.0

Shifting relative to each other N.2
You can move the depth of the slices of the composed volume
relative to each other. N.2
Selecting a slice N.2 Select the required slice with a mouse click on the dog-ear or
in the empty corner.
Or N.2
Press the Ima - (Num 1) or Ima + (Num 2) key on the key-

board.
Moving backward/
forward N.2
Click the end of the arrow (cross) or arrowhead (circle) once

or repeatedly.
The slice is moved backward (away from you) or forward
(toward you). N.2
The composed slice images affected are recalculated. N.2
Composed slice images that are not affected remain

unchanged. N.2
0.0

Display N.2
If a single image has been shifted manually, it is marked by

the letter "M" in the composite image.
The words "Manual adjustment performed!" are displayed at
the bottom of the image.
N.2
N OT E
When defining the film layout after manual correction in
Composing, ensure that All text is selected for the Image
Text selection so that the message Manual adjustment
performed! is exposed to the film.
Page A.37, Configuring image text N.2
0.0

Returning to automatic positioning N.2
N.2
Click the icon for automatic positioning.

Or N.2
Select Auto Adjustment from the pop-up menu.

All manual positioning is canceled and the status after auto-
matic reconstruction is restored. N.2
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
N.3 Viewing images N.3
The Composing task card allows you to view and post-process

composite images after reconstruction. N.3
You can switch between different layouts and scroll among sev-
eral composite images and slices. N.3
You can load and view images that have already been com-
posed and stored. (Manual alignment is only possible if all orig-
inal images are available.) N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.31

Viewing images Composing
The Composing task card N.3
(5 (6) (5)
(2) (3) (4)
(1)
0.0

Composing Viewing images
(1) Image area

(2) Detailed image
(3) Overview
(4) Control area
(5) Section markings and image position numbers
(6) Orientation mark
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.33

Image segments N.3
The image area of the Composing task card can be divided

into different segments which can be switched on or off. N.3
0.0

(1) Detailed image segment

Shows the composite image.
(2) Original image segment
If original images are available, the original image corre-
sponding to the current image number is displayed.
(3) Overview segment
Shows an overview of the entire composite image.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.35

Displays in images N.3
The following special displays appear in the image area of the

Composing task card: N.3
N.3
Image element Description

N.3 Dog-ears for scrolling through
the image stack
N.3 Image position number
N.3 Image position number with

orientation mark

"Manual" identification

Insufficient match!
identification
0.0

Image element Description

N.3 Cobb angle N.3
N.3 Kyphosis angle N.3
N.3 Vertical Distance mea-

surement N.3
N.3 Height Difference N.3
N.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.37

Text information in images N.3
0.0


(2) Image position numbers with orientation mark and identifi-
cation
(4) Notes
(5) Slice information and window values
(6) System-specific information
(7) Dog-ears for scrolling through the image stack
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.39

Control area N.3
The control area to the right in the task card contains the input
fields for selecting functions: N.3
(1) Display and keys for scrolling among different composite

images
(2) Subtask card stack for switching the View, for Manual cor-
rection of image transitions, and for setting the window val-
ues (Window)
(3) Subtask card stack for selecting evaluation functions
(Ortho I and Tools)
(4) Functions for storing and documenting
0.0

Loading and displaying images N.3
For viewing and postprocessing, load the series and images

onto the Composing task card. N.3
Open the Patient Browser (Patient > Browser).

Searching for the required patient / required study.
Click the tab of the Composing task card.
The Composing task card is placed in foreground. N.3
N.3
N OT E
You can only load images of one patient into the
Composing task card. N.3
Images of one study only may be loaded per load operation.N.3

If you want to load the images of another patient, you have
to first unload the images currently loaded. N.3
0.0

Loading images for reconstruction N.3
Select series in the navigation or content area of the Patient

Browser.
Page N.22, Selecting series for reconstruction and start-
ing reconstruction
Composite image/volume or single image/

volume N.3
You can load an already composed and stored image/volume or

just a single image/volume onto the Composing task card. N.3
N.3
N OT E
In the case of a composite image/volume that has been
stored and reloaded, you can change the position of single
images relative to each other only if: N.3
all original images are available

the images are not a canceled reconstruction
the composed image or original images have not been
altered outside the Composing task card or provided
with an electronic shutter
0.0

Loading a volume N.3 Select the desired series in the content area of the Patient
Browser.
Double-click this series.

(The Composing task card is on top.)
Or N.3
Drag the series with the mouse into the image area of the
Composing task card (drag&drop).
Or N.3
Select Applications > Composing from the menu of the

Patient Browser.
The volume is immediately loaded to the Composing task

card.
N.3
Display after loading N.3 For a volume that has just been composed, the center image is
the result volume. The focus is on the center volume. N.3
An already composite image is displayed as it was when it was

last saved. N.3
0.0

Modifying image display N.3
Tools N.3 The tools for image display are located on the View subtask
card or in the View menu. N.3
View subtask card and menu on the Composing task card.

N.3
Notes N.3 Page N.25, The reconstruction algorithm and

Page N.27, Important notes.
N.3
0.0

Layouts N.3
N.3
Detailed image or On the Composing task card you can choose from three differ-
comparison N.3 ent image layouts (for on-screen display, but not film layouts): N.3
Single Layout (standard setting)
Only the composite image is displayed. In this display you
will see a composite image, if necessary with an overview
reduced in size.
Page N.319, Selecting single layout
Single with original

The composite image and the original image (if present) con-
taining the original image information are displayed one
below the other. This display mode can be used for checking
the reconstruction and performing diagnoses.
Page N.320, Selecting single with original
Double Layout
Two reconstructed images are displayed next to each other.
This display can be used to compare composed images/vol-
ume, for example, to assess the course of an illness.
Page N.321, Selecting double layout
0.0

Full image or overview N.3 In each case you can switch between: N.3
Full image display

Only the detail image or the detailed image with the original
image is displayed in maximum width. The overview is hid-
den. The image can be viewed at full resolution (for diagno-
sis).
Overview (default setting)
In addition to the detailed/original image(s), one or two over-
views of the composite images is/are displayed. In this dis-
play you can navigate easily with the aid of the overviews.
Page N.317, Switching between full image and overview
Soft or hard transitions N.3 In each case you can determine whether the images are to be
displayed with blurred transitions or sharp edges: N.3
Blend Mode (Soft image transitions) (default setting)

The single images are blended at the transitions between
each pair of images.
Cut Mode (Hard image transitions)
The single images are joined without blending.
Page N.323, Switching between blend mode and cut
mode
0.0

Switching between full image and overview N.3
Showing the overview

image N.3
Click this icon on the View subtask card.

The icon is selected. N.3
Or N.3
Select View > Hide Overview from the menu.

Or N.3
Select Hide Overview from the pop-up menu (right mouse

button).
An overview is displayed. N.3
0.0

Hiding the overview

image N.3

The icon is no longer selected. N.3
Or N.3
Select View > Hide Overview from the menu.

Or N.3
Select Hide Overview from the pop-up menu (right mouse

button).
The overview is hidden. N.3
0.0

Selecting single layout N.3
If you just want to view one composite image of a volume, select

the Single Layout. N.3
Single layout with Show Overview (left) and Hide Overview

(right) N.3
(1) Detailed image

(2) Overview

Or N.3
Select View > Single Layout from the menu.
0.0

Selecting single with original N.3
The original image should be used for diagnosis. For this pur-
pose the composite image and an original image can be dis-
played simultaneously and compared. For that purpose, select
the Single with original. N.3
Single with original with Show Overview (left) and Hide Over-
view (right) N.3
(1) Detailed image

(2) Overview
(3) Original image

Or N.3
Select View > Single with original from the menu.
0.0

Selecting double layout N.3
If you want to compare two composite images (two volumes),

select the double layout. N.3
Prerequisite N.3 Several volumes have been composed and loaded. N.3
Double layout with Show Overview (left) and Hide Overview

(right) N.3
(1) Detailed image

(2) Overview
0.0


Or N.3
Select View > Double Layout from the menu.

If only one composed volume is loaded, a composite image is
displayed double.
In this case, you cannot use all the functions in the right
image. (Windowing is possible, for example, in the left image
only).
0.0

Switching between blend mode and cut mode N.3
Normally, composite images will be displayed with soft transi-

tions. For diagnosis, however, you can have the images dis-
played with hard cut edges and the original image information
instead: N.3
(1) Blend mode (Soft transitions)

(2) Cut Mode (Hard image transitions)
0.0

Switching N.3 Click this icon on the View subtask card.

The icon is selected: Blend mode
The icon is not selected: Cut mode
Or N.3
Select View > Blend / Cut Mode from the menu.

Or N.3
Select Blend / Cut Mode from the pop-up menu (right

mouse button).
The display changes immediately.

N.3
If the reconstruction algorithm does not identify sufficiently

similar features at an image transition, a warning will be dis-
played, and the image transition will be marked.
The images can be repositioned manually.
0.0

N.3
N OT E
When Blend mode is used, there are transition areas
between the single images that were interpolated from two
images. Although the Blend mode image may appear more
pleasing to the eye, only the original images (Single with
Original or Cut mode display) may be used for diagnosing
bone structures. N.3
N.3
0.0

Scrolling through composed volumes N.3
If several volumes have been composed and loaded, you can

scroll through them one by one. N.3
Click the required image segment (in the double layout).

This segment is identified with a blue (light) border. N.3
Click + or -.
Or N.3
Press the Study - (Num 7) or Study + (Num 8) key on the

keyboard.
The images of the next or previous composed volume are dis-

played. N.3
In overview mode, the overview also changes.
0.0

Scrolling through a single volume N.3
You can also "scroll" among single volumes within a recon-

structed volume. N.3
Click the required image segment.

This segment is identified with a blue (light) border. N.3
Press the Series - (Num 4) or Series + (Num 5) key on the

keyboard.
The displayed image is moved to the next/previous sub-image/

volume. N.3
In overview mode, the overview also changes. N.3
0.0

Scrolling the slice image stack N.3
You can scroll through the composite images in the image

stack. N.3
Scrolling with the Multiple-slice data sets provide dog-ears for scrolling. N.3
dog-ears N.3
Click the dog-ear to scroll backward image by image in the

image stack.
Or N.3
Click the empty corner in the image stack to scroll forward

image by image.
Scrolling with keys N.3 Alternatively, you can use the keys on the symbol keypad. N.3
Press the Image - (Num 1) or Image + (Num 2) key on the

keyboard.
The Image -/+ keys may have a function for image types
other than slice images.
0.0

Selecting an image section / navigating in the

detailed image N.3
There are three ways of navigating in the composite image: N.3
Shifting the image The first way is to place the orientation mark in the detailed
position N.3 image: N.3
Double-click the required position in the overview image.

The position is marked on the left with the orientation mark in
the detailed image. N.3
The detailed image is shifted so that the marked position is in

the center in the vertical direction. N.3
If applicable, the corresponding original image is displayed in

the lower part.
N.3
Enlarging/shifting the The second way is to enlarge or shift the detailed image as you
image (Zoom/Pan) N.3 do in the Viewing task card:
Page G.415, Displaying enlarged/reduced images
N.3
Click this icon.

Or N.3
Select Image > Zoom & Pan on from the main menu.
Click and drag in the detailed image.
The detailed image is displayed accordingly. N.3
The overview image does not change. N.3
0.0

Moving an image In the Overview image (right), the portion of the image shown
section N.3 in the detailed image (left) is marked with a green border. N.3
You can move this border as well as the entire image section.N.3
Move the mouse pointer onto the green line.
The mouse pointer changes shape. N.3
Click and drag the border to the new position.

The image section shown in the detailed image is moved
accordingly. N.3
0.0

Switching image text on/off N.3
The image text contains the following information: N.3
Text in the four corners of the image (patient data etc.),

without the image position numbers
System comments at the bottom in the image center (for
example, Insufficient match!)
This text can be hidden if, for example, you want to film an
image anonymously. N.3
N.3
WA R N I N G
Image text and/or graphics off N.3
Danger of incorrect diagnoses N.3
If you film a composite image with the image text and/or

graphics switched off, non-matching or manually adjusted
transitions between the individual images cannot be iden-
tified as such! N.3
Switching on image text and graphics for diagnostic

applications.
Select View > Image Text On from the menu.

The image text is switched on or off. N.3
The next time you select the menu item, a checkmark will have
been set in front of Image text On or a previously set check-
mark will be removed. N.3
0.0

Switching graphics on/off N.3
If you have drawn graphical elements (lines, circles, distance,

...) in an image, they can be switched off if you want to view a
detail located below, for example, if you do not want to change
the graphics. N.3
This includes: N.3
All graphical elements drawn in the image (lines, circles, dis-

tance, etc.)
The image segment markings and image position numbers
Special marking of transitions (for example, red triangles for
a non-matching transition or M for a manually adjusted
transition)
Switching graphics off N.3

The icon is no longer selected N.3
Or N.3
Select View > Image Graphics On from the menu.
The next time you select the menu, the item Image Graphics
On will no longer be marked with a checkmark. N.3
0.0

Switching graphics
back on N.3

The icon is selected again. N.3
Or N.3
Select View > Image Graphics On from the menu.
The next time you select the menu, the item Image Graphics
On will be marked with a checkmark again. N.3
0.0

Image display / Windowing N.3
You can set the window values on the Composing task card.N.3
During scrolling, window values are automatically applied to
other composite images.
Setting window values N.3 The window values are set in the image area using the
mouse (center button).
Page G.42, Windowing images
Or N.3
Enter the window values using the keyboard in the fields WW

(= Window Width) and WC (= Window Center) on the Adjust
subtask card or click the arrow buttons.
Resetting the window
values N.3
Click the icon on the Adjust subtask card.

The window values are reset to the values last saved. N.3
0.0

Additional display modes N.3
Flipping an image N.3
Page G.432, Flipping images vertically
N.3
Inverting grayscale
values N.3
Page G.434, Inverting images (Invert)
N.3
Editing graphics N.3 Page G.555, Editing graphics and image text
N.3
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
N.4 Evaluations N.4
The Composing task card allows you to perform evaluations

and apply postprocessing functions. N.4
Tools N.4 You will find the relevant tools on the Ortho I and Tools subtask
cards. N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.41

Evaluations Composing
Notes N.4
Availability of graphics functions N.4
You can perform measurements across image transitions (e.g.

distance measurements) only, if all image sections match (no
red triangles).
Page N.29, Transition does not match
N.4
Format of the composite images N.4
If the angle between two images is greater than a certain value

or the image sections do not match, an SC image (DICOM Sec-
ondary Capture) is generated. In all other cases, MR images
are generated.
N.4
Tolerance max. 5 N.4 The angle between input images is within MR tolerances. N.4
In this case, the composite image is an MR image. N.4
Graphics functions can be performed (with restrictions, if the

quality of the images transition is below a certain threshold).
N.4
Tolerance max. 45 N.4 The angle between input images is outside the MR tolerances
but within the SC tolerances. N.4
In this case, the composite image is an SC image. N.4
Graphics functions can be performed (with restrictions, if the

quality of the images transition is below a certain threshold). N.4
0.0

Composing Evaluations
Special evaluations N.4
Depending on the type of reconstruction performed, the follow-

ing special evaluations may be performed with composite
images: N.4
Scoliosis angle according to Cobb

Measuring one or more curvature angles of the spine.
Page N.414, Determining spinal curvature (scoliosis
angle according to Cobb)
Kyphosis angle
Measuring the angle of the vertebral base tangents relative
to the vertical.
Page N.419, Determining the kyphosis angle of a verte-
bra
Vertical alignment
Measuring the deviation of the spine from the vertical.
Page N.422, Measuring deviation of the spinal column
from the vertical
Height difference
Measuring the difference in height, for example between the
left and right side of the pelvis.
Page N.427, Measuring the difference in height
These may be selected on the Ortho I subtask card or via the

Tools menu. N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.43

Graphics functions N.4
N.4
N OT E
Graphics elements may be drawn in the detailed image
only, not in the overview. N.4
The following functions can be called on the Tools subtask card

or via the Tools menu. N.4
0.0

Annotating images N.4
You may use predefined text or enter text freely on the Com-
posing task card: N.4
Click the text icon.

The Annotation dialog box is displayed. N.4
Using a predefined text N.4 Select an entry from the list with a single click.
If necessary, use the scroll bars to display additional texts.
Click the required position in the image.
The text appears immediately. N.4
Repeat this as often as required.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.45

Entering a text N.4
Click the icon for free text entry.

The icon appears selected. N.4
Click the required position in the image.

A text field appears. N.4
Enter the text via the keyboard.

Complete entry with the enter key.
Defining text N.4 Up to 20 predefined texts are possible. The predefined texts are
entered during the installation. You can change the texts at any
time: N.4
Double-click the required entry in the Annotation window.

The Edit Annotation Text dialog box opens. N.4
Overwrite the text as required.

Click OK.
0.0

Positioning text N.4 You can move the entered text as required. N.4
Click the text.

The text is marked with small squares. N.4
Drag it into the required position.
Editing a text N.4 You can edit the entered text. N.4
Double-click the text.

The text field appears. N.4
Now change or add to the text.

Complete entry with the enter key.
Deleting text N.4 You may delete texts you have entered individually or together
with other graphical elements: N.4
Click the text.

The text is marked with small squares. N.4
Press the Del key.

Page G.555, Editing graphics and image text
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.47

Ending text entry N.4 Click Close.

If you want to edit several images, you do not have to deselect
the function.
Simply select the next image.
Switching text on/off N.4 Page N.331, Switching image text on/off N.4
0.0

Drawing circles and lines/polygons N.4
The Composing task card allows you to draw in circles and

lines/polygons just like circular and free-hand ROIs on the
Viewing task card. However, in this case, no statistical evalua-
tion is performed. N.4
Drawing circles N.4
For a description of this icon, see

Page G.54, Rectangular and circular ROIs
N.4
Drawing circles with

center N.4
In the same way as you draw circles, you can also draw circles
with a center. N.4
You cannot select the cross hair in the circle (but you can
select the circle line).
Using this method you can easily perform distance measure-
ments starting from the center of the circle, e.g. the center of
a ball-and-socket joint.
Drawing lines/polygons N.4
For a description of this icon, see

Page G.58, Drawing a freehand region N.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.49

Drawing arrows N.4
You can emphasize image details with arrows: N.4
Click the arrow icon.

The icon appears selected. N.4
Click into the image to place the starting point (= arrow

head), and drag a line to the end point with the mouse.
Release the mouse button to end the line.
The arrow is drawn.
N.4
Changing the size N.4 Click one of the two end points of the arrow, keep the mouse
button pressed, and drag the arrow (larger or smaller).
0.0

Additional graphics functions N.4
Shutter N.4
Page G.545, Setting a shutter
N.4
Distance line N.4
Page G.518, Drawing a distance line, measuring the dis-

tance
N.4
Angles N.4
Page G.527, Measuring an angle
N.4
Manual calibration N.4
Manual calibration is only required/possible for X-ray images

(AX modality).
Editing graphics N.4 Page G.555, Editing graphics and image text
N.4
Switching graphics on/off N.4 Page N.332, Switching graphics on/off

N.4
0.0

Evaluations for the spine and pelvis N.4
Important notes N.4
Angle measurements N.4 When performing angle measurements, please keep the follow-
ing in mind: N.4
The main sources of error when performing Cobb angle

measurements and kyphosis angle measurements are due
to subjective placement of the tangent to the vertebra and
the posture of the patient.
Digits appearing after the decimal point in the measurement
results are not representative of the accuracy of the mea-
surement taken.
The accuracy of Cobb angle or kyphosis angle measure-
ments is comparable with that of measurements made by
hand on film images.
In the case of angle measurements on projection images,
the projected plane must be parallel to the angle plane.
0.0

Distance measurements N.4 When performing distance measurements, please keep the fol-
lowing in mind: N.4
Distance measurements made across image boundaries in

composite images (in the vertical direction on the monitor)
are inaccurate. This error is additive across the sum of the
original images.
Digits appearing after the decimal point in the measurement
results are not representative of the accuracy of the mea-
surement taken. When using a measurement to support
diagnosis, the physician has to consider all sources of inac-
curacy.
N.4
N OT E
Only measure within each images (between the
transitions), if possible. N.4
Do not perform measurement across image borders

marked Insufficient match! N.4
0.0

Determining spinal curvature

(scoliosis angle according to Cobb) N.4
There are different methods for determining the scoliosis angle

of the spine. The most widely accepted is the method according
to Cobb. N.4
This method involves drawing the tangent to the dorsal plate of

the upper neutral vertebra and to the basal plate of the lower
neutral vertebra. From these, the system calculates the scolio-
sis angle: N.4
Scoliosis angle N.4
N: neutral vertebra
S: apical vertebra N.4
Scoliosis angle: schematic representation1 (left), example

(right) N.4
1. Zilch, H.; Weber, U.: Orthopdie mit Repetitorium. Berlin: de Gruyter, 1989
0.0

Drawing the scoliosis angle N.4
One or several scoliosis angles may be drawn: N.4
Select the required image.

Page N.311, Loading and displaying images
Select a detail image display.

Page N.314, Modifying image display
The tangents of the angles can be drawn only in a detailed

image.
The results are, however, also displayed in the overview.
Select Tools > Cobb Angle from the main menu.
Or N.4
Click the icon.

The icon appears selected.
N.4
Move the mouse pointer into the detailed image.

0.0

First tangent N.4 Set the mouse pointer to the starting point for the first tan-
gent.
Hold the left mouse button while drawing a line up to the end
point of the first tangent.
Release the mouse button there.
The tangent is drawn.
N.4
Second tangent N.4 If necessary, move the image area by double-clicking in the
overview (new position of the orientation mark).
Draw the second tangent in the same way.
The tangents are marked according to their position, for exam-
ple, Cb1, Cb2, etc. N.4
The scoliosis angle is drawn in the vicinity of the apical vertebra.

N.4
Further tangents N.4 If there are additional curvatures, more angles can be defined:N.4
Draw additional tangents in the same way.
The tangents are identified according to their position and, if
necessary, renamed. N.4
In each case, scoliosis angles are drawn in the vicinity of the

apical vertebrae located in between. N.4
0.0

Changing drawn angles N.4
Drawn angles can be changed at any time: N.4
Removing angles N.4 To remove an angle, delete a tangent: N.4
Click on the required tangent.

The tangent is marked with small squares at the corner points.N.4
Press the Del key.
Or N.4
Select Edit > Delete selected Graphics from the main

menu or Delete selected Graphics from the pop-up menu.
If it was the lowest or topmost tangent, the lowest or topmost
scoliosis angle is deleted. N.4
If it was the middle tangent, the scoliosis angles above and

below this are deleted and a new angle is drawn instead. N.4
If it was one of two tangents, both tangents including the angle

will be deleted. N.4
0.0

Changing angles or An incorrectly drawn tangent can be changed: N.4
tangents
Click on the required tangent.
N.4
The tangent is marked with small squares at the corner points.N.4

Click and drag one of the corner points to the required new
position.
The relevant scoliosis angles are updated.
N.4
Moving the annotation N.4 The annotation displayed (angle values) can be moved if, for
example, it conceals important details: N.4
Click the annotation to be moved.

The characters are marked with a small square. N.4
Drag it to the new position.
Ending editing N.4 Select another function.

If only one tangent (but no angle) is drawn, it is deleted. N.4
0.0

Determining the kyphosis angle of a vertebra N.4
A kyphosis angle is the angle between a vertebra and the ver-

tical in a lateral exposure: N.4
45
55
Kyphosis angle: schematic representation N.4
Example N.4
0.0

Drawing kyphosis angles N.4
One or several kyphosis angles may be drawn: N.4
Select the required image (Lateral exposure!).


The tangents of the angles can be drawn only in a detailed

image.
The results are, however, also displayed in the overview.
Select Tools > Kyphosis from the main menu.
Or N.4
Click the icon.

N.4
Drawing an angle N.4 Position the mouse pointer on the first point on the vertebra.
Hold the left mouse button while drawing a line up to the sec-
ond point on the vertebra.
The line is extended. N.4
A vertical line is drawn. N.4
The kyphosis angle is drawn. N.4
0.0

Changing drawn angles N.4
Drawn angles can be changed at any time: N.4
Removing angles N.4 To remove an angle, delete the associated line: N.4
Click on the required line.

The line is marked with small squares at the end points. N.4
Press the Del key.

Or N.4

The line and the associated kyphosis angle are deleted.
N.4
Changing angles or lines N.4 Click on the required line.

position.
The relevant kyphosis angle is updated. N.4
0.0

Measuring deviation of the spinal column

from the vertical N.4
The deviation of the spine from an imaginary vertical line is an

additional means for assuring the degree of scoliosis. N.4
Example of measuring deviations of the spine from the verticalN.4
0.0

Drawing lines N.4


Select Tools > Vertical Alignment from the main menu.

Or N.4
Click the icon.

N.4
Vertical line N.4 As a first step, determine the vertical line: N.4

Click the image and drag a short line up or down via the
mouse.
As soon as you move the mouse, a line is displayed. N.4

A vertical line is drawn through the entire image. N.4
0.0

Reference point N.4 As soon as you have drawn the vertical line, draw distances to
this line: N.4
Position the mouse pointer on the required point.

Hold the left mouse button down while dragging a short line
in the direction of the vertical line.
A plumb line is dropped to the vertical line and the length of the
plumb line is shown in cm. N.4
0.0

Changing the lines N.4
Removing a line N.4 Click on the required line.

Press the Del key.

Or N.4

The line and the given distance are deleted.
N.4
Changing a line N.4 Click on the required line.

The line is marked with a small square at the end point. N.4
Click and drag the end point to the new position.

The distances are updated accordingly. N.4
0.0

Moving the annotation N.4 The annotation displayed (distance) can be moved if, for exam-
ple, it hides important details: N.4

Moving a vertical line N.4 Click the line.

Click and drag the line to the new position.

All distances are updated.
N.4
Removing entire graphics N.4 Click the vertical line.

The vertical line is marked with small squares at the end points.N.4
Press the Del key.
Or N.4

The lines as well as all distances are deleted. N.4
0.0

Measuring the difference in height N.4
The system offers a height difference measurement which can

be used for measuring the difference in length between two
points (for example, between the two hip joints). N.4
HD1=0.2cm
Example of height difference measurement N.4
0.0

Drawing the difference in height N.4
You are able to draw one or several difference(s) in height: N.4


Select Tools > Height Difference from the main menu.

Or N.4
Click the icon.

N.4

Position the mouse pointer in the first reference point.

Hold the left mouse button while drawing a line up to the sec-
ond reference point.
The difference in height line and the difference in cm are dis-
played. N.4
0.0

Modifying the drawn differences in height N.4
Removing difference in Click the required line indicating the difference in height.
height N.4
Press the Del key.

Or N.4

The line and the given difference in height are deleted.
N.4
Modifying the line Click on the required line.

indicating the difference in
height N.4
position.
The relevant line is updated.
N.4
Moving the annotation N.4 The annotation displayed (difference in height) can be moved,
e.g., it hides important details: N.4

0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Saving and documenting
N.5 images N.5
The images composed on the Composing task card can be

saved for subsequent documentation. You can select whether
to save just one or all composite images. N.5
You can copy a composite image into the Windows clipboard to

insert from there into another program. N.5
You can copy composite images to the virtual film sheet to film
it there. You can select whether to film just one or all composite
images. N.5
N.5
N OT E
The work status (com/p/a/s/r/H) in the Patient Browser is
not set/changed by the Composing application. N.5
N.5
N OT E
When a user logs off, unsaved data are lost permanently. N.5
data you want to keep before you log off. N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.51

Saving and documenting images Composing
Saving images N.5
To keep composite images with graphics, they have to be saved

before you select a new patient.
N.5
Selecting a volume N.5 Select the volume, if necessary.

Page N.326, Scrolling through composed volumes
Saving the volume N.5 Select Patient > Save All As ... from the main menu.
All images of the composed volume are saved.
N.5
Selecting an image N.5 Select the image, if necessary.

Page N.328, Scrolling the slice image stack
Save single images N.5 Select Patient > Save As ... from the main menu.
Only the image currently displayed is saved. N.5
0.0

Composing Saving and documenting images
Entering a name N.5 The Save As window opens. N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.53

As a new series N.5 Click on Save images as new series if required (automati-
cally active the first time you select Save As).
Enter a name for the series.
Confirm with OK.
The images are saved as a new series.
N.5
Appending to a series N.5 Click Append images to series, if required

(automatically on repeated selection of Save As).
The series numbers and descriptions of the series belonging to
the study appear in the menu. N.5
Select an entry from the list.

Confirm with OK.
The images are appended to the selected series. N.5
0.0

Copying images to the clipboard N.5
If you want to use an image in other applications, for example,

Paint or WordPad, copy the image via the Windows clipboard:N.5
N.5
N OT E
Images pasted from the clipboard are not suitable for
diagnosis! N.5
N.5
N OT E
The image text can be configured to render images copied
via the clipboard anonymous.
Page A.37, Configuring image text N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.55

N OT E
You can copy images to the clipboard only if you have the
necessary Export right.
Page B.263, Setting up the Privileges for a Role or a
User N.5


Selecting an image Click the image segment, if necessary.

segment N.5
The image segment is given a colored (bright) border.
N.5
Copying an image N.5 Select Image > Copy Image to Clipboard from the main
menu.
The selected image is now on the clipboard and you can now
paste it into other applications (usually with Edit > Paste). N.5
0.0

Filming images N.5
You are able to film composite images like in other applications.N.5

The complete overview image (unzoomed) is always sent or
filmed from the Composing task card.
The 2x1 layout is very suitable for filming composite images.
You will find additional information in
Part O, Filming
N.5

Filming all images of the Select Patient > Copy All to Film Sheet from the main
volume N.5 menu.
All images of the composed volume are transferred to the vir-
tual film sheet. N.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.57


Activate the image segment, if necessary.
N.5
Filming a composite
image N.5
Click this icon.

Or N.5
Select Patient > Copy to Film Sheet from the main menu.
Only the currently displayed composite image is transferred to
the virtual film sheet. N.5
0.0

Sending images N.5
You are able to send composite images like in other applica-

tions. N.5
Notes N.5 Note when sending images containing annotations (graphics,

distance measurements, text), the data format of the annota-
tions is changed to prevent subsequent modification of these
annotations (e.g. editing of text or moving graphics). N.5
However, you can certainly add further annotations to the

images. N.5
This applies when images are sent to another workstation or an

archive that is not equipped with the syngo MR software or
when the syngo MR version of the receiving system is older
than that of the sending system. N.5
N.5
WA R N I N G
Sending zoomed non-square images from the Viewing
task card. N.5
It is possible that not all the image information dis-

played will be sent. N.5
Send non-square images unzoomed only.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T N.59



Selecting an image Click the image segment, if necessary.

segment N.5
N.5
Sending a composite
image N.5
Click this icon.

You will find additional information in
Part J, Storing and Data Exchange N.5
0.0

Closing the patient N.5
When you have completed your work on the Composing task

card, remove the images of the currently active patient from the
image selection tool (closing the patient). N.5
When you load images of another patient, the current patient

is automatically closed if confirmed accordingly.
Click this icon.
Or N.5
0.0

0.0

PART
O Filming O.0
O.1 Introduction
Procedure for Filming ..................................................... O.12
Terms ............................................................................. O.15
Layouts and settings ...................................................... O.17
O.2 Semi-automatic/Manual Filming

Transferring images to the virtual film sheet .................. O.22
Exam task card .......................................................... O.22
Viewing, 3D task cards and the
Patient Browser window ............................................ O.24
Transferring images from the virtual film
sheet to the camera/printer ............................................ O.27
Auto Expose .............................................................. O.28
Transferring images manually ................................. O.211
Virtual film sheet full ..................................................... O.214
O.3 Viewing and Processing Film Sheets

and Images
Film Preview .................................................................. O.32
The Film Preview window .......................................... O.33
Changing default settings .......................................... O.36
Processing a film sheet ............................................. O.37
Processing film jobs and film sheets .............................. O.39
Calling up the Filming task card .............................. O.310
Selecting a film job .................................................. O.312
Number of copies of a film job ................................. O.314
Selecting film sheets and images ............................ O.315
Reorganizing film sheets ......................................... O.323
Processing images .................................................. O.331
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O1
Contents Filming
O.4 Changing Film Settings for a Film Job

Selecting a camera or printer ........................................ O.42
Layout of the film sheet ................................................. O.44
Image, text and graphic display ..................................... O.48
Reference image display......................................... O.415
O.5 Checking Film Jobs

Display on the status bar ............................................... O.52
Viewing and manipulating film jobs ............................... O.53
Calling up the Film Task Status ................................ O.53
Information in the Film Task Status box .................... O.57
Manipulating film jobs................................................ O.58
O.6 Configuring Filming

Configuring film layouts ................................................. O.62
Selecting a layout to change ..................................... O.63
Configuring film job settings ...................................... O.66
Configuring film sheets.............................................. O.69
Associating layouts with a study or series ................... O.614
Assigning film layouts.............................................. O.615
Canceling a layout assignment ............................... O.618
Deleting a layout ..................................................... O.618
0.0
O2 Operator Manual
CHAPTER
O.1 Introduction O.1
You can expose the images of an examination on film or print

them on paper for documentation and reporting. O.1
Depending on your examination schedule and on the current

examination situation, you can have image material exposed on
film or printed automatically. Images are then passed on to a
preset camera or printer parallel to the examination. O.1
Otherwise you can start filming manually and select which

images you want to print or expose on film. O.1
O.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: Use of paper printouts for diagnosis of
AX, CT and MR images. O.1
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis possible. O.1
Remedy: Only use images on film for diagnostic purpose.

You may use printouts for diagnostic purpose if the printer
has specifically received 510(k) clearance for this
purpose. O.1
Security - Privileges O.1 Expose allows to expose film tasks or single film sheets on a
camera or to print them. O.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.11

Introduction Filming
Procedure for Filming O.1
Image material is filmed/printed in two steps:

O.1
First define on one of the task cards Exam, Viewing, 3D or

in the Patient Browser which images or series you want to
print or expose on film. Then transfer this preselection to the
Filming task card (virtual film sheet).
From the virtual film sheet, you send your selected images
either directly to a camera/printer or you can perform a few
processing steps first. You can view the selected images
using the Film Preview dialog box or the Filming task card
(virtual film sheet), postprocess them to some extent, make
a more precise selection, determine the film sheet layout,
and reselect a camera/printer.
0.0
O.12 Operator Manual

Filming Introduction
Semi automatic filming O.1 Depending on your examination schedule, it can be useful to
make image material available on film or paper for reporting as
quickly as possible and without manual intervention. O.1
Examination Filming Camera/Printer

(Virtual film sheet)
Manual Automatic
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.13

Manual filming O.1 You can initiate transfer of images to the virtual film sheet and
onto a camera or printer manually. In this way, you can divide up
the work in an optimum way and only film or print those images
that you really need for the diagnosis. O.1
Exam
Filming Camera/Printer
3D Viewing
Patient Browser
Manual Manual
0.0

Terms O.1
In the following chapters, you will come across several terms to

do with filming that you should be familiar with.
O.1
Film job O.1 Selected images, series and studies that you have sent for film-
ing are managed and executed by the system as film jobs.
O.1
Multiple film job O.1 Usually, the images of different patients are processed in differ-
ent film jobs. However, you can permit images of different
patients to be grouped together to form a multiple film job. The
images are then processed as follows, for example: O.1
Film sheet 1 Film sheet 2 Film sheet 3
A1 A2 A3 A10 A11 A12 B6 B7 B8
A4 A5 A6 A13 B1 B2 B9 B10 B11
A7 A8 A9 B3 B4 B5 B12
Patient 1 Patient 2
Multiple film job
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.15

Film Task Status O.1 You can also obtain information about the extent to which film
jobs in the camera/printer queue have been executed in the
Film Task Status dialog box and intervene in the sequence of
execution.
O.1
Virtual film sheet O.1 All images in film jobs are not necessarily printed or exposed on
film immediately but are first held in a virtual film sheet (Filming
task card or Film Preview dialog box).
In the virtual film sheet, you can see how the images will later
be arranged on the exposed film or print-out. O.1
0.0

Layouts and settings O.1
All film settings such as the layout of the film sheet or the
selected camera/printer are defined in so called film layouts.
O.1
Standard layout O.1 If you do not make any changes to the default film settings, you
are always working with the so called general default layout
defined by the Siemens Service during installation of your sys-
tem.
O.1
Changing the film If you are not satisfied with the default film settings (standard
settings for the current layout), then you change individual film settings in the Filming
film job O.1 task card. The current film job is then processed with your new
settings. On the next film job, the system again accesses the
defaults. O.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.17

Print modes O.1 The regular page mode is the default print mode. O.1
The scalable page mode provides images with reduced quality

and does not support original size. O.1
O.1
C AU T I O N
Source of danger: By scaling down the image in scalable
page mode the resulting image quality might no longer be
sufficient. O.1
Consequence: Wrong diagnosis possible. O.1
Remedy: Be aware of image quality reduction if scalable

page mode is configured. O.1
0.0

CHAPTER Semi-automatic/Manual
O.2 Filming O.2
As explained in the introduction, filming and printing examina-

tion images is performed in two steps: O.2
Transfer of images to the virtual film sheet.

Passing on the images from the virtual film sheet to a camera
or printer where they will be exposed on film or printed on
paper.
The second step can be made to run automatically. This is

advisable if large volumes of data resulting from a high patient
throughput have to be dealt with and therefore large volumes of
image material have to be made available for reporting as
quickly as possible. O.2
As an alternative, you can control filming completely manually.

In this way, you can make sure that only those images are
printed or being exposed on film that you really need for diag-
nosis or documentation. O.2
O.2
NOTE
Please note if you want to control filming manually
completely or partially: O.2
Only up to 3 film jobs can ever be managed simultaneously

in the virtual film sheet. A message appears if you exceed
this number.
Page O.214, Virtual film sheet full O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.21

Semi-automatic/Manual Filming Filming
Transferring images to the virtual

film sheet O.2
In the first step, you decide on the task cards Exam, Viewing,
3D or in the Patient Browser window which images you want
to transfer to the virtual film sheet.
O.2
Exam task card O.2
From the Exam task card, you can pass on images to the virtual
film sheet individually and manually. O.2
Camera/Printer
Examination
Filming
Copy to Film Sheet
0.0

Filming Semi-automatic/Manual Filming
Manual filming O.2 If you only want to film or print individual images, you can trans-
fer them to the virtual film sheet manually. O.2
Select the images one after the other in the image display
segment of the Exam task card.
Call up Patient > Copy to Film Sheet for each one.
Or O.2
O.2 Press the Copy to Film Sheet key on the symbol keypad
(Num Enter).
The images are transferred to the virtual film sheet. O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.23

Viewing, 3D task cards and the Patient

Browser window O.2
You can film or print images stored in your local database from
the Patient Browser or from the 3D or Viewing task cards. In
this way, you can also send images for filming that you have
evaluated with the Viewing card or generated in 3D.
O.2
3D Filming Camera/Printer
Viewing
Patient Browser
0.0

From Viewing, 3D or Patient Browser, you always transfer

images or series to the virtual film sheet manually. O.2
First select the images that you want to film/print in the

Patient Browser, on the Viewing or 3D task card.
Or O.2
O.2 Click on the Copy to Film Sheet button.
Or O.2
O.2 Press the Copy to Film Sheet key on the symbol keypad.
All the selected images are transferred to the virtual film sheet
on the Filming task card. O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.25

Per drag & drop O.2 From the Patient Browser, you can also transfer images
directly to the Filming task card by drag & drop. O.2
Select one or more images.

Drag the images onto the Filming task card holding the left
mouse button down.
A new film job or a multiple film job is created and the images
are displayed on the virtual film sheet. O.2
images from the Patient Browser onto the corresponding
tab. The task card moves into the foreground and the images
are loaded into the image area.
Per double click O.2 From the Patient Browser, you can also transfer images
directly to the Filming task card by double click. O.2
Select a study, a series or a patient from the Patient

Browser and double click.
A new film job is created and the images are displayed on the
virtual film sheet. O.2
0.0

Transferring images from the virtual

film sheet to the camera/printer O.2
In general, every time you want to transfer images, series or

whole studies to the virtual film sheet automatically or manually,
a film job is created. From the virtual film sheet, it is possible to
transfer the individual film jobs to the camera/printer either
automatically or manually. O.2
Exam
Camera/Printer
3D Viewing
Filming
Patient Browser
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.27

Auto Expose O.2
After a film job has been transferred completely to the virtual

film sheet, it can be passed on to the camera/printer immedi-
ately and automatically. O.2
You can define this setting at any time on the task cards or in
the Film Preview window. It is then applied to the opened film
jobs and all following film jobs.
Page O.32, Film Preview
O.2
Activating Auto Expose O.2 Call up Options > Auto Expose.

Or O.2
Activate the option via the Auto Expose button on the Film-
ing task card or in the Film Preview window.
The film sheets of the opened film job and all following film jobs
which are filled are automatically sent to the camera or printer
and exposed or printed. O.2
If the last film sheet is only partially filled, it is only sent for
filming when a new patient has been registered or a new film
job transferred to the virtual film sheet.
0.0

Deactivating Auto If Auto Expose has been activated on the task cards or in the
Expose O.2 film preview, you can deactivate it at any time. O.2
Deselect Options > Auto Expose.

Or O.2
Click on the button on the Filming task card or the film pre-
view again.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.29

Interrupting Auto If errors occur during automatic filming, or you notice that defec-
Expose O.2 tive images have been filmed/printed, you can interrupt auto-
matic filming at any time.
O.2
Deselect Options > Auto Expose.

Or O.2
Click on the button on the Filming task card or in the Film

Preview again.
The sheet that is being processed will be completed. All the
other film sheets are then retained in the virtual film sheet. O.2
Remedy the error or delete the defective images from the vir-
tual film sheet.
Reactivate Auto Expose or transfer the remaining sheets to
the camera/printer manually.
0.0

Transferring images manually O.2
If you want to determine the time at which jobs are filmed or

printed freely or if you want to view the images once more
before filming, then deactivate the Auto Expose option. O.2
All film jobs that you transfer from the task cards or from the
Patient Browser are first collected in the virtual film sheet on
the Filming task card.
O.2
When Security is activated, you can send data only if you are
Exposing current patient O.2 Call up Film > Expose Film Task o transfer all images of this
film job to the camera/printer.
Or O.2
O.2 Click on the Expose Film Task button in the control area of
the task card or in the Patient Browser.
All images of the film job are transferred to the camera. O.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.211

Film task selection O.2 If more than one patient is loaded in the task card Filming you
can select the task you want to expose from the list displayed in
the Select Film Job dialog. O.2
Call up Patient > Expose Film Task or use the shortcut

Ctrl + P.
The Select Film Job dialog box is opened in which you can
select the job that you want to transfer to a preselected camera/
printer. O.2
O.2 Select a job and click on Expose.
Or O.2
Click on Cancel and switch to the Filming task card or call

up Film Preview (Patient > Film Preview).
Select a film job.
Page O.315, Selecting film sheets and images
0.0

Exposing/printing a film Switch to the Filming task card or call up the Film Preview
sheet O.2 (Patient > Film Preview).
Select one film sheet.
Page O.315, Selecting film sheets and images
Page O.33, The Film Preview window
Call up Film > Expose Film Sheet.
Only the selected film sheet is processed.
O.2
Incorrect film size O.2 If a film size which your camera does not support is set for the
film sheet waiting to be exposed on film, the Incorrect Film
Size dialog box is displayed. O.2
No corresponding error message is displayed when a paper

printer is used.
Select another film size and confirm with OK to resume film-

ing.
0.0

Virtual film sheet full O.2
No more than 3 film jobs can be managed in the virtual film

sheet at one time. If a fourth film job is transferred to it, a mes-
sage box appears. You must first expose/print one of the film
jobs in the queue or delete it before a new film job can be
accepted. O.2
This situation can usually only occur if the Auto Expose

option is deactivated for the film jobs. The film jobs are only
kept in the virtual film sheet until they are sent for filming man-
ually and are therefore completed.
If a fourth film job is transferred, your system first checks
whether it can be combined with one of the other film jobs to
form a multiple film job.
Page O.15, Multiple film job O.2
If this is not the case, the No More Film Jobs Available dialog
box is displayed and you must remedy the situation. O.2
0.0

No More Film Jobs In the No More Film Jobs Available dialog box, you decide
Available O.2 what film jobs are to be exposed, merged or deleted to make
space for a new film job. O.2
Select one of the film jobs listed.
Click on Expose to transfer the selected job to the prese-

lected camera/printer.
The selected job is filmed and the new job is placed in its posi-
tion in the virtual film sheet. O.2
0.0

Or O.2
Click on Delete to delete the selected job and place a new

film job in its position.
Or O.2
Click on Merge to append the images of the new film job to

the end of this old film job.
The film job remains in the virtual film sheet as a multiple film
job until you transfer it to the camera or printer.
Page O.15, Multiple film job
O.2
Or O.2
Click on Cancel to cancel the operation.

Now switch to the Filming job card or open the Film Preview
to expose or delete film jobs before loading the new film job.
0.0

CHAPTER Viewing and Processing
O.3 Film Sheets and Images O.3
During manual filming, i.e. when you have deactivated the Auto
Expose option, you can view and process the film sheets again
before finally printing them or exposing them on film.
Page O.28, Auto Expose
O.3
Film preview O.3 If you want to obtain a quick overview of the film jobs in the
queue that have not yet been sent to the camera or printer, you
can use the Film Preview window.
O.3
Filming task card O.3 If you want to organize individual film sheets of the jobs in the
queue more efficiently and clearly or if you want to process the
images again before filming, switch to the Filming task card. O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.31

Viewing and Processing Film Sheets and Images Filming
Film Preview O.3
In the Film Preview, you can obtain information about how the
images of the current film job are arranged on the film sheets.
Here, you can also call up some important functions to do with
filming without having to switch to the Filming task card.
O.3
Calling up the film Call up Patient > Film Preview... in the main menu of the
preview O.3 Patient Browser or the Viewing task card.
Or
O.3 Click on the Film Preview button on the Viewing task card
or in the Patient Browser.
Closing the film preview O.3
Click on the Close button to close the Film Preview again.
0.0

Filming Viewing and Processing Film Sheets and Images
The Film Preview window O.3
After you have called up the Film Preview, the Film Preview
window will appear in front of the application you are currently
working on. O.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(1) Maximize to Filming task card

(2) Film jobs
(3) Display of film sheets
(4) Spin box for selecting the number of copies
(5) Delete button
(6) Buttons for film control
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.33

Film jobs O.3 Here you can see all the film jobs listed that are in the virtual film
sheet for transfer to a camera/printer. To process one film job or
check the arrangement of images, you first have to open the film
job. O.3
Click on a film job to open it.
Film sheets O.3 In the display area for the film sheets, you can see the first film
sheet of the film job which is open. O.3
With the dog ears in the top right hand corner, you can page
through all the film sheets of the film job. The film sheet is sub-
divided into segments in which the series and image numbers
of the images to be exposed or printed are displayed.
O.3
Click on the top of the dog ear once to page forward by one
Forward
film sheet.
Or O.3
Click once on the bottom of the dog ear to page backward by

Backward one film sheet.
0.0

Control area O.3 In the control area, you can call up a few important functions
that have to do with filming.
O.3
Click on this button to open the Film Task Status dialog box
or call up Patient > Film Task Status.
There you can see the queue with the film jobs waiting to be
transferred to the camera/printer.
Page O.51, Checking Film Jobs
O.3
Click on the Auto Expose button or call up Options > Auto

Expose to select or deselect this option.
Page O.28, Auto Expose
O.3 Click on the Expose button or call up Film > Expose Film
Task to transfer the opened film job to a camera/printer.
Page O.211, Exposing current patient
If you do not want to film the entire film job but only the film
sheet displayed, then call up Film > Expose Film Sheet.
Page O.213, Exposing/printing a film sheet
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.35

Changing default settings O.3
By default a layout has already been defined for every film job
in the virtual film sheet and a camera or printer has been
selected. O.3
You can change these default settings in the Film Preview dia-
log box or in the Filming task card itself. O.3
To change settings in the Film Preview, proceed as follows:
O.3
Selecting a camera or Call up Film > Change Camera... if you want to have the film
printer O.3 job or film sheet displayed exposed with another camera or
printed on another printer.
A dialog box is opened in which you can select a new camera/
printer.
Page O.42, Selecting a camera or printer
O.3
Changing film Click in a segment or on the border of the film sheet. In this
properties O.3 way, you can select a single image or an entire film sheet.
Or O.3
Select the film job to change the film settings for the entire
film job.
0.0

O.3 Call up Film > Properties... to change the film settings.

The Film Properties dialog box is opened in which you can
change a series of layout settings for filming.
Page O.44, Layout of the film sheet
O.3
Processing a film sheet O.3
In the Film Preview, a series of functions is available for reor-

ganizing film sheets. These can be useful if you have opened
the Film Preview from the Exam, 3D, or Viewing task card or
O.3
Deleting images O.3 If you can see that one of the images in the Viewing task card
is useless (e.g. an image with motion artifacts), click on this
image in the Film Preview. (You can identify the image by its
image number.) O.3
Click on the delete button in the control area to delete the

selected image.
The following images move up so that no empty segments are
left behind. O.3
Or O.3
Call up Film > Clear Document(s).
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.37

The image will be cleared. The following images do not move

up. O.3
If you have deleted several images in this way, your film sheets
will contain a number of empty segments. O.3
Call up Film > Repack to make more efficient use of your

film material.
Adding images O.3 If you have opened the Film Preview from the Patient Browser
window, you can add further images to a film job. O.3
In this way, for example, you can also film images of earlier
studies of a patient for comparison. O.3
Call up Film > New Film Sheet to add an empty film sheet
to the end of the film job.
Now fill this film sheet with selected images from the Patient
Browser by drag & drop.
Or O.3
Send further images to Filming with Copy to Film Sheet.

These images are also appended to the end of the film job. O.3
0.0

Processing film jobs and film

sheets O.3
In addition to the simple processing steps in the Film Preview,

you can also make complex and extensive changes to film jobs
in Filming. In this way, you can make sure that you will only
print or expose those images on film that you really need for
reporting. O.3
Moreover, you can process images or series of individual

images or entire series in order to obtain an optimum output
result on film. O.3
For example, you can delete individual images or several

images, reorganize or rearrange film sheets. O.3
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.39

Calling up the Filming task card O.3
You can process the film sheets of current film jobs on the Film-
ing task card. O.3
O.3 Click on the Filming tab.
Or O.3
Maximize the Film Preview window.
The Filming task card is placed in the foreground. O.3
0.0

The Filming task card is subdivided into the following areas: O.3
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(1) Menu bar with filming-specific menu entries

(2) Control area for easy call-up of processing functions
(3) Film sheet display (virtual film sheet)
(4) Status bar for system messages
0.0

Selecting a film job O.3
By the patient folders in the upper part of the control area, you
can see which film jobs are currently waiting to be transferred
to a camera/printer.
O.3
Designations O.3 These jobs have one of the following designations: O.3
Patient name
A film job that contains the images of a patient.
Multiple
A film job that contains the images of several patients.
Page O.16, Virtual film sheet
If there is no film job in the virtual film sheet, a patient folder
with the designation New is displayed.
Opening a film job O.3
Click on a film job to open it.

The patient folder opens up and the color of the folder remains
unchanged. O.3
The images of the opened film job are displayed on the film
sheet in the left hand part of the task card. O.3
You can now page through the film sheets of this job and select
and process one or more film sheets or images.
Page O.315, Selecting film sheets and images O.3
0.0

Selecting an entire If you want to process all the film sheets and images of a film
film job O.3 job, you not only have to open this job but also select it explic-
itly. O.3
Click again on the opened film job to select all the film sheets
with all images of this job.
The folder icon is now highlighted (blue), and all the images of
this job will be shown with a bold border in the film sheet display
and are therefore selected. O.3
0.0

Number of copies of a film job O.3
On the Filming task card or in the Film Preview window, you

can also set how many times a job is to be exposed or printed.
O.3
O.3 Select the number of copies with the spin box or enter the
required number with the keyboard.
0.0

Selecting film sheets and images O.3
After you have opened a film job, its images are displayed in the
left-hand part of the Filming task card.
O.3
Several film sheets O.3 If a job contains so many images that they fill several film
sheets, the sheet number and the total number of film sheets
are displayed at the upper right border of each sheet and in the
top right hand corner you will find dog ears for paging. O.3
Job only extends over one film sheet Job extends over more than one film sheet
0.0

Paging O.3 Page through the film sheets using the dog ears.
Page O.34, Film sheets
Or O.3
O.3 Double-click on the number of the current film sheet.
The display field becomes an input field. O.3
Overwrite the number displayed with the number of the sheet

that you want to go to and press Return.
The film sheet you have entered will be displayed. O.3
If you want to scroll through a stack of images very fast, click

on the dog ear and hold the mouse button down.
0.0

Selecting a film sheet O.3 Click on the border of the film sheet to select all the images
it contains.
All the segments of the film sheet are now shown with a bold
border. O.3
Deselecting a film sheet O.3 Click outside the film sheet with the left mouse button.
Or O.3
Select a single image, another film sheet or another film job

to cancel your selection.
0.0

Multiple selection O.3 You can also select more than one film sheet at once. O.3
Click on the border of the first film sheet of your choice hold-
ing the Ctrl key down.
Page to another film sheet.
Hold the Ctrl key pressed to extend your selection by a sin-
gle film sheet.
Or O.3
Hold the Shift key pressed to select all the film sheets
between the two film sheets including all their images.
When you have selected a film sheet, all images have a bro-
ken line border.
0.0

Selecting segments O.3 You can not only select whole film sheets, but also individual
images of a film job. O.3
The Input Focus indicates the active segment of the image

area. It is indicated by a broken line border and is shown so that
it is always clear which image is being processed. O.3
0.0

The processing steps that you execute are always applied to

the segment on which the input focus is located. O.3
Only if you have explicitly selected images, film sheets, or film

jobs the input focus is deactivated and no segment has a bro-
ken line border. O.3
Click on another image with the left mouse button to place

the input focus on another segment.
Or O.3
Move the input focus using the arrow keys on the keyboard.
Page G.333, Working in the input focus
The image is marked by a broken line border. O.3
0.0

Selecting one or more You can select images explicitly one after the other like film
images explicitly O.3 sheets. O.3
Click into a segment holding the Ctrl key down.

The segment is marked with a broken line border. O.3
Like film sheets, you can also expand your selection for seg-
ments by clicking on further segments holding the Ctrl or
Shift key down.
Page O.318, Multiple selection
Selecting images You want to select the image displayed and all the following
explicitly up to the images explicitly. O.3
end of a series
Click on the image that you want to select explicitly holding
O.3
the Ctrl key down or use the input focus.

Call up Edit > Select On Succeeding in the main menu or
Select On Succeeding in the popup menu.
The selected image and all the following images are now
selected. O.3
If you have selected images of different series explicitly, all

the remaining images in the series starting with these images
are selected.
0.0

Selecting complete series The simplest way for you to select entire series (e.g. all the
explicitly O.3 images contained in them) is with Select Series. O.3
Click on the image of the series that you want to select hold-
ing the Ctrl key down or use the input focus.
Call up Edit > Select Series in the main menu or Select
Series in the popup menu.
The entire series is now selected explicitly. O.3
If you have selected images of different series, all the images

of these series are selected.
Deselecting images O.3 If the explicit selection does not contain the set of images that
you require, you can deselect images individually or alto-
gether. O.3
Hold the Ctrl key down and click on an explicitly selected

image again. It is now deselected.
Or O.3
Call up Edit > Deselect All in the main menu to deselect all
selected images again.
After that, the default input focus is set automatically, i.e. the top
left segment is the destination of the next action. O.3
0.0

Reorganizing film sheets O.3
Using the Filming task card, you can reorganize film jobs in
such a way that only those images are exposed or printed that
you really need for a diagnosis.
O.3
Changing the sequence You can change the sequence of the images of a series by first
of images on the Filming deleting the series from the film job, sorting the images in the
task card O.3 Patient Browser, and loading the series on the Filming task
card again.
O.3
Put the input focus on an image of the series that you want
to select.
Select Edit > Select Series from the main menu or Select
Series from the pop-up menu.
Delete the selected series from the film job.
Page O.324, Deleting images or film sheets
Change the sorting of the images in the Patient Browser.
Load the series onto the Filming task card again.
Chapter O.3
The images are displayed in a new sort order. O.3
0.0

Deleting images or film You can delete image material that is useless for reporting from
sheets O.3 a film job. O.3
Select one or more images or film sheets or use the input

focus.
Call up Edit > Delete in the main menu.

Or O.3
Delete the image(s)/film sheet(s) with this button or with the

Del key on the keyboard.
The image(s)/film sheet(s) will be removed from the film job
completely. Empty segments are removed, too.
O.3
Or O.3
Call up Film > Clear Document(s) in the main menu or

Clear Document(s) in the popup menu.
The images are deleted, the segments in the film job remain
empty. O.3
The popup menu is context-sensitive, i.e. the content of the

menu depends on whether you have selected an image, a
film sheet, a film job or nothing.
0.0

Filling empty segments O.3 If you have deleted several images in a film job using Clear
Document(s), the job will contain several film sheets with
empty segments. Before you send the film job to a camera/
printer, you should reorganize the film sheets to make better
use of the film material. O.3
Select the entire film job.

Page O.313, Selecting an entire film job
Select Film > Repack from the main menu to fill the gaps
again.
1 2 3 12 13 14 1 2 3 13 14 15
4 5 6 15 16 Repack 4 5 6 16
7 8 7 8 9
9 10 11 10 11 12
0.0

You can also use Repack during your processing to reorganize

a single film sheet. In that case, only select one film sheet. Only
the images of this one film sheet are reorganized. O.3
1 2 3 12 13 14 1 2 3 12 13 14
4 5 6 15 16 Repack 4 5 6 15 16
7 8 7 8 9
9 10 11 10 11
0.0

Copying images or film If you want a film job to include images or entire film sheets
sheets O.3 more than once, you need to copy these images or film sheets
first. O.3
Select the image(s)/film sheet(s) that you want to copy or

copy the image that is in the input focus.
Call up Edit > Copy in the main menu or Copy in the popup
menu.
Or O.3
Copy the film objects with the Windows short-cut Ctrl + C.
Now select the image in front of which you want to insert the
copies. O.3
Call up Edit > Paste in the main menu or Paste in the popup
menu.
Or O.3
Insert the images with the Windows short-cut Ctrl + V.

All the copied images are inserted in front of the selected seg-
ment. The image of this segment is moved back in the film job.O.3
In Filming Layout, you can define special layouts so that
copies are produced automatically when images are trans-
ferred to the virtual film sheet.
Page O.612, Series with copy on film sheet
0.0

Moving images or film You can move images within a film job or from one film job to
sheets O.3 another by first cutting them and then pasting them at a new
position. O.3
Select the image or the images that you want to move or

work in the input focus.
Call up Edit > Cut in the main menu or Cut in the popup
menu.
Or O.3
Cut the images with the Windows short-cut Ctrl + X.
0.0

O.3 Select the segment in front of which you want to move the
cut-out images.
Insert the images in front of this segment with Edit > Paste,
Paste in the popup menu or Ctrl + V.
O.3 If you only want to move images within a film sheet, you can
also do that very easily by drag & drop. Empty segments may
result which can be filled with Repack.
Appending a new film If the last film sheet of your job is already full and you want to
sheet O.3 copy or move images to the end of your film job, you must first
append a new film sheet. O.3
Call up Film > New Film Sheet at any point in the film job.
A new (empty) film sheet is appended to the end of the film job.
Then insert the copied or cut images into this sheet.
0.0

Appending images from If you want to add images from the Patient Browser to a film
the Patient Browser O.3 job, you can do that very easily by drag & drop. O.3
Open the Patient Browser (Patient > Browser).

The Patient Browser window will appear in front of the Filming
task card. O.3
Select the image, the images, or entire series or studies.

Drag these images into a segment of a film sheet.
The images are inserted into the film job in front of this seg-
ment. The film job is called a multiple job if it contains the
images of more than one patient now.
O.3
Adding images from the From the task cards Viewing and 3D, you can only transfer
task cards O.3 images to Filming with Patient > Copy to Film Sheet. O.3
If you transfer the images of the same patient to the virtual film
sheet, they are always appended to the same film job. If you
copy images of different patients onto the virtual film sheet, a
new film job is created for each patient, unless your system has
been configured to allow so-called multiple film jobs.
Page O.67, One patient or more than one patient per film jobO.3
0.0

Processing images O.3
In addition to the arrangement of film sheets, you can also

change the display parameters of the images on the Filming
task card to obtain an optimum output result.
Windowing O.3 On the Filming task card, images are loaded with the window
values with which they were last saved. If you have transferred
images from the Viewing task card, the images are displayed
with the window values last used in the Viewing card. O.3
In Filming, you can change these window values before expo-

sure. O.3
For color images, the window values are not displayed in the
segment. Windowing of color images is not possible.
You have the following options: O.3
0.0

Window 1 or Window 2 O.3
Select one or more images, or work in the input focus.

Click on Window 1 or Window 2 to assign the values of the
first or second window stored in the Examination task card
together with the images.
O.3
NOTE
This application is not available for MR-images. The buttons
are only active when working with double windows is
possible (e.g. CT-images). O.3
Auto-Windowing O.3 With the Auto-Window option, you automatically assign opti-
mized window values to the images, either on loading or after
loading to individual images. O.3
Click on the Auto-Windowing button.

Or O.3
Call up Image > Auto-Windowing.

Page G.49, Automatic windowing
Or O.3
Double-click with the center mouse key.
0.0

Windowing with the For fine adjustment of the windowing values, you can also use
keyboard O.3 the keys on the symbol keypad of the keyboard. O.3
Setting the contrast

Press the Width+ (Num -) or Width- (Num *) key to increase
or reduce the contrast.
Setting the brightness

Press the Center+ (Num /) or Center- (Num Num) key to
increase or reduce the brightness.
Windowing with the

mouse O.3
Place the mouse cursor in the image and move the mouse
holding the center mouse button pressed.
Brightness -
y (center +)
Contrast + Contrast -
(width -) x (width +)
Brightness+
(center -)
For more information about windowing images, see

Page G.42, Windowing images O.3
0.0

Enlarging and reducing You can enlarge the image to view an area which is of special
images O.3 interest to you (zooming). If the enlarged image then no longer
fits in the segment, you can pan or move it until the relevant
area is in the center of the segment again. O.3
You can use the following functions to zoom and pan images.
O.3
Image > Zoom in/out O.3 Select one or more images.

Call up Image > Zoom in/out in the menu to open the Zoom
Image dialog box. Enter a zoom factor for the selected
images.
Zooming/panning with
the mouse O.3
Click on the Zoom/ Pan button or select

Image > Zoom & Pan On in the menu.
The function of the left mouse button is now switched from
Select to Zoom & Pan On. O.3
Place the mouse cursor on an image (it need not be selected

first).
Now click near the edge of the image and hold the left mouse
button down while moving the mouse curser up to enlarge
the image.
0.0

Or O.3
Click on the center of the image and pan the image holding
the left mouse button down.
Deselect Image > Zoom & Pan On or click on the button
again to make the left mouse button available for selecting
film objects again.
For more information about zooming/panning images, see
Page G.415, Zooming and panning images O.3
O.3
Restoring the zoom You can return to the zoom factor with which the images were
factor O.3 last stored in the database at any time.
O.3
Call up Image > Home Zoom/Pan in the main menu.

Or O.3
O.3 Click on the button.
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER Changing Film Settings for
O.4 a Film Job O.4
A standard film layout was defined during configuration of your

system. This layout contains all the settings required for film-
ing. O.4
All the necessary settings have therefore already been made

for each new film job. If you are happy with these settings, you
can start filming images without any further intervention. O.4
If these presettings are not suitable, you can change the follow-
ing settings on the Filming task card or in the film preview: O.4
Select another camera or printer
Change the number of copies
Change the arrangement of the film sheets
Change the image, text and graphic display
All these settings then only apply to the current film job. For the
next film job, the system returns to the standard layout. O.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.41

Changing Film Settings for a Film Job Filming
Selecting a camera or printer O.4
If you do not want to expose or print your current film job with
the default camera, then select another camera/printer for this
job.
O.4
Click the Camera subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
0.0

Filming Changing Film Settings for a Film Job
Or O.4
Select Film > Change Camera... to call up the Change

Camera and Film Size dialog box.
Select a camera or printer from the list. This selection list

contains all the cameras and printers connected to your sys-
tem.
The newly selected camera or printer is used as the default
camera that is always used when no other device is selected.
In the Status display, you can see whether the selected cam-
era/printer is switched on and is therefore available. O.4
Select the film format under Film Size.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.43

Layout of the film sheet O.4
With the layout of the film sheet, you can define the size of each
image. O.4
Switch, for example, to a larger format with fewer images per

film sheet, if you want to see diagnostic details on the exposed/
printed images.
O.4
Selecting images and Set the film sheet layout for selected images of a film job. O.4
film sheets
Select an entire film job to change the layout for all sheets of
O.4
this job.
Or O.4
Select an individual film sheet to change the layout of this

sheet only.
Or O.4
Select individual images or you work in the input focus to dis-

play only these images in a larger or smaller format on the
same film sheet.
0.0

Changing the layout O.4 Click the Layout subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
Click on the button for a film layout to display the selected

images in this format.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.45

Or O.4
Call up Film > Properties... in the main menu or Proper-

ties... in the popup menu.
The Film Properties dialog box is opened. O.4
Select a division in the Division selection list.

If the film sheet division is different for the selected images or
film sheets, the Division selection list is empty.
0.0

Example O.4 The selected images or film sheets are displayed in the new for-
mat. The remaining images of the film job are still displayed in
the old layout. O.4
1 2 3 10 11 12 19 20 21
4 5 6 13 14 15 22
7 8 9 16 17 18
1 2 3 13 14 16
5 9 17
4 6 7 18 19 20
11 15
8 10 12 21 22
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.47

Image, text and graphic display O.4
The layout of the film sheet defines the number and size of the
segments on a film sheet. With the Film Preview window and
the Filming task card, you can change the aspect ratio of indi-
vidual images in your segments and define whether and how
text and graphics are to be printed or exposed on film, too.
O.4
Click the Images subtask card on the Filming task card into
the foreground.
Or O.4
Call up the Film Properties dialog box (Filming > Proper-

ties...).
You can see the settings of the currently selected images dis-
played. The dots in the radio buttons are displayed gray if the
settings of the images are different.
0.0

Fit to segment O.4 Select the image(s) whose aspect ratio you want to change.
Or O.4
Select the entire film job if you want to change the aspect
ratio of all images.
Click on the Fit to segment button on the Images subtask

card.
Or O.4
Select the option Fit to segment in the Film Properties dia-

log box.
The images are displayed as large as possible in the segment
without any parts of the image being cut off.
O.4
Clip document O.4 Select an image, several images or the entire film job.
Click on the Clip document button on the Images subtask
card.
Or O.4
Select the Clip document option in the Film Properties dia-

log box.
Rectangular images can be increased so that the shorter side

of the image fills the segment. Parts of the longer side of the
image are cut off (upper and lower edge of the image or the
sides of the image). O.4
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.49

Original image O.4 Select an image, several images, or the entire film job.
Click on the Original image button on the Images subtask

card.
Or O.4
Select the Original Image option in the Film Properties dia-

log box.
The images are displayed in the segment in their original size,

the dimensions on the screen and on the printout are the origi-
nal ones. O.4
The tolerance depends on the camera type. Use the scale bar
as a reference.
If it is not possible to display images in the Original Image
aspect ratio (1:1 scale), a message is displayed and the Fit to
segment option is selected instead. O.4
0.0

Fit to segment Clip Document Original image
0.0

Display image text O.4 In the film settings, you can select whether text information
about the images is also to be printed/exposed on film or not.O.4
Settings about filming text always apply to the entire film job
and not only to selected images.
Click on the All text button on the Images subtask card to

have all text information about the images displayed in the
segments and filmed or printed together with the images
later on.
Or O.4
Select the All text option in the Film Properties dialog box.
Click on the No text button on the Images subtask card to

hide all text information in the segments.
Or O.4
Select the No text option in the Film Properties dialog box.
0.0

Click on the Customized text button on the Images subtask

card to have only part of the text information displayed and
exposed on film or printed.
If you select Customized text with the button on the Images

subtask card, the system accesses the settings you have
made during configuration.
Or O.4
Select the Customized text option in the Film Properties

dialog box.
In the Film Properties dialog box, you can now select which
text information is to be displayed if the Customized text option
is selected. O.4
Click on the check box with the mouse to have each item of
information either displayed or hidden.
All text Customized text No text
0.0

Displaying/hiding In the same way as text information, you can have graphics
graphics and annotations O.4 (e.g. ROIs) and annotations displayed or hidden.
O.4
Click the Show Graphics button on the Images subtask

card to display graphics (e.g. ROIs) and annotations.
Or O.4
Select the Show option in the Film Properties dialog box.
Click the Hide Graphics button on the Images subtask card

to hide graphics (e.g. ROIs) and annotations.
Or O.4
Select the Hide option in the Film Properties dialog box.
Show Graphics Hide Graphics
0.0

Reference image display O.4
You can display a small reference image (Mother) associated

with the image (Child) in the film sheet segment. That will make
orientation and overview of the scanned region easier. O.4
You may adjust display of the reference image in the Film prop-
erties dialog box or in the configuration of a film sheet.
Page O.611, Reference image
O.4
Open the Film properties dialog box (Filming > Proper-

ties...).
Activate the Reference image option.
Select the position (Top right or Bottom right) of the refer-
ence image.
0.0

A reference image on which slice positioning of the images to

be filmed was performed is found in the database and displayed
in all segments of the current film sheet. The image text is
shifted left. O.4
0.0

Display of the cut line O.4 To have the position of the image (Child) displayed in the refer-
ence image (Mother), the mother and child must fulfill the same
preconditions as the reference images.
Page F.34, Requirements O.4
Similar rules apply to display of the cut line as to graphic slice

positioning: O.4
A perpendicular cut is displayed as a continuous line.

An oblique cut is displayed as a dashed line.
If the angle between the mother and child is smaller than 30,
no cut line is displayed.
Loading a different image You can use any other image from the same examination as the
as the reference O.4 mother instead of the reference image being displayed, as long
as it was acquired at the same table position. O.4
Deactivate the Reference image option and select the posi-

tion of the reference image.
Call up the Patient Browser.
Drag and drop a suitable image to the film sheet.
If further images from the series to which the child belongs

are loaded on the film sheet, the new reference image is dis-
played there automatically.
0.0

Windowing a reference Sometimes the small reference image is displayed with unfavor-
image subsequently O.4 able window values on the film sheet. O.4
You cannot load the small reference image directly onto the film
sheet. Proceed as follows instead: O.4
Load the reference image onto the Viewing task card.

Window the reference image and close the patient.
The new window values will now be used for the reference
images from now on. O.4
Drag and drop the changed reference image from the

Patient browser to the film sheet.
0.0

CHAPTER
O.5 Checking Film Jobs O.5
If you transfer film jobs from the virtual film sheet to a camera
or printer, a queue of jobs waiting to be executed will be formed
for each camera and printer. O.5
You can obtain information about which and how many film jobs
are currently being executed, are waiting to be executed or have
been completed at any time. You can stop the entire queue, or
repeat or delete individual film jobs and thus intervene in the
execution of the queue.
O.5
In the Film Task Status dialog box, you can obtain information
about film jobs that are waiting to be executed in the queues for
each camera and printer. O.5
On the status bar below the control area, you can see whether
your system is currently exposing images on film in the back-
ground and whether exposure is progressing without error. O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.51

Checking Film Jobs Filming
Display on the status bar O.5
During film exposure, icons are displayed on the status bar

which tell you whether the process is progressing without error
or whether errors have occurred during exposure. O.5
The status of the printer is not shown on the status bar.

You can follow the course of filming without interrupting your
work and intervene immediately in the event of an error.
O.5
Camera in operation O.5
As long as the camera is working, i.e. exposing film sheets, the

camera icon is displayed on the status bar.
O.5
Film exposure interrupted O.5

If errors occur during film exposure, the camera icon on the sta-
tus bar is crossed out. O.5
Double-click on this camera icon to open the Film Task Sta-

tus dialog box.
There you can see the cause of the fault. O.5
Warning message O.5
O.5 This symbol indicates that the camera has output a warning
message. O.5
0.0

Filming Checking Film Jobs
Viewing and manipulating film jobs O.5
The display on the status bar shows concise information about

the progress of film exposure. O.5
For print jobs, no information is displayed in the status bar.

You can obtain detailed information in the Film Task Status
dialog box. There you can stop the entire queue, trigger it again
and repeat or delete individual film jobs.
O.5
Calling up the Film Task Status O.5
Regardless of whether your system is currently printing/expos-

ing films or not, you can call up the Film Task Status window
via the Patient main menu or a button at any time and from any
task card. There, you can obtain information about the film jobs
in the queues. O.5
Once film exposure in the background has started, you can also
display the dialog box by clicking on the icons in the status bar.
That is useful if transmission errors occur. You can then imme-
diately see which film job and which camera are affected and
take appropriate action. O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.53

Click on the Film Task Status button on the Filming task

card, in the Film Preview window, or in the Patient Browser.
Or O.5
Call up Patient > Film Task Status... menu item in any task
card, or in the Patient Browser.
Or O.5
Double-click on the camera icon on the status bar.

The Film Task Status dialog box is displayed. O.5
0.0

Camera O.5 In the upper part of the dialog box, all the cameras and printers
are displayed that are connected to your system.
O.5
O.5 The camera whose queue is being displayed is highlighted in a

different color.
O.5
O.5 Click on one of the other camera icons if you want to view the
queue for another camera.
Printer O.5
Click on one of the printer icons if you want to view the queue
for the respective printer.
The Windows XP print job control box is displayed. Here you
can manipulate the print jobs for the selected printer by using
the menu entries of the Windows XP operating system. O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.55

O.5 Close the Windows XP print job control box to return to the
Film Task Status dialog box.
As long as the film job is queued in the Windows XP printer
queue the patients name is visible. O.5
To ensure the required data protection, the user has to O.5
delete the print job, or

wait until the job is executed and safely store the printouts.
0.0

Information in the Film Task Status box O.5
The Film Task Status dialog box contains a job list with the fol-
lowing information:
O.5
Film Job Name O.5 Name of the film job (patient name, if a film job contains the im-
ages of only one patient, or multiple, if the job contains images
of more than one patient).
O.5
Status O.5 Processing status of the film job: O.5
Printed
The job is completed, all images have been sent to the cam-
era.
Printing
The job is currently being sent to the camera.
Queued
The job is in the queue and will be sent to the camera as
soon as it is free.
Stopped
The job has been stopped.
Aborted
The job was aborted and is treated as completed. Is has the
same work status as Printed.
No. of Sheets O.5 Number of film sheets that the film job contains O.5
The sheet number and the total number of film sheets the film
job contains are displayed on the printout.
No. of Copies O.5 Number of copies O.5
Urgent O.5 A job is classified as urgent. O.5
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.57

If the list contains more film jobs than can be displayed in the
content window, you can page through the queue of film jobs
using the scroll bar. When you open the window, the first job
with Active status (or Queued) is displayed in the list. O.5
Scroll the display up to view jobs already exposed on film

(Printed).
Manipulating film jobs O.5
In the Film Task Status dialog box, you can select film jobs and
influence them by clicking buttons. O.5
The status of a job determines how you can influence its execu-
tion and therefore what buttons are active. O.5
Only film jobs sent to a camera can be modified in the Film

Task Status dialog box.
0.0

Stopping jobs O.5 You can stop jobs with the status Queued or Printed at any
time, for example to insert a new film. O.5
Click on the Stop button.

All film jobs of this queue are stopped (status Stopped). In the
job which is being exposed, a sheet which has been started is
first completed. All the following film sheets are then no longer
processed.
O.5
Resuming jobs O.5 Once your camera is ready again, you can resume execution of
the queue. O.5
Click on the Continue button.

All the jobs in the queue return to their original status. Film
exposure is resumed. The job that was being exposed when
you clicked Stop is resumed at the point at which you stopped
the camera.
O.5
Repeating jobs O.5 You can repeat a film job that has already been exposed and is
therefore completed as long as it is still in the queue. O.5
Select the film job already exposed on film (status Printed).

O.5 Click on the Repeat button.
The job is assigned the Queued status and is copied to the
end of the queue. O.5
If the images of the job have already been deleted from the
database, an error message is displayed.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.59

Deleting jobs O.5 You can delete film jobs that are listed in a queue regardless of
their status. O.5
Select the job(s) that you want to delete (multiple selection

using the Ctrl or Shift key).
Or O.5
Click on Select All if you want to delete all the jobs in the
queue.
Click on the Delete button to delete the selected job(s).

If you delete a job that is being exposed, the sheet that has
been started will be completed. All the following sheets will
not be exposed on film.
Changing the priority of Set the film jobs that you want to process first as urgent. O.5
film jobs O.5
O.5 Select one or more film jobs with the Queued status and
click on Urgent.
This job moves to the first position amongst the jobs with the
Queued status. O.5
If more than one job is classified as urgent, they are executed

in the order in which they are listed. O.5
0.0

Selecting another You can select a new camera for one or more film jobs. O.5
camera
Redirecting film jobs from a camera to a printer is not possi-
O.5
ble.
Select one or more film jobs.
Click on the Change Camera button to open the Change
Camera dialog box.
Select a new camera from the selection list.

You cannot redirect film jobs that are being processed (Print-
ing status) to another camera.
0.0

Redirecting jobs from an If one of your cameras is defective or switched off this is indi-
inaccessible camera O.5 cated by a crossed-out camera icon in the header bar of the
Film Task Status dialog box. O.5
You can redirect the queue or even individual film jobs for this
camera to another camera.
O.5
O.5 Click on the camera icon.

The queue of the inaccessible camera is displayed.
O.5
Click on the Change Camera button to open the Change

Camera dialog box.
Select a substitute camera from the selection list.
Close the Change Camera box.
The queue of the camera is redirected to the substitute camera.
The redirected queue is marked with the note redirect in the
header bar of the dialog box.
O.5
All film jobs whose film size is not supported by the destination
camera remain in the queue for the original camera. These jobs
are assigned the status queued, but do not block the following
film jobs so that these can be redirected to another camera.
You can send these film jobs again when the fault has been
remedied or you can redirect them to a camera that supports
the required film sizes. O.5
0.0

As soon as the defective camera has been repaired again, you

can cancel the camera redirection. O.5
Click on the camera icon with the note redirect to display

the redirected queue.
Click on Change Camera to call up the Change Camera

dialog box again.
O.5 Click on the Default button in the Change Camera box.

The queue is now assigned to the original camera again. The
original device designation is again displayed in the header bar
of the Film Task Status dialog box.
O.5
Reactivating a queue Sometimes it is necessary to shut down the system before all
after system restart O.5 the film jobs in a queue have been executed. O.5
This does not delete the queue. After rebooting the system, the
film jobs are displayed in their old status again. O.5
They are then started automatically. O.5
0.0

0.0

CHAPTER
O.6 Configuring Filming O.6
You can adapt the filming and printing of images to your require-
ments in a flexible and individual way. O.6
The NUMARIS/4 Configuration Panel contains a configura-

tion window for setting up the film function. O.6
O.6 In the Filming Layout configuration window, you can adapt the
standard layout and create new layouts that are tailored to indi-
vidual studies.
O.6
In the Filming Study Layout configuration window, you can

assign specific layouts to individual studies.
O.6
Call up the NUMARIS/4 Configuration Panel

Call up the configuration window in which you want to make
settings.
In the Basics part of this manual, you can read how to call
up and exit configuration windows, save changes or reset the
settings back to the as-delivered state.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.61

Configuring Filming Filming
Configuring film layouts O.6
You can change and create film layouts using the Film Task
and the Series tab cards in the Filming Layout window. O.6
0.0

Filming Configuring Filming
Selecting a layout to change O.6
In the Filming Layout configuration window, you can define the

study-specific layouts. O.6
In the Layout name selection list, you can specify which layout
you want to change.
O.6
Changing the standard The Layout General Default is used for filming/printing if no
layout O.6 study-specific layout is assigned to the images and you have
not changed the film layout in the virtual film sheet manually. O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.63

Defining a study-specific During installation of your system, some study-specific layouts

layout O.6 are also installed and assigned to individual studies or series.O.6
This has the advantage that a suitable film layout is always used
for these images. O.6
You can adapt the default settings to your requirements by cre-

ating a new study-specific layout and assigning it to a study or
changing an existing layout.
O.6
Select the layout that you want to change.

Or O.6
Enter a new layout to create a new layout.

O.6
NOTE
Your system can manage up to 100 layouts. If you attempt
to create a 101st layout, an error message is displayed.
You must then delete an existing layout. O.6
0.0

The standard layout as When creating a new layout, you can base it on the settings of
the initial setting O.6 the standard layout in the Film Task or Series tab cards and
change it to meet your requirements. This is advisable, for
example, if the new layout differs only slightly from the standard
layout in one or more tab cards. O.6
O.6 Click on the General Default button on the Film Task or

Series tab card.
The standard settings are entered in gray in the radio buttons

and checkboxes of the tab cards in question. Settings that you
have changed are shown black so that you can distinguish them
from the default settings. O.6
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.65

Configuring film job settings O.6
On the Film Task tab card, you can define all the settings that
determine the structure and execution of a film job. O.6
Click the Film Task tab card into the foreground, if neces-
sary.
0.0

One patient or more than

one patient per film job O.6
Click the New film job by patient option if you want a film
job only to contain the images of a patient.
Or O.6
Deselect the New film job by patient option to permit mul-

tiple film jobs.
Page O.15, Multiple film job
New film sheet O.6
O.6 Click on the New film sheet by option if you want to permit
empty rows in film sheets.
Here you define whether you want to create a new film sheet
for each study or each series.
Or O.6
Deselect the New film sheet by option to avoid empty lines

in the film sheets.
New line in the film

sheet O.6
O.6 Click on the New row of images by option if you want to per-
mit empty fields in the film sheet.
Here you define whether a new line is to be started in the film
sheet for each patient, each study, or each series.
Or O.6
Deselect the New row of images by option to avoid empty

fields on the film sheet.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.67

Filming a partial O.6
selection O.6
Use the spin buttons to set whether every nth image or all
images (n=1) of a film job are to be copied in the virtual film
sheet and therefore exposed/printed.
Number of copies O.6
Define the number of copies.
Film size O.6
O.6 Select a film size from the Film size selection list.
The entries offered depend on the cameras and printers.
Separator lines between

segments O.6
Set the Segment lines option to separate the images with

lines on the film sheets.
Page number O.6
Select Page number on print out if you want the page num-
ber to be added to the printout.
0.0

Configuring film sheets O.6
On the Series tab card, you define with what settings a film
sheet is exposed or printed. O.6
You can only print/expose film sheets in portrait format.

Click the Series tab card into the foreground.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T O.69

Film sheet division O.6
O.6 Define in the Layout divisions selection list how many col-
umns and rows a film sheet has.
The division is shown in a diagram in the display window.
O.6
Portrait/landscape O.6
In Orientation, select portrait or landscape for exposing on

film / printing on paper.
0.0

Filling the film sheet O.6
O.6 Define whether the images are to be arranged from left to

right (horizontally) or from top to bottom (vertically) on the
film sheet.
Reference image O.6
O.6 Activate the Reference image option to display a reference

image associated with the image Top right or Bottom right.
A reference image on which slice positioning of the images to

be filmed was performed is found in the database and displayed
in all segments of the current film sheet. The image text is
shifted left.
Page O.415, Reference image display O.6
Depending on the modularity of the images, a preset reference

image is displayed. If no reference image is displayed or you
want to select another reference image, you can do so by drag
& drop. O.6
0.0

Series with copy on film You can have a copy generated automatically when you transfer
sheet O.6 a series to the virtual film sheet and then process the copy
before filming or printing. O.6
Click on the Copy series option if you want to make copies

of the series.
Set how the original images and their copies are to be
arranged on the film sheet (Interleaved or Appended).
Or O.6
Deselect the Copy series option to deactivate automatic

copying of the images.
A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 A2 A3 A4 A1 S1 A2 S2
A5 A6 A7 A8 A5 A6 A7 A8 A3 S3 A4 S4
S1 S2 S3 S4 A5 S5 A6 S6
S5 S6 S7 S8 A7 S7 A8 S8
Series is loaded without copy Copied series is appended to Copied series is inserted
the end (Appended) (Interleaved)
Series A: original series

Series S: copied series O.6
If you have created the film job by drag & drop, no copies of
the series are created.
0.0

Aspect Ratio O.6
O.6 Define the size with which you want the images to be dis-
played in the segments:
Keep visible part: The image is displayed in the segment
with maximum size, without being cropped. This is the
default.
Page O.49, Fit to segment
Original Image: The image is displayed in its original size.
Depending on the original size, the image might be cropped
or displayed too small in the segment.
Page O.410, Original image
Clip document: The image is enlarged so that it fills the
entire segment. The overlapping edges are cropped accord-
ingly.
Page O.49, Clip document
0.0

Associating layouts with a study or

series O.6
In the Filming Study Layout window, you can assign a specific

layout to a study. This can either be a layout you have created
yourself or one that has been created by the Siemens Service
during configuration of your system. O.6
0.0

Assigning film layouts O.6
You can only assign one specific layout to each study or series.
This layout is then automatically used for filming the images. O.6
You can assign a layout by selecting a study or series stored on
your system and the layout required and then linking the two. O.6
If a layout other than the standard layout is already assigned
to a study or series, you must first cancel this link before you
can assign a new study-specific layout.
Page O.618, Canceling a layout assignment
In the Film layouts selection list, you will find a list of the avail-
able layouts.
O.6
Selecting a film layout O.6 O.6
O.6 Select the required film layout.
0.0

Selecting a study/series O.6 In the Available Studies area, you can see a list of the studies
with their series. O.6
O.6 Click on the + - symbol in front of a study to display the

series associated with it.
You can only select entire studies if they are not subdivided
into series. In such cases, the + - or - - symbol in front of
the entry is missing.
Click a series or study to select it.
Linking the layout O.6
O.6 Click on the Down arrow button to assign the layout to the
selected study or series.
0.0

Displaying the layout As soon as you have assigned a study-specific layout, the cor-
assignment O.6 responding study or series is entered in the Studies/Series
linked to selected layout list. O.6
Here you can see for what studies or series the displayed layout
is set. O.6
In the Currently linked layout column in the Available Stud-

ies area, you can see which layout is linked with a certain
study. O.6
0.0

Canceling a layout assignment O.6
If you want to assign a different study-specific film layout to an

study or series, you must first cancel the old layout assignment.O.6
Select the study or series in question in the Studies/Series
linked to selected layout list.
O.6 Click on the Up arrow button.
The standard layout is now assigned to the study or series

again and you can assign a new study-specific layout.
O.6
Deleting a layout O.6
Your system can store and manage up to 100 layouts. There-

fore you should regularly delete those film layouts that you no
longer require to make space for new study-specific layouts that
you create in the Filming Layout window.
O.6
Select a layout that you no longer require from the Film lay-
outs selection list.
O.6 Click on the Delete Layout button.
The entry will be deleted from the list. O.6
You cannot delete the Layout General Default.
0.0

APPENDIX
P References P.0
P.1 Measurement Parameters

Slice parameters ............................................................ P.12
Slice group/slab group
Routine, Geometry Common ................................ P.13
Slices/slabs
Dist. factor
Slice thickness
Routine, Geometry Common,
Resolution Common .................................................. P.16
Slices per slab
Orientation
Position
Routine, Geometry Common .............................. P.111
Phase enc. dir.
Phase oversampling
Slice oversampling
Saturation ..................................................................... P.117
Saturation mode
Geometry Saturation .......................................... P.117
Standard saturation regions
Parallel and tracking saturation regions
Navigator objects ......................................................... P.121
Navigator
Geometry Navigator ........................................... P.121
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P1
References syngo MR
Position
Geometry Navigator ............................................ P.122
Orientation
Rotation
FoV phase
FoV read
Thickness
Resp. control
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.124
Scout mode
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Scout duration
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Scout TR
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.126
Accept window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.127
Position accept window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Accept. position
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.128
Search window
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.129
0.0
P2 Operator Manual
syngo MR References
Tracking factor
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.130
Physio PACE ....................................................... P.130
Excitation sequence of slices ....................................... P.131
Multi-slice mode
Geometry Common, Sequence Part 1 ............... P.131
Series
Geometry Common ............................................ P.133
Concatenations
Physio Signal1, Physio PACE .................................. P.134
Image numbering
System Miscellaneous ........................................ P.135
Image contrast and resolution ...................................... P.137
Repetition time (TR)
Routine, Contrast, Geometry Common,
Physio Signal1 ......................................................... P.137
Echo time (TE)
Routine, Contrast ................................................ P.138
Inversion time (TI)
Contrast, Physio Cardiac .................................... P.139
Delay time (TD)
Contrast .............................................................. P.139
Averages
Routine, Contrast ................................................ P.140
Flip angle
Contrast, ToF ...................................................... P.140
Magn. preparation
Contrast, Physio Cardiac .................................... P.141
Reconstruction
Contrast .............................................................. P.142
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P3
References syngo MR
Fat suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation,
Physio Cardiac ......................................................... P.143
Fat sat. mode
Contrast, Geometry Saturation ........................... P.144
Water suppression
Restore Magn.
Magnetization transfer (MTC)
Contrast, Angio Common .................................... P.146
FoV read, FoV phase
Resolution Common................................................. P.147
Base resolution
Resolution Common ............................................ P.150
Phase resolution
Interpolation
Slice resolution
Routine, Resolution Common ............................. P.157
PAT mode
Resolution iPAT ................................................... P.158
Accel. Factor PE
Max. recomm. Factor PE
Ref. lines PE
0.0
P4 Operator Manual
syngo MR References
Accel. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.162
Max. recomm. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.163
Ref. lines 3D
Resolution PAT .................................................... P.164
Matrix coil mode
Filter
Routine, Resolution Common ................................. P.168
Parameters for dynamic scanning ............................... P.177
Contrast, BOLD ................................................. P.177
Measurements
Contrast, BOLD, Perf, Inline Breast,
Inline Common ........................................................ P.177
Pause after meas.
Contrast, BOLD, Inline Breast ............................. P.178
Delay in TR
Contrast, BOLD .................................................. P.179
Multiple series
Contrast, BOLD, Perf. ......................................... P.180
Position of the scan region ........................................... P.181
Combining array images
Scan at current table position
Scan Region Position
Scan region Memory
Coils and coil elements
Routine, System Coils ............................................. P.185
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P5
References syngo MR
Sequence-specific parameters ..................................... P.188

Introduction
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.188
Dimension
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.189
Elliptical scanning
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.189
Phase stabilization
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.190
Compensate T2 decay
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.190
Averaging mode
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.191
Sorting
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.191
Asymmetric echo
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.192
Contrasts
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.192
Bandwidth
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.193
Allowed delay
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.193
Flow compensation
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.194
Echo spacing
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.195
Manual echo spacing
Sequence Part 1 ................................................. P.195
Turbo factor
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.196
EPI factor
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.196
0.0
P6 Operator Manual
syngo MR References
Segments
Sequence Part 2, Physio Signal1 ....................... P.196
Combined echoes
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.197
RF Pulse Type
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.197
Gradient mode
Sequence Part 2 ................................................. P.198
Excitation
Sequence Part 2 ............................................... P.1100
RF spoiling
Sequence Part 2 ............................................... P.1100
Application-specific parameters ................................. P.1101
Inflow
Angio Common ................................................. P.1102
Flow direction
Angio Common ................................................. P.1102
Angio Common ................................................. P.1103
Time to Center
Angio Common ................................................. P.1103
Flow mode
Angio Common ................................................. P.1104
Flow velocity
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Velocity enc.
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Direction
Angio Common ................................................. P.1105
Rephased images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Magnitude images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P7
References syngo MR
Magnitude sum
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Phase images
Angio Common ................................................. P.1106
Diffusion mode
Diff ..................................................................... P.1107
Diff. weightings
Diff ..................................................................... P.1108
b-value
Diff ..................................................................... P.1109
Diffusion-weighted images
Diff ..................................................................... P.1109
Trace-weighted images
Diff ..................................................................... P.1110
Average ADC maps
Diff ..................................................................... P.1110
Individual ADC maps
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Noise level
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Diffusion moment
Diff ..................................................................... P.1111
Diff. directions ........................................................ P.1112
Original images
Perf .................................................................... P.1113
Time-to-Peak-Map (TTP)
Perf, Inline Breast .............................................. P.1113
Perf .................................................................... P.1114
Perf .................................................................... P.1114
Wash - In
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1114
0.0
P8 Operator Manual
syngo MR References
Color table
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
First measurement
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Last measurement
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Highest value
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1115
Wash - Out
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1116
PEI
Inline Breast ...................................................... P.1116
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1116
Motion correction
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1117
Interpolation
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1118
Spatial filter
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1119
Filter setting
Perf, BOLD ........................................................ P.1119
t-Test
BOLD ................................................................ P.1120
Dynamic t-cards
BOLD ................................................................ P.1120
Threshold
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Window
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Paradigm size
BOLD ................................................................ P.1121
Paradigm table
BOLD ................................................................ P.1122
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P9
References syngo MR
Dark blood
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1123
Tagging
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1123
Distance
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1124
Angle
Physio Cardiac .................................................. P.1124
Parameters for image evaluation ............................... P.1125
Subtract
Inline Common, Angio Inline ............................. P.1125
Saving images
Autoscaling
Scaling factor
Offset
Subtrahend
Std-Dev-Sag
Std-Dev-Cor
Std-Dev-Tra
Std-Dev-Time
MIP-Sag
MIP-Cor
0.0
P10 Operator Manual

syngo MR References
MIP-Tra
MIP-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline, Inline Breast ....... P.1132
Parameters for physiologically triggered scanning .... P.1134
1st Signal/Mode
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1134
Average cycle
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1136
Acquisition window
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1136
Trigger pulse
Physio Signal 1, Physio PACE .......................... P.1137
Trigger delay
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1137
Phases
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1138
Calculated phases
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1138
Threshold
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1139
Respiratory phase
Physio Signal 1 ................................................. P.1139
Physio PACE ..................................................... P.1140
Cardiac trigger / respiratory cycle
Physio PACE ..................................................... P.1140
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P11

References syngo MR
P.2 Text Annotations in Medical Images

Content of the image text components ...................... P.22
List of Coil Abbreviations in the Image Text ................... P.27
MAGNETOM Symphony a Tim System ..................... P.28
MAGNETOM Trio a Tim System ................................ P.29
List of image types ................................................... P.210
Inline reconstruction ................................................. P.211
Post-processing ....................................................... P.214
0.0
P12 Operator Manual

APPENDIX Measurement
P.1 Parameters P.1
This section provides a detailed description of the measure-

ment parameters that allow value modifications within various
scan protocols in syngo MR. P.1
These measurement parameters are combined into compre-

hensive groups of topics. P.1
Each parameter description includes a reference to the param-

eter cards of the exam task card where the parameter may be
entered or modified. P.1
The Exam part of this user manual provides instructions on how

to work with the parameter cards including the input tools avail-
able.
Page F.51, Adjusting Measurement Parameters P.1
The Managing and adjusting the system part of this user

manual contains a detailed description of the parameters used
for system adjustment.
Page C.21, Adjusting the System P.1
The Spectroscopy Manual provides information regarding mea-

surement parameters relevant only for spectroscopy scans. P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.11

Measurement Parameters References
Slice parameters P.1
By entering slice parameters, you control the position, orienta-

tion, and extent of the slice to be measured. P.1
The parameters available for editing in the parameter cards

vary depending on whether the current scan protocol is used for
a 2D or 3D scan. Measurement parameters with the same
name may have different characteristics for 2D and 3D scans.
P.1
During routine scan operation, the slices and slabs to be

measured are normally planned graphically in the reference
images using the toolbar for graphic slice positioning and the
mouse. The parameter cards are rarely used for this purpose.
Page F.41, Positioning Slices
0.0
P.12 Operator Manual

References Measurement Parameters
Slice group/slab group

Routine, Geometry Common P.1
The slices or slabs to be scanned within a protocol are com-

bined into groups. P.1
The number of the slice group currently displayed is indicated.

All slice parameters currently listed on the Routine or Geome-
try card refer to this slice or slab group.
P.1
Displaying parameters of
another group P.1
The selection list of the Slice group or Slab group field shows
how many slice or slab groups are planned in the current scan
protocol. P.1
This list allows you to select another group and check and
change its parameters.
P.1
Creating new groups P.1
The Plus button next to the Slice or Slab group selection list
lets you create a new group. P.1
The new slice/slab group is added to the selected reference

image. To avoid overlapping, it is slightly offset compared to the
existing group to the far side.
P.1
Deleting a group P.1
You can use the Minus button to delete the current group. P.1
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.13

Slices/slabs
P.1 The number of slices or slabs defines the extent of the exami-
nation region in the slice selection direction. P.1
The larger the number of slices to be scanned, the longer the

scanning time for sequential multislice scans. P.1
The number of slices or slabs possible with interleaved multiple

slice measurements depends on the repetition time TR. There-
fore, the number of slices or slabs for a constant repetition time
can be increased only within the range limits. If the limit is
exceeded, the TR is automatically adjusted by the system. The
Confirm Parameter Changes message box notifies you of
parameter adjustments.
Page F.572 P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the Slices or
Slabs field, a tool tip displays the number of slices or slabs
planned in the scan protocol. P.1
0.0

Dist. factor
P.1 The gap between the slices of a slice group or the slabs of a
slab group is indicated as a percentage of the slice thickness or
slab thickness. P.1
At 100%, the gap between the slices/slabs is exactly one slice/

slab thickness. Negative values cause the slices/slabs to over-
lap. P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the spin box,
a tool tip displays the gap between the slices/slabs in millime-
ters.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.15

Slice thickness
Routine, Geometry Common, Resolution Common P.1
P.1 Together with the number of slices, the slice thickness deter-
mines the extent of the scan region in the slice-selection direc-
tion.
P.1
2D scans P.1 In the case of 2D scans, the slice thickness corresponds to the
thickness of a slice within a slice group. P.1
Changing the slice thickness changes the distance between the

slices as well because the distance is calculated from the dis-
tance factor entered as a percentage of the slice thickness.
P.1
3D scans P.1 In case of 3D scans, the slice thickness corresponds to the

effective thickness of the individual slices of the slabs (parti-
tions). P.1
Increasing the slice thickness in 3D scans increases the slab

thickness as well because the slab thickness is calculated from
the number of slices and the slice thickness. P.1
Increasing the slice thickness improves the signal-to-noise

ratio, but degrades the spatial resolution in the slice selection
direction.
0.0

Slices per slab

The Slices per slab parameter shows the number of slices per
slab. The slab thickness is adjusted after each change because
the thickness is calculated from the number of slices and the
slice thickness. In addition, absolute slice oversampling
changes since it is defined as a percentage of the slab thick-
ness. P.1
If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the spin box,
a tool tip displays the resulting slab thickness in millimeters.
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.17

Orientation
The orientation indicates the position of the slice or slab group

in space based on the patient coordinate system.
P.1
Selecting a main
orientation P.1
The Orientation selection list allows you to orient the current

slice/slab group on one of the main orientations of the patient
coordinate system. P.1
A
Transverse slice plane
Sagittal slice plane
H Coronal slice plane

R
F L
0.0

Planning oblique and

double-oblique slices P.1
Clicking this button next to the selection list opens the Orienta-
tion dialog box where you can select oblique or double-oblique
orientation for your current slice/slab group.
P.1
Example of oblique slice orientation: P.1
S > C30 corresponds to a sagittal slice tilted by 30 toward the

coronal slice. P.1
Sagittal slice
Coronal slice
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.19

Example of double-oblique slice orientation: P.1
S > C33.7 > T 25.7 corresponds to a sagittal slice tilted by 33.7

in the coronal direction followed by another 25.7 in the trans-
verse direction. P.1
Sagittal slice Transverse slice
Coronal slice
Flip and rotation angles are normally indicated in the following

order: P.1
Larger rotation angles are listed first

(not S > C10 > T30 but S > T30 > C10).
The angles are always indicated in the main orientation of
the slice (not T > S46 but S > T44).
If your entries do not follow these conventions, the system will
rearrange the values accordingly. P.1
0.0

Position
The Position field shows the position of the center of the slice
or slab group. P.1
If the position matches the isocenter, the input field is grayed

out.
Displaying the slice If you position and hold the mouse pointer over the Position
position P.1 field, a tool tip indicates the slice position. P.1
Phase Offcenter
shows the offset in the phase-encoding direction
Read Offcenter
shows the offset in the readout direction
Slice Shift
shows the offset in the slice selection direction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.111

Changing the slice The Position selection list lets you move the current slice and
position P.1 slab group into the magnet isocenter. P.1
Or P.1
Click this button next to the selection list to display the Posi-
tion dialog box.
This window allows you to position your slice/slab group with a
precision of 0.1 mm. P.1
If necessary, select the Position mode.

L-P-H
This mode allows you to enter the shift based on the patient
coordinate system.
L - to the left (negative value: shift to the right),
P - to posterior (negative value: to anterior),
H - in direction of the head (negative value: in direction of the
feet).
Offcenter shift
This mode allows you to enter the shift in the gradient direc-
tions:
Phase - offcenter in phase-encoding direction
Read - offcenter in readout direction
Shift - shift in slice selection direction
The selected Position mode is maintained after the current

slice positioning procedure. When you open the Position dia-
log box the next time (even from another protocol), the posi-
tion mode previously selected continues to apply.
0.0

Phase enc. dir.

The current phase-encoding direction (direction of the phase-

encoding gradient) is indicated in the main orientations of the
patient coordinate system. P.1
You can change the phase-encoding direction. This will swap

the phase-encoding and readout direction. P.1
Using this method allows you to prevent aliasing artifacts in the

phase-encoding direction or change the direction of flow and
motion artifacts. P.1
The selection list Phase enc. dir. on the parameter cards con-
tains only options relevant to the current slice/3D slab orienta-
tion. P.1
Readout direction Phase-encoding direction

Phase-encoding direction
Readout direction
Slice orientation Slice

transverse orientation
transverse
0.0

Phase oversampling
Phase oversampling increases the phase-encoded area sym-

metrically on both sides of the field of view (FoV). This extended
FoV area is not displayed in the reconstructed image. P.1
Phase oversampling is used to prevent overfolding artifacts.

Aliasing artifacts occur when the excited body regions are
larger than the field of view (FoV) in the phase-encoding direc-
tion. These regions are visibly "folded" on the opposite side of
the image. P.1
Phase oversampling increases the scan time. The signal-to-

noise ratio is improved. P.1
0.0

Phase oversampling is indicated as a percentage of the field of

view (FoV) in the phase-encoding direction. P.1
Example: with 30% phase oversampling, the scan region

increases by 15% on both sides of the phase-encoding direc-
tion. P.1
Phase oversampling on both sides

of the field of view
Oversampling is automatically applied in the readout direc-

tion because it does not increase the scan time.
0.0

Slice oversampling
Slice oversampling increases the phase-encoded area sym-

metrically on both sides of the slab in the slice selection direc-
tion. P.1
This creates slices that are reconstructed but not displayed in

the image. Using this method allows you to prevent aliasing arti-
facts in the slice-selection direction for 3D scans. P.1
Slice oversampling is indicated as a percentage of the slab

thickness. P.1
Slice oversampling on both

sides of the slab
Slab
Similar to phase oversampling, slice oversampling increases

the scan time while improving the signal-to-noise ratio.
0.0

Saturation P.1
Saturation regions are areas where the signal is saturated

using special RF pulses. You can use saturation regions to
avoid motion artifacts. P.1
Depending on the scan protocol and the slice or slab groups

planned, you can define standard, parallel, or tracking satura-
tion regions.
P.1
Saturation mode
Geometry Saturation P.1
The Saturation mode selection list allows you to select the fre-
quency for transmitting saturation pulses. P.1
Standard
Saturation pulses are transmitted before each scan.
Quick
Saturation pulses are not transmitted before each scan.
Selecting the Quick saturation mode lets you reduce the scan
time with fat/water saturation and regional saturation (regular
and parallel saturation regions). During runtime, the sequence
calculates the frequency for transmitting the saturation pulses.P.1
Quick mode can be used e.g. for breath-hold studies to
reduce scan time.
0.0

Standard saturation regions

Standard saturation regions are numbered and may be posi-

tioned as required. P.1
You may: P.1
freely position standard saturation regions using their Orien-

tation and Position.
The procedure is similar to the positioning of slice and slab
groups.
Page P.18, Page P.111
change the thickness of standard saturation regions.
New saturation region P.1
The Plus button next to the saturation region field lets you add
new saturation regions to the scan protocol.
P.1
Deleting a saturation
region P.1
The Minus button lets you delete the current saturation region.P.1
0.0

Parallel and tracking saturation regions

Parallel or tracking saturation regions are always linked to a

slice or slab group. P.1
As a result, it is not possible to change the position and orien-

tation of these saturation regions. Instead, the position of these
regions is automatically adjusted by the system whenever you
move or rotate the slice or slab group.
P.1
The Special sat. selection list lets you select a parallel or track-
ing saturation region.
Special saturators can be applied only if there is just one slice/
slab. P.1
Tracking saturation regions are excited before the scanning

of each slice at the specified distance either "before" or "after"
the slice and in the specified thickness. In this way, they are
tracking the slice currently scanned within the slice group. P.1
Parallel saturation regions are positioned either on one side

or on both sides parallel to the slice group. These saturation
regions do not move along with the slice, but rather remain at
the specified distance "before" or "after" or on both sides of the
slice group. P.1
0.0

The setting "before" or "after" the slice or slice group is dis-

played in the main orientation of the slice group: P.1
For transverse main orientation: H ("before")/F ("behind")

For sagittal main orientation: L ("before")/R ("behind")
For coronal main orientation: P ("before")/A ("behind")
"Before" means that the saturation region tracks ahead and
"behind" that the saturation region tracks behind.
P.1
The Thickness spin box allows you to enter the slice thickness
of the saturation regions.
P.1
The Gap spin box allows you to enter the distance from the cor-
responding slice or slab group.
P.1
Use of special RF pulses allows for saturation of the water

proton or fat proton signals. For information on how to set the
parameters for fat and water saturation, refer to
Page P.143, Fat suppression Contrast, Geometry Sat-
uration, Physio Cardiac
Page P.145, Water suppression Contrast, Geometry
Saturation.
0.0

Navigator objects P.1
You can define navigator objects for special navigator

sequences, for example, to measure respiratory movement. P.1
P.1
Navigator
Geometry Navigator P.1
This is where you select the type of the navigator object cur-
rently displayed. All parameters currently displayed on the
Geometry Navigator card refer to this navigator object.
P.1
You position the navigator exactly on the dome of the dia-

phragm. Use coronal as well as transverse images for optimal
positioning. P.1
0.0

Position
The Position field shows the position of the center of the

selected navigator object. P.1
If the position matches the isocenter, the input field is grayed

out.
Changing the position of

the navigator object P.1
The procedure is similar to changing the slice position.

Page P.112, Changing the slice position
P.1
Orientation
The Orientation field lets you select the position of the naviga-
tor object in the patient coordinate system.
Page P.18, Selecting a main orientation
P.1
Changing the orientation of

the navigator object P.1
The procedure is similar to changing the slice orientation.

Page P.19, Planning oblique and double-oblique slices P.1
0.0

Rotation
Only 90 or 0 angles are supported for the rotation of navigator

objects. This is equivalent to swapping the readout and phase-
encoding directions.
P.1
FoV phase
The FoV phase field lets you enter the extent of the navigator
object in the phase-encoding direction in millimeters.
P.1
FoV read
The FoV read field lets you enter the extent of the navigator
object in the readout direction in millimeters.
P.1
Thickness
The Thickness field allows you to enter the extent of the navi-
gator slice in millimeters. P.1
0.0

Resp. control
Physio PACE P.1
The Resp. control field lets you select a method for suppress-
ing respiratory artifacts. P.1
Off
Navigator control is switched off.
Breath-hold
The slices of a concatenation will be scanned as soon as you
press the Scan Breathhold button on the inline display. The
number of manual starts required for the complete scan
equals the number of concatenations set.
Breath-hold & Monitor
Similar to Breath-hold. However, in addition, the respiratory
curve of the patient before the first breathhold as well as dur-
ing pauses between breathhold intervals is monitored using
the Navigator.
Breath-hold & Follow
Similar to Breath-hold & Monitor. In addition, however, the
calculated offset of the diaphragm position between breath-
hold intervals is used to adjust the positions of the slices to
be scanned in real time.
0.0

Gate
The image data are only accepted if the diaphragm position
is within the acceptance window.
Gate & Follow
If the navigator result is within the acceptance window, the
positions of the slices to be scanned are offset in accordance
with the navigator result and scanning is resumed with the
next iteration of the loop structure. Otherwise, the current
loop is repeated.
Trigger
Respiratory triggering reduces motion artifacts by synchro-
nizing measurement of the image data with the respiratory
cycle of the patient.
A block of image data is acquired as soon as the sequence
of scanned diaphragm positions shows the end of the expi-
ration phase.
Trigger & Follow
Similar to Trigger. However, in addition, the positions of the
slices to be scanned are offset in accordance with the navi-
gator result.
Monitor only
The navigator signals are calculated and displayed in the
usual way, however, they are not used for controlling the
scan.
0.0

Scout mode
Physio PACE P.1
Scout mode is used to plan a preparation phase for measuring

only the Navigator signal. In this way you are able to check
whether or not the navigator records the respiratory signal as
required.
P.1
Scout duration
Physio PACE P.1
If you select the Scout mode checkbox, you can enter the dura-
tion of the preparation phase under Scout duration.
P.1
Scout TR
Physio PACE P.1
The Scout TR field allows you to enter the repetition time for the
navigator pulses. P.1
0.0

Accept window
Physio PACE P.1
This parameter is available if you select the Breath-

hold & Follow, Gate, Gate & Follow, Trigger, or Trigger &
Follow option under Resp. control.
P.1
Breath-hold & Follow:

The deviation of the diaphragm position from the position imme-
diately before the first breath-hold is determined. If the deviation
is greater than the value specified in the Acceptance
window , the slice positions are not changed for safety rea-
sons. If the diaphragm deviation is greater than the limit value,
the result is implausible.
P.1
Gate, Gate & Follow:

The image data are acquired as soon as the deviation of the
diaphragm position (relative to the reference position) is less
than the value specified in the Acceptance window .
P.1
Trigger, Trigger & Follow:

Determines the vertical width of the yellow acceptance window
shown in the inline display. The trigger algorithm determines the
end of expiration as soon as the sequence of measured dia-
phragm positions (green curve) falls within the acceptance win-
dow. The acceptance window is not displayed while the patient
is breathing in. P.1
0.0

Position accept window

Physio PACE P.1
If the respiratory control is set to Trigger or Trigger & Follow,

the Position accept window appears. P.1
This parameter determines whether the system will set the cen-
ter of the acceptance window "automatically" during the learn-
ing phase or whether you will set it "manually" as a percentage
in the Accept. position.
P.1

Physio PACE P.1
This parameter only appears during Gate or Gate & Follow

respiratory control. P.1
The Accept position (green) field allows you to enter the cen-
tering position of the accept window.
P.1
Accept. position
Physio PACE P.1
With this parameter, you can set the center of the acceptance
window for Trigger and Trigger & Follow.The following
applies:
0 % of the center position correspond to the center position at
the end of expiration during the learning phase and 100 % cor-
responds to the center position at the end of inspiration during
the learning phase. P.1
0.0

Search window
Physio PACE P.1
For Gate or Gate & Follow, you can enter the size of the win-
dow in millimeters in the Search window field. P.1
The search window is displayed as a red box surrounding the

tolerance center in the Inline Display.
P.1

Physio PACE P.1
For Gate or Gate & Follow, you can enter the centering posi-
tion of the search window in millimeters in the Search window
(red) field.
P.1

Physio PACE P.1
The temporal change of the navigator signal is displayed graph-

ically in the Inline Display. These images can be saved in a
separate series. P.1
0.0

Tracking factor
Physio PACE P.1
This parameter is available if you select the Breath-

hold & Follow, Trigger & Follow, or Gate & Follow option
under Resp. control. P.1
The Tracking factor establishes the correlation between the

movement of the diaphragm and the resulting shift of the anat-
omy to be measured.
P.1
Physio PACE P.1
The Chronological Position field lets you select the time for
triggering the navigator signal (with Gate or Gate & Follow). P.1
Before the echo train of the image
After the echo train of the image
If you have selected Gate & Follow under respiratory con-
trol, the After the echo train of the image option is not avail-
able.
Before and after the echo train of the image
If you have selected Gate & Follow under respiratory con-
trol, the slice sequence algorithm based on the first navigator
signal and the gating algorithm based on the second naviga-
tor signal will change.
0.0

Excitation sequence of slices P.1
For multislice scans, the sequence of excitation can be defined

according to various criteria.
P.1
Multi-slice mode
Geometry Common, Sequence Part 1 P.1
P.1 This parameter allows you to select a scan method for multi-
slice scanning: P.1
Sequential - scanning slice by slice

All lines (phase-encoding steps) of the first slice are scanned
in sequence first, followed by all lines of the second slice etc.
Interleaved - scanning by lines
All the first lines (phase-encoding steps) of all slices within a
concatenation are scanned in sequence in one repetition
time TR first, followed by all second lines etc.
Single Shot - special mode for fast sequences
All lines (phase encoding steps) of one slice are scanned in
one go after excitation. Then all lines of the second slice in
one go etc.
0.0

The Sequential multislice mode is necessary for a tracking sat-

uration region. If you are planning a tracking saturation region
while Interleaved mode is set, the system automatically
switches to Sequential mode. The Confirm Parameter
Changes message box notifies you of parameter adjustment.P.1
The Interleaved multislice mode lets you reduce the scan time.
The individual lines of different slices can be excited in quicker
succession within a repetition time TR without affecting the sig-
nals of adjacent lines. P.1
The Single shot multislice mode is available for very fast

sequences only (e.g. epi, haste, Turboflash). These sequences
do not offer any other modes. P.1
0.0

Series
Geometry Common P.1
The Series measurement parameter lets you define the

sequence for slice processing. P.1
The images are displayed in ascending order according to the

image numbers after reconstruction, irrespective of the
sequence for slice processing. P.1
The following excitation sequences are available: P.1
Ascending
The slices are excited starting at the beginning of the slice or
slab group (start -> end).
Descending
The slices are excited starting at the end of the slice or slab
group (end -> start).
Interleaved
Ascending Interleaved
5 5
4 4
3 3
2 2
1 1
Descending
You can combine the Multi-slice mode Interleaved and

Series Interleaved settings for a very short TR and small
slice distance to avoid cross-talk.
0.0

Interl. in B.-h.
If you select Interl. in B.-h. (interleaved in breath-hold inter-
val), the slices are scanned separately for each breath-hold
interval of a multiple breath-hold scan, similar to Interleaved
mode (see Application Manual).
The Interl. in B.-h. option is available only if you are planning
a scan in multiple breath-hold mode after selecting either
Breath-hold, Breath-hold & Monitor, or Breath-hold & Fol-
low under Resp. control on the Physio PACE parameter
card.
Concatenations
Routine, Geometry Common, Physio Signal1,
Physio PACE P.1
After selecting the Interleaved or Single shot option in the

Multi-slice mode field, you can use the Concatenations field
to specify across how many TRs the scanning of the planned
slices should be distributed. P.1
The system then determines across how many single sequen-

tial scans the slices will be distributed. P.1
This method lets you acquire a large number of slices with a

short repetition time TR (T1-weighted imaging). Additionally,
slice cross-talk is reduced. P.1
0.0

If you select the Breath-hold, Breath-hold & Monitor, or

Breath-hold & Follow option under Resp. control for a scan
in multiple breath-hold mode, the Concatenations parameter
also determines the number of breath-hold intervals: P.1
In Interleaved multi-slice mode, the number of breath-hold

intervals is the product of the Measurements and Concate-
nations parameter values.
In Single shot multi-slice mode, the number of breath-hold
intervals is the product of the Measurements, Concatena-
tions, and Averages parameter values.
P.1
Image numbering
System Miscellaneous P.1
The System Miscellaneous card allows you to define the

image numbering. P.1
The MSMA selection list lets you set the primary order for
image numbering. P.1
Example: S - C - T P.1
The reconstructed images are numbered as follows: P.1
All sagittal images

All coronal images
All transverse images
0.0

The Sagittal, Coronal, and Transverse selection lists let you

set the secondary order for image numbering.
The conventions of the DICOM patient coordinate system apply
( Page xv). P.1
Sagittal R >> L or L >> R, Med >> Lat or Lat >> Med

The order of sagittal images is either ascending (R >> L from
the right to the left) or descending
(L >> R from the left to the right).
They can also be numbered with respect to their distance
from the isocenter (Med >> Lat or Lat >> Med). Sorting is
performed according to the sagittal position of the slice in the
LPH patient coordinate system.
Coronal A >> P or P >> A
The coronal images are numbered according to their position
in ascending order (from anterior to posterior) or in descend-
ing order (from posterior to anterior).
Transverse F >> H or H >> F
The transverse images are numbered according to their
position in ascending order (from foot to head) or in descend-
ing order (from head to foot).
0.0

Image contrast and resolution P.1
Among other factors, image contrast is critical for correct diag-

nosis. P.1
The Contrast and Resolution cards as well as application-

specific parameter cards are the primary tools for setting image
contrast and resolution parameters.
P.1
Repetition time (TR)

Routine, Contrast, Geometry Common, Physio Signal1 P.1
The repetition time is the time that elapses between two con-
secutive excitations.
P.1
Changing the repetition time affects the image contrast: P.1
Short repetition times of about 400 ms produce good T1 con-

trast for spin-echo sequences.
Long repetition times of about 2000 ms produce good T2
contrast for spin-echo sequences.
0.0

Echo time (TE)

Routine, Contrast P.1
The echo time is the time between the RF excitation pulse and
the resulting echo that is measured. P.1
For some sequences, the echo time cannot be changed. In this

case, the input field is grayed out. P.1
You may enter several echo times for multi-echo sequences.

You can then scroll through the echo times using the arrow
keys. When you change a given echo time, the following echo
times will be adjusted accordingly. P.1
For gradient echo sequences, a tool tip indicates the in-phase

and opposed-phase condition of the fat/water spin.
0.0

Inversion time (TI)

Contrast, Physio Cardiac P.1
P.1 The spins are inverted with a 180 RF pulse (inversion pulse).
The spins relax during an inversion time TI according to their T1
relaxation time. This spin preparation applies additional T1 con-
trast to the image. P.1
In case of inversion recovery sequences, TI is the time that

elapses between transmission of the inversion pulse and trans-
mission of the excitation pulse of the subsequent scan (e.g., a
spin echo pulse sequence). Depending on the TI, certain sig-
nals are suppressed (e.g., fat) and additional T1 contrast is
applied to the signal. P.1
In case of turbo FLASH sequences, TI describes the time that

elapses between transmission of the inversion pulse and read-
out of the echo signal which is sorted into the center of the raw
data matrix (this echo determines the contrast).
P.1
Delay time (TD)

Contrast P.1
Using the delay time, you can insert a pause between concate-
nations, for example, to give breath holding instructions during
measurements with breath holding. P.1
0.0

Averages
Routine, Contrast P.1
Performing a scan several times improves the signal-to-noise

ratio. The results of repeat scans are averaged by the system.P.1
Please note that the greater the number of scans, the longer
the scan time.
Flip angle
Contrast, ToF P.1
The flip angle specifies by what angle the longitudinal (z) mag-
netization should be rotated into the xy plane by the RF pulse. P.1
The flip angle directly affects image contrast. P.1
With a 90 excitation pulse, for example, the longitudinal mag-

netization is rotated completely out of the z direction. If a
smaller flip angle is used, the magnetization returns to equilib-
rium more quickly allowing you to reduce the repetition time TR
(for gradient echo sequences). P.1
For spin echo sequences, you can enhance the T1 contrast by

reducing the flip angle. P.1
0.0

Magn. preparation
Contrast, Physio Cardiac P.1
P.1 You can affect the contrast by transmitting an RF pulse before

every scan. P.1
The inversion pulse can be slice-selective or non-selective. P.1
Consider whether your current sequence is an inversion recov-

ery sequence (IR) or a saturation recovery sequence (SR). P.1
The following options are available in the Magn. preparation
selection list: P.1
Slice-sel./Slab-sel. (IR or SR)

The scans are performed slice by slice.
Non-sel. (IR or SR)
The RF pulses excite the entire volume irrespective of the
current slice position of the scan sequence.
None
No inversion pulse is transmitted.
If you select the None option from the Magn. preparation

list, the TI parameter is not available on the Contrast card.
0.0

Reconstruction
Contrast P.1
MR images are usually magnitude images. The MR signal

intensity is displayed directly in these images. P.1
In phase images, however, the grayscales correspond to the

phase positions of the spins (between -180 and +180). They
depend on the velocity of the spins as they move in the body
(e.g., velocity of blood flow). Spins with the same phase position
(i.e., velocity) have the same grayscale value in this type of
image. P.1
In real images, the grayscale distribution indicates the real ori-

entation of the longitudinal magnetization following an inversion
pulse.
P.1
You can select the image type(s) for reconstruction from the
Reconstruction selection list: P.1
Magnitude - magnitude images

Phase - phase images
Real - real images
Magnitude/Phase - magnitude and phase images
Real/Phase - real and phase images
Real images can be selected only if an inversion pulse is
selected.
0.0

Fat suppression
Contrast, Geometry Saturation, Physio Cardiac P.1
As an alternative to fat suppression using an inversion pulse,

the Fat suppr. and Water suppr. selection lists provide a way
of suppressing the fat or water signal. P.1
Since the resonance frequencies of water protons and fat pro-

tons are different, it is possible to suppress only the water pro-
tons or the fat protons using frequency-selective RF pulses. P.1
The Fast suppr. selection list contains the following options: P.1
Fat sat.
Suppresses the fat signal and does not affect TE; however,
TR is increased substantially resulting in longer scan times.
Water excit. (normal)
Suppresses the fat signal; leads to a moderate increase in
TE and TR.
Water excit. (fast)
Suppresses the fat signal; leads to a moderate increase of
TE and TR, however, the effectiveness of fat saturation is
somewhat lower than in Water excit. (normal) mode.
None
Does not suppress the fat component in the MR signal.
0.0

Fat saturation P.1 You can reduce the scan time by selecting the Quick saturation
mode when applying fat saturation. Please note that not all
sequences support the Quick saturation mode.
Page P.117
P.1
Fat sat. mode

Contrast, Geometry Saturation P.1
Via the selection list Fat sat. mode you can set the type of fat
suppression. P.1
Weak
Weak saturation
Strong
Strong saturation
0.0

Water suppression
The Water suppr. selection list contains the following options:P.1

Water sat.
Suppresses the water signal, does not affect TE;
however, TR increases significantly.
Fat excit.
Suppresses the water signal; has only a moderate effect on
TE and TR, resulting in a slight increase in scan time.
None
Does not suppress the water component in the MR signal.
Fat saturation P.1 You can reduce the scan time by selecting the Quick saturation
mode when applying fat saturation. Please note that not all
sequences support the Quick saturation mode.
Page P.117 P.1
0.0

Restore Magn.
You can use the Restore magn. option to speed up longitudinal

magnetization. As a result, the signal for T2-weighed acquisi-
tions will be increasing (even for short repetition times).
P.1
Magnetization transfer (MTC)

Contrast, Angio Common P.1
P.1 In addition to the saturation of water or fat protons, another type

of presaturation may be applied. P.1
By applying a special RF pulse, magnetization transfer weak-

ens the signal from tissue with a high macro molecular content
(e.g., white/gray brain tissue). This effect is hardly noticeable in
blood, so that the contrast between blood and white/gray brain
tissue is increased. P.1
The MTC option is therefore used to obtain greater contrast

in images for vascular examinations.
0.0

FoV read, FoV phase

Routine, Geometry Common, Resolution Common P.1
The field of view (FoV) defines the anatomical region to be dis-

played (extent of scan in the readout and phase-encoding direc-
tion) and its resolution (pixel size). P.1
The FoV in the phase-encoding direction (FoV phase) is

defined as a percentage of the FoV in the readout direction
(FoV read).
P.1
Square field of With the FoV phase set to 100 %, the system will scan a
view (FoV) P.1 square FoV. In other words, the same number of pixels is
scanned in the readout direction as in the phase-encoding
direction. P.1
Phase-encoding
direction 4 steps
Readout direction
4 steps
0.0

Rectangular When examining elongated parts of the body, it can helpful to

Field of view (FOV) P.1 work with a rectangular field of view to reduce the scan time. P.1
In order to obtain a rectangular FoV, you must set the parameter
FoV phase to a value less than 100%. P.1
Phase-encoding
direction
Readout direction
Changing the field of view in the readout direction P.1
Changing the FoV in the readout direction also changes the

FoV in the phase-encoding direction. This changes the pixel
size. P.1
0.0

Changing the field of view in the phase-encoding directionP.1

The gradients for encoding the phases are switched in the
phase-encoding direction (FoV phase). P.1
You can only set the extent in the phase-encoding direction to

be less than or equal to the extent in the readout direction. If you
change the FoV in the phase-encoding direction, the number of
phase-encoding steps is always adapted to keep the resolution
ratio constant. P.1
If you increase the number of phase-encoding steps, the

scanning time will be adjusted accordingly.
The phase-encoding direction is indicated by an arrow in the
image. P.1
0.0

Base resolution
Resolution Common P.1
Base Resolution is used to specify the number of pixels in the

readout direction. This determines the spatial resolution in the
readout direction. P.1
The base resolution is also the reference value for specifying

the percentage of resolution in the phase-encoding direction. P.1
The base resolution also determines the image matrix size.
You may double the size by selecting Interpolation.
Changing the number of Enter the value 256 for the number of readout steps. P.1
readout steps (example) P.1

With phase resolution of 100% and a square FoV (FoV Phase
= 100%), the matrix is then 256 256. P.1
The size of the pixels depends on the size of the field of view
(FoV) you have entered in the readout direction. P.1
For an FoV of 256 mm in the readout direction, the pixels have

size 1 1 mm, for an FoV of 396 mm in the readout direction,
they have size 1.5 1.5 mm. P.1
0.0

Phase resolution
Phase resolution is the resolution of slices in the phase-encod-

ing direction expressed as a percentage value of the base res-
olution. P.1
If phase resolution is 100%, the resolution in the readout and

phase-encoding directions will have the same value and the
pixels are square. At 75%, the pixels are oblong and the reso-
lution decreases. P.1
If you reduce the FoV in the phase-encoding direction, the num-

ber of pixels has to be reduced as well to keep the resolution
ratio constant. As a result, the number of phase-encoding steps
are reduced. P.1
If you hold the mouse pointer over the Phase resolution

parameter, a tool tip will be displayed together with the matrix.
0.0

Examples for image

resolutions P.1 P.1
Field of view read Field of view Phase resolution Matrix size Pixels (mm)
(mm) phase (%) (%)
256 100 100 256 256 11
256 75 100 192 256 11
256 100 75 192 256 1,33 1
256 75 75 144 256 1,33 1
P.1
The pixel size is determined by both the base resolution and the
phase resolution, as well as by the FoV in the readout direction.
The base resolution determines the number of pixels in the
readout direction, and the phase resolution determines the
aspect ratio of the pixels (square or rectangular). P.1
Changing the FoV in the readout direction changes the pixel

size, but not the aspect ratio. For very large pixels, the resolu-
tion of the reconstructed images decreases because the signal
is averaged across a larger area. P.1
0.0

Interpolation
Interpolation increases the image matrix to twice its size without

increasing the scanning time (for example, from 256 256 to
512 512 matrix). P.1
After interpolation, the transitions in the image will be softer

because the pixels are now smaller. You need four times the
memory to store the image in the database.
P.1
In an interpolated image, the interpolated matrix, not the scan

matrix, is shown bottom right in the image text. Interpolation
is indicated by the I after the matrix.
P.1
NOTE
Interpolation doubles the size of the image matrix in the
readout and phase-encoding directions. No interpolation is
performed in the slice-selection direction. P.1
If you increase the base resolution, interpolation is

deactivated automatically.
Otherwise, reconstruction time
would increase considerably P.1
You can activate interpolation at any time. P.1
0.0

Slice resolution
In 3D scans, phase-encoding is performed in addition to the

readout and phase-encoding directions. P.1
The Slice resolution parameter defines the resolution in the

slice-selection direction. The resolution ratio is expressed as a
percentage of the readout steps. P.1
Slice selection
direction
Field of view
0.0

With slice resolution at 100%, the phase-encoding table in the

slice-selection direction has as many steps as the number of
slices (partitions) to be reconstructed. P.1
With slice resolution < 100%, fewer phase-encoded steps are

scanned in the slice-selection direction (resulting in a reduction
of the scan time). Additional slices are subsequently calculated
using interpolation. The slice thickness displayed in the image
text does not change. An "i" is simply appended to its numeric
value to identify it (e.g. SL 2.0i). P.1
Example:
To obtain 32 slices, 24 slices are scanned with a slice resolution
of 75% and 32 slices calculated from them. The resolution in
the slice-selection direction is reduced accordingly. P.1
0.0


If partial Fourier matrices are used for 2D scans, only part (at
least half) of the phase-encoding steps are acquired. P.1
Phase partial Fourier allows you to reduce the scanning time

while maintaining the spatial resolution via asymmetric sam-
pling of the k space in the phase-encoding direction. P.1
This reduces the scan time and worsens the signal-to-noise

ratio. P.1
Possible settings: P.1
4/8 (half Fourier)

5/8
6/8
7/ 8
Off (use whole image matrix)
0.0


Routine, Resolution Common P.1
With 3D scans, you can change the image matrix and therefore
the scan time not only via the phase-encoding direction and
readout direction but also via the slice-selection direction. P.1
Identical to phase partial Fourier, slice partial Fourier only

acquires a part of the raw data space acquired in the slice-
selection direction (asymmetric sampling of the k space in slice-
selection direction). P.1
The signal-to-noise ratio decreases, however, resolution in the

slice-selection direction remains the same. P.1
4/8 (half Fourier)

5/8
6/8
7/ 8
Off (use whole image matrix)
0.0

PAT mode
Resolution iPAT P.1
The PAT mode selection list allows you to choose a PAT recon-
struction mode. P.1
This parameter is dimmed. The default is set to None in case

there are not enough coil elements or RF receive channels.
To use the PAT algorithm, at least two coil elements and/or
RF receive channels have to be used.
When opening a protocol and the selected matrix coils have
to be adjusted to the matrix coil mode, resulting in an insuffi-
cient number of RF receive channels, the PAT mode value
will be set to None (at least two RF receive channels have to
be used for applying a PAT algorithm).
Page P.165
0.0

P.1
N OT E
The number of RF receive channels used depends on the
coils selected. For Matrix coils, the Matrix coil mode has to
be considered as well. P.1
In the Matrix coil mode CP, one RF receive channel per

selected Matrix coil element cluster is allocated, in the Dual
mode, two RF receive channel are allocated, and in the
Triple mode, three RF receive channels per selected Matrix
coil element cluster are allocated. P.1
The following options are available: P.1
None
The PAT reconstruction method is not used.
GRAPPA
PAT reconstruction mode based on the GRAPPA algorithm.
mSENSE
PAT reconstruction mode based on the mSENSE algorithm.
0.0

Accel. Factor PE
Resolution iPAT P.1
Via the spin box Accel. factor PE the acceleration factor is set
in phase encoding direction for PAT reconstruction. P.1
The acceleration factor in the phase-encoding direction may

correspond to the max. number of receive channels used.
Max. recomm. Factor PE

Resolution iPAT P.1
This read-only parameter is shown in the online editor only for

processing the protocol within the measurement queue or for
direct measurement preparations in the parameter stack. P.1
Based on the table position, the location of the slices and the
position of the selected coil elements, the system recommends
a max. Accel. factor PE. P.1
P.1
N OT E
Values higher than the max. recommended Accel. factor
PE may have a negative effect on image quality. P.1
0.0

Ref. lines PE
Resolution iPAT P.1
The Ref. lines PE spin box allows you to set the number of ref-
erence lines in the phase-encoding direction for a PAT recon-
struction. P.1
The number of reference lines in the phase-encoding direc-

tion cannot exceed the number of lines in the phase-encoding
direction.
P.1
N OT E
The max. number of Ref. lines is dynamically provided in
accord with the sequence and protocol parameters. P.1
0.0

Accel. Factor 3D
Resolution PAT P.1
The parameter Accel. factor 3D parameter is displayed only if

the protocol is based on a 3D sequence that supports PAT in
3D. P.1
Use the associated spin box to set the acceleration factor in

the slice-selection direction for PAT reconstruction.
The acceleration factor in the phase-encoding direction may
correspond to the max. number of receive channels used. P.1
P.1
N OT E
When changing the parameter Accel. factor 3D, slice
oversampling may have to be slightly adjusted depending
on the number of selected slices (adjustment is automatic
via the Scan Assistant dialog) P.1
0.0

Max. recomm. Factor 3D

Resolution PAT P.1
This read-only parameter is shown in the online editor only for

processing the protocol within the measurement queue or for
direct measurement preparations in the parameter stack. P.1
Based on the table position, the location of the slices and the
position of the selected coil elements, the system recommends
a max. Accel. factor 3D. P.1
P.1
N OT E
Values higher than the max. recommended Accel. factor
3D may have a negative effect on image quality. P.1
0.0

Ref. lines 3D
Resolution PAT P.1
The Ref. lines 3D parameter may be edited only if the protocol

is based on a 3D sequence that supports PAT. P.1
Use the associated spin box to set the number of reference

lines in the slice-selection direction for PAT reconstruction.
The number of reference lines in the slice-selection direction
cannot exceed the number of slices in the slabs.
P.1
N OT E
The max. number of Ref. lines is dynamically provided
depending on the sequence and protocol parameters. P.1
0.0

Matrix coil mode

Resolution iPAT P.1
In the head-foot direction, Matrix coils consist of one or several

coil clusters. Each coil cluster consists, as seen from left to
right, of typically three individual coil elements. The Matrix coil
mode affects each of these coil clusters, determining the
behavior of the coil.
P.1
Matrix coils are operated in different Matrix coil modes: P.1
CP (Circularly Polarized): The three coil elements of the coil

cluster act like a CP coil element. The coil cluster is read via
a RF receive channel.
Dual: The three coil elements of the coil cluster act like two
CP coil elements. The coil cluster is read via two RF receive
channels.
Triple: The three coil elements of the coil cluster act like
three individual CP coil elements. The coil cluster is read via
three RF receive channels.
0.0

CP Mode Dual Mode Triple Mode

Lowest data volume PAT factor 2 in left-right PAT factor 3 in left-right
direction direction
One RF receive Two RF receive Three RF receive
channel per coil channels per coil channels per coil cluster
cluster cluster
P.1
If required, the system automatically changes the Matrix coil

mode as a function of the PAT mode selected. The currently
used Matrix coil mode is shown in round brackets behind Auto.
Auto (..) : Matrix coil mode recommended by the system: P.1
If the PAT mode is changed by GRAPPA or mSENSE to the

None mode, the Matrix coil mode is changed to Auto (CP) so
as to optimize reconstruction times.
If the PAT mode is changed by None to GRAPPA or
mSENSE mode, the Matrix coil mode is changed from Auto
(CP) to Auto (Triple).
The settings are retained if the Matrix coil mode is set to Dual
or Triple.
0.0

The Matrix coil mode is not available for installations with Tim
[32x8] systems. All Matrix coils are operated in the CP mode.
P.1
N OT E
Applies to Matrix coils only - other coil elements are not
affected. P.1
0.0

Filter
Routine, Resolution Common P.1
To improve image quality, you can use filters for image recon-
struction. P.1
You can select any of the following filters: P.1
Raw data (Hanning filter)

FoV compensation filter (large FoV)
Normalization filter, prescan
Normalization filter
Elliptical filter
You are able to either apply just one filter or combine several fil-
ters and use them simultaneously. However, please note a
number of filters are mutually exclusive (e.g. Raw data filter or
Elliptical filter). P.1
0.0

Raw data filter The outer rows of the raw data matrix contain the edge informa-
(Hanning filter) P.1 tion (i.e. high spatial frequency) of an image. You can weight
specific lines with the raw data filter, for example, to suppress
edge oscillation.
P.1
Click the field to the right of the Raw data entry.

A selection list is displayed. P.1
Select On.
The raw data filter is now active.
P.1
The Properties button is no longer grayed out. You can use

those button to open the Filter properties dialog box and set
specific settings for the raw data filter. P.1
Click the Properties button.

The Filter properties dialog box is displayed. P.1
0.0

Select a filter strength from the Intensity selection list

(Weak, Medium, Strong, or Free).
The image will be more homogeneous by increasing the filter
intensity. However, image contrast may be compromised at
the same time. This means that weak filters should be used
whenever possible.
Slope shows the slope at the edges of the filter for the selected
filter intensity. P.1
S: slope at the edges of the filter

W: filter width
If you have selected Free from the Intensity selection list, you
are able to define the slope yourself. P.1
Enter a value for the slope in the Slope spin box.
0.0

FOV compensation filter The large FoV compensation filter helps to correct geometric
(large FOV) P.1 (e.g. pincushion) distortions at the edges of the FoV.
P.1
Click the field to the right of the Large FoV entry.

Select On.
The FoV compensation filter is now active.
P.1
P.1
N OT E
If you use the FoV compensation filter, you are no longer
able to use the reconstructed images as reference images
for graphic slice positioning in a new examination. P.1
P.1
Prescan normalization You are able to compensate for inhomogeneous image bright-
filter P.1 ness with the Prescan normalization filter. The procedure is
similar to the "standard" (auto-calibrated) normalization filter.
However, the data for homogenization are determined via the
Prescan (max. possible FoV volume is imaged with a lower res-
olution than the preceding adjustment measurement) as com-
pared to the measured image data used with the normalization
filter. P.1
0.0

P.1
N OT E
Use the "standard" normalization filter in place of the
Prescan filter whenever: P.1
You are using the body coil for scanning

You are using transceiver coils or
You are using other than H-nuclei for imaging
P.1
Click the field to the right of the Normalize, Prescan entry.
Select On.
The prescan normalization filter is now active.
P.1
The Properties button is no longer grayed out. P.1
Click the Properties button.

The Filter properties dialog box is displayed.
P.1
Click the Unfiltered images checkbox, if you want to save

the unfiltered images too.
0.0

Normalization filter P.1 If you are using surface coils, the area in the vicinity of the coil
will appear lighter in the images and darker the areas farther
from the coil. The signal intensity is greater in the vicinity of the
coil. P.1
Use the normalization filter to reduce the brightness of areas in

the vicinity of the coil and increase the brightness in areas far-
ther away from the coil.
P.1
Click the field to the right of the Normalize entry.

Select On.
The normalization filter is now active.
P.1
The Properties button is no longer grayed out. You can use

those button to open the Filter properties dialog box and set
specific settings for the normalization filter.
P.1
P.1
N OT E
The Filter properties dialog box is not available for the
normalization filter if you are planning a scan with the Body
Coil. P.1
0.0

Click the Properties.. button.

The Filter properties dialog box is displayed. P.1
Select a filter strength from the Intensity selection list

(Weak, Medium, Strong, or Free).
The image will be more homogeneous by increasing the filter
intensity. However, image contrast may be compromised at
the same time. This means that weak filters should be used
whenever possible.
Width shows the bandwidth of the filter for the selected filter
intensity
P.1
Cut off shows the level of pixel brightness that excludes pixels
from image reconstruction. P.1
This limit is expressed as a percentage of the maximum

intensity profile. If you set 20, for example, pixels whose inten-
sity profile is below 20% of the maximum value will only be
corrected by a factor of 5 (=1/20%).
0.0

If you have selected Free from the Intensity selection list, you
are able to define the bandwidth of the filter and the limit for
pixel brightness yourself.
P.1
Enter a bandwidth for the filter in the Width spin box.
Enter a limit value for the pixel brightness in the Cut off spin
box.
If you want to save both the images reconstructed with the nor-
malization filter and the unfiltered images, activate the Unfil-
tered images option.
P.1
Click the Unfiltered images checkbox.
P.1
NOTE
Use of the normalization filter may lead to a loss of contrast
and an increase in background noise. P.1
0.0

Elliptical filter P.1 With the elliptical filter, you will only use the center of the raw
data space (the corners are set to 0). P.1
That improves the signal-to-noise ratio up to 10% (without loss

of resolution).
P.1
Click the field to the right of the Elliptical filter entry.

Select On.
The elliptical filter is now active.
P.1
Accepting filter settings P.1 P.1
The filter settings are applied and the Filter Properties dialog
box closes. P.1
0.0

Parameters for dynamic scanning P.1
In dynamic studies with contrast agent or in movement studies

(e.g. joints), you can repeat the scans at regular intervals. You
are able to track, for example, the inflow of the contrast agent,
the activation of a region of the brain (e.g. due to finger move-
ment), or various stages of joint movement.
P.1
Contrast, BOLD P.1
The Infinite measurement option sets the number of scans to

the maximum value. P.1
If the Infinite measurement option is active, the Measure-

ments parameter will not be displayed.
P.1
Measurements
Contrast, BOLD, Perf, Inline Breast, Inline Common P.1
You set the number of measurements with the Measurements

parameters. P.1
If you set fewer than 15 measurements, the GBP, PBP, and

TTP parameters on the Perf parameter card cannot be
selected. On the Inline-Mamma parameter card, the TTP
parameter is not activated if you select less than 2 measure-
ments.
0.0

Pause after meas.

Contrast, BOLD, Inline Breast P.1
The Pause after meas. field is used for defining pauses (in sec-
onds) for dynamic scans between individual scans. You are
able to enter individual pauses after each scan. P.1
Click the horizontal arrow buttons below the input field of the
spin box to access a specific pause parameter.
Enter a value for the pause time in the spin box and change
the displayed value with the vertical spin buttons on the right
of the spin box.
If you hover the mouse pointer over the Pause after Meas.
parameter name, a tool tip will be displayed with the pause
time.
If you hold the mouse pointer over an input field of the spin
box, a tool tip will appear stating the starting and ending time
of the first 10 scans.
P.1
NOTE
In theory, you may define up to 64 separate pauses.
However, in most cases you set one pause that is the same
between all scans or you set the pause to zero.
If you increase the number of scans to 66, only the
automatic pause time can be set. P.1
0.0

Delay in TR
Contrast, BOLD P.1
This spin box is used to set the time between consecutive

scans. The parameter appears in all ep2d sequences. The
delay in TR is shown in milliseconds. P.1
Enter a value for the delay in the spin box and change the
displayed value with the vertical spin buttons on the right of
the spin box.
P.1
NOTE
You can only set one delay time which is the same for all
scans. P.1
0.0

Multiple series
Contrast, BOLD, Perf. P.1
When you have planned several scan runs, you have a choice
to: P.1
Click the Multiple series option to save the generated

images in separate series for each scan.
Or P.1
Deselect Multiple Series to save all images acquired in one

series during multiple measurements.
0.0

Position of the scan region P.1
At the beginning of an examination, you mark the center of the

examination region on the patient using the laser light localizer.
Subsequently, you move this marked position into the magnet
isocenter (center position).
After you have defined a home table position (original table
position), all subsequent table movements for this examination
refer to it if the position of the scan region is changed.
In most examinations, you will run all protocols of your scan pro-
gram at the home table position. In a few cases, the examina-
tion range may be so large that you have to move the patient
table and run protocols at different table positions. This means
that the positions of the scan regions are changed as well.
You can set the position of the scan region for a protocol as fol-
lows:
Load reference images including the scan region position
into the image area.
Page F.34, Using reconstructed images as reference
images
Change the parameters for the scan region position on the
System Miscellaneous parameter card.
0.0

Combining array images

The image generated by an array coil is composed of images

from different array elements.
The Save uncombined option allows you to save the output
images of individual coil elements.
Scan at current table position

The Scan at current TP option specifies whether the proto-

col will be run at the current table position.
If the GPS of the online protocol editor contains reference
images at the time of switch on, the user is alerted via the
Scan Assistant Dialog and asked to unload the reference
images.
0.0

Scan Region Position

This parameter is visible only, when the parameter Scan at cur-

rent TP is deactivated.
This parameter shows the position of the scan protocol where it
is scanned. The parameter is entered in series block coordinate
system. P.1
The position is determined: P.1
(1) A protocol is opened. Images are loaded into the GSP and
the position of the scan region is taken from the reference
images. No Scan Assistant Dialog is displayed.
(2) The user is able to edit the position of the scan region. The
direction is determined via H (Head) or F (Feet) (selection
box); the position is defined in the value input field. If
images are in the GSP at this point in time, the user has to
decide whether to transfer the position from the protocol,
unloading the images from the GSP, or whether to transfer
the position of the images to the open protocol (displayed
in Scan Assistant Dialog).
0.0

Scan region Memory

The selection list Scan Region Memory is visible only when

the parameter Scan at current TP is deactivated. P.1
The list displays all scan region positions of the current series
block. You may select a scan region position from the list and
apply it to your protocol. P.1
P.1
N OT E
When the image area of the task card Exam includes
images, all positions in the selection list Scan Region
Memory that do not correspond to the position of the scan
region of the loaded images, are set in square brackets. P.1
When selecting this type of position, the Scan Assistant
Dialog is displayed.
You have to decide whether to remove the loaded images
from the image area (use OK), so that you can apply the
selected scan region position or whether the scan region
position of the loaded images will be retained (use Undo).P.1
0.0

Coils and coil elements

Routine, System Coils P.1
You can select the coils you want to use for your examination in
the right half of the System Coil parameter card. The parame-
ter system coil card is divided into an upper and lower area via
a stylized patient. The location of the patient visualizes patient
positioning. P.1
Head left--> Head- first

Head right--> Feet- first
Page F.539, Matrix coil mode P.1
There are: P.1
Coil elements with unknown positions (in the upper area of

the system coil card)
Coil elements with known positions (in the lower area of the
system coil card)
P.1
N OT E
Prior to a scan, detection of coil positioning may be
performed. This will be performed, when, e.g., the table was
moved changing the position of the scan region.
When coil positions are detected, the coils are shown in the
lower area of the system coil card. P.1
0.0

Local coils P.1 Matrix and Array coils consist of several elements that can be
selected independently of one another.
Depending on the examination region relevant to your diag-
nostic problem, you may activate different numbers of coil
elements.
A tool tip is displayed for each coil element; the tip includes
the coil name, coil element name, and the plug number.
Body coil Spine Matrix P.1 When performing measurements with the body coil only, all
local coils are deactivated.
Click the Body button.
Deselecting body coil activates all local coils and coil ele-
ments that were previously active.
P.1
N OT E
Select the coil elements that are inside the region under
examination.
Coil elements outside this region degrade image quality. P.1
0.0

Coil elements and the iPAT You have to have at least as many coil elements and/or
acceleration factors P.1 modes as stated as iPAT acceleration factors (please note
the coil mode for Matrix coils).
When deselecting coil elements with the technical result of
disallowing the acceleration factors set, the acceleration fac-
tors are lowered to provide for a (consistent) program that
can be measured (adjustment by means of the Scan Assis-
tant Dialog).
0.0

Sequence-specific parameters P.1
Your system provides various different sequence types for your

scans. P.1
As a function of the type of sequence associated with the scan

protocol, different display and input fields will be appearing on
the sub-cards of the Sequence parameter card.
P.1
Introduction
Sequence Part 1 P.1
You may want to inform the patient about the start of the scan
via short knocking noises from the gradient system. These
noises inform the patient that scanning is about to begin. P.1
0.0

Dimension
Sequence Part 1 P.1
The Dimension field allows you to specify whether the scan

protocol is to execute 2D or 3D scanning. P.1
Switching from 2D to 3D changes the entries on various

parameter cards. They now contain slab group parameters
instead of slice group parameters.
NOTE
You cannot switch the dimension for all sequences. In such
cases this parameter is displayed dimmed or is not offered.P.1
P.1
Elliptical scanning
Sequence Part 1 P.1
In 3D sequences you can reduce the scanning time by up to

25% with elliptical k space scanning (no loss of resolution). P.1
The edges of the k-space (with minimal contribution to resolu-
tion) are not included in data acquisition. P.1
0.0

Phase stabilization
Sequence Part 1 P.1
Phase stabilization prevents phase errors caused, for example,

by respiration. P.1
The Phase stabilize option is especially advisable for gradient

echo sequences with a long echo time (TE) to improve image
quality.
P.1
Compensate T2 decay
Sequence Part 1 P.1
This compensation for T2 decay is a procedure for avoiding

negative effects of the T2 decay during acquisition of long echo
trains. P.1
Can be selected, e.g. for turbo echo sequences.
0.0

Averaging mode
Sequence Part 1 P.1
If you are performing several scans, you can select a method for
averaging the scans: P.1
Short term
gives a better signal-to-noise ratio while maintaining the best
resolution.
Long term
gives a better signal-to-noise ratio with optimized suppres-
sion of motion artifacts.
Sorting
Sequence Part 1 P.1
Reordering defines the acquisition sequence of the raw data

lines. P.1
Linear
The k-space is stepped through linearly.
Centrally
The first scanned raw data lines are from the center of the k-
space. This improves the fat saturation in single shot
sequences since the center of the k-space is scanned imme-
diately after the fat saturation pulse.
0.0

Asymmetric echo
Sequence Part 1 P.1
To reduce the echo time, an asymmetrical echo may be used in

the readout direction. The maximum asymmetry not to be
exceeded is defined in the sequence. P.1
If the echo time is long enough, the echo is centered even if the
asymmetrical echo is permitted. P.1
Echo asymmetry may lead to cut-off artifacts.

The asymmetry of the echo is shown as a tool tip.
Contrasts
Sequence Part 1 P.1
This parameter is used to define the number of image contrasts.

In this way, you can specify the number of images to be
acquired with different T2- (for example, se-tse sequences) or
T2* weightings (gre sequences) in one scan. P.1
The Contrasts parameter is available only for a few

sequences.
You have to define an echo time for each contrast.
0.0

Bandwidth
Sequence Part 1 P.1
The readout bandwidth determines the fat-water pixel offset

and the signal-to-noise ratio. P.1
In some sequences, it is possible to assign a readout bandwidth

to each contrast. P.1
If you keep the mouse pointer over the entry, a tooltip will be
displayed. The positional displacement between fat and water
is displayed in pixels.
Allowed delay
Sequence Part 1 P.1
Here you can define a maximum delay time after the end of
measurement. This parameter defines the earliest time you
may restart scanning. P.1
The delay time is used to reduce the specific absorption rate

(SAR). The required delay time is automatically calculated by
the system and ranges between 0 seconds and the maximum
delay time. P.1
0.0

Flow compensation
Sequence Part 1 P.1
Flow compensation (gradient motion reduction) is used to avoid

signal loss and signal smearing due to moving spins. For this
purpose, additional gradient pulses are switched with a suitable
time duration and amplitude. Flow compensation can be per-
formed in the readout and slice-selection direction, or just in the
readout or slice-selection direction (for example, for tse). P.1
Some sequences enable you to specify flow compensation sep-

arately for each contrast. Use the arrow buttons under the input
field to scroll through the flow compensation. P.1
The following settings are possible for each contrast: P.1
Yes
Compensation in readout and in slice-encoding direction
Read
In readout direction only
Slice
In slice-encoding direction only
No
No flow compensation
0.0

Echo spacing
Sequence Part 1 P.1
This is the distance between two echoes for turbospin echo

sequences or epi sequences. P.1
Smaller echo spacing results in more compact sequence timing

and reduces image artifacts (improved resolution in the phase-
encoding direction with turbospin echo sequences, reduced
distortion through susceptibility with EPI).
P.1
Manual echo spacing

Sequence Part 1 P.1
P.1
If the Manual echo spacing option is active, the Echo spacing

display field changes into a spin box and you can enter a value
for the echo spacing. P.1
P.1
NOTE
Excessive echo spacing may cause increased distortion in
EPI sequences due to susceptibility. P.1
0.0

Turbo factor
Sequence Part 2 P.1
The Turbo factor specifies the number of refocused spin ech-

oes per RF excitation that help generate an image. P.1
It therefore determines the gain in scan time over a conven-

tional spin echo sequence with comparable parameters.
P.1
EPI factor
Sequence Part 2 P.1
The EPI factor specifies the number of refocused gradient ech-

oes per RF excitation involved in image generation. P.1
In single-shot EPI sequences, the number of lines to be mea-

sured is used as the EPI factor.
Segments
Sequence Part 2, Physio Signal1 P.1
With the segments, you may define the number of rows in the k
space that are measured for an image during a TR interval. P.1
The Segments parameter is especially suitable for physiolog-
ical imaging.
0.0

Combined echoes
Sequence Part 2 P.1
The number of echoes acquired during a single measurement

may be combined to form an image (for example, MEDIC
sequences). P.1
This method produces flow-compensated T2* images with a

high signal-to-noise ratio.
P.1
RF Pulse Type
Sequence Part 2 P.1
RF pulse type defines the length and the envelope of the radio
frequency pulses. P.1
The following settings are possible: P.1
Fast
short RF pulse, which may cause cross-talk between the
slices/slabs. This setting is therefore only recommended for
fast scans with medium distance factors (for example,
breath-holding techniques)
Normal
RF pulse with a good slice profile, allowing for scans with a
small distance factor and little "cross-talk"
Low SAR
extended RF pulse with a good slice profile and reduced spe-
cific absorption rate
You can select this setting to reduce SAR. This reduces scan
performance.
Optimized
optimized RF pulse for reducing slice cross-talk
0.0

Gradient mode
Sequence Part 2 P.1
Here you define the rise time and maximum gradient strength
the gradients can be switched during the sequence. P.1
The possible settings depend on the gradient system: P.1
Fast
The gradient rise time and strength are utilized to the full.
This mode may cause peripheral nerve stimulation in the
patient. The fast option is only available on Quantum and
Sonata systems.
Normal
For many sequences this setting is a good compromise
between performance and noise.
Whisper
Guarantees quietest gradients possible at an acceptable
performance level.
0.0

A high gradient rise time can lead to an exceeded stimulation

threshold and as a result to peripheral nerve stimulation in the
patient. P.1
If the gradient mode is adjusted by the stimulation monitor, the

setting is marked by an asterisk *, e.g. Fast*. This means the
gradient slope times have been adjusted automatically to pre-
vent the stimulation limit from being exceeded.
Page F.1434, Stimulation limit reached P.1
You can change the mode from Fast* to Fast. To reverse the
mode, you need the stimulation monitor to ensure an optimal
adjusted sequence. P.1
0.0

Excitation
Sequence Part 2 P.1
This parameter defines how the RF excitation pulse is to be

transmitted. P.1
slice-selective or slab-selective
non-selective
If you have selected the non-selective option, aliasing arti-

facts may occur in the slice-selection direction.
RF spoiling
Sequence Part 2 P.1
The RF spoiler is used to destroy residual phase coherence of

spins and is used in gradient echo sequences to generate
FLASH contrast. P.1
0.0

Application-specific parameters P.1
Depending on the sequence selected, the parameter card stack

might contain an additional card for application-specific set-
tings. P.1
The following application cards might be displayed: P.1
Angio (Time-of-Flight angiography, contrast agent enhanced

angiography, phase contrast angiography, flow quantifica-
tion)
Diff (diffusion-weighted imaging)
Perf (perfusion scans)
BOLD (Blood Oxygenation Level Dependent imaging)
Physio-Cardiac (cardiac imaging)
Inline Breast
Inline Common
The application-specific parameter cards contain a number of

parameters that are described on the preceding pages.
0.0

Inflow
Angio Common P.1
The shape of the RF pulse is adapted to the velocity and direc-

tion of the blood flow (slow, medium, fast) to prevent saturation
effects of the blood when it passes through a slice or slab. P.1
In this way, even signal distribution of the blood vessels of a slab
is achieved. P.1
TONE method = Tilted, Optimized, Nonsaturating Excitation
Flow direction
Angio Common P.1
Flow direction defines which direction of blood flow will be dis-

played. P.1
The direction always refers to the patient coordinate system. P.1
For example, in a mainly transverse slice you can select the

Head-Feet or Feet-Head direction. P.1
As you change the flow direction, the saturation region auto-

matically moves to the outflow side of the slab.
0.0

Angio Common P.1
The 3D centric reordering option causes quickest possible

scanning of the center of the raw data space in contrast agent
enhanced 3D angiography after contrast agent inflow. P.1
The arteries show optimal contrast.
P.1
Time to Center
Angio Common P.1
The Time to Center field shows the scan time required until the
scan has reached the k space center. P.1
This information is required for timing the contrast agent bolus

in contrast agent enhanced angiography. P.1
0.0

Flow mode
Angio Common P.1
Here you can define the flow encoding mode: P.1
Single vel. - one flow sensitivity (flow velocity encoding)

Measures the velocity of blood flow in 3 spatial directions,
with reference to a flow sensitivity. This mode provides ves-
sel display independent of the direction of flow.
Single dir. - one direction for several flow sensitivities
Measures the blood flow with reference to several flow sen-
sitivities but only in one spatial direction.
This mode is used to acquire great variations in flow veloci-
ties (e.g., in the area of peripheral arteries).
Free
Permits free selection of the flow sensitivities and spatial
directions.
The input options for the following parameters depend on the

flow mode selected.
0.0

Flow velocity
Angio Common P.1
Number of flow sensitivities to be set
P.1
Velocity enc.
Angio Common P.1
Determining the flow sensitivities in cm/s.
P.1
Direction
Angio Common P.1
Flow-sensitive axis for each flow sensitivity entered. P.1
Through plane
The flow-sensitive axis is perpendicular to the image plane.
Only flow moving perpendicular to the image plane is
detected.
0.0

Rephased images
Angio Common P.1
Reconstruction of a rephased image (magnitude image).

P.1
Magnitude images
Angio Common P.1
Reconstruction of a set of magnitude images (1 image per flow

direction and flow sensitivity).
P.1
Magnitude sum
Angio Common P.1
P.1 Reconstruction of a magnitude sum image from the contributing

images of a slice.
P.1
Phase images
Angio Common P.1
Reconstruction of a set of phase images (1 image per flow

direction and flow sensitivity). P.1
0.0

Diffusion mode
Diff P.1
The Diffusion mode describes the measurement method and

the diffusion-sensitive direction. P.1
1-Scan Trace
Only one scan is required per image.
Advantage: Shorter acquisition time than in 3-Scan Trace
mode
3-Scan Trace
Three scans are required per image.
Advantage: shorter echo time and better SNR than in
1-Scan Trace mode
One diffusion-weighted image per slice position and b-value is
calculated. The diffusion weighting depends on the trace of the
diffusion sensor (mean value of the diagonal elements Dxx,
Dyy, and Dzz). P.1
Orthogonal
Three images are acquired per slice position and b value (if
b0), one image with diffusion weighting each for the read,
phase, and slice directions.
For b-value b = 0, only one image per slice position is
acquired.
Slice
One image is acquired per slice position and b-value, the dif-
fusion weighting is in the slice-selection direction.
Phases
fusion weighting is in the phase-encoding direction.
0.0

Read
fusion weighting is in the readout direction.
Diagonal
In the HASTE sequence with a diffusion weighting, the diffu-
sion weighting points in the direction of the spatial diagonal.
MDDW
MDDW stands for multi-directional diffusion weighting. One
diffusion-weighted images is acquired per slice position, per
b-value, and (for b> 0) per diffusion encoding direction. The
number of directions is defined with the Diff. Directions
parameter.
In MDDW mode it is not possible to calculate ADC maps or
other parameter images. This mode is mainly for customers
who have their own image post-processing system.
Diff. weightings
Diff P.1
Number of diffusion weightings included in a scan. Individual

weightings have to be defined before measurement in the b
value field. You can enter up to 16 b values. P.1
0.0

b-value
Diff P.1
The nominal b value is a measure of diffusion weighting.

It is expressed in s/mm2. P.1
The number of possible b values is defined by the Diffusion

Weighting parameter. P.1
The greater the value, the stronger the diffusion weighting. The
b-value increases with the intensity, duration, and time interval
of the diffusion-sensitive gradient pulses. P.1
b value = 0 corresponds to one T2*-weighted image.

P.1
Diffusion-weighted images
Diff P.1
Here you can define the reconstruction settings for inline recon-
struction of the diffusion: P.1
When you click Diff. weighted images, you obtain original

images with diffusion weighting. These images contain T1, T2,
and diffusion-weighted portions. P.1
Diffusion weighting is performed in the direction set with the Dif-

fusion mode parameter (e.g. if it is Slice in the slice-selection
direction). P.1
0.0

Trace-weighted images
Diff P.1
This option calculates an isotropically diffusion-weighted

image, i.e. all spatial directions are averaged. This eliminates
signal variations in healthy tissue caused by anisotropic effects.
As a result, it is easier to identify abnormal areas with restricted
diffusion. P.1
This option can be selected both in 1-scan trace mode and in 3-

scan trace (diffusion mode).
P.1
Average ADC maps

Diff P.1
The ADC maps (Apparent Diffusion Coefficient) indicated the

grayscale values of the diffusion coefficients. The grayscales
are derived from scans with different diffusion weighting (b val-
ues).
ADC maps contain no T1 or T2 components. P.1
The Average ADC maps option provides an ADC image in

which averaging has been performed over the different spatial
directions and b-values used. P.1
The option can only be selected if at least two b values are

set.
0.0

Individual ADC maps

Diff P.1
Individual ADC maps show the ADC along the gradient axis.P.1
The option can only be selected if at least two b values are
set.
Noise level
Diff P.1
The noise level is a threshold value used to determine the pixel

intensity for calculating ADC maps.
P.1
Diffusion moment
Diff P.1
This parameter is only displayed for the psif sequence. P.1
The Diff. moment is a measure of the strength of diffusion

weighting. It is the amplitude multiplied by the duration of the
diffusion gradient. P.1
0.0

Diff. directions P.1
Diff P.1
If you have selected the MDDW mode, you can enter the num-
ber of diffusion encoding directions under Diff. directions. P.1
You can set 6 or 12 directions. P.1
The b-value and the diffusion direction are displayed to you in

the image text of the diffusion-weighted images acquired. P.1
Example:
b1000#3 b=1000s/mm2, third direction of 6 or 12
P.1
For a precise definition of the individual directions refer to the

Application Manual, Chapter Multidirectional diffusion
weighting.
0.0

Original images
Perf P.1
In perfusion scans, the original images are always recon-

structed and stored. You can use them for additional postpro-
cessing functions.
P.1
Time-to-Peak-Map (TTP)
Perf, Inline Breast P.1
If the TTP option is activated, a time-to-peak image will be cal-

culated for each slice. The pixel intensity value in the image
shows the time (in seconds) that elapsed before the signal peak
was reached. P.1
The brighter the areas in the grayscale image, the longer the
time until signal peak. For this reason, arrival of the contrast
agent is delayed. P.1
If you have set fewer than 15 measurements, you cannot acti-

vate the TTP option. On the Inline Breast card, the option is not
activated for fewer than 2 measurements. P.1
In color perfusion images, the TTP display depends on the

selected color scale.
0.0


Perf P.1
If the PBP option is activated, a percentage signal image will be

calculated for each slice. This image shows the signal change
of the bolus peak relative to the base line. P.1
The lighter the regions are displayed in the image, the less con-
trast agent has arrived there. P.1

vate the PBP option.
P.1

Perf P.1
With the GBP option activated, a global time-density curve is

calculated to assess the bolus passage that has just occurred.P.1
vate the GBP option.
P.1
Wash - In
Inline Breast P.1
Here you can define whether the parameters for signal change
in the starting range of the dynamic measurement series will be
enabled. P.1
0.0

Color table
Inline Breast P.1
You can define color palettes for individual images.

P.1
First measurement
Inline Breast P.1
For a Wash - In / Wash - Out calculation, you can define the

measurement to be used first within a measurement series.
P.1
Last measurement
Inline Breast P.1
For a Wash - In / Wash - Out calculation, you can define the

measurement to be used last within a measurement series.
P.1
Highest value
Inline Breast P.1
You are not using the value of the last measurement but rather
the highest value in the range between the first and last mea-
surement for calculating the Wash - In parameter image. P.1
0.0

Wash - Out
Inline Breast P.1
Here you can define whether the parameter card for signal
change will be calculated in the end range of the dynamic mea-
surement series and the parameters enabled. P.1
P.1
PEI
Inline Breast P.1
Positive enhancement integral

P.1
P.1

Perf, BOLD P.1
The Starting ignore meas spin box is used to define the num-
ber of first scans that are not used for evaluation (contrast has
stabilized). P.1
0.0

Motion correction
Perf, BOLD P.1
If this option is activated, motion correction will be performed

during image calculation. P.1
Small patient movements (0.3 mm) may cause significant arti-

facts in the functional information. In Fig. 1 these apparent
instances of activation are marked yellow. Using the 3D motion
correction, you can reduce the relative motion (translation and
rotation) between measured volume data sets (Fig. 2). P.1
The motion correction is displayed in the image text.

Page P.21, Text Annotations in Medical Images P.1
Image type MOCO applies. P.1
The comment line shows the correction parameters. The

images of the first repetition have only the comment "Reference
volume for motion correction". P.1
0.0

Example: Motion: -3.98, -0.27, 4.04, -2.48, 3.12, -0.35

The first three values show translation in the x-, y-, z-direction
(in millimeters) and the following three values show rotation
about the x, y, z axis (degrees).
P.1
Interpolation
Perf, BOLD P.1
If the Motion correction option is activated, you can select an

interpolation method for motion correction in the Interpolation
selection list: P.1
Linear - Linear interpolation

Fastest method of real-time post-processing
3D-K-space - Interpolation in Fourier space
The best quality method of real-time post-processing
0.0

Spatial filter
Perf, BOLD P.1
If you have selected the Motion correction option, you can

select low-pass filtering for softening the images under Spatial
filter. P.1
The spatial filter increases the signal-to-noise ratio, but reduces

local resolution.
P.1
Filter setting
Perf, BOLD P.1
If the Spatial filter option is activated, you can use the

Filter Setting spin box to set the width of the Gaussian filter
used. It defines the filter strength. P.1
Example: P.1
(1) No filtering
(2) Weak (2.0)
(3) Medium (1.0)
(4) Strong (0.5)
0.0

t-Test
BOLD P.1
The t-test option provides a student's t-test evaluation. A

parameter map of the t values is calculated to locate the cere-
bral regions exhibiting significant signal differences between
the resting and active states. P.1
The t-test option can not be selected if the number of scans

is less than 15. Neither can the associated parameters
Threshold, Window, and Starting ignore meas.
The t-test calculation is saved as an additional series.
Dynamic t-cards
BOLD P.1
If the Dynamic t-cards option is activated, the t-cards gener-

ated during scanning are stored. This permits real-time opera-
tion of the Neuro 3D-task card. P.1
A "StartFMRI" series is also created at the start of scanning. P.1
0.0

Threshold
BOLD P.1
The Threshold spin box is used for entering a threshold value

for the t-test evaluation. At a certain level of intensity, pixels from
the t-test images will be used to calculate overlaid images. P.1
This threshold value does not apply to calculation of pure t-
test images.
Window
BOLD P.1
The Window selection list is used to set the t-test calculation

window. P.1
Constant
Only the BOLD images of a paradigm cycle are used to cal-
culate the t-test images. Previously acquired series are
excluded.
Growing
All acquired series are included in the calculation of the t-test
images. Signal differences are summed up to improve the
statistics.
Paradigm size
BOLD P.1
The Paradigm size spin box is used to determine the number

of entries in the paradigm table. P.1
0.0

Paradigm table
BOLD P.1
This table can only be edited if t-test is selected. You can make
one of the following settings for each scan here: P.1
Baseline
The scan is performed as a functional scan without stimula-
tion.
Active
The scan is performed as a functional scan with stimulation.
Ignore
The scan is not used for evaluation.
You may edit the cells in the right column of the paradigm table.
Just click them with the mouse. The selection list appears and
you can select one of the three settings listed above: P.1
0.0

Dark blood
Physio Cardiac P.1
This option is used to transmit a special preparation pulse to

saturate the blood in cardiac sequences. The cardiac muscle is
then displayed especially well. P.1
Blood then appears dark in the image, hence the name "dark
blood".
P.1
Tagging
Physio Cardiac P.1
It is possible to excite tagging lines in the image plane. This pro-

vides for clearly visible differences in heart wall thickness. P.1
Grid Tag
Grid of lines as orientation aid. For visualizing regional and
global heart wall movements.
Line Tag
Parallel lines as orientation aids. For visualizing heart wall
movements in the long main axis view or four-chamber view.
None
No orientation aids
0.0

Distance
Physio Cardiac P.1
The Distance parameter allows you to select the distance

between the orientation aids (tags).
P.1
Angle
Physio Cardiac P.1
If you have selected Line Tag as auxiliary lines, you can also
enter the angle between the orientation lines (tags) and the
phase-encoding direction. P.1
0.0

Parameters for image evaluation P.1
Suitable series, e.g. from a contrast agent examination, can be

post-processed on the Viewing or 3D task cards with different
evaluation functions.
Page L.11, Dynamic Analysis
Page H.12, 3D evaluation method
P.1
You can set protocol parameters for the evaluation functions

Subtraction and Standard deviation and for the MIP projec-
tion on the Inline-Common or Angio-Inline parameter card
(for angiography examinations).
P.1
Subtract
Inline Common, Angio Inline P.1
If the Subtract option is activated, subtraction evaluation is per-

formed with a series of current scans. P.1
This generates images showing, for example, changes after

contrast agent administration. P.1
0.0

Saving images
If the Save Images option is activated, the result images of the

subtraction will be
saved automatically. P.1
The Save Images parameter is only displayed, if the Sub-

tract option is activated.
Autoscaling
If the Autoscaling option is activated, the subtraction result

images are scaled automatically, that is, the display area of the
calculated values is adjusted automatically. P.1
The Autoscaling parameter is only displayed, if the Subtract

option is activated.
0.0

Scaling factor
The Scaling factor spin box is used for entering an individual

factor for scaling the display area of the calculated subtraction
values. P.1
The Scaling factor parameter is only displayed, if the Sub-

tract option is activated and the Autoscaling option is deac-
tivated.
Offset
The Offset spin box is used for entering an offset for the lower
and upper threshold of the display area of the calculated sub-
traction values. P.1
The Offset parameter is only displayed, if the Subtract option

is activated and the Autoscaling option is deactivated.
0.0

Subtrahend
If multiple scans are set in the current protocol, the Subtrahend

spin box is used to define the acquired series that will be sub-
tracted from all following series (subtraction within a proto-
col). P.1
If only one scan is set, the acquired series for a subtraction eval-
uation will be used with the acquired series of another protocol
(subtraction across protocols) P.1
In this case, it is not possible to edit the Subtrahend spin box,

and the selection of the subtrahend depends on whether the
protocol is identified as a contrast agent scan in the program
control. P.1
If the protocol is marked as a contrast agent scan with a

syringe icon, the series last buffered on the image recon-
struction system will be subtracted from the current series.
If the protocol is not marked with the syringe icon, the current
series will be loaded into the buffer of the image computer
and subtracted from the series of a following protocol.
The Subtrahend parameter is only displayed, if the Subtract

option is activated.
0.0

Std-Dev-Sag
If the Std-Dev-Sag option is activated, standard deviation result

images with sagittal orientation are calculated from the
acquired slabs of the current protocol. You can see variances in
pixel values in the sagittal direction. P.1
It is only possible to edit the Std-Dev-Sag parameter if it is a

3D scan and the number of slices in the slabs is at least 4.
Std-Dev-Cor
If the Std-Dev-Cor option is activated, standard deviation result

images with coronal orientation are calculated from the
acquired slabs of the current protocol. You can see the variance
of the pixel values in the coronal direction. P.1
It is only possible to edit the Std-Dev-Cor parameter if it is a

0.0

Std-Dev-Tra
If the Std-Dev-Tra option is activated, standard deviation result

images with transverse orientation are calculated from the
acquired slabs of the current protocol. You can see the variance
of the pixel values in the transverse direction. P.1
It is only possible to edit the Std-Dev-Tra parameter if it is a

Std-Dev-Time
If the Std-Dev-Time option is activated, standard deviation

result images with the orientation of the acquired slice groups
or slabs are calculated from the acquired slice groups or slabs
of the current protocol. You can see the variance of the pixel val-
ues within the scan period. Both multiple phases and multiple
scans can be evaluated. P.1
0.0

MIP-Sag
If the MIP-Sag option is activated, MIP images with sagittal ori-

entation are calculated from the acquired slabs of the current
protocol. P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Sag parameter if it is a 3D

scan and the number of slices in the slabs is at least 4.
MIP-Cor
If the MIP-Cor option is activated, MIP images with coronal ori-

entation are calculated from the acquired slabs of the current
protocol. P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Cor parameter if it is a 3D

0.0

MIP-Tra
If the MIP-Tra option is activated, MIP images with transverse

orientation are calculated from the acquired slabs of the current
protocol. P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Tra parameter if it is a 3D

MIP-Time
Inline Common, Angio Inline, Inline Breast P.1
If the MIP-Time option is activated, MIP images with the orien-

tation of the acquired slice groups or slabs are calculated from
the acquired slice groups or slabs of the current protocol. In the
calculation, the highest pixel value along the time axis is taken
into account. P.1
It is only possible to edit the MIP-Time option if there is at

least one scan repetition or, in the case of triggered scans, at
least 2 phases are scanned.
0.0


The Save original images option is normally activated and can

not be edited. It is therefore possible to use the original images
for other postprocessing functions. P.1
Only if an option for standard deviation or for MIP project is acti-

vated, can you deactivate the Save original images option. P.1
0.0

Parameters for physiologically

triggered scanning P.1
Physiologically triggered scan synchronize physiological sig-

nals sensed on the patient's body with scans. This avoids
motion artifacts caused by the heartbeat or respiration. P.1
You may also retrospectively assign acquired image data to

physiological signal curves. P.1
You will find measurement parameters specifically for physio-

logically triggered scan on the Physio parameter card.
P.1
1st Signal/Mode
Physio Signal 1 P.1
The 1st Signal/Mode selection list allows you to select a phys-

iological signal and a scan mode.
P.1
Selectable physiological trigger signals:

P.1
ECG signal P.1 The ECG signal is detected on the skin surface with electrodes.
The signal shows the action potential of the heart as a curve. P.1
The individual curve phases correspond to the respective con-
traction or relaxation phases of the heart. The R wave in the
QRS complex is used as triggering point for the scan. P.1
ECG triggering is especially suitable for scans of the chest and

heart, because such images would be blurred by the heartbeat
with the normal scanning method. P.1
0.0

Pulse signal P.1 Pulse triggering is especially suitable for suppressing motion
and flow artifacts that result from pulsating blood or CSF. P.1
You can take the pulse signal, for example, from the middle fin-
ger of the patient with the pulse sensor. P.1
The first pulse wave ("premature pulse wave") is used for trig-
gering. This wave corresponds to the systolic blood pressure.P.1
External signal P.1 You can input an external, digital triggering signal via the PMU
strip at the foot end of the patient table. P.1
You use an external triggering signal, for example, for functional

scans (bold imaging) to trigger scanning of a series. P.1
The rising edge of the signal is used to start the scan. P.1
Respiratory signal P.1 The respiratory signal is obtained with the respiratory belt. The
cyclic expansion and contraction of the thorax generates the
respiratory curve. P.1
With respiratory triggering you can avoid motion artifacts

caused by the patient breathing.
P.1
ECG/Retro, Pulse/Retro, Some special sequences allow retrospective gating. In this

Ext/Retro P.1 case, the scan is performed with triggering. Instead, the
acquired image data are retrospectively sorted and subse-
quently correlated with the characteristics of a physiological sig-
nal. P.1
Retrospective gating may be applied to ECG signal curves,

pulse signal curves, and external trigger signal curves. P.1
0.0

Average cycle
Physio Signal 1 P.1
Your system derives the Average cycle from statistical values.

This value indicates the time that has elapsed between two trig-
ger events. P.1
The standard deviation is subtracted from this value to calculate

the system acquisition window: P.1
For the ECG, Pulse, and External signals, the system acqui-
sition window is the Average cycle minus twice the standard
deviation.
For the Resp signal, the system acquisition window is Aver-
age cycle/2 minus the standard deviation.
Acquisition window
Physio Signal 1 P.1
In the field Acquisition window you can enter the data acqui-
sition time, that is, the time that is used for the scan after a trig-
ger pulse in the physiologically triggered scan. P.1
In this way you define the scan acquisition window. P.1
You should choose an acquisition window that is approximately

10% shorter than the average signal period (average cycle). P.1
If you hover the mouse pointer over the Acquisition window
input field, a tool tip will be displayed. It shows the acquisition
time recommended by the system.
0.0

Trigger pulse
Physio Signal 1, Physio PACE P.1
In the Trigger pulse field, you define whether you want to use
every trigger event or only every nth event to trigger scanning.P.1
The value 1 means that every trigger signal starts a scan. P.1
For ECG, pulse, or external trigger signal only.
Trigger delay
Physio Signal 1 P.1
You can acquire images at any time during the signal cycle. Just
enter a delay time for the ECG/trigger signal into the Trigger
delay field. P.1
The value entered corresponds to the time (grey bar) planned

between the trigger signal and the start of the measurement. P.1
For an adult patient with a pulse frequency of 70/min, you
require, for example, a delay time of 0 ms to acquire an image
of the end diastole. For an image of the systole, you need a
delay time of 250 - 350 ms. P.1
Only for ECG, pulse and external trigger signal.
0.0

Phases
Physio Signal 1 P.1
The Phases field defines how many phases of the heartbeat or

how many respiratory phases you want to include. P.1
You can use this, for example, for multislice/multiphase scans of

the heart. P.1
The number of heart phases or respiratory phases depends

on the selected repetition time TR. Please observe the limits.
Calculated phases
Physio Signal 1 P.1
This parameter is displayed if you have selected a Retro mode

from the 1st Signal/Mode selection list. P.1
Calculated phases is used to define the number of recon-

structed images per heart interval. P.1
0.0

Threshold
Physio Signal 1 P.1
Here, you select at which point of the respiratory cycle scanning

is to be triggered. P.1
When the respiratory curve reaches this threshold value, the

signal is triggered. P.1
The threshold value is stated as a percentage of the respiratory

curve. 100% corresponds to the maximum expansion of the rib
cage. P.1
Respiratory triggering only.
Respiratory phase
Physio Signal 1 P.1
Here, you select whether Inspiration (breathing in) or Expira-

tion (breathing out) will be used for triggering. P.1
0.0


Physio PACE P.1
Number of slices acquired during a respiratory cycle. Only

available for haste, trufi, and tfl sequences.
P.1
Cardiac trigger / respiratory cycle

Physio PACE P.1
Number of cardiac trigger pulses per respiratory cycle.

Replaces Slices / respiratory cycle for double triggering. P.1
0.0

APPENDIX Text Annotations in
P.2 Medical Images P.2
Various information is shown as image text on medical images.

This information is used to identify the patient and to document
scan and image parameters. P.2
The image text is sorted by topic and positioned in the four cor-
ners of the image. P.2

(2) Comment lines
(3) Mainly system-specific information
(5) Data about the MR image
(6) Orientation mark
(7) Scale
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.21

Text Annotations in Medical Images References
Content of the image text components P.2
Here is a list of the individual items of information in the image

text components. P.2
(1) Patient and The top left corner shows the patient and examination data. P.2
examination data P.2
Image text Example Description

Patient name Peter Patient
Patient ID 02081948
Date of birth, age *11.11.1970; 30Y
Examination number STUDY 1
Date acquired 17.10.01
Time acquired 13:47:46.78
Series and image number and total 2 IMA 5/7 Series 2, total of 7 images in series 2
number of images Image 5 is displayed
P.2
(2) Comment lines P.2 At the lower edge next to the scan and image parameters, the
data about contrast medium administration as well as an image
comment are provided. P.2
P.2
Image text Example Description

Contrast agent/time after injection in GADOLINIUM 1.1 1.1 s after administration of
sec GADOLINIUM
Image comment Motion: 0.27, -0.07, 1.29, -0.47, Motion correction parameters for
0.11, -0.01 BOLD images
0.0

References Text Annotations in Medical Images
(3) Plant-specific The top right corner contains the name of your hospital or prac-
information and patient tice, the system name, the software version, patient position,
position P.2 and direction of viewing. P.2
P.2
Image text Abbreviation Example

Institution - St. Marys, New York
System name - Magnetom Symphony
Software version - MR 2006T
Patient position (orientation and HFS (Head First Supine)
position) and viewing orientation HFP (Head First Prone)
HFDR (Head First Decubitus Right)
HFDL (Head First Decubitus Left)
FFS (Feet First Supine)
FFP (Feet First Prone)
FFDR (Feet First Decubitus Right)
FFDL (Head First Decubitus Left)
Coordinate system LPH (patient coordinate system left- +LPH
posterior-head)
Referring physician Dr. Mustermann
Phase-encoding direction
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.23

(4) Scan and image In the bottom left corner you can see the parameters used to
parameters P.2 generate the image. P.2

Magnification factor/compression MF MF 1.51/CQ 80
CQ as a percentage
Trigger time TT in msec TT 50
Inversion time TI in msec TI 50
Repetition time TR in msec TR 600
Echo time TE in msec TE 30
Scan duration * concatenations TA TA 02:36*4
HH:MM:SS (hours range); MM:SS (minutes range);
SS.HS (seconds range)
Pixel bandwidth BW in hertz/pixels BW 1000.0
Image type Page P.210, List of image types
px - Grappa with acceleration factor x p2 M/MIP

Px - Sense with acceleration factor x
Scan options (1st line) RG - Respiratory Gating RG/CT
CG - Cardiac Gating
RT - Respiratory Trigger
CT - Cardiac Trigger
EXT - External trigger
Averages/scan options (2nd line) A (y) - number of averages A4/FS/SAT1/MT
FS - fat saturation
WS - water saturation
WE - water excitation
SAT(y) - number of saturation regions
DB - dark blood
IR - inversion recovery
SR - saturation recovery
G (x) - grid tag with x mm grid spacing or
L(x) - line tag with x mm line spacing
MT - MTC pulse
0.0


Coil information Page P.27, List of Coil Abbreviations in the Image NE1;SP1
Text
Sequence name/flip angle A * in front of the sequence name means that an *TS2_23 80
original Siemens sequence was used.
P.2
(5) Data about the The bottom right corner shows data about the position, orienta-
MR image P.2 tion, and thickness of the acquired slice, about the extent (FoV),
and about the window values.
P.2
P.2

Sequence mask D - Door open D\I
I - Interpolation
R - Raw data filter
E - Elliptical filter
Table position (H,F) TP TP H300
H/F in mm
Slice position (+LPH) SP in mm SP L8.7
Slice thickness SL in mm SL 4.0
Slice thickness interpolated SL i in mm SL 4.0 i
FoV (Field of View) FoV in mm FoV 230 230
Acquisition matrix interpolated p - partial Fourier 192p 256s I
Acquisition matrix not interpolated s - swap 192p 256s
I - Interpolation
Image orientation with inplane Sag, Tra, Cor Tra>Cor(-20)>Sag(-30)
rotation
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.25


Flow-encoding direction vXXX_inplane_xy - in-plane flow v150_inplane_fh
encoding
vXXX_through - through-plane flow
encoding
XXX - flow velocity in cm/sec
xy - direction, e.g. fh (feet to head)
Window width (contrast) W W -100

Window center (brightness) C C -200
0.0

List of Coil Abbreviations in the

Image Text P.2
The coils and coil elements used are shown in the lower left
image text. P.2
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.27

MAGNETOM Symphony a Tim System P.2
P.2
Image text Coil name

BO1, BO2 Body Matrix
BRL, BRR CP Breast Array
DLL Double Loop Left
DLR Double Loop Right
EN Endorectal
EX CP Extremity
FL CP Flex Large
FLL Flex Loop Large
FLS Flex Loop Small
FS CP Flex Small
HE CP Head Array, TxRx Head
HE1, ..., HE4 Head Matrix
HRH HR Head (8 Channel Head)
KN HR Knee
NE1, NE2 Neck Matrix
PL1, ..., PL4 H PA Matrix
PR1, ..., PR4 F PA Matrix (CP PA Array)
SH Shoulder Array
SP1, ..., SP8 Spine Matrix
0.0

MAGNETOM Trio a Tim System P.2
P.2
Image text Coil name

BL, BR F 4 Channel Breast Array
H 4 Channel Breast Array
BO1, BO2 Body Matrix
EX CP Extremity
HE TxRx Head
HE1, ..., HE4 Head Matrix
KN High Resolution Knee, TxRx Knee Array
NE1, NE2 Neck Matrix
PL1, ...,PL4 H PA Matrix
PR1, ...,PR4 F PA Matrix (CP PA Array)
SH Shoulder Array
SHL Shoulder Array Large
SHS Shoulder Array Small
SP1, ..., SP8 Spine Matrix
WR CP Wrist
0.0
syngo MR 2006T P.29

List of image types P.2
The image type is shown in the lower left image text. P.2
An image may include more than one image type, e.g. after sev-
eral post-processing steps. These are concatenated, and sep-
arated by a slash (/). If the maximum line length is exceeded,
the last image types are omitted.
P.2
Example P.2 Assuming the defined maximum length is 18 characters: P.2
TYP1/TYP2/TYP3/TYP4 (19 characters) P.2
will be truncated to TYP1/TYP2/TYP3 (14 characters). P.2
0.0

Inline reconstruction P.2
Flow quantification P.2
Abbreviation Image type

R Real image
M Rephased image (magnitude image)
P Phase contrast image
P.2
Diffusion, stroke, and

breast perfusion P.2
ADC Apparent Diffusion Coefficient, diffusion-weighted

image (b-values)
TTP Time To Peak image
SCM Signal Change image
TCS Time Course of Signal
PBP Percentage signal image (Percent-of-Baseline at Peak;
bolus peak relative to baseline).
GBP Global time-density curve (Global Average Bolus Curve
Plotted; passage of bolus)
RELMTT Relative MTT image (relat. average transit time)
WI Wash In image
WO Wash Out image
PEI Positive Enhancement Integral image
MITP Maximum Intensity Time Projection image
COMB Combination image
0.0

Phase contrast Angio P.2 P.2

MAG Magnitude image
MSUM Sum image from magnitude images of a slice
Graphic slice position P.2 P.2

GSP Reference image with graphic objects
Functional imaging P.2 P.2

MEAN Mean value image
TTEST Result image of volunteer's t-test
MOSAIC Mosaic image
COR Correlation image
Inline post-processing P.2 P.2

MIP Maximum Intensity Projection image
MIP_SAG Sagittal image from MIP reconstruction
MIP_COR Coronal image from MIP reconstruction
MIP_TRA Transverse image from MIP reconstruction
TMIP Temporal MIP, MIP reconstruction of time sequence
of images
TMIP_SAG Sagittal TMIP image
TMIP_COR Coronal TMIP image
TMIP_TRA Transverse TMIP image
TSTDDEV Temporary standard deviation image
0.0


STDDEV_SAG Sagittal standard deviation image
STDDEV_COR Coronal standard deviation image
STDDEV_TRA Transverse standard deviation image
DIS2D Image after 2D remapping (distortion correction)
DIS3D Image after 3D remapping (distortion correction)
ND Images without 2D remapping
RETRO Retro-Gating image
NORM Image after normalization algorithm
PROJECTION Projection image
IMAGE
FIL Inline Image Filter
MOCO BOLD or perfusion image with motion correction
FILTERED BOLD or perfusion image with spatial filtering
P.2
Import/export P.2 P.2

OTHER Converted N3/3.5 image or SC (secondary
captured) image
0.0

Post-processing P.2
3D reconstruction P.2 P.2

CSA MPR Multiplanar reconstruction image (MPR)
CSA MPR THIN MPR Thin image
CSA MPR THICK MPR Thick image
CSA MPR CURVED Curved MPR image
CSA MIP MIP reconstruction image
CSA MIP THIN MIP Thin image
CSA SSD SSD reconstruction (Shaded Surface Display)
CSA SUBTRACT Subtraction image
CSA 3D EDITOR 3D editor processing image
CSA 3D FUSION Fusion image
CSA VRT VRT (Volume Rendering Technique) image
CSA AVERAGE VRT image
CSA RESAMPLED Zooming/panning image
CSA BLACK IMAGE Graphic image
Dynamic analysis P.2 P.2

ADD An addition
MEAN Mean value image
COR Correlation image
DIFFER Differentiation image
DIFFUS Diffusion weighted image
DIV Division image
0.0


SDEV Standard deviation image
INT Integration image
MULT Multiplication image
SLOPE SLOPE evaluation contrast imagery
SUB Subtraction image
T1 T1 image
T2 T2 image
PDT1 T1-weighted proton density image
PDT2 T2-weighted proton density image
TTP Time To Peak image
TTEST Statistical analysis method for BOLD images
LOG Logarithm function image
CVxx Image filtered with Context Vision filter
(xx stands for filter strength; integer value)
Mean Curve P.2 P.2

CSA BLACK IMAGE Graphics and table image
Position display P.2 P.2

POSDISP Position display image
0.0

Image composing P.2 P.2

COMPOSED Composed images
Spectroscopy P.2 P.2

SPEC Spectrum
0.0

syngo MR Index P.2
A
Acceleration factor PE P.160
Acceleration factor 3D P.162
Accept. Location P.128
Access authorization
Soft tissue evaluation L.63
Access authorization to the BOLD task card L.42
Access control B.22, B.244, B.32
Access rights L.54
Acquiring diagnostic information C.124
Acquisition sequence for lines of raw data P.191
Acquisition window F.1520, F.1528, P.1136
Activating
Blocking areas (BOLD) L.424
Clip planes K.310
Activating first level mode F.1415
Activating/deactivating
Scan program option archive F.1629
Scan program option visibility F.1630
Activation map
Hiding K.41
Loading K.23
Setting colors K.47
Setting the cluster size K.411
Setting value ranges K.48
ADC images (apparent diffusion coefficient) P.1110
Noise level P.1111
Adding
Slab group F.576
Slice group F.576
Addition
Starting L.128
Adjusting protocols
Scanning with AutoAlign Scout F.198
Adjustment C.21, C.214
Closing C.263
Displaying the results C.270
Frequency adjustment C.223
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX1

Index syngo MR
Inline adjustment C.265 Annotating

Interactive 3D Shim C.248 Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1625
Manual water suppression C.256 Annotations G.551, H.370
Rejecting the results C.271 Application program A.22
Setting the adjust volume C.214 Applications
Starting all adjustments C.264 User-defined D.312
Stopping C.264 Applying parameter changes F.584
Transmitter adjustment C.233 Archive node J.37
Undoing changes C.263 Archive option for scan programs F.1629
Updating parameters C.271 Archiving
3D-MAP Shim C.239 Errors J.220
Adjustment volume F.437 Archiving media D.13
Administrators tasks B.21 Areas
Align model G15 Measuring M.411
Allowed delay P.193 Arithmetic mean
Alpha images Selecting the mode L.151
Calculating automatically in BOLD L.411 Starting L.151
Definition for BOLD L.41 Array coils P.185
Saving all (BOLD) L.428 Saving images uncombined P.182
Saving singly (BOLD) L.432 Arrows
Alpha value K.410 In Composing N.410
Changing (BOLD) L.426 Arterial Input Function (AIF) L.514
Analysis mode K.52 Assigning
Anatomical standard view H.34 Assigning a region to a body region F.1632
Anatomical threshold K.412 Asymmetric echo P.192
Changing (BOLD) L.423 Asymmetrical k space scanning P.156
Angio F.546 Audit Trail B.320
Angle G.527, H.359 Configuring the General Security Parameters B.277
Changing G.530, H.362 Defining the events to be recorded B.288
Switching the angle direction G.531, H.362 Open Event Configuration B.286
Angle measurements N.412 Overview B.271
Angle of intersection Storing and deleting log files B.294
Double-oblique intersection F.418 Storing Configuration B.275
Single-oblique intersection F.418 Viewer B.286
Angles P.1124 Viewing log files B.291
Kyphosis N.419 Auto Expose O.28
Measuring M.414 Deactivating O.29
Scoliosis N.414 Interrupting O.210
Auto Filming O.22
IX2 Operator Manual

syngo MR Index
Auto Navigation H.1121 Average ADC maps P.1110

Auto Window G.49 Average cycle F.1519, F.1528, P.1136
AutoAlign Averages P.140
Adjusting the following protocols F.198 Averaging mode P.191
Atlas F.192 Avoiding physiological effects F.141
AutoAlign matrix (AAM) F.192 Axial cuts
AutoAlign Scout (AAS) F.192 Creating M.43
Basics F.192
Checking the patient's age F.1913 B
Closing an AA exam F.1910
Creating a protocol from a series b value P.1109
or image (Phoenix) F.1923 Backup B.47
Creating an AutoAlign head program Bandwidth P.193
in the Exam Explorer F.1926 Base resolution P.150
Creating new AutoAlign programs F.1926 Basics
Deactivating F.1911 AutoAlign F.192
Display in the Program Control F.194 Basics of reporting D.83
Editing a scan program F.1921 Bitmap
Exporting executed programs Format J.41
to the Exam Explorer F.1927 Blend mode N.323
GSP on statistical images (Atlas images) F.1928 Blocking areas
Making the program control ready to run F.1915 Activating/deactivating (BOLD) L.424
Manually deactivating F.1911 Blood flow
Measuring an AutoAlign Scout F.195 Direction P.1102
Registering a planning patient F.1928 Body Coil P.186
Repeating the AAS scan F.1919 Body region F.1634
Requirements F.193 Changing F.93
Scan procedure F.195 Deleting F.94
System scan cancellation F.1917 Bold vessels
Automatic coil selection F.539 Defining M.31
Automatic data transfer J.72 BOLD (Blood Oxygen Level Dependent Contrast) F.551
Configuring export J.710 Paradigm size P.1121
Defining storage assignment J.711 Paradigm table P.1122
Defining the necessary work status J.712 T-test P.1120
Rules J.73 Box mode F.423
Automatic image storage F.1211 Breast biopsy F.181
Automatic positioning N.219 Checking the marker position F.1828
Automatic Registration H.1022 Performing a biopsy examination F.1828
Autoscaling (Inline-Subtraction) P.1126
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX3

Index syngo MR
Performing a biopsy examination C

for multilesions F.1829
Placing a biopsy channel F.181 Calculated phases P.1138
Printing the worksheet F.1823 Calculating
Selecting an angle G21 Alpha images in BOLD automatically L.411
Selecting the printer G25 Combined images (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.624
Setting a lesion marker F.1816 Parameter images subsequently (BOLD) L.434
Setting a reference marker F.1813 Parameter maps (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.610
Setting the cross hair G15 Calculating T1 images L.169
Browser Calculating T2 Images
Calling up D.16 Generating a test image L.172, L.175
Customizing content area D.113 Starting L.172
Customizing window D.110 Calling
Enlarge/reduce navigation/content area D.111 Composing N.13
Filters on tool bar D.212 MRNeuro K.12
Information area D.112 Print dialog box for protocols F.132
Moving tool bar D.112 Print preview of protocols F.138
Multiple selection of objects D.210 Print preview of the report D.824
Showing/hiding database D.114 Soft tissue evaluation L.64
Showing/hiding drive D.114 Vessel View M.13
Showing/hiding window sections D.112 Calling standard views K.329
Tree view D.112 Calling the 3D task card H.25
Browsing Camera O.55
Between groups in movie display F.1729 Defective O.512
Between images F.319 Error exposing film O.52
Between images in movie display F.1728 Selecting O.36, O.42, O.511
Between series F.321 Captured cycle F.1519
Defining the order (examination card) F.313 Cardiac trigger per respiratory phase P.1140
Sort criteria F.314 CARE bolus P.1103
Within image segments of the CARE Bolus scan F.1025
examination card F.318 Caution
Buttons Back up your system before starting
Dimmed A.235 the security configuration B.219
For executing commands A.234 CamTasia directory J.219
Icon button A.235 Diagnostically relevant areas of images
may be lost. J.222
Impermissible manipulations A.11
Incorrect diagnosis H.101
Incorrect SUV calculation H.1040
IX4 Operator Manual

syngo MR Index
Loss of data within the required period Name of a scan protocol F.124
for retention J.12 Password in syngo MR C.114
Mix-up of patients and incorrect diagnosis H.104 Voice output for patient instructions F.1121
Projected images H.353 Check box A.232
References may be lost. D.410 Checking system files C.124
Security policy affects the behavior of the syngo Chronological Position P.130
system B.212 Circle
Security system cannot be disabled B.219 In Composing N.49
Storage attributes J.31 Circular ROI G.54
System blocks when the Audit Trail is filled B.288 Clear Path H.1126
System is not available in emergency cases A.249 Clear Scheduler D.623
Terminating Remote Service A.46 Clearing document(s) G.718
The data may be lost if it is deleted Clip planes
by the sender D.616 Activating/deactivating K.310
Unauthorized access A.16 Displaying M.36
Unexpected system behavior A.16 Hiding the frame K.312
Wrong diagnosis H.410 Moving K.314
Wrong diagnosis possible O.18 Panning M.37
CD Resetting K.315, M.38
Ejecting J.23 Resizing the frame K.315
Inserting J.22 Rotating M.37
Labeling J.28 Selecting K.311, K.312
Multi-session J.214 Tilting K.314, M.37
Single session J.27 Unselecting K.312
Writing J.212 Clipboard A.220, G.717, N.55
Center F.511, P.192 Clipping document O.49
Center of circle Closing
In Composing N.49 Application program C.19
Changing BOLD task card L.443
Alpha value (BOLD) L.426 Composing N.13
Anatomical threshold (BOLD) L.423 Data set M.22
Cluster size (BOLD) L.427 Dialog box of a report D.823
Color range in BOLD L.421 MRNeuro K.18
Comment about a scan pause F.1221 Print preview of a protocol F.1311
Comment about a scan protocol F.124 Print preview of the report D.826
Diagnostic codes for reports in syngo MR C.16
the configuration D.838 Vessel View M.112
Display of the print preview of a protocol F.1310 Closing BOLD L.443
Name of a scan pause F.1221
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX5

Index syngo MR
Cluster size Composite image

Changing (BOLD) L.427 Loading into Composing N.312
Of the activation map K.411 Concatenations F.1522, F.1529, P.134
Cobb Configuration
Scoliosis angle N.414 Creating a encoding scheme for reports D.841
Coil abbreviations P.27 Creating or changing diagnostic codes
Coil elements F.434 for reports D.838
Coil selection F.539 Enter general settings D.833
Coils Installing a user logo for reporting D.834
Information C.127, C.129 Of a report D.831
Selecting virtual coils F.1657 Of Audit Trail B.286, B.288
Coils and coil elements P.185 Of the MR system A.48
Color palette Opening Audit Trail Storing Configuration B.275
Deselecting (BOLD) L.419, L.420 Predefining a diagnostic code D.836
Color range Predefining a encoding scheme for reports D.837
Changing in BOLD L.421 Saving settings for reports D.842
Excluding (BOLD) L.422 Security system B.22
Color scale Setting the language of a report D.833
Editing with parameter images L.418 Configuration of Audit Trail B.294
Setting for parameter images in BOLD L.419 Configuration of security system
Colors of the activation map K.47 Access control (overview) B.244
Combined echoes P.197 Audit Trail B.271, B.277, B.291
Combined images Changing password of user account B.231
Calculating (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.624 Configuration of group accounts (Overview) B.235
Combining rotate and shift functions F.451 Deleting user accounts B.234
Combo box A.233 Managing data protections B.248
Comment L.251 Managing group accounts B.236
Entering a comment about a scan pause F.1221 Managing groups B.243
Entering a comment about a scan protocol F.124 Managing groups and roles B.242
Comments G.551 Managing user accounts B.227, B.231
Compensation T2 decay P.190 Opening configuration dialog B.222
Composed volumes Setting up the default protections B.259
Scrolling N.326 Setting up the privileges B.263
Composing User account B.225
Calling N.13 Configuring
Closing N.13 Movie display F.1732
Control area N.310 User-defined applications D.718
Image text N.38 Vessel View M.221
Task card N.32 Configuring film sheets O.69
IX6 Operator Manual

syngo MR Index
Film sheet division O.610 Selecting images in the Patient Browser L.32
Film size O.68 Selecting images in the Viewer L.33
Configuring image text A.37 Starting calculation L.39
Configuring user interface Contour
Adding list entries to Browser D.710 Post-processing M.413
Assigning film layout O.615 Contrast agent catalog F.1224
Browser tool bar D.73 Deleting a contrast agent entry F.1226
Canceling film layout assignment O.618 Entering a new contrast agent F.1225
Changing standard film layout O.63 Selecting a contrast agent F.1224
Defining study-specific layout O.64 Contrast agent documentation
Deleting confirmation D.75 In the examination pause F.75
Deleting film layout O.618 Contrast agent pause F.1223
Deleting permission D.74 Contrast agent scan
Displaying ROI statistics G.82 Documenting the use of contrast agent
Film job settings O.66 without a pause F.77
Film layouts O.62 Inserting a contrast agent pause into
Film sheet settings O.69 a scan in progress F.715
Hiding data level in Browser D.713 Procedure F.72
HIS/RIS worklist E.49 Specifying contrast agent details F.79
List display/icon display in Browser D.714 Using the contrast agent catalog F.79
Organ-specific window values G.87 Contrast-enhanced angiography F.548
Patient search E.45 CARE bolus P.1103
Removing list entries from Browser D.710 Time to center P.1103
Selection lists in patient registration E.42 Control area G.17
Showing work status D.74 Composing N.310
User-specific window values G.87 MRNeuro K.17
Viewing task card G.81 Vessel View M.18
Confirming parameter changes F.584 Converting
Conflicts F.672 Scan programs F.1675
Construction worker icon F.612 Copy
Contact F.1510 Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1621, F.1623
Content area D.19, F.165 Parameter group F.585
Content of the report D.81 Copy reference
Context menu Setting the scan protocol F.1214
Vessel View M.110 Copy & paste A.219, G.556
ContextVision filter L.32, L.34 Coronal view H.329
Monitoring calculation L.310 Correcting data
Name of the result series L.38 Examination data D.42
Resetting the filter strength L.37 Modifiers name D.46
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX7

Index syngo MR
Patient already exists D.48 Customized text O.413

Patient data D.42, E.314 Customizing content area D.113
Patient name D.42 Cut
Saving changes D.47 Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1622
Correction factor C.258 Cut line
Corrections Moving N.216
During composing N.23 Cut mode N.323
Create Cut & paste A.219, G.556
New customer body region F.1636
New examination F.1637 D
New region F.1631
New scan program F.1638 Dark blood P.1123
Creating Data
Diagnostic codes for reports in Correcting patient data D.42
the configuration D.838 Data levels D.14
Encoding scheme for reports in configuration D.841 Data tree D.22
New voice output for patient instructions F.1115 Deleting D.616
Creating a movie file Exporting to the file system D.56
Of rotation of the flat ribbon M.511 Filtering data D.211
Of rotation of the volume M.511 History of changes D.414
Of sequence of actions M.59 Image data D.15
Crosshair G.533 Importing D.233
Cross-talk P.134 Instance level D.15
Ctrl key A.217 Marking D.66
Cursor A.24 Merging D.410
Cursor keys A.28 Patient data D.15
Curvature of the spine N.414 Protecting data from deletion D.621
Curved sections H.47 Raw data D.15
Displaying long sections H.411 Rearranging D.410
Drawing freehand H.49 Selecting from archive media D.233
Drawing point to point H.49 Sending via network D.53, G.710, J.33
Moving display H.412 Series data D.15
Curves Storing on CD D.52
Measuring M.49 Study data D.15
Customer body region Unmarking D.67
Creating new F.1636 Work status D.62
Delete F.1636 Data formats K.21
Customer regions F.1634 Supported K.21
Customer tree F.166 Data image/data series G.62
IX8 Operator Manual

syngo MR Index
Data levels F.166 Images on film sheet O.37

Data Protections B.244, B.248, B.254, B.259 Marker of the pixel lens G.544
Data set Parts of the report D.819
Closing M.22 Text A.222
Data transfer Voice output for patient instructions F.1124
Deleting jobs J.612 Deleting confirmation D.75
On CD J.612 Deleting objects M.418
Priority J.613 Delimiting K.15, M.16
Resuming jobs J.611 Derivation F.1510
Starting jobs again J.611 Starting L.146
Status J.68 Deselecting
Stopping jobs J.610 Annotation texts G.555
Database C.130 Film sheet O.317
Local D.12 Graphics G.555
Scheduler D.12 Objects A.217
Showing/hiding D.114 Deviation from the vertical N.422
Updating D.25 Diagram
View C.132 Results in mean curve L.241
Deactivating AutoAlign F.1911 Dialog box A.230
Delay time (TD) P.139 Addition L.127
Delete Arithmetic mean L.151
Audit Trail Log Files B.294 Differentiation L.145
Contrast agent entry from the contrast Diffusion coefficient L.156
agent catalog F.1226 Division L.138
Customer body region F.1636 Integration L.148
Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1624 Logarithm L.143
Graphical objects F.485 Multiplication L.135
Group or Role (Security) B.243 Slope L.153
Slab group F.577 Standard deviation L.165
Slice group F.577 Subtraction L.130
User account B.234 Time to peak L.174
Delete confirmation D.619 TTest L.159
Deleting T1 L.168
Characters A.28 T2 L.171
Customer protocol in Diaphragm movement F.1026
Soft tissue evaluation L.621, L.633 DICOM
Data D.616 Format J.41
Film job O.216 Regions F.1634
Graphics G.557
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX9

Index syngo MR
Diffusion Dist. factor P.15

b value P.1109 Division
Diffusion coefficient Operands L.138
Selecting the mode L.157 Starting L.141
Starting L.157 Dog-ears G.35, M.213, N.328, O.34
Diffusion mode P.1107 Paging in 3D H.317
Diffusion Moment P.1111 Double layout N.321
Diffusion-weighted images P.1109 Double-clicking A.220
Diffusion-weighted scans F.554 Double-oblique cut plane H.324
Diff. weightings P.1108 Double-oblique intersection F.418
Dimension (2D or 3D) P.189 Drag & drop A.218
Directing image processing G.344 Transferring data from Browser to Viewing D.35
Direction (flow encoding) P.1105 Drives C.130
Display Connected D.13
Manual positioning N.218 Showing/hiding D.114
Display of Navigator Objects F.427 View C.131
Display order Dynamic analysis L.11, L.14
Movie display F.1723 Addition L.126
Displaying Arithmetic mean L.150
Data tree D.22 Calculating T1 images L.167
Value of pixel lens at cursor position G.538 Calculating T2 Images L.170
Displaying patents C.135 Checking whether images are suitable L.16
Distance P.1124 Deleting evaluation L.182
Distance line G.518 Derivation L.144
Changing G.520, H.356 Diffusion coefficient L.155
Moving G.520, H.356 Displaying initial images L.110
Distance measurements Division L.137
Notes N.413 Evaluation progress L.177
Distances General procedure L.110
Measuring M.47 Integration L.147
Distortion artifacts L.311 Interrupting L.181
Cause L.311 Logarithm L.142
Remedies L.312 Mode L.114, L.115, L.116
Distortion correction Multiplication L.134
For composing N.24 Name of the result series L.124
Requirements L.313 Overview L.13
Results L.314 Progress indicator L.179
Selecting images L.313 Selecting images L.14
Starting calculation L.313 Selecting test images L.118
IX10 Operator Manual

syngo MR Index
Selection L.110 Voice output F.1113

Setting a noise level L.123 Voice output for patient instructions F.1121
Slope of linear regression L.152 VRT parameters K.36
Standard deviation L.164 Windowing images in BOLD L.416
Starting image analysis L.15 EDX file format F.1673
Starting the next job L.180 Elliptical filter P.176
Status display L.179 Elliptical k space sampling P.189
Stopping evaluation L.182 Emergency access B.311
Subtraction L.129 Enlarging
Test area for preview images L.117 Images K.33
T-test L.158 Segment K.32
Dynamic scans Entering
Multiple series P.180 Text and numbers A.28
Pause after measurement P.178 Work status D.65
Entry field A.233
E EPI factor P.196
EPR Web browser D.246
ECG signal F.1517, P.1134 Equilibration magnetization P.146
Selecting a lead F.1510 Equivalent diameter M.223, M.411
ECG triggering F.1515 Error during data transfer J.62
ECG/Retro, Pulse/Retro, Ext/Retro P.1135 Errors during saving J.220
Echo spacing P.195 Evaluation area
Echo time (TE) P.138 Vessel View M.19
Long echo trains P.190 Evaluations
Shortening by asymmetric echo P.192 On the spine and pelvis N.412
Editing Exam Explorer
Color scale parameter images (BOLD) L.418 Calling up F.163
Deactivating interpolation for parameter images in Closing F.1682
BOLD L.417 Exporting objects F.1678
Diagnostic code of a report D.836 Finding an item F.1612
Diagnostics and comments in the report D.814 Importing objects F.1671
Editing in the Protocol Editor F.1655 Printing protocols F.1681
Images in BOLD L.416 Searching for the name of an entry F.1614
Pause properties F.1219 Structure F.165
Post-processing protocol (BOLD) L.440 Tool bar F.169
Protocol parameters in Exam task card
Soft tissue evaluation L.614, L.628 Movie display F.1713
Protocol properties F.122 Examination F.17, F.167
Report D.87, D.812 Commenting F.1625
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX11

Index syngo MR
Copying F.1621, F.1623 F

Creating new F.1637
Cutting F.1622 Fader M.312
Delete F.1624 Fat suppression P.143
Inserting F.1623 Field Map (Multi Angle Projection) C.239
Moving F.1619 Displaying C.244
Procedure for routine scanning F.14 Field of view (FOV) F.47, P.147
Renaming F.1625 Changes via the mouse F.477
Selecting a scan program F.22 Rectangular FoV P.148
Examination data Square FoV P.147
Correcting D.42 Fieldmap K.42
Examination database objects File format
Exporting F.1678 EDX F.1673
Importing F.1671 Filenames
Examination region F.167 Exported images J.46
Excitation P.1100 Film job O.15
Excluding Adding images from Browser O.330
Color range (BOLD) L.422 Adding images from Viewing O.330
Exiting Adding images from 3D O.330
VOI mode H.528 Appending a new film sheet O.329
Expanded range Changing priority O.510
Generating H.397 Checking O.53
Settings H.398 Deleting O.216, O.510
Expiry date of license E.410 Designation O.312
Explicit selection F.322 Displaying O.34
Exporting Inserting O.328
Configuring J.710 Manipulating O.58
Errors J.220 Merging O.216
Examination database objects F.1678 Number of copies O.314
Filenames J.46 Opening O.312
From data to hard disk J.15 Reactivating queue O.513
Image formats J.41 Redirecting O.512
Images to the file system K.64 Repeating O.59
Protocol data F.1313 Resuming O.59
To the file system J.42 Selecting O.313
External signal P.1135 Sending to camera/printer O.212
Several film sheets O.315
Status O.54
Stopping O.59

syngo MR Index
Urgent O.510 From Examination task card O.22

Film layout From Viewing task card O.24
Changing for current job O.17 From 3D task card O.24
Standard O.17 Images M.56
Film preview Managing film jobs D.510
Adding images O.38 Mean curve results L.259
Calling up O.32 Multiple film job O.15
Changing film properties O.36 Standard layout O.17
Closing O.32 Virtual film sheet O.16
Control area O.35 Virtual film sheet to camera/printer O.27
Deleting images O.37 2-step procedure O.12
Film job O.34 Filming task card O.310
Paging through film sheets O.34 Filter P.168
Selecting camera/printer O.36 Audit Trail Events B.288
Film properties O.36 Creating D.214
Film sheet Deactivating D.213
Copying O.327 Elliptical filter P.176
Deleting image O.324 Normalization filter P.173
Deselecting O.317 Raw data (Hanning filter) P.169
Dog-ears O.34 Removing D.218
Layout O.45 Saving D.217
Moving O.328 Setting P.1119
Multi-select O.318 Spatial filter P.1119
Paging O.316 Standard filters D.211
Repacking O.38, O.325 User-defined filters D.214
Selecting O.317 Filtering
Selecting segment O.319 Monitoring filtering L.310
Film sheet division O.610 Renaming a results series L.38
Film size O.68 Selecting images L.33
Filming K.66 Setting/Resetting the filter strength L.34, L.37
Auto Expose O.28 Smoothing L.35
Control area O.311 Starting calculation L.39
Exposing a film job O.211 Finding
Exposing a film sheet O.213 Program instructions F.1640
Film job O.15 Scan program F.1612
Film sheet display O.311 Fitting to segment G.422, O.49
Film sheet full O.214 Flags M.428
Film task selection O.212 Flat ribbon M.419
From Browser window O.24
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX13

Index syngo MR
Flex coils P.185 Frequency C.223

Selecting P.186 Accepted for the measurement system C.232
Flip angle P.140 Entering C.225
Flipping Transferring C.230
Horizontally G.433 Frequency adjustment
Vertically G.432 Acceptance without successful adjustment C.232
Floating MPRs Amplitude C.226
Defining properties K.321 Graphic display of the results C.230
Hiding K.318 Numeric results C.229
Moving an image plane K.326 Performing C.225
Orienting K.331 Preparing C.223
Reducing in the volume segment K.323 Search range C.227
Resetting K.331 Selecting the gain C.228
Rotating an image plane K.327 Selecting the receive channel C.232
Flow compensation P.194 Starting C.228
Flow direction P.1102 Vertical marker C.230
Flow mode and sensitivity P.1104, P.1105 Full screen K.32, M.212
Flow quantification F.549 Fully automatic path creation M.314
Flow velocity P.1105 Functional Privileges B.263
Fly Path Planning H.1122 Fusion H.1019, H.1032
Fly Through H.111 Calling up H.103
Fly View Volume Settings H.1114 Changing the display H.1038
Fly View Volume (FVV) H.111, H.1111 Landmark H.1017
Formats for export J.41 Loading a new series H.105
FoV Visual alignment H.1012
Phase P.123, P.147 Fusion mode H.1036
Read P.123, P.147
Freehand line G.522 G
Free form G.523
Point to point G.522 Gathering diagnostic information C.125
Statistics G.524, H.358 Generate service password B.317
Freehand ROI G.57, H.365 Geometry F.523
Changing the shape G.59 Common F.524
Resizing G.59 Navigator F.532
Rounding off edges G.512 Saturation F.529
Freehand VOI H.513 Global Bolus Plot (GBP) P.1114
Cropping H.515 Gradient mode P.198
Cutting H.517 Graphic tools G.52
In Composing N.41

syngo MR Index
Graphical objects F.45 Hiding

Aligning perpendicularly F.455 Activation map K.41
Delete F.485 Clip planes K.310
Display in the reference images F.417 Floating MPRs K.318
Moving F.442, F.447 Orthogonal MPRs in the volume segment K.317
Navigator objects F.414 Plot segment K.16
Positioning on statistical images (AutoAlign) F.1928 Reference lines K.14
Rotating F.449 Unwanted volume parts K.310
Rotating in the plane F.451 VRT volume image K.318
Selecting F.439 Hip joint
Graphics Height difference N.427
In Composing N.44 HIPAA (Health Insurance Portability
Showing/Hiding H.84, O.414 and Accountability Act) B.11
Switching off/on N.332 Histogram G.516, L.117
Gray scales G.434 History of changes D.41
Grid G.548 HIS/RIS E.12
Group B.32 Patient search E.315
Of users B.22 Worklist D.12, D.24
Selecting for editing B.242
Groups F.1714 I
Adding/removing group members B.242
Creating new group accounts B.236 Icon button A.235
Deleting a group account B.243 Icons
GSP Identifying protocols F.65
Sending image data to GSP M.58 Identification of a report in the Patient Browser D.82
GSP segment Image
Copying parameters from an image F.644 Clipping document O.49
Copying to the clipboard N.55
H Creating a new scan protocol from an image F.1650
Displaying text O.412
Handles Filming from Composing N.57
Extent handles F.439 Fitting to segment O.49
FOV handle F.439 Image stamps D.116
Pivot handle F.439 Loading into Composing N.312
Hanning filter P.169 Original image O.410
Height difference N.427 Rotating in 3D H.319
Help A.28 Sending from Composing N.59
Hide Path H.1127
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX15

Index syngo MR
Image area G.14 Image reconstruction system

Changing the layout G.221 Monitoring C.115
Image comment G.225 Rebooting C.116
Orientation markers G.225 Image section
Scale bar G.225 Moving N.330
Showing/hiding text G.226 Image segment
Text information G.225 Enlarging M.212
Window values G.225 Image segments
Image comment F.913, G.554 In Composing N.34
Changing F.916 Image stamp D.113, D.116
Deleting F.917 Image text F.332, L.251
Entering F.913 Coil abbreviations P.27
Inserting F.915 Comment line P.22
Image control system Composing N.38
Rebooting C.15 Data about the MR image P.25
Image data In the Inline Display F.1015
Transferring to GSP M.58 Interpolated matrix P.153
Image definition Patient and examination data P.22
Soft tissue evaluation L.62 Plant-specific information and patient position P.23
Image display Scan and image parameters P.24
Changing N.314 Switching off/on N.331
Overview N.317 Image type F.515, P.142
Stack G.218 Images
Stripe G.216 Appending to existing series G.76
Study comparison mode G.214 Automatic loading into the GSP
Image formats for export J.41 segment (movie display) F.1214
Image matrix size P.150, P.151 Composite N.31
Doubling by interpolation P.153 Display in Composing N.334
Image numbering F.539 Enlarging K.33
Image orientation G.16 Exporting K.64
Test for Composing N.24 Exporting to the file system D.56, J.42
Image position Exposing on film G.713
Copying from Inline Display F.1019 Filming D.57, K.66, M.56
Selecting in Composing N.214 Filtering with the ContextVision filter L.32
Image processing Fitting to segment G.422
Grid G.548 Flipping G.432
Patient folder G.23 Importing D.233, J.47
Image quality Importing from the file system J.47
Improvement by filtering P.168 Invert gray scales G.434

syngo MR Index
Loading and displaying N.311 Information

Loading in MRNeuro K.22 About coils C.127, C.129
Loading in Vessel View M.22 About databases C.130
Loading into Mean Curve L.27 About drives C.130
Loading into stamp segments About hardware options C.129
automatically F.1212, F.1214 About software options C.129
Loading onto the BOLD task card L.44 About the hardware C.127
Panning G.423, K.33 About the network C.133
Printing G.713 About the system C.127
Processing in BOLD L.416 For Administrators B.21
Rotating G.429 For service technicians B.111, B.41
Save as... K.62, M.53 For standard user B.31
Saving K.63, M.52 SAR monitoring F.1420
Saving as new series G.75 Stimulation monitoring F.1440
Saving (BOLD) L.428 Information area D.18
Scrolling (BOLD) L.413 Inhomogeneity of the magnetic field C.239
Selecting G.332 Inline adjustment
Shifting relative to each other N.215 Confirming the frequency spectrum C.265
Transferring to the Viewer M.57 Entering the frequency C.268
Windowing in the Inline Display F.1012 Graphic display of the results C.267
Zooming G.415 Selecting the receive channel C.269
Zooming and panning in the inline display F.1014 Inline Display
Images in the volume segment Automatic image storage F.1016
Changing the size K.323 CARE Bolus scan F.1025
View K.316 Copying the image position F.1019
Implicit selection F.323 Ending F.1031
Importing Image text F.1015
Examination database objects F.1671 Manual image storage F.1018
From data to hard disk J.15 Modifying display F.1011
From the file system J.47 Navigator signal F.1027
Icons on the status bar J.62 Pausing F.109
Images D.233, J.47 Real-time mode F.1022
Inconsistencies F.590, F.672 Removing an image F.1015
Change table position F.675 Restarting F.1010
Inconsistent Coil Configuration F.672 Selective image display F.1021
Individual ADC maps P.1111 Spectroscopy time signal F.1030
Infinite measurement P.177 Starting F.102
Inflow P.1102 Starting multiple breath-hold scans F.1026
Tips on real-time scans F.1033
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX17

Index syngo MR
Windowing F.1012, F.1014 K

Inline-Subtraction P.1125
Autoscaling P.1126 Keyboard A.27
Offset P.1127 Keyboard focus F.319
Saving images P.1126 Keyboard operation F.582
Scaling factor P.1127 Keypad
Selecting a subtrahend P.1128 Numeric A.211
Input field A.235 Symbol A.211
Input focus F.318, G.333 Knocking sounds P.188
Insert Point H.1124 Kyphosis angle N.419
Inserting
Pixel lens marker at fixed position G.539 L
Installing
User logo for reporting D.834 Landmark H.1017
Instance level D.15 Layout
Instruction ranges Double N.321
Editing a body region F.93 Single N.319
Editing a work step F.95 Single with original N.320
Editing an image comment F.913 LED display F.1726
Integration start L.149 License for Security system B.212
Interactive scanning in real-time mode F.1022 Light Source H.719
Interactive 3D Shim C.248 Lightening icon F.630
Entering the shim parameters C.250 Line
Entering the transmit amplitude C.250 Calculating a profile G.526
Physio selection C.250 In Composing N.49
Preparing the adjustment C.248 Line mode F.424
Selecting the receive channel C.252 Loading
Starting C.252 Activation map K.23
Stopping C.255 BOLD volume K.23
Internal User Accounts B.28 First series into BOLD L.46
Interpolation P.153 Images in BOLD L.44
Interrupting F.629 Images in MRNeuro K.22
Intersecting areas F.417 Images in Vessel View M.22
Introduction in safety standards B.11 Loading acquired images/series
Introduction (knocking at the start of scanning) P.188 automatically F.1210
Inversion time (TI) P.139 Loading additional series into BOLD L.48
Inverting Mosaic images into BOLD L.410
Saving changes G.435 Loading automatically
Into GSP segment F.1212

syngo MR Index
Loading the BOLD volume K.23 Main menu

Local access B.43 View > Info Area D.112
Local database D.12 View > Tool Bar D.112
Local service B.41 View > Tree D.112
Access B.315 Making
Location P.111 Diagnostics and comments in the report D.814
Changing the slice position P.112 Report D.86
Displaying the slice position P.111 Manage
Navigator object P.122 Audit Trail Events B.286
Scan region P.183 Groups and Roles B.236, B.242
Setting with millimeter precision F.579 User accounts B.231
Lock computer B.35 Manual echo spacing P.195
Locking the computer C.111 Manual path creation M.315
Log files Manual positioning
See Audit Trail B.271 Display N.218
Log off B.35 In a slice N.215
Log on B.35 Slice relative to each other N.217
Failed B.312 Manual start (scan protocol) F.127
Logbook A.47 Running a protocol once/more than once F.128
Logging off Manually deactivating AutoAlign F.1911
Users in syngo MR C.112 Marking arrow M.16
Logging on Marking data items D.66
New user in syngo MR C.113 Masked areas K.42
Longitudinal section of a vessel M.419 Mean curve (statistical evaluation) L.21
Long-term statistical values F.159 Changing image display L.221
Loop F.1722 Defining sorting L.213
Defining the x axis L.215
M Drawing ROIs in the first segment L.228
Drawing ROIs in the third segment L.232
Maestro layout F.39, F.172 Evaluation across series L.214
Changing the arrangement of series F.1710 Evaluation within the series L.213
Loading series F.174 Filming images L.259
Navigating in the stamp segments F.177 Image as a background for the diagram L.252
Magnetic field inhomogeneity C.239 Image text and comments L.251
Magnetization transfer (MTC) P.146 Loading images into the third and
Magnitude image 3D Shim C.245 fourth segments L.211
Magnitude images P.142, P.1106 Loading images of the first segment L.27
Magnitude sum images P.1106 Mean Curve task card L.24
Magn. preparation P.141 Overview L.23
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX19

Index syngo MR
Requirements L.27 Curves M.49

Result display in the diagram L.241 Defining a new center position F.636
Result display in the table L.242 Deviation from the vertical N.422
Saving results as an ASCII file L.256 Distance G.518, G.522
Saving results as images L.254 Distances M.47
Scaling the x axis L.245 Freehand contour M.412
Scaling the y axis L.247 Height difference N.427
Scrolling across series L.223 Interrupting the measurement F.629
Scrolling with dynamic ROIs L.231 Kyphosis angle N.419
Searching for an original images by scrolling in the Pixels with crosshair G.533
fourth segment L.225 Repeating a canceled protocol F.634
Set relative evaluation L.237 Repeating scans F.634
Setting absolute evaluation L.236 Scanning open protocols more than once F.637
Smoothing curves L.250 Starting the next scan F.626
Sorting in Across mode L.217 With a countdown F.627
Start evaluation L.239 Measuring vessel cross-section M.427
Static ROI L.230 Menu
Using vertical scan line L.243 Dropdown A.243
Measurement parameters Menu bar A.243
Applying the settings F.584 Options A.244
Changing because of SAR monitoring F.1411 Popup A.246
Copying F.585 Submenu A.245
Copying a parameter group F.585 Merging film job O.216
Slice group/slab group P.13 MinIP thin series H.538
Measurement time MinIP (minimum intensity projection) H.15
Reduce by slice partial Fourier P.157 MIP display
Reduction by elliptical sampling P.189 Volume image M.15
Reduction of partial Fourier matrices P.156 MIP mode
Reduction with PAT P.158 Closing M.28
Measuring Setting M.28, M.211
Angle G.527, H.359 MIP thin H.530
Angles M.414 Series H.533
Applying a contour M.427 MIP thin slice
Areas M.411 Setting the mode M.211
Closing routine examinations F.618 MIP (maximum intensity projection) H.15, H.54
Complete protocols F.611 Radial range H.529, H.530
Completing a patient F.620 Reconstructing coronal MIP images inline P.1131
Completing and running a protocol F.612 Reconstructing sagittal MIP images inline P.1131
Curvature of the spine N.414

syngo MR Index
Reconstructing standard deviation Display order of the images F.1723

MIP images inline P.1132 Displaying additional information F.1735
Reconstructing transverse Displaying predefined parameter sets F.1736
MIP images inline P.1132 Editing images during movie display F.1726
Mirroring Groups within a series F.1714
Saving changes G.435 Keyboard or mouse control F.1718
Mode LED display in the Movie Control dialog box F.1726
Evaluating images across series L.115 Loop mode and yo-yo mode F.1722
Using the constant L.116 Menu control F.1719
Within series L.114 Navigating in movie display F.1727
Modifiers name D.46, D.413 Scrolling between groups F.1729
Modifying Scrolling between images F.1728
VRT display M.24 Setting inline movie F.1212
MOD/DVD-RAM Setting realtime mode F.1725, F.1734
Ejecting J.23 Speed F.1724
Monitoring Starting automatically F.1716
Image reconstruction system C.115 Status F.1717
MR scanner C.119 Moving
Postprocessing (BOLD) L.439 By half a slice distance F.445
Mosaic Images Combining rotate and shift functions F.451
Loading into BOLD L.410 Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1619
Rule in BOLD L.412 Graphical objects F.443
Splitting into single images D.37 Into the plane of the reference image F.447
Motion artifacts F.151 Marker of the pixel lens G.540
Motion correction P.1117 Reference line H.314
Activating low-pass filtering P.1119 With the mouse F.443
Mouse A.23 MPPS status D.610
Double-clicking A.25 MPR Thick H.43
Drag & drop A.26 MPR thick slice
Dragging A.25 Setting the mode M.211
Mouse pointer A.24 MPR (multiplanar reconstruction) H.13, H.41
Single-clicking A.25 Curved sections H.47
Movie G.318 Expanded range H.46
Movie display F.1214, F.1713 Parallel range H.45
Applying temporary settings F.1737 Radial range H.45
Changing a predefined parameter set F.1737 Thick slices H.43
Changing the range F.1731 MR scanner
Configuring F.1732 Booting the operating system C.119
Dialog box control F.1720 Monitoring C.119
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX21

Index syngo MR
Shutting down C.119 Location P.122

Shutting down the operating system C.119 Orientation P.122
Standby C.121 Rotation P.123
MR scanner standby C.121 Setting TR of the navigator pulses P.126
MR system Slice thickness P.123
Configuring A.48 Navigator Objects F.415, P.121
MRNeuro Display F.428
Calling K.12 Parameters F.415
Closing K.18 Navigator signal F.1027
Loading Images K.22 Correlation between diaphragm movement and
Overview of the task card K.13 anatomy to be scanned P.130
Requirements K.21 Defining the time P.130
MTC (magnetization transfer) P.146 Deviation of the position of the diaphragm from the
Multi view mode G10 tolerance center P.127
Multiframe images Planning the preparation phase P.126
Loading to Viewing G.27 Saving temporal changes as images P.129
Saving G.72 Network information C.133
Multiple breath-hold scans F.1026 New film sheet O.38
Multiple film job O.15 ngio F.546
Multiple series P.180 Noise level
Multi-select A.217 ADC maps P.1111
Multi-slice mode P.131 Dynamic analysis L.123
Multi-slice scans F.1522 Noise suppression with the ContextVision filter L.36
Normal mode F.142
N Normalization filter P.173
Number of pixels
Name Setting for shift N.214
Correcting data D.42 Number of readout steps P.150
Name of sequence F.564 Numbering of the reconstructed images F.667
Navigating Numeric keypad A.211
In the stamp segments F.177
Movie display F.1727 O
Navigating in the Exam Explorer F.1612
Navigation area D.18, F.165 Object list M.416
Navigator cuboid Deleting an object M.418
Rotating F.450 Displaying an object M.417
Navigator object Renaming an object M.418
FoV phase P.123 Storing notes M.418
FoV read P.123 Oblique cut planes H.320

syngo MR Index
Offset (Inline-Subtraction) P.1127 Orientation cube H.35, K.15, K.39

Online help A.28 In slice images M.17
Online mode K.58 In the volume image M.16
Online statistical values F.159 Using it in the volume image M.210
Open Orientation description H.35
Audit Trail Filter and Viewer B.286 Orientation markers H.36
Audit Trail Storing B.275 Orienting
Data Permission Setup B.254 Floating MPRs K.331
Security Configuration B.222 Individual slice image planes M.217
Service Session B.42 Orthogonal MPRs K.331
Opening Slice image planes M.217
Report in the Patient Browser D.88 Volume image K.330, M.210
Soft Tissue Evaluation dialog L.65 Original image O.410
Operating mode Original images P.1113
Display F.145 Save P.1133
First level controlled operating mode F.142 Ortho Sync H.1119
Normal operating mode F.142 Orthogonal MPRs
Switching F.1414 Defining properties K.319
Operating system Displaying in the volume K.320
Rebooting C.121 Displaying outside the volume K.320
Order of RF excitation P.133 Displaying the frame K.320, K.322
Organizing local jobs J.64 Hiding in the volume segment K.317
Organizing network jobs J.65 Moving an image plane K.326
Organ-specific window settings G.411 Moving an intersection point K.328
Orientation P.18 Orienting K.331
Navigator object P.122 Reducing in the volume segment K.323
Selecting a main orientation P.18 Resetting K.331
Setting a precise angle F.577 Overview
Orientation aids Image display N.317
Adjustment volume F.437 MRNeuro task card K.13
Coil elements F.434 Security System B.11
Display of slice oversampling F.433 Vessel View task card M.14
Displaying the phase oversampling F.432
In slice images M.17 P
In the volume image K.15, M.16
Reference image position lines F.434 Package mode F.424
Shadow lines F.438 Paging G.37
Showing F.430 Using keyboard G.38
Orientation check M.215 Using scroll bar G.310
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX23

Index syngo MR
Panning G.423, O.334 Parameter card stack

Restoring image display G.426 Adding a new group F.576
With mouse G.423 Applying parameters F.584
Paradigm size P.1121 Deleting a saturation region F.577
Paradigm table P.1122 Deleting a slice/slab group F.577
Parallel range H.377, H.387 Displaying and editing parameter groups F.574
Changing range H.381, H.391 Keyboard operation F.582
Settings H.379, H.389 Restrictions when selecting options F.573
Parallel saturation regions P.119 Value ranges F.571
Parameter card Parameter group F.586
Angio Common for contrast-enhanced Parameter images L.513
angiography F.548 Calculating subsequently (BOLD) L.434
Angio Common for phase contrast angiography and Calculating (Soft Tissue Evaluation) L.610
flow quantification F.549 Color setting L.524
Angio Common for time-of-flight angiography F.547 Definition for BOLD L.41
Angio Inline F.558 Saving singly (BOLD) L.432
BOLD F.551 Windowing L.525
Center F.511 Parameter set
Diff F.554 Automatic assignment H.75
Geometry F.523 Changing for movie display F.1737
Geometry Common F.524 Creating and editing H.710
Geometry Navigator F.532 For configuration of movie display F.1736
Geometry Saturator F.529 Manually assignment H.76
Inline F.558 Parameters
Perf F.556 Calculating changes for stimulation
Physio F.540, F.1514 monitoring F.1435
Physio Cardiac F.541 Changes via the mouse F.469
Physio PACE F.543 Copying F.585
Resolution F.517 Copying a parameter group F.585
Resolution iPAT F.521 For controlling the excitation sequence F.526
Routine F.55 For dynamic scans P.177
Selecting for editing F.54 For extending the measurement range F.526
Sequence F.564 For image numbering F.539
Sequence Part 1 F.565 For multi-slice scans P.131
Sequence Part 2 F.567 For positioning the scan region F.539
System F.534 For suppression of respiratory artifacts P.124
System adjustments C.23 Loading F.1534
System Transmitter/Receiver C.216 Parameters for dynamic scanning F.516
Parameters of navigator objects F.415

syngo MR Index
PAT reconstruction F.521 Editing a voice output F.1121

Partial Fourier matrices P.156 Label F.111
Partial views F.421 Naming a new voice output F.1115
Password Playing back a voice output F.113
Changing for user account B.231 Playing back manually F.616
For user accounts B.225 Playing back voice output manually F.115
Generating for service access B.317 Recording F.617
Paste Recording a new voice output F.1117
Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1623 Recording a voice output F.1115, F.1117
New scan pause in the scan program F.1653 Recording and editing voice outputs F.1113
Scan protocol in scan program F.1639 Reordering voice outputs F.1123
PAT to shorten the scan time P.158 Selecting the patient language F.1131
Path Name H.1125 Setting the output volume F.1131
Path representation H.1127 Setting the volume F.1111
Paths Setting up automatic playback F.117
Changing the course M.318 Testing a new voice output F.1120
Connecting M.321 Testing voice output F.1111, F.1132
Deleting path points M.320 Voice output F.114
Editing M.317 Patient name
Fully automatic definition M.314 Correcting D.42
Inserting path points M.319 Patient registration E.21
Manual definition M.315 Moving to the HOME position F.148
Moving path points M.320 Table movement F.149
Semiautomatic definition M.310 Patient search E.34
Patient Accepting patient data E.320
Closing N.511 In the HIS/RIS E.315
Patient Browser More than one patient found E.38
Sorting data D.219 One patient found E.38
Patient data Patient not found E.39
Correcting D.42, E.314 Searching in Browser E.310
SAR relevant F.1426 Patient Worklist Query E.317
Patient ID E.24 Pause F.167
Patient instructions F.111 After scanning P.178
Changing a voice output F.1121 Commenting F.1625
CV/CBT switch F.1112 Copying F.1621, F.1623
Deleting a voice output F.1124 Cutting F.1622
Deleting a voice output from all languages F.1127 Delete F.1624
Deleting a voice output from the current Inserting F.1623
language F.1124 Moving F.1619
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX25

Index syngo MR
Properties F.1220 Physiological display

Renaming F.1625 Contact F.1510
Pause properties Display of trigger information F.1512
Editing F.1219 Graphic display of time ranges F.1511
Percentage of Baseline at Peak map (PBP) P.1114 Physiological effects F.141
Performance report D.68 Physiological scan
Perfusion F.556 Acquisition window F.1520, F.1528
Automatic sorting of images L.58 Performing F.155
Calculating parameter images L.513 Preparing F.153
Color display of parameter images L.524 Sensors F.153
GBP curve P.1114 Starting F.1534
Loading Images L.54 Physiological signal
Original images P.1113 Monitoring F.155
PBP image P.1114 Pixel coordinates F.334
Positioning an AIF ROI L.517 Pixel lens H.368
Scrolling images and series L.510 Deleting the marker G.544
Selecting a post-processing protocol L.513 Display value at cursor position G.538
Setting the time range L.519 Displaying values permanently H.368
Settling P.1116 Inserting a marker at a fixed position G.539
Starting calculation L.521 Requirement for reference image G.536
Storing and filming results L.526 Restrictions G.537
Suitable images L.55 Saving the marker with the image G.544
TTP image P.1113 Selecting and moving the marker G.540
Permission B.244 Using G.538
To access data B.22 Pixel lense G.536
Phase contrast angiography F.549 Planning
Phase errors P.190 Contrast agent pause F.1223
Phase images P.142, P.1106 Planning oblique and double-oblique slices P.19
3D Shim C.245 Playback
Phase oversampling F.432, P.114 Patient instructions manually F.115
Changes via the mouse F.480 Voice output for patient instructions F.113
Phase partial Fourier P.156 Plot segment
Phase stabilization P.190 Showing/hiding K.16
Phase-encoding direction P.113 PMU display F.153
Phases F.1529, P.1125, P.1138 Polygon
Resolution P.151 In Composing N.49
Phoenix F.337, F.658, F.1650 Position accept window P.128
AutoAlign F.1923 Position display
Basics G.62

syngo MR Index
Configuring G.614 Print scope

Data and reference image G.62 Setting page numbering F.137
Defining data and reference images G.64 Setting print options F.136
Display rules G.69 Printer O.55
Displaying some images G.66 Error while printing O.52
Displaying whole series G.66 Selecting O.36, O.42
Example G.612, G.613 Setting F.134
Labeling rules G.610 Printer a list of contents F.136
Name and number of the new series G.68 Printing
Requirements G.63 Protocols and lists of contents F.131, F.136
Position nose H.1130 Protocols print preview F.138
Position toolbar F.44 Report D.824
Positioning the patient table F.82 Printing protocols
Post-processing L.434 Exam Explorer F.1681
Preparing (BOLD) L.434 Privileges B.244, B.263
Saving protocol changes (BOLD) L.442 To access application functions B.22
Starting the protocol editor L.441 Procedure step
Starting (BOLD) L.438 Cancel F.910
Tracing (BOLD) L.439 Completing F.911
Tracking jobs L.523 Deleting F.912
Post-processing protocol L.513 Inserting F.96
Editing (perfusion) L.530 Profile G.526
Processing (BOLD) L.440 Save P.129
Preferred orientation Profile curve M.422
Checking M.215 Program F.167
Preparations for Security B.212 Commenting F.1625
Preparing Copying F.1621, F.1623
Post-processing (BOLD) L.434 Creating new F.1638
Preregistration E.21, E.224 Cutting F.1622
Presets H.1115 Delete F.1624
Preview images L.117 Inserting F.1623
Print dialog box Moving F.1619
Calling up F.132 Renaming F.1625
Print preview of protocols F.138 Program control F.212
Print range Completing a procedure step F.619
Setting F.135 Display of AutoAlign F.194
Setting the print scope F.135 Examination with AutoAlign F.195
Opening the next protocol for editing F.640
Planning mode (AutoAlign) F.1929
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX27

Index syngo MR
Queue F.64 Reconstructed protocol through conversion F.659

Transferring scan program Renaming F.1625
from the Exam Explorer F.1666 Repeating completed protocols F.634
Program instructions F.16, F.167 Repeating multiple program instructions F.635
Adding to a scan program F.1639 Scanning an open protocol more than once F.637
Delete F.663 Selecting F.653
Finding F.1640 Set the print range F.135
Skipping F.633 Set the printer F.134
Transferring individually F.210 Setting a Copy Reference F.645
Projection areas F.417 Setting to complete F.613
Projection display F.436 Single scan F.622
Properties Start printing F.1312
Defining the floating MPRs K.321 Starting data export F.1316
Defining the orthogonal MPRs K.319 Starting manually F.621
Protections on data B.244, B.248, B.259 Updating a copy reference F.648
Protocol F.16, F.167 Protocol Editor F.1655
Changing the display of the print preview F.1310 Selecting virtual coils F.1657
Close the print preview F.1311 Protocol parameters
Commenting F.1625 Displaying in the protocol view F.1644
Completing F.639 Editing in the Protocol Editor F.1655
Copy reference for multiple target protocols F.651 Protocol properties
Copying F.1621, F.1623 Editing F.122
Copying parameters F.643 Protocol view F.1644
Cutting F.1622 Pulse signal F.1525, P.1135
Delete F.1624 Pulse triggering F.1525
Editing for stimulation monitoring F.1437
Export settings F.1314 Q
Exporting data F.1313
Generating a protocol from acquired images Quality measurement
(Phoenix) F.658 Performing F.201
Inserting F.1623 Query & Retrieve Configuration D.244
Making a source protocol complete F.652 Queue
Moving F.1619 Accepting parameter settings F.643
Multiple scans F.624 Changing the scan sequence F.660
Opening it for slice positioning F.42 Cutting / copying and pasting a
Opening the print dialog box F.132 program instruction F.661
Opening the print preview F.138 Deleting completely F.664
Printing F.131, F.132 Deleting program instructions F.663
Printing from the print preview F.1311 Displaying in the program control F.64

syngo MR Index
Inserting new protocols F.653 Realtime mode F.1725

Inserting pause F.657 Setting F.1734
Inserting protocols with a patient instruction F.655 Real-time mode F.1022
Moving a program instruction F.660 Realtime sequences P.177
Saving as a new program F.666 Rebooting
Setting a Copy Reference F.645 Image control system C.15
Viewing parameters of protocols Image reconstruction system C.116
previously run F.642 Operating system C.121
Receive channel C.232, C.269
R Receiver gain C.228, C.236, C.259
Receiving
Radial range Icons on the status bar J.62
Changing H.3105 Reconstruction P.142
Generating H.3101, H.3112, H.615 Adjusting manually N.212
Graphic display H.3102 Important notes N.27
Moving H.3106 Starting N.22
Settings H.3103, H.3114 Reconstruction technique PAT P.158
Radio button A.232 Acceleration factor PE P.160
Range markers Acceleration factor 3D P.162
Adding a work step F.96 Reference lines PE P.161
Body region F.93, F.94 Reference lines 3D P.164
Canceling a procedure step F.910 Record Off-line Files G18
Changing the body region F.93 Recording
Changing the image comment F.916 Author of the report D.814
Completing a procedure step F.911 Voice output F.1113
Deleting a body region F.94 Recording a CD
Deleting an image comment F.917 Display on the status bar J.62
Deleting the procedure step F.912 Recording speed F.157
Image comment F.915 Rectangular
Inserting an image comment F.915 Cut planes H.332
Procedure step F.95 Rectangular ROI G.54
Procedure step being processed F.97 Reference image
Procedure step completed F.911 Displaying O.415
Work step canceled F.910 Reference images
Raw data D.15 Appending an image to a reference series F.350
Image stamps D.116 Defining the scroll order F.313
Raw data (Hanning filter) P.169 Distributing images across segments F.310
Readout bandwidth P.193 Enlarging/reducing/panning F.326
Real images P.142 Filming, sending, and exporting F.352
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX29

Index syngo MR
Fit to segment height F.329 Reference lines PE P.161

Fitting to segment F.328 Reference lines 3D P.164
Flipping horizontally and vertically F.330, F.1810 Reference points H.1019
Images with different table positions F.37 Refresh display D.25
Loading into the image area F.35 Region F.17, F.167
Maestro layout F.39 Assigning a region to a body region F.1632
Measuring F.32 Commenting F.1625
Multiple localizers F.343 Copying F.1621, F.1623
Position lines F.434 Creating new F.1631
Reference series G.62 Cutting F.1622
Removing from the image area F.337 Delete F.1624
Repeating scans (Phoenix) F.337 Inserting F.1623
Requirements F.34 Moving F.1619
Rotating about 90 F.332, F.1811 Renaming F.1625
Rules for saving, exporting, and filming F.347 Region Growing
Save F.348 Draw Blocker H.919
Scanning at a table position F.340 Seed Points H.919
Scrolling within image segments F.318 Regional settings A.35
Selecting explicitly F.322 Registration
Selecting implicitly F.323 Accession number E.216
Showing pixel coordinates, distances, Additional patient attributes E.28
and angles F.334 Admitting diagnosis E.211
Showing/hiding image text F.332 Annotations E.26
Siemens sort scheme F.316 Birth date, Input format G4
Sort criteria for scrolling and movie F.314 Calling up E.13
Three-segment layout F.38 Detailed information E.28
Transferring images to other task cards F.351 Examining personnel E.217
Transferring the table position of a Institution data E.15, E.217
normal protocol F.341 Known patient E.31
Two-segment layout F.38 New patient E.21
Using reconstructed images F.34 Patient ID E.24
Windowing F.324 Patient position E.215
Reference line Personal data E.15, E.23
Free angle H.319 Preregistering patient E.224, E.313
Rotating M.215 Referral data E.15, E.211
Reference lines H.1118, K.14 Referring Physician E.211
Hiding K.14, M.17 Registering patient E.220, E.313
Panning K.327 Request ID E.216
Scrolling with M.214 Requesting physician E.211

syngo MR Index
Search list E.37 Reporting D.81

Search list of the worklist query E.319 Basics D.83
Searching a patient E.34 Codes in the report D.85
Searching with wildcards E.35 Configuration D.831
Selecting study E.212 Content items D.84
Study-specific data E.15 Diagnostic codes D.85
Remote service access B.315, B.41, B.45 Editing a report D.87, D.812
Remove Point H.1125 Making a Report D.86
Renaming Navigating in the report D.810
Entries in the Exam Explorer F.1625 Opening a report D.88
Object M.418 Printing a report D.824
User account B.231 Relationship between content items D.84
Reordering mode P.191 Saving a report D.822
Repacking O.38, O.325 Sending a report D.829
Repeat scans (averages) P.140 Structure of a Report D.84
Repetition time TR P.137 Representative image F.310
Repetition time (TR) P.137 Requirements
Repetitions P.177 AutoAlign F.193
Rephased images P.1106 For composing N.23
Repiratory triggering F.1526 For MRNeuro K.21
Report For Vessel View M.23
Close the print preview D.826 Resetting
Closing the dialog box D.823 All views K.329
Creating D.86 Clip planes K.315
Delete parts of the report D.819 Floating MPRs K.331
Displaying images and table in original size D.817 Orthogonal MPRs K.331
Editing D.87, D.812 Volume view K.330
Making/editing diagnostics and comments D.814 Resolution F.517
Opening D.88 Respiratory control F.1026, P.124
Opening the print preview D.824 Respiratory phases F.1529, P.1139
Printing D.824 Respiratory signal F.1526, P.1135
Recording the author D.814 Restore image display G.426
Saving D.822, M.55 Restore Magn. P.146
Sending D.829 Restoring
Setting diagnostic codes D.815 Session in Vessel View M.226
Setting the completion status D.812 Restoring a session
Setting the verification status D.813 In Vessel View M.226
Start printing D.827 Result images L.124
Result series L.124
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX31

Index syngo MR
Retrospective gating F.1531, P.1135 Rotating the VOI H.510

RF excitation pulse P.1100 Rotation
Adjustment to blood flow P.1102 Navigator object P.123
RF Pulse Type P.197 Routine F.55
RF spoiling P.1100
RIS/HIS E.12 S
Patient search E.315
ROI (region of interest) G.54 Safety standards
Calculating a histogram G.516 Introduction B.11
Circular G.54 Sagittal view H.328
Deleting L.231 SAR information F.1420
Drawing G.55, G63, L.228 SAR limit values F.143
Dynamic L.231 Exceeding F.1410
Freehand G.57, H.365 Stimulation models F.143
Moving G.56, H.364 SAR monitoring
Rectangular G.54 Automatic F.146
Resizing G.56, H.364 Changing measurement parameters F.1411
Static L.230 On other task cards F.1419
Statistics G.513, H.367 Relevant patient data F.1426
Role Skipping a scan protocol F.1417
Adding/removing owners B.242 SAR status F.1425
Selecting for editing B.242 SAR values F.1422
(group of users) B.22, B.263, B.32 Reduction of delay time P.193
Rolling H.1118 Relative F.1423
Rotating F.451 Saturation mode F.529, P.117
Clockwise G.429 Saturation region F.530, P.117
Counterclockwise G.430 Location F.577
Free angle G.430 Orientation F.577
Graphical objects F.449 Parallel sat P.119
Longitudinal section of a vessel M.423 Standard sat P.118
Navigator cuboid F.450 Tracking sat P.119
Oblique intersections F.452 Saturation regions
Reference images about 90 F.332, F.1811 Adding in the center of the image F.466
Regular saturation region and navigator pen F.450 Display F.426
Saving changes G.435 Parallel F.411
Section planes K.327 Positioning freely F.467
Slice image planes M.215 Regular F.410
Volume image K.39, M.29 Rotating F.450
90 G.429 Tracking F.413

syngo MR Index
Save Entering the name F.1221

Path H.1126 Inserting a scan pause in the scan program F.1653
Saving scan data automatically F.1210 Scan program F.17, F.161, F.167
Scan program F.1661 Activating/deactivating archive option F.1629
Saving Activating/deactivating visibility option F.1630
Additional information M.54 Adding program instruction F.1639
All alpha images (BOLD) L.428 Converting F.1675
Configuration settings for reports D.842 Creating a new protocol from a sequence F.1646
Images G.74, K.63, M.52 Creating a new protocol from a
Images (BOLD) L.428 series or image F.1650
Marker of the pixel lens with the image. G.544 Creating an AutoAlign program F.1926
Mean curve results L.254 Creating new F.1638
Mean curve results as an ASCII file L.256 Finding F.1612
New images K.62, M.53 Inserting a new scan pause F.1653
Protocol data in Soft tissue evaluation L.617, L.631 Saving F.1661, G64
Report D.822, M.55 Saving under a new name F.1661
Session in Vessel View M.225 Saving under the same name F.1665
Single alpha images (BOLD) L.432 Selecting F.22, F.24
Single parameter images (BOLD) L.432 Transferring from the Exam Explorer to the program
VRT parameters K.38, K.57, M.27 control F.1666
Windowing values G.77 Transferring to the program control F.27
Saving as a BMP image file K.64 With multiple localizers F.343
Saving images (Inline-Subtraction) P.1126 Scan protocol F.167
Saving the session Adding to a scan program F.1639
In Vessel View M.225 Automatic loading F.1210
Saving uncombined P.182 Automatic saving F.1210
Scaling factor (Inline-Subtraction) P.1127 Creating a new protocol from a sequence F.1646
Scan P.177 Creating a protocol from a series
Displaying M.417 or image (Phoenix) F.1650
Performing physiologically controlled scans F.155 Default setting for manual start F.127
Scan procedure for a routine examination F.610 Default setting for multiple scans F.128
Skipping F.1433, F.1437 Defining start options F.125
Skipping because of SAR monitoring F.1417 Displaying upgrade info F.1216
Starting F.1534 Entering a comment F.124
Scan at current table position P.182 Entering the name F.124
Scan pause F.167 Finding F.1640
Adding to a scan program F.1639 Reconstructed protocol through conversion F.1652
Defining as a contrast agent pause F.1223 Setting a Copy Reference F.1214
Entering a comment F.1221
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX33

Index syngo MR
Scan region Security system

Location P.183 Access control (overview) B.244
Scan region Memory P.184 Audit Trail B.271, B.277, B.288, B.291, B.294
Scan time F.22 Changing password of user account B.231
Scheduler D.12 Configuration B.22
Updating D.24 Configuration of group accounts (Overview) B.235
Scoliosis angle Configuration of user accounts B.225
According to Cobb N.414 Deleting user accounts B.234
Scout Enabling B.219
Duration P.126 Managing data protections B.248
Mode P.126 Managing group accounts B.236
TR P.126 Managing groups B.243
Scroll bar A.228, G.310 Managing groups and roles B.242
Scrolling G.32 Managing user accounts B.227, B.231
Composed volumes N.326 Opening Audit Trail Archiving Configuration B.275
From series to series (BOLD) L.415 Opening configuration dialog B.222
Image by image (BOLD) L.413 Overview B.31
Mean Curve L.225 Setting up the default protections B.259
Page by page G.37 Setting up the privileges B.263
Patients G.317 Setting up workflow B.216
Series to series G.312 Setting up (preparations) B.212
Slice image stack N.328 Segment
Studies G.314 Enlarging K.32
Through images and series (BOLD) L.413 Segment height F.329
Through the slice image stacks M.213 Segment size F.328
Using the dog-ears G.35, M.213, N.328 Segmentation
With reference lines M.214 Fully automatic M.314
Scrolling series by series (BOLD) L.415 Semiautomatic M.310
Search position P.129 Segments F.1522, P.196
Search window P.129 Selecting
Searching patient data E.34 Anatomical series in Soft tissue evaluation L.611
Section planes Annotation texts G.555
Moving an intersection point K.328 Camera O.511
Panning K.326 Camera/printer O.36, O.42
Rotating K.327 Clip planes K.312
Sectional images Combined protocol in Soft tissue evaluation L.627
Windowing K.324 Contrast agent from the catalog F.1224
Security in syngo MR B.11 Data for Soft tissue Evaluation L.65
Explicit selection F.439

syngo MR Index
Film job O.313 Sequence of actions

Film sheet O.317 Saving to a movie file M.59
Graphics G.555 Sequence variant F.564
Images G.332 Series P.133
Implicit selection F.441 Creating a new scan protocol from a series F.1650
Marker of the pixel lens G.540 Loading into BOLD L.48
Multi-select A.217 Loading the first into BOLD L.46
Objects A.216 Selecting for reconstruction N.22
Parameter image series in Series block F.339
Soft tissue evaluation L.625 Series icon F.32
Post-processing protocol in breast evaluation L.613 Service
Regions of the brain K.53 Local service A.44
Segment O.319 Maintenance A.42
Virtual coils F.1657 Remote service A.45
Selecting images Service access B.315, B.42, B.45
Patient Browser L.14 Rights B.41
Viewing task card L.14 Service password B.317
Selecting regions of the brain K.53 Setting
Selection Color scale in BOLD L.419
Explicit selection G.337 Completion status in the report D.812
Implicit selection G.344 Diagnostic code in the report D.815
Input focus G.333 Diagnostic code of a report D.836
Selection list A.232 Encoding scheme for reports D.837
Selective Image Display in the Inline Display F.1021 Language of a report in the configuration D.833
Semi-automatic path creation M.310 Page number in the print scope F.137
Sending D.53, G.710, J.35 Print options in the print scope F.136
Automatic J.15 Print range F.135
Data in the network J.14 Printer F.134
Errors J.220 Verification status in the report D.813
Icons on the status bar J.62 Setting MinIP H.343
Report D.829 Setting the width of the flat ribbon M.422
Sending data J.33 Settings for spin preparation F.513
Sensors F.153 Settling P.1116
Sequence F.16 Shadow lines F.438
Creating a new scan protocol Shadow protocol F.337
from a sequence F.1646 Shift
Part 1 F.565 Setting the number of pixels N.214
Part 2 F.567 Shift key A.217
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX35

Index syngo MR
Shim parameters C.241 Slab group P.13

Accepting C.247 Adding F.576
Applying C.255 Delete F.577
Calculating C.246 Location F.577
Changing C.253 Orientation F.577
Deleting the best shim parameter C.255 Slabs P.14
Fine-tuning C.251 Applying the settings F.489
Loading from tune up C.242 Changing the distance F.473
Loading system parameters C.242 Changing the number of the slabs F.470
Loading the best shim parameters C.255 Changing the thickness F.470
Shutter G.545 Slice distance F.47
Shutting down Slice group P.13
MR scanner C.119 Adding F.576
System C.13 Delete F.577
Shutting down syngo MR C.16 Location F.577
Shutting down the system C.13 Orientation F.577
Side-by-Side H.1032 Slice image planes
Siemens filter L.34 Moving an intersection point M.214
Siemens regions F.1634 Orienting M.217
Siemens tree F.166 Orienting individually M.217
Signal Rotating M.215
Displaying F.157 Tilting M.215
Displaying a second signal F.158 Slice image stack
Monitoring on the PMU display F.155 Scrolling M.213, N.328
Selecting F.158 Slice images
Signal suppression F.514 Orientation aids M.17
Fat/water F.530 Switching display modes M.211
Signal-to-noise ratio Slice oversampling F.433, P.116
Effect of the averaging mode P.191 Slice partial Fourier P.157
Improving by averaging P.140 Slice resolution P.154
Influence of the readout bandwidth P.193 Slice thickness F.47, P.16
Single layout N.319 Setting M.212
With original N.320 Slice thickness (MPR Thick) H.43
Single-oblique intersection F.419 Slices P.14
Slab Editor Adding in 3 point mode F.463
Enlarging a 3D block H.99 Applying the settings F.489
Moving a 3D block H.910 Canceling positioning F.43
Reducing a 3D block H.99 Changing the distance F.473
Rotating a 3D block H.910 Changing the number of slices F.470

syngo MR Index
Changing the thickness F.470 Spectroscopy

In the slab P.17 Inline Display F.1030
Partial views F.422 Speed of Movie display F.1724
Positioning freely F.460 Spin box A.233
Positioning in the center of the Spin preparation F.513
reference image F.461 Spinal column
Shifting relative to each other N.217 Deviation from the vertical N.422
Slices and Slice Groups F.46 SSD (Fly view) H.115
Swapping the phase direction F.452 SSD (surface shaded display) H.18, H.61
Slices per respiratory cycle P.1140 Changing thresholds H.63
Slider A.234 Generating images H.62
Slope Starting extraction H.67
Selecting the mode L.154 Stack G.218
Smoothing with the ContextVision filter L.35 Stamp segments F.172
Soft limits and extended limits F.571 Changing the arrangement of series F.1710
Soft tissue evaluation L.61 Navigating F.177
Access authorization L.63 Repeating the measurement F.176
Calling up L.64 Standard deviation
Deleting a customer protocol L.621, L.633 Calculated image from 3D blocks P.1129, P.1130
Editing protocol parameters L.614, L.628 Calculating L.166
Image definition L.62 Selecting the mode L.166
Introduction L.62 Standard film layout O.17
Layout of subtask cards L.68 Standard saturation regions P.118
Opening the dialog box L.65 Standard view
Opening the Patient Browser L.64 Coronal H.34, H.329
Performing a parameter image calculation L.622 Restoring H.330
Saving protocol data L.617, L.631 Sagittal H.34, H.328
Selecting a combined protocol L.627 Transversal H.34, H.327
Selecting a post-processing protocol L.613 Start options (scan protocol) F.125
Selecting anatomical series L.611 Starting
Selecting data L.65 Application program C.19
Selecting parameter image series L.625 Default setting for manual starting of a
Sort criteria for scrolling and movie F.314 scan protocol F.127
Sort scheme F.316 Export of protocol data F.1316
Sorting F.314, F.316 MRNeuro K.12
Images for Mean Curve L.213 Parameter image calculation L.622
Voice outputs for patient instructions F.1123 Post-processing (BOLD) L.438
Spatial filter P.1119 Printing a report D.827
Special User Accounts B.25 Printing protocols F.1312
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX37

Index syngo MR
Protocol editor post-processing (BOLD) L.441 Statistics

syngo MR C.16 Showing/hiding G.514, G.521, G.525
Vessel View M.13 Status
Starting ignore meas P.1116 Movie display F.1717
Statistical evaluation (mean curve) L.21 Status bar A.247
Changing image display L.221 Data transfer J.62
Defining sorting L.213 Stenosis curve M.421
Defining the x axis L.215 Step Size H.1128
Deleting results L.260 Stimulation F.141
Drawing ROIs in the first segment L.228 Automatic monitoring F.1431
Drawing ROIs in the third segment L.232 Editing the protocol F.1437
Evaluation across series L.214 Information F.1440
Evaluation within the series L.213 Limit reached F.1434
Filming images L.259 Threshold exceeded F.1432
Image as a background for the diagram L.252 Stimulation models F.143
Image text and comments L.251 Stimulation monitoring
Loading images into the third Calculating new parameters F.1435
and fourth segments L.211 On other task cards F.1438
Loading images of the first segment L.27 Storage
Mean Curve task card L.24 Configuring J.71
Overview L.23 Icons on the status bar J.62
Requirements L.27 In the network J.37
Result display in the diagram L.241 Storage Comittment D.616, J.31
Result display in the table L.242 Storing
Saving results as an ASCII file L.256 Audit Trail Configuration B.277
Saving results as images L.254 Automatic J.15
Scaling the x axis L.245 On a multi-session CD J.214
Scaling the y axis L.247 On a single session CD J.27
Scrolling across series L.223 Storing data on an external medium J.14
Scrolling with dynamic ROIs L.231 Storing data J.21
Searching for an original images by scrolling in the Storing notes M.418
fourth segment L.225 Stripe G.216
Set relative evaluation L.237 Structure
Setting absolute evaluation L.236 Report D.84
Smoothing curves L.250 Study comparison mode G.214
Sorting in Across mode L.217 Study report
Start evaluation L.239 Image stamps D.116
Static ROI L.230 Subtask card A.240, G.18
Using vertical scan line L.243 dB/dt F.1442

syngo MR Index
SAFE F.1440 Inconsistencies resulting from a

Subtracting P.1125 changed table position F.86
Subtraction Table position P.181
Starting L.133 Defining using protocol parameters F.342
Subtrahend (Inline-Subtraction) P.1128 Images with different table positions F.37
Surface coils P.185 Inconsistencies resulting from a changed table
Surface Matching H.1025 position F.672
Swapping the phase direction F.452 Propagating to another protocol F.341
Switch user B.35 Scan region Memory P.184
Switching modes F.462 Scanning reference images at a table position F.340
Switching off Table positioning F.82
Blocking areas (BOLD) L.424 Magnet opening lighting F.87
Interpolation parameter images L.417 Magnet opening ventilation F.88
Symbol keypad A.211, D.32 Table STOP F.86
syngo MR Tagging (cardiac imaging) P.1123
Changing your password C.114 Task card A.237
Closing C.16 BOLD L.41, L.43
Closing an application program C.19 Composing N.32
Locking the computer C.111 Perfusion L.52
Logging off C.112 TD (delay time) P.139
Logging on a new user C.113 TE (echo time) P.138
Shutting down and rebooting components C.117 Temperature rise due to radio frequency F.141
Starting C.16 Test image
Starting an application program C.19 Changing L.118
Switching the Power Supply to Standby C.121 Generating for t-test L.162, L.171
Syringe icon F.71 Generating for T2 L.172, L.175
System Limiting the display area L.119
Forced reboot C.18 Selecting L.118
Forced shutdown C.18 Testing
System acquisition window P.1136 Voice output for patient instructions F.1111
System information C.127 Tests during composing N.23
Text
T Switching off/on N.331
Thickness P.123
Tab A.236 Three-segment layout F.38
Tab card A.236 Threshold F.1528
Table Creating presets H.612
Results in mean curve L.242 Presets H.67
Table movement P.181 Threshold values H.1027, P.1121, P.1139
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX39

Index syngo MR
TI (inversion time) P.139 Transversal view H.327

Tilting Tree view D.22
Clip planes K.314 Trigger delay P.1137
Slice image planes M.215 Trigger indication F.154
Time ranges in the physiological display F.1511 Trigger information F.1512
Time ranges on the Physio parameter card F.1524 Trigger pulse P.1137
Time to center P.1103 Triggering with an external signal F.1530
Time to peak T-test P.1120
Selecting the mode L.175 Entering a threshold P.1121
Starting L.176 Generating a test image L.162, L.171
Time-of-flight angiography F.547 Grouping Series L.160
Time-to-Peak-Map (TTP) P.1113 Performing L.162
Tips on real-time scans F.1033 Setting a calculation range P.1121
Tolerance window P.127 Starting L.163
Tool bar D.18 t-test images
Tool tip A.235 Definition for BOLD L.41
Tools Turbo factor P.196
Acquiring diagnostic information C.124 Two-segment layout F.38
Checking system files C.124
TR (repetition time) P.137 U
Trace-weighted images P.1110
Tracking factor P.130 Undo
Tracking saturation region P.119 All steps M.18
Transfer Unlicensed scan programs F.1610
Configuring J.71 Unloading
Error messages J.62 Single volume K.24
Transition does not match N.29 Unselecting
Translucent M.317 Color palette in BOLD L.419, L.420
Transmitter adjustment C.233 Upgrade info (scan protocol) F.1216
Acceptance without successful adjustment C.238 User account B.32
Entering the amplitude C.235, C.238 Change password B.231
Graphic display of the results C.238 Configuration (Overview) B.225
Numeric results C.237 Creating a new user account B.227
Preparing C.233 Deleting B.234
Selecting the gain C.236 Enabling/disabling B.231
Selecting the receive channel C.238 Properties B.231
Start amplitude C.235 Selecting for editing B.231
Starting C.236 Special accounts B.25
Transmitter increment C.258 User change during composing N.210

syngo MR Index
User Management B.22, B.32 Patents C.135

User-defined applications D.312 Protocol parameters in the protocol view F.1644
Configuring D.718 Unlicensed scan programs F.1610
User-specific window settings G.411 Upgrade info of a scan protocol F.1216
Using View options
Pixel lens G.538 Defining M.221
Siemens filters L.34 Viewing
Closing images G.718
V Closing series G.718
Closing the patient G.719
Value ranges of the activation map K.48 Copying, cutting and pasting graphics G.556
Varying magnetic fields F.141 Display mode G.212
Velocity encoding P.1105 Drag & drop images from Browser G.24
Vertical scan line L.243 Graphics tools G.51
Vessel navigator Images, text, graphics G.15
Calling M.419 Layout of the image area G.14, G.220
Evaluating a longitudinal section M.425 Loading images from Browser G.22
MIP view M.419, M.423 Loading multiframe images G.27
MPR view M.419 Movie G.318
Profile curve M.422 Patient information G.17
Rotating the longitudinal section M.423 Regions of interest (ROIs) G.54
Setting the width of the flat ribbon M.422 Scroll bar G.310
Stenosis curve M.421 Subtask cards G.18
Vessel orthogonal orientation M.42 Text blocks G.225
Vessel section images Transferring images to 3D task card G.716
Creating axial cuts M.43 Viewing distance H.1114
Vessel View Viewing point H.1112, H.1113, H.1116
Calling M.13 Virtual coils
Closing M.112 Selecting F.1657
Configuring M.221 Virtual film sheet O.16
Requirements M.23 Film sheet full O.214
Vessel View task card Visibility-Irrespective of licensing F.1630
Overview M.14 Visual alignment H.1012
Vessels VOI
Defining M.31 Deleting K.57
View Drawing a contour K.53
Changed data C.126 Editing a contour K.54
Databases C.132 Organizing K.56
Drives C.131
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX41

Index syngo MR
VOI (volume of interest) H.56 Tissue classes H.715

Activating VOI mode H.57 VRT Definition H.710
Changing size H.58 VRT Clip H.724
Changing view H.59 VRT mode
Complex VOIs H.523 Setting M.28
Cropping H.515 VRT parameters
Cutting H.517 Editing K.36, M.25
Defining M.32 Manual assignment K.34, M.24
Drawing a contour M.33 Saving K.38, K.57, M.27
Exiting VOI mode H.528 VRT (Fly view) H.118
Freehand H.513
Moving H.59 W
Tube-shaped M.322
Undoing H.520 Water suppression C.256, P.145
Voice output Acceptance without successful adjustment C.262
Automatic playback F.117 Accepting the correction factor C.262
Volume Entering the correction factor C.258
Loading into Composing N.312 Entering the transmitter increment C.258
Same position N.28 Graphic display of the results C.261
Volume image Numeric results C.260
Hiding K.318 Preparing C.256
In MRNeuro K.15 Selecting the gain C.259
MIP display M.15 Selecting the receive channel C.262
Moving it into original display M.210 Starting the measurement C.259
Orientation aids K.15, M.16 Wildcards E.35
Orientation cube M.16 Window
Orienting K.330, M.210 Active A.229
Resetting K.330 Border A.223
Rotating K.39, M.29 Closing A.225
Switching to MIP mode M.28 Configuration window A.32
VRT display M.15, M.24 Controlling the window display A.223
Volume parts Maximizing A.225
Hiding K.310 Menu bar A.223
VRT H.71 Menu for window commands A.223
Closing the VRT Gallery H.79 Minimizing A.225
Display K.15, M.15, M.24 Moving A.227
Gallery K.34, M.24 Resizing A.226
Opening the VRT Gallery H.76 Restoring size A.225
Settings K.34 Scroll bar A.223

syngo MR Index
Scrolling A.228 Y
Status bar A.223
Switching between windows A.229 y axis scaling L.247
Title bar A.223 Yo-yo F.1722
Tool bar A.223
Workspace A.223 Z
Window center G.43
Window values G.77 Zoom factor G.417
Setting N.334 Zooming G.415
Window width G.43 Images K.33
Window (BOLD) P.1121 Restoring zoom factor G.421
Windowing G.42, K.324, O.331 With the mouse G.418
Anatomical images in BOLD L.416
Auto window G.49 Symbols
In Composing N.334
Organ-specific window settings G.411 +GSP toolbar F.44
Parameter images L.525
Restoring window values G.414 Numerics
Setting the scope G.44
Window 1 / Window 2 O.332 1st Signal/Mode P.1134
With the mouse G.412 3 point mode F.463
Windows XP A.21 3D
Work status Auto-storing H.1210
Abbreviations D.62 Configuration H.141
Entering D.65 Control area H.111
Workflow for configuration of security system B.216 Data checked for suitability H.23
Working in 3D Filming images H.132
Restoring original view H.330 Grouping images by output type H.126
Showing/Hiding graphics H.84 Image area H.111
Switching to MIP H.341 Image information H.39
Switching to MPR H.340 MIP thin H.530
Switching to SSD H.344 MIP (maximum intensity projection) H.54
Write protection J.25 MPR thick H.43
MPR (multiplanar reconstruction) H.41
X Orientation cube H.35
Orientation description H.35
x axis scaling L.245 Orientation markers H.36
Output segment H.38
Reference image H.311
0.0
syngo MR 2006T IX43

Index syngo MR
Reference segment H.38

Saving as (entire series) H.128
Saving as (individual images) H.123
Saving images H.122
Series from Series list H.212
Series list H.26
SSD (surface shaded display) H.61
Transferring images from Browser H.22
Transferring images from Viewer H.22
Transferring images to Viewer H.133
VOI mode H.56
3D Editor H.91
Morphological Operations H.942
Object Editor H.914
Object Punching H.935
Region Growing H.914
3D Series list
Hiding invalid series H.28
Merging series H.29
Too many images selected H.28
Transferring series to 3D task card H.210
3D Shim
Acceptance of the calculated parameters C.247
Acceptance without successful adjustment C.247
Displaying the field map C.244
Entering the shim parameters C.241
Entering the transmit amplitude C.241
Mode display C.242
Numeric results C.246
Selecting magnitude or phase image C.245
Selecting the gain C.243
Selecting the receive channel C.243
Starting C.243
Windowing images C.245
3D slabs and slab groups F.48
3D-MAP Shim C.239
Preparing C.239

syngoMR PDF

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

syngoMR PDF

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

syngo MR Operator Manual

Products, that are bearing a CE mark fulfill the provisions of the

The CE mark applies exclusively to medical equipment and

Telephone: +49 9131 84-0

Print No. MR-05000.621.04.01.24

Managing and Adjusting the C

Storing and Data Exchange J

syngo MR 2006T iii

A.2 Basics for Beginners

A.3 Configuring the User Interface

A.4 Service Functions

B.2 Information for Administrators

B.3 Information for Users

B.4 Information for Service Technicians

C Managing and Adjusting the System

C.2 Adjusting the System

D.2 Searching for and Displaying Patient Data

D.3 Transferring Data to other Applications

D.4 Correcting Data

D.5 Storing, Sending and Filming Data

D.6 Maintaining your Data

D.7 Configuring the Patient Browser

E.2 Registering a New Patient

E.3 Registering a Known Patient

E.4 Configuring Patient Registration

F.2 Loading the Scan Program

F.3 Measuring, Editing, and Managing Ref. Images

F.4 Positioning Slices

F.5 Adjusting Measurement Parameters

F.6 Performing a routine examination

F.7 Using a contrast agent

F.8 Positioning the Patient Table

F.9 Working with instruction areas

F.10 Inline Display

F.11 Patient instructions

F.12 Protocol and Pause Properties

F.13 Printing protocols

F.14 SAR and Stimulation Monitoring

F.15 Physiologically Controlled Scans

F.16 Organizing Scan Programs

F.17 Maestro Layout and Movie Display (Option)

F.18 Breast Biopsy

F.19 Automatic position correction

F.20 Quality measurement

G.2 Loading and Displaying Images

G.3 Scrolling and Selecting Images

G.4 Processing Images

G.6 Position display

G.7 Saving and Documenting Images

G.8 Configuring the Viewing Task Card

H.2 Transferring Images to 3D

H.4 Multiplanar Reconstruction (MPR)

syngo MR 2006T vii

H.5 Maximum and Minimum Intensity Projection

H.6 Reconstructing Surfaces (SSD)

H.7 Volume Rendering Technique (VRT)

H.8 Selecting and Processing Images

H.11 Fly Through

H.12 Saving 3D Series and Images

H.13 Filming, Evaluating and Sending 3D Images

J Storing and Data Exchange

J.2 Storing Data on an External Medium

J.3 Sending Data via the Network